HANDBOOK -ON
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES (Excluding Eiectrkai =Work)
.
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
HANDBOOK ON BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES (Excluding Electrical Work)
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG NEW DELHI 110002
.
SP62(S & T,: 1997 FIRST PUBLISHED 0 BUREAU KS
SEPTEMBER
1997
OF INDIAN STANDARDS
91.010.01
ISBN 81-7061-048-6
PRICE:Rs. 1080.00
Typeset by Paragon Enterprises, New Delhi 110002 Printed in India at Central Electric Press, New Delhi 110028 Published by Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi 110002
.
FOREWORD
Users of various civil engineering codes have been feeling the need for explanatory handbooks and other compilations based on Indian Standards. The need has been further emphasized in view of the first publication of the National Building Code of India in 1970 (which has since been revised in 1983) and its implementation. The Expert Group set up in 1972 by the Department of Science and Technology, Government of India carried out in-depth studies in various areas of civil engineering and construction practices. During the preparation of the Fifth Five-Year Plan in 1975, the Group was assigned the task of producing a Science and Technology Plan for research, development and extension work in the sectors of housing and construction technology. One of the items of this plan was the formulation of design handbooks, explanatory handbooks and design aids based on the National Building Code andrelated Indian Standards and other activities in the promotion of the National Building Code. The Expert Group gave high priority to this itemand on the recommendation of the Department of Science and Technology, the Planning Commission approved the following two projects which were assigned to the Bureau of Indian Standards (erstwhile Indian Standards Institution): a) Development b) Typification
programme on code implementation
for building and civil engineering
construction,
and
for industrial buildings.
A Special Committee for Implementation of Science and Technology Projects (SCIP) consisting of experts connected with different aspects was set up in 1974 to advise the BIS Directorate General in identifying and for guiding the development of the work. Under the first project, the Committee has identified several subjects for preparing explanatory handbooks/compilations covering appropriate Indian Standards/ Codes and Specifications which include the following: *Handbooks Published: 1. Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS 456 : 1978 (SP 16 : 1980) (First Revision) (SP 20 : 1991)
2. Handbook on Masonry Design and Construction
3. Summaries of Indian Standards for Building Materials (SP 21 : 1983) 4. Explanatory Handbook (SP 22 : 1982)
on Codes of Earthquake
Engineering
(IS 1893 : 1975 and IS 4326 : 1976)
5. Handbook on Concrete Mixes (Based on Indian Standards) (SP 23 : 1982) 6. Explanatory Handbook on Indian (IS 456 : 1978) (SP 24 : 1983)
Standard
7. Handbook on Causes and Prevention
for Plain
and Reinforced Concrete
of Cracks in Buildings (SP 25 : 1984)
8. Handbook on Functional Requirements 9. Handbook on Timber Engineering
Code of Practice
(SP 32 : 1986)
of Industrial Buildings (Lighting and Ventilation)
(SP 33 : 1986)
10. Handbook on Concrete Reinforcement
and Detailing (SP 34 : 1987)
11. Handbook on Water Supply and Drainage with Special Emphasis on Plumbing
(SP 35 : 1987)
12. Handbook on Typified Designs for Structures with Steel Roof Trusses (with and without Cranes) (Based on IS Codes) (SP 38 : 1987) 13. Handbook on Structures with Steel Portal Frames (without Cranes) (SP 40 : 1987) 14. Handbook on Functional
Requirements
of Buildings (other than Industrial Buildings)
(SP 41 : 1987)
15. Handbook on Structures with Reinforced Concrete Portal Frames (without Cranes) (SP-43 : 1987) 16. Handbook on Structures with Steel Lattice Portal Frames (without Cranes) (SP 47 : 1987) Subjects Under Programme: “Handbooks
Foundation
of Buildings
published are available for sale from BIS Headquarters,
and from all Branches and Regional Offices of BE.
(v)
-
Construction
-
Explanatory
Safety Practices
-
Fire Protection
-
Form Work
-
Tall Buildings
Handbook on IS 875 (Part 3) : 1987
This Handbook has been written with a view to unifying the constructional practices being followed by various organizations engaged in construction of residential, commercial and industrial buildings and is mainly based on various Indian Standards published in the respective areas of construction. The Handbook provides information regarding methods of construction of any particular element of the building using different materials so that a designer/site engineer can choose the most appropriate material(s) and method(s) of construction as per his needs. Besides, it is hoped that this Handbook would be of great help to students of Civil Engineering. It may be noted that the Handbook does not form part of any Indian Standard on the subject and does not have the status of an Indian Standard. Wherever, there is any dispute about the interpretation or opinion expressed in this Handbook, the provisions of the codes only shall apply; the provisions of this Handbook should be considered as only supplementary and informative. The Handbook is based on the first draft prepared by Shri D. Ajitha Simha, former Deputy Director General of Bureau of Indian Standards with Shri P. Krishnan, Director General CPWD (Retd) as the co-author. The draft handbook was circulated for review to Structural Engineering Research Centre, Chennai; Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee; Department of Science and Technology, New Delhi; Central Public Works Department, New Delhi; Metallurgical and Engineering Consultants (India) Ltd, Ranchi; Planning Commission, New Delhi; Engineers India Ltd, New Delhi; Hindustan Construction Co ~Ltd, Mumbai; Asia Foundation and Construction Ltd, Mumbai; Cemindia Co Ltd, Mumbai; Engineer-in-Chief, Army Headquarters, New Delhi; Housing and Urban Development Corporation, New Delhi; Howe India (Pvt) Ltd, New Delhi; National Institute of Construction Management and Research, Mumbai; M/s Ansal Properties and Industries Ltd, New Delhi; Building Material and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi; Chief Engineer (R&B), Hyderabad; Public Works Department, Itanagar; Road and Building Department, Gandhi Nagar; Public Works Department, Mumbai; Chief Engineer (Blds, PWD, B&R), Chandigarh; Public Works Department, Shimla; Chief Engineer (Communication and Buildings), Bangalore; Chief Engineer (Building and Local Works), Trivandrum; Public Works Department, Patna; Public WorksDepartment, Calcutta; Public WorksDepartment (Buildings), Shillong; Chief Engineer (Building Projects), Aizawal; Chief Engineer, Housing, Kohima; Works Department, Bhubaneshwar; Public Works Department, Chennai; Public Works Department, Jaipur; Public Works Department, Lucknow; Institution of Engineers, New Delhi; Garnmons India Ltd, Mumbai and views expressed were taken into consideration while finalizing the Handbook.
CONTENTS
Page
,
ix
Introduction
,
1
Chapter 1
Construction
Chapter 2
Earthwork
11
Chapter 3
Foundations
25
Chapter 4
Masonry
43
Chapter 5
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
91
Chapter 6
Anti-termite
Chapter 7
Doors and Windows (Wood and Metal)
135
Chapter 8
Steel Construction
165
Chapter 9
Floors and Floor Coverings
177
Chapter 10
Wall and Ceiling Finishes and Coverings and Walling
239
Chapter I 1
Roofs and Rooting
277
Chapter 12
Damp-Proofing
323
Chapter 13
Joints in Buildings
Chapter 14
Whitewashing, Colour Washing and Painting of Masonry, Concrete and Plaster Surfaces (Calcareous Surfaces)
377
Chapter 15
Painting, Varnishing
391
Chapter 16
Water Supply and Drainage
Chapter 17
Special Construction
Chapter 18
Demolition
Planning and Storage of Materials
123
Measures
and Waterproofing (Control of Cracks in Buildings)
and Allied Finishes (Wood and Metals)
Procedures -
361
409 Earthquake Effects, etc
433 455
of Buildings
466
List of Referred Indian Standards
(vii)
‘_
COMPOSITION
OF THE SPECIAL COMMITTEE FOR IMPLEMENTATION SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY PROJECTS (SCIP)
OF
CHAIRMAN PADMASHRIDR H. C. VISVESVARAYA Vice-chancellor University of Roorkee Roorkee MEMBERS DR T. V. S. R. APPARAO DIRECTOR SHRIV. RAO AIYAGARI DIRECTORGENERAL ADDITIONALDIRECTORGENERAL (Alternate) SHRIM. L. MEHTA
REPRESENTING Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR), Madras Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee Department of Science & Technology, New Delhi Central Public Works Department, New Delhi Metallurgical Ranchi
and Engineering
Consultants
SHRI S. K. DATTA (Alternate) SHRIB. D. JETHRA SHRI P. D. MAYEE (Alternate)
Planning Commission,
Secretaries SHRI K.. K. SHARMA Director (S & T), BIS SHRIMATI NEETA SHARMA Deputy Director (S & T), BIS
(viii)
New Delhi
(India) Ltd,
INTRODUCTION
The National Building Code of India, 1983 (NBC) covers all the aspects of buildings. These aspects include building byelaws, development control rules, building materials and fire protection which are covered in Part I to Part V; Part VI covers the design of buildings using the building materials. Part VII is a compendium ~of Indian Standards on Construction Practices generally described as codes of good practices. Part VIII deals with building services, Part IX with plumbing services and Part X, the last part, deals with signs and outdoor display structures. For implementation of the NBC, a broad decision was taken by all state governments and the central and public sector departments to incorporate the appropriate parts of the NBC into the relevant technical documents, such as, municipal building byelaws, PWD specifications, specifications of construction departments, etc. Simultaneously it was felt that for easy understanding and implementation of handbooks be brought out on various Parts/Sections as relevant. In the light of this, by BIS, the Bureau of Indian Standards to prepare such handbooks. This handbook is one of them. Some handbooks have been already prepared and reference is made
various Parts of the NBC, S & T project was launched on constructional practices to them as found necessary.
This handbook has been on the anvil for some time now. The NBC has broadly classified buildings into 9 groups based on use and occupancy; for convenience of this handbook, they have been grouped into three, namely, residential, commercial and industrial buildings. Therefore, a study was made of available Indian Standards on constructional practices of these three groups of buildings. Within the BIS this work of standardization of the construction sector is spread over more than one technical division. Departmental programmes of civil, mechanical, metallurgical, chemical, river valley had to be checked up in this context. Normally PWDs and other construction department largely cover the constructional practices relevant to residential and to some extent office buildings. Constructional practices relevant to commercial buildings and industrial buildings are not generally dealt with. Thus this handbook has a much wider coverage in dealing with constructional practices for residential, commercial and industrial buildings, than normal departmental specifications. The approach to the handbook is to attempt to cover the ‘how’ of constructional practice with the ‘why’ of it. The current departmental specifications generally specify as to how an item of work has to be done. They do not explain the rationale for such specifications and therefore the user is not given enough information to decide, for the same work, use of alternate or more appropriate specifications among others available in the country. For example a number of specifications for flooring are available; the choice of any of them according to the end use is not mentioned. Therefore the reasons or ‘why’ of a particular specification helps in choosing one of the many specifications available for an appropriate end use. Such information, it is hoped, would lead to a reasonably good decision on choice or selection of construction procedure in relation to its end use or performance on site. A holistic approach to buildings bring out the interrelationship among building materials, design and construction of buildings using these materials. Therefore, construction practices have to be viewed inthe light of quality of materials and appropriate designs. The BIS have already brought out a summary of Indian Standards on building materials; handbooks on design; and handbooks on some services. This handbook would therefore have to be looked at as filling a gap in the series of handbooks on the building as a whole. It is therefore felt that a close co-ordination be established between the design of an item/element and its construction in the field SO that the intention of the designer is fully understood in the field. To demarcate the contents of the handbook into individual chapters, available PWD handbooks have been studied; these include among others the CPWD specifications of 1991-92 and Tamil Nadu Building Practice 198311985. The main basis are the Indian Standards available up to March 1994. From a study of
(ix)
these, the chapters have been identified and arranged according to the sequence of construction as closely as possible, namely, planning of work, collection of materials, earthwork and related termite treatment, foundations, superstructure of masonry; wood, concrete and steel, flooring, wall finishes and roofing and then followed by waterproofing and damp-proofing. Finishing of surfaces, such as, masonry, concrete and plaster are then covered; finishes of wood and metal construction is also covered. Finally water supply and drainage systems are covered. Emphasis is then laid on special construction procedure particularly for earthquake forces. The last chapter deals with demolition of buildings. For the use of materials not covered by Indian Standard Codes of Practice, the construction practices would be based on the principles enumerated in each section. For example in painting, the preparation of surface and application should be based partly on manufacturers recommendations and broadly on the principles of preparing a clean, dry surface to receive the paint; the actual finishing should be preceeded by filling, staining where applicable and sealing particularly with respect to wood surfaces. Similar procedure could be worked out for other items of work using new materials, such as, for doors, roofing sheets and so on. For economies in construction, planning of the entire work as covered in Chapter 1, is of importance. Crack control in buildings as covered in Chapter 13 which could be of use in planning of buildings is also of great importance. ,, For specialized
construction
work reference has been made to ISS wherever available.
It is therefore reasonable to assume that careful planning and meticulous observance practices elaborated herein would lead to ahigh quality building.
of all the constructional
For ease of reading, each chapter is preceded by a table of contents. List of standards used and referred to are given at the end of the handbook. A summary of each chapter is given below to indicate its broad coverage.
CHAPTER
1
Construction
Planning and Storage of Materials
This chapter deals with the need for planning of construction before commencement of work. Attention is drawn to the use of networking techniques like Programme Evaluation and Review Techniques (PERT) and Critical Path Method (CPM) to draw up a sequence of operations in a given time frame taking into account various elements of such operations. Such planning techniques are likely to help in proper monitoring of the work and avoid time overruns and finish the project in time. That is why at the very beginning of this handbook this aspect of planning has been brought in. Stocking and storage of materials, before commencing the construction is an important activity as part of planning. Safe storage and stacking would avoid hazards of breakage, etc. Details of storage of most of the materials of construction are given. The chapter is divided into two Parts; Part 1 deals with construction materials.
planning, and Part 2 deals with storage of
CHAPTER 2
Earthwork Soils are classified for excavation work. Reference is also made to appropriate Indian Standard on soil classification. Excavation for various end uses, different depths and different areas are described. Information on excavation in soft soil, hard soil, soft rock and hard rock is given. Shoring and timbering details are elaborated. Excavation in mud, water and foul positions is covered. Immediately after excavation, the anti-termite treatment of soil for different situations, is elaborated. The site preparation, chemicals to be used, etc, for treatment at various locations are given. Information on treatment of masonry, concrete foundations, masonry up to ground level, etc, is given. Treatment of soils around pipes, conduits, etc. is also given for protection against termites. Statutory authorities may be consulted in hazards related to use of these chemicals.
CHAPTER 3
Foundations This chapter covers the construction of shallow, deep, spread and strip foundations and pile foundations. Details of different types of piles, namely cast in-situ, precast and timber piles are given; in this bored and driven piles are elaborated. Reference is made to machine foundatians and special foundations. Information on choice of foundations more loads are given in Annex B.
is given in Annex A. Guidelines
for improvement
of weak soils to carry
CHAPTER 4
Masonry This chapter is divided into three parts, namely, mortars, brickwork and blockwork and stonework. Part 1 deals with mortars. Types of mortars such as cement mortar, cement-lime mortar and lime mortars are described in detail, such as, selection of mortars, preparation of mortars, etc. Emphasis is laid on the use of composite mortars which have an edge over plain cement mortars. Optimum mortar mixes in relation to masonry strengths are also indicated. Part 2 deals with brick and block units, brickwork, blockwork and in-situ walls with soil cement. Section 1 gives information on various types of bricks available in the country and some of their properties. Information on various types of blocks made in the country is given. This could help in deciding on the type of brick or block to be chosen for a given condition of loading so that economies can be achieved in construction. Section 2 deals with brickwork. Various types of bonds are illustrated and explained including the end uses. Laying of brickwork for different components of building is indicated. Thickness ofjoints, preparatory work, etc, are also covered. Section 3 deals with blockwork. Careful consideration has to be given for avoidance of crack formation due to structural movements of supporting structural elements. Remedial measures for such crack formation are mentioned. Laying of blocks is dealt with in detail. Provisions for openings, roof and intersecting walls are covered. The use of hollow, light weight and autoclaved concrete blocks is covered. Section 4 deals with construction of walls in-situ with soil cement. The quality of soil, amount of cement to be mixed depending on type of walls, etc, are covered. To carry roof loads through trusses, beams, etc, bed blocks are recommended. Plastering with cement plaster is suggested. Mud plaster with addition of cutback bitumen is also provided. The building is limited to one storey only. Part 3 deals with stone masonry. Types of stones and their properties such as durability, strength and sizes are described. Preparatory work such as dressing, handling, etc, are detailed. Various types of stone masonry and the general requirements of laying are covered; construction of these types of stone masonry is covered in detail with illustrations.
CHAPTER 5
Plain and Reinforced Concrete This chapter deals with plain and reinforced concrete work in buildings using cement; use of lime and lime pozzolana concrete is also covered. Shotcreting of work is also dealt with. Part 1 deals with the common requirements of plain and reinforced cement concrete. This includes materials to be used, grades of concrete, production, transportation and mixing of concrete. Concreting under special conditions, such as, hot weather, cold weather, underwater, in sea water and aggressive soils is also covered. Reference is made to ready mixed concrete and non-destructive testing of concrete. Accelerated curing for testing of concrete is also covered apart from determination of particle size and surface moisture on aggregate.
(4
Part 2 deals with additional requirements of reinforced concrete work over and above the general requirements covered in Part I. Details of formwork, striking of formwork, etc, are dealt with. Placing of reinforcement, welding of plain and deformed bars are also covered. Cover to reinforcement shall be as per drawings subject to IS 456 : 1978. Part 3 deals with the use of lime concrete and lime pozzolana mixture concrete. Section 1 deals with lime concrete including materials, mixing and placing of concrete. lime concrete~in foundations, arches, etc, are covered.
Details of laying
Section 2 deals with laying of lime pozzolana mixture concrete. Part 4 covers use of shotcreting methods when employed. Both dry mix and wet mix processes are covered. Details of application of shotcrete for certain elements and locations are given.
CHAPTER
6
Anti-termite
Measures
This chapter covers anti-termite measures by constructional means for new buildings and also the anti-termite treatment of existing buildings. This chapter is brought in immediately after Chapters 3,4 and 5 dealing with foundations, masonry and concrete to highlight the need to take these measures at the time of construction of these items of work. The chemical methods of anti-termite treatment are already covered in Chapter 2 on earthwork. Design criteria, internal and external anti-termite with constructional measures.
measures and termite shields are dealt with in Part 1 dealing
Part 2 deals with post constructional methods for protection of existing buildings; including inspection of the structure, elimination of termites andperventive measures. Statutory authorities may be consulted on the hazards of use of chemicals.
CHAPTER
7
Doors and Windows
(Wood and Metal)
Thischapter covers installation of doors and windows and ventilators made of wood, steel and aluminium; chapter is divided into two parts accordingly.
the
Part 1 dealing with wooden doors, etc. gives detailed information on classification of timber in the country for construction and furniture making; in this portion all relevant information on various characteristics is given; this would help in deciding on use of various species of timber for making of wooden doors, etc. Moisture content is another important aspect governing woodwork and zoning of the country based on maximum permissible moisture content is also given. Installation of wooden frames, pressed steel frames, panelled shutters, ledged, braced and battened doors and windows, battened and framed door and windows, timber panelled and glazed shutters; louvredshutters; glazing and fittings are covered in some detail. There are many hardware fittings and a number of figures are given to illustrate them; reference to Indian Standards for both wood based products and builders hardware is given for ease of use. Part 2 deals with the installation of steel and aluminium single and composite units are covered.
CHAPTER
doors, windows and ventilators;
details of installing
8
Steel Construction This chapter deals with the construction using hot rolled sections including tubular sections and cold formed light gauge sections. For this purpose the chapter is divided into two Parts. (xii)
Fabrication of sections and their connections are the two major facets of steel construction. fabrication details such as straightening, machining, cutting, holing, etc, are dealt with.
In each Part therefore
In dealing with hot rolled sections use of rivets, bolts, high strength friction grip bolts and welding is elaborated. Shop erection, site erection, shop painting and site painting are dealt with. Special precautions for members not meeting at a joint, packing of materials, inspection, etc, are also dealt with. ,
Special requirements
of fabrication for design of hot rolled sections by plastic theory are mentioned.
For construction of tubular structures, use of rivets, close tolerance bolts and welding is dealt with. A list of standards and handbooks relating to steel construction is given in Annex A. Reference is made to good construction
practice by resistance spot welding for cold formed light gauge sections.
CHAPTER 9
Floors and Floor Coverings This chapter deals with floors and floor coverings extensively. Parts.
For this purpose the chapter is divided into five
Part 1 deals with brickfloors and details of their construction. construction and finish.
It includes quality of bricks, preparatory
Part 2 deals with laying of cement concrete floors. It includes in-situ concrete flooring, flooring, in-situ terrazzo finish and cement concrete tiles. Part 3 covers construction
work,
in-situ granolithic
of industrial floor finishes including dairy floor finishes.
Part 4 deals with special floors and floor coverings. It includes magnesium oxychloride finish, rubber floors, bitumen mastic floor finish, linoleum floors, epoxy resin floors, PVC floors, use of chemical resistant mortars and parquet flooring. Part 5 covers construction
CHAPTER
of timber floors using joists and planks.
10
Wall and Ceiling Finishes and Coverings and Walling This chapter is divided into two Parts. Part 1 deals with construction of wall finishes, ceiling finishes, wall coverings and ceiling coverings. It covers the details of materials, preparatory work and construction of the following finishes on walls and ceilings and their coverings. -
Lime plaster finish; cement and cement-lime backgrounds.
-
Externalfacing and veneers using stone, cement concrete, tiles and mosaics, including requirements of using devices like cramps to fix the veneers to the background wall.
-
Wall coverings using various woodbased products, asbestos cement Similarly ceiling coverings using different materials is also dealt with.
-
Information
on backgrounds
plaster finish; external rendered finishes for different the special
boards, etc, is dealt with.
with sulphate content is also given.
Part 2 deals with the construction of walls using reeds suitable for earthquake prone areas, gypsum light weight partitions and the use of no fines in-situ concrete in walls and foundations.
CHAPTER
11
Roofs and Roofing This chapter deals with various types of roofs and roofing. Roofing materials differ and for this purpose, the chapter is divided into five Parts, namely, flat roofs, sloping roofs, shell roofs, thatched roofs and flat roof finish.
(xiii)
Part 1 covers considerable amount of information on jack-arch type roof, Madras terrace, stone over joint construction. Use of various types of precast roofing elements in combination with different types of blocks, such as, hollow and solid made from concrete or clay materials are described. A careful study of these combinations in flat roofs may lead to savings in cement and steel. Part 2 covers use of wooden shingles in sloping roofs of hilly regions. Use of slates is also indicated. Use of AC sheets both corrugated and semi-corrugated is extensively covered in the form of figures. Similarly use of plain and corrugated galvanized steel sheets is also covered. Part 3 is only an introduction construction is needed.
to shell roofs; since it is a specialized job expert guidance both in design and
Part 4 covers one of the traditional roof finishes, namely, use of mud Phuska which is economical a good insulating material easy to construct.
as well as
Part 5 deals with protection against hazards of fire of thatched roofing.
CHAPTER
12
Damp-Proofing
and Waterproofing
This chapter covers in detail damp-proofing materials and damp-proofing of various elements of structures; it also deals with waterproofing materials and their various uses in different elements of structures. Information on use of water repelling agents is also given. General details governing the preparation of surfaces to receive either damp-proofing treatment or waterproofing application, to make these treatments effective, is of importance. These details are given in the beginning of the chapter itself, applicable both to damp-proofing treatment and waterproofing treatment. Part 1 deals with various materials for damp-proofing and their use. Normal, heavy and extra heavy treatments are listed, as per conditions at site. The materials include, bitumen felt, bitumen mastic, etc. Part 2 deals with various materials for waterproofing and their use. Normal, heavy and extra heavy treatments are covered, as per conditions at site. The materials include bitumen felt, mastic, etc. Precautions
in the use of glass fibre tissue reinforced bitumen, polyethylene
CHAPTER
13
film, etc, are mentioned.
Joints in Buildings (Control of Cracks in Buildings) This chapter deals with various details of construction of joints to prevent initiation of cracks and their control. That is why this chapter is also called control of cracks in buildings. Various types of joints are described; the main joints are expansion and contraction joints. Some basic information on causes of cracking, namely, moisture movement and thermal effects on building materials is given. Other aspects of long term creep of materials, differential expansion/contraction of composite construction, like brick and plaster, are also covered. Basic details, illustrative in nature of various types of joints and their locations in walls, roofs, floors and junctions of such elements are also covered. The drawings are indicative of the principles involved in preventing and controlling cracks in buildings. Attention is also drawn to an important handbook already published by BIS on Causes and Prevention of Cracks in Buildings.
CHAPTER
14
Whitewashing, Colour Washing and Painting of Masonry, Concrete and Plaster Surfaces (Calcareous Surfaces) This chapter deals with whitewashing, colour washing and painting of calcareous surfaces like masonry, concrete, plaster and asbestos cement surfaces. For convenience the chapter is split into two Parts; Part 1 deals with whitewashing and colour washing and Part 2 deals with painting of calcareous surfaces.
(xiv)
Emphasis is laid on preparation of surfaces to as dry a condition as possible and for painting to take care of alkalinity of these surfaces. Painting of new and old surfaces are covered. Characteristics of calcareous surfaces which have to be considered for painting have been listed. Schedules of painting of these surfaces like type of paints for primer coat, undercoat and finishing coats are given. Problems of efflorescence, fungus growth, suction, etc, are highlighted with some recommendations for treatment. Maintenance schedule of painting of surfaces is also given. Some tests to determine fitness of plaster for painting through determination of dryness of background before painting, alkalinity and efflorescence are given.
CHAPTER
15
Painting, Varnishing and Allied Finishes (Wood and Metals) This chapter covers the painting of wood and wood based materials, ferrous and non-ferrous metals in buildings. For convenience it is divided into three Parts. Part 1 deals with finishing of wood and wood based materials and gives the general characteristics of timber in relation to painting. It deals in detail with priming of timber joinery before painting followed by selection of coating materials. Surface preparation of timber is important to ensure proper adhesion of paint. Details of stopping, filling, staining and finishing are elaborated. Clear finishes, french polish, etc, are also covered. A schedule of painting is listed in tabular form. Mention is also made of finishing wood based products similar to solid wood. Some details regarding finishing of wood products with nitrocellulose and cold catalysed crystals are given. Part 2 covers the pretreatment of ferrous metals, either in factory or at site before final painting. Factory pretreatment is recommended for durable results. The importance of preparing surface before treatment like removal of oil, grease, rust, etc, is emphasized. A schedule of application of paints is given. Mention is also made for maintenance painting. Part 3 covers the pretreatment,
CHAPTER
preparation of surfaces and finish of non-ferrous
metals in buildings.
16
Water Supply and Drainage This chapter is divided into three Parts dealing with water supply, drainage and plumbing system including that in high altitude and/or sub-zero regions. Part 1 on water supply deals with the piping system from the municipal water mains to the building and internal distribution also. Appurtenant structures in relation to water supply are also covered. The basic principles of supplying potable water, general requirements of pipe work, laying and jointing of pipes are elaborated. Reference is made to testing, inspection, disinfection, storage tanks, etc. Part 2 on drainage covers the conveyance of waste water, sewage, surface water and subsoil water. Laying of pipes, pipe joints and disposal are dealt with; emphasis is laid on separation of storm water drainage and sullage. Part 3 deals with special requirements of water supply and drainage of high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperatures. The effects on physical, chemical and biological properties of wastes, equipment, etc, are brought out and corresponding provisions given.
CHAPTER
17
Special Construction
Procedures -
Earthquake Effects, etc
This chapter deals with construction procedures for buildings when subjected to earthquake forces. Buildings constructed with weaker materials and strengthening of earthen buildings are also covered. The general requirements of design of course should be according to the basic code IS 1893 : 1984.
(xv>
Emphasis is laid on categorisation of buildings based on importance of the building, zone of seismic map of India and the soil foundation factor. Special construction procedures are listed for each of the five categories of buildings. The general principles for earthquake resistance of buildings are enumerated. The main thrust of these principles is to make the building rigid in both the horizontal directions through continuity of structural elements. Details of such treatment are given for masonry and timber buildings. The ductility of joints in reinforced concrete construction is covered by an Indian Standard to which reference is made. Use of precast elements and their strengthening is also covered. Some infonation on improving earthquake resistance of buildings using weaker building materials including mud/earth is covered. Repair and seismic strengthening of buildings is mentioned giving reference to an Indian Standard. The title envisages covering construction
CHAPTER
Demolition
for effects of blast and similar instantaneous
forces on buildings.
18
of Buildings
This chapter covers the safety requirements of the general public and the workers at site during demolition, Emphasis is laid on planning of the work of demolition so as to avoid any accidents or damage to adjacent structures. The need is therefore to consider sequence of demolition of elements of a structure starting from top storey and working downwards. Special requirements for demolition of masonry arches, precast elements, steel elements, beams, columns, etc. are elaborated. Demoltion by hand, mechanical means or explosives is also mentioned. Protective equipment for workers during demolition is listed. Continuous removal of debris throughout the operation is recommended so as to avoid overloading of structures below the storey under demolition; chutes and openings for this purpose are recommended. In line with the National Building Code, the word Authority having jurisdiction, is used as merely Authority in various chapters. The Authority always refers to the concerned department who has jurisdiction over the matter or subject under jurisdiction.
(xvi)
CHAPTER 1
CONSTRUCTION PLANNING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
CONTENTS
PART 1 CONSTRUCTION
PLANNING
10
ROOFINGSHEETS
I GENERAL
11 BOARDS
2 CONSTRUCTIONPLANNING
12 PLASTICANDRUBBERSHEETS
2.1 Planning Techniques 2.2 Advantages 2.3 Networking Technique PART 2
STORAGE
OF MATERIALS
13 GLASSSHEETS 14 ASBESTOSCEMENT,PIPESANDFITTINGS 15 POLYETHYLENEPIPES
I GENERAL
16 UNPLASTICIZEDPVCPIPES
2 CEMENT
17 BITLJMEN,ROADTARANDASPHALT
3 LIME
18 WATER
-1BRICKS
19 FLATTILES
5 AGGKECATE
20 OILPAINTS
6 FLYASH
21 SANITARYAPPLIANCES
7 TIMBER
22 PILES
8 STEEL
23 OTHERMATERIALS
9 DOOR~,W!NDOWSANDVENTILATORS
24 SPECIALCONSIDERATIONS 25 ELECTRICALMATERIALS
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
CHAPTER 1
CONSTRUCTION PLANNING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS PART 1 CONSTRUCTION
1 GENERAL 1.1 Planning and scheduling ofaconstruction project, be it a building, bridge, or drainage work, consists of defining all the tasks that must be performed and laying them out in logical sequence necessary for the completion of the project. There is a link between quality of preparation that goes into the formulation of a work plan and the efficiency of management and contra1 in the execution and operation phases. This calls for effective co-ordination of the efforts of all the participants and identification of the tasks which are likely to constrain the completion of project in time. If not done, it might lead to time and cost overrun of the project. Thus there is a need for application of modern and scientific techniques in the planning, management and control of construction. This would essentially mean a dedicated attempt to identify critical tasks and then attempt at backward integration of these, both in time and cost along with other noncritical tasks.
known as Network Techniques comprising of both Programme Evaluation and Review Techniques (PERT) and Critical Path Method (CPM). Both are modern techniques suitable for any organized activity; the basic aim being to tie up all loose ends involved in any project and put them in a proper sequence and time frame. These techniques can also be applied to construction industry. 2.2 Advantages Networking overcomes some of the lacunae in Bar Chart System. The advantages of it are as below.
4 Results in a logical appreciation of the project from conception to completion.
b) Enables project completion to be forecast more c) 4
2.1 Planning
accurately. Identifies critical activities that have great bearing on the efficient progress of the construction project. Forecasts potential delays ahead of their actual occurrence. Provides a slack to permit rescheduling of resources for efficient deployment. Identifies interdependent activities to focus on importance of co-ordination. Provides an effective tool for management to locate slippages and plug them. Above all provides a basis for more dynamic and quick reporting system to take corrective action during different stages of construction.
e>
1.2 One of the conventional methods that have been in use for construction planning is the bar chart. .However, all the required information cannot be shown on a simple bar chart. For instance the chart cannot indicate the effect of some work being behind or ahead of schedule on the completion of project. This is because the bar chart does not show the interdependence of each item of work (activity) on the other. It cannot also project the effect of delay (time overrun) in one item of work on another. It is this lack of knowledge of the inter-relationships of various items of work that results in the lack of co-ordination or appreciation of the sequential or logical role of each item of work to the total construction project. The bar chart also does not identify those tasks which are critical to the completion of construction. Thus the attention to be paid to critical areas of work gets diverted resulting in loss of time and resources. 2 CONSTRUCTION
PLANNING
f-l g) h)
2.3 Networking
Technique
2.3.1 Before launching on preparing a schedule following basic questions have to be answered:
the
-
What activity should precede the one that is being considered?
-
What activity can follow this activity immediately?
-’
What activities can proceed concurrently?
2.3.2 Some of the ground rules to answer these three basic questions are:
PLANNING
Techniques
Construction planning techniques have emerged in the recent past abroad. These are being propagated in our country over a decade or more. These are commonly 3
-
No event can occur until every activity preceding it has been completed;
-
Similarly no activity, succeeding an event, can be started until that event has occurred;
SP 62@ & T): 1997
-
Each activity must terminate in an event; An event can occur twice; and Finally every activity must be completed reach the end objective.
to
2.4 The above introductory information is only to indicate the practical aspect of the approach of Network techniques. The purpose in introducing at this stage in this very first chapter is to highlight the impor-
tance of understanding and application of this technique to construction. A considerable amount of literature has been generated on this and these may be referred to for any given project for preparation of planning schedules. 2.5 One of the activities is to procure and store building materials taking into account sequence of operations. Some information on storage of materials is given in Part 2 of this Chapter.
PART 2 STORAGE
OF MATERIALS
1 GENERAL
alround between the bags and external walls. In the stacks, cement bags shall be kept close together to reduce circulation of air as much as possible. Owing to pressure on the bottom layer of bags ‘warehouse pack’ is developed in these bags. This can be removed easily by rolling the bags when the cement is taken for use.
1.1Materials shall be so stored as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter and to ensure the preservation of their quality and fitness for use in the work. Materials shall also be stored to protect against atmospheric agencies, fire and other hazards.
The height of the stack shall be not more than 15 bags to~prevent the possibility of lumping up under pressure. The width of the stack shall not be more than four bags length or 3 m. In stacks more than 8 bags high, the cement bags shall be arranged alternately lengthwise and crosswise so as to tie the stacks together and minimize the danger of toppling over. Cement bags shall be stacked in a manner to facilitate their removal and use in the order in which they are received.
1.2 Materials like timber, coal, paints, etc, shall be stored in such a way that there may not be any fire hazards. Inflammable materials like kerosene, petrol, etc, shall be stored in accordance ~with the relevant rules and regulations in force prescribed by the Authority, so as to ensure safety during storage (see also IS 7969 : 1975). Explosives like detonators shall be stored in accordance with the rules and regulations in force.
During the monsoon orwhen it for a long period, the stack enclosed by a waterproofing polyethylene sheet. Care shall membrane is not damaged any
Materials which are likely to be affected by subsidence of soil, like precast elements, large size timber sections, etc, shall be provided with unyielding supports. In areas, likely to be affected by floods, the materials shall be suitably stowcd to prevent their being washed away or damaged by floods.
is expected to be stored shall be completely membrane, such as, be taken to see that the time during use.
Different types of cements shall be stored separately. Cement stored in drums may be arranged with closures on top. After partial use of drums when it occurs, the closure should fastened to prevent ingress of moisture. A of 3 drums can be stacked in height.
During construction, stairways, passageways and gangways shall not be obstructed due to storage of materials, tools or rubbish. 2 CEMENT
vertically cement in be firmly maximum
3 LIME
Cement shall be stored at the work site in a building or shed which is dry, leakproof and as moisture proof as possible. The building shall have minimum number of windows and close fitting doors which shall be kept closed as far as possible.
Quick lime deteriorates rapidly on exposure by taking up moisture and carbon dioxide from atmosphere. Therefore, it should be stacked as soon as possible before deterioration sets in. If unavoidable, quicklime may be stored in compact heaps having only minimum of exposed area. The heaps shall be stored on a suitable platform and covered to avoid direct contact with moisture/rain or being blown away by wind. In case it is stored in a covered shed, a minimum space of 300 mm should be provided alround the heaps to avoid bulging of walls.
Cement stored in bags shall be stacked and shall be kept free from the possibility of any dampness or moisture coming in contact with the bags. Cement bags shall be stored/stacked off the floor on wooden planks in such a way as to be clear above the floor by 1SO mm to 200 mm and a space of 450 mm minimum 4
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
Hydrated lime is generally supplied in containers such as jute bags, lined polyethelene or HDPE woven bags lined with polyethylene or craft paper bags. It should be stored in a building to protect lime from dampness and to minimize warehouse deterioration. Dry slaked lime should be stored on a platform suitably covered from rain and wind if it is to be used within a few days. If required to be stored for longer periods not exceeding 2 months it may be kept in a dry and closed godown. 4 BRICKS Bricks shall not be dumped at site. They should be stacked in regular tiers as and when they are unloaded to minimize breakage and defacement of bricks.
shall be 50 bricks long and 10 bricks high, the bricks being placed onedge. The width of each stack shall be 6 to 8 bricks. Clear distance between adjacent stacks shall not be less than 0.8 m. Bricks of different types and class shall be stacked separately. 5 AGGREGATE Aggregate shall be stored at site on a hard and dry level patch of ground. If such a surface is not available, a platform of planks or of corrugated iron sheets, or a floor of dry bricks, or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be made so as to prevent the admixture of clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign matter. Stacks of fine and coarse aggregate-shall be kept in separate stack piles, sufficiently removed from each other to prevent the materials at the edge of the piles getting intermixed. On a large job it is desirable to construct dividing walls to give each type of aggregate its own compartment. Fine aggregate shall be stacked in place where loss due to the effect of wind is minimum.
In case of bricks made -from clay containing lime kanknrthe bricks in stack should be thoroughly soaked in water to prevent lime bursting. Bricks shall be placed close to the site of work so that least effort is required to unload and transport the bricks again by loading on pallets or barrows. Building bricks shall -be loaded a pair at a lime unless palletized. Unloading of building bricks or handling in any other way likely to damage the corners or edges or other parts of bricks shall not be permitted.
Unless specified otherwise or.necessitated by site conditions, stacking of aggregate should be carried out in regular sizes.
Bricks shall be stacked on firm ground. For proper inspection of quality and ease in counting, the stacks
The suggested sizes of stacks are as follows:
Materials
Size of Stuck (in m) A
f Length
Breadth
\ Height
Soling stone
5.0 or 5.0
2.0 1.0
0.50 0.50
Coarse aggregate
2.0 or 5.0
2.0 5.0
0.50 1.oo
Fine aggregate
2.0 or 5.0 or 5.0
2.0 5.0 1.0
0.50 1.oo 0.50
6 FLY ASH
in different lengths, and material of equal lengths shall be piled together in layers with wooden battens, called crossers, separating one layer from another. The crossers shall be of sound wood, straight and uniform in thickness. In any layer, air space of about 25 mm shall be provided between adjacent members. The larger pieces shall be placed in the bottom layers and the shorter pieces in the upper layers, but one end of the stock including crossers shall be in true vertical alignment. The most suitable width and height of a stack are recommended to. be about 1.5 m and 2 m. Distance between adjacent stacks is shown in Fig. 1.1. The stacks shall be protected from hot dry winds or direct sun and rain. Heavy weights, such as metal rails
Fly ash shall be stored in such a manner as to permit easy access and proper inspection and identification of each consignment. Fly ash in bulk quantities shall be stored in a stack similar to fine aggregate as referred to in 5, avoiding any inclusion of foreign matter. Fly ash in bags shall be stored in stack not more than 15 bags high. 7 TIMBER Timber shall be stored in stacks upon well treated and even surfaced beams, sleepers or brick pillars as to be above the ground level by at least 150 mm. The various members shall preferably be stored separately 5
.
‘ucyvsuapuoz luaAa.rd pue ~9 JO uo!le~tw!~ luar\aJd 01 Buyuw3 hwodural uo LIasoor Bunq aq ~p_?qsuqnedlrzl aqL w[nud.w SI? yns Jar\03 alqulys Lq ~l~our pw luawa:, asooi ~013 palgalord aq ~leys sJoyqguaA pun SMOPU!M ‘sloop uuyuynle akols 30 popad 4u!lna %.qdoo~p slallnys pur? payells Bu!aq saBuy pw advqs 30 Ino 8uplaE4 saurvy loop aql p!ohe 01 sv 0s pax!3 Bu!aq a.ro3aq lauuetu sg u! %o[ ~03 puels 01 paMo[lu aq lou ~[vqs LayL .dol aql le salyd yy ayi ql!M UMO~ap!sdn paycels aq llsqs slolrzI!luai\ pue SMO~U!M‘sloop 103 saw213 IElaN ‘110~ aql103 paqnbaJ uaqM pue st? Sal&w aql ruol3 paAoura1 puv uoq3nqsur ,slalnl5qnuew 018uyp~o~3v pay3vls aq ~Isys Laql sale13 ui pahtaDa131 ‘saysi purr lup ql+ ~3eluo3 us am03 lou Ip2qs pua sualleq uapoow uo 61qwa3ald punoII8 Iahal uo (SII!S .yaql uo) lq+dn pay%lS
&Xl I[“IjS -SapIS
S.IOlE~!lUaA 10
SKXl103
PUV ‘SMOPU!M 01 dhXUT?p
‘S.IOOp
PlOAk?
[I?laJAJ
CINV SMOCINIM
‘SuogDas 30 uoy~o]s!p p!onr? 01 slJoddns alqel!ns Jaylo JO spgs ‘suno3leId uodn tutu 0~1 lseal jr! Lq Iaha[ puno.Ci aAoqe palols aq 11vys11 .IClalvJudas palois aq I@qs sql8ual put! sazrs ‘(sap& puv sadill) uo!l -e3!3issel3 luaJa33rp 30 suogDas Iaals Ie.uwnqs Jay10 %IgstU put? h1e3s luahald 01 ‘a8wols 2~01 q3ns 103 %a,@ aq IIeqs ~SBM luaura3 30 leo3 V ‘unu os[ isr?aj 3e Aq [ahal puno.8 a,zoqu payDcls aq IIeqs s.n2q luauraglo3uyal ‘a%~ols Buoy 30 asw UI 5q@ual p.rupuvls uroJ3 BuynD u! a%lscM az!ru!u!ru~ 01 sv OS sq@ual pue saz!s q3ns u! anssr alelq!cw3 01 L[alv.wdas palols aq Ilvqs sq$haI pu12saz!s ‘uo~le3gye~r1 luala33ip 30 s_w~ %psnl puu Buye3s 1uaAaId 01 Buyysels a.ro3aq qseh luaurag ql!M luauraD~o3uraJ iv03 01 alqr?qsap s! 11~uo~so~o3 pue uog -elopalap 1uaAaJd 01 pw uo!l.Iols!p p!oAI? 01 St?hM B qDns ul pa_tols aq IcI!~u!p~o lIt2ys luawaDlqlu!al IaaJS
01 lL?[J 6IqE
-1a3aId page3 pue payg aq plnoqs Ivualeur aqJ .sJal -1nqs~aApeloDap 30 asw u! ‘aldurexa “03 ‘pgaleur aql 30 aDE3-tnsaql 01 a%ut?p asna3 iltw 1~su lay10 aqi la.40 au0 pa%hp you s! [u!lalmn aqz lcql alnsua 01 uayr?l aq ~~uqsan?3 slallnqs pur? saun2y MO~UFMpuu loop Jaq -tug Buyels puu 8ugpwq ‘%.g3lqs %npeolun altqfi S2IOLV?LLN2IA
‘SXOOCI 6
‘suo!l>as Iaals p2mvn~ls puv snq luauxag.ro3ufal Jo3 ua@ aq IIeqs luauw!aq aAy3alo~d ;rv~!wys‘van 1elwo3 u! aBalols.ro~ put? k~e3s 1uaAaJd 01 ua@ aq ~leqs agl3alold alqel!ns ‘aikols ~UO~JO~
%IpI.I
Jaugd 30 8uyo~
.sJno[oD aleledas l~gs!p u! palu!ed aq ssel3 qwa 30 suogDas pue sleq 30 spua aql lvq~ a[qcqsap SF11 ‘laals 30 (ape&? pwadL1) uo~~~~y~ss~~~ q3va Buyols 103 payn?uxlva aq ~leqs walli alwedag ‘IBBJS
8
pgaieur a1qt2lins laqlo iCue10 XBM au!Ilelsh 0~3!rn ‘(I!o SSOIBpauap?eq) slu!cd paI tun!uyn[u ‘.wl 1~03 qi!M palpo:, aq IIeqs slaqwaur Ip230 spua aql ‘p2galcw aqi ur %uyw pua luaAa.rd 01 ‘alow 10 lea/l u lnoqr? “03 palois s! .raqury asw UI .y~ols aql u! laqurg 30 ih!d.rw JO uo~l~ols~p 1uaAald 01 y~els aqi 30 do1 uo paoeld aq 01 papuaunuogar a.n2 ‘poohi 30 suo!lDas aBleI -10
L661: (A ‘8 S) Z9 dS
..rSP 62 (S & T) : 1997
All wooden frames and shutters shall be stored in dry andclean covered space away from any infestation and dampness. The storage shall be preferably in well ventilated dry rooms. The frames shall be stacked one over the other in vertical stacks with cross battens at regular distances to keep the stack vertical and straight. The cross battens should be of uniform thickness and placed vertically one above the other. The door shutters shall be stacked in the form of clean vertical stacks one over the other and at least 80 mm above ground on pallets or suitable beams or rafters. The top of the stack shall be covered by ~a protecting cover and weighed down by means of scantlings or other suitable weights. The shutter stack shall rest on hard and level ground. Separatestacks shall be built for each size, each grade and each type of material. When materials of different sizes, grades and types are to be stacked together for want of space, the bigger size shall be stacked in the lower portion of the stacks. Suitable pallets or separating battens shall be kept in between two types of material. If any wooden frame or shutter becomes wet during transit, it shall be kept separate from undamaged material. The wet material may be dried by stacking in shade with battens in between adjacent boards with free access of dry air generally following the guidance laid down in IS 1141 : 1993. 10 ROOFING
SHEETS
Roofing sheets shall be stored in such a way as not to damage them in any way. Asbestos cement sheets shall be stacked to a height of not more than one metre on a firm and level ground with timber or other packing beneath them. If stacked in exposed position, they shall be protected from damage by wind.
50 mm x 25 mm battens in such a way that it will give support to all the four edges and corners of the boards with intermediate battens placed at suitable intervals to avoid warping. The boards shall be stacked in a solid block in a clear vertical alignment. The top sheet of each stack shall be suitably weighed down to prevent warping. The boards shall be unloaded and stacked with utmost care avoiding damage to corners and surface. In case of decorative plywood and decorative boards the surfaces of which are likely to get damaged by dragging one over the other it is advisable thatthese boards are lifted in pairs facing each other as far as possible. 12 PLASTIC
AND RUBBER
SHEETS
Plastic and rubber sheets have a tendency to breakdown during storage. These shall be stored according to manufacturers’ instructions. The coolest room available shall be utilized for the storage of rubber and plastic sheets. The store rooms where plastic and rubber sheets are stored shall be well ventilated and kept as dark as possible. Though complete darkness is not necessary, direct light should not be allowed to fall on the plastic and rubber sheets. Contaminatian with vegetable and mineral oils, greases, organic solvents, acids and their fumes, alkalis, dust and grit, shall be prevented. When greasy contamination occurs this shall Aberemoved immediately with petrol and the sheet thoroughly wiped dry and dusted with French chalk. Rubber and plastic sheets shall be stored away from electric generators, motors, switchgear-and other such electrical equipment as they produce harmful odour in their vicinity. Undue stretch and strain, kink, sharp bends or folds shall be avoided. In case of long storage, the sheets shall be turned over periodically and treated with French chalk, if necessary.
Asbestos cement sheets of the same variety and size shall be stacked together. Damaged sheets shall not be stacked with sound materials. All damaged sheets shall be salvaged as early as possible.
13 GLASS SHEETS It is important that all sheets whether stored in crates or not shall be kept dry. Suitable covered storage space shall be provided for the safe storage of glass sheets. In removing glass sheets from crates great care shall be taken to avoid damage to glass. The glass sheets shall be lifted and stored on its long edges and shall be put into stacks not more than 25 panes, supported at two points by fillets of wood at 300 mm from each end. The first pane laid in each stack shall be so placed that its bottom edge is about 25 mm from the base of the wall or other support against which the stack rests. The whole stack shall be as close and as upright as possible.
11 BOARDS Gypsum boards shall be stored flat in a clean covered and dry place. Boards shall not be stored in the open and exposed to sun and rain, particularly if they are woodbased boards, such as plywood, fibre board, particle board, block board, etc. The boards shall be stacked on a flat dunnage, on top of which a wooden frame shall be constructed with
7
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 14. ASBESTOS FITTINGS
CEMENT,
PIPES AND
more than 1.5 m high. another.
Avoid storing one pipe in
The pipes shall be unloaded where they are required, when the trenches are ready to receive them.
Pipes of different sizes and classes should be stacked separately.
The pipes shall be stored on firm, level and clear ground and wedges shall be provided at the bottom layer to keep the stack stable.
On no account should pipes stored in a stressed or bent condition. The ends of pipes should be protected from abrasion~particularly those specially prepared forjointing.
The stack should be in pyramid shape or the pipes be arranged lengthwise and crosswise in alternate layers. The pyramid stack is advisable for smaller diameter pipes for conserving space in the store room. The height of the stack shall not exceed 1.5 m.
In tropical conditions, pipes should be stored in shade. In wintry conditions or cold weather the impact strength of PVC is reduced making it brittle; therefore more care shall be exercised in handling of the pipes.
Each stack shall contain only pipes of same class and size, with consignment or batch number marked on it with particulars of suppliers wherever possible.
If due to improper storage or handling, a pipe becomes kinked, the damaged portion should be cut out completely. Kinking is likely to occur in thin walled pipes.
Cast iron detachable joints and fittings shall be stacked under cover and separated from asbestos cement pipes and fittings. Rubber rings shall be kept clean, away from grease, oil, heat and light. 15 POLYETHYLENE
PIPES
Black polyethylene pipes are suitably protected from ageing due to sunlight by the addition of appropriate quantity and type of carbon black during manufacture. Therefore they may be stored even in the open; however, it is preferable that they are stored under cover. Natural polyethylene pipes, however, shall be stored under cover and protected from direct sun. Pipe coils may be stored either on edge or stacked flat
one on top of another, but in either case they should not be allowed to come in contact with heat, such as, through hot water or steam pipes. They should also be kept away from hot surfaces. Straight lengths of pipes should be stored on horizontal racks giving continuous support to prevent the pipe getting a permanent set if allowed to sag. Storage of pipes in heated areas exceeding 27°C shall be avoided. 16 UNPLASTICIZED
PVC PIPES
These pipes shall be given support at all times. Pipes should be stored on a reasonably flat surface free from stones and sharp projections so that the pipe is supported all along its length. Pipes should not be stored on racks. Pipes should not be stacked in large piles especially under warm temperature conditions as the bottom pipes may be distorted, thus creating problems in jointing. Socket and spigot pipes should be stacked in layers with sockets placed at alternate ends of the stacks to avoid lopsided stacks. Stacks shall not be
17 BITUMEN,
ROAD TAR AND ASPHALT
All types of bitumen, road tar, asphalt, etc, in drums or containers shall be stacked vertically on their bottoms up to 3 tiers. Leaky drums should be seggregated. Empty drums shall be stored in pyramidical stacks neatly in rows. 18 WATER Wherever water is to be stored for construction purposes, it shall be done in proper storage tanks to prevent any organic impurities polluting the water. 19 FLAT TILES Flat tiles shall be stacked on well treated and hard surface. Tiles shall be stacked at site in proper layers and tiers and they shall not be dumped in heaps. In a stack, the tiles shall be so placed that the mould surface of one faces another. The height of the stack shall not be more than 1 m. Tiles when supplied in packed boxes/crates shall be stored as such. They shall be opened only at the time of use. 20 OIL PAINTS All containers of paints, thinners and allied materials shall preferably be stored on floors with sand cushions in a separate room which is well ventilated and free from excessive heat, sparks of flame and direct rays of the sun. The containers of paint shall be kept covered or properly fitted with lid and shall not be kept open except when in use. 21 SANITARY
APPLIANCES
All sanitary appliances shall be carefully stored under cover to protect from damage. When accepting and
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 23 OTHER
storing appliances consideration shall be given to sequence of removal from the store to the asssembly positions. Proper stacking to assist the later stage will be advantageous. As nearly all assemblage have need for separating brackets, these shall be readily accessible as they will be required at an early stage.
MATERIALS
Small articles like screws, bolts, nuts, door and window fittings, polishing stones, protective clothing, spare parts of machinery, linings and packings, water supply and sanitary fittings, etc, shall be kept in a suitable and properly protected store rooms. Valuable small material shall be kept under lock and key.
22 PILES
24 SPECIAL
Pile shall be stored on firm ground free from liability to unequal subsidence of settlement under the weight of the stack of piles. The piles shall be placed on timber supports which are truly level and spaced so as to avoid undue bending in the piles. The supports shall be left around the piles to enable them to be lifted without difficulty. The order of stacking shall be such that the older piles can be withdrawn for driving without disturbing the newer piles. Separate stacks shall be provided for different lengths of piles. Whenever curing is needed during storage, arrangements shall be made to enable the piles to be watered if the weather conditions so require.
CONSIDERATIONS
Material constantly in use shall be relatively nearer the place of use. Heavy units like precast concrete members stacked near the hoist and the ramp.
shall be
Materials which normally deteriorate during storage shall be kept constantly moving, by replacing old materials with new stocks. Freshly arrived materials shall never be placed over materials which had arrived earlier. Fire extinguishers and fire buckets shall be provided wherever necessary for safety.
Care shall be taken at all stages of transportating, lifting and handling of piles to see that they are not damaged or cracked during handling. During
25 ELECTRICAL
transportation the piles shall be supported at appropriate lifting holes provided for the purpose. If
MATERIALS
Storage of electrical materials such as, cables, conductors, switch gear, etc, shall conform to National Electric Code, 1983 [see &SO the supplementary ‘Handbook on electrical installation .in buildings’ (underpreparation)].
Piles are Put down temporarily after being lifted, they shall be placed on trestles or blocks located at the lifting points.
9
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER 2 EARTHWORK
-_.
-
CONTENTS
CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS
10.3 Filling
GENERALPRECAUTIONS
11 SHORINGAND TIMBERING
SURFACEEXCAVATION
12 EXCAVATIONIN MUD, WATER OR FOUL POSITION
3. I General 13 FILLING IN TRENCHES,UNDER FLOURS,ETC 3.2 Setting Out and MakingProfiles 14 SAND FILLING IN PLINTH ROUGHEXCAVATION 4.1 General 15 SURFACEDRESSING 4.2 Cutting 16 ANTI-TERMITETREATMENT 4.3 Filling (CHEMICAL TREATMENT) EXCAVATION OVERAREAIN SOFT/HARDSOIL 16.1 General 5.1 General 16.2 Site Preparation 5.2 Setting Out and Making Profiles 16.3 Treatment Beneath the Building 5.3 Cutting 16.4 Time of Application EXCAVATIONOVER AREA IN ORDINARY/HARD 16.5 Treatment of Masonry Foundations and ROCK Basements 6.1 General 16.6 Treatment of RCC Foundations and Base6.2 Blasting Operations ments 6.3 Precautions During Blasting 16.7 Treatment of Top Surface of Plinth Filling EXCAVATIONIN FOUNDATION TRENCHES OR 16.8 Treatment at Junction of the Wall and the DRAINS (SOFT/HARDSOIL) Floor 16.9 Treatment of Soil Along External Perimeter EXCAVATION IN FOUNDATION TRENCHES OR of the Building DRAINS (ORDINARY ROCK) 16.10 Treatment of Soil Apron Along External EXCAVATION IN FOUNDATION TRENCHES OR Perimeter of Building DRAINS (HARD ROCK) 16.11 Treatment of Walls Retaining Soil Above Ground Level IO EXCAVATION IN TRENCHES FOR PIPES, CABLES, 16.12 Treatment of Soil Surrounding Pipes, ETC, AND REFILLING Conduits, etc 10.1 General Treatment of Expansion Joints 16.13 IO.2 Width of Trench
-_..__
-
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
CHAPTER 2
EARTHWORK 1 CLASSIFICATION
OF SOILS
1.1 For the purpose of this chapter regarding earthwork soils may be classified as below:
4 Soft/Loose Soil -
Generally any soil which yields to the ordinary application of pick and shovel or to a spade, rake or other ordinary digging tools, examples: I) Sand, gravel, loam, clay, mud, black cotton soil. 2) Vegetable or organic soil, turf, peat, soft shale or loose murrum. 3) Mud concrete below ground level. 4) Any mixture of soils mentioned above.
b) Hard/Dense Soil - Generally any soil which requires the close application of picks or jumpers or scarifiers and rippers to loosen the same, examples: 1) Stiff heavy clay, hard shale or compact murrum requiring grafting tool and/or pick and shovel. 2) Shingle and river or nallah bed boulders. 3) Soling of roads, paths, etc, and hard core. 4) Macadam surface of any description (water bound, grouted tarmac, etc). 5) Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime or cement mortar below ground level. 6) Soft conglomerate or soft laterite when the stone can be detached from matrix with picks.
cl Ordinary Rock (not requiring blasting, wedging, or similar means) - This may be quarried or split with crow bars or picks, such as, limestone, hard laterite, hard conglomerate and unreinforced cement concrete below ground level. If required light blasting may be resortedto, for loosening the materials, but this does not in any way entitle the material to be classified as ‘Hard Rock’. NOTE -
1.2 IS 1498 : 1970 may be seen for classification soils for general engineering purposes. 2 GENERAL
Trenches and foundation pits shall be securely fenced and posted with proper precautionary signs. They shall be marked with red lights at night to avoid accidents. Public safety shall be ensured at all times. 2.1 Site Clearance Before the earthwork is started, the site shall be cleared of vegetation, brushwood, trees, saplings, etc, of girth up to 30 cm measured at a height of 1 m above ground level and rubbish remained up to a distance of 50 m outside the periphery of area under clearance. The roots of trees shall be removed to depth of at least 60 cm below ground level or 30 cm below foundation level and the hollows filled up with earth, levelled and rammed. The trees of girth above 30 cm measured at a height of 1 m above ground level shall be cut only after permission of the Engineer-in-charge. The roots of trees shall be removed as specified in above para. Existing structures, such as, old buildings, culverts, pipe line, sewers, etc, within the site, shall be dismantled; if necessary, with appropriate permission, structures adjacent to the site may be dismantled. Archaeological monuments, structures, etc, should be dealt with appropriately in consultation with the concerned Authority, similarly felling of trees should be done in consultation with the concerned Authority. 3 SURFACE EXCAVATION
rock or boulder for the excavation of which blasting is required such as quartzite, granite, basalt, reinforced cement concrete (reinforcement to be cut through but not separated from concrete), etc, below ground level. rock where blasting is prohibited reason, excavation has to be carried chiselling, wedging or any other method.
3.1 General Excavation exceeding 1.5 m width and IO m* on plan but not exceeding 30 cm in depth shall be called ‘surface excavation’. 3.2 Setting Out and Making Profiles
In hard for any out by agreed
A masonry pillar shall be erected at a suitable point in the area which would be visible from most points in the area to serve as a bench mark for the execution of work. A typical construction of the bench mark is shown in Fig. 2. I. This bench mark shall be connected
13
r
L,.,.‘.
.
PRECAUTIONS
Excavating shall not be carried out below foundation level of adjacent buildings, until underpinning, shoring, etc, is done. Adequate precautions shall be taken to see that the excavation operations do not affect adjacent buildings.
4 Hard Rock (requiring blasting) -Any
e) Hard Rock (blasting prohibited)
of
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 with a standard bench mark available in the vicinity. Necessary profiles, with pegs, bamboos and strings or pillars, shall be made to show the correct formation levels before the work is started. The profiles and Burjis shall be maintained during excavation.
hill side cutting, excavation.
as rough
4.2 Cutting The work shall be executed true to levels, slopes, shape and pattern as indicated in the drawings. During excavation the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained~to avoid water logging.
The ground levels shall be taken between 5 to 15 m intervals in uniformly sloping ground and at closer intervals where local mounds, pits, undulations are met with. The ground levels shall be recorded in field books and plotted on to appropriate scale. The plans shall be signed by the Authority having jurisdiction before commencement of work to authenticate it. 4 ROUGH
etc, shall be described
Cutting shall be done from top to bottom. Under no circumstances shall, undermining or under cutting, be allowed. The sides of the excavation shall be dressed or trimmed and bottom shall be levelled or graded and rammed.
EXCAVATION
All cutting shall be done to the required levels. In case it is taken deeper, it shall be brought to the required levels by filling in with earth duly consolidated. However in case of hard rock, where blasting operations are
4.1 General Excavation not requiring dressing of sides and bottom to exact levels, such as winning earth from borrow pits,
MS hEMISPHERICAL LL WELDED WITH PLATE
BRICK
+560------j
SECTIONAL
WORK
IN
I:4
ELEVATION
Alldimensionsin millimetres.
FIG. 2.1 TYPEDESIGNFORTEMPORARYSITEBENCHMARK 14
.
___
-
._
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 resorted to, cutting shall be left as it is and made up during construction.
b)
Excavation for basement, water tanks, etc; and Excavation in trenches for foundations exceeding 1.5 m in width and 10 m* on plan.
c>
4,3 Filling The earth from cutting shall be directly used for filling. Filling of earth shall be done in regular horizontal layers, each not exceeding 20 cm thick. The earth shall be free of all roots, grass, rubbish; and lumps and clods exceeding 8 cm in any direction shall be broken. Each layer shall be consolidated by ramming. Watering of each layer may be done if required. The top surface of the finally finished area be neatly dressed. The finished formation levels, in case of filling, shall be kept higher than the required levels, by making an allowance of 10 percent of depth of filling for future settlement in case of ordinary consolidated fills. The allowance shall be 5 percent if consolidation is done by machinery. No allowance shall be made if consolidation is done by heavy mechanical equipment under optimum moisture conditions. 5 EXCAVATION SOIL
OVER AREA IN SOFT/HARD
Excavation shall be carried out to the required depths and profiles. 6.2 Blasting Operations Where blasting operations are necessary as in hard rock, prior permission shall be obtained from the Authority. In ordinary rock, blasting operations shall not be generally adopted. 6.3 Precautions
During Blasting
During blasting operations proper precautions shall be taken for the safety of persons. Blasting operations shall not be done within 200 m of existing structures. All operations shall conform to Rules and Regulations of Indian Explosive Act, 1940 as amended from time to time. In addition precautions laid down in IS 4081 : 1986 [see&o IS 5878 (Part 2/Set 1) : 19701.
5.1 General This shall include: a) Excavation exceeding 1.5 m in width and 10 m* on plan and exceeding 30 cm in depth; b) Excavation in basements, water tanks, etc; and c) Excavatioriin trenches for foundations exceeding 1.5 m width and 10 m* on plan. Excavation shall be carried out to the required depths and profiles. 5.2 !htth$
Out and Making Profiles (see 3.2)
7 $XCAVATION IN FOUNDATION TRENCI-IJZS OR DRAINS (SOFT/HARD SOIL) 7.1 Excavation in trenches for foundations shall not exceed 1.5 m in width or 10 m* or plan to any depth (excluding trehches for pipes, cables, etc). 7.2 The excavation operation shall include excavation and removal of the earth. The excavated earth shall be thrown at least at half the depth of excavation, clear of the edge of excavation. The earth shall be disposed off as directed by the Authority.
3.3 Cutthg In firm soils, the sides of the trench shall be kept vertical up to a depth of 2 m from the bottom. For greater depth, the excavation profiles shall be widened by allowing steps of 50 cm on either side after every 2 m from the bottom. Alternatively, the excavation may be done to give a side slope of 1:4. Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of steps shall be suitably increased or side sloped or the soil shored up. The bed excavation shall be made to the correct level or slope and consolidated by watering and ramming. Soft and weak spots shall be dug out and filled with levellingconcrete. Excess depth, if any, also shall be mnde good with the same concrete.
While carrying out at the excavation work for drains, care shall be taken to cut the sides and bottom to the required shape, slope and gradient. The surface shall be properly dressed. If the excavation is done to a greater depth than shown on drawings, the excess depth shall be made good with stiff clay puddle at places where the drains are required to be pitched. The excess depth shall be made good with~ordinary earth and properly watered and rammed where the drain is not required to be pitched. The back filling with clay puddle shall be done side by side as the pitching work proceeds. Brick pitched storm water drain shall be avoided as far as possible in filled up areas.
6 EXCAVATION OVER AREA IN ORDINARY/HARD ROCK
8 EXCAVATION IN FOUNDATION TRENCHES OR DRAINS (ORDINARY ROCK)
6.1 General 8.1 Excavation not exceeding 1.5 m in width or 10 m* on plan to any depth in trenches (excluding trenches for pipes, cables, etc) shall be described as excavation in trenches for foundations.
This shall include: a) Excavation exceeding 1.5 m in width and 10 m* on plan and exceeding 30 cm depth;
15
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 8.2 Excavation in ordinary rock shall be carried out by crow Pars, pick axes, or pneumatic drills. Blasting operations are not generally required in this case. 9 EXCAVATION IN FOUNDATION TRENCHES OR DRAINS (HARD ROCK) 9.1 Excavation not exceeding 1.5 m in width or 10 m2 on plan to any depth in trenches (excluding trenches for pipes, cables, etc) shall be described as excavation in trenches for foundation. 9.2 Excavation in hard rock shall be done by chiselling, where blasting operations are prohibited or are not practicable. In trenches and drains, where blasting is not otherwise prohibited, excavation shall be carried out by blasting in the first instance and finally by chiselling to obtain the correct section of the trench as per drawings.
10.3.1 Filling the trenches for pipes, cables, etc shall be commenced immediately after the joints of pipes, etc, are tested and passed. -Where the trenches are excavated in soil, the filling shall be done with earth on the sides and top of pipes in layers not exceeding 20 cm, watered, rammed and consolidated ensuring that the pipes are not damaged. In case of excavation of trenches in rock the filling up to a depth~of 30 cm above the crown of the pipe, shall be done with fine material such as earth, murrum or pulverized decomposed rock as available. The remaining depth shall be done with rock filling or boulders of size not exceeding 15 cm mixed with fine material as available to fill up the voids; and then watered, rammed and consolidated in layers not exceeding 30 cm. 11 SHORING AND TIMBERING
10 EXCAVATION IN TRENCHES CABLES, ETC, AND REFILLING
FOR PIPES,
10.1 General
11.1 All trenches exceeding 2.0 m in depth shall be securely shored and timbered as determined by the Engineer-in-charge.
Excavation not exceeding 1.5 m in width or 10 m2 in plan to any depth in trenches shall Abe described as trenches for pipes, cables, etc. Returning, filling and ramming (after pipes and cables are laid) and removal of surplus soil shaM form part of this work.
NOTES
1 The above requirementsdo not apply in cases where the sides of the trenches are sloped to within 1.5m of the bottom. The slope that is provided for such purposes shall be inspected and declared as stable.
10.2 Width of Trench a) For depth up to 1 m, fhe width of the trench shall be arrived at by adding 25 cm to the external diameter of the pipe (not socket), cable, conduit, etc. When the pipe is laid on a concrete bed/cushioning layer, the width shall be pipe diameter plus 25 cm or the width of concrete bed/cushioning layer whichever is more. b) For depths exceeding 1 m, an additional width of 5 cm/m depth for each side of trench shall be taken to arrive at the width, that is, external diameter of pipe + 25 cm + 2 x 5 cm. This shall apply to the entire depth of trench. c) When more than one pipe, cable, conduit are laid, the diameter to be taken shall be the horizontal distance from outside to outside of outermost pipe, cable, conduit, etc.
2 Notwithstanding anything said above, it shall be understood that the need for shoring is a matter which shall receive careful consideration even in trenches less than 2.0 m of depth where there is a doubt as to the safety of work.
11.2 Where sides of trenches are sloped (see Note 1 of 11.1) the vertical sides shall be shored and the shoring shall extend at least 30 cm above the vertical sides. When open spaced sheathing is provided, a toe board shall be provided to prevent material rolling down the slope and falling into the part of the trench with vertical walls. 11.3 Shoring and timbering shall be carried out along with the opening of a trench but when conditions permit protection of work, such as sheet piling may be done before the excavation commences. 11.4 Approved quality of SAL wood shall be used for shoring and timbering a trench. Any other structural material having strength not less than that of SAL may be used for the purpose (see IS 883 : 1970). The stress values of species for design of members shall be taken as 2/3 of the values given in Table 2 of IS 883 : 1970.
10.3 Filling Normally excavated earth shall be used for filling. In case such earth contains deleterious salts, it shall not be used. All clods of earth shall be broken or removed. Where excavated material is mostly rock, the boulders shall be broken into pieces not bigger than 15 cm in any direction and be mixed with fine materials of decomposed rock, murrum or earth as available so as to fill up the voids as far as possible; this shall be used for filling.
11.5 Erection of Shoring and Timbering Provisions detailed as in 11.5.1 to 11.5.4 shall be followed while erecting shoring and timbering (see Fig. 2.2).
16
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 CLOSE PLANKING WITH
VERTICAL
AND POLING
STRUTTING BOARD ING BOARD
PLANKING SHALLOW
250x30
AND WIDE
STRUTTING EXCAVATION
FOR
rWALING
OPEN
PLANKING
AND
STRUTTING
CLOSE WITH
PLANKING LONGITUDINAL
AND
STRUTTING
POLING
BOARD
FIG. 2.2 CLOSE AND OPEN PLANKINGAND STRUI-I-ING 11.5.1 Sheathing
supporting the pieces of sheathing next above it. The pieces of sheathing shall be firmly driven into the soil and securely supported by wales and struts as the trench is made deeper.
The sheathing shall be placed against the side of the trench so that the length of each piece of sheathing is vertical. The sheathing shall be held securely in place against the wall of the trench by wales. Where the trench is excavated in loose, sandy or soft soil or soil which has been previously excavated or soil which is under hydrostatic pressure, each piece of sheathing shall be driven into the bottom of the trench so as to be firmly held in place.
11.5.2 Wales Wales shall be parallel to the bottom or proposed bottom of the trench. Each wale shall be supported on cleats spiked to the sheathing or by posts set on the wale next below it and in the case of lowest wale on the bottom of the trench itself. Where necessary, wedges may be provided between a wale and the sheathing it supports so that rightly uniform support is given to all individual pieces of sheathing.
Where two or more pieces of sheathing are used one above the other, the sheathing shall be so arranged that the lower pieces of sheathing overlap the lowest wales 17
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 11.5.3 Struts. Struts shall be horizontal and at right angles to the wales or sheathing supported thereby. Struts shall be cut to the proper length required to fit in tightly between the wales. Where necessary, the struts shall be held securely in place by wedges, driven between struts and the wales. 11.5.4 Struts shall be placed on cleats spiked or bolted to posts supporting wales. 11.6 Sizes and Spacing of Members 11.6.1 The sizes and spacing of sheathing, wales and struts used for shoring and timbering for different trenches shall be as given in Tables 2.1 to 2.4. Table 2.1 for~hard soil, Table 2.2 for soil which may crack or crumble, Table 2.3 for loose sandy or soft soil which has been previously excavated and Table 2.4 for soil under hydro-static pressure. Where the section of the wale or strut is rectangular, the longer side shall be kept vertical. Where distinctly different types of strata encountered, each strata shall be treated separately as is required by its characteristics. 11.6.2 Where a wedge is used in shoring and timbering of a trench, the thick end of the wedge shall be at least 5 cm wide. 11.7 Removal of timber members shall be done carefully to prevent collapse of the trench. 12 EXCAVATION POSITION
IN MUD, WATER OR FOUL
12.1 When water is met with in excavation due to stream flow, seepage, springs, rain or other reasons, adequate measures shall be taken to bail out water by pumping or other means to keep the foundation trench dry. Excavation shall be done within shored and timbered area in a similar manner. 12.2 Trial pits shall be dug in the area where excavation is required to be done. The steady water level in the trial pits, before the pumping operation is started, shall be considered as the subsoil water level in that area. 13 FILLING IN TRENCHES, ETC
In case of filling under floors, the finished level of the filling shall be kept to the slope to be given to the floor. 14 SAND FILLING IN PLINTH 14.1 Sand shall conform to grading zone V or IV, and it shall be free from dust, organic and foreign matter (see Chapter 4). 14.2 Sand filling shall be done in a manner similar to earth filling in plinths as specified in 13, except that consolidation shall be done by flooding with water. The surface of the consolidated sand shall be dressed to the level or slope required. 15 SURFACE DRESSING 15.1 Surface dressing shall include removal of vegetation, cutting and filling up to depth of 1.5cm and dressing the area. 15.2 Dressing High portions of groundshall be cut down and hollows and depressions filled up to the required level with the excavated earth so as-to give an even, neat and tidy look to the site. 16 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT (CHEMICAL TREATMENT) 16.1 General Termites are divided into two types on the basis of their habitat, namely (a) Subterannean or ground-nesting termites, and (b) Non-subterranean or wood-nesting termites having no contact with soil. The former are more destructive. Treating the soil with chemicals beneath the building and around the foundation with a chemical soil insecticide is a good preveative measure. The purpose of the treatment is to create a chemical barrier between the ground and woodwork. Of course, timber used in the building shall be natural, durable, heartwood, treated and seasoned. Anti-termite treatment can also be given, through constructional measures, to existing buildings. These are covered elsewhere (see Chapter 6). 16.2 Site Preparation 16.2.1 Remove trees, stumps, logs or roots which may be harbouring the termites.
UNDER FLOORS,
16.2.2 On clays and other heavy soils where penetration is likely to be slow and on sloping sites where run off of the treating solution is likely to occur, the surface of the soil should be scarified to a depth of at least 75 mm.
13.1 Earth used for filling shall be free from stone, shingle or boulder not larger than 75 mm in any direction; it shall also be free from salts, organic matter or other foreign matter.
16.2.3 On loose and porous or sandy soils where loss of treating solution through piping or excessive percolation is likely to occur, preliminary moistening to fill capillary spaces in the soil is recommended.
13.2 In trenches the space around the foundations, pipes, drains, etc, shall be cleared of all debris, brickbats, etc. The filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 20 cm in each layer. Each layer must be watered and rammed for consolidation.
16.2.4 All subfloor levelling and grading shall be completed. All cuttings, trenches and excavations 18
c
-w-___
._.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 should be completed with backfilling in place. Borrowed earth fill must be free from organic debris and should be well compacted.
16.2.5 All framework, levelling pegs, timber offcuts or other builders’ debris should be removed from the area to be treated.
Table 2.1 Hard Soil (Clause 11.6.1) Item No.
Depth
Wales
Sheathing
Strut
Gf Trench
SHorTEln- S:ctionm Cd Veal-
ta1Spacing,
Spacing,
MUX
MU m (1)
(2)
cmxcm (3)
Width of Width of Trench Trench not more Between Than 2 m 2 m and 4m cmxcm
m
IT,
(9)
( I())
I.5
3
ISX IS
I .s
3
In
mix cm
m
(41
(5)
(61
(7)
I .s
10 x 1s
IOX
cm x cm
(8) 15
I
Over 2 but not over 3
5x20
2
15X15
2
Over 3 but not over 5
5x20
.s
15x1s
3
10x
3
Over 5 but not over 6.5
5x20
I
20x20
5
15x 1s
ISX IS
I.5
3
4
Over 6.5 but not over 8
5x I.5
W idth of member
25x25
l.S
15x20
20x20
1.5
3
5
Over 8 but not over 10
8x20
Width of member
20x30
1.5
20x20
20x25
1.s
3
1s
Table 2.2 Soil which may Crack or Crumble (Clause 11.61) Item No.
Wales
Sheathing
Depth of Trench I Section
A
1 Horizon-
tal Spa-
(1)
Struts h
6 Section
Cal
cing,
Spac-
MUX
iw, MUX
Width of Width of Trench Trench not More Between Than 2 m 2 m and 4m
. Spacing-
Cal
zontal
cm X cm
nl
m
(8)
(9)
Cl())
-
I.5
3
In
cmxcm
m
cm xcm
m
(2)
(3
(4)
0)
(6)
(7)
I.5
IOX IS
I .s
10x10
1
15x 1.5
I.5
IOX IO
IS x IS
I.5
3
1s x 20
.s
IOX IS
15x IS
I .s
3
cmxcm
I
Over I .S but not over 2.5
5x20
2
Over 2.5 but not over 3
5 x 20
3
Over 3 but not over 5
5x20
0.5
4
Over 5 but not over 6.5
8X15
Width of member
20x2s
3
15x 1s
20x20
I .s
3
5
Over 6.5 but not over 8
8X IS
Width of member
25x2s
.s
1.x220
20x20
I .s
3
6
Over 8 but not over IO
8X20
Width of member
20x30
1.5
20x20
20x2s
1.S
3
19
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Table 2.3 -Loose Sandy or Soft Soil (Clause 11.6.1) Item No.
Sheathing
Depth of Trench
struts
Wales
Section
Section
Horizontai Spacing, Max-
Verti-
Width ---YzFof
Cd
Trench not More Than2m
Spacing.
MUX (1)
I
A
, Section Width of Trench
. Spacing Horizontal
Cd
Between 2mand 4m
m
cmxcm
m
m
m
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
5x20
0.4
10x 15
I.5
IOX IO
IOX 1s
1.5
3
Over 1.5but
cmxcm
m
cmxcm
cmxcm
not over 2.5 2
Over 2.5 but not over 3
5x
I5
Width of member
15x20
1
IOX I5
15 x I5
I
3
3
Over 3 but not over 5
5x
I5
Width of member
20x20
I.5
15x I.5
I5 x I5
I.5
3
4
Over 5 but not over 6.5
5x
IS
Width of member
20x25
1.5
15x I5
15x20
I.5
3
5
Over 6.5 but not over 8
8x20
Width of member
20x25
I.5
IS x 20
20x20
I .s
3
6
Over 8 but not over 10
8x20
Width of member
25x25
1.5
20x20
20x20
1.5
3
Table 2.4 Soil Under Hydro-Static (Clause 11.6. I) Item No.
Depth of Trench
Sheathing
Pressure
struts
Wales
1
A
t
Horizontal Spacing.
Section
VertiCd
Spac-
MUX
ing,
-Width of Trench not More Than 2 m
MU (1)
I
Section
*
c Section
m
A
f
Spacing
Width of Trench
Vertical
Horizontal
Between 2 m and 4m
“1
cm x cm
m
m
m
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Over I .Sbut not over 2.5
5x I5
Width of member
15x20
I.5
IOX IO
I5 x I5
I.5
3
Over 2.5 but not over 3
5x
Width of member
15x25
I
IOX I5
15x I.5
I.5
3
Over 3 but not over 5
8x20
Width of member
25x25
1.25
15x IS
15x I5
1.25
3
Over 5 but not over 6.5
8X20
Width of member
25x30
1.25
20x20
20x20
I .25
3
Over 6.5 but
10x20
Width of member
25x35
20x20
20x25
I
3
10x20
Width of
35x35
20x25
25 x 25
I
3
(2)
cmxcm
IS
not over 8 Over 8 but not over 10
member
20
cmxcm
cmxcm
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 16.3 Treatment
Beneath the Building
For treating soils beneath a building, chemicals are effective: Ll>
b) Cl
the following
concentrate 0.5 Heptachlor emulsifiable percent by weight (see IS 6439 : 1978); Chlordane emulsifiable concentrate 1.O percent by weight (see IS 2682 : 1984); Chlorpyrifos emulsifiable concentrate, 1.Opercent by weight (see IS 8944 : 1978).
NOTES 1 These chemicals are to be regarded as POISONS. They can have adverse effect on health when absorbed through skin, inhaled as vapours or spraymists or swallowed. Therefore, they most he safely handled [see Appendix B of IS 6313 (Part 2) : 19XIj. These chemicals should not be used where there is a risk ol’ walls or other water supplies being contaminated. The Authority concerned shall be consulted. 2 Aldrin has heen banned by Government of India. Before use of these chemicals latest recommendations of Central Insecticide Board and Registration Committee, Ministry of Agriculture, Faridahad should be referred.
16.3.1 Where there are mounds of termites within the excavated area, these chemicals shall be poured into the mounds of several places after breaking them. The quantity used shall be related to the size of the mound. For a mound of about lcm3, 4 1 of the emulsion of one of the chemicals may be used, namely, 0.25 0.5
percent Heptachlor emulsifiable concentrate. percent Chlordane emulsifiable concentrate.
16.4 Time of Application Soil treatment should start when foundation trenches and pits are ready to take mass concrete in foundations. Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or when the soil is wet. This also applies to filled up soil within the plinth area before laying the subgrade for the floor. 16.5 Treatment Basements
of Masonry
Foundations
and
16.5.1 The bottom surface and sides (up to about 30 cm) of the excavations made for necessary foundations and basements shall be treated with the chemical at the rate of 5 l/m2 of surface area. 16.5.2 After the masonry foundations and retaining wall come up, the backfill in immediate contact with the foundation shall be treated with the chemical at the rate of 7.5 l/m” of the vertical surface of the sub-structure for each side. If water is used for ramming the earth fill, the chemical treatment shall be carried out after the ramming operation is done. For this rodding of earth close to the wall at 15 cm centres shall be done and working the rod backwards and forward parallel to the wall before applying the chemical emulsion.
chemical emulsion shall be directed towards the masonry surfaces in contact with the earth. All foundations shall be fully surrounded by and in close con- , tact with the chemicals treated soil barrier (see Fig._2.3 and Fig. 2.4). 16.6 Treatment of RCC Foundations Basements
and
The treatment of masonry foundations was necessary because of the voids in joints through which the termites are able to seekentry into the building. However in RCC foundations there are no such voids for the termites to penetrate. It is therefore unnecessary to start the treatment of RCC foundations from the bottom. The treatment may be started at SO0 mm below ground level except when the level is raised or lowered by filling after the foundations have been cast. In such a case the depth of soil level shall be determined from the new ground level. The soil in the immediate contact with RCC shall be treated with 7.5 l/m2 of the chemical. The other details are as in Fig. 2.5. 16.7 Treatment of Top Surface of Plinth Filling 16.7.1 The top surface of the consolidated earth within plinth walls shall be treated with chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 l/m2 of the surface before the sandbed or sub-grade is laid.’ If the. filled bed is rammed and the surface does not allow the emulsion to seep through, holes up to SO mm to 75 mm deep at 150 mm centres both ways may be made with I2 mm steel rod to facilitate saturation of the soil with chemicals. 16.8 Treatment Floor
at Junction
of the Wall and the
Special care shall be taken to establish continuity of the vertical chemical barrier on the inner wall surfaces from ground level (or other level) up to the level of the filled earth surface. To do this, a small channel 30 mm x 30 mm shall be made at all the junctions of wall 01 columns with the floor (before laying sub-grade) and rod holes made in the channel up to the ground level 150 mm apart; the rod shall be moved backward and forward to break up the earth and then the chemical emulsion be poured along the channel at a rate of 7.5 l/m2 of the vertical wall or column. This would perLmitthe soil to be soaked right down to the bottom. The soil should be tamped back into place after the operation. 16.9 Treatment of the Building
of Soil Along External Perimeter
After the building is complete, the earth along the external perimeter of building shall be rodded at intervals of 150 mm to a depth of 300 mm. The rod should be moved backward and forward parallel to the wall to break up the earth and the chemical emulsion be poured along the water at the rate of 7.5 l/m2 of the
The earth fill is done in layers and the chemical treatment shall be carried out for each layer. After the treatment the earth should be tamped in place. The 21
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 vertical surfaces in contact with earth. After the treatment the earth should be tamped back into place. If the earth outside the building is gradedthe treatment should be carried out on completion of grading.
of termites through~voids in masonry, cracks, etc. The soil retained by the walls shall be treated with the chemical emulsion at the rate of 7.5 l/m2 of the vertical surface in contact with the soil. This barrier should be in continuation of the barrier upto the plinth level.
In the event of the filling being more than 300 mm, the external perimeter treatment shall extend to the full depth of filling down to the ground level so as to ensure continuity of the chemical barrier. 16.10 Treatment of Soil Apron Perimeter of Building
Along
of Walls Retaining
Soil Above
Retaining walls like basement walls or outer wall above the floor level retaining soil need to be protected by providing a chemical barrier so as to prevent entry
of Soil Surrounding
Pipes,
When pipes, conduits, enter the soil inside the area of the foundations, the soil surrounding each point of entry should be treated. For this the soil shall be loosened for a distance of 150 mm and depth of 75 mm and then the treatment should be commenced at the same rate as the foundation soil. When the pipes enter the soil external to the foundation they shall be similarly treated for a distance of 300 mm unless they are clear of the-walls by about 7.5 mm.
External
The top surface of the consolidated earth over which the apron is to be laid shall be treated with chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 l/m2 of the surface before the apron is laid. If the consolidated earth does not allow the emulsion to seep through, holes up to 50 mm to 75 mm deepat 150 mm centres bothways may be made with 12 mm dia rod, on the surface to facilitate saturation of the soil with the chemical emulsion (see Fig. 2.4). 16.11 Treatment Ground Level
16.12 Treatment Conduits, etc
16.13 Treatment
of Expansion
Joints
Expansion joints at ground level are one of the worst hazards for termite infestation. The soil beneath these joints should receive special attention when treatment under 16.6 for plinth filling is being carried out. This treatment should be supplimented by treating the expansion joint after the sub-grade has been laid, at the rate of 2 litres per linear me&e. /-
/A’:..‘_:‘;1
FLOOR
L
FINISH
PLINTH
FILLING
Stages of Treatment A = Bottom and sides of
trenches B = Backfillin immediatecontactwithmasonryfoundation C = Junctionof wall andfloor D = Topsurfaceof plinthfilling E = External perimeter of building
FIG. 2.3 TREATMENTFORMASONRYFOUNDATIONSWITHOUTAPRON
22
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
ED/
ETC.
GR
Stages of Treatment A = Bottom and sidesof trenches
B = Backfillin immediatecontactwith masonryfoundation C = Junctionof wall and floor D = Top surface of plinth filling E= External perimeter of building F = Soil below apron
FIG. 2.4 TREATMENTFORMASONRYFOUNDATIONS.WITH APRON ALONG EXTERNALPERIMETER
23
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 r
FLOOR
FINISH
FLOOR BASE CONCRETE I
SAND 6ED/ SOLING
GROUND
ETC.
LEVEL
PLINTH
Stages of Treatment A = Backfill in immediate contact with RCC foundation
B = Junction of wall and floor C = Top surface of plinth filling
D = Externalperimeterof building FIG. 2.5 TREATMENTFORRCC FOUNDATIONS
24
FILLING
CHAPTER3 FOUNDATIONS
.
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL 1. I 1.2 1.3 1.4
Pre-construction Drainage Setting Out Protection of Excavation
2 TYPESOF FOUNDATIONS 2.1 Shallow Foundations 2.2 Deep Foundations 2.3 Foundations for Special Structures 3 CONSTRUCTION OFFOUNDATIONS 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Shallow Foundations Pile Foundatiops Under-Reamed Foundations Precast Piles
3.5 Cast in-situ Piles 3.6 Timber Piles 3.7 Load Test on Piles 4 MACHINEFOUNDATIONS 4. I General 4.2 Criteria for Construction 5 MISCELLANEOUS 6 SPECIALSTRUCTURES ANNEXA-INFORMATIONONCHOICEAND CHARACTERISTICS OFCERTAIN TYPESOFFOUNDATIONS ANNEXB-GUIDELINESFORGROUNDIMPROVEMENT FOR FOUNDATIONSIN WEAK SOILS
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
CHAPTER 3
FOUNDATIONS 1 GENERAL
Alternatively, the bottom of the excavation shall be protected immediately by 8 cm thick layer of cement concrete not leaner than mix 15: 10; the foundation concrete should then be placed on this. Or in order to obtain a dry hard bottom, the last stretch of excavation of about 10 cm shall be removed just before concreting. d) The refilling of excavation shall be done with care so as not to disturb the just constructed foundation. The backfill should be carried out evenly on both sides of the wall. The fill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 20 cm thick, with sprinkling of just enough water necessary for proper compaction.
1.1 Pre-construction After the excavation is done, as per Chapter 2, construction of foundations should be undertaken. However, certain pre-construction activities should be completed before commencement of work. These are described below. 1.2
Drainage
If the site of the building is such that water would drain towards it, land may be dressed or drains laid to divert the water away from the site. 1.3 Setting Out 1.3.1 Generally the site shall be levelled before the layout of foundations are set out. In case of sloping terrain, care shall be taken to ensure that the dimensions should be set out with theodolites in case of important and intricate structures where the length of site exceeds 16 m. In other cases these should be set out by measurement of sides. In rectangular or square setting out, diagonals shall be checked to ensure accuracy. The setting out of wall shall be facilitated by permanent row of pillars, parallel to and at a suitable distance beyond the periphery of the building. The pillars shall be located at junctions of cross walls with the peripheral line of pillars. The centre lines of the cross walls shall be extended and permanently connected to the tops of corresponding pillars. The datum lines parallel to and at a known distance fixed from the centre lines of external walls, should also bepermanently set on the rows of pillars to serve as checks on the accuracy of the work as it proceeds.
2 TYPES OF FOUNDATIONS 2.1 Shallow Foundations These cover such types of foundations in which load transfer is primarily through shear reistance to the soil and are normally laid to a depth of 3 m. 2.1.1 The various types of shallow foundations under: a) b) c) d)
b) a
cl
Spread or Pad (see IS 1080 : 1986), Strip (see IS 1080 : 1986), Raft [see IS 2950 (Part I) : 198 I], and Ring land Shell (see IS 11089 : 1984 and IS 9456 : 1980).
2.2 Deep Foundations These foundations ark generally in the form of piles, caissons, diaphragm walls, used separately or in combination to transmit the loads to a deeper load bearing strata. The transfer of load may be through friction, end bearing or a combination of both. 2.2.1 The various types of deep foundations are as under: a) Pile Foundations 1) Driven cast in-situ - see IS 29 11 (Part l/Set 1) : 1979 2) Bored cast in-situ - see IS 2911 (Part l/Set 2) : 1979 3) Driven precast - see IS 291 l(Part l/Set 3) : 1979 4) Bored precast - see IS 291 l(Part l/Set 4) : 1984 5) Timber - see IS 291 l(Part 2) : 1980 6) Under-reamed - see IS 2911 (Part 3) : 1980 b) Diaphram Walls - see IS 9556 : 1980 c) Combined Foundations-Two or more of the above.
The tops of pillars shall be at the same level and preferably at plinth or floor level. The pillars shall be of sizes not less than one brick wide and shall be embedded sufficiently deep into the ground so that they are not disturbed. 1.4 Protection
are as
of Excavation
Protection of excavation during construction of shoring, timbering, ~dewatering operations, etc, shall be ensured. After excavation, the bottom of the trench shall be cleared of loose soil and rubbish and shall be levelled, where necessary. Excavations, in clay or other soils, that are likely to be effected by exposure of atmosphere, shall be concreted as soon they are dug. 27
‘.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.3 Foundations
for Special Structures
These include foundations
b) Steel--Reinforcement
steel shall conform to IS 432 (Part 1) : 1982; or IS 1786 : 1985; OI IS 2062 : 1992.
for machines, towers, etc.
2.3.1 Machine foundations are subject to vibrations. Manufacturer’s instructions, if any, may be followed. Indian Standards cover machinery foundations for Reciprocating type [see IS 2974 (Part 1) : 19821; Impact type [see IS 2974 (Part 2) : 19801; Rotary type [see IS 2974 (Part 3) : 1992 and IS 2974 (Part 4) : 19791; Impact type (other than Hammer) [see IS 2974 (Part 5) : 19871.
cl
Tower foundations are covered by IS 4091 : 1979 for steel towers and by IS 11233 : 1985 for Radar, Antenna? Microwave and TV towers. 3 CONSTRUCTION
OF FOUNDATIONS
3.1 Shallow Foundations In shallow foundations, generally, masonry and/or concrete, plain and reinforced, are used. The procedure for masonry and concrete foundations shall be the same as described in masonry and concrete work (see Chapters 4 and 5). 3.2 Pile Foundations Under-reamed piles, though listed under deep foundations also are used for foundations up to 3 m depth. 3.3 Under-Reamed
Foundations
Under-reamed piles are of bored cast in-situ and bored compaction concrete types having one or more bulbs formed by suitably enlarging the bore hole of the pile stem. With the provision of bulbs, substantial bearing or anchorage is available. These piles find application in widely varying situations in different types of soils where foundations are recluired to be taken to a certain depth in view of considerations like the need a ) to avoid the undesirable effect of seasonal moisture content changes as in expansive soils; b) to reach firm strata; c) to obtain adequate capacity for downward, upward and lateral loads and moments; and d) to take the foundations below scour level. Under-reamed piles may also be used in situations where vibration and noise caused during construction of piles are to be avoided.
For under-reamed bored compaction piles, the reinforcement cage shall be prepared by welding the hoop bars to withstand the stresses during compaction process. Concrete 1) Consistency of concrete for cast in-situ piles shall be suitable to the method of installation of piles. 2) Concrete shall be so designed or chosen as to have a homogeneous mix. 3) Slump of concrete shall range between 100 mm and 150 mm for concreting in water-free unlined bore holes. For concreting by tremie, a slump of 150 mm to 200 mm shall be used. In case of tremie concreting ~of piles of 4) smaller diameter and depth up to IO m, the minimum cement content should be 350 kg/m” of concrete. For piles of larger diameter and/or deeper piles, the minimum cement content should be 400 kg/m’ of concrete.
In case the piles are subsequently exposed to water or in case piling is done under water or drilling mud is used in methods other than tremie, 10 percent extra cement shall be used over and above that required for the grade of concrete at specified slump. For making concrete, aggregate as described in IS 456 : 1978 shall be used. For tremie concreting; aggregates having nominal size more than 20 mm should not be used. For bored compaction piles Rapid Hardening to IS 8041:1990 shall not~be used.
Cement
3.3.2 Equipment Normally the equipment required for manual operations are: a) auger; b) under-reamer; c) boring guide; and d) accesories. For piles of deeper and larger size greater than 30 cm and a portable tripod hoist with manually operated winch is required.
The provision of bulbs is of advantage in underreamed piles to resist uplift as they can be used as anchors; increased bearing surface also becomes available.
For piles in high ground water table and unstable soil conditions, boring and under-reaming shall be carried out using suitable equipment. Tremie pipe shall ‘be used for concreting.
3.3.1 Materials a) Cement-The cement used shall conform to the requirements of IS 269 : 1989 or IS 455 : 1989 or IS 804 1 : 1990 or IS 6909 : 1990 or IS 1489 (Parts 1 and2) : 199 1; or IS 12269 : 1987.
For compact piles, the additional equipment required are drop weight for driving the core assembly and pipe or solid core. 28
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 3.3.3
bore hole. Care shall be taken that soil is not scrapped from sides if rodding is done for compaction. Vibrators shall not be used.
Construction
Bore holes may be made by earth augers. In :ase of manual boring, an auger bohng guide In multi-under-reamed piles, the boring is first completed to the depth required for the first (top) bulb only and after completing underreaming bulb, the boring is extended further down to the second bulb and so on. h) The piles shall be installed as correctly as possible, both at the correct location and truly vertical (or at the specified batter). Piles shall not deviate by more than 75 mm or one quarter the stem diameter whichever is less; for piles of diameter more than 600 mm, the deviation may be 75 mm or 10 percent of the stem diameter. j> Concreting shall be done as soon as possible after completing the bore. The bore hole full of drilling mud should be concreted between 12 to 24 h depending on the stability of the hole. k) The method of concreting should be such that the entire volume of the pile bore is filled up without formation of voids and/or mixing of soil and drilling fluid in the concrete. For placing concrete in pile bores, funnel should be
a)
If the subsoil water level is confined to the bucket length portion at the toe, the seepage is low and the water should be bailed out before commencing concreting. In case the pile bore is stabilized with drilling mud or by maintaining water head-within the bore hole, the bottom of bore hole shall be carefully cleaned by flushing it with fresh drilling mud and the pile bore be checked before concreting. Concreting shall be done by the tremie method. The tremie should have a valve at the bottom and lowered with the valve closed at the start and filled up with concrete. The valve is then opened to permit concrete which permits the upward displacement of drilling mud. The pouring should be continuous and the tremie is gradually lifted up such that the pipe opening remains always in the concrete. In the final stage the quantity of concrete shall be enough so that on the final withdrawal some concrete spills on the ground (see Notes I to 5). NOTES 1 All tremie tubes should be cleaned hefore and after ttse. 2 The tremie pipe should always penetrate well into the concrete with an adequate margin of safety against withdrawal of the pipe. 3 The tremie method shall not be changed for a given pile, to prevent the laitance from being entrapped in the pile. 4 In the case of withdrawal of a pile accidentally or to remove a choke, the tremie may be reintroduced in a manner to prevent fragmentation of laitance or scmlt lying on the top of the concrete deposited already in the bore. 5 In the exceptional case of interruption of concreting which can he resumed in one or two hours, the tremie shall not be taken out of concrete. Instead it shall be raised or lowered slowly, from time to time, to prevent the concrete around the tremie from setting. Concreting should be resumed by introducing a little richer mix of concrete with a slump of about 200 mm for easy displacement of the partly set concrete. If the concreting cannot be resumed before the final set of concrete, the pile may be rejected or used with modifications.
m>In 4
used.
In the empty bore holes for under-reamed piles a small quantity of concrete is poured to give about a 100 mm layer of concrete at the bottom. Reinforcement is lowered next and positioned correctly. The concrete is poured to fill the
29
inclined piles, concreting should be done through a chute or by tremie method. A bored compaction pile is one in which the compaction of surrounding ground as well as fresh concrete in the bore is simultaneously accomplished. In under-reamed bore compaction piles, the pile shall be filled up with concrete, without placing reinforcement. Immediately, the core assembly shall be driven
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 and extra concrete shall be poured in simultaneously to keep the level of concrete up to ground level. If a hollow driving pump is used in core assembly, the pipe shall be withdrawn after filling it with fresh concrete.
binding wire, the free ends of which should be turned into the interior of the pile. The longitudinal bars may be held apart by temporary or permanent spreader forks not more than 1.5 m apart. The reinforcement shall be checked for tightness and position immediately before concreting. After casting the piles, they shall be stored as described in Chapter 1. Bored precast piles shall be .constructed by suitable choice of boring and installation techniques depending on detailed information about the subsoil conditions. The bottom end of the pile shall have proper arrangements for cleaning and grouting.
In these compaction piles it shall be ensured that concreting should be done uninterruptedly. Accidental withdrawal should be completely avoided. P) The top of the concrete pile shall be brought above the cut-off level to permit removal of all laitance and weak concrete before capping and to ensure good concrete at the cut-off level for proper embedment into the pile cap. 9) Where cut-off level is less than 1.5 m below working level, concrete shall be cast to minimum of 300 mm above cut-off level, for every excess of 0.3 m over 1.5 m, additional of 50 mm shall be cast over and above 300 mm. When tremie method is employed, it shall be cast to the piling platform level to permit overflow of concrete for visual inspection or to a minimum of 1 m above cut-off level.
g)
When the cut-off level is below the ground water level, there is a need to maintain a pressure on the unset concrete equal to or greater than the water-pressure and a length of extra concrete above the cut-off level may be permitted to provide this. When defective piles are formed, they shall be r) removed or left in place whichever is convenient, without effecting the performance of adjacent piles or the cap as a whole.
h)
Any deviation beyond permissible limits from the designed location, alignment or load capacity of any pile shall be noted and adequate measures be taken well before the concreting of the pile cap and plinth beam.
3.4.2 Driven Precast Piles
The pile should project 50 mm into the cap concrete.
Driven precast piles transmit the load of the structure by resistance developed either at the tip or by end bearing or along the shaft by friction or by both. They are cast in a yard and subsequently driven into the ground with or without jetting. These piles find wide application for structures, such as, wharves, jetties, etc, or where conditions are unfavourable for use of cast in-situ piles.
3.4 Precast Piles 3.4.1 Bored Precut
Piles
Bored precast concrete piles are constructed in a casting yard and subsequently lowered into prebored holes and the space grouted.
a) As far as possible, in-situ extensions shall be
b)
a ) Pile foundations shall be designed in such a way that the load of supports can be transmitted to the soil without any soil failure and without causing settlement as may result in structural damage. It shall withstand all loads (vertical, axial, or otherwise) and moments to be transmitted to the soil. b) When working near existing structures care shall be taken to avoid damage to such struc-
avoided. The casting yard should be well drained. As far as possible, longitudinal reinforcement shall be in one length. In case joints are needed, they should be staggered. The hoops and links for reinforcement shall fit tightly against the longitudinal bars and be bound to them by welding or by tying with
c>
4
Piles shall be installed as vertically as possible according to the drawings, or to the specified batter. The deviation from specified alignment shall be as permitted for under-reamed piles in 3.3. Cement and sand (1 : 2) grout mixed with water in a high speed colloidal mixer is fed to the pile with grout pump of suitable capacity to the central duct through a manifold. Temporary casing used here shall be removed in stages with the rise of level of grout. The grout should be levelled off at the top. The strength of the grout shall be at least equal to the strength of the surrounding soil. Where a pile is to have another length cast on to it before or during placing, the longitudinal reinforcement should be welded with full penetration butt welding, after the concrete at the top of the pile should be cut-off to expose not less than 200 mm of the bars. Bars may be lapped if it is not possible to undertake butt welding with an overlap of 40 times the dia of bar.
30
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 3)
tures. In case of deep excavations adjacent to piles, proper shoring or other suitable arrangements be provided against lateral movement of soil stratum or releasing the confined soil stress. [For guidance, see IS 2974 (Part 1) : 1982 for effect of vibrations due to reciprocating machines.] The casting yard for all concrete piles shall be so arranged that they can be lifted directly into the piling area. The yard shall have a well drained surface to prevent excessive or uneven settlement during manufacturing and curing. As far as possible longitudional reinforcement shall be in one length. In case joints are needed they shall be buttwelded and staggered. The hoops and links reinforcement shall fit tightly against the longitudional bar and bound to them by mild steel wire or by welding. The bars may be held apart by spreader forks not more than 1.5 m apart. The reinforcement shall be checked for tightness and position before concreting. After casting the piles, it shall be cured and stored as described in Chapter 1. The piles may be driven by any type of hammer, provided they penetrate to the prescribed depth or attain the specific resistance without being damaged. Any change in the rate of penetration which cannot be ascribed to normal changes in the nature of the ground should be noted and cause ascertained if possible before driving is continued. The head of the precast pile should be protected with packing of resilient material. Piles should be installed as accurately as possible in a pile group. The sequence of installation of ~piles shall be from centre to the periphery of the group or one side to the other. For details of manufacture of piles, pile driving, etc, reference may be made to IS 2911 (Part l/Set 3) : 1979.
Single or double-acting hammer A hammer operated by steam or compressed air; 4) Kentledge - Dead weight used for applying a test load to a pile; and 5) Pile rig - A fabricated movable steel frame. c) Construction 1) Concrete - The minimum slump should be 100 mm when the concrete in the pile is not compacted, and shall not in any case be more than 180 mm. 2) Control of alignment - Piles shall be installed as accurately as possible according to the drawings. Permitted deviations shall be as per 3.3.3. 3) Sequence of piling - In a pile group, the sequence of installation of piles shall normally be from centre to the periphery of the group.
c>
e)
h) j)
W
No adjacent pile should be driven until the concrete in the pile under construction has set; otherwise the pile may be damaged. The damage is greater in piles driven in compact soils than in loose soils. In loose sandy soils compaction will increase as the piles are driven. Thereforethe order of installing such a pile should be so chosenas to avoid creating a compacted block in the ground, which would prevent further piles being driven. Similarprecautions should~be taken in stiff clayey soils and compact sand layers; this can be done by driving the piles from centre outwards. However in very soft soils, the driving of piles should be from outside to centre, so that soil is prevented from floating out during driving of piles. The casing may be jetted out by means of water without impairing the bearing capacity of the pile, stability of the soil and safety of adjoining structure.
3.5 Cast in-situ Piles 3.5.1 Cast in-situ driven piles transmit load to the soil by resistance developed by the toe of the pile or by end bearing or by friction along their surface or by both. a) Materials - (see in 3.3.1) b) Equipment - Among the commonly used plants, tools and accessories, the suitability depends on subsoil conditions, manner of operation, etc. Some commonly used equipment are: 1) Dolly - A cushion of hardwood or suitable material placed on top of the casing to receive hammer blows; 2) Drop hummer Hammer (ram or monkey) raised by a winch and allowed to fall under gravity;
The cut-off level, formation dealt with as in 3.3.3.
of latiance, etc shall be
Defective piles shall be dealt with as in 3.3.3. 3.5.2 Bored Piles The bored cast in-situ piles, of less than 2 500 mm transmit the load to soil by resistance developed either at the tip by end bearing or along the shaft by friction or by both. a) Bored cast in-situ piles may be driven by suitable choice of installation techniques; the manner of soil stabilization, that is, using of casing and/or use of drilling mud; manner of concreting, etc. Sufficient information on sub31
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 SUll
I __._ I:*:-_c;uIIuItIuIls
1_ -_-_._r:_, 1s css~llllal
I_ .__.J_&___-t__ LO prcumx1111ne
.L_ Lilt:
details of installation techniques. b) Piles shall be installed as accurately as possible as per drawings. Great care shall be taken in installing single pile or a group of two piles. Any deviation from designed location, align~ment or load capacity of anypile shall be noted and adequate measures taken well before the ,fin,,.~t;+,, “I ,C the Ala n-n nnrl ,.l:nth I.\,,,L”llL.l5LLII& L11L p”G Lap a11u yrllrrrl “LXIIII. c)
A minimum length of I m of temporary casing shall be inserted in each bored~pile. Additional length of temporary casing may be used depending on the conditions of strata, ground water level, etc. Drilling mud of suitable con~i&=nr~, inat~arl ,f OLULV’,“, m~.r .,,UJ he “I IIEPFJ “Lll.8 I,*Ub”U” “1 tsvmnnrcan, cv”‘y”.Y’J
casings to stabilize sides of holes. For marine locations, the piles may be formed with permanent casing (liner). 4 In case the bored pile is stabilized by drilling mud or by maintaining water heads in the hole, the bottom of the hole shall be cleaned carefully before concreting work is taken up. Flushing of holes hefnre concretinp wit_h frer;h --_-_- ----------= drilling fluid/mud is preferred. e) The specific gravity of the drilling mud shall be consistent. For this periodic samples shall be taken and tested. Concreting shall not be taken up when the specific gravity is more than 1.2.
f)
Concreting shall be done by tremie method in all such cases. The slurry should be maintained at 1.5 m above ground water level if casing is not used. Concreting may be done by tremie method or by the use of specially designed underwater placer to permit deposition of concrete in suc~PCC~VP nermittinn the u lavera ‘C’J“I” rxrithmxt .v I...“YI y”‘L#“‘L”n~ %.I” rnnrretn ““IIWAW.Y “““Ul
.
to fall through free water. .g) Convenience of installation may be taken into account while determining the sequence of piling in a group. h) The top of concrete in a pile shall be brought above cut-off level to permit removal of laitance and weak concrete before capping and to ensure good concrete at the cut-off level for proper embedment into the pile cap. j) In case defective piles are formed, they shall be removed or left in place whicheveris convenient affecting the performance of the adjacent piles or the cap as a whole. Additional piles shall replace them. k) ‘Pneumatic tools shall not be used for chipping until seven days after pile casting. Manual chipping of pile top may be permitted after 3 days of casting the pile. m) After concreting the actual quantity of concrete shall be compared with the average obtained
A-.-__
tru1n
__r.__l
ilClUa1
_I___-..-.:_--
uc3su
valluIls
:_
Al__
111 Lilt:
--.__
cast:
-42 c-... Ul ICW
piles cast initially. If the quantity is found to be considerably less, special investigations shall be conducted and appropriate measures taken. 3.6 Timber Piles Timberpiles find extensive use for compaction of soils ,..,,,...L.., “,. ..,,11 _” p’“LeLL”1g ,..,.*,,*:..,. ..,.. +-.. and also L... I”, sup~“‘rUlg a5 WC“ aa W‘lLeIfront structures. The choice of use of timber piles shall be mainly governed by the site conditions, particularly water table conditions. They are comparatively light for their strength and are easily handled. However, they will not withstand as hard driving as steel or cn”,.rP*P tJJllti.7. n;1nr T;mha. hoc tn ha ralnrtd t.~n-caf,,llx, onA -A,ll,"Ul IILL.L" vu .Y~-l~b,l"Urcl,"‘u.,J LtInCI b”.lnrLti treated as durability andperformance would considerably depend upon the quality of the material and freedom from natural defects. 3.6.1 Class of Piles Depending upon the use, piles shall be classified Class A and Class B.
as
a>Class b)
A - For railway and highway bridges, trestles, docks and warehouses. The butt diameter or sides of square shall not be less than 30 cm. Class B - For foundation work other than specified in Class A and temporary work. Piles used for compaction of ground shall not be less than 100 mm in diameter or side in case of square piles.
3.6.2 Timber Species The species of timber shall conform to IS 3629 : 1986. The length of the individual pile shall be specified lmanth A. 4” Wl VI,, c-m fnr 13 m ad A A MI 11. lnntr ‘“I.& ..>I” -11, rm “1,. +n;rr A”, lrnothc &,d.‘&. . . .I ,“,,6L” L I”, I&
above 12 m. In case of round piles, the ratio of heartwood diameter to the pile butt diameter shall not be less than 0.8. Both the ends shall be sawn at right angles to the length of the pile and surface shall be made flush by trimming the knots and limbs. The timber shall be treated as per IS 401 : 1982 on timber preservation. 3.6.3 Control of Pile Driving
b)
The piles in each bent of a pile shall be selected for uniformity in size to facilitate placing of bracing members. The pile tip shall be pointed (unless driving is in wholly soft strata) in the form of truncated cone or a pyramid having the end 25 cm2 to 40 cn? in area and the length shall be 11 to 2 times the diameter or side of a square. is to be done in hard material such as stiff clay, gravels, etc, metal shoes of approved design shall be attached to the tip.
c>If the driving
32
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 To prevent splitting and reduce brooming, the read of the pile should be hooped with a suitable ring or wrapped with wires. The heads )f piles shall be further protected by the Errovision of cushion blocks. e) I f the piles are required to be formed from two rr more lengths, the butting surfaces shall be :ut square to ensure contact over the whole :ross section of the pile. A thin steel plate Ilaced between the butting surfaces will .educe the tendency to brooming.
4
The pieces should also be secured with steel ubes or steel tlats. Splices in the middle of the Gle should be avoided. If it is necessary to obtain increase in size and length of pile by Glding up sections, the joints should be stag:ered and the timber members connected by neans of bolts or screws. Tiles shall be installed as accurately as possible according to drawings. [n a pile group, the sequence of installation of piles shall normally be from centre to periphery of the group or from one side to the other. Adjacent piles shall not be damaged when driving a pile; the danger is greater in compact soils than in loose soils. Driving piles in loose sand tends to compact the sand which in turn increases the skin friction for friction piles. Therefore the order of installing of such a pile group should avoid creating a compact block of sand pile into which further piles cannot be driven.
h)
j>
k)
Similar precautions have to be taken in case piles have to be driven into stiff clay or compact sand layers. This may be overcome by driving piles from the centre to the periphery or by beginning at a selected edge or working across the group. In case of very soft soils, driving may have to proceed from outside to inside, so that soil is retained from flowing and during operation. Jetting of cases by means of water shall be carried out if required in such a manner as not to impair the bearing capacity of piles already in place, the stability of the soil or the safety or any adjacent buildings. Defective piles shall either be removed or left in place as is convenient without affecting the performance of the adjacent piles or the cap as a whole. Additional piles shall be provided to replace the defective piles. Any sudden change in the rate of penetration which cannot be ascribed to the nature of ground shall be noted and its cause ascertained, if possible, before driving is continued.
3.6.4 Hundlir~g of’ Piles a ) Care shall be taken to see that the piles are sufficient number of points, properly located to prevent damage due to excessive bending. b) Treated piles shall be handled with hemp OI manila rope slings or other means of support that will not damage the surface of the wood. c) Dropping, brushing, breaking of fibres and penetrating the surface shall be avoided. d) Sharp pointed tools shall not be used for handling or turning them in leads. e) Minor abrasions of the surface of treated piles below cut-off level in the portions which are to remain permanently under water shall be permitted. 1) Surface of treated piles below cut-off shall not be disturbed by boring holes or driving nails to support temporary material or stagping. 3.7 Load Test onPiles Shall be done as prescribed in IS 29~11 (Part 4) : 1985. 4 MACHINE
FOUNDATIONS
4.1 General Machine foundations are specialized structures, according to typeof machines, namely, rotary, impact, reciprocating, etc. However, a few criteria for construction are listed below. 4.2 Criteria for Construction 4.2.1
Concrete
The-concrete used shall be controlled concrete. The grade of concrete shall be between M 15 to M 20 for block foundations and M 20 for formed foundations. A slump of 50 mm to 80 mm is allowable. The concrete used shall be of plastic consistency without excessive water. The water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45 which shall be maintained throughout the concreting of foundation. 4.2.2 Continuous concreting shall be done as far as possible for the entire block, leaving provisions for grouting. 4.2.3 All areas under and adjacent to the foundation shall be well cleaned prior to pouring of concrete. The surfaces except the pockets for grout, shall be made rough so as to secure good bond with fresh cement. Cement grout with non-shrinkable additive shall be used where structurally required. 4.2.4 All elements of foundation shall be provided both at top and bottom by two way reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be provided along the surface in case of block foundations. The amount of reinforcement shall vary between 25 to 50 kg/m’ of concrete as the case may be. The minimum dia shall be 12 mm
33
SP 62(S &T): 1997 and covered by a rich layer of 1: 2 cement grout 20 mm thick, concrete should be placed not later than 2 h after the grout is laid.
and maximum shall be 20 mm in order to take care of shrinkage. Concrete cover shall be 75 mm at bottom, SO mm on sides and 40 mm on top. 4.2.5 The tlnished surface of the foundation leveiied before installing the machine.
5 MISCELLANEOUS
shall be
5.1 For field testing of soils reference may be made to SP 36 (Part 2) : 1988.
4.2.6 The foundation bolts shall be properly anchored. 4.2.7 Construction joints should be avoided. needed the plane of the joint shall be horizontal. The requirements
of a construction
a1 Embed
5.2 Some information on choice and characteristics of foundations is given in Annex A. Information on improvement of weak soils to carry more load is given in Annex B.
If
joint are:
dowels of 12 mm to 60 mm centres to a depth of depth; and b) Before laying fresh concrete, laid surfaces shall be cleaned
6 SPECIAL
16 mm dia at at least 30 cm
STRUCTURES
6.1 Requirements of foundations for special structures shall be as per design and drawings and any requirements specified. By and large IS 456: 1978 may be followed.
the previously and roughened
ANNEX A (Clause INFORMATION
A-l
ON CHOICE AND CHARACTERISTICS TYPES OF FOUNDATIONS
GENERAL
A-l.1 The design of foundation, superstructure and the characteristics of the soil are inter-related. In order to obtain mnximum’economy, the supporting soil, foundation and the superstructure should be studied as a whole. The gee-technical aspects of the soil determines the type and design of foundation; whereas the materials and properties of these materials determine the design of superstructure. In effect it may appear that an inelastic foundation should support a superstructure constructed out of elastic materials. The general aim of foundation choice and design is to ensure that the loading intensity imposed on the soil does not exceed the safe bearing capacity of the soil. In addition the materials of foundation, such as, masonry, concrete, etc, should not be stressed for more than the limits specified in appropriate codes governing the structural design of such elements. The construction procedures should enable the aim of design in office to be realised in the field. A-2 SPREAD
5.2) ~OF CERTAIN
A-2.2 These foundations could be used for medium high structures of residential and commercial occupancy with uniform distribution of loads. A-3 RING FOUNDATION A-3.1 Ring foundation is a substructure supporting an arrangement of columns or walls and transmitting loads to the soil by means of a continuous Slab. Generally, these foundations could be used for tail structures, such as, silos, chimneys, water tanks, etc, which have a non-uniform distributed loads. A-3.2 For fairly small and uniform column spacing and when the supporting soil is not too compressible, a flat concrete slab of uniform thickness is most suitable. Under the effect of dead load, the soil is subjected to uniform pressure; but under live loads like wind or earthquake the pressure on the soil is nonuniform. If there is sufficient bending due to lateral loads it is more economical to adopt a annular raft. Annular circular slab with a ring beam type of raft is likely to be more economical for large column spacing.
FOUNDATIONS
A-4 RAFT FOUNDATION
A-2.1 In spread foundations transfer of load is primarily through shear resistance of the bearing soil and they are normally laid to a depth of 3 m. Strip foundations provide continuous and longitudinal bearing of loads, such as, wall elements, beams and the like. The soil bearing capacity is limited for choice of such foundation.
A-4.1 Raft foundation is a substructure supporting an arrangement of columns or walls in a row and transmitting the loads to the soil by means of a continuous slab with or without openings or depressions. The foundations are useful where the soil has low bearing capacity.
34
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 A-4.2 A raft (mat) foundation slab of uniform thickness is suitable for fairly small and uniform column spacing and when the supporting soil is not too compressible.
They are also useful where artesian conditions exist or where local obstructions are encountered above the foundation level. They also can be protected by appropriate coatings.
The slab may be thickened for heavily loaded columns to provide adequate strength for shear and negative moment.
A-5.3 Driven Cast in-situ Concrete
A slab and beam type of raft is likely to be more economical for large column and unequal spacing of columns; particularly when the supporting soil is compressible. For heavy structures, provision of cellular raft or rigid frames consisting of slabs and basement walls may be considered.
Pile
Driven cast in-situ piles are formed by driving a casing and filling it in the hole with plain or reinforced concrete. The casing may be temporary or permanent. The concrete may be rammed, vibrated or just poured. These piles find wide application where the pile required is taken to a greater depth to find adequate bearing strata or to develop adequate skin friction; and also when the length of individual piles cannot be pre-determined.
A-5 PILE FOUNDATION A-5.1 The load transfer mechanism from a pile to the surrounding soil is cgmplicated and has not yet been fully determined, altliough application of pile foundation has been in vogue for many decades. Broadly speaking, piles transfer axial load either by friction along its shaft and/or subsequently by end bearing.
A-5.4 Bored Cast in-situ and Driven Precast
Their application is similar to A-5.3 and A-5.2 respectively. A-5.5 Under-Reamed-Piles Under-reamed piles find wide application following conditions:
Construction of pile foundations requires careful choice of piling system, depending on the subsoil conditions, the load characteristics, limitations of total settlement, differential settlement, etc. It requires careful control of alignment, position and depth and involves specialized skill and experience. A-5.2 Bored Precast
Concrete
Pile
under the
4 When the site consists of expansive soils, like
b)
Pile
These piles find wide application in chemically agressive soils and in high ground water conditions. These piles are protected even in such conditions because they are made by using dense, vibrated matured conCrete.
c)
ANNEX
black cotton soil, the bulb provides additional anchorage against uplift due to swelling pressure impart from the increased bearing. In filled or otherwise weak strata overlying firm strata, enlarged base in the form of underreamed bulb provides larger bearing area and therefore piles of greater bearing capacity can be constructed. In loose to medium pervious sandy and silty strata, the process of compaction increases the bearing capacity of the pile.
B
(Clause 5.2) GUIDELINES FOR GROUND IMPROVEMENT FOUNDATIONS IN WEAK SOILS B-l
GENERAL
FOR
B-2 METHODS B-2.1 Need
B-l.1 In poor and weak subsoils, the design of conventional shallow foundations for structures may present problems with respect to both size of foundation and control of settlements. Traditionally pile foundations have been employed at very high costs. A recent approach is to improve the soil itself to the extent that would result in adequate bearing capacity and settlements within acceptable limits.
The need for ground improvement should be established by collection of soil data. If the bearing capacity is less than that specified in IS 6403: 198 I for shallow foundations than the need for ground improvement arises; also if the settlements exceed those specified by IS 8009 (Part 1) : 1976 and IS 8009 (Part 2) : I980 for shallow and deep foundations. Soils subject to
35
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 liquefaction particularly during earthquakes under high water table conditions also need strengthening. B-2.2
a ) Injecting of chemicals, lime, cement, etc, into subsoils to improve subsoil by formation of bonds between soil particles. Mechanical compression of subsoil~is also achieved under certain conditions provided grout is pumped in under high pressure.
SOIL DENSIFICATION
a) Soil structure improvement from in a loose to medium dense or dense state is by application of shock and vibration. This technique, is applicable only to cohesionless soils under high water table conditions. b) Vibroflotation, vibrocompaction, compaction piles, blasting and dynamic consolidation are some of the methods suitable to undertake this treatment. 9-2.3
B-2.4 Injection and Grouting
b) This method is suitable for sands as well as fine grained soils. B-2.5
a) Reinforcement introduced into the soil mass causes marked improvement in stiffness and consequently load carrying capacity and stability of soil mass. Reinforcement may be in the dense granular materials like stone chips. These are used primarily to increase load bearing capacity of the soil mass.
Preconsolidation
a > Increase in shear strength with substantially reduced values of settlement result by expulsion of water from the pores of the soil causing consolidation. This consolidation is achieved by subjecting it to a preload. Preload can be soil itself or any suitable material.
b) Reinforcements may be in the form of horizontal or vertical membranes. These membranes serve significantly to increase the capacity of the soil to withstand tensile, shear and com~pression loads and contribute towards stability of mass.
b) Preloading is generally carried at in stages to allow gradual build up of strength enabling it to safely support further stages of preload. c) For poorly draining soils precompression is accelerated by provision of vertical drainage in soils. d) Removal of water from pore spaces can also be done by application of electric current to subsoil. This process is known as ‘Electra Osmosis.’ e> This technique is applicable to fine ground soils such as silts and clays. Subsoils requiring high secondary consolidation characteristics may not be amenable to improvement by the preload method.
Soil Reinforcement
B-2.6 Other Methods Other methods include heating and drying and by fusion at high temperatures; replacement of poor subsoil by competent fill. However, these have certain limitations. B-3 CWOICE OF METHOD B-3.1 For more information on soil improvement techniques, choice, etc, is given in IS 13094 : 1992. Table 3.1 may be taken as a guide for selection of the various methods along with principles applicable to various soil conditions, equipments required, results likely to be activised and limitations.
36
Table 3.1 Soil Improvement (Clause B-3.1) Summary of Soil Improvement
-
Methods
Methods
Method
Principle
Most Suituble Soil Conditions/Types
Maximum Effective Treatment Depth
Special Materials Required
Special Equipment Required
Properties of Treated Material
Special Advantages and Limitations
Relative Cost
Blasting
Shock waves ‘and vibrations cause liquefaction and displacement with settlement to higher density
Saturated, clean sands : partly saturated sands and silts (collapsible loess) after flooding
>30m
Explosives backfill to plug drill holes, hole casings
Jetting or drilling machine
Can obtain relative densities to 7080, may get variable density time dependent strength gain
Rapid, inexpensive, can treat any size areas : variable properties, no improvement near surface, dangerous
Low
Vibratory Probe
Densification by vibration; liquefaction induced settlement under overburden
Saturated or dry clean sand
20 m (ineffective above 3-4 m depth)
None
Vibratory pile driver and 750 mm dia, open steel
Can obtain relative densities of up to 80. Ineffective in some sands
Rapid, simple, good underwater, soft underlayers may damp vibrations, difficult to penetrate, stiff overlayers, not good in partly saturated soils
Moderate
Vibrocompaction
Densification by vibration and compaction of backfill material
Cohesionless soils with less than 20 fines
30m
Granular backfill, water supply
Vibroflot, crane, pumps
Can obtain high relative densities, good uniformity
Useful in saturated and partly saturated soils, uniformity
Moderate
Zompaction ‘iles
Densification by displacement of pile volume and by vibration during driving
Loose sandy soils: partly saturated clayey soils, loess
>20 m
Pile material (often sand or soil plus cement mixture)
Pile driver, special pile equipment
sand
Can obtain high densities, good uniformity
Useful in soils with fines, uniform cornpactioh, easy to check results, slow, limited improvement in upper I-2m
Moderate ‘to high
heavy Tampng (Dynamic Consolidation)
Repeated application of high intensity impacts at surface
Cohesionless soils, waste fills, partly saturated soils
30m
None
Tampers of up to 200 tons, high capacity crane
Can obtain good improvement and reasbnable uniformity
Simple, rapid, suitable for some soils with fines; usable above and below water, requires control, must be away from existing structures
Low
pipe
Table 3.1~Continued Summary
Methods
Method
Principle
Most Suitable Soil Conditions/Types
Maximum Effective Treatment Depth
Special Materials Required
Special Equipment Required
Propekies qf Treated Material
Special Advantages and Limitations
Relalive Cost
Particulate Grouting
Penetration groutingtill soil pores with soil, cement and/ or clay
Medium to coarse sand and gravel
Unlimited
Grout, water
Mixers, hoses
tanks,
pumps,
Impervious, high with strength cement grout, eliminate liquefaction danger
Low cost grouts, high strength; limited to coarse grained soils hard to evaluate
Lowest of the grout systems
Chemical Grouting
Solutions of two or more chemicals react in soil pores to form a gel or a solid precipitate
Medium silts and coarser
Unlimited
Grout, water
Mixers, hoses
tanks,
pumps,
Impervious, low to high strength eliminate liquefaction danger
Low viscosity controllable gel time, good water shut-off; high cost, hard to evaluate
High to very high
Lime slurry injected to shallow depths under high pressure
Expansive clays
Unlimited, but 2-3 m usually
Lime, water surfactant
Slurry tanks, pumps, hoses
Lime encapsulated zones formed by channels resulting from cracks, roof holes, hydraulic fracture
Only effective in narrow range of soil conditions
Competitive with other solu tions to ex pansive soil problems
Highly viscous grout acts as radial hydraulic jack when pumped in under high pressure
Soft, tine grained soils; foundation soils with large voids or cavities
Unlimited, but a few m usually
Soil, cement water
Batching equipment, high pressure pumps, hoses
Grout bulbs within compressed soil matrix
Good for correction of differential settlements filling large voids; careful control requited
Low material high injection
Stabilizing chemical moved into soil by electroosmosis or colloids into pores by electrophorasis
Saturated silts; silty clays (clean sands in case of colloid injection)
Unknown
Increased strength, reduced comptessibility, reduced liquefaction potential
Existing soil and structures not subjected td high pressures; no good in soil with high conductivity
Bxpensive
B 5 I 3 8 B Pressure e Injected Lime 9 P 9
Displacement Grout
,
of Soil Improvement
Electrokinetic Injection
Chemical stabilizer colloidal void tillers
agitators,
DC power supply, anodes cathodes
Jet Grouting
High speed jets at depth excavate, inject, and mix stabilizer with soil to form columns or panels
Sands, silts. clays
Water. stabilizing chemicals
Special jet nozzle, pumps. pipes and hoses
Solidifiedcolumns and walls
Useful in soil that can’t permeation be grouted, precision in locating treated zones
Preloading with/ without Drain
Load is applied sufficiently in advance of construction so that compression of soft soils is completed prior to development of the site
Normally consolidated soft clays, silts, organic deposits, completed sanitary landfills
Earth fill or other material for loading the site; said or gravel for drainage blanket
Earth moving equipment. large water, tanks or vacuum drainage systems sometimes used; settlemarkers, ment piezometers
Reduced water content and void ratio increased strength
Easy, theory well developed, uniformity; requires long time (vertical drains can be used to reduced consolidation time)
Low (moderate if vertical drains are required)
Surcharge Fills
Fill in excess of that required permanently is aIjplied to richieve a given amount of settlement in a shorter time; excess fill then removed
Normally consolidated soft clays, silts, organic deposits, completed sanitary landfills
Earth fill or other material for loading the site; sand or gravel for drainage blanket
Earth moving equipment; markers, settlement piezometers
Reduced water content, void ratio and compressibility; increased strength
Faster than preloading without surcharge, theory well developed extra material handling; can use vertical drains to reduce consolidation time
Moderate
ElectroOsmosis
DC current causes water flow from anode towards cathode where it is removed
conNormally solidated silts and silty clays
Anodes (usually rebars or aluminium) cathodes (well points or rebars)
DC power supply, wiring, metering systems
Reduced water content and compressibility. increased strength, electrochemical hardening
No fill loading required, be used in confined area. relatively fast; non-uniform properties between electrodes; no good in highly conductive soils
High
Table 3.1-Concluded Summary of Soil Improvement Methocl
Principle
Most Suitable Soil Conditions/Types
_
--
Methods
Maximum
Speck1 Mote-
Special Equipment
Properties
rials Required
Required
Treated btuteriul
Special Advuntages and Limitations
Relative
IYffective Treot-
IOm
Admixture stabilizers
Excavating mixing and compaction equipment dewatering system
Increased strength stiffness, and reduced compressibility
Uniform, controlled foundation soil when replaced; may require large area dewatering
High
-
Sand, gravel fly ash, bottom ash, slag, expanded aggregate, clam shell or oyster shell, incinerator ash
Mixing and compaction equipment
Soft subgrade protected by structural load bearing till
High strength, good load distribution to underlying soft soils
Low to high
oj
Cost
ment Depth
b B E 2
Remove and Replace
Foundation soil excavated, improved by drying or admixture and recompacted
hr-organic soils
Structural Fills
Structural fills distributes loads to underlying soft soils
Use over soft clays or organic soils marsh deposits
Mix-in-Place Piles and Walls
Lime, cement or asintroduced phalt through rotating auger or Special in-place mixer
All Soft or loose inorganic soils
>20m
Cement lime asphalt, or chemical stabilizer
Drill rig. rotary cutting and mixing head, additive proportioning equipment
Solidified soil piles or walls of relatively high strength
Uses native soil, reduced lateral support requirements during excavation; difficult quality control
Modente to high
Heating
low Drying at temperatures’ alteration of clays at intermediate temperatures (400-600 “C); fusion at temperatures high (>I 000 “C)
Fine-grained soils, especially partly saturated clays and silts loess
15m
Fuel
Fuel tanks, blowers
Reduced water content, plasticity, water sensitivity; increased strength
Can obtain irreversible improvements in properties: can introduce stabilizers with hot gases
High
Freezing
Freeze soft, wet ground to increase its strength and stiffness
All soils
Several m
Refrigerant
Refrigeration
Increased strength and stiffness, reduced permeability
No good in flowing ground water, tem-
High
-
1 : 2 l
burners,
system
porary
Vibro Replacement Stone and Stand Columns
B t$ Root Piles, s Soils Nailing & .E d
Strips and Membranes
P
Vibroflot. crane vibrocat. water
or
Hole jetted into soft. fine-grained soil and backfilled with densely compacted gravel or sand
Soft clays and alluvial deposits
20 m
Gravel or rock backfill
Inclusions used to carry tension, shear, compression
All soils
-
Reinforcingbars, cement grout
Drilling and equipment
Horizontal tensile strips, membranes buried in soil under embankments, gravel base courses and footings
Cohesiohless soils
construct Can earth structures to heights of several tons of m
Metal or plastic strips, geo-textiles
Excavating, earth handling, and compaction equipment
crushed
grouting
Increased bearing capacity. reduced settlements
than Faster precompression, avoids dewatering required for remove and replace; limited bearing capacity
Moderat to high
Reinforced zone behaves as a coherent mass
In-situ reinforcement for soils that can’t be grouted or mixed-in place with admixtures
Moderatr to high
Economical, earth structures coherent, can tolerate deformations; increased allowable bearing pressure
Low to moderate
‘Self-supporting earth structures, increased bearing capacity. reduced deformations
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER 4
MASONRY
.
CQNTENTS
4 SUMMARYOF PROPERTIES OF MASONRY UNITS
1 GENERAL
PART 1 MORTARS 1 TYPEOF MORTARS 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
General Cement Mortars Lime Mortars Cement-Lime Mortars Mix Proportions
2 SELECTION OF MORTARS
ANNEX C SAMPLING AND TESTING OF COMMON BURNTCLAY BRICKS
Section 2 Construction Practices Brickwork 1 GENERAL 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Setting Out 2 TYPESOFBONDS
2.1 Cement Mortar
General English Bond Double Flemish Bond Single Flemish Bond Garden Wall Bond American Bond 2.1 Stretcher Bond 2.8 Header Bond 2.9 Other Bonds
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
2.2 Composite Mortar 2.3 Lime Based Mortars 2.4 Optimum Mortar Mixes 3 PREPARATION OFMORTARS 3.1 Materials 3.2 Slaking of Lime 3.3 Preparationof Mortars ANNEX A SIEVEANALYSIS
3 THICKNESS OFJOINT
ANNEX B F~ELUTESTFORSILTCONTENT
3.1 General 3.2 Finishing of Joints 3.3 Mortars
PART 2 BRICKWORK AND BLQCKWORK Section 1 Brick and Block Units 1 GENERAL 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Types of Bricks 2 BRICKS 2.1 General
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
Information on Bricks Classification of Bricks Size of Bricks Sand Lime Bricks References
3 BLOCKS 3.1 General
3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
Types of Blocks Concrete Blocks Lime Based Blocks Soil Based Blocks
4
PREPARATORY WORK 4.1 Scaffolding 4.2 Soaking of Bricks
5 LAYINGOFBRICKWORK 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15
General Walls Plasters Openings Partitions Half Brick Masonry Arches Brick Tile Work Honey Comb Brickwork Brickwork in Openings Parapets and Copings Cavity Walls Curing Service Installation Moulding and Cornices
PART 3
5.16 Jointing Old Brickwork with New Brickwork Section 3 Construction Blockwork
Practice -
1 GENERAL
I .I Introduction 1.2 Types of Stones
1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
OF STONES 2 PROPERTIES 2.1 Strength 2.2 Durability
MORTAR 2.1 Hollow Concrete Blocks 2.2 Light Weight Blocks
2.3 >~zes MORTARS
CONCRETE
SELECTION OF STONE
THICKNESS
PREPARATORY WORK
LATERALSUPPORT
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
AVOIDANCEOFCRACKFORMATION 6.1 General
6.2 Bonded Beams and Studs Used on Structural Members PREPARATORY WORK 7.1 Wetting of Blocks 7.2 Scaffolding
8 LAYINGOF CONCRETEBLOCKS 8.1 First Course 8.2 Construction 8.3 Closure Block 9 PROVISIONFORDOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES 10 PROVISION FORROOF 11 INTERSECTING WALL 12 RENDERINGS AND OTHERFINISHES
Section 4 In-situ Walls with Soil Cement 1 GENERAL 2 SOIL 3 WALL CONSTRU(XION 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9
Preparationof Soil Compaction Curing Joints Fixing Frames Bearing of Roof Lintels Parapet Plastering
4 PREPARATION OF MUD PLASTER
STONEWORK
6
Dressing of Stone Scaffolding Handling Tools Wetting
TYPESOFMASONRY
7 RANDOM RUBBLE 7.1 Uncoursed
7.2 Brought to Courses 8 SQUAREDRUBBLE 8.1 Uncoursed 8.2 Brought to Courses 9 POLYGONALRUBBLEMATCHING ! 0 PLAINASHLAR 11 LAYINGOF STONES-
GENERALREQUIREMENTS
12 LAYINGOFDIFFERENT TYPESOF MASONRY
12.1 General 12.2 Random Rubble (Uncoursed and Brought to Course) 12.3 Coursed Rubble Masonry-First Sort 12.4 Coursed Rubble Masonry-Second Sort 12.5 Plain Ashlar Masonry 12.6 Ashlar Sunk or Moulded 12.7 Ashlar Rock Faced 12.8 Ashlar Rough Tooled 12.9 Ashlar Chamfered 12.10 Ashlar Block in Course 12.11 Ashlar Masonry for Special Works 12.12 Laterite Stone Masonry 12.13 Stone Veneering
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
:, L-.
.-
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
CHAPTER 4
MASONRY 1 GENERAL 1.1 The chapter lowing:
on
masonry
will cover
the fol-
Part 1 Part 2 Part 3
Mortars Brickwork and Blockwork Stonework
PART 1 MORTARS
1 TYPE OF MORTARS 1.1 General Mortars for use in masonry work are many. Mortar strength ingeneral shall not be greater than that of the masonry units; nor greater than necessary in any application. IS 22SO : 1981 covers the requirements of various mortars. Mortars could be classified as cement mortars, lime mortars, and cement-lime mortars. The main characteristics of these mortars are as under. 1.2 Cement Mortars These consist of cement and sand, varying in proportions from I:8 to 1:3; the strength and workability improving with the increase in proportion of cement. Mortars richer than 1:3 are not used in masonry because of high shrinkage and no appreciable gain in the strength of masonry.
Mortar with workability will hang from trowel and spread easily. Good water retentivity will -enable mortar to develop good bond with masonry units. Masonry in lime mortar has b,:tter resistance penetration and is less liable to cracking; strength is less than that of cement mortar. 1.4 Cement-Lime
to rain but its
Mortars
These have good qualities of cement as well as that of lime; that is, medium strength alongwith good workability and good water retentivity, freedom from cracks and good resistance against penetration. Commonly adopted proportions are (cement, lime and sand) 1:1:6, l:2:9 and 1:3:12. Mix proportion of binder to sand (cement plus lime) is kept as 1:3. This gives a very dense mortar, since voids of sandare fully filled. 1.5 Mix Proportions The mix proportions and compressive strength of some of the commonly used mortars are given in Table 4.1.
Mortars leaner than 15 tend to become harsh and unworkable.
2 SELECTION
OF MORTARS
1.3 Lime Mortars
2.1 Cement Mortar
These consist of intimate mixtures of lime as a binder and sand, burnt~claylSURKHI, cinder as fine aggregate in the proportion of I:2 or 1:3.
Cement mortar is needed, when a) masonry units of high strength are used, b) early strength is necessary, and c) in wet condition, as in foundation below plinth level where a dense mortar being less pervious can better resist the effect of soluble salts.
As a general rule lime mortars gain strength slowly and have low ultimate strength. Mortars using hydraulic lime gain somewhat better strength than those using fat lime. Lime mortars using fat lime do not harden at all in wet locations, Properties of mortar using semihydraulic &me is intermediate betwen those of hydraulic lime and fat lime mortars.
2.2 Composite
Mortar
Unnecessarily strong mortar, concentrate the effect of any differential movement of masonry in a fewer and wider cracks; whereas a weak mortar (mortar having more lime and less cement) will accommodate movements and cracks are distributed. Thus, when strong mortars (cement mortar) are not required from strength, wet locations, or other considerations, it is preferable to use composite mortars.’
When only fat lime is used, it is necessary to use some pozzolanic material, such as, burnt clay/SURKHI or cinder to improve the strength of the mortar. The main advantage of lime mortar lies in its good workability, good water retentivity and low shrinkage.
47
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Table 4.1 Mix Proportion and Strength of Commonly Mortars for niasonry (Clause 4.1) SI No.
Mix h
/ Cement
.
Lime
Sand
Used __ Mortar
Minihtum Compressive Strength N/mm* (5)
Type
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
I
1
o-1/4c
3
10
HI
2(a)
I
0
4
1.5
H2
2(b)
I
1/2C
4.5
6
-
3(a)
I
0
5
5
h41
3(b)
I
IC
6
3
-
4(a)
I
0
6
3
-
4(b)
I
2c
9
2
M2
4(c)
0
IA
2-3
2
-
5(a)
I
0
8
0.7
Ll
5(b)
1
3c
12
0.7
-
6
0
IBorC
2-3
0.5
L2
NOTES 1 A, 8, C denote eminently hydraulic lime, semi-hydraulic
lime, and fat lime respectively, as stipulated in IS 712 : 1984.
2 When using plain cement sand mortars SI No. 2(a). 3(a), 4(a) and 5(a) it is desirable to include a plasticizer in the mix to improve workability. if sand used is too coarse and graded, 3 For mortar at SI No. 6, if lime is used, part of sand should be replaced by some pozzolanic material, for example, burnt clay or fly ash, in order to obtain the requisite strength. 4 Strengths of mortar may vary appreciably, depending on nngularity, grading and fineness of sand. Quantity of sand in the mix may therefore be varied where found necessary to attain the desired strength. 5 In this Table, classificafion from IS 2250: 198 I, 6 Though compressive significantly affected.
of types of mortar as HI, H2, etc. is only for convenience in reference to design calculations.
It is different
strength of composite mortars H2, Ml and M2 is less than cement to mortan, the masonry strength may not be
7 Other mortar mixes may also be permitted where necessary as in blockwork,
2.3 Lime Based Mortar
Brick Strength kg/m2 (N/nm2)
Lime based mortars give higher ratio of masonry strength to mortar strength as compared to non-lime based mortar. This is because masonry with lime abased mortars have higher strength and this is more important in masonry failure. 2.4 Optimum
Mortar Mix
Mortar Type
150-249 (15 to24.9)
I:0 :4 1: 1/2c:+
H2
250 (25) and above
1:o-1/4c:3
Hl
Mortar Mixes 3 PREPARATION
From considerations of maximum strength of brickwork for various strengths of bricks, optimum mortar mixes are as below: Brick Strength kg/cm2 (N/mm2)
Mortar Mix
3.1 Materials 3.1-l
1:0 :6 1:2C:9 0: lA:2-3
M2
50 to 149 (5 to 14.9)
1:o :5 I:lC:6
Ml
Water
Water used shall be clean and reasonably free from injurious or deleterious materials, such as, oils, acids, alkalies, salts, etc. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory. As a guide the following concentrations represent the maximum permissible limits of deleterious materials in water.
Mortar Type
c 50 (5)
OF MORTARS
a) Limits of acidity - To neutralize 200 ml sample of water, using phenolpthalein as an 48
/
I
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 indicator, it should not require more than 2 ml of 0.1 normal NaOH. Limits of alkalinity - To neutralize 200 ml sample of water, using methyl orange as an indicator, it should not require more than 10 ml of 0. I normal HCI. Permissible limits of solids shall not exceed as given below: Organic 200 mg/l Inorganic 3 000 mg/l Sulphates (as S04) 500 mg/l Chlorides (as Cl) 2 000 mg/l Suspended matter 2 000 mg/l The pH value of water shall generally be not less than 6. Sea water is not recommended, because of presence of harmful salts in sea water. Under unavoidable circumstances sea water may be used for under sea constructions. 3.12
Cement
Cement shall conform to any of the following: a) 13 Grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 269 : 1989, b) Portland slag cement conforming to IS 455 : 1989, cl Portland pozzolana cement conforming to IS 1489 (Parts 1 and 2) : 1991, 4 Rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS 8041 : 1990, e) Hydrophobic Portland cement conforming to IS 8043 : 1991, 0 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 8 112 : 1989, g) 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 12269 : 1987, and h) -Low heat Portland cement conforming to IS 12600 : 1989. High alumina cement conforming to IS 6452 : 1989 may be used under special circumstances as permitted by the Authority; simimlarly supersulphated cement conforming to IS 6909 : 1990 may also be used in special cases. Specialist literature may be consulted for use of these types of cements. 3.1.3 Lime
the form of paste and used before it dries up. This is comparable to Class C lime. It may be used for mortar and plaster work, but not for white washing. 3.1.3.2 Hydrated lime It shall be in the form of dry fine powder produced by treating quick lime in any suitable form with sufficient water so as to produce a completely hydrated but dry and sound product. It shall be brought from approved manufacturers and shall be used within 3 to 4 months from the date of manufacture. 3.1.4 Lime Pozzolana Mixture It shall conform to IS 4098 : 1983. Only LP 40 type lime pozzolana mixture shall be used. Class C lime shall be ground with burnt clay pozzolana to IS 1344 : 1981 to obtain the mixture; burnt clay pozzolan; with a minimum lime reactivity of 80, 60, 40 kg/cm- shall be used. 3.1.5 Firte Aggregate Aggregate most of which passes 4.75 mm IS sieve is known as fine aggregate. The aggregate shall conform to the requirements of IS 383 : 1970. It shall not contain harmful organic impurities in such form or quantities to affect adversely the strength of mortar. Fine aggregate, when used in places using reinforcement, shall not contain any material acidic in character which is likely to attack reinforcement. Fine aggregate shall be either sand or crushed stone dust. Sand is of two types, namely, coarse and fine sand. 3.1.5.1 Fine sand This shall be natural river sand. Its grading, ai per Annex A, shall be within the limits of Grading Zone IV (see Table 4.2). When the grading falls outside the percentage limits prescribed for sieves other than 600 micron, 300 micron and I50 micron IS sieves by not more than 5 percent it shall be regarded as falling within the zone. This 5 percent can be split up among the different sieves; for example, it could be one percent for each of the three sieves and 2 percent on another.
Lime shall conform to IS 7 12 : 1984. Building lime shall be classified as follows:
The maximum quantity of silt as determined Annex B, shall not exceed 8 percent.
Class A -Eminently hydraulic lime used for structural purposes. Class B - Semi-hydraulic lime for masonry purpose. Class C -Fat lime used for finishing coat; it can be used for masonry mortar with addition of pozzolanic material. Class D -Magnesium lime used for finishing coat. Class E - Kankar lime used for mortar.
3.1.5.2 Stone dust
3.1.3.1
by
This shall be obtained by crushing hard stones. Its grading, as per Annex A, shall be within the limit of Grading Zone III (see Table 4.2). When the grading falls outside the percentage limits prescribed for sieves other than 600 micron and 300 micron IS sieves by not more than 5 percent and on 150 micron sieve by nut more than 20 percent, it shall be regarded falling within the limits of this zone. The 5 percent can be split up; for example, it could be one percent in each of the three sieves and 2 percent on another.
Carbide lime
Carbide lime is obtained as a by-product in the manufacture of acetylene. It shall be procured fresh in 49
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Table 4.2 Grading
of Fine Aggregates
(Clauses3.1.5.1,3.1.5.2,3.1.5.3and3.1.5.4) IS Sieve Designation
Percentage / Grading Zone I
\
Grading Zone III
Gmding Zone IV
100
100
75-100
IO0 85 100
5s.90
75-100
9%IO0 95.100 90. IO0
35-59
60-79
X0- IO0
s-20
8-30
12-40
I s-50
O-10
O-10
o-to
O-IS
100
100
90-100
90-100
2.36 mm
60-95
I. 18 mm 600micron
30-70
I s-34
300 micron
150micron
The maximum quantity of silt, as per Annex B shall not exceed 8 percent. 3.1.5.3
Grading Zone II
4.1.5 mm
IO mm
Passing for h
Marble dust
This shall be obtained by crushing marble. Its grading, as per Annex A, shall be within the limits of Grading Zone IV (see Table 4.2). When the grading falls outside the percentage limits prescribed for the sieves other than 600 micron, 300 micron and 150 micron IS sieves by not more than 5 percent, it shall be regarded as falling within the zone. This 5 percent can be split up; for example, one percent on each of the three sieves and 2 percent on the other.
90-
strength, hardening, durability of mortar. The maximum quantities of impurities, such as, clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities, taken together shall not exceed 5 percent by weight. The particle size of SURKHZ for use in lime mortars shall be as below: IS Sieve Designation 4.75 mm 2.36 mm 1.18 mm 600 micron 300 micron 150 micron
The maximum quantity of silt, as per Annex B, shall not exceed 8 percent.
Percentage P@$ng (by Weight) 100 90- 100 70- 100 40- 100 5-70 O-15
3.1.7 Calcined Clay Aggregate 3.1.5.4
Coarse sand This shall conform to IS 1344:1981. It shall be obtained by calcining processed clay at a suitable temperature and grinding the resultant product to required fineness. The average 7 day strength of three cubes of size 7 cm shall not be less than 40 kg/cm2. The cubes shall be prepared with a mix of one part of hydrated lime, 2 parts of pozzolana (blended intimately) and 3 parts of standard sand.
This shall be either river sand or pit sand. It shall be clean, sharp, strong, angular and composed of hard silicious material. Its grading as determined by Annex A, shall be within the limits of Grading Zone III (see Table 4.2). When the grading falls outside the percentage limits prescribed for the sieves other than 600 micron, 300 micron and 150 micron IS sieves by not more than 5 percent, it shall be regarded as falling within the zone. This 5 percent can be split up; for example, one percent on each of the three sieves and 2 percent on another.
The strength of cement cube prepared with 4 parts of ordinary cement (Grade 33), one part of pozzolana (blended intimately) and three parts of standard sand shall be as follows:
The maximum quantity of silt, as per Annex B shall not exceed 8 percent.
a) Abe at 28 days - not less than 80 percent of the strength of corresponding plain cement mortar cube, prepared with one part cement and three parts of standard sand and cured for 28 days. b) At 90 days - not less than the age at 28 days.
3.1.5.5 Sand for masonry mortars should generally conform to IS 2116 : 1980. 3.1.6 Broken Brick Aggregate Broken brick aggregate (SURKHI) shall be made by grinding underburnt or overburnt broken bricks. It shall conform to 1s 3 182 : 1986; and shall not contain any harmful impurities, such as, iron, pyrites, salts, coal, mica, shale or similar laminated or other materials in such form or quantity to adversely affecl
3.1.8 Cinder Cinder for mortar shall conform IS 2686 : 1977. These shall-be obtained from furnace of steam boilers using coal fuel only. Cinder from brick klins should not be used. Cinder shall be free from clay dirt, wood 50
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 ashes and other deleterious materials. It shall pass through IS sieve 3.35 mm with at least 50 percent of it passing through IS sieve 1.70 mm. The allowable percentage of unburnt carbon, for use in mortars, shall be up to 20 percent and acid soluble sulphate (expressed as SOS) shall be one percent. 3.1.9 Fly Ash Fly ash to be used as pozzolana for mortars shall conform to IS 38 12 : 198 1. It shall be free from any contamination of bottom ash, grit or small pieces of pebbles. This fly ash can be used as part replacement of fine aggregate in mortar and concrete. With a view to improve the grading, the recommended extent of replacement is upto 20 percent. 3.1.10 Soils Soils for making mud,mortar shall have suitable plasticity. The soil shall be free from vegetable roots, stone gravel greater than 2 mm in particle size, Kankar, coarse~sand and harmful and efforescent salts. Soil shall not be collected from locality affected by white ants. The plasticity index of the soil shall be between 6 and 10. For large and important projects it shall be between 12 and 15. The sulphate content shall not extend 0.1 percent. Coarse materials, coarser than 3.55 mm, shall not exceed 10 percent~by weight (see IS 13077: 199 I). 3.1.11 Properties of Materials The chemical and physical properties of materials referred to in 3.1 and its subparas shall be as listed in SP 21 : 1983. The original Indian Standard Specifications may also be referred to. 3.2 Slaking~of Lime
The stirring may be stopped 5 min after the boiling has stopped. As the mix thickens more water shall be added. The mix shall then be allowed to pass through IS Sieve 3.55 mm and flow into a tank at the lower level where it shall kept standing for 72 h before use. Water will evaporate partly and the surplus water at top shall be removed, leaving lime putty in the form of paste. Lime putty shall be kept wet till it iscompletely used. It can be stored for a fortnight without getting spoilt. 3.3 Preparation
of Mortars
As already mentioned in 1.1 mortars shall be prepared and tested as for IS 2250 : 198 1, except mud mortar. Some important points to be noted are given below. 3.3.1 Cement Mortar Mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer. If done by hand, the operation shall be carried out on a clean waterlight platform. It shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it has begun to set, in any case within 2 h, after water is added to the dry mixture. Mortar unused for more than 2 h shall be rejected. 3.3.2 Cement Lime Mortar It shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and within 2 h. Mortars unused for more than 2 h shall be rejected. For class B lime, lime putty and sand can be kept for 72 h for preparation of cement lime mortar. Cement fly ash mortar shall also conform to requirement as mentioned herein.
Slaking of lime shall conform to IS 1635 : 1992.
3.3.3 Lime Mortar
3.2.1 Pla@orm
Lime mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and grinding. As a rule the mortar should be used the day it is made. If Class A is present as an ingredient, the mortar shall be used within 4 h after mixing or grinding. Lime mortar with Class B lime shall be used within 36 h; the same applies to use of Class C lime; with pozzolana lime mortar with Class C lime and shall be used within 72 h. time mortars shall be kept damp with wet sack or other means and shall not be allowed to dry.
Lime, before slaking, shall be quite fresh and generally in the form of lumps. Slaking shall be carried out on a masonry platform by sprinkling water gradually till lime is slaked and reduced to powdery form. Slaked lime shall be screened through IS Sieve 3.35 mm and the residue retained on the sieve shall be rejected. Slaked lime shall then be run to putty before use in mortar. 3.2.2 Preparation
of Lime Putty
Similar precautions shall be taken for mortars with pozzolana mixture as mentioned herein.
Three sufficiently large slaking vessels or tanks shall be made; one 50 cm deep at a higher level, the remaining 80 cm deep at a lower level such the contents of upper tank flow into the next by gravity.
3.3.4 Mud Mortar Soil as chosen in 3.1.10 shall be broken up into fine powdery form and then shall be mixed with clean water and matured at least for 2 days. The mortar shall then be trodden with man’s feet and spades, turning over and over again to make it a homogeneous mass of working consistency.
The upper tank shall be filled with water to half the depth; sufficient quick lime be added gradually to fill up the tank to half of water depth. Lime shall be added to water and not water to lime. The mix shall be stirred continuously ensuring lime does not get exposed above water.
that
Reference may also be made to IS 13077 : 1991. 51
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
ANNEX
A
(Clauses 3.1.5.1,3.1.5.2,3.1.5.3and 3.1.5.4) SIEVE ANALYSIS A-l
EQUIPMENT
A-2 SAMPLE The weight of the sample available shall not be less than the weight as given below. The sample for sieving shall be prepared from the larger sample by quartering or by sample divider.
Perforated plate sieves of designation 10 mm,4.75 mm and fine mesh sieves of designation 2.36 mm, I. 18 mm, 600 micron, 300 micron and I50 micron shall be used. Pm-tide Size,
60
50
40
25
20
16
12.5
10
6.3
4.75
2.36
50
35
15
5
2
2
I
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.1
A-3 SIEVlNG
A-4 REPORT
The sample shall be brought to air-dry condition before sieving. The sieves shall be clean before use. Sieving shall be done on successive sieves starting from the largest. Light brushing is permitted on-finer sieves.
The results shall be calculated and reported as: a > Cumulative percentage by weight of the total sample passing each sieve to the nearest whole number; or b) Percentage by weight of the total sample passing one sieve and retained on the next small sieve to nearest 0.1 percent.
On completion of sieving, the material retained on each sieve shall be weighed.
ANNEX B (CZauses3.1.5.1,3.1.5.2,3.1.5.3and3.1.5.4) FIELD TEST FOR SILT CONTENT B-l
PROCEDURE
ensuring that some sidewise shaking is also done. Allow the mix to settle for 3 h.
A sample of sand to be tested shall be placed without drying in a 200 ml measuring cylinder. The volume of sand shall fill up to 100 ml mark.
The height of the silt layer visible above the sand shatl be expressed as percentage of the height of sand below.
Clean water shall be added up to 150 ml mark. One tea spoon of salt shall be dissolved in a half litre of water before adding. Shake the mixture vigorously,
Sand containing more silt than permitted shall be washed as to bring the silt content to acceptable levels.
52
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 PART 2 BRICKWORK
AND BLOCKWORK
Section 1 Brick and Block-Units
1 GENERAL 1.1 Introduction There are several types of masonry units, such as, clay bricks, concrete blocks, lime based blocks, stones, etc. Therefore the choice of masonry unit becomes relevant. Generally, the choice is governed by local availability; compressive strength; durability; impermeability in heavy monsoon areas; fire resistance; cost; ease of construction; etc.
bricks. For semi-mechanized process of manufacture of common burntclay building bricks, reference may be made to IS 11650 : 1991. 2.2 Information
The following information of availability, strength, etc. of different types of bricks in the country would be of use. a) Strength of Bricks - Strength of bricks in India varies from region to region depending upon the nature of available soil and technique adopted for moulding and burning. Some research has been done for manufacture of bricks of improved quality from inferior soils, such as, black cotton and moorum, which ordinarily give bricks of very low strength.
Generally brick has the advantage over stone as it lends itself to easy construction and requires less labour for laying. Thus the first choice is any place would be brick if it is available at reasonable cost, has required strength and isof good quality. Stone masonry, because of practical limitations of dressing to shape and size, usually has to be thicker and results in unnecessary extra cost. In hills and certain plains, where soil is unsuitable for brick burning, and stone is locally available, the choice naturally is on stone. However if the type and quality of stone is unsuitable for dressing and shaping, recourse may be taken to using blocks particularly when the construction is not more than two storeys high. For example, precast stone masonry work to IS 12440: 1988 may be considered. With these blocks, the thickness of walls could be kept within economical limits. In places where brick and stone of suitable~quality is not available, and concrete blocks cannot be manufactured at reasonable cost, sand lime bricks could be considered. However the cost of equipment for sand lime bricks is high and hence these bricks have not yet become popular. 1.2 Types of Bricks
on Bricks
According to some survey done, the average strength of bricks ~manufactured in India, employing commonly known methods for moulding and burning, is as given below: Delhi, Punjab and 70- 100 kgf/cm2 (7- 10 N/mm2) Haryana 100-200 kgf/cm2 ( 1O-20 N/mm2) Uttar Pradesh Madhya Pradesh 35-50 kgf/cm2 (3.5-5 N/mm2) 50 kgf/cm2 (5 N/mm2) Maharashtra 30- 100 kgf/cm2(3- 10 N/mm2) Gujarat Rajasthan 30 kgf/cm2 (3 N/mm2) 100-200 kgf/cm2 (1 O-20 N/mm’) West Bengal Andhra Pradesh 30 kgf/cm (3 N/mm2) 35 kgf/cm2 (3.5 N/mm2) Assam In some cities like Delhi, Calcutta and Madras, made bricks have become available, machine with high compressive strengths ranging from 175-250 kgf/cm2 (17.5-25 N/mm2). b) Strength ofMasonry -Apart from strength of bricks and grade of mortar, as a general rule, the strength of masonry depends on surface characteristics and uniformity of size and shape of units, Units which are true in shape andsize, can be laid with thinner mortar joints, thereby resulting in higher strength. Therefore, for the same brick strength, higher masonry strength can be obtained by better shaped bricks with true edges. For this very reason, ashlar stone masonry, with uses accurately dressed and shaped stones, is much stronger (nearly double) than ordinary coarsed stone masonry.
The following Indian Standards cover various bricks: a) IS 1077 : 1992; IS 2180 : 1988; IS 2222 : 1991; IS2691: 1988;IS3952: 1988;IS6165: 1992 for clay bricks. b) IS 4139 : 1989 for calcium silicate (sand lime) bricks. c) IS 12894 : 1990 for sand lime bricks and fly ash lime bricks. 2 BRICKS 2.1 General Bricks shall be handmade or machine moulded. Reference may be made to IS 2117 : 1991 for guide on manufacture of handmade commonburntclay building
2.3 Classification
of Bricks
Common burnt clay bricks are classified on the basis 53
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 of compressive
strength as given below: 35
Class Designation Average Compressive
30
25
20
17.5
15
12.5
10
7.5
5
3.5
30 300
25 250
20 200
17.5 175
15 150
12.5 125
10 100
7.5 75
5 50
3.5 35
Strengths 35 350
N/mm* kgf/cm*
IS 2180 : 1988 covers burnt clay bricks of higher strength 40 and above, for heavy duty. The bricks shall be free from cracks and flaws and nodules of free lime. They shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be uniform in colour. Tolerance on brick dimensions shall be f 3 percent for designation 100 and above ; zk8 percent for lower designations. The requirements of bricks to IS 1077 : 1992 are summarized in SP 21 : 1983. Sampling and testing shall be as per IS 5454 : 1978 and IS 3495 : 1992 respectively. However sampling and tests for properties of bricks are given in Annex C.
Sand lime bricks shall have the same size as clay bricks to IS 1077 : 1992. 2.5.3 The physical properties, sampling, as per IS 4139 : 1989. 2.6 References For information on other bricks, refer to SP 20 : 1991. These include bricks to IS 2222 : 1990, IS 3952 : 1988 and brick shapes to IS 6165 : 1992. Also for information on IS 12894 : 1990 for fly ash lime bricks refer to SP 20 : 1991.
3. I General
Bricks shall have the following dimensions:
Modular bricks bricks
Length mm
Width mm
Height mm
190 190 230 230
90 90 110 110
90 40 70 30
Blocks have several advantages, such as, durability, strength, structural stability, fire resistance, sound absorption, heat insulation, etc. They are also economical because of the following reasons: a) The units are relatively large and true in size and shape. This ensures rapid construction so that more wall is laid per man than in other types of wall construction. b) Fewer joints result in considerable saving in mortar as compared to normal masonry construction; it also increases the strength of masonry [see 2.2 (b)]. c) The true plane surfaces obtained obviate necessity to plaster for unimportant buildings situated in low rainfall areas; even when plaster is used for any reason, the quantity required for satisfactory coverage is significantly small.
For obtaining proper bond between modular and nonmodular bricks the following size of bricks may also be used: Length mm 70
Width mm 110
Height mm I/3 length of brick
2.5 Sand Lime Bricks Sand limebricks, also called ‘Calcium Silicate’ bricks consist essentially of an intimate mixture of siliceous sand or crushed siliceous rock and lime combined by action of saturated steam under pressure. Coloured sand lime bricks also can be made by adding fast pigments to the raw mix before pressure casting. 2.5.1
3.2 Types of Blocks Concrete blocks may be solid or hollow. The following Indian Standards covers various types of blocks:
Classes
Sand lime bricks shall be of 4 classes as givenbelow: Class Class Class Class Class
Average Comp;essive N/mm (k&/cm ) 75 100 150 200
etc shall be
3 BLOCKS
2.4 Size of Bricks
Non-modular
2.5.2 Sizes
Strength
b)
7.5 to 10.0 (75 to 100) 10.0 to 15.0 (100 to 150) 15.0 to 20.0 (150 to 200) 20.0 and above (200 and above).
Concrete masonry units: IS 2185 (Part 1) : 1979 Hollow and solid concrete blocks; IS 2185 (Part 2) : 1983 Hollow and solid light weight concrete blocks; and IS 2185 (Part 3) : 1984 Autoclaved cellular aerated concrete blocks. Lime based blocks: IS 3115 : 1992. Soil based blocks: IS 1725 : 1982.
c>
3.3 Concrete
Blocks
They shall be handmade or machine made. 54
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 3.3.1 Manufacture
4 Materials-
Height: Cement shall conform to either of
the following: IS 269 : 1989; IS 455 : 1989; IS 1489 (Parts 1 and 2) : 1991; IS 6452 : 1989; IS 6909 : 1990; IS8112: 1989;IS8041: 199O;IS8042: 1989; IS 8043 : 1991; IS 12269 : 1987; IS 12600 : 1989. Aggregates shall conform to IS 383 : 1970. Fly ash conforming to IS 3812 : 198 1 may be used as a replacement for fine aggregate up to 20 percent. Water used in the manufacture of blocks shall be free from harmful matter and shall not cause efflorescence. It shall conform to the requirements laid down in IS 456 : 1978. Admixtures may be added and they shall be either: I) Accelerating, water reducing and air entraining admixtures conforming to IS 9103 : 1979; or 2) Waterproofing agents conforming to IS 2645 : 1975. b) Concrete Mix - The concrcte mix used for blocks shall not be richer than one cement to six combined aggregates (by volume). Combined aggregates shall be graded as near as possible to IS 383 : 1970. The fineness modulus of combined aggregate shall be between 3.6 and 4. cl Hand Moulding - For hand moulding compaction is done manually. Concrete mix should be of sufficient consistency to enable demoulding immediately after casting. The consistency should be such that it may be cohere when compressedby hand without free water being visible. 4 Machine Moulding - In machine moulding, the web markings on the units give a good indication as to whether proper consistency of concrete has been used. e) Curing - The blocks shall be cured in water for 14 days. Steam curing also may be adopted instead of curing in water. The blocks shall then be dried for 28 days before using on work. The blocks shall be stacked with voids horizontal to permit free flow ofair. They shall be allowed to complete their initial shrinkage before using on site. 3.3.2 Sizes The nominal dimensions
are as below:
Length:
400 mm, 500 mm or 600 mm.
Width:
50 mm, 75 mm, 100 mm. 150 mm, 200 mm, 250 mm, or 300 mm.
200 mm or 100 mm. details see IS 2185 (Part I) :
For other dimensional 1979. 3.3.3 Classification
of Blocks
a) Hollow (open and closed cavity) concrete blocks - Hollow blocks shall conform to the following three grades: 1) Grade A - Load bearing units with a minimum block density of I 500 kgf/m”. Average compressive strength shall be 3.5,4.5,5.5 and 7.0N/mm2 (or 35,45,55 and 70 kgf/cm2). The thickness of face shell and web shall not be less than 25 mm.
2) Grude B -
Load bearing units wit? a block density between I 000 kgf/m- to 1 500 kgf/m . The average compressive strength shall be 2.0 3.0 and 5.0 N/mm2 (20, 30 or 50 kgf/cm’).
Grade C - Non-load bearing units with block density between 1 000 kgf/m3 to 1 500 kgf/m3. The average compressive strength shall be not less than 1.5 N/mm” (1.5 kgf/cm2). b) Solid concrete blocks - Load bearing units with a block density not less than 1 800 kgf/m3. The average compressive strength shall be between 4.0 to 5.0 N/mm2 (40 to 50 kgf/cm2). 3)
3.3.4 The physical properties, sampling criteria for conformity and testing shall be as per IS 2185 (Part 1) : 1979 or SP 2 1 : 1983 which summarizes properiies of various masonry elements. Some important properties are: a) Water absorption - not more than 10 percent by mass; b) Drying shrinkage - not more than 0.1 percent; and c) Moisutre movement - not more than 0.09 percent. 3.4 Lime Based Blocks 3.4.1 Manufacture Several individual able.
process of manufacture
are avail-
a) Materials - Lime shall conform to IS 712 : 1984. Cement shall be as per IS 269 : 1989 or IS 455 : 1989 or IS 1489 (Parts 1 and 2) : 199 1. Burnt clay pozzolana shall conform to IS 1344 : 1981. Lime pozzolana mixture to IS4098: 1983andflyashtoIS3812: 1981. Aggregate shall be as per IS 383 : 1970; or IS 3068 : 1986; or IS 2686 : 1977. Water shall be as per IS 456 : 1978.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 b) Sizes Length: Width: Height:
The sizes of blocks shall be as below:
390 mm. 100 mm, 200 mm, 300 mm. 90 mm, 190 mm.
3.4.2 For other physical properties, sampling, tests, etc, see IS 3115 : 1992 or SP 21 : 1983 which summarizes properties of various masonry elements. Some important properties are:
29cmx19cmx9cm. 3.5.5 The physical properties, sampling, testing, etc, shall be as perIS 1725 : 1982 or SP 21 : 1983 which summarizes properties of various masonry elements. Some important properties are: stren th - Not less than a) Compressive 5 2 N/mm2 (20 kgf/cm ) for Class 20. Not less than 3 N/mm* (30 kgf/cm2) for Class 30. b) Water-absorption-Not more than 15 percent. c) Weathering - Not more than 5 percent.
a>Bulk b) c) 4
density - not less than 1 000 kgf/m3; Compressive strength - not less than 3.5 N/mm* (35 kgf/cm*); Drying shrinkage-not more than 0.1 percent; and Moisture movement - not more than 0.05 percent.
3.5 Soil Based Blocks 3.5.1 General Experience has shown that most soils can be satisfactorily stablized with cement-lime. It is, however, necessary to conduct comprehensive tests on soils in a laboratory in order to determine optimum requirements to give the specified properties. Soil based blocks can generally be used in low cost structures; they can substitute bricks except in case of isolated heavy load bearing columns, piers, etc. 3.5.2 Manufacture Soil based blocks shall be manufactured from a mixture of suitable soil and cement, thoroughly mixed preferably in a mechanical mixer. The mixture is cast into blocks. 35.3
Classification
The blocks class 35.
shall be of two classes, class 20 and
4 SUMMARY UNITS
OF PROPERTIES
OF MASONRY
4.1 So far several masonry units have been covered, For the purpose of design it would.be useful to have a look at the compressive strengths of these masonry units since this is an important characteristic for choice of unit (see Table 4.3). 4.2 From this it is clear that in building construction, high strength masonry units and lower strength units are also available. For load-bearing construction, so far buildings up to 6 storeys have gone up. In many places abroad, even 14 storeys have been built only with masonry. This is possible by combining vertically high strength bricks in lower storeys (heavier loads) and lighter masonry units (blocks) in upper storeys. That is why, this aspect should be decided at planning and design stages, so that, higher buildings can be done with masonry units only; thus load bearing masonry construction is possible. Very light blocks can be used for partition, tiller walls, etc, as non-load bearing elements. Thus an attempt on these lines would result in savings in construction. As already mentioned there is a need to correlate strength of mortar with the masomy unit and finally arrive at an ascending order of load bearing capacity.
3.5.4 Sizes The sizes of soil based blocks shall be : 19cmx9cmx9cmor 19cmx9cmx4cmor
Table 4.3 Compressive Strength of Masonry Units (Clause 4.1) IS No. 2180
: 1988
Compressive Strength N/mm’ (kgflcm’) 45 (450). 40 (GO)
1077 : 1992
35 (350). 30 (3OO),25 (250), 20 (200), 17.5 (175), 15 (150), 12.5 (125). 10 (100). 7.5 (75), 5.0 (50), 3.5 (35)
4139
20 (200), 15 (150). 10 (loo), 7.5 (75)
: 1989
2185 (Part 1) A979
7.0 (70), 5.5 (55), 5.0 (50), 4.5 (45). 3.5 (35), 3.0 (30), 2.0 (20). 1.5 (15)
2222
: 1991
7.0 (70). Min
3115
: 1992 and 3952 : 1988
3.5 (35)
1725 : 1982
3.0 (30), 2.0 (20)
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
ANNEX C (Clause
2.3)
SAMPLING i$ND TESTING OF COMMON BURNT CLAY BRICKS be as follows:
Cd CHFCKING QF TOLE&jNCES Cc1.I Twenty vqhole bricks shall be selected at random. 411 the blisters, loose particles of clay and small projections shall be removed. These shall then be arranged upon a level surface as in Fig. 4.1 in contact with each other and in a straight line. The total length of the assembled bricks shall be measured with a steel tape or other suitable inextensible measuring device sufficiently longto measure the whole row at one stretch. If for any reason it is impracticable to measure the bricks in one row of 20 bricks, it may be divided into two rows of 10 bricks each and shall be‘measured seperately to the nearest millimetre. Both dimensions shall be added.
372 to 388 cm 176to 184cm 176 to 184 cm 76 to 84 cm
C-2 SAMPLING CONFORMITY
Sample Size
More than 50 000 bricks
20 Bricks
Class 75,50,35
More than 100 000 bricks
20 Bricks
C-3 TESTS C-3.1
Compressive
Strength
Five bricks shall be tested. The average compressive strength shall be as per class designation. The compressive strength of individual brick shall not less than 20 percent, of the specified value.
(380 + 8 cm) (180f4cm) (180 f 4 cm) (for 9 cm thick bricks) (8044cm) (for 4 cm thick bricks)
AND CRITERIA
Lot Size
Class 100
C-2.2 The sampling shall be at random and the samples shall be stored in a dry place until the tests are done.
C-l.2 The dimensions of 20 bricks when measured as above shall be within the following limits: Length: Width: Height:
Brick
C-3.1.1 The bricks shall be immersed in water for 24 h at 27°C + 2°C. The surplus water shall be allowed to drain. The frog of the bricks should be filled with 1:3 cement mortar, flush to the surface and shall be cured under the jute bags for 24 h; the bricks shall then be immersed in water for 72 h. The bricks after removal shall be wiped clean.
FOR
C-3.1.2 The brick shall be placed with flat faces horizontal with the frog with mortar upside. Loads
C-2.1 The sample size for all the tests prescribed shall
A MEASUREMENT
OF LENGTH
B MEASUREMENT
OF WIDTH
C MEASUREMENT
OF HEIGHT
c
FIG.4.1 MEASUREMENTOFTOLERANCESOFCOMMONBUILDINGBRICKS 57
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 shall be applied at a uniform rate of 140 kgf/cm2 pet minute, after placing a plywood sheet or similar uniform surface on the upper side. C-3.1.3 Average of five results of compressive strength shall be reported. The compressive strength is load at failure of brick divided by surface area of brick, expressed as kgf/cm*. ,
Then they shall be immersed in water at 27 + 2°C for 24 h. After removal they shall be wiped clean and shall be weighed again, W2. C-4.3 The difference between the two weights as a percentage of the weight WI shall be recorded and the average of five bricks shall be reported as the moisture absorption. C-5 EFFLORESCENCE
If any value exceeds the specified value, this may be taken into account in reporting the results. C-4 WATER
ABSORPTION
C-4.1 Water absorption by brick shall not exceed 20 percent by weight up to class 12.5 and 15 percent by weight for higher classes. C-4.2 Five bricks shall be tested for water absorption. The bricks shall be dried in_a+oven at 110°C to 115°C till they attain constant weight. .Then they shall be allowed to cool at room temperature. Oven drying may take 48 h and cooling another 4 h on an average. The cooled bricks shall be weighed, WI.
Section 2 Construction
1 GENERAL 1.1 Introduction BrIckwork is in a way a specialized craft where different types of bricks have been tried, different types of bonds evolved with various types of mortars and a number of construction details for improving the performance of the brickwork that have emerged. The performance of brickwork includes strength, durability, waterproofing, thermal insulation, fire resistance, etc. 1.2 Setting Out 1.2.1 In case of sloping terrain, care shall be taken to ensure that the dimension on plan are set out correctly in one or more horizontal planes, after clearing the site.
C-5.1 Five bricks shall be tested for efflorescence. A shallow dish with distilled water may be arranged. The bricks on end are immersed in the water in the dish to a height of 2.5 cm. The brick should be allowed to absorb the whole water. Again pour some water and allow it to evaporate as before. The brick shall be examined after the second evaporation. C-S.2 Check for efflorescence. The efflorescence shall be ‘nil’ to ‘moderate’. For ‘nil’ there is no perceptible deposit of efflorescence. For ‘slight’ there is no more than 10 percent of area of the brick covered with a thin deposit of salts. For ‘moderate’ a heavy deposit covering up to 50 percent of the area of the bricksurface but not accompanied by flaking.
Practices -
Bridwork
1.2.3 Setting out of walls shall be done by permanent rows of pillars, parallel to and at a fixed distance from the building. The pillars shall be located at junctions of cross walls. The centre lines of cross walls shall be extended and permanently marked on plastered tops of corresponding pillars. The datum line shall be marked on corresponding rows of pillars to serve as a check ~for accuracy of work as it proceeds. The tops of the pillars shall be uniform in size say 30 cm2 in plan, and shall be bedded in ground deeply so that they are not disturbed. 1.2.4 Appropriate bench harks be located at convenient points linked to standard bench mark available neear the site. 2 TYPES OF BONDS 2.1 General
1.2.2 The building lines shall be set out with steel tapes. Setting out of angles shall be with theodolite in case of important and intricate buildings where the length is more than 16 m. In other cases they may be set out by measurement of sides. In rectangular or square setting out, the diagonals shall be checked to ensure accuracy.
The primary.object of a bond is to give strength to masonry. In brickwork, the cross joints in any course shall not be nearer than a quarter of a brick length from those in the course below it. The types of bonds generally in use, their characteristics, situations of use are described below. 58
‘.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.2 English Bond (see Fig. 4.2) The bricks in the facing are laid in alternate courses of headers and stretchers. The header course is commenced with a quoin header followed by a queen closure and continued with successive headers. The stretcher course is formed by stretchers having a minimum lap of one quarter their length over the header. The bond contributes substantially to the strength of brickwork and may be particularly suitable for carrying heavy loads. 2.3 Double Flemish Bond (see Fig. 4.3) The courses both in the facing and backing are formed with alternating stretcher and headers. In order to obtain the lap, which is equal to one-quarter of the
length of bricks, a queen closer is introduced next to the quoin header in alternate courses, the intervening ones commencing with a stretcher, and every header will obtain a location that is central with respect to the stretcher above or below. The appearance on the face may be considered as more uniform than in English bond. It requires less number of facing bricks than English bond and hence may be more economical where brickwork is faced with special facing bricks and exposed to view. Though considered inferior to English bond in strength this bond may be-suitable for single-brick thick walls in normal house construction, provided a strong mortar such as cement mortar is used.
F1ci.4.3 DOUBLEFLEMISHBOND
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.4 Single Flemish Bond (see Fig. 4.4) This facilitates the facing of wall to be in Flemish bond and the backing in English bond.This will entail the use of snap headers. This attempts to combine practically the better appearance of Flemish bond with the better strength of English bond. However increase in strength over Double Flemish bond is doubtful. 2.5 Garden Wall Bond (see -Fig. 4.5 and 4.6) English garden wall bond consists of a header course with the necessary queen closure next to quoin header to three or sometimes even five stretcher courses running in series with overlap of half-brick between stretcher over stretcher.
Flemish garden wall bond consists of alternate courses composed of one header to three or five stretchers in series throughout the length of these courses. One brick thick walls are easier to construct with these bonds than with pure Flemish or English bonds and save facing bricks considerably in the case of exposed work. 2.6 American Bond (also Known Bond) (see Fig. 4.7)
as Common
It consists of one header course to a numberof courses. This is for general use. America.
It is commonly
FIG.4.4 SINGLEFLEMISHBOND
v
/COURSE
FIG.4.5 ENGLISHGARDENWALLBOND 60
‘C’
stretcher
adopted in
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.7 Stretcher
2.8 Header
Bond (see Fig. 4.8)
In this bond all the courses are stretcher courses and the overlap is usually half brick and is obtained by commencing each alternate course with a half-bat. With a slight variation at the quoin the overlap may be varied to 314 or 1I4 brick and the bond is then known as ‘Raking Stretcher Bond’.
The facing of this bond has all the courses as headers only and the overlap, which is half the width of the brick, is obtained by introducing a three quarter bat in each alternate course at quoins. This bond is used for walls curved in plan for better alignment; and preferably in foundation footings of brick masonry for better transverse distribution.
This is generally used in l/2 brick thick leaves of cavity walls.
F~4.6
Bond (see Fig. 4.9)
FLEMISHGARDENWALLBOND
FIG.~.~ AMERICANBOND 61
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.9 Other Bonds
3 THICKNESS
The bonds covered from 2.2 to 2.8 are based on the traditional 225 mm x 112.5 mm x 75 mm brick. These are also suitable for modular bricks. Other bonds, such as, Monk Bond, Dutch Bond, English~Cross Bond are in vogue for special conditions. They give different artistic appearance.
3.1 (&nerd
f
SLATE
OF JOINT
The thickness of bed joints shall be such that four courses and three joints taken consecutively shall measure as follows:
CLOSURE
TO JAM6
F!!EsEE PLAN
OF
COURSE
-PLAN OF COURSE
I
1
I
I
I
I
‘8’
‘A’
I
I
ELEVATION NOTE-Use of stretcher bond in cavity wall construction is illustrated here. FIG.~.~STRETCHERBOND
~PLAN OF COURSE
‘A’
ELEVATION FIG.4.9 I~EADERBOND 62’ .
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 a) In the case oj’traditional brickEqual to four times the actual thickness of brick + 3 cm. b) In the case of modular brick to IS 1037 : 1992 with thickness of 39 cm the maximum thickness of joint shall be 10 mm.
3.3 Mortars Mortars shall be any one described in Table 4.1 of Part 1 of this Chapter. The strength of mortar should match strength of brick (see 2.4 of Part I for optimum mix).
3.2 Finishing of Joints
4 PREPARATORY
3.2.1 The face joints of brickwor!< may be tinished by ‘jointing’ or ‘pointing’.
4.1 Scaffolding
W-ORK
Single scaffolding shall not be used on important works, since subsequent filling up of the putlog holes and rendering of their surfaLe would give an unsightly appearance. Another disadvantage with single scaffolding is that the workmen are apt to support them on window and similar openings, thereby spoiling frames and shutters.
3.2.2 In jointing, either the face joints of the mortar shall be worked out while green to give a finished surface flush with the face of the brickwork; or the joints shall be squarely raked out to a depth of I cm while the mortar is still green for subsequent plastering. The faces of the brickwork shall be cleaned with wire brush so as to remove any splashes of mortar during the course of raising brickwork.
4.1.1 Where single scaffolding is adopted, the placing of the poles, which are to rest on the brickwork under construction, shall be so adjusted to affect only one of the headers at the point of support at various courses.
3.2.3 In pointing, the joints shall squarely be raked out to a depth of 15 mm, while the mortar is green and the raked joints shall be well brushed to remove dust and loose particles and well wetted; the joints shall then be tilled with mortar to give the required finish. Some finishes are ‘flush’, ‘weathered’, ‘tucked’, ‘ruled’, etc (see Fig. 4.10).
4.1.2 Scaffolding shall be designed to withstand the loads coming on it. They should conform to IS 3696 (Part 1) : 1987, IS 4014 (Part 2) : 1967. 4.1.3 Scaffolding for exposed brickwork or tile work shall be double scaffolding, having two sets of vertical supports. For all other brickworks in buildings, single scaffolding may be permitted subject to provision of 4.1 and 4.1.1. For such scaffolding, holes for scaffolding shall not be allowed in pillars/columns less than 1 m width; holes also shall not be permitted immediately near skew backs of arches. The holes left in the masonry works shall be filled and made good before plastering.
Pointing will offer facilities for introducing in the face joints a mortar specially prepared with regard to composition, colour, etc.
4.2 Soaking of Bricks 4.2.1 Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for a period that is sufficient for the water to just penetrate the whole depth of bricks. The period of soaking may generally be at least 6 h. The period of soaking may easily be determined by field test at site. The bricks are soaked in water for different periods and then broken to find the extent of water penetration. The least period that corresponds to complete soaking will be one allowed for. If the bricks are soaked for the required time in water that is frequently changed, the soluble salts in the brick will -be bleached out and subsequent efflorescence reduced.
c
Wetting of bricks assists in removing the dirt, sand and dust from them. Further, it prevents the suction of water from wet mortar, as otherwise mortar is likely to dry out soon and crumble before attaining strength. Also the bricks shall not be too wet at the time of use, as they are likely to slip on the wet mortar bed and there will be difficulty in ensuring plumbness of the wall.
FIG. 4.10 DIFFERENTTYPES OF POINTINGFINISHES FORBRICK WORK
63
..
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Proper adhesion of the bricks will not be possible if the bricks are too wet. 4.2.2 When bricks are soaked, they shall be removed from the tank sufficiently early so that at the time of laying they are skin dry. Soaking by spraying of water may also be permitted if~found satisfactory. 4.2;3 Bricks required for masonry with mud mortar or fat lime mortar shall not be soaked. 5 LAYING
OF BRICKWORK
5. I General
51.2 Brickwork shall be built in uniform layers. Corners and other advanced work shall be raked back. No part of a wall may rise more than 1 m high above the general construction level to avoid unequal settlement. If unavoidable the work shall be raked back at an angle not exceeding 45’ and not toothed. Toothing may be done where ~future extensions contemplated.
are
5.1.3 Vertical joints in alternate courses shall come directly over the other. Thickness of brick course shall be kept uniform. Both faces of the wall shall be kept in proper parallel planes.
Bricks shall be laid on a full bed of mortar. When laying, the bricks shall be slightly pressed so that the 5.2 Walib mortar can get into all the pores of the brick surface to &2J All qttoins shall be accurately constructed and ensure proper adhesion. Cross joints and wall joints the height of the courses checked with storey rods as shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar SO the work progresses. In general quoin bticks shall be that no hollow spaces are left. Properly filled joints ~headers and stretchers in alternate courses, the bond ensure maximum strength and ix?Sb4taHO2 to pe&!tf% being estnbiished by placing a quoin closer next to the tion of moisture which takes place mainly through the queen hettdet . joints.
In case of thick walls (two brick thick and over), the joints shall be grouted at every course in addition to bedding and flushing with another. In case of traditional bricks, the courses at top of plinth and sills, at the top of the wall just below roof slab or floor slab and at the top of the parapet, may be laid with bricks on edge.
5.2,2 Acute and obtuse quoins shall be bonded, where pructlcable in the sume way as square quoins. Obtuse
quoins shall be formed with squints showing a threequarter brick on one face nnd a quarter brick on the other, 5.3 Plasters These shall be so set out as to avoid a broken bond.
The bricks at corners and perpends shall be properly
keyed into position by using cut bricks. A typical arrangement is shown in Fig. 4.11.
5.4.1 The depths of reveals and rebates shall, where practicable conform to standat-d brick sizes to avoid cutting of bricks and thereby weakening the work. 5.4.2 The arrangement of bond at quoins, at jambs of openings shall be symmetrical. 5.5 Partitions For half brick partitions to be keyed into main walls, indents shall be left in the latter.
L
5.6 Half Brick Masonry
70 70 -
Work shall be done as in 5.1 except that all bricks shall
be laid with stretchers.
60
T FIG. 4.11 A TYPICAL ARRANGEMENTOF CUT-BRICKS IN A CORNER
51.1 Bricks with frogs shall be laid with frog-down if the frog is 2 cm deep; if 1 cm deep, they may be used either frog-down or up. The courses shall be aligned and care shall be taken to keep the perpends.
5.6.1 For the case of half-brick wall water tanks or long length of half brickwalls, reinforcement may be provided from structural considerations. Two bars of 6 mm shall be provided at every third course or as per drawings. Half the mortar joint must be first laid, then place the reinforcement followed by the rest~ofmortar, so that the bar is fully embedded inmortar. Reinforcement shall be straight. 5.7 Arches 5.7.1 General requirements as applicable.
64
of 5.1 shall be followed
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Both plain and gauged arches are covered. In plain arches, uncut bricks shall be used. In gauged arches moulded bricks shall be used. Bricks forming skewbacks shall be dressed or cut so as to give proper radial bearing to the end voussoirs. Defects in dressing up bricks shall not be covered by extra use of mortar, nor use of chips be permitted. The bricks of the spandrel wall at their junctions with extrados of arch shall be cut to fit the curvature of the arch. 5.7.2 Circular Arches They shall be either (a) plain arches and shall be built with half brick concentric rings with break joints, or (b) gauged arches with bricks cut to or moujded to proper shape. The arch work shall be carried out from both ends and keyed in the centre, The bricks shall be flush with mortar and well pressed into their positions as to squeeze out a part of their mortar and leave the joints thin and compact. All joints shall be full of mortar and thickness of joints shall not be less than 5 mm and not more than 15 mm. After the arch is completed, the haunches shall be loaded by filling upmsprandrels up to the crown level of the arch. Care shall be taken to load the haunches on two sides of the sprandrels. When the arch face has to be pointed, the face bricks shall be cut to proper shape or moulded as to have joints not more than 5 mm thick. These shall be laid to the full depth of the arch. The voussoirs shall break joints to the full depth of the arch. 5.7.3 Flat Arches These shall be gauged arches of cut brick or moulded brick to proper shape. The extrados shall be kept horizontal and the intrados shall be given a slight camber of 1 in 100 of the span. The centre of the arch from which joints shall radiate shall be determined by the point of intersection of the two lines drawn from the ends of the arch at the springing level and at 60’ to horizontal.
arch. The sequence of easing the shuttering shall be carefully worked out. The shuttering shall be struck between 24 to 48 h of the completion of the arch. This shall be done after the sprandrel has been filled in and the arch loaded. 5.8 Brick Tile Work It shall be done in the same way as brickwork as in 5.1. 5.9 Honey Comb Brickwork The honey comb brickwork shall be done with specified class of brick, laid in specified mortar. All joints and edges shall be struck flush to give an even surface. The thickness shall be half-brick only, unless Openings shall be equal and otherwise specified. alternate with half-brick laid with a bearing of 2 cm on either side. 5.10 Brickwork
in Openings
Openings shall be of such size and so spaced in walls as to reduce the cutting of bricks to minimum. The width of openings shall, as far as possible, be a multiple of width of brick. In the external walls, it is desirable to rebate the sills, jambs and heads of openings so as to form a barrier for rainwater. The sill may be sloped slightly to allow the rain water to drain off. 5.11 Parapets and Copings 511.1 The parapets and copings shall be of thickness such that their~base covers the junction of roof slab and wall which shall be further effectively treated against possible leakage of rain water. Normally a cement lime mortar ‘gola’ or fillet is done (see SP 25 : 1984) Fig. 4.12. 511.2 Coping may be of stone, concrete, brick or terraccota; it is throated underside of the projection. The top of the coping shall be slightly sloped to allow water to drain off.
In flat arches, bricks shall be laid with radial joints to the full depth of the arch and voussoirs breaking joints with each other. The arch work shall be carried out from both the ends simultaneously and keyed in the centre. The thickness ofjoints shall not exceed 15 mm.
5.12 Cavity Walls
The centering and shuttering for the arches shall~be got approved by the Authority. It shall carry the dead-and live loads without any appreciable deflection.
512.1 In building cavity walls of half-brick thickness, only stretcher bond shall be used, unless purpose made snap headers are available. When header bricks are cut and used, they are either likely to protrude into the cavity and form a ledger for mortar droppings to collect or they may be so short as to weaken the structure. The cavity shall not be less than 5 cm.
The shuttering shall be tightened with hardwood wedges or sand boxes, so that the shuttering can be eased out without any jerks being transmitted to the
The outer and inner leaves shall be tied by means of wall ties. The wall ties shall preferably be bedded with a slight fall towards the exterior part of the wall.
5.7.4 Centering and Shuttering
65
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 CONCRETE FILLET ONE COURSE OF BRICK TILES CHASED INTO PARAPET r PROTECTIVE COVER (MUD. flC)
tilTH ‘MASTIt COMPOUND
FIRST COURSE OF PARAPET MASONRY IS THICKER THAN THE WALL BY % BRICK
hCC
CEILING PLASTER
SLAB
12 mm WIDE GROOVE IN PLASTER
YA3 L SLIP JOINT AT SUPPORT OF RCC‘SiAB SECTION
Flc. 4.12 CONSTRUCTIONALDETAIL OF BEARINGOF RCC ROOF SLAB OVERA MASONRY WA.LL 5.12.5 The thicker leaf shall be arranged on the inside. The materials of leaves may be different masonry, concrete, etc. Wall ties, binding them together shall not be placed more than four brick-lengths apart horizontally and not more than five brick-heights vertically staggered. Additional ties shall be used near openings. A minimum of 5 ties/m2 of surface area of the wall shall be provided.
5.12.2
At the base of the cavity wall, the foundations and basement shall be solidly constructed up to 300 mm above the ground level. The air cavity shall begin not be less than 200 mm below the upper floor surface of the ground floor and the cavity shall be continued without interruption to the roof. The cavity shall be ventilated by air slots below the eaves level of the roof to the extent of 50 cm2 for every 20 m* of the wall. 5.12.3
Ties may be of mildsteel, flat iron or round bars suitably sloped towards the exterior wall so as to prevent water from flowing into the innerleaf. Ties may be given a protective coating from corrosion.
Precautions
The following precautions
shall be taken:
5.12.6
Efforts shall be rnade to prevent mortar dropping into cavity and remove the same in the event mortar were to be dropped.
a>Parapets
- If the top of a hollow wall ends with a parapet, the cavity shall be carried to the full height of the wall or stopped at the roof flashing level; b) Euves - If a roof projects over the top of the wall, the cavity shall be closed at the top; and Party walls - In a hollow party wall, the top of a cavity wall shall be closed just above the uppermost ceiling level and the courses over shall be continued as in solid brickwork. A sound insulation material shall be interposed between the hollow wall and solid brickwork.
5.13 Curing The wall shall be cured at least for 7 days except brickwork of mud mortar.
c>
5.14 Service Installation Provision for service installations construction itself. 5.15
5.12.4
At the points where the two ieaves of party wall come into contact, for example at windows and doors, they shall be separated by a water tight membrane.
5.15.1
Moulding
shall be made during
and Cornices
Cornices
Cornices shall not ordinarily project by more than 150 mm to 200 mm and this projection shall be obtained by projecting each brick course by not more than one-fourth of brick length. Metal clamps shall be used for cornices longer in length.
Above lintels of doors and windows, a damp-proof membrane shall be inserted sloping downwards and outwards. At solid jambs, a vertical damp-proof course shall be inserted. 66
SP 62 (S & T)~: 1997 US,2
5.16 Jointing Old Brickwork
CorOelling
Corbelling shall be brought roughly to shape by plastering with specified mortar. When the mortar is green, the mouldings shall be finished stra’ight and trace with the help of metal template. The mouldings and cornices shall be cured for seven days. They shall be protected during construction from sun and rain.
Section 3 Construction
with New
Brickwork The old brickwork shall be proper cleaned of dust, loose mortar, etc. Bricks of the same size shall be used. The surfaces of old work shall be thoroughly wetted before commencing the work.
Practice -
Blockwork
1 GENERAL
2.2 Light Weight Blocks
1.1 Inttoduction
Light weight blocks shall be embedded with a mortar mix, the strength of which is lower than mix for making blocks, to avoid formation of cracks. A 1:2:9 cement, lime, sand mortar may generally be used; for high intensity of load it shall be 1:1:6. Autoclaved blocks shall be embedded in mortar as specified in Table 4.4.
Blocks are either hollow or solid. Generally they are of light weight compared to bricks. Concrete blocks to IS 2185 (Part i) : 1979 may be used for both load bearing and non-load bearing walls. The wall thickness will vary. For leaf 2) : less
high thermal insulation, cavity walls having inner of light weight concrete blocks to IS 2185 (Part 1983 may be used. Each leaf of cavity shall not be than 100 mm.
Autoclave cellular concrete blocks to IS 2185 (Part 3) : 1984 shall not be used for foundations and for masonry below damp-proof course. 2 MORTAR 2.1 Hollow Concrete Blocks Hollow concrete blocks shall be embedded with a mortar which is relatively weaker than the mix used for making blocks in order to avoid formation of cracks. A rich or strong mortar tends to make a wall too rigid thus localizing the effects of movements due to ~temperature and moisture variations, resulting in cracking of blocks. The recommended proportion of mortar measured by volume is given in Table 4.4. Table 4.4 Mix Proportions of Mortar for Hollow Concrete Blocks (Clauses 2. I and 2.2) Sl Type of Work No.
Normal Masonry (Cement:Lime:Sand)
Reinforced Masonry (CementSand)
1. Normal work
I:
1:9to10
1 :7to8
2.
Exposed to severe conditions; high intensity of loads; plasters; heavily loaded lintels and beams
I : 1:6to7
1 :4tos
Partitions of 10 cm
I : 1:7to8
3.
NOTE -
3 CONCRETE 3.1 Concrete used for filling hollow concrete block masonry when reinforced shall be 1 cement, 2; sand and 3 coarse aggregate of size ranging from 4.75 mm to 10 mm. The water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.6. When cells exceed, 100 mm on the narrower side, the proportion of mix shall be 1 cement, 2; sand, 3icoarse aggregate for reinforced concrete and 1:3:6 for plain concrete. 4 THICKNESS 4.1 For load bearing masonry built with hollow concrete blocks, the thickness of walls shall not be less than the values as obtained from IS 1905:1987. 4.2 Light weight block in load bearing masonry for external walls in framed construction shall not be less than 200 mm. However, if they are suitably braced by lateral or vertical supports, the thickness can be 100 mm. Non-load bearing hollow block walls shall be not less than 100 mm. 4.3 Autoclaved block walls in framed construction shall also be as per 4.2, except that for load bearing work, the minimum thickness shall be 200 mm; however it can be reduced to 150 mm if properly braced. 5 LATERAL
All mortars shall have a slump of 75 mm.
I :5to6
Walls lateral Cross lateral
SUPPORT
made of blocks shall have vertical or horizontal supports at right angles to the face of the wall. walls, plasters or buttress walls shall provide the support.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 6 AVOIDANCE
OF CRACK FORMATION
6.1 General -MASONRY The major cracks in the walls or partitions in a structure constructed with blocks, whether they are of hollow of cellular types can be prevented. The preventive measures to be undertaken are covered in 6.1.1 to 6.1.5. 6.1.1 Structurul
Movements
Cracks may arise from alterations in length, curvature or orientation due to load settlement, thermal expansion or changes in moisture content. \OPENlNG In the case of framed structures, erection of partitions and panel walls shall be delayed wherever possible until the frame has taken up, as much as possible, any deformation occurring due to structural movements. Floor deformation and movementThe floor upon which a partition is built may deflect under load brought on it after the partition is built. Such deflections tend to create a noncontinuous bearing for the block leading to cracks in the partition. This can be avoided by embedding wires of 3 mm diameter of mild steel or galvanized steel or welded wire mesh strip in bed joints in cement mortar I:2 after every 900~mm to I 200 mm height. Ceiling deflection and movement - A ceiling above a partition wall may deflect under loads applied after its erection or through thermal or other movements. To avoid cracking as a result of such deflection, the partition wall shall be separated from the ceiling by a gap or by a layer of resilient material or lean mortar. When this cannot be done as in the case of plastered finishes, the risk of cracking may be reduced By forming a cut between the ceiling plaster and the wall plaster. Defection
or movement
of structural
abut-
BOND
BEAM
/-
-r
98mm
BARS.2 No.
Y--
!L L@ 6 mm STIRRUPS e @ 175 mm WC
H 480mm wx H -j 1200Ill,,?
FIG.4.13 NOMINALREINFORCEDCONCRETE BONDBEAMATSILLLEVEL 6.1.2 Control Temperature
rnents-The wails, columns or other structural elements against which the wall or partition abut, may deflect or move because of load, settlement, shrinkage or thermal effects.
of Wall Movements and Moisture Changes
Accompanying
Cracking in concrete masonry walls is often due to tensile stresses which develop when wall movements accompanying temperature and moisture change are restained by other elements of the’building or when concrete masonry places restraint on the movement of adjoining elements.
In order to avoid cracking of w:!lls or partitions as a result of such movements, a slip joint shall be provided where possible, preferably packed with a resilient mortar or lean mortar. Cracks in partition walls may occur at corners of door and window frames at lintel level or sill level. It may therefore be desirable to provide a nominal reinforced concrete band beam (see Fig. 4.13) at sill level and vertical reinforced concrete stud at either side of vertical members of frames which may in addition provide sufficient anchorage for hold fast.
a) There are three methods of controlling cracking in concrete masonry structures: 1) Specifying a limit on the moisture content of masonary units at the time of delivery and construction; 2) Incorporating steel reinforcement either in the form of nominal bond beams (see 6.1.3) or horizontal joint reinforcement (see 6.1.4); and 68
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 mix. In walls exposed to action of weather. the reinforcement shall have a mortar cover of not less than 15 mm. d) Notwithstanding the above, location of joint reinforcement shall be as follows: 1) Place the joint reinforcement in the first and second bed joints immediately above and below wall openings; It shall not extend less than 600 mm 2) beyond the openings to end of the panel whichever is smaller; Place joint reinforcement wtthm two or 3) three courses immediately below the top of the wall; 4) Joint reinforcement shall not be located closer to a bond beam than 600 mm; and 5) Joint reinforcement shall be interrupted at control joints.
3) Providing control joints to accommodate the movement of masonry (see 6.1.5). For control joints (see Chapter 13). In all concrete masonry construction, it is essential to employ only moisture controlled units. Their use, combined with the provision of control joints is generally adequate to prevent cracking in concrete masonry walls. However, bond beams or joint reinforcement, or both in different locations as considered suitable may also be used in addition to the above. 6.1.3 Nominal Bond Beams Bond beams, the use of which as structural members have been referred to in 6.2, shall also serve as a means to crack control. Norma1 bond beams shall be built in the same manner as the structural bond beams with a minimum reinforcement of two 8 mm dia mild steel bars or two 6 mm dia high strength deformed bars. Their value for this purpose is due to increased strength and stiffness they provide to a masonry wall. As a means of crack control, the area of influence of bond beam shall generally be assumed to be extend 600 mm above and below its location in the wall. In walls without openings, they shall be placed at 1 200 mm apart and may be of any length up to a maximum of 18 m (see Table 4.5). Nominal bond beams shall be discontinuous at control joints, but practice here varies depending on the structural requirements. Dummy joints shall be formed when a bond beam is continuous at a control joint. 6.1.4 Joint Reinforcement Horizontal joint reinforcement serves much purpose as bond beams in crack control. It stresses to cracking. Due to closer spacing joint reinforcement may be more effective control than bond beams.
a>Joint
the same increases adopted, in crack
reinforcement shall be preferably be fabricated from galvanized steel to IS 280 : 1978 and shall consist of two or more smooth or deformed longitudinal wires 3 mm dia or larger weld connected with 2.8 mm dia or larger cross wires. The out-to-out spacing of longitudinal wires shall be 30 mm less than the width of masonry units. Cross wires shall be welded at a pacing of 150 mm for smooth wires and 400 mm for deformed wires. Where splice in wires is necessary, it shall be lapped to a length of at least 300 mm. shall be embedded in b) The reinforcement horizontal joints at intervals of 900mm to 1 200 mm depending on panel length, height and the number and type of wall openings. Table 4.5 gives, general guidance in this regard. c) Joint reinforcement shall be used in conjunction with cement mortar not weaker than 1 : 2
Table 4.5 Recommended Length to Height Ratios for Concrete Block Masonry (Clause 6.1.3) Sl
Wall
Panel
Vertical Spacing of Joint Reinforcement
No. ri)00mm 1. Length of panel (L) irrespective of height (H), MIX 2. Ratio L/H,Max a) 200 mm thick wall b) 300 mm thick wall
18m
15 m
12m
3.0 2.25
2.75 2.00
2.50 I .75
NOTES 1 When bond beams spaced at I 200 mm are used in place of joint reinforcement, control joints shall be spaced at I8 m. 2 Where reinforcement has not been provided, the ratio L lHof wall panel shall conform to IS 1905 : 1987.
6.1.5 Control Joints Control joints are employed to reduce restraint by accommodating movement of masonry wall or movement of structural elements adjacent to the wall, and thus to control cracking. They are in fact vertical separations built into the wall at locations where cracking is likely due to excessive horizontal stresses. The spacing along the wall length depends upon: a) expected movements of the wall and other elements; b) resistance of the wall to horizontal stresses; and c) the extent and location in the wall of doors, windows, recesses, chases and other causes of stress concentration. Some typical methods of control joints are shown in Fig. 4.14 and Fig. 4.15. 6.2 Bonded Beams and Studs Used on Structural Members 6.2.1 Reinforced concrete structural bond beams may be used in concrete block masonry to meet the 69
SP
62 (S & T) : 1997 ON EXPOSED FACE OF WALL. RAKE OUT MORTAR TO 20 mm AND FILL WITH CAULKING COMPOUND\
ALTERNATE COURSESA
LC~NTROL JOINT
METHOD
A
ON EXPOSED FACE OF WA&RAKE OUT MORTAR TO 20 mm AND FILL WITH CAULKING COHPO
ALTERNATE
5
GAULKING COMPOUND OR MORTAR ON UNEXPOSED WALL
mm WIRES GREASED AND LAID IN EVERY OTHER COURSE
LKING COMPOUND OR MORTAR. ON UNEXPOSED
METHOD ALTERNATE
JAMB
WALL
B
ON EXPOSED FACE OF WAl_L.RAKE OUT MORTAR TO 20 mm AND FILL
BLOCK
mm WIRES GREASED AND LAID IN EVERY OTHER COURSE
OR MORTAR ON tiNEXPOSED WALL
METHbD
C
FIG.4.14 CONTROL JOINTSINCONCRETE BLOCKMASONRYCONSTRUCTION
ON EXPOSED
FACE OF WALL,RAKE MORTAR TO 20 mm AND FILL WITH CAULKING COMPOUNO
L/5 mm
WIRES BENT IN FORM OF Ll, GREASED AND LAID IN EVERY OTHER
L
\
CAULKING
COMPOUND
OR MORTAR UNEXPOSED
COURSE
ALTERNATE
METHOD
ON WALL
COURSES
A
FIG.4.15 PLASTERSWITHCONTROLJOINTSINCONCRETEBLOCKMASONRYCONSTRUCTION-C~~~~~~~~
70
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
WITH
CAULKING
CO~MPOUND
L 5 mm WIRES BENT tN FORM OF U, GREASED AND LAtD IN EVERY i OTHER COURSE
CAULKlNG COMPOUND OR MORTAR ON UNEXPOSED
h4ETHOD
WALL
8
ON EXPOSED FACE OF WALL,RAKE OUT MORTAR TO 20 mm AND FILL WITH CAULKING COMPOUND /r;ALTERNATE
bmm WIRES GREASED AND LA10 IN EVERY OTHER COURSE
COURSES
‘%AULKlNG COMPOUND OR MORTAR ON UNEXPOSED WALL
METHOD
C
FACE OF WALL,RAKE UT MORTAR TO 20 mm AND’FILL WITH CAULKING COMPOUND NATE
6
COURSES
L CAULKING COMPOUND OR MORTAR ON UNEXPOSED WALL
mm WIRES GREASED AND LAID IN EVERY OTHliR COURSE
METHOD
Cl
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 ON EXPOSED OUT MORTAR
FACE OF WALL,RAKE TO 20 mm AND FILL
WITH
COMPOUND
CAULKING
/-qAQ_TERNATE
CAULKING
ON
COMPOUND
MORTAR
ON
METHOD
E
EXPOSED
OUT
FACE
MORTAR
WITH
COURSES
TO
OF
WALL
WALL,RAKE
20 mm
CAULKING
OR
UNEXPOSED
AND
FILL
COMPOUND LTERNATE
&AULKING
COURSES
COMPOUND
OR MORTAR UNEXPOSED
METHOD
ON WALL
F
FIG.4.15 PLASTERSWITHCONTROLJOINTSINCONCRETEBLOCKMASONRYCONSTRUCTION- Concluded requirements of unusual stress conditions. are as below:
6.2.3 Bond beams may be provided at any of the following locations depending on the conditions described in 6.2.1. a) At floor level; b) At top of all door and window openings (in which case they serve as lintels over them); c) Below the sill in all window openings; and d) At plinth level.
Examples
a) In buildings in earth-quake regions; b) In buildings in areas where severe wind storms occur; c) In buildings in areas where unfavourable soil movements and soil subsidence occur; and d) In buildings where walls are subjected to excessive vibration or to heavy loads.
6.2.4 Apart from the horizontal bond beams, vertical reinforced concrete studs may also be provided at corners, at wall openings and at regular intervals between wall openings. The studs shall be tied in with bond beams.
In all such cases, it is necessary to provide n-ore than nominal stability for all types of masonry walls. 6.2.2 Bond beams, shall be built integrally with block masonry or with special U-shaped lintel blocks slung together with reinforcing steel placed in the core of hollow of blocks filled with M 15 concrete. The reinforcement shall conform to IS 456 : 1978; but in no case shall be less than two 12 mm dia mild steel bars. The beams are discontinuous at control joints; but the joints should be designed to transfer forces along the wall.
Non-structural in 6.1.3.
use of bond beams is already covered
7 PREPA-RATORY 7.1 Wetting
WORK
of Blocks
The blocks need not be wetted before or during the laying of the blocks. In case the climatic conditions so require, the top and sides of the blocks may be slightly
72 .
SP62(S&T):1997 moistured so as to prevent absorp&n of water from the mortar and ensure development of the required bond with the mortar.
8.2.3 To ensure satisfactory bond, mortar shall not be spread too far ahead of actual laying of the block as it will stiffen and lose its plasticity.
7.2 Scaffolding
As each block is laid, excess mortar extruding from the joints shall be cut off with a trowel and thrown back on the mortar board to be reworked into fresh mortar.
Scaffolding shall be on the same lines as brickwork, suitably modified where necessary. 8 LAYING
OF CONCRETE
BLOCKS
8.1 First Course The first course of concrete block shall be laid with great care, making sure that it is properly levelled, aligned and plumbed, to assist in obtaining a straight and truly vertical wall. Before laying the first course, the alignment of the wall shall be marked on the d.p.c. The blocks for this course shall be laid dry, that is, without mortar along a string stretched between properly located corners of the wall in order to determine the correct position of blocks including those of the cross walls jointing it and also ad.just their spacing. When the blocks are in proper position, the two corner blocks shall be removed, a mortar bed spread and these blocks relaid back in place truly level and plumb. The string shall then be stretched tightly along the faces of two corner blocks and the faces of the intermediate blocks adjusted to coincide with the line. Thereafter each block shall be removed and relaid over a bed of mortar. After every three or four blocks are laid the correct alignment and verticality be checked. 8.2 Construction The construction of walls may be started either at the corners first or started from one end preceding to the other end.
If the work is proceeding rapidly, the extruded mortar cut from the joints may be applied to vertical face shells of the blocks just laid. It’ there be any delay long enough for the mortar to stiffen or? the block, the mortar shall be removed to the mortar board and reworked. Dead mortar that has been picked up from the scaffold or from the floor shall not be used. 8.3 Closure Block When installing a closure block, all edges of the openings and all four edges of the closure block shall be buttered with mortar. The closure block shall be carefully lowered into place. If any mortar falls leaving an open joint, the closure block shall be removed, fresh mortar applied and the operation repeated. 9 PROVISION FRAMES
FOR
DOOR
AND WINDOW
9.1 Door and window frames shall be attached to the surrounding masonry either by conventional method or by 200 mm flooring nails with screwed lends fixed directly into the block, after the frame has been edged into the opening at every nailing position. The number of nails depends on the~dimensions of the frames. The nails shall be spaced at a maximum of 400 mm apart and the first nail shall not be farther than 200 mm from the corner. Frames may be attached to the masonry by holdfasts anchored in the vertical reinforced concrete studs provided to the frames (see 6.2).
If the corners are built first, they shall be built four or tive courses higher than the centre of the wall. As each course is laid at the centre, it shall be checked for alignment and level and for being plumb.
10 PROVISION
FOR ROOF
10.1 The top of the roof course shall be finished smooth with a thin layer of 1:3 cement mortar and covered with a coat of crude oil or craft paper or oil paper to ensure free movement of the roof.
Each block shall be carefully checked for alignment with a straight-edge to make sure that the faces of the blocks are in the same plane.
11 INTERSECTING
8.2.1 Each course, in building the corners, shall be stepped back by a half-block and the horizontal spacing of block shall be checked by placing a mason’s level diagonally across the corners of the blocks.
WALL
11.1 Load Bearing Walls When two load bearing walls intersect and courses are to be laid up at the same time, a true masonry bond between 50 percent of the units at the intersection is necessary. When such walls are laid up seperately, pockets with maximum 200 mm vertical spacings shall be left in the first wall laid. The corresponding course of the second wall shall be built into these pockets.
A storey rod or course pole, suitably marked provides an accurate method of finding the top of the masonry for each course. 8.2.2 When filling in the wall between corners, a mason’s line shall be stretched from corner to corner for each course and the top outside edge shall be laid true to this line. The manner of handling or gripping the block shall be such as to position the block properly with minimum adjustment.
11.2 For non-load bearing walls same bonding -methods as for load bearing walls may be used. 12 RENDERINGS
AND OTHER FINISHES
12.1 All finishes shall be as described in Chapter IO on wall finishes as the case may be. 13
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Section 4 In-Situ Walls with Soil Cement
1 GENERAL
NOTE - Sand content is the fraction of sand of the soil that passes 425 micron and is retained on 75 micron IS sieve. More
1.1 This type of in-situ construction with soil cement shall be limited to single storey construction with a wall height not exceeding 3.2 m and a minimum wall thickness of 300 mm for load bearing and 200 mm for non-load bearing walls.
than half the material is smaller than 75 micron by mass.
2.2 Soil shall be prepared as per IS 21 10 : 1980. Cement shall be mixed in proportions as given below: a) For construction of walls 2.5 to 3.5 percent by mass of dry soil depending on the density to be obtained. b) For construction of walls below plinth level and for copings. 5 to 7.5 percent by mass of dry soil, so that the crushing strength of blocks mate shall not be less than 1.4 N/mm2 (14 kg/cm2) for dry condition.
1.2 The procedure described herein may also be followed for rammed in-situ wall construction with unstabilized soil, provided the surfaces of the wall are protected by a waterproof mud plaster (see 4). 2 SOIL 2.1 Raw soil used for deleterious contents, vegetable origin, mica. be used from economy
soil cement shall be’free from such as organic matter of etc. Black cotton soil may not considerations.
For calculation purposes the unit weight of dry soil shall be taken as 1 300 kg/m3. Properties of soil cement shall be as in IS 2110 : 1980. 2.3 Preparatory
Soil shall conform to the following requirements: Sand content, percent by mass Plasticity index. percent Total soluble salts, percent by mass Sodium salts, percent by mass Liquid limit, percent
Work
2.3.1 Shuttering
35, Min 8.5 to 10.5 1, MU O.l,/t4ax 27, Max
Any timber planks suitable in local practice may be used for shuttering. The planks shall be not less than 200 mm in width and 50 mm in thickness. A typical arrangement is shown in Fig. 4.16.
WOOOEN Pl ANK MS ANGLES LOxLOx6mm
MS
END PLANK FOR CASTING WALL NEAR AN OPENING
ANGLE AT CORNER 5Ox50r6mm
4.16A NOTE-If
4.168
the thickness of wall is greater than 300 mm the shuttering details will have to be suitably modified. All dimensions in millimetres. FIG.
4.16
TYPICAL
DETAILS
OF SHUTTERING
74
FOR
300
mm THICK
WALL
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 The shuttering shall generally be in lengths ranging from 1.8 m to 3.3 m. The height of the shuttering for one lift shall be about 600 mmclear for casting the wall plus 200 mm for holding on to the portion of the compacted wall below in the previous lift. The shuttering may be lifted immediately after first lift is well compacted and the shuttering for next lift arranged. 3 WALL CONSTRUCTION
3.6 Bearing of Roof Where light roof framework is to rest on the wall, the portion of the wall directly below it shall be built with bricks laid in cement mortar 1:6 for a depth of 150 mm; or bricks made out of 7.5 percent soil cement. Beams shall rest on cement concrete bed plates. Trusses or flat roofs shall rest on brick bearing course to a depth of 150 mm laid in cement mortar 1:6. 3.7 Lintels
3.1 Preparatiou
of Soil
After the shuttering is erected, the moist stabilized soil shall be poured into the shuttering in layers of 75 mm at a time. The layer shall be uniform in depth. To control this depth, templates may be used.
Reinforced brick or cement concrete lintels may be used. The space above the lintels shall be filled either with soil cement rammed in-situ, or precast soil cement blocks laid in cement in mortar mix 1:6. 3.8 Parapet
3.2 Compaction Compaction shall be done by iron rammers. Compaction shall be started at the side and worked inwards. Ramming of the sides shall be evenly distributed to * avoid tilting of the shuttering. Verticality of the shut!tering shall be checked as compaction proceeds. 3.3 Curing
The parapet shall be of brickwork. A drip course shall be provided to drain rain water from parapet and away from the lower portions of the walls on to the roof surface. The plaster finish of the roof shall be continued from the roof surface right up to the drip course in the parapet. 3.9 Plastering
The walls shall be cured for 15 days after removal of shuttering. Curing shall be done by slight sprinkling of water at regular intervals. 3.4 Joints Vertical joints shall be provided at a spacing of not more than 2 m apart. Vertical joint shall be staggered. Fig. 4.17 gives details of joint.
Cement plaster of mix not leaner than 1:5 shall be used. It shall be applied after drying the wall for four weeks at least. The wall surface shall be given a neat cement wash before applying plaster. 4 PREPARATION
OF MUD PLASTER
3.5 Fixing Frames
4.1 Add cutback bitumen to IS 217 : 1988, grade 80/100 to mud with BHUSA which is allowed to rot for a week. About 60 kg of BHUSA should be added to a cubic metre of mud. Bitumen should be around 40 kg/m3 of soil used.
Frames for door and windows shall be fixed by iron holdfasts inserted in the wall before-hand.
4.2 Surfaces to be plastered shall be moistened before application of mud plaster.
Horizontal joints shall be formed by finishing smooth the rammed surface at the end of each lift.
I-.
/1O-f
‘i
1LO
120
c--t-
4.176 Plan of Vertical Tongue and Groove Joint
4.17A Section of Plank Used for Making Vertical Joint
Alldimensions in millimetres. FIG. 4.17 TYPICALDETAILSOF~CONSTRUCTION JOINTIN IN-SITUSOIL CEMENTWALLS OF 300 mmTHICKNESS 75
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 PART 3 STONEWORK
1 GENERAL
flaws, sandholes, ve,ins, patches of soft or loose materials, etc. The stone should not contain crypt0 crystalline silica or chert, mica or any other deleterious materials, like iron oxide, organic impurities, etc. Petrog’raphic examination of stones may bedone as per IS 1123 : 1975 which helps in identifying natural building stones.
1.1 Introduction Use of stone masonry work is~practised from earlier days and natural building stone is available extensively in many parts of the country. The types of stone masonry construction depends on local factors, such as, physical characteristics of the stone, climatic conditions, workmanship, etc. Certain broad principles of laying, bonding, breaking of joints and finish should be complied with in order that masonry develops adequate strength and presents a neat appearance.
2.3 Sizes Normally stones used in stone masonry work shall be as described below: Length mm
1.2 Types of Stones The following Indian Standards on different types of stones used for stone masonry:
a) Ashlar masonry based on 3 mm joint thickness 1 b)Block in course based on 6 mm joint thickness 1 c) Squared rubble, based on 10 mm joint thic-kness
IS 1127 : 1970 for Natural building stones. IS 1128 : 1974 for Lime stone (slab and tiles). IS 33 16 : I974 for Structural granite. IS I 130 : 1969 for-Marble (blocks, slabs, tiles). IS 3622 : 1977 for Sandstone (slabs and tiles). IS 12440 : 1988 for Precast concrete stone masonry blocks. g) IS 3620 : 1979 for Laterite stone brick.
a) b) c) d) e) f)
2 PROPERTIES
OF STONES
d)Random rubble
2.1 Strength The strength of building stones shall be adequate to carry the loads imposed. For ashlar and coursed rubble masonry, the strength shall be worked as in IS 1905 : 1987, taking into account appropriate crushing strength of stones as given in Table 4.6.
Granite Basalt Limestone (except very soft stone) Sandstone Marble Laterite
4 SELECTION
394 494
194 244
194 244
Length - 90, 140 mm in increments of 50 mm Breadth - 90, 140,290 mm in increments of 50 mm May be any shape and size but not less than 150 mm in any direction
OF STONE
4.1 In selection of stone, the situation where it is to be used shall be considered. Table 4.7 gives the recommended use of common types of stones.
Stone shall be free from defects like cavities, cracks,
2. Granite. quart&e 3. Sandstone 4. Soft stone like marble, sandstone
297 347 397
Mortars shall conform to IS 2250 : 198 1.
2.2 Durability
Type of Stone
297 347 397
3 MORTARS
30 (300) so (500) 3 (30)
I. Dense stone like granite, gneiss
597 697 797
Other ~physical properties like water absorption, transverse strength, durability, etc, as applicable to different types of stones are also covered in SP 21 : 1983. If not covered by SP 2 1 : 1983 for other stones, reference may be made to the appropriate Indian Standards.
Minimum Crushing Strength N/mm2 (kgf/cm’) 100 (1 000) 40 (400) 20 (200)
Table 4.7 Recommended
Height mm
Dimension of other natural stones for sills, lintels, arches, domes,coping stones andother stones, such as, lime stone, structural granite, laterite, marble, etc, are summarized in SP 21 : 1983.
Table 4.6 Crushing Strength of Stones (Clause 2.1) Type of Stone
Breadth mm
Use of Common Types of Stones (Clause 4.1)
Use a) Masonry work submerged in water b) Masonry below plivth level or in contact with soil Masonry work exposed to smoke or chemical fumes Fire resistant masonry For carved ornamental work, arches, veneers, etc
76
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 5 PREPARATORY
Scaffolding shal! conform to IS 3696 (Part 1) : 1987.
WORK
5.1 Dressing of Stone
5.3 Handling
The dressing of stones shall be as specified for individual types of masonry work; it shall also conform to the general requirements of dressing of stone covered in IS 1129 : 1972.
The use of grips in the tops of stones is preferable to any method of holding the stone at the end because it enables the stone to be set in final position before the tackle is released. Due care shall be taken to protect the work done against any danger during handling.
5.2 Scaffolding 52.1 Single scaffolding, except as in 52.2, having one set of vertical supports shall be used and the other end of the horizontal scaffolding member shall rest in a hole provided in the masnry. The holes shall not be left in pillars under I m in height or immediately near the skew backs and arches. Planks should be laid over the horizontal pieces. The holes in masonry shall be made good before plastering.
Various methods of handling shown in Fig. 4.18.
for lifting of stone is
5.4 Tools Tools, such as, plumb bob and line, straight edges, masons square, spirit level and trowel as described in IS 1630 : 1984 and various types of mason’s hammer and chisels as in IS 1129 : 1972 shall be used. 5.5 Wetting
Double scaffolding having two vertical supports shall be provided for pillars less than 1 m wide or for a building having more than two storeys.
Stones shall be sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent absorption of water from mortar.
rSHACKLE
TRINGS RECTANGULAR STEEL PIECE
THREE-LEGGED
CHAIN
LEWIS
r
WEDGE - SHAPED CENTRAL PIECE
MODlFlED LEGGED
LEWIS WEDGE -SHAPED STEEL PIECE
LEWI,S
THREE LEWIS
FIG. 4.18 TYPICAL DETAILSOF LIFTINGAPPLIANCESOF STONES
77
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 6 TYPES OF MASONRY
8 SQUARED
6.1 The following types of masonry are dealt with:
8.1 Uncoursed
a) Random rubble masonry brought to courses; b) Squared rubble; c) Ashlar, plain; d) Ashlar, punched; e) Special ashlar; and 1) Stone veneering. 7 RANDOM 7.1 Uncoursed
-
Uncoursed
and
(see Fig. 4.21)
In this type, the stones are roughly squared as risers or jumpers and stretches with varying heights, and are laid uncoursed. 8.2 Brought to Courses (see Fig. 4.22) The stones are similar to those used for uncoursed rubble but the worked is levelled up to courses of varying depth from 300 mm to 900 mm according to the the type of stone used.
RUBBLE (see Fig. 4.19)
This type of masonry is constructed come from the quarry.
RUBBLE
..
8.3 Coursed (First and Second Sort) (see Fig. 4.23) Coursed masonry is built in courses which may vary in height from 100 mm to 300 mm but the stones in any one course are roughly squared to the same height. The faces of the stones may be pitched to give a rockface appearance or may be dressed smooth. A variant of this type of masonry may be formed by the introduction of pinnings, that is, similar stones in the same courses, at intervals, producing a chequered effect.
of stones as they
Blocks of all shapes and sizes are selected more or less at random, and placed in position to obtain a good bond while restricting the cutting of stones to the removal of inconvenient corners with a scabbling or spalling hammer. 7.2 Brought to Courses (see Fig. 4.20) This masonry is similar to uncoursed random rubble except that the work is roughly levelled up to courses at intervals varying from 300 mm to 900 mm, according to the locality and type of stone used.
9 POLYGONAL Fig. 4.24)
RUBBLE
MATCHING
(see
9.1 Stone with no pronounced stratification is roughly hammer pitched into irregular shapes, and bedded to show face joints running irregularly in all directions.
The course heights usually correspond with the heights of quoin and joint stones.
SECTION
XX
FIG.4.19 RANDOMRUBBLEUNCOURSEDMASONRY
SECTION
XX
FIG.4.20 RANDOMRUBBLEMASONRYBROUGHTTOCOURSES
78 .
*
..,I
--
,I.)
,_
4
ti
*,.
.
...,
.
/,...
^,,S
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
SECTION
XX
FIG. 4.2 1 SQUAREDRUBBLEUNCOURSEDMASONRY
SECTION
XX
FIG. 4.22 SQUAREDRUBBLEMASONRYBROUGHTTO COURSES
[-COPING
-BOND STONE
SECTION
I-X
XX
FIG. 4.23 SQUAREDRUBBLE COURSEDMASONRY 10 PLAIN ASHLAR 10.1 Every stone shall be cut to required size and shape; and chisel dressed on all beds and joints so as to be free from bushing. Dressing of exposed face of stone shall be done to suit the type of ashlar masonry to be adopted, namely, plain ashlar, sunk or moulded ashlar, punched or tooled ashlar, rock-faced ashlar or block-in-course ashlar. Bond stones (see 12.1) shall be provided between 1.5 m to I .8 m apart in every course. Heights of stones shall be such that masonry has regular courses. In width it shall be at least twice the height.
FIG. 4.24 POLYGONALRUBBLE WALLING
79
11 LAYING OF STONES REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
11.1 In all types of masonry below shall be compiled with.
the particulars
given
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 11.2 The stone should be laid so that the pressure is always perpendicular to the bed. The courses shall be built perpendicular to the pressure’ which the masonry will bear. In case of battered walls, the base stone and the plane courses shall be at right angles to the batter. 11.3 In the case of coursed rubble masonry, if the heights of the courses vary, the largest stone shall be placed in the lowest course; the thickness of courses shall also decrease gradually to the top. Vertical joints shall be staggered as far as possible. Bell shaped bond stones or headers shall not be used. All the necessary chases for joggles, dowels and cramps should be ft>rmed in the stones before hand. 11.4 Sufficient transverse bonds should be provided by the use of bond stone extended from the front to~the back of the wall and from outside wall to the interior of thick wall and in the latter case bond stones shall be overlap each other in their arrangement. At all angular junctions, the stones at each alternate course shall be well bonded into the respective courses of adjacent wall.
DOOR
11.5 Where there is break in the masonry work, the masonry shall be raked in sufficiently long steps for facilitating jointing of old and new work. The stepping of the raking shall not be more than 45°C to the horizontal. Walls and pillars shall be carried up truly plumb as to the specified batter. 11.6 Fixing of Frames Where door or window frames fixed in the openings, holdfasts may be used (see Fig. 4.25). 11.7 Bearing of Floors, Roofs and Joists Corbels or brackets shall be provided for resting of joists. Beams carrying heavy loads shall be supported by templates of concrete or stone. 11.8 Jointing and Pointing All joints shall be full of mortar. Pointing may be avoided. If unavoidable, raking is done and types of pointing shall be as per Fig. 4.10 for brickwork.
FRAME \
NUT AND
HOLDFAST--/ CONCRETE
F1~4.25
BLOCK
POSITIONOFHOLDFASTSTODOORFRAME 80
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 The use of chips shall be restricted to filling of the interstices between adjacent stones in hearting and shall not exceed 20 percent of the masonry.
Ail green work shall be protected suitably from rain, atid dust, etc; All faces shall be kept moist for seven days, The top of the masonry shall be flooded with water: 12 LAYING MABONWY i&i
OF DIFFERENT
TYPES
OF
fl
General
C&t&al details of laying shalt be as per 11. 1%9 ib-mdam Rubble (Unraursed Cmme)
aad Brought to
stones shall be small enough to be lifted by hand. The length of stone shall not exceed three times the height; and breadth on the bnae shdli not exceed three fourth the thickness of waif not lew than 150 mm. The height of stone fray be tip to 300 mm. Normally
When masonry is interrupted, it shall be raked to 45OC for continuing later on. Bond Stones - Bond stones shall be provided in walls up to 600 mm thick; in case of thicker walls two or more bond stones shall be provided overlapping each other by at least 150 mm, in a line from face to back. Bond stones or through stones run right through the thickness of masonry. In case of highly absorbent bond stones, such as, porous lime stone, sand stone, etc, the bond stone should extend only about two-third into the wall. Through stones in such cases may give rise to dampness. Therefore for all such thickwalls, a set of two or more bond stones overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall be provided.
Stone shall be hammer dressed on the face, sides and beds to enable it to Abe in close proximity with the neighbouring stone. The bushing In the face shall not project more than 40 mm ofl the exposed face, and 10 mm on a
When bond stones of suitable length are not available, cement concrete blocks of 1 : 3 : 6 cement, sand, 20 mm graded aggregate mix shall be used.
face to be plastered, Bond shall be obtained by fitting closely the adjacent stones and by using a bond stone. Face stones shall extend beyond the bond well into the backing, These shall be arranged to break joints and to avoid long vertical lines as much as possible. The hearting or interior of the wall shall consist of rubble stones which may be of any shape, but shall not pass through a circular ring of 150 mm inner diameter. Thickness of stone in any direction shall not be lesser than 100 mm. Every stone shall be carefully fitted to the adjacent stone so as to form a neat and close joint. They shall be carefully laid, hammered down with a wooden mallet into proper position and solidly bedded in mortar; chips and spawls of stone may be used wherever necessary, to avoid thick mortar joints. It shall be ensured that there are no hollow spaces left anywhere in the masonry,
g)
h)
At least one~bond stone for every 0.5 rn’~of the wall surface shall be provided. All the bond stones shall be suitably marked. Quoins shall be selected stones neatly dressed with hammer or chisel to form the required angle and laid as stretcher and headeralternately. Face joints, shall not be more than 20 mm thick. When pointing or plastering is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. Otherwise, the joints shall be raked back to a minimum depth of 20 mm by raking tool while the mortar is green.
12.3 Coursed Rubble Masonry -
First Sort
a) Faces shall be hammer dressed on all beds, so as to give them approximately rectangular block shape. These shall be squared on all joints and beds. The bed joints shall be rough chisel dressed for at least 80 mm back from the face and for at least 40 mm for side joints so that no portion of the dressed surface is more than 6 mm away from a straight edge placed on it. The bushing on the face shall not project more than 40 mm as an exposed face and 10 mm on face to be plastered. The hammer dressed stone shall have a rough tooling for a minimum width of 25 mm along the edges of the face of the stone, when stone work is exposed.
The hearting shall be laid nearly level with facing and backing, except that about 1 m intervals, vertical ‘plumb’ projecting about 150 mm to 200 mm shall be firmly embedded to form a bond between successive courses.
Stones may be brought to level courses at plinth, window sill and roof level. Levelling for this purpose shall be done with a mix of one part of mortar and two parts of graded aggregate 20 mm size. Chips shall not be used ~below the heartening to bring these up to the level of face stones. 81
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
b) All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all
two stones shall not be used in the height of a course.
vertical joints shall be truly vertical. The height of each course shall be not less than 150 mm and not more than 300 mm.
c) Face joints shall not be more than 20 mm thick. When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. Otherwise joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by raking tool during the progress of work, when the mortar is green.
Face stones shall be laid alternate headers and stretchers. No pinning shall be allowed on the face. No face stone shall be less in breadth than its height and at least one-third of the stones shall tail into the work not less than twice their height.
12.3 Plain Ashlar Masonry (see %ig. 4.26)
c>Hearting
or the interior filling of the wall shall consist of stones carefully laid on their proper beds in mortar. Chips and spawls of stone may be used where necessary to avoid thick bed joints of mortar and at the same time ensuring that no hollow spaces are left anywhere in the masonry. The chips shall not be used below the hearting stone to bring these up to the level of face stones. The use of chips shall be restricted to the filling of the interstices between the adjacent stones in hearting and these shall not exceed 10 percent of quantity of stone masonry.
a) Every stone shall be cut to the required size and shape, so as to be free from any waviness and to give truly vertical and horizontal joints. In exposed masonry, the faces are to remain exposed in the final position and the adjoining faces to a depth of 6 mm shall be fine chisel dressed so that when checked with a straight edge, no point varies from it by more than 1 mm. The top and bottom faces, that are to form bed joints, shall be chisel dressed so that the variation from a 60 cm straight edge at no point exceeds 3 mm. Faces, which are to form the vertical joints, should be chisel dressed so that variation at any point with straight edge does not exceed 6 mm. Any vertical face which hasto come against backing of masonry shall be dressed such that variation from the straight edge does not exceed 10 mm.
The masonry shall be carried on continuously; but when breaks are unavoidable, the joints shall be raked by at an angle not steeper than 45°C. Toothing shall not be allowed.
4 Bond stones shall be the same as in 12.1; bond stones shall be inserted 1.5 m to 1.8 m apart, in every course.
All angles and edges of masonry that are to be exposed in the tinal position shall be true, square and free from chippings.
e) Quoins
shall be of the same height as the course in which they occur. These shall be at least 4.50 mm long and shall be laid stretchers and headers alternately. These shall be laid square on the beds, which shall be roughly chisel dressed to a depth of at least 100 mm. In case ~of exposed work, these stones have a minimum of 25 mm wide chisel drafts at four edges; all the edges shall be in the same plane.
A sample of dressed stone shall be prepared for approval of the Authority. b) in case of ashlar work wihout backing of brick work or coursed rubble masonry, face stone shall be laid headers and stretchers alternately unless otherwise specified, the headers shall be arranged to come as nearly as possible in the middle of stretchers above and below. Stone shall be laid out in regular courses of not less than 150 mm in height and all courses shall be of the same height unless otherwise specified.
f-1 Face joints shall not be more than 10 mm thick. When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. Otherwise the joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by raking tool during work when the mortar is still green. 12.4 Coursed Rubble Masonry -
For ashlar work with backing of brick work or coursed rubble masonry,. face stone shall be laid in alternate courses of headers and stretchers, unless otherwise directed. Face stone and bond stone courses shall break joint on the face for at least half the height of the standard course and the bond be carefully maintained through out. All the connected masonry in the structure shall be carried up nearly at the uniform level through out; but where breaks are unavoidable, the joint shall be made in good long steps so as to prevent cracks developing between new and old work.
Second Sort
a ) Dressing shall be as in 11 except but no portion of dressed surface shall exceed 10 mm from a straight edge placed on it. b) Laying shall be as in 11 except that the use of chips shall not exceed 15 percent of the quantity of stone masonry. The stone in each course need not be of the same height, but more than 82
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 When necessary, jib crane or other mechanical appliances shall be used to hoist heavy pieces of stones, to place these in correct position; care shall be taken to see that corners of stones are not damaged, Stone shall be covered with gunny bag hefore a chain or rope for tying is passed over it and shall be handled carefully. No piece which has been damaged shall be used in the work.
or bushing shall project more than 75 mm from plane of drafts. 12.8 Ashlar Rough Tooled (see Fig. 4.29)
a>The
dressing of the stone shall be similar to plain ashlar as in 12.4 except that the face exposed to view shall have a fine chisel draft 25 mm wide round the edges and shall be rough tooled between the draft such that the dressed surface shall not deviate more than 3 mm from the straight edge placed over it.
Cl joint8 shall Hd be more than 5 mm thick. Face joints shall be tmiform throughout and a
unifotm recesb of 20 mm depth from face shall be ieft with the help of a st%elplate during the progress of Work.
b) Other requirements shall be as in 12.5. 12.9 Ashlar Chamfered
d) All exposed joints shall be pointed with mortar as specified, The~pointing when finished shall be sunk from atone face by 5 mm or as specified, The depth of mortar in pointing work shall fiat be less than 15 mm,
a>The dressing
shall be as in 12.5 except that the levelled off to 45°C for a depth of about 25 mm or more as specified.
b) 126
Ashiar &it& 6t l%ulded
(see Fig. 4.30)
Other requirements
shall be as per 12.5.
(see Fig. 4.27) 12.10 Ashlar Block in Course (see Fig. 4.31)
The faces shall then be gauged, cut, grooved, rebated, sunk d plain maulded as required. For this purpose a full site layout of the mouiding_shtlll be prepared on platforms for which sheet tempiates shall be cut and the stone dressed to the templates to a uniform and fine finish. The dressed surface shd not be mare than 3 mm from the straight edge placed on it.
a) The stones are dressed all squared and laid to fine joints; the faces being usually hammer dressed. The stones selected may be larger size than plain ashlar. b) The other requirements are as in 12.5; except that the courses vary between 200-250 mm in thickness. This type of masonry is therefore superior to coursed rubble masonry.
All visible angles and edges shall be true and free from clippings. The joints, 6 mm from the face shall also be fine tooled so that a straight edge placed on it is in contact with-every point. It shall be finest surface that can be given to a sfdHIwith the chisel and without rubbing. Other requirements shall be as in 12.5
12.11 Ashlar Masonry for Special Works a) Special works include arch dome, circular moulded works, moulded and carved columns, etc.
12.7 Ashiar Rack Faced (see Pig, 4.28)
b) The dressing of the stone shall be as in 12.5 except giving the appropriate shape to the stones as required in each specialized work.
Dressing shall be as per 12,s; except that the exposed faces of the stone betweeh the drafts shall be left rough as the stone corners frotn fhe quarry; but no rock face
FIG.4.26 PLAINASHLAR 83
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 12.12 Laterite Stone Masonry a) Lateritestone should be compact in texture. It may be mottled with streaks of brown, red and yellow colours. It should not contain white clay or lithomarge or an appreciable number of deep sinuosities. Blocks should be obtained from a good ferrugenous variety of laterite which hardens on exposure after it is quarried. b) Stones should be dressed immediately after quarrying into regular rectangular blocks, so that all faces are free from waviness and edges are straight and square. Blocks may be cut to size either manually or by machine; for good quality work machine cut blocks may be used. Stone blocks after dressing shall be exposed to atmosphere for a period of 3 months before use in masonry. The stone, on exposure changes its nature and improves in compreLive strength. c) Blocks are laid in masonry in regular horizontal courses, breaking bond of vertical joints in every course to the extent of half the height of blocks. When the thickness of a masonry element is more than the breadth, these should be laid as headers and stretchers as in English Bond. d) Joint thickness shall not be more than 10 mm. Faces may be plastered, pointed or finished flush. Joints should be raked to a depth of 15 mm for pointing, while the mortar is green. e) Other requirements should be as in 12.5 as applicable.
FIG. 4.27 SUNKOR MOULDED
FIG. 4.28 ROCKOR QUARRYFACED
12.13 Stone Veneering a) Lime stone and sand stone -Dressing shall be as per 12.5; except that the top, bottom and vertical sides which are to form joints shall be chisel dressed so that variation from a straightedge at no point exceeds 5 mm. Dressing at the back should not be done so as to~ensure good grip work for the backing. All the angles and edges that are to remain exposed in final position should be from-chippings. b) Marble slabs - Marble slabs should be cut to the required size and shape and chisel dressed on all beds and joints so as to be free from any waviness and to give truly vertical and horizontal, radial and circular joints as required. The exposed faces and joints 12 mm from the face should be fine tooled such that straight edge laid along the face of the slab is in contact, with every point on it. The~surfaces shall then be rubbed smooth. Beyond the depth of 12 mm from the face, the joints should be dressed with a slight spray so that joints are V-shaped, being thin at face and wide at the back. Back surface in contact with the backing shall not be dressed.
FIG. 4.29 ROUGHTOOLEDOR PUNCHED
FIG. 4.30 CHAMFERED
84
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
SECTION
XX
FIG. 4.31 BLOCK-INCOURSE ASHLAR MASONRY supports shall be at vertical intervals not more than 3;5 m apart and also over the head of all openings. Such supports shall also be provided when there is a transition from thin facings to thick facings above.
c) Slabs should be anchored to be backing by means of cramps (of bronze, gun metal or other non-corradible metal). Cramps may be of 25 mm x 6 mm and 30 mm long; they may be provided as shown in Fig. 4.32. The cramps shall be spaced not more than 600 mm apart. Alternatively the slab may be secured to the backing by means of stone dowels 100 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm as per shape indicated in Fig. 4.33; the adjoining stone secured to each other by means of gun metal cramps or copper pins of specified size. Cramps may be attached to its sides and/or top and bottom (see Fig. 4.34). The actual number of cramps and their sections shall however be as per design to carry the loads [see IS 4101(Part 1) : 19671.
4
Alternatively, cramps may be used to hold units position. The pins, cramps and dowels shall be laid in cement mortar 1 : 2. The types of cramps are shown in Fig. 4.35. As far as possible the backing shall be carried out simultaneously with the face work. In case of reinforced cement concrete backing, the lining shall be secured after the concrete has been cured. The cramps shall be laid in position in concrete while laying. All joints shall be full of mortar specified. Special care shall be taken to see that the grounding for veneer work is full of mortar. The thickness of joints shall be as small as possible and not more than 5 mm.
e>
When cramps are used to hold units in position only, the facings shall be provided with a continuous support on which the stones rest, as the support being in the form of a projection from or recess into the concrete slab as beam. These
85
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
L
I-
I
T0
tP LGUN
METAL
CRAMP FEXPOSED
L
FACES
AND
FACE- JOINTS
SECTIONAL ELEVATION AT PQ
/
I
SECllONAL
‘A’
.
’
‘ELEVAlION
FULL SIZE DETAIL
MORTAR
/-“‘ORTAR /@J
6,75 mm LONG COPPER PIN
I
SECTIONAL PLAN FULL SIZE DETAIL A
FIG. 4.32 TYPICALDETAILSOFFIXINGSTONEVENEERWORK FACINGUSINGGUN METAL CRAMPSANDCOPPERPINS
86
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
STONE
GUN
VENEER SECTIONAL
I
u
FAC E
L
ELEVATION
SECTIONAL (FULL SIZE
N
CRAMP
PLAN
JOINTS
SECTIONAL
METAL
GUN
AT
METAL
CRAMP
PQ
ELEVATION DETAILS AT’A’)
METAL
CRAMP
SECTIONAL (FULL SIZE
PLAN DETAILS
AT ‘A’)-
FIG. 4.33 TYPICAL DETAILSOF FIXING STONEVENEER WORK USING STONEDOWELS AND GUN METAL CRAMPS 87
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
BRICK
VENEERING
UT
WORK
-.__~.A..
BACKING
“”
GUN METAL CRAMP
FIG. 4.34 TYPICAL DETAILSOF FIXING STONEFACING SHOWINGUSE OF GUN METAL CRAMPS
SE’ 62 (S & T) : 1997
BACKING WALL
/
WASHER f
/
FIG. 4.35 TYPESOFCRAMPSFORSTONEFACINGS
F GUN-METAL
CRAMP
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER 5
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
CONTENTS
PART 1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PLAIN AND REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE
8.2 Centrally Mixed Concrete 8.3 Truck Mixed Concrete 9 NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTS
1 GENERAL
ANNEX A PARTICLE SIZE ‘PINDSHAPE OF COARSE
2 MATERIALS
AGGREGATE
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.4
Cement Aggregates Water Admixtures Pozzolanas Reinforcement
3 GRAD= OF CEMENTCONCRETE
3.1 General 3.2 Design Mix Concrete 3.3 Nomfnal Mix Concrete OFCONCRETE 4 PRODIKTIONAND.CONTROL 4.1 General 4.2 Batching
ANNEX B TEST FORSURFACEMOISTURE ANNEX C ACCELERATEDCURING FOR DETERMINATIONOFCOMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OFCONCRETE
PART 2 REQUIREMENTS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE
1 GENERAL 2 FORMWORK 2.1 General 2.2 Materials of Formwork 2.3 Reinforcement PART 3 LIME AND LIME POZZOLANA MIXTURE CONCRETE
5 MIXING 5.1 General 5.2 Machine Mixing 5.3 Hand Mixing PLACING,COMPACTING AND 6 TRANSPORTING, CURING 6. I Transporting
6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
Placing Compaction Construction Joints Curing Supervision
7 CONCRETING UNDERSPECIALCONDITIONS 7.1
7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6
~Workin Extreme Weather Conditions Hot Weather Concreting Cold Weather Concreting Under-Water Concreting Concrete in Sea-Water Concrete in Aggressive Soils and Water
8 READYMIXED CONCRETE 8.1
General
Section 1 Lime Concrete 1 GENERAL
2 MATERIALS 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
Lime Cement Pozzolana Coarse Aggregate Fine Aggregate Water
3 PROPERTIES OFLIMECONCRETE 3.1 Workability 3.2 Rate of Hardening and Setting Time 3.3 Strength 4 MIXING 4.1
General 4.2 Hand Mixing 4.3 Machine Mixing
5 LAYING OF LIME CONCRETE 5.1 General
2 MATERIALS
5.2 In Foundations and Under Floors 5.3 In Haunches of Arches Section 2
Lime Pozzolana Concrete
3 MIXING
Mixture
4 LAYING
1 ~GENERAL PART 4 I GENERAL
2 MATERIALS 3 SHOTCRETINGPROW% 3.1
"I*LI~IU1 r-4...3rnl
3.2 Dry-Mix Process 3.3 Wet-Mix Process 4 PROPORTIESOF SHOTCRETE 5 PRE-CONSTRUCTIONTESTING 6 -h’bXlNG
6.1 Dry-Mix Process 6.2 Wet-Mix Process
SHOTCRETE 7 APPLICATIONOF SHOTCRETE 7.1 Surface Preparation
7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7. I 0 7. I 1
Formwork Reinforcement _A!ign_mentContro! Placing of Shotcrete Rebound Preparation for Succeeding Layers Construction Joints Finishing Suspension of Work Curing
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
CHAPTER 5
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE PART
4
Ilhaan”r\LI
I ~~VIIVIUIY
L)l!cn,
Ilc)el”e~l-rc
n~bw~n,c~vici~
CEMENT
n,
CAl3
run
I3
Alhl
ruwv
fiNIn
HIYY
“elrler\anen
nciiw-wnbcu
CONCRETE
1 GENERAL
is placed. The resistance of concrete to weathering, chemical attack, abrasion, frost and fire depends la;1.1 Concrete mix proportions shall be selected to engely upon the quality and constituent materials. Sussure that the workability of fresh concrete is suitable ceptibility of corrosion of steel is governed by the t&the rnnA;t;nnr nfh.znrllinn .znA Y‘UtiU16, nl,w.inn rnth~t oftar 1”I CLlV U”LIU‘CI”.ILI “I ,XL.,U”‘,6U,.U U”~CL,clL U&l”& cover provided and the preamibility of concrete. completion it surrounds all reinforcements and comOne of the main characteristics influencing durability of pletely fills the formwork. When concrete is harany concrete is its permeability. With strong and dense dened, it shall have the required strength, durability andsurface finish. aggregates, a suitably low permeability is achieved; by having a sufficiently low water-cement ratio, by ensur1.2 The strength of concrete depends on the mix ing as thorough a compaction as possible and by achievproportions of cement, aggregates, and water. Coning sufficient hydration ofcement through proper curing crete mixes can be designed and this is called ‘Design methods. Therefore, for given aggregates, the cement Mix’; otherwise ‘Nominal Mix’ is generally adopted. content should be sufficient to provide adequate Design mix concrete is preferred to nominal mix. If workability with low water-cement ratio so that concrete design mix cannot be used for any reason, nominal can be completely compacted with the means available. mixes may be used; however this is likely to increase The cube-crushing strength alone is not a reliable guide cement content than by design mix. to the quality and durability of concrete; it must also 1.3 The durability of concrete depends on its resishave ai adequate cement- content and a low water tance to deterioration and the environment in which it cement ratio as indicated below: Exposure
Plain Concrete A F \ Minimum Maximum Cement Water Content Cement Ratio kg/m3 I_\ IT)\ (L,J (3)
i II\ 1’1 Mild - For example, completely protected against weather, or aggressive conditions, except for a brief period of exposure to normal weather conditions during construction Moderate -For example, sheltered from heavy and wind driven rain and against freezing, whilst saturated with water; buried concrete in soil and concrete continuously under water Severe - For example, exposed to sea water, alternate wetting and drying and to freezing whilst wet, subject to heavy condensation of water or corrosive fumes
Reinforced Concrete c \ f Minimum Maximum Cement Water Content Cement Ratio kg/m’ I”\ ,r\ (4)
(3)
220
0.7
250
0.65
250
0.6
290
0.55
310
0.5
360
0.45
NOTES 1 When the
maximumwater-cementratio can be strictly
controlled, the cement
content may
be reduced by 10 percent.
2 The minimum cement content is based on 20 mm aggregate. For 40 mm aggregate, it should be reduced by about IO percent: for 12.5 mm aggregate, it should be increased by about IO percent.
2 MATERIALS
b) IS 804 1 : 1990 Rapid hardening Portland cement; c) IS 455 : 1989 Portland slag cement; d) IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 199 1 Portland poz_-1...- .~~ ..~I zolana cement;
2.1 Cement Any of the following cements may be used as required. a) IS 269 : 1989 Ordinary Portland cement, 33 grade; 95
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 e) IS 8112 : 1989 43 ~Grade ordinary Portland cement; f) IS 8043 : 1991 Hydrophobic Portland cement; g) IS 269 : 1987 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement; h) IS 12600 : 1989 Low heat Portland cement; j) IS 6452 : 1989 High alumina cement and IS 6909 : 1991. Supersulphated cement may be ..rPrl fiml., ..n,-Ic.,-‘..,‘ao;nl n:..,wIm"tnnr.‘a" u3cIu "rrlJ "Ll"c.l qAA&lL Lll\r"IIIJLaIILb"a* 2.1.1 Recommended
Uses of These Cemertts
The type of cement selected shall be suitable for the intended use. Some guidelines are as below: may be used for most of the works; it has a ‘28 days strength of 33 MPa (33 kg/cm2).
ful effects may be used for secondary members; but such aggregates should not contain more than 1 percent of sulphates and should not absorb more than (0 percent of their own mass of water. 2.2.3 Heavy weight aggregates or light weight aggregates such as bloated clay aggregates may also be used provided sufficient data on the properties of concrete made with them is avai!ab!e. 2.2,4 Fly ash conforrtting to IS 38 12 : 1981 may be used as part repiacement up to 20 percent of fine aggregate. It shah be ensured that cement is thoroughly intermixed with fly ash.
a) Ordinary portland cement
b) Grade 43 ordinary portland cement can be used in works where grade 33 is used and where the spaces are longer.
c>For
higher strength requirements of works or for specialized works, such as, prestressed concrete work, higher grades of cement such as 53 grade ordinary portland cement may be used.
4 Rapid hardening
portland cement gains strength more rapidly at early ages, but has a strength comparable to ordinary portland cement. Therefore, it can be used where early strength is required.
e) Slag cement has a low heat of hydration and has better resistance to soils and water containing excessive amounts of sulphates as well as to acidic waters. Therefore it may be used for marine works. However manufacturers’ recommendations should be followed.
2.15 Aggregates sh0uid be free from deieterious materials, such as, iron pyrites, coal, mica, slate, clay, alkali, soft fragments, sea shell8 and tither organic impurities. IS 383 : 1970 gives lithlts of such deleterious impurities passing 75 mlcroti IS sieve. Aggregates containing reactive silica, such as, chert and chacendony shall not be used. Soft lime stone, soft sand stone or other porous or weak aggregates shall not be usedfor concrete in sea water. Inadequate washing of aggregates leaves clay or dust films over the surface of the aggregates; this prevents adhesion of cement to aggregate and results in weak concrete. 2.2.6 The following tests in the field may be done based on IS 2386’(Parts 1 to 8) : 1963. a) Particle size and shape (see Annex A). of surface moisture b) Determination Annex B). 2.2.7 Grading and Sizes
f) Pozzolana cement produces less heaton hydration and offers greater resistance to the attack of agressive waters than ordinary portland cement. It is useful in marine structures and mass concrete work. It does not develop strength in early ages. It can be used in works where ordinary portland cement is used.
2.2.7.1
Grading
4 Fine aggregate is defined as aggregate mainly b)
S) The other special cements shall be used as per manufacturers’
(see
recommendations.
2.2 Aggregates
passing 4.75 mm IS sieve and coarse aggregate as that mainiy retained on this sieve. Fine aggregates are divided into four zones (see Chapter 4, Part 1 on mortars also). Most of the natural sands found in the country have gradings corresponding to one or the other of these zones.
2.2.1 Coarse and fine aggregates obtained from natural sources shall conform to IS 383 : 1970. The aggregates may be tested as per IS 2386 (Parts 1 to 8) : 1963.
Typical good sands fall in Zone II grading. However, finer or coarser sand may be used with suitable adjustments in the ratio of quantities of coarse to fine aggregates.
2.2.2 Other aggregates such as slag and crushed overburnt brick or tile, which may be found suitable with regard to strength, durability and freedom from harm-
Very fine sands as included in Zone IV grading should not be used except when the concrete is closely controlled by the use of design mixes.
96
/.
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 With nominal mix concrete, it is not advisable to use Zone IV sand under any circumstance, and to avoid use of Zone I, if a lean concrete mix is desired.
Table 5.1 Graded Aggregate (Clause 2.2.7. I) IS Sieve Designation
c) Grading of coarse aggregate shall be controlled by obtaining, the aggregates in different sizes and blending them in right proportions when required, the different sizes being stacked in separate stock piles.
2.2.7.2
Size
a ) The nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate should be as large as possible within limits specified but in no case greater than onefourths of the minimum thickness of the members, provided that the concrete can be placed without difficulty to fill all corners of the form and to surround all reinforcement. For (light) reinforced concrete work, aggregates having a nominal size of 20 mm are generally considered satisfactory. Plums above 160 mm and up to any reasonable size may be used in plain concrete work up to a maximum limit of 20 percent by volume of concrete when specifically permitted. The plums shall be distributed evenly and shall not be cioser than i60 mm from the surface. b) For heavily reinforced concrete members, as in the case of ribs of main beams, the nominal maximum size of aggregate should usually be restricted to 5 mm less than the minimum clear distance between the main bars or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to reinforcement whichever is smaller.
Passing~for Normal Size of Aggregate A
40 mm
mm
20 mm
80
100
40
95-100
100
20
30-70 -
95 100
16
16mm
100
100
90-100
‘XI-IO0
IO-35
2.5-55
30-70
40-85
4.15
o-s
o- IO
O-10
2.36
-
-
O-IO -
IO
Table 5.2 Single Sized Aggregate (Clause 2.2.7. I) IS Sieve Designation mm
Percentage f 63 mm
80
100
I
12.5 mm
-
12.5
Graded aggregate shall conform to the requirements in Tables 5.1,5.2,5.3 and 5.4. dj Aii-in-aggregates shaii conform to requirements in Table 5.5. If combined aggregates are available they need not be separated into fine and coarse aggregates; but necessary adjustment may be made in grading by addition of single size aggregates.
Percentage
(Ungraded)
Passing for Normal Size of Aggregate h
40 mm
20 mm
I6 mm
-
-
-
63
85-100
100
-
-
40
O-30
85-100
100
-
12.5 mm IO mm -
-
20
o-s
O-20
85-100
100
-
-
16
-
-
-
8.5-100
100
-
12.5
-
-
-
-
8%100
0-j
U-Xl
^ _
100
i0
u-4>
,._ KS-
o_5
^ ^^ u-20
^ ^^
\
.^^ ItJO
4.15
-
-
o-s
o-s
O-IO
O-20
2.36
-
-
-
-
-
o-s
Table 5.3 Making Single Sized to Graded Aggregate (Clause 2.2.7.1) P,.-,.-_4 L51115111h,,....:..“, I.“IIIIII~E Concrete Mix
1:6: 12 _ .^ 1:5: 10
I :4:8
Where reinforcement is widely spaced as in solid slabs, limitations on the size of the aggregate may not be so important and the nominal maximum size may sometimes be as great or greater than the minimum cover.
Size of Graded Aggregate Required 63
Dmr,r 6x”,,rx~&‘C~“.L A,.“m”n+‘.‘c. I ‘lxID,.F “I cx”“lr. U.I,RLC O.&C L” be Mixed to Get Graded Aggrepte (by Volume) A
r SO mm 9
9 7.5
-
2.5
40
-
7.5
2.5
63
6
-
2
6
2
63
4,s
40
-
20 l:2:4
c? Coarse and fine aggregates shall preferably be batched separately, specially for design mix concrete.
l:l.S:3
40 20
-
12.5
-
20
-
-
3
63
40
.
20 mm 125 mm IO mm
3
40 l:3:6
40 mm
--
--
I.5
-
-
I.5
-
-
4.5
-
1,s
2.5
I
-
0.5
-
3
4.5
I 3
-
2
I I
NOTE - Proportions indicated arc by volume. If single sized aggregate specified is not available, the volume of single sized aggregates shall be varied with a view to obtain the graded aggregate. ,
d) The largest possible size, properly graded, should be used in order to reduce the water demand. For high compressive strengths of concrete, it is usually economical.
97
*ul._-.
_
.._”
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.3.1 In case of doubt regarding development of strength, the suitability of water for making concrete shall be ascertained by compressive strength and initial setting time tests as specified in 2.3.1.2 and 2.3.1.3.
Table 5.4 Grading of Fine Aggregates (Clause 2.2.7.1) IS Sieve Designation
Percentage Grading Zone I
10 mm 4.15 mm
Passing for A
f Grading Zone II 100
100 90-
100
2.36 mm
60-95
Grading Zone 111
I
100
100
100
IO0
90-100
90-
75-100
85-100
95-100
90-
2.3.1.1 The sample of water taken shall represent the water proposed to be used for concreting, due account being paid to seasonal variation. The sample shall not receive any treatment before testing other than that envisaged in regular supply of water proposed for use in concrete. The sample shall be stored in a clean container previously rinsed out with similar water.
Grading Zone IV
1.18 mm
30-70
55-90
75-100
90-100
600 micron
15-34
35-59
60-79
80-100
300 micron
S-20
8-30
12-40
IS-50
I50 micron
O-10
O-IO
O-10
O-IS
NOTE - For crushed stone sands, the possible limit on 150 micron IS sieve is increased to 20 percent. This does not affect 5 percent allowance permitted to other sieves.
Table 5.5 All-in-Aggregate (Clause 2.2.7.1)
Grading
2.3.1.2 The average 28 days compressive strength of at least three 15 cm concrete cubes prepared with the water proposed to be used, shall not be less than 90 percent of the average strength of three similar concrete cubes prepared with distilled water. The cubes shall be prepared, cured and tested as per IS 516 : 1959. 2.3J.3
IS Sieve Designation
Percentage
Passing for All-in-Aggregate
of
r40 Size 80 mm
100
‘
Size -
40 mm
95-100
95-100
20 mm
45-75
95-100
4.75 mm
25-45
30-50
600 micron
8-30
IO-35
150 micron
O-6
O-6
The initial settinob time . . . . . ., nf -_
tpct ._“. hlnrk “.“_..
.ma& . . ..--
with
the appropriate cement and the water proposed to be used shall not differ by more than + 30 min from initial setting time of control test block prepared with the same cement and distilled water. The test blocks shall be prepared and tested in accordance with IS 4031 (Part 1) : 1988. 2.3.2 ThepH value of water shall generally be not less than 6. 2.3.3 Sea Water
2.3 Water
Mixing and curing of concrete with sea water is. not recommended because of presence of harmful salts in the sea water. Under unavoidable circumstances, sea water may be used for mixing or curing in plain concrete or such reinforced concrete constructions which are permanently under sea water.
Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amountsofoils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials or other substances, that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing concrete. The following concentrations, as a guide, represent the maximum permissible values: 4 To neutralize 200 ml sample of water, using phenolphthalein as an indicator; it should not require more than 2 ml of 0.1 normal NaOH. The details of the test are as given in IS 3025 : 1964. bj To neutraiize ‘200 mi sampie of water, using methyl orange as an indicator; it should not require more than 10 ml of 0.1 normal HCI. Details of test are as given in IS 3025 ~: 1964. Permissible limits for solids, when tested in accordance with IS 3025 : 1964, shall be as -:..__ L-1-.... g;lvtX, IJCIVW. Qrganic 200 mg/l, Max 3 000 mg/l, Max Inorganic 500 mg/l, Max Sulphates (as S04) 2 000 mg/l for plain Chlorides (as Cl) concrete work and 1 000 mg/l for reinforced concrete work Suspended matter 2 000 mg/l. Max
2.3.4 Water found satisfactory for mixing is also However, water suitable for curing of concrete. should not produce any objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the concrete surface. The presence of tannic acid or iron compounds is objectionable. 2.4 Admixtures Admixtures are added to the concrete mix before or during mixing, in order to modify one or more of the properties of concrete. Use of admixtures should be correlated to the type of cement and aggregates to be used and to the conditions expected at the site. Admixtures should be used only on the basis of approval by the Authority. 2.4.1 Types of Admixtures
a>Accelerating
admixturesThese are added to hasten the_rate of early strength development, which would facilitate early removal of formwork: or reduce the required period of
98
SP 62 (S & T) : 1097 curing or concreting emergency repairs.
in cold weather or in
Common acceleraters are calcium chloride, flourosilicates and triethanolamine; but chloride content in concrete shall be carefully checked [see 2.3 (c)l.
b) Retarding admixtures -
These admixtures tend to slow down the rate of setting of cement. They are useful in hot weather concreting; for avoiding cold joints in mass concrete works and for special treatment of concrete surfaces.
Common retarders are starches, cellulose products, sugars and hydroxyl-carboxylic acids and their salts.
Water-reducing or platicizing admixtures These admixtures allow greater workability to be achieved for a given water-cement ratio; or for the same workability reduces water content. When used in sufficient quantities, these admixtures function as-set-retarders. The basic ingredients of water-reducing admixture are either ligno-sulphonate or polyhydroxy compounds.
4 Air-entraining admixtures -
These are used to intentionally entrain a controlled quantity of air in the concrete, without altering the setting or hardening of concrete significantly. Their use improves durability, water tightness and workability.
2.6 Reinforcement Reinforcement shall be any of the following: a) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars to IS 432 (Part 1) : 1982. b) High strength deformed bars and wires to IS 1786: 1985. c) Hard drawn steel wire fabric to IS 1566 : 1982. d) Rolled steel made from structural steel to IS 2062 : 1992. 2.6.1 Hard drawn steel wire fabrics are occasionally used for floor slabs, for secondary reinforcement in developing fire resistance and in some precast concrete products like pipes. 2.6.2 All reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scales, loose rust and coats of paints, oil, mud or other coatings which may destroy or reduce bond. However, some indications are available to show that rust firmly adhering to steel may not be harmful; and on the contrary it may increase bond with concrete. Therefore, it may not be necessary in all cases for bars to be cleaned or wiped before using in concrete construction. 3 GRADES
CONCRETE
3.1 General Grades of cement Table 5.6
concrete
shall
be as given
in
Table 5.6 Grades of Cement Concrete (%/awes 3.1, 3.2and 3.3.1)
Commonly used air-entraining agents are animal and vegetable oils and fats: natural wood resins and their sodium salts; and alkali salts of sulphated and sulphonated organic compounds.
Specified Characteristic Compressive Strength at 28 Days
Grade Designation I .
2.4.2 All admixtures
should be used taking into account manufacturer’s instructions. Use of two or more admixtures may be considered after ascertaining their compatibility. 2.4.3 All admixtures 1979.
OF CEMENT
shall be tested as per IS 9103 :
N/ITli-l12
(kg/cm*)
M 10
IO
M 15
15
IS0
M 20
20
200
1
100
M 25
25
250
M 30
30
300
M 35
35
3.50
M 40
40
400
NOTES
2.5 Pozzolanas
1 Grades lower than M concrete.
Pozzalanas may be used in any of the following ways: a) As an ingredient of cement, that is, portland pozzalana cement; b) As part replacement of ordinary portland cement; c) As fine aggregate; and d) As an admixture.
IS shall not be used in reinforced
2 M 5 and M 7.5 grades of concrete may be used for leean concrete bases and simple foundations for masonry walls.
3.2 Design Mix Concrete The mix design shall produce concrete having reduced workability (consistency) and strength not less than that of the appropriate values given in Table 5.6. The procedure given in IS 10262 : 1982 for mix design may be followed. Reference may also be made to SP 23 (S&T) : 1982.
2.5.1 Fly ash conforming to IS 3812 : 1981 or burnt clay pozzolana conforming to IS I344 : I98 1 may be used as an admixture for concrete.
99
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Workability is used to cover a variety of characteristics such as cohesiveness, mobility, compactability, and tinishability of concrete. IS 456 : 1978 stipulates that workability of concrete can be controlled by direct measurement of water content; and checking it at intervals by the method prescribed frequent in IS I199 : 1959.
those specified for the grade in the nominal mix of concrete, it shall not be placed in a higher grade.
Three methods of test to assess workability are slump test, compacting factor test and vee-bee test. Each of them measures only a particular aspect of it. Out of the three, slump test is most widely used.
4.1 General
3.3 Nominal
Mix Concrete
Nominal mix concrete may be used for concrete of grades M 5, M 7.5, M 10, M 15 and M 20. The proportions of materials used for concrete of grades M.5. M7.5, M IO, M 15 and M20shallbeasin Table 5.7.
3.3.3 Accelerated Annex C.
curing
and testing
4 PRODUCTION CONCRETE
AND CONTROL
is given in OF
To avoid confusion and error in batching, practicable consideration should be given to using the smallest practicable number of different concrete mixes. A competent person shall supervise all stages of production of concrete. Preparation of test specimens and site test shall be properly supervised. 4.2 Batching
a) For guidance, in proportioning
concrete, the quantity of both cement and aggregates should be determined by mass [see ulso 4.2(f) for volume batching]. b) Water should be either measured by volume in calibrated tanks or weighed. c) Any solid admixture to be added, may be measured by mass; liquid and paste admixtures by volume or mass. 4 Batching plant where used should conform to IS 4925: 1968 for concrete batching and mixing plant. All measuring equipment should be cleaned and be in a serviceablecondition and their accuracy periodically checked. e) Grading of aggregate should be controlled by obtaining coarse aggregate in different sizes
3.3.1 The cement content of the mix specified in Table 5.6 for any nominal mix shall be proportionately increased if the quantity of water in a mix has to be increased to overcome the difficulties of placement and compaction, so that the water-cement ratio as specified is not exceeded. NOTE - In case of vibrated concrete, the limits specified may suitably be reduced to avoid segregation.
3.3.2 If nominal mix concrete made in accordance with the proportion given for a particular grade does not yield the specified strength, such concrete shall be classified as belonging to the appropriate lower grade. However, if the strength results of test are higher than
Table 5.7 Proportions for Nominal Mix of Concrete (Clause 3.3) Grade of Concrete
Total Quantity of Dry Aggregate by Mass per 50 kg of Cement (as 9um of Fine and Coarse Aggregates), in kg, MUX
Proportion of Fine Aggregate to Coarse Aggregate (by Mass)
Quantity of Water per 50 kg of Cement, Max in Litres
MS
800
M 7.S
625
-do-
M 10
480
-do-
34
M 1.5
3.50
-do-
32
M 20
250
-do-
30
Generally 1:2. Subject to an upper limit of 1:1.Sand a lower limit of 1:2.5
60
4s
NOTES
1 The proportions of the fine to coarse aggregates should be adjusted from upper limit to tower limit progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates becomes finer and the maximum size of coarse aggregate becomes larger. Graded coarse aggregate (see Table 5. I) shall be used. kjianznfe : For an average grading of fine aggregate (that is, Zone II of IS 383: 1970, Table 4). the proportions shall be I : I .S , I :2 and I:25 for maximum size of aggregates 10 mm. 20 mm and 40 mm respectively. 2 This table envisages batching by weight. Volume batching when done the nominal mixes would roughly be 1:3:6, l:2:S and 1:0.5:3 for M IO, M IS and M 20 respectively. 3 For underwater concreting the quantity of coarse aggregate, either by volume or mass, shall not be less than 1.5 times nor more than twice that of the fine aggregate.
100
SP~62 (S & T) : 1997 and blending them in right required; the different-sizes separate stock ~piles. The stock piled preferably a day
f)
8)
proportions when being stacked in material shall be before use.
The grading of coarse and fine aggregate shall be checked as frequently as possible, frequency being decided by the Authority. In case uniformity of materials used for concrete has been established over a period of time, the proportioning may be done by volume batching, provided periodical checks are made on mass/volume relationship of the material. When weigh batching is not practicable, the quantities of fine and coarse aggregate (not cement) may be determined by volume. If fine aggregate is moist and volume batching is adopted, allowance shall be made for bulking in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 3) : 1963. It is important to maintain water-cement ratio constant at its correct value. To this end, therefore determination of moisture content in both coarse and fine aggregates frequently as possible is necessary. The amount of water added should be adjusted to compensate for any observed variation in moisture contents.
To allow for variation in mass of aggregate due to variation in moisture content, suitable adjustments in masses of aggregates shall also be made. In the absence of exact data, in the case of nominal mixes only, the amount of surface water may be estimated from the values given in Table 5.8. Table 5.8 Surface Water Carried by Aggregate (Clause 4.2) Aggregate
I
Approximate Quantity of Surface Water
Percent by Mass (1) Very wet sand Moderately
-
(2) 1.5
wet sand
Moist sand Moist gravel ‘) or crushed rock ‘) Coarser aggregate,
II”,”
’
(3 120
5.0
80
2.5
40
I .25 to 2.5
20-40
less the water it will carry.
materials and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. If there is seggregation after unloading, the concrete should be remixed. 4 For guidance, mixing time may be 1; to 2 min; for hydrophobic cement it may be taken as 23 to 3 min. b) In exceptional cases hand mixing may be done as approved by the Authority. Hand mixing may be done for work done in cases, such as, remote areas, break down of mechanical mixer, or when quantity of work is small subject to additional 10 percent extra cement. When hand mixing is permitted it shall be done on a water-tight platform and care shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until concrete is uniform in colour and consistency. cl Stone aggregate shall be washed with water to remove dirt, dust or any other foreign matter. Brick aggregates shall be well soaked with water for a minimum period of 2 h. 5.2 Machine Mixing The mixing drum shall be flushed clean with water. Measured quantity of dry coarse aggregate shall be first placed in the hopper. This shall be followed with placing of measured quantities of fine aggregate and then cement. In case damp sand is used add half the quantity of the coarse aggregate, then followed by cement and sand, finally add the balance of coarse aggregate. The dry materials shall be mixed for at least four turns of the drum, after which the correct quantity of water shall be added gradually while the drum is in motion to ensure even distribution of the dry materials.. The total quantity of the water shall be introduced before 25 percent of the mixing time has elapsed. The complete content of the mixed concrete shall be removed from the drum before recharging. When the mixer is idle for more than 20 min, the drum shall be flushed clean again. 5.3 Hand Mixing Hand mixing shall be done in a smooth, clean and water-tight platform of suitable size in the following manner: a ) Measured quantity of sand shall be spread evenly. b) Cement shall be dumped on the sand and distributed evenly. c) The sand and cement shall be intimately mixed with spade, turning the mixture over and over until it is of even colour throughout and free from streaks. d) The sand cement mixture shall be spread out and measured quantity of coarse aggregate shall be spread on top. Alternatively, the measured quantity of coarse aggregate shall be
h) No substitution of materials work or alterations in the established proportions, except as permitted in 4.2 (f) and (g) shall be made without additional tests to show quality and strength of concrete. 5 MIXING 5.1 General Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer conforming to IS 1791 : 1985. The mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of 101
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 6.2 Placing
spread out and the sand and cement mixture shall be spread on its top. This shall be mixed at least three times by shovel1 ing and turning over from centre to side, then back to centre. A hollow shall be made in the middle of the mixed pile. Three-fourths the quantity of the total quantity of water required shall be added while the material is turned in towards the centre with a spade. The remaining water shall be added by a water can slowly turning the whole mixture over and over until a uniform colour and consistency is obtained throughout the pile.
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling. Concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting commences and should not be subsequently disturbed. Methods of placing should be such as to avoid segregation. Care should be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement of formwork (see 2 of Part 2). The layers of concrete shall be so placed that the bottom layer does not finally set before the top layer is placed. 6.2.1 During cold weather, concreting shall not be done when the temperature falls below 4S”C. The concrete placed shall be protected against frost by suitable covering. Concrete damaged by frost shall be removed and work redone. During hot weather, precautions shall be taken to see that the temperature of wet concrete does not exceed 38°C (see 7).
The slump as given in Table 5.9 shall be adopted for different kinds of works. The mixing platform shall be washed at the end of the day.
6.3 Compaction
Table 5.9 Slump (Clause 5.3) Placing Conditions
Slump, mm A cDegrce of Workability
(1)
Concrete should be thoroughly compacted and fully worked around the reinforcement, around embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork. Vnlues of Workability
Very low
Concreting of lightly reinforced sections with vibration
Low
Concreting of lightly reinforced sections without vibration, or heavily reinforced section with vihrnlion
Medium
Concreting of heavily reinforced sections without vibration
High
6.3.1 The use of mechanical vibrators to IS 2505 : 1980, IS 2506 : 1985, IS 2514 : 1963 and IS 4656 : 1968 for compacting concrete is recommended. Over vibration or vibration of very wet mixes is harmful and should be avoided; under vibration is harmful.
(3
(2)
Concreting of shallow sections wiih vibration
’
2040
seconds, vee-hce time 01
0.75-0.80.
compacting factor
The vibrator should penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the layer and at least 15 cm into the preceding layer, if there is any. It should be held (generally 5 to 15 s) until the compaction is considered adequate and then withdrawn slowly at the rate of about 8 cm/s.
IO-S seconds. vee-bee time Or
0.X0-0.85. compacting factor
S-2 seconds, vee-bee time Or
0.85-0.92.
Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the design of formwork and the disposition of vibrators should receive special consideration to ensure efficient compaction and to avoid surface blemishes.
compacting factor 01‘
25-75 mm, slump for 26 mm” aggregate Above 0.92, compacting factor 01
75-125 mm, slump for 20 mm ‘I aggregate
” For smaller aggregare the values will he lower
6 TRANSPORTING, PLACING, COMPACTING AND CURING 6.1 Transporting Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as possible which will prevent segregation of or loss of any of the ingredients and maintaining the required workability. During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transported in deep containers. Other suitable methods to reduce the loss of water by evaporation in hot weather and heat loss in cold weather may also be adopted.
6.4 Construction
Joints
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints, the position and arrangement of which shall be indicated by the designer (see Chapter 13). 6.4.1 When work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surface shall be roughened. It shall then be swept clean and thoroughly wetted. For vertical joints, neat cement slurry shall be applied on the surface before it is dry. For horizontal joints, the surface be covered with a layer of mortar about IO mm to 15 mm thick composed of cement and sand in the same ratio as the cement and sand in the concrete mix. This layer of cement slurry or mortar shall be freshly mixed and applied immediately before placing concrete. 102
L-.._
.....
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 6.4.2 When the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitanceshallbe removed by scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristle, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of particles of aggregate. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and all free water removed. The surface shall then be coated with neat cement slurry. On this surface, a layer of concrete-not exceeding 150 mm thick shall first be placed and shall be well rammed against old work, particular attention being paid to corners and close spots; work thereafter shall proceed in the normal way. 6.5 Curing 6.51
Moist Curing
After the concrete has begun to harden, that is, 1 to 2 h after laying curing shall be started. Exposed surfaces shall be kept continuously in a damp or wet condition by ponding or by covering with layer of sacks, canvas, hessian or similar materials and kept constantly wet for at least seven days from the date of placing of concrete. 6.5.2 Membrane
7.2 Hot Weather Concreting The climatic factors affecting concrete in hot weather are high ambient temperature above 40°C and reduced relative humidity, the effects of which may be considerably pronounced with increase in wind velocity. The effects of hot~weather are most critical during periods of rising temperature, fall in relative humidity or both. They may occur at any time of the year in warm tropical or arid climates and generally occur during summer season in other climates. Precautionary measures required on a calm humid day will be less strict than those required on a dry, windy day, even if air temperatures are identical. Damage to concrete caused by hot weather can never be fully alleviated since improvisations at site are rarely successful; easily preventive measures may be applied with the emphasis on materials, advanced planning and co-ordination of all phases of work. 7.2.1 @beets of Hot Weather on Concrete
a) Accelerated
setting - High temperature increases the rate of setting of concrete. The duration of time during which the concrete can be handled is reduced. Quick stiffening may necessiate considerable retempering by addition of water. It may also result in cold joints. b) Reduction in strength - High temperature results in increase of the quantity of mixing water to maintain the workability -with consequent reduction in strength. cl Increased tendency to crack - Either before or after hardening, plastic shrinkage may form in the partially hardened concrete due to rapid evaporation of water. Cracks may be developed in hardened concrete either by increasing drying shrinkage resulting from greater mixing water used or by cooling of the concrete from its elevated temperature. 4 Rapid evaporation of water during curing period - It is difficult to retain moisture for hydration and maintain reasonably uniform temperature conditions during the curing period. e) Difficulty in control of air content in airentrained concrete - It is difficult to control air content in air-entrained concrete. This adds to the difficulty of controlling workability. For a given amount of air-entraining agent, hot concrete will entrain less air than concrete at normal temperatures.
Curing
Approved curing compounds may also be used with the approval of Authority. Such compounds may be applied to all the surfaces of concrete as soon as possible after it has set [see SP 24 (S&T) : 19831. 6.53 Over foundation concrete, masonry work may be started after 48 h of its laying, but the curing of cement concrete shall be continued along with the masonry work for a minimum period~of 7 days at least. 6.5.4 When concrete is used as a sub-grade for flooring, the flooring may be commenced before the curing period of sub-grade is over but the curing of sub-grade shall be continued along with the top layer of tlooring for a minimum period of 7 days. 6.6 Supervision It is exceedingly difficult and costly to alter concrete once placed. Hence, constant and strict supervision of all items of the construction is necessary during the progress of work, including the transporting and mixing of concrete. Supervision is also of extreme importance to check the reinforcement and its placing before being covered. Before any important operation, such as concreting or stripping of the formwork is started, adequate notice shall be given to the construction supervisor. 7 CONCRETING CONDITIONS
UNDER SPECIAL
Procedures to minimize these effects are given in 7.2.2 to 7.2.6.
7.1 Work in Extreme Weather Conditions
7.2.2 Temperature
During hot or cold weather the concreting should be done as per IS 7861 (Part 1) : 1975 for hot westher and IS 7861 (Part 2) : 198 1 for cold weather.
The most direct approach to keep concrete temperature down is by controlling the temperature of its ingredients. The contribution of each ingredient to the 103
Control of Concrete Ingredients
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 temperature of concrete is a function of the temperature, specific heat, and quantity used ofthat ingredient. The aggregates and mixing water exert the most pronounced effect on temperature of concrete. Thus, in hot weather all available means shall be used for maintaining these materials at as low temperature as possible. a) Aggregates - Any one of the procedures or a combination of the procedures given below may be used for lowering the temperature of aggregates. 1) Shading stock piles from direct rays of the sun. 2) Sprinkling of the stock piles of coarse aggregate with water and keep them moist; this is effective when relative humidity is low. 3) Successive layers of coarse aggregate should be sprinkled with water as the stock pile is built up. 4) If cold water is available heavy spraying on coarse aggregate immediately before use may also be done to have a direct cooling action. 3 Coarse aggregates may be cooled by circulating refrigerated air through pipes or other suitable methods. b) Water - Mixing water has the greatest effect on temperature of concrete, since it has a specific heat of about 4.5 to 5 times that of cement and aggregate. The temperature of water is easier to control than that of other ingredients. Even though water used is small in quantity compared to cement and aggregate, the use of cold mixing water will bring about a moderate reduction in concrete placing temperatures.
of mixing water. It must be ensured that the ice melts by the time mixing is completed. c) Cement --Temperature has a direct effect on the hydration of cement. Higher the temperature of concrete, higher the rate of hydration, the rate of stiffening and generally it results in increased water demand; and therefore results in reduced strength and plastic shrinkage. Temperature has a definite effect on setting time depending on cement composition. However, a change in temperature of cement, produces significantly less change in the temperature of fresh concrete than the other ingredients. Cements shall preferably not be used at temperatures in excess of 77°C. 7.2.3 Proportioning Mix Design
and
The quantity of cement used in a mix affects the rate of increase in temperature. a) Therefore cement content may be the least and cements with lower heat of hydration shall be preferred. b) Admixtures which reduce water demand or retard setting may be used. 7.2.4
Temperature
ef Concrete as Placed
In hot weather, ingredients of concrete should be cooled to the extent necessary to maintain the temperature of concrete at the time of placing to below 38°C. Temperature of the concrete may be ascertained from a sample of the mix or by calculations. 7.2.5 Production and Delivery
a>Temperature
For example, for a nominal mix concrete of 336 kg cement, 170 kg water and I 850 kg of aggregate per cubic metre of concrete, a change of 2°C in water temperature will bring a change of 0S”C in the temperature of concrete.
b)
Efforts shall be made to obtain cold water, and to keep it cold by protecting pipes, water storage tanks, etc. Tanks or trucks used for transporting water shall be insulated and/or coloured and maintained white or yellow. Under certain circumstances, reduction in water temperature may be most economically obtained by mechanical refrigeration or mixing with crushed ice. Use of ice as a part of mixing water is highly effective in controlling concrete temperature, since on melting alone, it takes up heat at the rate of 80 kcal/kg. To take advantage of this, the ice should be incorporated directly into the concrete as part
of Concrete Mix Materials
of aggregates, water and cement shall be maintained at the lowest practical levels so that the temperature of concrete is below 4O”C, at the time of placement. Mixing time shall be held to the minimum which will ensure adequate quality and uniformity, because the concrete gets warmed up due to mixing, by the air and by the sun. The effect of mixer surface exposed to the hot sun must be minimized by painting and keeping the mixer drum yellow or white and spraying it with cold water. Cement hydration, temperature, loss of workability and loss of entrained air, all these will increase with the passage of time after mixing. Therefore the period of time between mixing and delivery shall be kept to a minimum.
c>
Co-ordination of delivery of concrete with the rate of placement should be ensured. 7.2.6 Placement, Protection and Curing a) Forms, reinforcement and sub-grade shall be sprinkled with cold water just prior to place104
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 nent of concrete; area around the work may be tept cool. b) when temperature conditions are critical, conmay be restricted to evenings (:rete placement 3r night when temperatures are lower and :vaporation is less. Speedy placement of concrete, with the help of adequate personnel is necessary. 4 Finishing of flat surfaces shall be done promptly. e) Concrete layers shall be thin enough and in area small enough so that time interval between consecutive placements is reduced; vibration should ensure complete union with adjacent portions. f) tf, cold joints tend to form or if surfaces dry and set too rapidly, or if plastic shrinkage cracks tend to appear, the concrete shall be kept moist by means of fog sprays, wet burlap, cotton mats, or other means. Fog sprays have been found to be particularly effective in preventing plastic shrinkage cracks when other means have failed. g) Concrete when delivered by truck or otherwise, shall reach the forms at a temperature not higher than 40°C. h) When the concrete has attained some degree of hardening sufficient to withstand surface damage, roughly 12 h after mixing, moist curing shall commence.
essential to keep concrete temperature above a minimum value before it isplaced in the formwork. 7.3.1 Effects of Cold Weather Concreting
a>Delayed
setting - Development of concrete strength is retarded at temperatures below 5°C compared to strength development at normal temperatures.
c>
j>
k)
Actual duration of curing will depend. on the mix proportions, size of member, environment, etc; in any case it shall not be less than 10 days. Continuous curing shall be arranged. Reliance should not be placed on forms for protection during hot weather. All formwork shall be kept completely and continuously moist prior to and during removal of formwork. Wind breakers shall be provided to protect new concrete work since wind causes more evaporation as compared to still-air; sometimes as high as 4 times depending on wind speed. On hardened concrete and on flat surfaces in particular, curing water shall not be much cooler than the concrete because of the possibilities of thermal stress and resultant cracking. Attempt may be made to reduce rate of drying by avoiding air circulation after curing. Proper records should be maintained so that any changes that are needed may be done during construction.
b)
The hardening period thus increases. Free&g of concrete at early uges - When concrete is exposed to freezing temperature, there is a risk of loss of strength and other qualities irreparably; permeability may increase and durability may be impaired. Freezing and thawing qf concrete - Quality of concrete may also be impaired, if the concrete after final set is subjected to repeated freezing and thawing. Stress due to temperature d@rntials - Large temperature differentials within concrete may promote cracking and harm durabilty; such differentials can occur when the insulation is removed from the formwork. Cold weather conditons, for assessing the effect’s on concrete can be divided into three categories as below: I) When temperature is below 5°C but does not fall below freezing point, 2) When frost occurs at night only and is not severe, and 3) When there is a severe frost day and night. Precautions to be taken in each case of (e) are given in Table 5.10.
c>
4
e>
Table 5.10 Precautionary Measures for Cold Weather Concreting (Clause 7.3.1) Condition a) At low temperature
b) Where there is frost at night
n>
7.3 Coid Weather Concreting .
c) When there is frost day and night
The production of concrete in cold weather introduces special problems, such as, in setting and hardening of concrete, damage to concrete in plastic state when exposed to low temperature, etc. It is, therefore, 105
Precautions to be Taken 1) Keep formwork in position longer or use rapid hardening cement 2) Cover the top of the concrete with insulating material 3) Insulate steel formwork I) Make sure that the concrete is delivered to the point ofplacingat not less then 5 “C All the precautions as in (a) plus: I) Insulate all formwork 2) Make sure that the concrete is not placed against frozen sub-grade or against reinforcement or forms covered with snow or ice 3) Place concrete quickly and insulate Take all precautions at (a) and (b) plus: I) Heat the water and if necessary the aggregate 2) Make sure that the concrete is delivered for placing at not less than lO”C, or make sure that the concrete is delivered for placing at not less than 5 “C, place quickly and provide continuous heating to concrete
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 7.3.2 Temperature
Control of Concrete Ingredients
The most direct approach to keeping concrete temperature up is by controlling temperature ofits ingredients. The contribution of each ingredient to the temperature of concrete is a function of specific heat and quantity used for that ingredient. Aggregates and mixing water have the most pronounced effect on temperature of concrete. a) Aggregates - Heating of aggregates shall be such that frozen lumps, ice and snow are eliminated and at the same time over-heating is avoided. At no point shall the aggregate temperature exceed 100°C. The average temperature of aggregate for an individual batch shall not exceed 65°C. The heating of aggregates to higher temperatures is rarely necessary if mixing water is at 60°C. 1) If the coarse aggregate is dry and free of frost and ice lumps, adequate temperatures of fresh concrete can be obtained by increasing the temperature of sand only, which will seldom have to be higher than about 4O”C, if mixing water is at 60°C. 2) Steam embedded in pipes is recommended for heating aggregates; but for small jobs aggregates may be heated with the help of steel drums embedded in heaps of aggregate and filled with fire. When steam pipes are used for heating aggregates, the exposed surfaces of the aggregates shall be covered with tarpaulins to maintain uniform distribution of heat and to prevent formation of frozen crusts. b) Water - The required temperature of mixing water to produce specified concrete is shown in Fig. 5.1; uniform heating of water should be ensured. To avoid possibility of flash set when either aggregate or water is heated to a temperature in excess of 40°C, water and aggregate shall be mixed together in a mixer first in such a way that the high temperature of one or other is reduced before cement is added. The heated water shall come into direct contact with aggregate first and not cement. I) Water having temperature up to boiling point may be used provided the aggregate is cold enough to reduce the temperature of mixing water and aggregate appreciably below 40°C. In fact this temperature shall not~normally exceed 25°C. 2) If effectiveness of air-entraining admixtures is lost due to hot water, the admixture may be added to the batch only after the water temperature is reduced. c) Cement During winter concreting, it is preferable to use rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS 8041 : 1990.
0
IS 5 10 lEMPERA?URE OF CONCRETE;C
20
WMPERAWRE
-
OF CONCRElE.;C
25
Moisturecontentof aggregate: Damp(4%in fine, 1%in coarse)------Wet(8%in fine, 2%in coarse)------Temperature of aggregated Temperature of cement
and contained moisture
= 1°C = 5°C
REQUIREDTEMPERATURE OF MIXING WATERTO PRODUCEHEATEDCONCRETE
FIG. 5.1
7.3.3 Proportioning
of Concrete Mix Materials
and
Concrete Mix Design
4 With the winter conditions prevailing
b)
in our country, concreting can be achieved mainly by conserving heat of hydration of cement with insulating materials and insulating formwork. Air-entrainment is necessary where alternate thawing and freezing is anticipated. Development of strength in a short period is desirable; for this additional quantities cement, ordinary or rapid hardening cement may be
c>
106
1
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
4
may be thawed deep enough to ensure that it will not freeze back up to the concrete; or it majl be covered with dry granular material.
added or proper admixture in right proportions. This results in saving du,e to shorter duration of protection, earlier removal of formwork, etc. Cement which gives earlier and higher heat of hydration is preferred. The cement content in the mix shall preferably be not less than 300 kg/m”. Admixture to be used may be calcium chloride; however it cannot be used under certain conditions listed below; also the stipulated chloride content as per IS 456 : 1978 should be adhered to. The conditions are: I ) When sulphate resistant cement is used, 2) When there are cracks in concrete, 3) When they are exposed to alternate drying and wetting, 4) When the concrete cover is small, and 5) When the concrete is permeable.
Arrangements shall be made to cover and insulate newly placed concrete well in advance.
b) All concrete surfaces shall be covered as soon as the concrete has been placed; clean straw blankets about 50 mm thick, sacks, tarpaulins, expanded polystyrene, plastic sheeting, waterproof paper in conjunction with an air gap may be used. Insulating materials may be used as a protective material for formwork also.
c>Water
curing is not necessary during freezing or-near freezing conditions. On removal of formwork and insulation the member shall be immediately covered with plastic sheet or tarpaulins properly taped and made wind-tight. On no account shall such concrete, released from insulated formwork, be saturated with cold water.
Chlorides lead to corrosion of reinforcement and hence every care shall be taken to restrict its content in concrete; for using it as an admixture if need be, specialists may be consulted. Air-entraining agents, if proper amounts are used, increase the resistance of hardened concrete to freezing and thaw~ing and also improves workability of concrete.
e>
7.3.4 Temperature
of Concrete
Low pressure wet steam provides the best means of both cheating enclosures and moist curing of concrete. Later on liquid-membrane forming compounds may be followed on concrete surfaces with heated enclosures.
as Placed
In cold weather, curing is not so important, as the protection offered by formwork. Therefore, forms may not be removed until the end of minimum period of protection or even later. Table 5.11 gives the minimum time for structural concrete for stripping of formwork; the time for removal of formwork fo; sides of beams, columns and walls shall be not less than those in Table 5.12.
4 When ~placing concrete at or near freezing
b)
temperature, precautions shall be taken to ensure that concrete at that time of placing has a temperature of at least 5’C and the temperature of concrete after having placed and compacted is maintained at above 20°C until it hardens thoroughly. The temperature of concrete mix may be assessed by calculation or by taking a sample of the mix and measuring its temperature by a metal clad thermometer. -
7.3.5 Production
Table 5.11 Stripping Time for-Structural Concrete (Clause 7.3.6)
and Delivery
a ) The concrete shall be delivered at not less than 5°C. b) Suitable precautions be taken during production of concrete against the weather for both machines and materials. c) It is necessary to place the concrete quickly and cover the top of-the concrete with an insulating material.
Stripping Walls, columns and vertical faces of all structural members
b) Beam soffits (props left under)
Time
24 to 48 h as may be decided I
days
c) Removal of propsunder slabs: i) Spanning up to 43 m ii) Spanning over 4.5 m
7 days 14 days
7.3.6 Placement, Protection and Curing d) Slabs (props left under)
a) Before any concrete is placed all ice, snow and frost shall be completely removed and the temperature of all surfaces to be in contact with concrete be raised to the temperature of concrete to be placed. When concrete has to be placed over permanently frozenground, sub-grade material
3
days
e) Removal of props under beams and arches: i) Spanning up to 6 m ii) Spanning over 6 m
I4 days 21 days
For other cements, the stripping time recommended above may be modified. 107
L.,.-
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 limestone, soft sandstone, aggregate shall not be used.
Table 5.12 Recommended Minimum Stripping Time for Formwork when Member is Carrying Its Own Weight (Clause 7.3.6)
I.
Ordinary Portland cement concrete
Beam Sides
Slabs
Oays
bYS
Cold weather Air temperature about 3°C
5
7
Normal weather
I
3f
Beam Sonits Days
14
7
Removal Removsl of Pr00s or PWDS lo Slabs to Beams Days Days
14
7
28
14
Air temperature about 16°C 2. Rapid hardening Portland cement concrete
Cold weather Air temperature about 3°C
I
4
8
8
16
Normal weather Air temperature about 16°C
1
2
4
4
8
Concreting
7.4.1 Prior approval of Authority is necessary for the method to be used for under-water concreting. 7.4.2 The concrete shall contain at least 10 percent more cement than that requiredfor the same mix in the dry condition, the quantity of extra cement varying with conditions of placing. The volume or mass of the coarse aggregate shall be between one and a half times to twice that of fine aggregate. The slump shall be between 100 mm to l80 mm. 7.4.3 Cofferdams or forms should be sufficiently tight to ensure still water or in any case to restrict the flow to less than 3 m/min in the space to be concreted; the forms should also prevent loss of mortar through the walls. Dewatering shall not be done while concrete is being placed or unit1 24 h thereafter. 7.4.4 Concrete shall be deposited in any of the ways; by tremie, by drop bottom bucket or by bags or grouting. To minimize formation of laitance, concrete should not be disturbed while being placed. 7.5 Concrete in Sea-Water 7.5.1 Concrete in sea-water or exposed directly along the seacoast shall be at least M 15 Grade for plain concrete and M 20 for reinforced concrete. Use of slag or pozzolana cement is advantageous under such conditions. 7.5.2 Densest possible concrete is to be obtained by proper design of the mix; slag, broken brick, soft
porous
weak
7.53 No construction joints should be within 600 mm below low water-level or within 600 mm of the upper and lower planes of wave action. When unusually severe conditions or abrasion are anticipated, such parts of the work shall be protected by bituminous or silica-flouride coatings or stone facing be added with bitumen. 7.5.4 Reinforcement in reinforced concrete structures shall be protected from saline atmosphere during storage and fabrication. 7.5.5 Precast members well cured and hardened may be given preference; they shall be free from sharp corners, crazing, cracks or other defects; they shall have trowel smooth finish; plastering should be avoided. 7.6 Concrete in Aggressive
7.4 Under-Water
or other
Soils and Water
7.6.1 Destructive action of aggressive waters on concrete is progressive. The rate of deterioration which varies with alkali resisting property of cement used decreases as the concrete is made stronger and more impermeable; and increases as the salt content of water increases. When even a part of the structure is in contact or exposed to aggressive soils and waters, evaporation may cause serious concentration of salts leading to deterioration even if the original salt content of soil or water is not high. 7.6.2 Where alkali contents are concentrated or may become high Portland cement is not recommended; if used the ground water may be lowered by drainage so that it will not come into contact with concrete. Additional protection may be obtained by the use of a chemically resisting stone facing or a layer of plaster of Paris covered with suitable fabric such as jute thoroughly impregnated with bituminous material. 8 READY MIXED CONCRETE 8.1 General The use of ready mixed concrete, mixed elsewhere and supplied to a site is coming into vogue. Ready mixed concrete may be of two types, namely, centrally mixed concrete and truck mixed concrete. 8.2 Centrally Mixed Concrete Concrete produced by cbmpletely mixing cement, aggregates, admixtures, if any, and water at a stationary central mixing plant and delivered in containers fitted with agitating devices, except that the concrete, if so desired, may be transported without being agitated. 108
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 8.3 Truck Mixed Concrete Concrete produced by completely mixing the ingredients except water of concrete in a truck mounted mixer at the batching plant; and water and admixtures being added and mixing being done entirely in the truck mixer either during the journey or on arrival at site. No water shall be added to the aggregate and cement until the mixing commences.
8.4 IS 4926 : 1976 covers requirements mixed concrete. 9 NON-DESTRUCTIVE
of ready
TESTS
9.1 Non-destructive tests are covered in IS 133 11 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1992 by ultrasonic pulse velocity and by rebound hammer. .Rapid determination of compressive strength is covered by IS 9013 : 1978 (see Annex C).
ANNEX
A
(Clause 2.2.6) PARTICLE A-l
SIZE AND SHAPE OF COARSE AGGREGATE Table 5.13 Maximum Weight on Sieves (Clause A.l.1)
GENERAL
A-l.1 The sieves shall not be overloaded. Therefore care must be taken to ensure that the maximum loads on sieves are not exceeded at the time of completion of seiving (see Table 5.13).
IS Sieve Designation
Maximum r 45 cm dia Sieve
kg
A-2 SIEVING A-2.1 The sample will require several operations on each sieve. Each sieve shall be separately shaken over a clean tray or reciever until no more than a trace passes, but in any case for not less than 2 min. Material should not be forced through the apertures but hand placing is permitted. A little brush shall be used with fine sieves.
\ 30 cm dia Sieve
kg
SOmm
10
4.5
40 mm
8
3.5
31Sor25mm
6
2.5
20 mm
4
2
16 or 12.5 mm
3
I.S
10mm
2
I.0
6.5 mm
1.5
0.75
4.15 mm
I.0
0.50
3.35 mm
A-3 RESULT
Weight for
0.30
A-3.1 The cumulative weight passing each sieve shall be calculated as a percentage of total sample weight to the nearest whole number.
ANNEX
B
(Clause 2.2.6) TEST FOR SURFACE B-l
PROCEDURE
B-l.1 Take a test sample of wet aggregate and weigh it (WI). Place it in a frying pan and gently apply heat while stirring with a glass rod until the surface moisture disappears. This is apparent when its shining appearance disappears and the aggregate looks dull.
MOISTURE
Weigh again (W2). Continue heating thereafter until all the moisture evaporated and weigh the dry sample (W3).
is
B-l.2 Surface moisture = ((WI - W2)lW3) x 100 expressed as percentage of dry aggregate.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
ANNEX
C
(Clause 3.3.3) ACCELARATED
C-l
CURING FOR DETERMINATION STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
GENERAL
C-l.1 The compressive strength of concrete is expressed as its 28 days strength. The procedure requires 28 days moist curing before testing, which is too long a period to be of any value either for construction control or for applying timely corrective action. If after 28 days, the quality of concrete is suspect, it would have hardened by that time and might have been buried by subsequent construction. Therefore the replacement of that concrete is difficult and impracticable. On the other hand if the concrete is found to be too strong than necessary, cement is wasted due to uneconomical mix proportioning. Hence the standard 28 days strength is not feasible for quality control. C-l.2 Thus, there is a need for a rapid test which can give results while the concrete is still green so that it can be either removed or modified. A period of 24 h would help in this, that is the test result should be available in a day’s time so that corrective actions can be taken successfully. With the assistance of accelerated curing techniques, it is now possible to test the compressive strength of concrete within a short period and thereby it is possible to estimate whether the concrete is likely to reach the28 days strength. C-l.3 This is fairly reliable and fast method for evaluating controlled concrete in the field by accelerated curing. Two methods of curing are warm watermethod and boiling water method. Appropriate correlation curves are available to estimate the quality of concrete at normal ages. Methods of test proposed are readily applicable to the site-testing and to give results of reasonably low variability. C-l.4 High pressure steam curing is also used as in accelerated-curing method, but has some inherent limitations for application. However this may be used for internal quality control purposes under special circumstances. C-l.5
For detailed information refer to IS 9013 : 1978.
C-2 ACCELERATED WATER METHOD
CURING
BY WARM
OF COMPRESSIVE
immersion in a curing tank. The time between the addition of water to the ingredients and immersion of the test specimens in the curing tank shall be between 1; h to 3; h. C-2.3 The specimens in their moulds shall be gently lowered into the curing tank and shall be totally immersed at 55 + 2°C for a period of not less than 19 h and 50 min. The specimens shall then be removed from the water, marked for identification, removed from the moulds and immersed in cooling tank at 27 + 2°C before completion of 20 h and 10 min from the start of immersion in the curing tank. They shall remain in the cooling tank for at least 1 h. C-3 ACCELERATED WATER METHOD
CURING
BY BOILING
C-3.1 Test specimens in mould shall be stored in a place free from vibration, in moist air of at least 90 percent relative humidity and at a temperature of 27 f 2°C for 23 h +15 min from the time of addition of water to the ingredients. C-3.2 The specimens shall be gently lowered into a curing tank and shall remain totally immersed for a period of 3; h + 5 min. The temperature of the water in the curing tank shall be at boiling point (1OO’C) at sea level. The temperature of the water shall not drop by more than 30°C after the specimens are placed and shall return to boiling within 15 min. In confined places, the temperature of water may be kept just below the boiling point to avoid excessive evaporation. C-3.3 After curing for 3$ h + 5 min in the curing tank, the specimen shall be removed from the boiling water, removed from the moulds and~cooled by the immersing in cooling tank at 27 + 2’C for a period not less than 1 h. C-4 TESTING C-4.1 The specimens with IS 516 : 1959.
shall be tested in accordance
C-2.1 Test specimens, shall be made according to IS 5 16 : I959 if correlation curves have to be drawn. If it is for control purposes sampling shall be done as per IS I199 : 1959.
C-4.2 The warm water method specimens shall be tested while still wet, not more than 2 h from the time of immersion in the cooling tank.
C-2.2 The test specimens shall be left to stand undisturbed in their moulds in a place free from vibration at a temperature of 27 + ~2°C for at least 1h, prior to
C-4.3 Inthe boiling water method, the age at the time of test subsequent to removal of moulds and cooling shall be 28; h f 15 min.
110
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 C-5 INTERPRETATION
OF RESULTS
C-5.1 Since the strength requirements in existing specifications are not based on accelerated curing, results from this method, in checking the compliance of specified strength at later stages shall be applied with great care.
ACCELERATED
C-S.2 Correlation curves shall be developed for a set of given materials for normal curing and accelerated curing for reasonable projection of strength at any age. Figures 5.2 and 5.3 indicate one such typical~correlation curves for the two methods, namely, warm water method and boiling water method.
STRENGTH
Nd-I?,
FIG. 5.2 TYPICALRELATION BETWEENACCELERATEDAND 2%DAYS COMPRESSIVESTRENGTHOF CONCRETE(WARM WATER METHOD)
ACCELERATED
STRENGTH
Nlmfr?-R,,
FIG. 5.3 TYPICALRELATION BETWEEN ACCELERATEDAND 28-DAYS COMPRESSIVESTRENGTHOF CONCRETE(BOILING WATER METHOD)
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 PART 2 REQUIREMENTS
OF REINFORCED
1 GENERAL 1.1 All the common requirements of Part 1 apply to reinforced concrete work also. These include materials, grades of concrete; production and control of concrete; mixing, transporting, placing, compacting and curing; and concreting under special conditions, as described in detail in Part 1.
usage, such as, erection of forms, fixing of steel, pouring concrete, etc. 2.2.2 Propping and Centering
4 Props for centering may be of steel, timber
1.2 This Part will deal with requirements of reinforced concrete work in addition to those given in Part 1. 2 FORMWORK
b)
2.1 General The requirements of formwork for reinforced concrete apply to plain concrete work except for information relating to reinforcement. Formwork shall include all temporary or permanent forms or moulds required for forming the concrete which is cast in-situ. Together with all temporary construction required for their support. Formwork shall be of rigid construction true to shape and dimensions shown in drawings. It shall be able enough to withstand dead, wind and live woods, etc, [as per IS 875 (Parts 1 to 5) : 19871 as applicable. It shall also be designed to resist forces generated during construction, namely, those due to-ramming, vibration of concrete and other incidental loads imposed on it. The species of timber and design shall be according to IS 883 : 1970 and SP 33 (S&T) : I986. It shall be made sufficiently rigid by use ties and braces. Screw jacks or wedges shall be used when required to take up any settlement in the formwork either before or during the placing of concrete. Forms shall be removable in sections in desired sequence, without disturbing other sections or damaging the surfaces of concrete. All formwork should be easy to strip after connecting; care shall be taken to see that no piece is keyed into the concrete. Details of formwork should be carefully worked out and approved by the -Authority. The completed formwork shall be inspected before placing reinforcement in position. 2.2 Materials of Formwork 2.2.1 Formwork may be timber, plywood, steel or any other material. IS 4990 : 1981 may be used for plywood shuttering. Timber used for formwork shall be easily workable, with nails without splitting and of light weight. It shall be stiff and strong enough to avoid undue deflection when loaded; it shall not warp when exposed to sun and rain or wetted during concreting. It shall not be soft and shall withstand easily the normal forces of
CONCRETE
posts or ballies; brick masonry may also be used as props. Ballies shall rest squarely on wooden base plates or any other load bearing material. Wedges or other devices may be used below the props to ensure tight fitting again to formwork. Props for upper storeys may rest on the floor below. Formwork and concreting of upper floors shall not be done until concrete of lower floor has set for 14 days. Before concreting is done props and wedges should be checked for alignment.
2.2.3 Shuttering Shuttering material shall have smooth, and even surface and the joints shall not permit leakage of cement grout. Timber when used shall be seasoned and free from loose knots, splits, etc; nails shall not be projecting from timber pieces. Steel plates when used should have no projections of bolts and nuts. Fixing devices, if any shall be properly provided for (see IS 1946 : 1961). All surfaces of shuttering, in contact with concrete, shall be treated with a non-staining mineral oil or other approved material to prevent adhesion with concrete and protect reinforcement also. Suitable camber shall be givenfor horizontal members. 2.2.4 Special formwork, where necessary, used, for example for tall structures.
may be
2.2.5 Stripping The formwork shall be so removed as not to damage, the concrete. In slab and beam construction, sides of beams shall be stripped first and then the underside of the slab and lastly the underside of the beam. Under no circumstances shall formwork be stripped until concrete attains a strength at least twice the stress to which concrete may be subjected at the time of removal of formwork. When possible, formwork shall be left in place longer as it would assist the curing. For ordinary Portland cement, forms may be stripped after the expiry of the periods as specified in Table 5.11. Where the shape of element is such that formwork has re-entrant angles, the formwork shall be removed as soon as possible after the concrete has set to avoid shrinkage cracking due to restraint imposed by the stiff formwork. IL2
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 -
2.3 Reinforcement 2.3.1 Straightening,
Cutting nnd Bending
Reinforcement may be bent and fixed in accordance with the procedure indicated in IS 2502 : 1963; and shall not be straightened in a manner injurious to the material. Cold twisted barsshall be bent cold. All bars shall be placed and maintained in the position shown on drawings. Crossing bars should not be tack welded for assembly of reinforcement. Annealed steel wire (0.9 mm dia or over) may be used for tying crossing bars. 2.3.1.1 Tolerance forcement
on formwork
and placing of rein-
a) Formwork tolerance shall be as follows: -
deviation from specified dimensions of cross sections of beams and columns, - 6 mm to 12 mm.
-
deviation-from dimensions of footings, in plan - 12 mm to 50 mm eccentricity 0.02 times the width of footing in the direction of footing but not more than 50 mm; thickness f 0.05 times the specified thickness.
b) Reinforcement -
depth
depth more than 200 mm,
c) Cover shall not be reduced by more than onethird of specified cover or 5 mm whichever is less. 2.3.2
Welded Join.ts or Mechanical
Connections
Welded joints or mechanical connections in reinforcement may be used; but tests shall be need to prove that the joints are of full strength of bars connected. For welding of mild steel plain and deformed bars refer to IS 275 1 : 1979 [see also SP (S&T) 34 : 1987 on concrete reinfol~cementl. When reinforcement are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards bent back to their original positions, care should be taken to ensure that at no time is the radius of the bend less than 4 bar diameter for plain mild steel and 6 bar diameters for deformed bars. Care also shall be exercised that when bending the bars back the concrete around the bar is not damaged. 2.3.3 Cover Cover to reinforcement shall be as per drawings subject to requirements of IS 456 : 1978.
tolerance
for effective * 10 mm;
for effective + 15 mm.
200 mm
or less,
PART 3 LIME AND LIME POZZOLANA
MIXTURE
CONCRETE
Section 1 -Lime Concrete 1 GENERAL 1.1 Lime concrete, inspite of its low strength, may be used in several situations in construction such as in well foundations for moderately tall buildings, under floor finishes, for filling haunches over masonry arch work and for roof terracing work. 1.2 Lime concrete is found to have many desirable properties and advantages for use in construction. Properly prepared, compacted and laid, lime concrete is durable under normal exposures. Lime concrete possesses considerable resistance for sulphate attack and can be used in foundations and in areas in which soil contains considerable quantities of soluble sulphate or where subsoil water table is high. The effect of temperature fluctuations on the volume change is negligible in lime concrete compared to that due to
moisture variations. It undergoes negligible change~after setting and initial shrinkage. 1.3 For detailed information
volume
refer to IS 254 1 : 199 1.
2 MATERIALS 2.1 Lime Lime for use in lime concrete IS 712 : 1984.
shall
conform
to
2.2 Cement Cement shall conform to the requirements of 33 grade ordinary Portland cement to IS 269 : 1989. 2.3 Pozzolana Burnt clay pozzolana shall conform to IS 1344 : 198 I. Fly ash shall conform to IS 38 12 : 1981.
113
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.4 Coarse Aggregate
4 MIXING
Coarse aggregate for use in lime concrete shall be either natural stone aggregate conforming to IS 383 : 1970 or broken brick (burnt clay) aggregate conforming to IS 3068 : 1986 or cinder aggregate to IS 2686 : 1977 depending on the situation of use (see Table 5.14).
4.1 General
2.5 Fine Aggregate Sand for use in lime concrete shall conform to IS 383 : 1970. Brick aggregate shall conform to IS 3 182 : 1986. Fly ash shall conform to IS 38 12 : 1981. 2.6 Water Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amount of deleterious matter. Sea water shall not be used. Potable water is considered satisfactory. 3 PROPERTIES
OF LIME CONCRETE
3.1 Workability Satisfactory workability of lime concrete is obtained by using the proportions recommended in Table 5.14. Workability of lime concrete can be increased further by increasing the proportion of lime mortar, within the limits specified in Table 5.14. Lime concrete with a slump of SO-75 mm will be generally found to be satisfactory. 3.2 Rate of Hardening 3.2.1
and Setting Time
Hardening
Hardening of lime concrete is slow compared to cement concrete. Therefore for structural load bearing lime concrete, it should be allowed to harden for a period of seven days before further work is undertaken. 3.2.2 Setting time of lime concrete depends on the class of lime used in the preparation of the mortar. For Class A lime initial set may occur in 2 to 3 h. Final set does not occur in less than lo-12 h. Placing of lime concrete shall be done before the initial set has occurred.
Lime concrete may be hand mixed or machine mixed. For large quantities of concrete, machine mixing is desirable. 4.2 Hand Mixing The aggregates should be thoroughly washed and drained before use. Mixing shall be,done on a clean water-tight platform. The coarse aggregate shall be stacked on the platform. Lime shall then be evenly spread over it, in the specified proportion, and thoroughly mixed. Water in just sufficient quantity shall be applied with a sprinkler. Mixing shall be done by turning the mix over and over until all particles of aggregate are covered with mortar and concrete of uniform appearance and consistency is obtained. 4.3 Machine Mixing Clean dry coarse aggregate shall be ~first laid into a mechanical mixer. Lime mortar is then fed into the mixer. The contents shall then be mixed well. Required quantity of water shall then be added. Mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution of materials. Final adjustment of water, to obtain concrete of required consistency, may be added if~necessary and continue mixing. 5 LAY-ING OF LIME CONCRETE 5.1 General Only that amount of concrete shall be mixed which can be laid in 2 h after mixing. Laying and compaction of concrete shall be completed within 4 h of adding water. 5.2 In Foundations
and Under Floors
a) The soil sub-grade shall be thoroughly wetted and rammed before the concrete is laid. b) Concrete shall be laid, and not thrown, in layers not thicker than 150 mm, when consolidated. c) Each layer shall be thoroughly rammed and consolidated before succeeding layers are placed. Where joints in the same layer are unavoidable each layer shall be sloped at an angle of 30’ and made~to ensure proper bond with the new concrete. The surface of each completed layer shall be cleaned and roughened by wire brushing or other means before the next layer is laid. Where vertical joints occur, they shall be at least 600 mm apart. d) Vibrators may be used for uniform and good compaction.
3.3 Strength The process of strength development in lime concrete is slow and may extend over years. The strength again depends on the class of lime used and the aggregate; proportion and quality of pozzolana used in the preparation of concrete. The compressive strength, for mixes shown in Table 5.14, shall not be less than 1 N/mm2 (10 kg/cm2) at 28 days, and for transverse strength it shall not be less than 0.2 N/mm2 (2 kg/cm2) at 90 days. The compressive strength is expected to rise to 1.2 N/mm2 (12 kg/cm2) in 90 days. 114
ASP62 (S & T) : 1997 Table 5.14 Recommended Mixes for Use in Lime Concrete (Clauses 2.4, 3.1 and 3.3) SI Situations No.
(1) i)
Type of Mortar
Class of Lime”
(All Proportions by Volume)
as in IS 712 1984
(2) In founda-
(3)
1lime, 2
tions
lime,
Type of Coarse Aggregate
Maximum Size of Coarse Aggregate
Proportion of Mortar to Coarse Aggregate (by Volume)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Stone or
50 ml-0
(4) fine
A
aggregates
I
:
to 50 parts of mortar to 100 parts of aggregate depending upon the grading of ag-
40
broken brick
1pozzo-
B, C, D. E
-do-
50 mm
B, C, D. E
-do-
SO mm
lanic material.
I
fine aggregate
3 lime,
I
cement,
I2 fine aggregate
ii)
Base con-
I lime, 2 fine
crete under floor finishes on ground
A
aggregate
I
lime,
Stone or
SO mm
broken brick
1pozzo-
B, C. D, E
50 mm
-do-
Ianic materials,
I
fine aggregate
3 lime, 1 cement,
B, C, D, E
-do-
50 mm
A
Broken brick
20 to 25
gregate !
40 to 50 parts of mortar to 100 parts of aggregate
Remarks
(8) Normally suitable for buildings not more than three storeys high and in places with dry subgrade that is subsoil water level not within 25 m of foundation level Suitable for dry and tolerably wet subgrades
depending upon the grading of aggregate
12 fine aggregate
iii)
Levelling
1 lime, 2 fine
course or
aggregate
cushioning
I lime, I pozzo-
layer under
lanic material,
floor
I fine aggregate
2 lime,
I cement,
B. C, D. B
40 to 50 parts
-
of mortar to
01’
cinder
100 parts of aggregate
-
B,C,D,E
-
-
-
12 tine aggregate
iv)
Filling over
I lime.
I pozzo-
haunces of
lanic~material,
masonry
1 fine aggregate
B, C, D, E
Broken brick
25 mm
45 parts of mortar to100partsofI:2 aggregate
-
arch work
NOTE -
For details of fine aggregate, see 2.5.
‘) When lime is used as putty, the proportioning shall take into account only the equivalent quantity of dry slaked lime.
e) Care shall be taken to ensure that segregation f-l s) h)
of aggregate and mortar does not take place when laying concrete. No water shall be added during ramming. Mixing and ramming shall go on uninterruptedly. When not practicable, break joints as in (e) above, may be provided. The completed work shall be cured for a period of not less than 10 days.
Curing may be done by using wet hessian, gunny bags, etc and watering frequently. No brickwork or masonary shall be started at least for 7 days after laying of concrete foundation. 5.3 In Haunches of Arches a) Each layer of concrete shall not be more than 100 mm when compacted. b) Curing shall be done for at least 21 days as described in 5.2.
Section 2 Lime Pozzolana 1 GENERAL 1.1 Lime pozzolana concrete is used in building and road constructions. The dry shrinkage values of this concrete are low. Compared to cement concrete, it has also a low volume change after setting and -initial
Mixture Concrete
shrinkage. Well compacted lime pozzolana is less permeable than cement concrete.
concrete
1.2 Lime pozzolana concrete conforming to IS 4098 : 1983 is used as a levelling course in 115
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 foundation, footing under~masonry walls and columns, ordinary base concrete under floor, filling haunches in masonary arches, roof finish, making blocks, etc. 1.3 For more information
3.1 Both hand mixing and machine mixing are permitted (see Section 1)
refer to IS 5817 : 1992. 4 LAYING
2 MATERIALS 2.1 Lime pozzolana IS 4098 : 1983.
3 MIXING
mixture
shall
conform
to
2.2 Fine and coarse aggregate and water shall be as in Section 1. 2.3 Recommended mixes with lime pozzolana ture are given in Table 5.15.
mix-
4.1 The methods of laying lime pozzolana concrete are similar to lime concrete laying as per Section 1. 4.2 In Roof Finish Shall be as per IS 3036 : 1992.
PART 4 SHOTCRETE 1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Aggregates
1.1 Shotcrete is mortar or concrete conveyed through a hose and pneumatically projected at high velocity on to a surface. The force of jet impinging on the surface compacts the material. Generally a relatively dry mixture is used, and so the material is capable of supporting itself without sagging or sloughing, even for vertical and overhead applications.
a) Fine aggregate (sand) - Sand for concrete shall comply with the requirements of IS 383 : 1970 and graded evenly from fine to coarse as per Zone II and Zone III grading. Sand failing to satisfy this grading may however be used if pre-construction testing gives good results (see 5). Further sand for finish or flash coats may be finer from the above grading. However, the use of finer sands results in greater drying shrinkage, and coarse sands in more rebound. b) Coarse aggregate - Coarse aggregates, when used, shall comply with IS 383 : 1970. It shall conform to one of the gradings given in Table 5.16.
1.2 Shotcrete is generally referred to as gunite, pneumatically applied mortar or concrete, sprayed concrete, airblown mortar and concrete, etc. However, the term ‘shotcrete’ will be used throughout this part as the term is~accepted internationally. 1.3 Shotcrete is suitable for a variety of new construction and repair work, but its properties are to a great extent dependent on the conditions under which it is placed, the capability of the particular equipment selected and in particular on the competence~of the operating staff. Shotcrete can be either plain or reinforced. 1.4 Shotcrete is done by two processes, namely, drymix process and wet-mix process. Pnetlmatically conveyed shotcrete in which most of the mixing water is added at the nozzle is dry-mix process. Shotcrete wherein all the ingredients, including mixing water, are mixed in the equipment before introduction into the delivery hose in wet-mix process; the shotcrete mix may be conveyed pneumatically or moved by displacement.
3 SHOTCRETING
PROCESS
3.1 General The two basic processes are: a) Dry-mix process, and b) Wet-mix procqss. 3.2 Dry-Mix Process In this process, a mixture of cement and moist sand is conveyed through the delivery hose to a nozzle where most of the mixing water is added, under pressure (see Fig. 5.4). The process consists of the following steps:
2 MATERIALS
a) The cement and moist sand are thoroughly mixed; b) The cement-sand mixture is fed with a special mechanical feeder or gun;
2.1 Cement, aggregates, water, admixtures and reinforcement are as per Part I except as mentioned in 2.1.1. 116
‘fable 5.15 Recommended Mixes with Lime-Pozzolaha Mixture (Clause 2.3 of Part 3 Section 2) Sl No.
(1)
Situation
(2)
1. Levelling course under foundations, footiligs under masonry walls and columns, ordinary base concrete under floors, filling of haunches over masonry arches and roof finish
Grade of LimePoizalana
(3) LP-20
LP-7
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
2. Rbad bases air-field bases and improved base concrete under floor
3. Bonded under lays, building blocks and paving blocks
Coarse Aggregatk
,
28 Days Strength, Min
Mix by Volume
Mix by Mass A
/
%
LimePozzolana Mixture
Fine Aggregate
Coarse Aggregate
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
zE-G---Pozzolana Mixture (8)
coarse Aggregate
Compressive MPa
Flexural MPa
(10)
(11)
(12)
Crushed stone
1
4
8
1
Brick aggregate
1
3
6
1
2.25
4.5
1
0.2
1.75
4.0
1
Crushed stonC
1
3
6
1
0.2
1.75
3.5
1
Brick aggregate
1
2.5
0.2
5
1
Crushed stone
1
8
16
1
1.5
3.0
1
0.2
4.5
9
1
Brick aggregate
1
6.8
0.2
12
1
Crushed stone
1
5.2
10
1
4.0
8
1
0.2
3.0
6
1
0.2
Brick aaaregate
1
4.2
8
1
2.5
5
1
0.2
Crushed stone
1
3.4
7
1
2.0
4
1
0.2
Brick aggregate
1
2.5
5
1
1.5
3
1
0.2
5
1
1.25
3.0
4
0.6
Aggregate (9)
LP-40
Crushed stone
1
2.33
LP-20
do
1
1.33
3
1
1.25
1.75
4
0.6
Type
1
do
1
3.72
6.66
1
2.0
4
4
0.6
Type 2
do
1
2.66
2.60
1
1.5
3
4
0.6
LP-40
Crushed stone
1
2
4
1
1.12
2.25
7
0.9
LP-20
do
1
1
2
1
0.50
1.12
7
0.9
Type1
do
1
1
3.60
1
1.0
2.0
7
0.9
Type 2
do
1
1
2.64
1
0.5
1.5
7
0.9
NOTES
n
1 The aggregate grading for the lime-pozzolana concrete should, in the absence of special mix design procedure generally conform to the grading given in IS 383 : 1970. 2 The volumetric proportioning is based on the assumption that a 36 kg bag of LP mixture would be 0.042 5 m3 by volumC.
G E G Ro 5 ..
3 For water requirement, the compaction factor should be kept b.85 _+0.02 for all the mixes. 5 4
i.
.
Table 516 Coarse Aggregates (Chse2.1.1)
Percentage Passing for Single-Sized Aggregate of Nominal Size h
IS Sieve Designation #-
c oc
I
Percentage Passing for Graded Aggregate of Nominal Size h
/
% 12.5 mm
63 mm
40 mm
20mm
16mm
12.5 mm
10mm
40 mm
20 mm
16 mm
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(10
80 mm
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
63 mm
85 td 100
100
-
-
-
-
100
-
-
-
95 to 100
100
-
-
100
-
-
30 to 70
9s to 100
100
100
40 mm
oto30
20 mm
0 to 5
k5 to 100 oto20
85 to 100
16 mm
-
-
-
12.5 mm
-
-
-
-
oto20
oto30
IOmm
0 to 5
0 to 5
4.15 mm
-
-
2.36 mm
-
-
0 to 5 -
85 to 100
oto5 -
100 85 to 100 oto45 oto 10 -
100 85 to 100 oto20 0 to 5
100
-
-
-
-
90 to 100 -
10tcs3.5
25 to 55
30 to 70
0 to 5
Oto 10
oto10
-
-
-
90 to 100 40 to 85 oto 10 -
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
C) The mixture is forced into the delivery hose by a feed wheel or a distributor;
d) The mixed material is carried in suspension of compressed air through the delivery hose to a nozzle, which is filled inside with a perforated manifold through which water is introduced under pressure and intimately mixed with other ingredients; and
4 The mortar is jetted from the nozzle at high velocity on to the surface to be shotcreted. 3.3 Wet-Mix
Process
In this process, all the ingredients including water are mixed before they enter the delivery hose. It consists of the following steps:
4 All the ingredients, b) c) d)
including mixing water, are thoroughly mixed; The mortar or concrete is introduced into the chamber of the delivery equipment; The mixture is forced into the delivery hose and conveyed by compressed air or other means to a nozzle; Additional air is injected at the nozzle to increase the velocity and improve the shooting pattern; and CEMENT
e) The mortar or concrete is jetted from the nozzle at high velqcity on to the area to be shotcreted. 3.4 Shotcrete may be produced by either of the processes for normal constructional requirements. However, difference in cost of equipment, maintenance and operational features may make one or the attractive for a particular other method more application. 4 PROPERTIES
OF SHOTCRETE
4.1 Shotcrete, if properly applied, is a structurally adequate and durable materid capable of excellent bond with concrete, masonary, steel, and other materials. However, these favourable properties of sound shotcrete are contingent on properplanning and supervision, and on the skill and continuous attention by the operating staff. 4.2 The water cement ratio for shotcrete in place normally falls within a range of 0.35 to 0.50 by mass which is somewhat lower than for most conventional concrete mixes. In general, the physical-properties of sand shotcrete in place are comparable to those of conventional mortar or concrete of the same composition. Most reported values for 28 days strength are in the range of 20 to 50 N/mm2 (200 kg/cm2 to
AGGREGATE
YY MIXER
Y
AIR CONVEYED DRY MIX
WATEI 9 !SUPPLY
I
PRESSURISED WATER WATER CONTROL VALVE d
MIX SPRAY ED FROM NOZZLE
FIG. 5.4 DIAGRAMATICREPRESENTATION OFGUNITEPROCESS
SP 62(S & T): 1997
500 kg/cm2). It is recommended
that strength higher than 25 N/mm2 (250 kg/cm2) be specified only for the most carefully executed shotcrete jobs. 4.3 The drying shrinkage of shotcrete depends, somewhat on the mix proportions used, but generally falls within the range of 0.06 to 0.08 percent. This is-rather higher than most low slump conventional concrete, which is generally placed in heavier sections using larger aggregates and leaner mixes. It will tend to give more shrinkage, cracking and may require a closer joint spacing. The durability of shotcrete is good.
be large enough to obtain all test specimens needed, and also to indicate what quality and uniformity may be expected in the structure. Generally, the size of the panel shall be not less than 75 cm x 75 cm. The thickness shall be the same as in the structure, except that it shall normally be not less than 7.5 cm. 5.6 Cubes or cores shall be taken from the panels for testing. The cores shall have a minimum diameter of 7.5 cm and length diameter ratio of at least one if possible. The specimens shall be tested in compression at the age of 7 or 28 days or both.
4.4 Shotcrete offers advantages over conventional concrete in a variety of new construction and repair works. It is frequently more economical because of lesser forming requirements and because it requires only a small portable plant for manufacture and placement.
5.7 The cut surfaces of the specimens shall be carefully examined and additional surfaces shall be exposed by saving and breaking of the panel when it is considered necesary to check the soundness and uniformity of the material. All cut and broken surfaces shall be dense and free from laminations and sand pockets.
5 PRE-CONSTRUCTION
6 MIXING
TESTING
5.1 Testing shall be done prior to the commencement of the work in order to check the operation of equipment, skill of the operating staff and the quality of shotcrete. The procedure is detailed in 5.2 to 5.7.
6.1 Dry-Mix
a>Batching
by mass is preferred.
b) The moisture content of the sand shall general-
5.2 Test panels shall be fabricated, simulating actual job conditions, by the operating staff using theequipment, materials and mix proportions proposed for the job.
c)
5.3 For the dry-mix process, the amount of water added at the nozzle is adjusted so that the inplace shotcrete appears to be adequately compacted and neither sags nor shows excessive rebound. Where justified by the size and importance of the job or lack of previous experience with the materials, it may be advisable to test two or three mixes, generally within the range of 1 part of cement to 3 to 4; parts of sand,
4
before deciding on the final mix proportions.
4
5.4 The procedure for wet-mix process is similar to the dry-mix process (see 5.3), except that the entire concrete mix is premixed to give a workability judged to be appropriate for the work, before it is introduced to the chamber of delivery equipment. Tests on more than one~mix design are usually recommended where it is desired to include coarse aggregate in the mix. Normally 20 to 40 percent of coarse aggregate is first tried with subsequent mixes adjusted to reflect the results of the first trial. 5.5 The panels are fabricated by gunning on to a back form of plywood. A separate panel shall be fabricated for each mix design being considered, and also for each gunning position to be encountered in the structure, that is, slab, vertical and overhead sections. At least part of the panel shall contain the same reinforcement as the structure, to show whether sound shotcrete is obtained behind the reinforcing rods, The panel shall
Process
ly be within 5 to 6 percent 10 permit flow at a uniform rate. The mixing equipment shall be capable of thoroughly mixing the sand and cement in sufficient quantity to maintain continuity of placing. The mixing time shall be not less than a minute in a drum type mixer. The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned to prevent accumulations of batched materials. Supply of clean dry air under pressure should be ensured through an air compressor. The air pressure should be uniformly steady (non-pulsating). The operating pressure shall drive the material from the delivery equipment into the hose. For length of hose up to 30 m, the operating pressure shall be 0.3 N/mm2 (3 kg/cm2) or more; for each additional 15 m length of hose pressure maI be increased by 0.035 N/mm’ (0.35 kg/cm ) and the same increase allowed for each 7.5 m ~that the nozzle is raised before the gun. Water under pressure shall be supplied; the water pressure shall be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure at the discharie nozzle. Water pressure shall also be steady and non-pulsating.
6.2 Wet-Mix
Process
a) Batching by mass is preferred. Aggregates may be batched by volume of periodic checks are made to ensure that the masses are maintained within the required tolerance. Water may be batchedeither by volume or mass.
120
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
b) The mixing time will depend on the mix being used and the efficiency of the mixer. The other details are as per~dry-mix.
c>
7 APPLICATION
OF SHOTCRETE
7.1 Surface Preparation Shotcrete shall not be placed on any surface which is frozen, spongy or where there is freewater. b) Surfaces shall be kept damp for several hours before shotcreting. In case of repairs, all existing deteriorated concl crete shall be removed. The final cut surface shall be examined to make sure that it is sound and perfectly shaped; all edges shall be tapered. The surface shall be cleaned of all loose and foreign materials. 4 Exposed reinforcement shall be free of rust, scales, etc. 7.2 Formwork Forms may be plywood sheeting or other material, true to line and dimension. They shall be so constructed as to permit the escape of air and rebound during gunning operations. Forms shall be~oiled and dampened just before gunning. Short removable bulkheads may be used at intersections. Appropriate scaffolding shall be erected to permit suitable positions for holding the nozzle. 7.3 Reinforcement
4 Reinforcement b)
shall be so placed as to cause least interference to gunning operations. Minimum clearance may be 12 mm to 50 mm between formwork and reinforcement for mortar work and concrete mix respectively. Clear spacing between bars shall be not less than 65 mm. As far as possible, bars shall be so arranged as to permit shooting from the opposite side. Lapped reinforcing bars shall not be tied together; they shall be separated by at least 50 mm. For repair work, existing work may be fixed with reinforcement by nails. All detailing shall be as per IS 456 : 1978.
c> 4 e) fl g)
7.4 Alignment
Control
Adequate ground wires shall be installed to ensure thickness and surface planes of shotcrete build up. 7.5 Placing of Shotcrete t
b)
a) Shotcrete may be built up in layers. Shotcrete shall be forced behind bars. When bars are closely spaced more than one bar may be shot
from each position of the nozzle. ?ivoid building up on the front face of the bar. The first layer shall completely embed the bar for walls, columns and beams, beginning at the bottom.
7.6 Rebound a) Rebound is aggregate and cement paste which ricochets off the surface during the application of shotcrete. Rebound may be as below: Percentage
Sutiace
of Rebound 5-15 15-30 25-50
Floors or slabs Sloping and vertical walls Overhead work b) Rebound concrete; batches.
shall not be worked back into the it shall not be included in later
7.7 Preparation for Succeeding Layers The earlier layer shall be allowed to take initial set before the second layer is commenced. Then laitance, loose material and rebound shall be removed. The surface shall be thoroughly sounded with a hammer for drummy areas resulting from rebounding pockets or lack of bond. Drummy areas shall be cut off and replaced with succeeding layers. Surfaces to be shot shall be damp. 7.8 Construction
Joints
Construction joints shall generally ciples as laid down in Part 1.
follow the prin-
7.9 Finishing The natural gun finish is preferred both from structural and durability considerations. Finishing may be difficult for dry-mix work. 7.10 Suspension of Work
.
a)
The work shall be suspended when exposure to high wind, breezing or rain is likely. b) When work is stopped, the shotcrete shall be sloped off to a thin edge and then the work resumed after cleaning the surface.
7.11. Curing The surfaces shall be kept continuously 7 days.
wet for at least
7.12 For more details reference may be made to IS 9012 : 1978 on recommended practice for shotcreting.
121
‘,
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER 6 ANTI-TERMITE
MEASURES
CONTENTS
5 TERMITESHIELDS
1 GENERAL PART
1 CONSTRUCTIONAL
5.1 Installation 5.2 Termite Caps
MEASURES
1 GENERAL
PART 2 TREATMENT IN EXISTING BUILDINGS
2 PRELIMINARY WORK 2.1 Presence of Termites 2.2 Clearance of Site 2.3 Elimination of Moisture 2.4 Foundation and Sub-base of Ground Floor 2.5 Selection of Timber 3 DESIGNCRITERIA 4 INTERNALANDEXTERNAL ANTI-TERMITE MEASURES 4.1 Construction Methods
1 GENERAL TREATMENT 2 POSTCONSTRUCTION 2.1 Inspection 2.2 Extermination of Termites in Buildings 2.3 Preventive Measures 3 INSPECTION I
ANNEX A GUIDE FORTERMITE DETECTION
SP62(S
& T): 1997
CHAPTER 6
ANTI-TERMITE MEASURES 1 GENERAL 1.1 In Chapter 2 on earth work the anti-termite treatment of soil by chemical methods has been dealt with.
This chapter will deal with (a) Anti-termite measures through constructional means; and (b) Anti-termite treatment of existing buildings.
-PART 1 CONSTRUCTIONAL
1 GENERAL 1.1 Termite control in buildings is very important as damage likely to be caused by the termites is huge. Termites attack both cellulosic and non-cellulosic materials. They also damage materials of organic origin with a cellulosic base. Wood, rubber, leather, plastic, neoprene as well as lead coating used for covering underground cables are damaged by termites. 1.2 There are two types of termites, namely, subterranean or ground nesting termites and non subterranean termites or wood nesting which have no contact with soil. The subterranean termites cause most damage in buildings.
a stump or other piece of timber near the site. If the soil is covered by soil rich in decaying matter, the top layer of the soil (about 50- 100 mm) shall be removed. The soil shall be graded to maintain drainage around the building. 2.3 Elimination
2.4 Foundation
and Sub-base
of Ground
Floor
a>Every b)
effort should be made to avoid voids in the construction of foundations. The earth and sand filling around the foundations and in sub-base shall be fully rammed so asto prevent any subsidence in soil. Where jointless sub-base is not .possible, precautions may be taken to prevent crack formation and the joints are sealed. If concreting of sub-base has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surfaces shall be roughened, swept clean, thoroughly wetted and covered with a 15 mm layer or mortar composed of cement and sand in the same ratio as in the concrete mix. This layer of mortar shall be freshly mixed and laid immediately before placing of concrete. When concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristle ~brushes, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of particles of aggregates. The surface shall be wetted and all free water removed and then coated with neat cement grout. The first layer of concrete to be laid shall not be more than 150 mm in thickness and shall be well rammed against old work, particular attention being paid to corners and close spots.
c> 4
WORK
2.1 Presence of Termites The presence of termites at the site may be determined either by experience of local inhabitants or by stake test as described below. A member of stakes 50 mm x 50 mm of timber species which are suspectible to termites, such as, chir, kail, mango, etc, should be buried at least 150 mm into the ground spaced at 1 m centre-to-centre at the proposed site. After 3-4 months, the stakes may be taken out and infestation of termites observed. Termites, if present, will damage the stakes. 2.2 Clearance of Site Care shall be taken to see that all wooden debris, roots, leaves, stumps and other organic matters are not accumulated or buried near the foundation or under floor of the building. Typically termite nests are formed in
of Moisture
Drainage shall be ensured so that water does not accumulate or stagnate around the building. Access of water to the underside of the ground floor shall be prevented through proper construction measures, such as, construction of concrete apron around the building.
1.3 Prevention of possible invasion by subterranean termites from the ground to the building through external entry or internal attackfrom under floors should be undertaken. This can be done either by preventivecum-detection methods, for example, masonry groove or termite shield orstring course and cement concrete apron floor; or by internal preventive methods, such as, by providing a solid floor. The constructional methods given in this part are based on actual trials in the field but modifications due to local conditions have to be made. 2 PRELIMINARY
MEASURES
2.5 Selection of Timber Seasoned timber which is naturally durable in heartwood and which is treated to withstand the attack 125
.”
SP 62 (S & T) : I997 of subterranean termites should be used in the building (see IS 401 : 1982 and IS 1141 : 1993, onpreservation and treatment of timber). 3 DESIGN
CRITERIA
Anti-termite measures through construction will be effective if both external and internal protection are adequately provided. The external protection refers to prevention of termite access on surrounding area of the building. The internal protection refers to the access from soil under the floor area. b) For external protection, provision of metal shields or masonry grooves around the periphery of the building and cement concrete apron around the building are recommended. To be effective the shape of the metal barrier shall be properly maintained. For internal protection the concrete sub-base shall be extended under the walls so that the entire plinth area is fully covered without any break. In case of depressed floors like liftwells, bathrooms, garrage pits, etc, the subbase should be continuous. 4 The concrete flooring shall be laid over a layer of coarse sand (larger than 3 mm) as the sand layer checks soil moisture rising up. e) Termites do not generally penetrate masonry or concrete in which there are no voids. Masonry with lime mortar mix leaner than I : 3 shall not be used to be in contact with soils. If the floor construction gives rise to vertical joints between the floor and the plinth masonry, the joints may be filled with heavy grade coaltar pitch to IS 216 : 1961 to minimize the tendency of termites to infiltrate through these joints. 4 INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL TERMITE MEASURES 4.1 Construction
ANTI-
Methods
The construction methods specified in 4.1.1 to 4.1.8 may be adopted for protection against subterranean termites originating both internally from within and externally from the area surrounding the building. Stagewise details are given. 4.1.1 Earth, free from roots, dead leaves, or other organic matter, shall be placed and compacted in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than 200 mm thick. Dry brick shall be inserted at least 50 mm in brick masonry for providing apron floor around the periphery (see Fig. 6.1). 4.1.2 Brick on edge in cement mortar shall be laid on the plinth wall. Dry brick shall be placed on the inner side of the plinth wall for getting anticipated offset space for coarse sand and on the otherside for installing anti-termite masonry groove. In the case of intermediate walls, dry bricks are placed on either side of
the brick on edge masonry for getting offset space for coarse sand layer (see Fig. 6.2). 4.1.3 The dry brick for the anti-termite groove shall be taken out and cement concrete (1:3:6) sub-floor shall be laid casting an anti-termite groove in position. In case of internal protection walls, the cement concrete sub-floor shall be laid on either side over dry bricks to sufficient extent for getting staggered vertical joints over the joint of plinth wall and earth filling (see Fig. 6.3). 4.1.4 Superstructure masonry shall be raised over the cement concrete sub-floor and overhead jobs completed (see Fig. 6.4). 4.1.5 The dry brick for coarse sand filling shall be removed and graded sand (of size 3 mm to 5 mm) layer at least 100 mm thick shall be compacted over the earth filling (see Fig. 6.5). 4.1.6 Cement concrete (1:3:6 mix) sub-floor at least 75 mm thick shall be laid over the sand filling. Masonry finish may be provided to the cement concrete sub-floor (see Fig. 6.6). 4.1.7 Dry brick provided for apron floor (see Fig. 6.1) shall be taken out and 600 mm wide formation of earth in 1:30 slope shall be made. lover the formation 75 mm thick lime concrete (1:3:6 mix) shall be laid (see Fig. 6.7). 4.1.8 Over the 75 mm thick lime concrete bed at least 25 mm thick cement concrete topping ( 1:2:4) shall be laid and 12 mm thick cement plaster shall be applied on the plinth (see Fig. 6.8). 4.1.9 The finished construction, incorporating the stages mentioned in 4.1.1 to 4.1.8, appears as in Fig. 6.9. 4.1.10 The finished construction for stone masonry incorporating the stages mentioned in 4.1.1 to 4.1.8, would be as in Fig. 6.9 without plaster. 5 TERMITE SHIELDS 5.1 Installation Termite shields may be installed around the periphery of a building where infestation is high. Provision of metal shields takes care of external protection only. The visible termites tunnels on the shields should be destroyed periodically. However, termite metallic shield in residential areas may be hazardous for people; so it may be advantageously used for warehouses, godowns, etc. Metallic sheets may be made out of galvanized sheets, aluminium sheets, etc. The sheet should be embedded~in the sub-floor properly with about SOmmprojection bent downword around 45’C~(see Fig. 6.10). The free edge also may be turned downwards as termites can negotiate on straight edge. General protective measures shall be attempted for door entrances as it is not practicable to install metal shields. 5.2 Termite Caps Inverted caps may be used in pipelines outside walls to prevent migration of termites and they should be properly mounted. 126
SP 62 (S 8r T) : 1997
DRY
BRICK FOR APRON FLOOR
Alldimensions in millimetres. FIG.6.1 ANTI-TERMITECONSTRUCTION-STAGE 1 BRHZK ON EDGEIN CEMENT
MORTAR
DRY BRICK FOR ANTI-TERMITE GROOVE
All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG.6.2 ANTI-TERMITECONSTRUCTION-STAGE 2 DENSE CEMENT CONCRETE [1:3:6) SUBFLOOR CARPET LAID CASTING .-DRY \-‘--
FIRICK _..._..
/
-ANT-TERMITE
GROOVE
IN POSITION
1
_r
12mm
CEMENT
DETAIL
AT
THICK PLASTER
A
All dimensions in millimetres. FIG.6.3 ANTI-TERMITECONSTRUCTION-STAGE 3
127
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
SUPERSTRUCTURE
All dimensions in millimetres. FIG.6.4 ANTI-TERMITECONSTRUCTION-STAGES
DRY
BRICKS
AND
100
LAYER
mm
LAID
TAKEN OUT THICK SAND AND COMPACTED
7
FIG.6.5ANTI-TERMITECONSTRUCTIONSTAGES
128
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
COMPLETED 75mm THICK DENSE CEMENT CONCRETE
F1ci.6.6 ANTI-TERMITECONSTRUCTION-STAGES
~6oo-------t-1r25 t
GL
\-DRY BRICK TmAKE-N OUT AND .IMECONCRETE BED [1:3:6) .AID FOR APRON FLOOR
Fa6.7
AI1dimensions inmillimetres. ANTI-TERMITECONSTRUCTION-STAGE 7 129
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
12mm
THICK
CEMENT
PLASTER
25 mm -THICK
CEMENT
CONCRETE 4 1: 2: 61 TOPPlNG
FIG. 6.8 ANTI-TERMITE
CON$TRUCTION
- STAGE 8
SUPERSTRUCTURE FLOOR
75mm
THICK
CONCRETE FILLING-j
\
I ///l=y
r
Y-
BRICK
CEMENT
SUBFLOOR
ON EDGE
75 100 12 mm
THICK CEMENT ~PLASTER
r25
c
!’
FILLING
L50
LIME
CEMENT
CONCRETE CONCRETE
APRON TOPPING
All dimensions in miliimetres. FIG. 6.9 ANTI-TERMITE
CONSTRUCTION
- FINAL
RECOMMENDATIONS
130
.:
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
DETAIL
Al
A
ANTI -TERMITE SHIELD ALROUND THE PERIPHERY OF THE BUILDING ~EXCEPT AT EN1 RANCE
PRQN FLOOR
Alldimensions in millimetres. FIG.6.10 TERMITESHIELDATPLINTHLEVEL
PART 2 TREATMENT
IN EXISTING
BUILDtNGS
1 GENERAL
2.2 Extermination
1.1 Chapter 2 covered preventive chemical treatment against termites in the soil. Part 1, dealt with constructional means of preventing termite attack. This part deals with treatment after attack in existing buildings.
After making a study of the infestation in the building the next step~to eliminate the termites located inside the building. This shall be carried out in a thorough manner, seeking the termites in their hideouts, such as, ceilings, behind wooden panelling, inside electrical battens, conduits, switchboards and similar locations. Recourse may be taken to inject chemicals as already mentioned in Chapter 2 along with the recommended concentrations; every precaution shall be taken while using chemicals to protect the operators. All traces of termite tubes shall be removed so that any fresh infestation which might occur at a later date may be easily detected. The chemicals to be used Heptachlor 0.5 percent emulsifiable concentrate, I .O percent Chlordane emulsifiable concentrate and 1.O percent Chlorpyrifos emulsifiable concentrate. The Authority concerned with the use of pesticides should be consulted on the hazards in using these chemicals.
2 POST CONSTRUCTION
TREATMENT
2.1 Inspection Before undertaking any type of treatment, a thorogh inspection shall be made of the infestation in the building with a view to determine the extent to which it has spread and the routes of entry of the termites into the building. A study of the structure of foundation land the ground floor helps in finding out the routes of entry of termites from the-soil and also in deciding on the mode of treatment. For guidance, information on detection of termites is given in Annex A.
131
of Termites in Buildings
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.3 Preventive
a>At the junction
Measures
2.3.1 Soil Treatment
b)
of the floor and walls as a result of shrinkage of the concrete; On the floor surface owing to construction defects; and At expansion joints in the floor.
The object of soil treatment is to establish chemical (toxic) barrier between termites in the soil and the building to be protected. Basically~it consists of treating the soil adjacent to or under the building with a chemical toxicant which kills or repels termites. Water emulsions of any one of the chemicals mentioned in 2.2 shall be used in soil treatment and applied uniformly at the prescribed rate.
The method of the dealing with these locations is to apply chemical treatment within the plinth wherever such cracks occur. The chemical should be pumped through holes drilled at regular intervals to a reasonable depth, until refusal, subject to maximum of one litre/hole. The holes shall then be sealed.
2.3.1.1
2.3.1.3
Treatment along outside offoundations
a) The soil in contact with the external wall of the building shall be treated with the chemical emulsion at the rate of 7.5 l/m* of the vertical surface of the substructure to a depth of 300 mm. To facilitate this treatment a.shal1o.w channel b) shall be excavated along and close to the wall face. c) The chemical emulsion shall be directed towards the exposed wall at the rat6 of 1.75 litres per running metre of the channel (see Note). NOTE - 7.5 l/m2 for a depth of 0.3 m means 2.27 litres per running metre.
For uniform disposal of the chemical, rodding may be done at every 150 mm intervals. e) The balance of the chemical (2.27- 1.75 l/m) shall be used to treat the backfill returned to the channel. f) If there is a concrete apron around the wall,’ instead of excavating a channel,~holes shall be made in the apron 800 mm apart and deep enough to reach the soil below and then the chemical solution be pumped at the rate of about 2.25 litres per running metre. here applies to d The treatment mentioned masonry foundations.
4
In the case of RCC foundation, the soil (backfill) in contact with the column sides and plinth beams along the external perimeter of the building shall be treated with the chemical solution at the rate of 7.5 l/m* of vertical surfaces of the structure. Details of the treatment shall be as above. 2.3.1.2
Treatment of soil under floors
The points where termites are likely to seek entry through the tloor are the cracks at the following locations:
cl
Treatment of voids in masonry
The movement of termites through the masonry walls may be arrested by squirting chemical emulsion through holes drilled in the wall at plinth level. The holes shall be drilled at a downward slope of around 45’C. This treatment shall also be done to internal walls in contact with soil. Additional holes may also be drilled as needed, such as, wall corners, under door and window frames, etc. The treatment holes shall then be sealed. 2.3.1.4
Treatment at points of contact with woodwork
All existing work, infested with termites, shall be treated by spraying at points of contact with masonry with chemical emulsion in holes drilled at an inclination of around 45’C, the rate shall be around half-alitre per hole. 2.3.2 Treatment of Woodwork
4 ~Woodwork which has been damaged beyond b)
repair shall be replaced after appropriate treatment. Infestld woodwork, which can be used, shall be protected with chemical treatment squirted through inclined holes drilled into the woodwork up to the core, on the unaffected side of the frame. If need be, the woodwork may be painted with one or two coats of chemicals.
2.3.3 Treatment of Electrical Fixtures Wherever possible, the inside of the enclosures of electrical fixtures shall be treated liberally with chlordane powder. 3 INSPECTION 3.1 Periodic inspection of the work/installations particularly during humid and hot seasons would be helpful.
132
r.__.
._
SP 62 (S ‘& T) : 1997
ANNEX A (Clause 2.1) GUIDE FOR TERMITE -DETECTION A-l PROCEDURE A-l.1 Bright light is essential for termite detection. A bright hand-held electric bulb (in a fixture) or a torch would be necessary. A-l.2 Portions of the building in contact with or adjacent to soil should be inspected. Damp locations, such as, bathrooms, etc, shall also be inspected. Points where woodwork is embedded in the floor, in partitular, shall be examined.
A-l.3 The signs of presence of termites is through the tell tale tubes. Termites travel in these and are~supposed to eataway woodwork leaving the film of paint on the surface, making it difficult to locate the termite. Woodwork sheuld be tapped to check hollow sound which would indicate termite attack. The new tubes of termites are moist; the old ones are dry and break easily. These must be gouged out with a knife to destroy the termites.
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER 7 DOORS AND WINDOWS
(WOOD AND METAL)
CONTENTS
9 LEDGED AND BATTENEDAND LEDGED, BRACED
1 ~GENERAL
PART 1 TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS VENTILATORS
AND
1 GENERAL 2 CLASSIFICATIONOF TIMBER
2.1 Zonal Distribution 2.2 Information on Timber 2.3 Moisture Content
ANDBATTENEDDOORAND WINDOW SHUTTERS 10 BATTENEDAND FRAMED DOOR AND WINDOW SHUTTERS 11 TIMBERPANELLEDAND GLAZEDSHUTTERS 12 LOUVREDSHUTTERS
13 FITTINGS 14 GLAZING
3 WOOD PANELPRODUCTS
14.1 General 14.2 PatentGlazing 14.3 Materials
4 DOORSAND WINDOWS 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Frames Shutters Hardware Paints and Varnishes ~Glass
14.4 Glazing ANNEX A LIST OF INDIANSTANDARDSON BUILDERS HARDWARE
PART 2 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS (STEEL AND ALUMINIUM)
5 INSTALLATION OFWOODEN FRAMES
5.1 Prepared Openings 5.2 Installation of-Frames 5.3 Precautions
1
GENERAL
2
INSTALLATION
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
6 INSTALLATION OFPRESSEDSTEELFRAMES 6.1 General 6.2 Components 6.3 Installation 7 INSTALLATION OFPANELLEDSHUTTERS 8
JOINERY
General Type of Openings Installation~of Single Units Installation of Composite Units Hardware
3
GLAZING
4
OTHERSHUTTERS
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
CHAPTER 7
DOORS AND WINDOWS (WOOD AND METAL) metal (steel and aluminium) are dealt with. Part I deals with timber doors and windows. Part 2 deals with metal doors and windows.
1 GENERAL In this chapter doors and windows made of wood and
PART 1 TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS
AND VENTILATORS
1 GENERAL
2 CLASSIFICATION
1.1 Timber generally used in buildings are either of solid timber or panel products like plywood, particle board, etc. The major use is in door and window frames and their shutters, furniture and the like. It is also used in structures specially in hilly regions where timber is abundantly available and other common building materials like brick are not easy to come
2.1 Zonal Distribution
OF TIMBER
IS 399 : 1963 details the zonal distribution of common commercial and timber of India, classified according to their various end uses and gives information on availability and on some of the other properties of these timbers. The uses, include:
by.
a) Constructional purposes, including building construction, piles, bridges, poles, railway sleepers, etc; and b) Furniture and cabinet making.
1.2 India has around two hundred species of commercial timber grown in different parts of the country. For quite sometime timber was transported over long distances for some specific services even when species suitable for the purpose would be secured from nearby sources. The reason apparently appears to be the misT conception that in timber there are primary species (teak) and secondary species. No such classification exists and it is a misnomer. All species can be used, only each species has different end use. Some species are even stronger in cumulative properties than teak. IS 399: 1963 classifies commercial timber and their distribution in India along with different end uses. Therefore it is necessary to check locally available timber for building purposes before specifying the species for woodwork.
India is divided into five zones for convenience in tabulating the information on timber. The zones are:
1.3 Moisture content is an important requirement for use of timber in woodwork. Moisture content affects its workability, size, etc. The moisture content of timber changes from season to season depending on atmospheric humidity. The application of a finish (paint or varnish) reduces the change in moisture content with changes in humidity in the atmosphere. IS 287 : 1993 governs the recommendations for maximum permissible moisture content for timber used for different purposes.
Zone I
-
Jammu & Kashmir, Punjab, H.imachal Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, Haryana and Rajasthan.
Zone2
-
Assam, Manipur, Tripura, West Bengal, Bihar, Orissa, Mizoram, Arunachal Pradesh, Nagaland, Sikkim, Bhutan, Andamans.
Zone 3 -
Madhya Pradesh, Vidharbha areas of Maharashtra and north east part of Andhra Pradesh (Godavari Delta area).
Zone 4
-
Maharashtra (except Vidharbha area), Gujarat, and north west part of Karnataka.
Zone 5 -
Tamil Nadu, Pondicherry, Andhra Pradesh (except Godavari Delta area), Kerala and Karnataka (except north west part).
2.2 Information
1.4 For actual end use seasoning and treatment of timber are necessary. Seasoning will help in the control of moisture and it should be done as per IS 1141 : 1993; and preservation as per IS 40 I : 1982.
on Timber
Tables in IS 399 : 1963 give information on the following aspects of timbers available in these zones.
137
a) Availability - Availability of commercial timber is categorized under three classes as
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.3 Moisture
given below: X -
Most common, 1400 cu.m and more per year
Y -
Common,
For the purpose of classification into four zones as under:
350 - 1 400 cu.m per year
Z - Lesscommon, bElow 350cu.mperyear. b) Mass per cubic metrc -The average mass per cubic metre at 12 percent moisture content for all timbers. cl Durability - The figures of durability are based on grave yard tests carried out on 60 cm x 5 cm x 5 cm specimens and are categorized as below: High
-
Timber having, an average life of 120 months and over
Moderate -
Timbers having an average life between 60 to 120 months
Low
4
b -
Heartwood penetration obtained
Zone 1 -
Average annual relative than 40 percent
humidity
less
Zone2
-
Average annual relative tween 40-50 percent
humidity
be-
Zone3
-
Average annual relative tween 50-67 percent
humidity
be-
Zone4
-
Average annual relative humidity above 67 percent.
2.3.1 Maximum permissible moisture content of different end uses are given in IS 287 : 1993. For construction, furniture, etc, purposes Table 7.1 gives the recommended values of~maximum moisture content.
Timber having an average life less than 60 months. Treatability - Treatability, reflecting the resistance offered by the heartwood to the penetration of preserative fluid under pressure of 10. 5 kg/cm2 is classified as below: Heartwood easily treatable
Table 7.1 Permissible Moisture Timber (Clause 2.3.1) Sl Use No.
Heartwood only partially treatable
d -
Heartwood refractory to treatment
i)
Doors and windows a) 50 mm and above in thickness b) Thinner than 50 mm
iii) iv) v)
e -
Heartwood very refractory to treatment, penetration being practically nil from side or end Compressive strength coejjfkient - The come) pressive strength coefficient is arrived at by grouping the various important mechanical properties of timber that may come into play for any particular use and giving due weightage to the relative important of these properties.
of
h
Beams and rafters
ii)
Content
Moisture Content, MUX / Zone
treatable, but complete of preservative not always
c -
the country is divided
For these zones see Map of India in IS 287 : 1993.
-
a -
Content
Flooring strips Furniture and cabinet
I
Zone 2
\ Zone 3
Zone 4
12
14
17
20
10
12
14
16
8
10
12
14
8
10
10
12
10
12
14
15
Timber for further conv&on,
pasts, poles, etc
20 percent in all zones
NOTE - The moisture content is determined within a depth of 12 mm from the surface excluding 30 cm from each end, by a
moisture meter. 3 WOOD PANEL
PRODUCTS
3.1 Types There are several types of wood panel products which can be used in wood work for buildings. These are covered by the following Indian Standards:
2.2.1 The Handbook SP 33 (S & T) : 1986 covers the engineering aspects of use of timber.
IS No.
2.2.2 Timber species be identified by using IS 4970: 1973 keys for identification of commercial timbers; around 50 cards are available for identifying species. 2.2.3 Timber may be graded on the~basis of defects as per IS 6534 : 197 1 which gives guidelines of grading and inspection of timber. 2.2.4 Since publication of IS 399 : 1963 further work has been done in identifying species of timber suitable for doors and window shutters and frames; and for furniture and cabinets. These are covered in IS 12896 : 1990 for shutters and frames and IS 13622 : 1993 for furniture and cabinets. Thus additional species have been brought in for these~end uses.
303 : 1989 1328 : 1982 1658 : 1977 1659 : 1990 3087 : 1985 3097 : 1980 3129 : 1985 3348 : 1965 3478 : 1966 5509 : 1980 5539 : 1969 7316 : 1974 6701 : 1983
Title
PJywood for general purposes Veneered decorative plywood Fibre hardboards Block boards Wood particle board (medium density) Veneered particle~boards Particle board (low density) Fibre insulation boards Particle boards (high density) Fire retardant plywood Preservative treated plywood Decorative plywood using plurarity of veneers for decorative faces Structural plywood
Properti-es of these panel products are summarized in SP 21 (S &T) : 1983.
138
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 4 DOORS AND WINDOWS
c) Selection of hardware shall depend on economy desired and climatic conditions, such as, exposure to sea wind in coastal areas, etc. d) The material of the hardware may be mild anodized oxidized iron. brass, steel, aluminium, etc.
4.1 Frames Quite often doors which are factory made have to be adjusted with regard to dimensions of openings. Therefore, co-ordination among dimensions of shutters would be of great use. For larger benefit modular co-ordination is desirable. Installation practices have to be suitably adjusted so as to achieve satisfactory work within the tolerances specified. 4.1.1 Timber frames for doors and windows shall conform to IS 402 1 : 1983. For permatrent door frames Group I Timber shall be used (see IS 12896 : 1990). For temporary frames Group II and III can be used. Same species shall be used for rails and stiles; solid wood panels may be of any other specie. Steel door frames to receive wooden shutters shall conform to IS4351 : 1976.
Shutters can be of several kinds as below: Timber panelled and glazed shutters shall conform to IS 1003 (Part 1) : 1991 for doors and to IS 1003 (Part 2) : 1983 for windows. Wooden flush door shutters shall conform to IS 2191 (Part 1) : 1983 with plywood face panels (cellular and hollow core) and to IS 2 19 1 (Part 2) : 1983 for particle board and hard board face panels (cellular and hollow core). Wooden flush door shutters shall conform to IS 2202 (Part 1) : 1991 plywood face panels (solid core); and to IS 2202 (Part 2) : 1983 for particle board face panels and hard board face panels (solid core). sliding IS 4962 : 1968.
White lead primer paint, aluminium or other primer, wood filing putty, ready mixed paints, varnishes. polishes and all other materials shall conform to relevant Indian Standards (see Chapter IS). 4.5 Glass Sheet glass used for glazing shall conform to IS 2835 : 1987 or IS 2553 (Part I) : 1990 or IS 5437 : 1969. Other glasses like frosted glass, coloured glass, etc, may also be used (see 14 for glazing). 5 INSTALLATION
OF WOODEN FRAMES
5.1 Prepared Openings
4.2 Shutters
cl Wooden
4.4 Paints and Varnishes
doors shall
conform
to
4 Ledged, Braced and Battened Doors shall conform to IS 6198 : 1992. 4.3 Hardware Door and window hardware shall meet the requirements of relevant Indian Standards (see 13).
4 Each wooden door shutter shall have a minimum of three hinges and two fastenings like tower bolt, hasp and staple, mortice lock, etc. Floor stoppers, handles, hydraulic door closers, kick plate, etc, are optional.
b) Each window shutter shall have a minimum of three hinges and one fastening like tower bolt and one handle for opening and closing. Additional fastenings or tower bolts may be optional.
Installation into prepared openings shall be preferred (see 5.3); the advantage being that the frame is less liable to distortion and moisture changes. 5.2 Installation of Frames Door frame shall be installed at the required place and each door frame shall be provided with three holdfasts on either side; one each at top and bottom 30 cm away from the edge and one in the middle. Masonry or concrete in the wall shall be built after installation of doors so that holdfasts and pins at the bottom are anchored into them. Before construction of masonry, the outside of frames coming in contact with masonry shall be given a thick coat of coal tar or other water proofing paint. Suitable arrangements shall be made to hold the frames in rectangular shape during construction. Usually one cross batten at the middle and one cross batten at the bottom (no sill for the door) and two cross battens diagonally will be necessary to hold the frame in rectangular shape. Window frames shall be installed in the same manner as door frames, except that at least two holdfasts shall be provided. The size of the opening shall be checked. To ensure that the units are set at the appropriate levels a datum line for the sill of the door, window or ventilator shall be taken from a fixed point on the watl or from the finishes of the floor or ceiling. Alternatively, in a prepared opening, the fixing of the door frame may be flush or rebated as per drawings. The clearence between the frame and opening shall be kept depending on whether the opening is externally rendered or fair faced. The frame shall be checked before fixing in the positions that the same is square and in the proper position. The holdfast openings and the bottom pin shall be grouted. Plastering of the sides 139
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 shall be done and allowed to dry before the door window or ventilator shutters are fixed.
5.3 Precautions Precautions shall be taken to fix the door frame so as to take care of the final floor level and also the following points: a) Whether the shutters are inside opening or outside opening,~and b) Whether the frames are for exterior use or interior use. 6 INSTALLATION FRAMES
OF PRESSED
STEEL
6.1 General Each door frame shall consist of hinge jamb, lock jamb, head and if required angle thresh hold. The whole shall be welded or rigidly fixed together by mechanical means. Where no threshold is required, temporary base tie shall be screwed to the feet of the frames in order to form a rigid unit. 6.2 Components Base ties, fittings, such as, hinges, fixing lugs, mortar guards, lock-strike plate and sheet absorbers shall be as per IS 435 I : 1976. 6.3 Installation Pressed steel door frames are ideally suited for built-in; while fixing the following instructions shall be followed: 1) Place the door in position at correct height from the finished floor level. 2) Plumb to ensure that the frame is upright, square and free from twists. 3) Pressed steel door frames are liable to develop bow in heights or sag in the width either during fixing or during subsequent building work. To aovid this fix temporary struts across the width, preventing sides bulging inwards by weight of wall or partitions. 4) Build the walls up solid or each side and grout each course so as-to make solid contact with the frame leaving no voids. 5) Three lugs shall be provided on each jamb and the lugs shall not be placed more than 75 cm apart. 6) Do not remove temporary struts till brickwork is set. 7) In case screwed base tie is provided, leave it in position until floor is laid when it shall be removed. 7 INSTALLATION
OF PANELLED
SHUTTERS
7.1 Before installation of shutters, it shall be ascertained that the shutters, hardware, etc, are of the right
size and quality. The size of openings and the door frames shall be checked along with the verticality of the side frames, level position of the tloor and the wall. Adjustment any, if necessary, shall be done before the installation of the shutters. The shutter shall be installed only after the walls have dried. 7.2 Any defects in storage should be rectified, unless otherwise specified door shutters shall be fixed to the frames with 100 mm (or appropriate) long hinges. In driving screws in hard timbers, pilot holes be driven before fixing the screws. The door shutters shall be checked again after installation. 7.3 All fixtures shall then be fixed on the shutters and checked for preference. 7.4 Glazed panels, where required, should be fixed making sure that the correct size of glass panels are used. 7.5 Flush doors, when used in bathrooms, shall be protected at the bottom (inside) with 15 cm high-sheet of aluminium or plastic. 7.6 Where combination of doors, windows and ventilators is desired, care shall be taken that the symmetry of combination both as to dimension, colour and fixture is preserved. 7.7 Wooden doors, shutters, etc, shall be finished as given in Chapter 15 on finishes. 8 JOINERY 8.1 Joinery work may be started immediately after commencement of building work. All pieces shall be accurately cut and planed smooth to full dimensions without any patching or plugging of any kind. Rebates, rounding and moulding as shown in drawings shall be made before assembling. The thickness of stiles and rails shall~be as specified for the shutters. 8.2 All members of door shutters shall be straight without any warp or bow and shall have smooth well planed faces at right angles to each other. The corners and edges of panels shall be finished as shown in drawings and these shall be feather tongued into stiles and rails. Sash bars shall have mitered joints with stiles. Stiles and rails shall be properly and accurately mortised and tenoned. Rails which are more than 180 mm in width shall have two tenons. Stiles and rails of shutters shall be made out of one piece only. The tenons shall pass through the stiles for at least threefourths of the width of the stile. When assembling a leaf, stiles shall be left projecting as a horn. The stiles and rails shall have I2 mm groove in panelled portion for the panel to fit in. 8.3 The depth of rebate in frames for housing the shutters shall in all cases be 1.25 cm and the rebate in shutters for closing in double shutter door or window shall be not less than 2 cm. In the case of double leaved
140
_““..
,.,__&
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 shutters, the meeting of the styles shall be rebated 20 mm. The rebate shall be splayed. 8.4 The joints shall be pressed and secured by bamboo hardwood pins of about 6 mm diameter. The horn of the stiles shall be sawn off. 8.5 The finished work shall have a tolerance of + I mm in thickness and f 2 mm in width of stiles and rails. 8.6 The contact surfaces of tenon and mortise joints shall be treated before putting together with bulk type synthetic resin additive. The shutters shall not be painted, oiled or otherwise treated, before these are fixed in position. Mounting and glazing bars shall be sub-tenoned to the maximum depth which the size of the member would permit or to a depth of 25 mm whichever is greater. The thickness of each tenon shall be approximately one-third of the finished thickness of the members and the width of each tenon shall not exceed five times the thickness. 8.7 Beading for panels- may be provided on one or both sides for fixing wooden panel products. 8.8 For fixing glass and absestos panels, beadings with grooves shall be provided; where beading is provided without grooves, the beading shall be on one
side only. The other side being supported by the rebate from the stiles. For external doors and windows the beading shall be fixed on the outside. 8.9 For fixing glazing, the glass shall be embedded in putty and secured to the rebate by wooden beads of suitable size and shape. Wash leather, ribbon velvet, rubber flannel, felt, absestos or other similar material may be used in place of putty for internal glazing. The material shall be fitted either as a beading on one side or in such a manner that~it covers all parts of the glass which will be covered by beading (see also 14). If glazing compound or putty are not to be used recourse may be taken to patent glazing as per IS 10439 : 1983. The term ‘patent glazing’ is applied to those forms of glazing that rely on their efficiency upon some means of collecting and removing water in channels or grooves incorporated in the glazing bar as distinct from putty or other glazing compounds. For more details refer to IS 10439 : 1983. 8.10 Wooden cleats and blocks, for fixing locks,.shall be provided as decided by the Authority. 8.11 Figures 7
to 7.4 give typical details of joinery.
7.1A Single Tenon in Top Rail
?.I B Haunched Single Tenon in Top Rail
7.1C Double Tenon in Lock Rail
7.1 D Hazle Tenon in BottomRail
FIG. 7. I TYPICAL~LLUSTKATIONS OF TENONAND HAUNCHEDTENONINJOINERY 141
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
7.2A Single-Haunched
Tenon on a Top Rail
7.2B Middle or Lock Rail with Pair of Single Tenon and Haunch in Centre
7.2D Stub Tenon on a Munting (it does not go Through the Rail)
7.2C
Pair of Single-Haunched Tenon on Bottom Rail
FIG.7.2 TYPICALILLUSTRATIONSOFTENONANDHAUNCHEDTENONINJOINERY(ALTERNATEFIGURE)
142
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
FIG. 7.3 COMMON METHODSOF JOINTINGPANELS WITH STILESAND RAILS WITH/WITHOUTBEAIIING
pFjg
pqp
7.48 Square Type
7.4A Splayed Type
NOTE- t= Thickness of shutter FIG. 7.4 MEETINGOF STILESFORDOUBLE-LEAVED DOOR SHUTTERS
9 LEDGED AND BATTENED AND LEDGED, BRACED AND BATTENED DOOR AND WINDOW SHUTTERS 9.1 Timber specified for ledges, bracing and battens should be used and sawn in the direction of grains. Sawing shall be fully straight and square. The timber shall be planed smooth and accurate to the full dimensions, rebated, roundings and mouldings as in drawings, before assembly. Patching and plugging shall not be permitted except as provided. The thickness of the doors shall be the thickness of battens only and not the Lombined thickness of battens and braces. 9.2 Planks shall be 20 mm thick unless otherwise specified and of uniform width of 75 mm to 100 mm. These shall be planed and made smooth and provided
with minimum 12 mm rebated joints. The finished work with a tolerance of +I mm in thickness and &2 mm in width of battens, ledges, etc. The ends of battens shall be feather tongued into styles and rails which shall be provided with a 12 mm grove to fit battens. 9.3 The battens shall be fixed together by 25 mm thick ledges and braces to the inside face of door shutters with screws. The ledge shall be 175 mm wide and brace 125 mm wide unless otherwise specified. The braces shall incline down towards the side on which the door is hung as shown in Fig. 7.5. Edges and ends of ledges and braces shall be chamfered. Tee hinges shall be provided in ledges only. The finished work shall be with a tolerance of I!I~ mm in thickness and + 2 mm in width of battens ledges etc.
143
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 T,G
FRAME7
j--4Jb’ERALL
WIDTH
WIDTH OF
AND V
JOINTED
BATTENS
BRACE7
OF DOOR+
OPENING
SECTION
XX
r-LINTEL /HEAD
*-I
,-TO!
LEDGE
STRAP OR HINGE
X I, r-MIDDLE -
LEDGE
SLIDING BOLT
BATTENS -? BRACE \
SECTION
-BOTTOM
LEDGE
-BARREL
BOLT
YY
FIG. 7.5 LEDGED,BRACEDANDBATTENEDTIMBERDOOR 10 BATTENED AND FRAMED WINDOW SHUTTERS
DOOR
AND
a) Timber for frames shall be as in 4. b) Panels shall be made of any listed in 3. c) Glazing shall conform to IS 2835 : 1987 or IS 2553 (Part 1) : 1990. d) Joinery as given in Figs. 7.1 to 7.4.
10.1 These shall be made on the same lines as ledged, battened, braced shutters as shown in Figs. 7.1 to 7.4. 11 TIMBER PANELLED SHUTTERS
AND GLAZED
11.1 These shutters shall be-made in the same way as in 9 exceptas below:
SHUTTER
12 LOUVRED
SHUTTERS
12.1 Timber and frames shall be as in 4. 12.2 Venetian panels shall be 12 mm thick unless otherwise specified. The Venetian shall slope down 144
1.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 towards the outside at an angle as shown in drawings and shall be fixed in the stiles. The Venetians shall overlap each other by about half of their width. They may be fixed or movable. A tolerance of fl mm on thickness and 5 2 mm on width of the finished work is permissible. 12.3 The louvers may also be fixed to frames in grooves of minimum I .25 cm depth. Venetian blades shall slope down towards the outside at an angle of 45’ or specified otherwise, the overlap shall be about half the width. 13 FITTINGS
(HARDWARE)
13.1 Fittings shall conform to requirements of Indian Standards listed in Annex A. Fittings may be of steel, brass or aluminium or as specified. These shall be well made, reasonably smooth and free from sharp edges
and corners and other defects. Screw holes shall be smooth and free from sharp edges, flaws or other defects. Screw holes shall be countersunk to suit the head of wood screws. Screws used for fittings shall be of the same metal and finished as the fittings. However, chromium plated brass screws may be used for fixing aluminium fittings. Screws shall be driven home with screw driver and not hammered in. Recess shall be cut to the exact size and depth of counter sinking or hinges. Fittings shall be truly vertical or horizontal proper position as shown in drawings.
13.2 Figures 7.6 to 7.17 illustrate some of these hardware. The requirements of these hardware are summarized in SP 2 1 (S & T) : 1983; for hardware not covered here reference may be made to relevant Indian Standards given in Annex A.
--IF
t CRANKEO
UNCRANK ED
FIG. 7.6 MILD STEETBUTT HINGES(MEDIUM)
I
KNUCKLE
and in
-X4
t
Ll
U TAFpLEipE0
FIG. 7.7 BUTT HINGES(ALUMINIUMALLOY, CAST BRASSOR EXTRUDEDBRASS) 145
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 CSK HOLE I
t
t R6
KNUCKLE-/ I
minI@7J-Y@== -+ I
7 min.
I!’
3
C
7 min.
t
.
FIG.7.8 PARLIAMENT HINGES I
I
I
A--+-C--l 7.9A
Nominul Size 40 30
MildSteel Tee Hinges (Light, MediumandHeavy)
B
II
h
40 k 1 30+ I
75+2
2szkI 2s + I
7Sf2
L..
L”
1.1 20+
1
Is+ I
All dimeosionsm millimetres. 7.9B Continuous (Piano) Hinges
FIG.7.9 TYPICAL~LLUSTRATIONSOFHINGES 146
b
I
.’ .
SP 62 (S & ‘I’) : 1997
SPOT
WELDED
c 1 BOLT (ALTERNATIVE SECTION
BACK
PLATE
-4
-ACSK
b-3.15
No.9
CLIP
HOLE CSK
XX
.
FOR DESIGNATION WOOD SCREW
STAPLE
NOTE - Shapes of parts are only illustrative but the dimensions and the minimum requirements,
wherespecified,arebinding.
All dimensionsin millimetrs. FIG. 7.10 MILD STEEL SLIDINGDOOR BOLT, CLIPOR BOLT TYPE
SCREW
16
v HOLES
PRES LSED
mm +
+
44 F-d-PRING
AND
BALL
FIG. 7.11 BARRELL TOWER BOLTS 147
F-h-CAST OR EXTRUDED
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
I
\
‘G
T7
A
!
KNOB
TYPE NOTE I -
\
I
\
m-B-4
TYPE
2
Number and position of screw holes are illustrative and shall conform to the requirements
given in IS 5 I87
: 1972.
NOTE 2 -The shapes of the component parts are only illustrative and are not intended to limit the design. Movement of the bolt may be either by means of a knob or a lever.
FIG.7.12FLUSH BOLTS
148
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
ll II
ttt-ii-t-
DISC I
INDICATING BOLT
GUIDE AND LOCK PLATE 3 mm THICN imm ROUND HEAD
SHUTTER7
I I
I
\
6mm ROUND HEAD NUT WITH SQ. SEAT I I
^. __..AND ML UCK
LGUIDE
STOP
IRON SCREW
LDOOR FRAME
‘-OPEN
POSITION
F1c.7.13 BOLTANDPULLBOLTLOCK
.10 mm DIA BOLT IN LOCKING-POSITION PULL BOLT LOCK
SP 62 (S & T) : 199’7 /-KNOB
NIGHT LATCH
FLOOR DOOR STOPPER -CAST
TYPE
FIG. 7.14 NIGHT LATCH AND FLOOR DOOR STOPPER ADJUSTING
ARM
CONCENTRIC RATCHET-
/-
,-
SkiAFT STUB PINION
BACK
TOOTH GEAR
PI ATE
’
,REGULATING
SCREW4 -“..,r
7.15A Typical Illustration of a Door Closer (Hydraulically
Regulated)
7.156 Typical Door Handles (Type 1)
FIG. 7.15 TYPICAL ILLUSTRATIONSOF DOOR HANDLES -
150
Cmtinued
,
.._.“&
SP62~(S& Tj~: 1997
7.15C Typical Door Handles (Type 2)
SECTION
8 AT XV
7.15D Typical Door Handle (Type 3)
NOTE - Variousdimensionsshall conformto requirementsgiven in IS 208 : 1987. FIG. 7.15TYPICAL ILLUSTRATIONSOF DOORIHANDLES-
r4’1fl
MAIN
WIRE
I
7.16A Ventilator Chain with Eyeand
Staple
All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG. 7.16 STAYS -
151
Concluded
Continued
SP 62 (S t& T) : 1997 I
G-73
TO WEB
(80mm Lc
----+
l--30--+
I_-
___._-
BG K ET All dimensions in millimetres.
7.168 Window Stay
k-----l
-H--i 900’
I
\
>ooo
L__Ip., , l-4
D
\,
B
D
----_-t
_F loo0
1
t1.5 mm WROX.
7.16C Gate and Shutter Hooks and Eyes FIG.
7.16
STAYS
-
Concluded
+--F--A
----“m+
STAPLE
(MILD STEEL) D+I-5 mm
HASP
-IP
(MILD
STEEL BRASS OR ALUMINIUM ALLOY 1
STAPLE (BRASS
FIG. 7.17 MILD STEELOKBRASS OR ALUMINIUM ALLOY HASPS AND 152
OR ALUMINIUM
STAPLES
(SAFETY
ALlDY) TYPE)
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 14 GLAZING
14.4.1 Rebates and Grooves
14.1 General .
Rebates shall be rigid and true. The rebates shall be as f0110’ws: 6 mm for small panes. 8 mm for normal panes.
Glazing is an important item in building construction and glass has to be selected to cater to several requirements, such as. in multistoreyed buildings, industrial structures, etc. Therefore fixing of glass is a specialized operation and has to be done carefully; otherwise it w~ill lead to hazards of broken glass. Besides the types of glass and exposure conditions have to be taken into account. 14.2 Patent Glazing As already mentioned, 1983.
it is covered by IS
-
10 mm at tops and sides and 12 mm at bottom for large windows, such as, shop windows.
-
16 mm deep for double or multiple glazed seal units, un!ess otherwise advised by the manufacturer.
-
A wider rebate is required for bent glass than for flat glass; rebate for flat glass without beads shall be enough to accommodate the back putty, the glass and front putty stripped at an angle.
-
For glazing with beads rebates shall be wide enough to accommodate glass and beads and to allow a minimum clearance of 1.5 mm at both-back and front of the glass.
-
Rebates and grooves shall be clean and unobstructed before glazing.
10439 :
14.3 Materials a) The glass shall conform to: I) IS 2835 : 1977 for sheet glass. 2) IS 2553 : 1990 for safety glass. 3) IS 5431: 1969 for wired and figured glass. b) Glazing compound shall conform to: 1) IS-419 :-1967 for putty. 2) IS 11433 (Part 1) : 1985, IS 11433 (Part 2) : 1986 for polysulphide based sealants. Compounds for glazing in concrete, stone, 3) brick or asbestos cement are needed to be sealed to prevent absorption of oil from the glazing compound, unless the compound has been specifically formulated; resistance to alkali is important. A nonsetting compound may be used, provided it is pointed. 4) Non-setting compunds are needed for use with colour and heat absorbing glasses which will become hot in sunshine and which are therefore liable to expand and contract much more than ordinary glass. The fact that non-setting compounds are easily finger marked make it undesirable to use them without beads except in relatively inaccessible situations. c) The design criteria like thickness, durability, fire resistance, thermal expansion and contraction, light transmission and heat insulation, sound insulation are to be satisfied as per IS 3548 : 1988 on glazing practice.
14.4.2 Location of Glass in Frame (see Fig. 7. IS) a) The’glass shall rest on two blocks to locate the pane properly within the surround. In case of small panes, the blocks may not be necessary, when glazing in side-hung windows or door, the glass shall be located by blocks so that it bears on the bottom of the surround at a point near the hinge but is not brought into contact with surround and does not suffer und& stress. b) When glazing in horizontal hung sashes, which may turn through about 180°, additional blocks shall be placed between the top edge of glass and the surround to prevent movement of the glass when the sash is inverted. When the panes are more than 90 mm high, the glass shall be located at two pivoting points by blocks of suitable material, like chloroprene. 14.4.3 Preparation
of Rebates and Grooves in Wood
a) Rebates or grooves should be primed to prevent ,excessive absorption of oil from the putty. If a shellac varnish or gloss paint is used, the wood may be completely sealed and setting of putty unduly delayed.
14.4 Glazing The size of glass shall allow for a clearance between the edge of glass and surround as specified below:
b) Absorbent hardwood frames that are not to be painted should either be primed with a medium composed of equal parts of exterior varnish and white spirit and glazed with linseed oil putty; or be completely sealed with a coat of unthinned exterior quality varnish and glazed with a metal casement putty (which will need to be painted); or with a non-setting compound.
For wood or metal surrounds Y 2.5 mm For stone or brick - 3.0 mm The clearance may be increased, provided the depth of the rebate or groove is sufficient to provide not less than 1.5 mm cover to the glass.
153
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
c) When completely non absorbent hardwoods, such as, teak frames are used, metal-casement putty shall be used.
4 If the wooden frame has been treated with a preservative, preparation of rebates and grooves shall be made as per instructions of the manufacturer of glazing compound.
e) In case of stone, concrete,
brick or other materials, the rebates or grooves should be sealed with an alkali resisting sealer and allowed to dry before glazing. The compound shall be metal-casement putty.
14.4.5 Glazing with Beads This method should be used for windoy and door panes where the combined height and width exceed the maximum shown in Fig. 7.19; glazing in unpainted hardwood frames and framed shopfronts for double and multiple glazing units as defined in 14.4.9.and wherever a non-setting compound is used in a position where it is liable to be disturbed. 14.4.6 Glazing with Compound into Rebates a) Sufficient compound should be applied to the rebate so that, when the glass has been pressed into the rebate, a bed of the compound (known as back putty) not less than 1.5 mm thick will remain between the glass and rebate; there shall be a surplus of compound squeezed out above the rebate which would be stripped at an angle as in Fig. 7.18 B and not undercut to prevent water accumulating.
14.4.4 Glazing with Compound This method is suitable for window or door panes where the combined height and width do not exceed the maximum shown in Fig. 7.19 for appropriate exposure grading.
I
TIGHT SIZE
7.18A Glazing Rebate
GLASS
FRONT PUTTY.
7.188 Glazing withCompound
c
FIG. 7.18 TYPICAL ILLUSTRATIONSSHOWING GLAZING DETAILS
154
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 LENGTH
OF
SHORTER
SlBE(mm)
v;?OOO 1750 1500
1'250
-11000
750
500
PLATE SHEET THICKNESS (mm)
WIND PRESSURE ( N/m2)
“‘Weight ofglass in kg/m2approximatelyequalto 2.6 times the thicknessin millimetres. Nomogram for determiningthickness of window panes for various wind.pressures.(Modulus of ruptureof sheet glass taken CC+ 38 N/mm’ and of plate glass as 19 N/mm’ after making allowance for variability
of strength.)
FIG. 7.19 NOMOGRAM FOR DETERMINING THICKNESS OF GLASS PLATE AND SHEET~FORWINDOW PANES
b) The glass should be secured by springs or spring clips spaced not more than 350 mm apart measured around the perimeter of the pane, and afterwords fronted with the compound to form a triangular fillet stopping 1.5 mm short of the sight line so that the edge of the compound may be sealed against the glass by-painting, without encroaching over the sight line.
pound against the glass and wood beads should also be bedded against the rebate.
a>Care b)
14.4.7 Glazing with Compound into Grooves The glass should be pressed into the glazing compounds previously placed in the groove. The space between the glass and sides of the groove should be filled with the compound which should then be stopped at an angle and not undercut (see Fig. 7.18 C). 14.4.8 Glazing with Beads Alongwith
should be taken to see that no voids are left between the glass and the bead. For outside glazing, hollow beads are undesirable unless they can be completely filled. With non-setting compound and where there is a risk of glazing compound being dislodged by pressure, front and back distance pieces (to maintain face clearances) should be used. Distance pieces should be completely embedded in the compound. Beads should be secured to the wooden frame with either panel pins or screws and to metal frames in the way providea for in the-frame. In securing wooden frames, an adequate number of pins or screws for fixing the beads should be used as to prevent flexing or movement of beads. The external glazing should as far as possible be fixed from outside with beads as stated in 14.4.5. Where it is not possible to fix the glass from outside, especially in a multistoreyed buildings, it may befixed from inside with sealing compound as shown in Fig. 7.20.
c>
Compound
Sufficient compound should be applied to the rebate so that when the glass has been pressed into the rebate, a bed of compound (known as back putty) not less than 1.5 mm thick will remain between the glass and the rebate. There should also be a surplus of compound squeezed out above the rebate which should be stripped at an angle not undercut, to prevent water accumulating. Bends should be bedded with the com-
4
e>
155
d
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 other. However carefully such glazing is done, it may be necessary to open the cavity at frequent intervals for the purpose of cleaning.
cl One window frame of sash single-glazed
provided with clip to permit attachment of second glass - This system involves no serious cleaning problems since the slippedon panes can be quickly detached. Their main use is on existing windows which cannot otherwise be modified.
OUTSIDE I I
/II/
/-
BEAD*
4 Double or multiple factory made hermetically ‘?ALING CLEAR ANC
SECTION
sealed units - Problems of cleaning of inner surfaces do not arise. Adequate~rebate shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
COMPOUND
AA
14.4.10Double Glazing other than Factory Made Units
* Can be fixed prior to or after placing the glass pane as per site conditions.
FIG. 7.20 INSIDE
GLAZING
Figured glasses are used to avoid direct sunrays and to get diffused-light. This can be achieved advantageously by placing rough surface of the glass facing outside. As the surface of the glass from inside is smooth, it will facilitate in pasting colour plastic film on the inside surface, whenever required. In that case, it will be difficult to clean the rough surface of the glass outside, but it can be cleaned by a water jet.
To minimize the entry of moist air from the interior of the building or penetration of rain from outside into the cavity, the glazing shou!d be done carefully. When opening sashes are provided, it is essential that they should fit closely. A small breathing hole should be provided from the bottom of the cavity to the outside to ensure that such breathing vents are kept clear of paint or other obstructions. Where separate panes are glazed in one sash, it is preferable to use preformed strip of compound for the back putty in glazing the second pane, in order to provide full~back putty with a neat finish. Usually it is better to glaze the outer pane first. 14.4.11 Factory-Made Double or Multiple Sealed Units When ordering factory-made units or multiple the following points may be taken into account:
units
a) Both tight size and glazing size (see Fig 7.18)
14.4.9 Double and Multiple Glazing
should be specified and not the glazing size.
---“W-b
b) Sealed unitsshould
be checked in the opening for sedge clearance consistent with the manufacturers’ recommendations. It is essential to follow any recommendation given by the manufacturer concerning the correct edge to be glazed at the bottom. Units should be positioned in the compound approximately one quarter of the total length from each end. The width of the blocks should be not less than the thickness of the sealed units and their thickness should be such as to positioh the units centrally in the opening. The thickness of glazing compound between the glass and the back of the rebate, and between the glass and bead should be about 1 mm.
The problems connected with application of double and multiple glazing are briefly as follows: Two separate window frames, each singleglazed--These are preferable for sound insulation. To avoid problems of dirt and moisture in the air space, means of access to the cavity should be provided. One window frame carrying two sashes coupled together, each separately glazed, The glazing may be in separate rebated, one inside glazed and the other outside glazed; or in single wide rebates with spacing beads. The former method has the advantage that either pane can be replaced without disturbing the
156
IA’
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Special techniques of glazing are required to protect the seal and reference shall be made to the manufacturer of glazing units. A non-setting glass compound having good adhesion to glass and frame should be used. All absorbent rebates and beads should be treated with a sealer (priming is not sufficient).
14.4.12 Louvred Glazing This type of fixed glass louvres are recommended for toilets, stores, etc, where permanent ventilation is required. a) Louvred glazing (horizontal) - Glass strips with rounded edges are inserted frpm outside into the grooves placed one above the other. The grooves shall be angular preferably at 45’ on the frame. The grooves shall overlap each other by at least 20 mm (see Fig 7.2 I).
Glazing with beads should always be used. Hollow beads are not recommended.
b) Luuvred glazing (vertical) - Glass strips are placed angularly and vertically, and inserted as described in 14.4.l2 (a).
Where there is a risk of the glazing being dislodged by pressure, front and back distance pieces should be used to maintain face clearance.
FRAME
GROOVE
20 mm
OUTSIDE
NOTE-The depthof groovemaybe thricethe thicknessof glassand widthof the groovemnybe I to 1S mm morethan the maximum thicknessof glass. FIG. 7.21 FIXED GLAZED LOUVEREDWINDOW
.
157
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
ANNEX A (Clauses 13.1 and 13.2) LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS IS No.
204 (Part 1) : 1991 204 (Part 2) : 1992 20.5 : 1992 206 : 1992 208 : 1987 281 : 1991 362 363 364 452 453 729
: : : : : :
1991 1993 1993 1973 1993 1979
1019: 1341 : 1823 : 1837: 2209 : 2681 :
1974 1992 1980 1966 1976 1993
3564: 3818 3828 3843 3847 4992
1986 1992 1966 1985 1992 1975
: : : : :
Tower bolts (ferrous metals) metals)
Non-ferrous metal bull hinges Tee and strap hinges Door handles Mild steel sliding door bolts for use with padlocks Parliament hinges Hasps and staples Fanlight catch Doorsprings, rat-tail type Double acting spring hinges Drawer locks, cupboard locks and box locks Rim latches Steel butt hinges Floor door stoppers Fanlight pivots Mortice locks (vertical type) Non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts for use with padlocks Door closer (hydraulically regulated) Continuous (piano) hinges Ventilator chains Steel back flap hinges Mortice night latches Door handles for mortice lock (vertical type)
5187 5899 5930 6315
: : : :
1972 1970 1970 1992
6318 : 1971 6343 : 1982
6607 : 1972 7196 : 1974 7197: 1974 7534 : 1985 7540 : 1974 8756 : 1978 8760: 1978 9106: 1979 9131 : 1979 9460 : 1980 9899: 1981 10019 : 1981 10342 : 1982 12817 : 1989 12867 : 1989
158
HARDWARE Title
IS -No.
Title
Tower bolts (non-ferrous
ON BUILDERS
Flush bolts Bathroom latches Mortice latch Floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for heavy doors Plastic window~stays and fasteners Door closers (pneumatically regulated) for light doors weighing up~to 40 kg Rebated mortice locks Holdfast Double action floor springs (without oil check) for heavy doors Sliding locking bolts for use with padlocks Mortice dead locks Mortice ball catches for use wooden almirah Mortice sliding door locks, with lever mechanism Rising butt hinges Rim locks Flush drop handles for drawer Hat, coat and wardrobe hooks Mild steel stays and fasteners Curtain rail system Stainless steel butt hinges PVC hand rail covers
-.._
._
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 PART 2 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS
AND VENTCLATORS
(STEEL AND ALUMINIUM)
1 GENERAL
2.2 Type of Opening:
1.1 The dimensions and other details of steel doors, windows and ventilators shall conform to IS 1038 : 1983. The hot rolled steel sections shall conform to IS 7452 : 1990. Fire check doors shall confirm to IS 3614 (Part l) : 1966 and IS 3614 (Part 2) : 1992.
Metal doors windows and ventilators may be required to be fixed to either masonry openings (including brick, concrete, stone and marble) or timber openings or steel work openings.
4 Masonry openings - Masonry openings may either be rebated or flush and in either case, they may have either external rendering applied or be ‘fair-faced’ (that is, without external rendering). It is usual for stone or marble masonry to be fair-faced.
1.2 Fixing of aluminium doors, windows and ventilations is also covered in this Part. 2 INSTALLATION
b) Timber openings-Timber
2.1 General
openings
are in-
variably rebated.
Fixing and glazing of metal doors, windows and ventilators refer to securing them in structural or masonry surrounds and securing glass to the metal frame. The method adopted should be such that movement of the structure to which the securing is done does not transmit strain to the metallic units. Special requirements of manufacturer shall be taken care of while installing fire check doors.
c>Steelwork
openings-Steelwork openings vary in detailed design but shall be so designed that the outer frame of the door, window or ventilator frame sections overlap a steel surface either externally or internally.
2.2.1 Size of Openings
Every installation presents its own problems and different surround details may require different techniques. Further, doors, large composite windows, bay windows are rather complicated, to install and whereever special windows are being fixed, a careful study of the drawings and specialized training and skill are called for. A trained titter in metal window fixing knows how to make adjustments to bring window out of wind ‘and to take out any twist or bend in the section.
I-
The overall size of both flush and rebated openings to which the units have to be fixed shall allow a clearance between the frame and opening and the amount of clearance depends on whether the opening is externally rendered or fair-faced.
a>Flush
openings-Rendered flush openings shall allow a clearance between frame and opening equal to thickness of rendering (see Fig. 7.22 A and Fig. 7.22 B). Fair-faced flush openings shall allow a clearance of 3 mm between frame and opening (see Fig. 7.23).
WIOTH
OF
rb25cm
OPENING
RENDERING
WlDtH
OF
VENTILATOR-
GLASS
CEMENT
MORTAR
7.22A
FIG. 7.22 MASONRY OPENINGSFLUSH WITHRENDERING-
Continued
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
rGLASS
7.228
FK. 7.22 MASONRY OPENINGSFLUSHWITHRENDERING- Concluded WIDTH OF
OPENING
WIDTH bF
-
WINDOW -
CEMENT MORTAR
FIG. 7.23 MASONRYOPENINGS FLUSHWITHOUTRENDERING
b) Rebated openings Fair-faced masonry openings and timber openings shall allow a clearance of 3 mm between the opening and the inner flange of the frame as well as between the opening and the outer flange of the frames. The depth of rebate shall therefore be equal to the distance between the inner and outer flanges of the frame of the unit. The rebate shall be 12.5 mm in the case of general building and industrial windows (see Figs. 7.24 and 7.25). 2) Rendered masonry openings shall allow a clearance~of 3 mm between opening and the inner flange of the frame and a clearance equal to the thickness of rendering between the opening and the outer
3)
flange of the frame. The depth of rebate shall therefore be adjusted accordingly (seeFig. 7.26). Steelwork openings shall be designed to allow the outer flange of the window frame section to overlap the steel surface by 10 mm (see Fig. 7.27A).
~_ The size of the Indian Standard units both for building and industrial purposes are designed for modular openings which are larger by 12.5 mm allround than these units. This gap of 12.5 mm is for fixing those units. In case of masonry the gap is filled with mastic cement and plaster after the unit is in position. In the case of steel and timber openings, extra steel or timber fillets will be necessary to cover this gap of 12.5 mm (see Fig. 7.27B).
160
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 wcoT_n OF
OPENING
-
t- pmm(f) OC WINDOW-
WIOTH
FIG. 7.24 MASONRY OPENINGS REEATEDWITHOUTRENDERING WSUTW
+
OF OPENING-
WIOTH OF
WINOOW-’
~WOOOEN OR-METAL BEAO
PLASTER
FIG. 7.25 MASONRY OPENINGS REBATEDWITHOUTRENDERING k-WlblH
OF WlOtM
OPENtNG
_
OF OOOR-
FIG. 7.26 MASONRY OPENINGSREBATEDWITH RENDERING 2.3 Installation
of Single Units
done to the unit during subsequent building work. Placing of scaffolding on frames or glazing bass shall on no account be done.
a) The units shall be fixed into prepared openings.They shall not be ‘built-in’ as the walls go up as this practice often results in brickwork being brought right up to the frame with no clearance allowed and usually distorts the units and increases the likelyhood of damage being
b) The size of the opening shall be checked and cleaned of all obstructions. Suitable markings may be done to fix the unit in the proper position, including the fixing hole positions. In case i
I
161
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 WIDTH
OF
WINDOW -
Y ROLLED STEEL ANGLE WIDTH OF STEEL_ WORK OPENING 7.27A m
/--ROLLED
STEEL ANGLE
lMRD 7 ~000 OR
k
BLOCK
L l9mm MASTIC
7.278
!I
FIG. 7.27 DETAILS OF FIXINGWINDOW TO STEELWORK
(
In concrete, dressed stone and marble surrounds, the units shall be fixed with legs.
of masonry, hales for fixing lugs shall be cut 5 cm2 and 5 cm to 1D cm deep or to fix raw plugs.
Wood surrounds are generally rebated and mastic be applied to the sill of the opening and units placed on it, and screwed on to the openings. In case of steel openings, special clips may be used to fix the unit.
c>The
units shall be checked to ensure that they are square and working satisfactorily before fixing.
4 The units shall then be put in position and the
h) In case of aluminium frames, the surfaces shall
lugs screwed on tight.
be anchored in direct contact with the surrounds afid shall be protected with two coats of alkali-resistant paints, to avoid chemical attack from the materials of surround.
e) When fixing to flush surrounds without rendering the 3 mm gap shall be pointed with mastic on the outside before the internal plaster and rendering; the plaster and rendering shall be applied to the surrounds after the lugs have firmly set. When fixing to rebated sorrounds without rendering the frame shall be bedded in mastic. When fixing to rebated surrounds with rendering, after bedding in mastic, plaster shall be applied from outside.
_Y”._
2.4 Installation of Composite Units
162
i
1 1
a) Composite units shall follow the procedures described in 2.3 and in addition shall conform to the following.
I I-
b) Mullions
r
and transome
of composite
units
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 shall be bedded in mastic to ensure weather tightness. Mastic shall be applied to channels of the outside frame sections before assembly.
c>If their is a cross joint
of mullion and transome, the shorter coupling unit shall run through unbroken.
4 Mullions normally project 2.5 cm at head and sill into the surround; transomes also project 2.5 cm into surround where appropriate they shall be cut. 2.5 Hardware Hardware shall be fixed as late as possible just before the final coat of paint is applied.
3 GLAZING 3.1 The procedures laid down in 14 of Part 1 may be followed to the extent applicable. 4 OTHER
SHUTTERS
4.1 Steel rolling shutters shall conform to IS 6248 : 1979 4.2 Steel collapsible gates shall conform to IS 10521 : 1983. 4.3 Steel sliding shutters shall conform to IS 10451 : 1983. 4.4 Installation of these shutters shall be as per principles laid in 2 except as required during installation to suit local conditions.
163
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER8
STEELCONSTBUCTION
CONTENTS
PART 1 USE OF HOT ROLLED SECTIONS 1 GENERAL 2 MATERIALS 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 -2.8
Structural Steel Rivets Welding Consumables Steel Castings Bolts and Nuts Washers Cement Concrete Hot Rolled
3 FABRICATIONAND ERECTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17
General Fabrication Procedures Assembly Riveting Bolting Welding Machining of Butts, Caps and Bases Solid Round Steel Columns Painting Marking Shop Assembly Packing Inspection and Testing Site Erection Field Connections Painting after Erection Bedding of Stanchion Bases and Bearings of Beams and Girders on Stone, Brick or ConCrete (Plain or Reinforced)
4 CONNECTIONS 4.1 General 4.2 Rivets, Close Tolerance Bolts, High Strength Friction Grip Fasteners, Black Bolts and Welding 4.3 Composite Connections 4.4 Members Meeting at a Joint 4.5 Bearing Brackets 4.6 Gussets 4.7 Lug Angles 4.8 Pitch of Rivets 4.9 Pitch of Bolts 5 FABRICATIONAND CONNECTIONSFORDEZXN BY PLASTIC THEORY 5.1 Fabrication 5.2 Connections 6 FABRICATION AND CONNECTIONS FOR TUBULAR STRUCTURES 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
General Materials Fabrication Connections
ANNEX A LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDSAND HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO STEEL CONSTRUCTION
PART 2 USE OF COLD FORMED SECTIONS 1 GENERAL 2 MATERIALS
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
CHAPTER 8
STEEL CONSTRUCTION PART 1 USE OF H-OT ROLLED SECTIONS
1 GENERAL
2.4 Steel Castings
-1.1 This Part covers use of hot rolled steel sections including tubes in general building construction, in particular fabrication practices and connections. The requirements do not completely cover those of bridges, chimneys and other special steel structures. This is line with the design codes, one for general building construction and others for individual structures depending loads, service conditions, etc.
Steel castings shall IS 1030 : 1989.
conform
to grade 23-45 of
2.5 Bolts and Nuts Bolts and-nuts shall conform to IS 1363 (Parts 1,2,3) : 1992, IS 1364 (Parts 1,2,3) : 1992, IS 1367(Part 3) : 1991, and IS 3640 : 1982 as appropriate. 2.6 Washers
1.2 There are three basic methods of connecting steel members through rivets, bolts and welding. Thus, the fabrication practices differ. In addition high strength grip bolts are being used in construction which reduces noise during fabrication on site, and is based on the principle of friction through grip.
Washers shall conform to IS 5369 : 1975, IS 5370 : 1969, IS 5374 : 1975 and IS 6610 : 1972, as appropriate.
2 MATERIALS
2.8 Hot Rolled
2.1 Structural
2.7 Cement Concrete Cement concrete used in association steel shall conform to IS 456 : 1978.
Steel
Hot rolled sections shall conform to Indian Standards listed in Annex A. It also lists other relevant Indian Standards and Handbooks_prepared so far in relation to steel construction.
Structural steel shall conform to IS 1977 : 1975, IS 2062 : 1992 and IS 8500 : 1992 and any other structural steel as specified with minimum guaranteed yield point.
3 -FABRICATION
NOTE - IS 226 and IS 961 have been superseded by IS 2062 and IS 8500 respectively.
2.2 Rivets Rivets shall conform to IS 1929 : 1982 and IS 2155 : 1982 as appropriate. High tensile steel rivet bars shall conform to IS 1149 : 1982. Hot rolled rivet bars shall conform to IS 1148 : 1982.
AND ERECTION
3.1 General As much fabrication work as is reasonably practicable shall be completed in the shops where steel work is fabricated. Tolerances for fabrieation of steel structures shall conform to IS 7215 : 1974. Tolerances for erection of steel structures shall conform to IS 12843 : 1989. For general guidance on fabrication by welding reference may be made to IS 9595 : 1980. 3.1.1 Minimum Protection
2.2.1 Friction Grip Bolts High tensile diction grip bolts shall conform to IS 3757 : 1985; high tensile friction grip nuts shall conform to IS 6623 : 1985 and high tensile friction grip washers shall conform to IS 6649 : 1985. 2.3 Welding
with structural
Consumables
Covered electrodes shall conform to IS 814 : 199 1, or IS 1278 : 1972. Barewire electrodes for submerged arc welding shall conform to IS 7280 : 1974. Combination of wire and flux shall satisfy IS 3613 : 1974. Filler rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded metal arc welding shall conform to IS 6419 : 1971 and to IS 6560 : 1972 as appropriate.
Thickness
of Metal
-
Corrosion
Where steela> Steel work exposed to weatherwork is directly exposed to weather and is fully accessible for cleaning and repainting, the thickness shall be not less than 6 mm; and where steel is exposed to the weather and is~not accessible for cleaning and painting, the thickness shall not be less than 8 mm. This shall not apply to hot rolled sections covered by Indian Standards. b) Steel work not directly exposed to the weather - The thickness of steel work not directly exposed to the weather shall be not less than 6 mm. The thickness of steel in secondary
167
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 members shall be not less than 4.5 mm. For hot rolled sections to Indian Standards the mean thickness of flange be considered and not the web thickness.
c) These requirements
of3.1.1 (a) and (b) do not apply to light structural work or to sealed box section or to steel work in which special provision against corrosion has been made; also in case of steelwork exposed to highly corrosive industrial fumes or vapour or slaine atmosphere. the minimum~thickness shall be as agreed to between the customer and designer.
3.2 Fabrication
2)
Procedures
4 Straightening - All material shall be straight and, if necessary, before being worked shall be straightened and/or flattened by pressure, unless required to be curve linear and shall be free ft-om twists.
3)
b) Clearances
The erection clearance of cleated ends of members connecting steel to steel should preferably be not greaterthan 2.0 mm at each end. The erection clearance at ends ofbeams without webcleats should be not more than 3 mm at each end, but where, for practical purposes, greater clearance is necessary, suitably designed seatings should be provided.
4)
Where black bolts are used, the diameter of holes, shall be generally 1.5 mm more than the diameter of permanent bolts, and 3 mm more than diameter of erection bolts.
c) Cutting 1) Cutting may be effected by shearing, cropping or sawing. Gas cutting by mechanically controlled torch may be permitted for mild steel only. Gas cutting of high tensile steel may also be permitted provided special care is taken to leave sufficient metal to be removed by machining sothat all metal that has been hardened by flame is removed. Hand flame cutting may be permitted subject to approval by the Authority. 2) Except where material is to be subsequently joined by welding, no loads shall be transmitted into metal through a gas cut surface. 3) Shearing, cropping and gas cutting, shall be clean, reasonably square, and free from any distortions, and should the Authority find it necessary, the edges shall be ground afterwards.
4 Holding I)
Holes through more than one thickness of material for members, such as, compound
5)
6)
stanchion and girder tlanges shall, where possible, be drilled after the members are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted together. Punching may be permitted before assembly, provided the holes are punched 3 mm less in diameter than the required size and reamed after assembly to the full diameter. The thickness of material punched shall not be greater than 16 mm. For dynamically loaded structures, punching shall be avoided. When holes are drilled in one operation through two or more separable parts, these parts, when so specified, shall be separated after drilling and the burrs removed. Holes in connecting angles and plates other than splices, also in roof members and light framing, may be punched full size through material not over 12 mm thick, except when required for close tolerance bolts or barred bolts. Matching holes for rivets and black bolts shall register with each other so that a gauge of 1.5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may-be depending on the diameter of rivet or bolt is less than or more than 25 mm) less in diameter than the diameter of the hole will pass freely through the assembled members in the direction at right angle to such members. Finished holes shall be not more than 1.5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be) in diameter larger than the diameter of the rivet or black bolt passing through them, unless otherwise specified. Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a diameter equal to the nominal diameter of the shank or barrel subject to H8 tolerance specified in IS 9 19 (Part I ) : 1993. Parts to be connected with close tolerance or barrel bolts shall preferably be tightly held together through all the thickness at one operation and subsequently reamed to size. All holes not drilled through all the thickness in one operation shall be drilled to a smaller size and reamed out after assembly. Where this is not practicable, the parts shall be drilled and reamed seperately through hard bushed steel jigs. Holes for rivets or bolts shall not be formed by gas cutting process.
3.3 Assembly The component parts shall be assembled and aligned in such a manner that they are neither twisted nor 168
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 3.7 Machining
otherwise damaged, and shall be so prepared that the specified cambers, if any, are provided.
of Butts, Caps and Bases
1) Column splices and butt joints of struts and 3.4 Riveting
compression members depending on contact for stress transmission shall be accurately machined and close butted over the whole section with a clearance not exceeding 0.2 mm locally at any place. In column caps and bases, the ends of shafts together with attached gussets, angles, channels, etc, after riveting together should be accurately machined so that parts connected butt over entire surfaces of contact. Care should be taken that these gussets, connecting angles or channels, are fixed with such accuracy that they are not reduced in thickness by machining more than 2.0 mm. 2) Where sufficient gussets and rivets or welds are provided to transmit the entire loading, the column ends need not be tnachined, the design of column members should cover this. Ends of all b&ring stiffness shall be machined 3) or ground to fit tightly both at top and bottom. 4) Slab bases and caps, except when cut from material with true surfaces, shall be accurately machined over the bearing surfaces and shall be in effective contact with the end of the stanchion. A bearing surface which is to be grouted direct to a foundation need not be machined if such face is true and parallel to the upper face. 5) To facilitate grouting, holes shall be provided where necessary in stanchion bases for the escape of air.
1) Rivets shall be heated uniformly throughout
2)
3)
4)
5)
their length without burning or excessive scaling, and shall be of sufficient length to provide a head of standard dimensions. They shall, when driven, completely fill the holes, and if countersunk, the countersigning shall be fully filled by the rivet; any protrusion of the countersunk head being dressed off flush, if required. Riveted members shall have all parts firmly drawn and held together before and during riveting, and special care shall be taken in this respect for all single riveted connections. For multiple riveted connections, a service bolt shall be provided in every third or fourth hole. Wherever practicable, machine riveting shall be carried out by using machines of the steady pressure type. All loose, burned or otherwise defective rivets shall be cut out and replaced before the structure is loaded, and special care shall be taken to inspect all single riveted connections. Special care shall be taken in heating and driving long rivets.
3.5 Bolting I) Where necessary, washers shall be tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to give the heads and nuts of bolts a satisfactory bearing. 2) The threaded portion of each bolt shall project through the nut by at least one thread. 3) In all cases where full bearing area of the bolt is to be developed, the bolt shall be provided with a washer of sufficient thickness under the nut to avoid any threaded portion of the belt being within the thickness of the parts bolted together.
3.8 Solid Round Steel Columns
1) Solid round steel columns with shouldered ends shall be provided with slab caps and bases machined to fit the shoulder, and shall be tightly shrunk or welded in position. 2) The tolerance between the reduced end of the shaft and the hole in case of slabs welded in position, shall not exceed 0.25 mm. the 3) Where slabs are welded in position, reduced end of the shaft shall be kept just sufficiently short to accommodate a fillet weld around the hole without weld metal being proud of the slab. Alternatively, the caps and bases may be directly welded to the column without bearing or shouldering. All bearing surfaces of slabs intended for metal-to-metal contact shall be machined perpendicular to the shaft.
3.6 Welding
1) Welding shall be in accordance with IS 816 :
2)
.
1969, IS 819 : 1957, IS 1024 : 1979, IS 1261 : 1959, IS 1323 : 1982 and IS 9595 : 1980 as appropriate. For welding any particular type of joint, welders shall give evidence acceptable to the Authority of having satisfactorily completed appropriate tests as described in any of the Indian Standards, namely, IS 817 (Part 1) : 1992, IS 1393 : 1961, IS 7307 (Part 1) : 1974, IS 7310 (Part 1) : 1974 and IS 7318 (Part 1) : 1974 as appropriate.
3.9 Painting
‘i
Painting shall be done as prescribed in IS 1477 (Parts 1 and 2) : 1971 (see also Chapter 15).
:
169
. L
1
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
1) All surfaces to -be painted, oiled or otherwise
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
treated shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned to remove all loose scale and loose rust. Shop contact surfaces need not be painted unless specified. If so specified, they shall be brought together while the paint is still-wet. Surfaces not in contact, but inaccessible after shop assembly shall receive the full specified protective treatment before assembly. This does not apply to the interior of hollow sections (see IS 3502 : 1981). /Chequered plates (see IS 3502 : 1981) shall be painted but the details of painting shall be specified by the Authority. In case the surfaces are to be welded, the steel shall not be painted or metal coated within a suitable distance of any edges to be welded, if the paint specified or metal coating would be harmful to the welders or impair the quality of welds. Welds and adjacent parent metal shall not be painted prior to de-slugging, inspection and approval. Parts to be encased in concrete shall not be painted or oiled.
manufacturers’ works which are concerned with the fabrication of steelwork and shall be afforded all reasonable facilities to satisfy that the fabriction is being undertaken in accordance with the specifications. 2) Unless specified otherwise, inspection prior to despatch shall not interfere with the operation of the work. 3.14 Site Erection 1) Plant and Equipment - The suitability and capacity of all plant and equipment used for erection shall be to the satisfaction of the Authority. 2) Storing and Handling - All structural steel should be so stored and handled at the site that the members are not subject to excessive stresses and damage. 3) Setting Out-The positioning and levelling of all steelwork, the plumbing of stanchions and the placing of every part of the structure with accuracy shall be in accordance with approved drawings and to the satisfaction of Authority. 4) Security during Erection - Safety precaution during erection shall conform to IS 7205 : 1974. During erection, the steelwork shall be securely botled or otherwise fastened and, when necessary, temporarily braced to provide for all load to be carried by the structure during erection including those due to erection equipment and its operation.
3.10 Marking Each piece of steelwork shall be distinctly marked before delivery, and bear such other marks as in accordance with a marking diagram as well facilitate erection.
No, riveting, permanent bolting or welding should be done until proper alignment has been obtained.
3.11 Shop Assembly 1) The steelwork shall temporarily shop assembled complete or as arranged with the Authority so that accuracy of fit may be checked before despatch. The parts shall be shop assembled with sufficient numbers of parallel drifts to bring and keep the parts in place. 2) In case of parts drilled or punched, through steel jigs with bushes resulting in all similar parts being interchangeable the steelwork~may be shop erected in such position as arranged with the Authority.
3.15 Field Connections All field assembly by bolts, rivets and welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for shop fabrication excepting such as manifestly apply to shop conditions only. Where the steel has been delivered painted, the paint shall be removed -before field welding, for a distance of 50 mm at least on either side of the joint. 3.16 Painting after Erection
3.12 Packing
1) Before
painting of such steel which is delivered unpainted is commenced, all surfaces to be painted shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned from all loose scale and rust. 21 The specified protective treatment shall be completed after erection. All rivet and bolt heads and site welds after de-slugging shall be cleaned. Damaged or deteriorated paint surfaces shall be first made good with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Where specified, surfaces which will be in contact after site assembly shall receive a coat of paint
All projecting plates or bars and all ends of members at joints shall be stiffened, all straight bars and plates shall~be bundled, all screwed ends and machined surfaces shall be suitably packed; and all rivets, bolts, nuts, washers and small loose parts shall be packed separately in cases so as to prevent damage or distortion during transit. 3.13 Inspection
and Testing
1) The Authority shall have free access at all reasonable times to those parts of the
170
-.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 (in addition to any shop priming) and shall be brou~ght together while paint is still wet. 3) Where the steel has received a metal coating in the shop, this coating shall be completed on site so as to be continuous over any welds and site rivets and bolts; but subject to the approval of Authority, protection may be completed by painting on site. Bolts which have been galvanized or similarly treated are exempted from this requirement. 4) Surfaces which will be inaccessible after site assembly shall receive the full specified treatment~before assembly. 5) Site painting should not be done in frostly or foggy weather, or when humidity is such as to cause condensation on the surfaces to be painted. 3.17 Bedding of Stanchion Bases and Bearings of Beams and Girders on Stone, Brick or Concrete (Plain or Reinforced)
1) Bedding
shall be carried out with cement, grout, or mortar or with cement concrete as in IS 456 : 1978. 2) For multistoreyed buildings, this operation shall not be carried out until a sufficient number of bottom lengths of stanchions have been properly lined, levelled and plumbed and sufficient floor beams are in position. 3) Whatever method is employed, the operation shall not be carried out, until the steelwork has been finally levelled and plumbed, the stanchion bases being supported meanwhile by steel wedges; and immediately before grouting, the space under the steel shall be thoroughly cleaned. 4) Bedding of structure shall be carried out with grout or mortar which shall be of adequate strength and shall completely fill the space to be grouted and shall either be placed under pressure or by ramming against fixed supports. 4 CONNECTIONS 4.1 General As much of the work of fabrication as in reasonably practicable shall be completed in the shops where the steel work is fabricated.
be used provided that due allowance slippage. 4.3 Composite
Connections
In any connection which takes a force directly transferred to it and which is made with more than one type of fastening, only rivets and turned and fitted bolts may be considered as acting together to share the load. In all other connections sufficient number of one type of fastening shall be provided to transfer the entire load for which the connection is designed. 4.4 Members Meeting at a Joint For triangulated frames designed on the assumption of pin jointed connections, members meeting at a joint, shall, where practicable, have their centroidal axes meeting at a point; and wherever practicable the centre of resistance of a connection shall be on the line of action of the load so asto avoid eccentricity moment on the connections. 1) However, where eccentricity of members or if connection is present, the members and the connections shall provide adequate resistance to the induced bending moments. 2) Where the design is based on non-intersecting members at a joint all stresses arising from eccentricity shall be calculated and this stress within limits specified. 4.5 Bearing Brackets Wherever applicable, connections of beams to columns shall include a bottom bracket and top cleat. Where web cleats are not provided, the bottom bracket shall be capable of carrying the whole of the load. 4.6 Gussets Gusset plates shall be designed to resist the shear, direct and flexural stresses~acting on the weakest or critical section. Re-entrant cuts shall be avoided as far as practicable. 4.7 Lug Angles Lug angles connecting achannel shafied member, shall as far as possible, be disposed symmetrically with respect to the section of the member.
1) In case of angle members, the lug angles and
4.2 Rivets, Close Tolerance Bolts, High Strength Friction Grip Fasteners, Black Bolts and Welding Where a connection is subject to impact or vibration or to reversal of stress (unless such reversal is solely due to wind) or where for some special reasonsuch as continuity in rigid framing or precision in alignment of machinery, rivets or close tolerance bolts, high strength friction grip fasteners or welding shall be used. In all other cases bolts in clearance holes may
is made for any
2)
their connections to gusset or other supporting member shall be capable of developing a strength not less than 20 percent in excess of the force in the outstanding leg of the angle and the attachment of the lug angle to the angle number shall becapable of developing 40 percent in excess of that force. In the case of channel numbers and the like, the lug angles and their connections to the gusset or other supporting member shall be capable of developing a strength of not less than 10 per-
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 When two or more parts are connected together, a line of rivets or bolts shall be provided at a distance of not more than (37 mm + 4 t) the nearest edge. In case of work not exposed to weather, this may be increased to 12 t. 4) Tacking Rivets - Tacking rivets not subject to calculated stress shall be used, in case the maximum distances specified in 4.8 (2) is exceeded. The pitch of tacking rivets in line shall not exceed 33 t or 300 mm whichever is less. When the plates are exposed to weather, the pitch in line shall not exceed 16 t or 200 mm, whichever is less. In both cases, the lines of tacking rivets shall not be apart at a distance greater than the pitches.
cent in excess of the force not accounted for by direct connection of the member, and the attachment of the lug angles to the member shall be capable of developing 20 percent in excess of that force. 3) Inno case shall fewer than two bolts or rivets be used for attaching the lug angle to the gusset or other supporting member. 4) The effective connection of the lug angle shall, as far as possible terminate at the end of the member connected, and the fastening of the lug angle to the member shall preferably start in advance of the direct connection of the member to the gusset or other supporting member. 4.8 Pitch of Rivets
1) Minimum
2)
Pitch - The distance between centre of rivets shall not be less than 2.5 times the nominal diameter of the rivet. Maximum Pitch - The maximum pitch for any two adjacent rivets shall not exceed 32 t where t is the thickness of the thinner outside plate or 300 mm. In tension members the distance between any two adjacent rivets, in a line lying in the direction of stress, shall not exceed 16 t or 200 mm; and 12 t or 200 mm for compression members. In case of butting compression members, the distance shall not exceed 4.5 times the diameter of the rivets for a distance from the abutting faces equal to 1.5 times the width of the member. The distance between centres of any two consecutive rivets in a line adjacent and parallel to an edge of an outside plate shall not exceed ( 100 mm + 4 t) or 200 mm; whichever is less in compression or tension members.
3)
Din
When rivets are staggered at equal intervals and the gauge does not exceed 7.5 mm, the distances specified herein between centres of rivets, may be increased by 50 percent. Edge Distances - The minimum edge distance from the centre of any hole to the edge of the plate shall be not less than as given below:
of
Hole mm
DiLstalzce to Sheared or Hand Flame Cut Edge mm
13.5 and below
I9
IS.5
2s 29 32 32 38 44 51 57 57
17.5 19.5 21.5 23.5 25.5 29.0 32.0 35.0 .________
In tension members composed of two angles, flats, channels or tees in contact back-to-back or seperated back-to-back by a distance not more than the aggregate thickness of the connected parts, tackng rivets shall be at a pitch not exceeding 1 000 mm. For compression members as above, the pitch shall not exceed 600 mm. 4.9 Pitch of Bolts They shall be as for rivets including edge distances and tacking bolts. 5 FABRICATION AND CbNNECTIONS DESIGN BY PLASTIC THEORY
FOR
5.1 Fabrication All the requirements of fabrication as per 3 shall apply for fabrication for design of steel structures by_ _ plastic theory subject to the following: a ) The use of sheared edges shall be avoided in locations subject to plastic hinge rotation at factored loading. Ifvsed they shall be finished smooth by grinding, chipping or planning. b) In locations subject to plastic hinge rotation at factored loading, holes or rivets or bolts in the tension area shall be sub-punched and reamed or drilled full size. 5.2 Connections
Distance to Rolled. Muchine Flume Cut, Sawn or Planed Edge mm
4 All connections which are essential to the con-
17 22 2s 29 29 32 38 44
b)
tinuity, assumed as the basis of design analysis shall be capable of resisting the moments, shears and axial loads to which they would be subjected by either full or factored loading. Corner connections (haunches), tapered or curved for architectural reasons shall be so proportioned that the full bending strength of the section adjacent to the connection may be developed. Stiffeners shall be used, as required, to preserve the flange continuity of interrupted
c>
51 51 172
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 posed to weather. In case some other metallic corrosion protecting material is used, such as aluminium painting, the renewal of coating may be done after longer intervals.
members at theirjunctions with other members in a continuous frame. Such stiffeners shall be placed irrpairs on opposite sides of the web of the member which extends continuously through the joint. 6 FABRICATION AND CONNECTIONS TUBULAR STRUCTURES
6.3 Fabrication
FOR
4 As mentioned in 6.1, provisions of 1 to 5 apply to construction using tubes also. Where welding is adopted provisions of IS 8 16 : 1969 shall apply, as appropriate.
6.1 General The use of tubular steel in structural work would result in considerable savings, particularly in case of roof trusses, latticed girders and compression members in general. This clause on fabrication and connections for tubular structures is complimentary to the provisions of 1 to 5. Requirements which are of special application to construction using steel tubes are included here.
b) The component parts of the structure shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither twisted nor otherwise damaged and be so prepared that the specified cambers, if any, are maintained.
c) Straightening - All material before assembly shall be straightened, if necessary, unless’ otherwise required to be a curvilinear form and shall be free from twist.
6.2 Materials a) Steel tubes shall be hot roiled finished tubes
conforming to IS 1161 : 1979. Tubes made by other than hot finishing processes or which have been subjected to cold working, shall be regarded as hot finished, if they have subsequently been heat-treated and are supplied in normalized conditions.
d) Bolting 1) Washers shall be specially shaped where
2)
NOTE - Grade ERW YSt 22 tubes specifiedin IS I 16 I : I979 with a carbon content less than 0.30 percent, may be considered as hot finished for this purpose.
b) Electrodes used for welding of steel tubes shall conform to IS 814 : 1991. Minimum Thickness 1) For tubular steelwork painted with one ~priming coat of red oxide and zinc chromate paint after fabrication and periodically repainted and maintained regularly, the wall thickness of tubes used for construction exposed to weather shall be not less than 4 mm (see 2); for construction not exposed to weather, it shall be not less than 3.2 mm and; where structures are not readily accessib!e for maintainance, the minimum thickness shall be 5 mm. 2) Steel tubes used for construction exposed to weather shall be not less than 3.2 mm thick and for construction not exposed to weather shall be not less than 2.6 mm thick provided that in each case the tube is applied with: one coat of zinc primer conforming to IS IO4 : 1979, followed by a coat of paint conforming to IS 2074 : 1992; or two coats of paint conforming to IS 123 : 1962. This painting schedule should be reviewed after every two years in the case of tubes ex173
necessary, or other means used, to give the nuts and the heads of bolts a satisfactory bearing. In all cases where the full bearing area of the bolt is to be developed, the threaded portion of the bolt shall not be within the thickness of the parts bolted together, and washers of appropriate thickness shall be provided to allow the nut to be completely tightened.
e) Cut Edges-Edges
should be dressed to a neat and workman like finish and be free from distortion where parts are to be in contact metalto-metal. Caps and Bases,for Columns - The ends of all tubes for columns, transmitting loads through the ends, shall be true and square to the axis of the tube and should be provided with a cap or base accurately fitted to the end of the tube and screwed, welded or shrunk on. The cap or base plate shoul‘d be true and square to the axis of the columns.
g) Sealing of Tubes - When the end of a tube is not automatically sealed by virtue of its connection by welding to another member, the end shall be properly and completely sealed. Before sealing, the inside of the~tube should-be dry and free from loose scale.
h) Flattened Ends-In
tubular construction, the ends of tubes may be flattened or otherwise formed to provide for welded, riveted or bolted connections, provided that the methods adopted for such flattening do not injure the
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 material. gradual.
The change
of section
shall
welding. When butt weld running throughout is not employed, a fillet running throughout should be used where the diamter of the branch tube is less than one-third of the diameter of the main tube. The combined fillet-butt weld should be used when the diameter of the branch tube is equal to or greater than one-third of the diameter of the main tube. 3) A weld connecting the end of one tube to the surface of another, with axes of tubes intersecting at an angle less than 30°, shall be permitted only if adequate efficiency of the junctions has been demonstrated. 4) Connections where the axes of the two tubes do not intersect - A weld connecting the end of one tube to the surface of another, where the axes of the tubes do not intersect, shall be subject to the provision of 6.4 (c) (2) and (3) provided that no part of the curve of intersection of the eccentric tube with the main tube lies outside the curve of intersection of the corresponding largest permissible eccentric tube with the main tube (see Fig. 8.1).
be
j) Oiling and Painting - If not galvanized, all tubes shall, unless otherwise specified, be painted or oiled or otherwise protectively coated before exposure to the weather. If they are to be painted with any special requirements, this shall be arranged. Reference may also be made to Chapter 15. 6.4 Connections General - Connections in structures using steel tubes shall be provided by welding, riveting or bolting. Wherever possible, connections between tubes shall be made directly tube to tube without gusset plates and other attachments. Each tube may be flattened as specified in 6.3 (h) or otherwise formed to provide for welded, riveted or bolted connections. When loads are required to be carried from one tube to another or are required to be distributed between tubes, diaphragms which may be tubular, designed with sufficient stiffness to distribute the load between tubes, shall be used. Eccentricity of Members - Tubes meeting at a point shall, wheverever practicable, have their gravity axes meeting at a point so as to avoid eccentricity. Wherever practicable, the centre of resistance of the connection shall lie on the line of action of the load so as to aovid eccentricity of the connection.
TYl’E I Butt Weld e,, = +(D~-D~
Welded Connections I! A weld connecting two tubes end-to-end shall be full penetration butt weld. The effective throat thickness of the weld shall be taken as thickness of the thinner part joined. 2) A weld connecting the end of one tube (branch tube) to the surface of another tube (main tube) with their axes at an angle of not less than 30” shall be of the following type: butt weld throughout, fillet weld throughout, and fillet-butt weld, the weld being a fillet weld in one part and a butt weld in another with a continuous change from the one form to another form in the intervening portions.
TYPE m Filfrt-6utt Weld Go, =f (DICDCJ enhl = +C+-D$
A butt weld throughout may be used whatever the ratio of the diameters of the tubes joined, provided complete penetration is secured either by the use of backing material, or by depositing a sealing run of metal on the back of the joint, or by some special method of
NOTE - Dottedcircle shows curve of intersection of largest
permissiblenon-eccentrictube with main. Solid circle indicates curve of intersection of eccentric branch.
FIG. 8.1 DIAGRAM SHOWING LIMITS OF ECCENTRICITYFOR TUBE CONNECTIONS 174
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 5)
diameter of the flattened tube for this purpose shall be measured in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the main tube.
Connections of tubes with flattened ends - Where the end of the branch tube is flattened to an elliptical shape, the provisions of 6.4 (c) shall apply and the
ANNEX
A
(Clause 2.8) LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS A-l
AND HANDBOOKS
HOT ROLLED STEEL SECTIONS IS No.
808: 1989
channel
TO STEEL
CONSTRUCTION Title
IS No.
Title Beam, column, sections
RELEVANT
806 : 1968
Use of steel tubes in general building construction
4000 : 1992
Assembly of structural joints using high tensile bolts
and angle
1161 : 1979
Steel tubes
1730 : 1989
Dimensions of steel plates, sheets, strips and flats for general engineering purposes
HANDBOOKFOR SP 6 (17 : 1964
Steel sections
Dimensions of round and square steel bars for general engineering purposes
SP 6 (2) : 1962
Steel beams and plate girders
SP 6 (3) : 1962
Steel columns and struts
SP 6 (4) : 1969
High strength friction grip bolts
1852: 1985
Rolling and cutting tolerances hot rolled steel products
SP 6 (6) : 1972
Plastic theory
3443 : 1980
Crane rail sections
3954: 1991
Channel sections gineering purposes
1732 : 1989
for
A-3 WELDING for
IS No.
12778 : 1989
Parallel flange beam and column sections - Dimensions
12779: 1989
Rolling and cutting tolerances for parallel flange beam and column sections
11991 : 1986
SP 6 (7) : 1972 CODES AND HANDBOOKS
IS No. 800 : 1984
CODES/HANDBOOKS
in general building
Title Recommended procedures for heat treatment of welded fabrication Recommended practice for flash butt welding of tubes, rods and other sections in carbon and alloy steels Simple welded girders IS1 handbook for manual metal arc welding for welders.
Title Use of steel construction
ENGINEERS
general en10801 : 1984
A-2 DESIGN
STRUCTURAL
SP 12: 1975
Handbook for gas welders
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 PART 2
USE OF COLD FORMED SECTIONS
1 GENERAL
2 MATERIALS
1.1 The design of cold formed sections is covered by IS 801 : 1975. The fabrication is largely by resistance spot welding and by site bolting. This is because of extremely thin sections used in cold forming. IS 819 : 1957 for resistance spot welding of light assemblies in mild steel covers the fabrication practices of cold formed sections.
2.1 Cold formed IS 811 : 1988.
gauge sections
shall conform
to
2.2 Design code using cold formed sections shall conform to IS 801: 1975. SP 6 (5) : 1980 is the handbook for cold formed light gauge sections.
176
CHAPTER 9
FLOORSANDFLOORCOVERINGS
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
3 IN-SITUTERRAZZO FLOORFINISH
PART 1 BRICK FLOORS
1 GENERAL 2 BURNTCLAYBRICKFLOORING 2.1 General
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
Preparatory Work Bedding Laying of Bricks Dry Brick Paving
3 REINFORCED BRICKANDBRICKCONCRETE FLOORS 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7
General Preparatory Work Construction of RB and RBC Roof or Floor Laying of Bricks and-Reinforcement Curing Removal of Formwork Finishing
PART 2 CEMENT
CONCRETE
FLOORS
1 IN-SITUCONCRETE FLOORING 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14
General Materials Types of Floor Finishes Mix Proportions Durability Resistance to Attack by Chemical Reagents Slipperiness Surface Hardening Solutions Size 0f~Panels Protection against~Dampness Finish over Stairs Laying of Concrete Flooring on Ground Laying of Bonded Construction (Type II) Laying of Floor Topping on Suspended Slabs
2 IN-SITU GRANOLITHIC CONCRETE FORFLOOR TOPPING 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7
General Materials Preparatory Work Laying of Floor over Base Concrete Laying of Floor Topping on Suspended Slab Curing Maintenance
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.1 3.8 3.9 3.10
General Materials General Construction Preparatory Work Spreading the Under layer Laying Terrazzo Topping Curing Grinding Laying Terrazzo Skirtings and Dados Maintenance
4 CEMENTCONCRETE FLOORING TILES General Materials Preparatory Work Bedding Laying of Tiles Grinding and Polishing Laying of Rough Tiles Tolerance in slaying Skirting, Dado Work and Staircase -Tread Work 4.10 Maintenance 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9
ANNEXA SURFACE TREATMENT TO CEMENT
CONCRETE EOOR TOPPING PART 3 INDUSTRIAL
FLOOR FINISHES
1 GENERAL 2 TYPESOFINDUSTRIAL FLOORFINISHES 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Types Considerations for Selection of Floor Finish Properties of Floor Finishes Recommendations for Floor Finish for Industrial Buildings 2.5 Bedding and Jointing of Materials
3 DAIRYFLOORFINISH= 3.1 General 3.2 FloorFinishes for Different Sections of Dairy Floors 3.3 Waterproofing Membrane for Dairy Floors 3.4 Drainage in Dairies 3.5 Maintenance of Dairy Floor
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
BITUMENMASTICFLOORING FORLPG 4.1 General
4.2 Thickness 4.3 Preparatory Work 4.4 Laying PART 4
SPECIAL FLOORS AND FLOOR COVERINGS
GENERAL MAGNESIUM OXYCHLORIDE COMPOSITION FLOORS 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
2.6 2.7 2.8
General Types Materials Properties of Magnesium Oxychloride Floors Application Testing Maintenance Protection of Metal Work
3 BITUMENMASTICFLOORING
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
General Materials Preparatory Work Laying
4 RUBBERFLOORS 4.1 General 4.2 Preparatory Work 4.3 Laying and Fixing of Rubber Flooring 5 LINOLEUM FLOORS 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
General Materials Preparatory Work Laying
6 EPOXYRESINFLOORTOPPINGS 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
General Materials Types of Epoxy Resin Toppings Preparatory Work Laying Maintenance
7 FLEXIBLEPVC SHEETANDTILE FLOORING 7.1 General
7.2 Materials 7.3 Preparatory Work 7.4 Laying RESISTANT MORTARS 8 CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTAR 9 SILICATETYPECHEMICAL 9.1 Material
9.2 Mortar
9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7
Storage Mixing Application Acid-Curing Chemical Resistance of Silicate Type Mortars
10 RESINTYPECHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTAR 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8
Material Storage Safety Precautions Mixing Handling Application Acid-Curing Chemical Resistance of Resin Type Mortars
11 SULPHURTYPECHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTAR 11.1 I 1.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6
Material Storage Safety Precautions Melting and Pouring Application Chemical Resistance of Sulphur Type Mortars
12 PARQUET FLOORING 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8
General Materials Classes of Mosaic Parquet Flooring Parquet Floor Patterns Wood Block Flooring Patterns Mosaic Parquet Panel Dimensions Fabrication and Laying
ANNEXB SPECIESOF TIMBERRECOMMENDED FOR SLATS,FLOORBOARDSAND PARQUETFLOORS PART 5 TIMBER
FLOORS
1 GENERAL 2 MATERIALS 3 TYPESOFTIMBERFLOORS 4 CONSTRUCTION 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Single Joisted Timber Floor Double Joisted Timber Floor Triple Joisted Timber Floor Solid Timber Floors Purpose-Made Floors
5 TIMBERFLOORBOARDS
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
CHAPTER 9
FLOORS AND FLOOR COVERINGS 1
GENERAL
Part 3
Industrial floor finishes
1.1 For the purpose of this Handbook floors and floor coverings are grouped as under:
Part 4 Part 5
Special floors and floor coverings
Part 1
Brick floors
Part 2
Cement concrete floors
Indian Standards available for different floor and floor coverings are IS 5766 : 1970 and IS 13074 : 199 1.
Timber floors
PART 1 BRICK FLOORS
of cement per square metre so as to get a good bond between sub-grade and flooring.
1 GENERAL 1.1 In this Part construction sidered:
of the floors are con-
b) The sub-grade shall be provided with the slope required for the flooring for proper drainage. Where sub-grade is not provided, the earth below shall be properly sloped, watered, rammed and compacted. Before laying the floor it shall be moistened.
a) Burnt clay brick flooring to IS 5766 : 1970. b) Reinforced brick and RBC floors and roofs to IS 10440 : 1983. 2 BURNT CLAY BRICK FLOORING
c) To prevent subsidence a layer of sand 75 mm thick may be provided under the base concrete.
2.1 General The usefulness of burnt clay bricks as flooring material is their wearing quality and facility for quick installation. Generally, common burnt clay bricks to IS 1077 : 1992 can be used for low cost temporary sheds, court yards, footpaths, etc. Heavy duty bricks conforming to IS 2180 : 1988 and IS 3583 : 1988 could be used for locations of floors subject to heavy wear and tear, such as, stores, godowns and platforms. Generally, bricks laid on edge give better performance than when laid flat. . 2.2 Preparatory Work 2.2.1 Base Concrete
2.3 Bedding Before the concrete sub-grade is finally set, lime mortar or lime cement mortar not less than 10 mm thick shall be spread evenly over the base concrete.. The proportions of mortar shall be as given below: Heavy dutyfloors Light dutyfloors
-
1:4 (cement mortar) or 1: 1:6 (cement lime mortar) 1:6 (cement mortar) or 1:2:9 (cement lime mortar)
2.4 Laying of Bricks
a>Soaking
- To reduce excessive suction, the bricks shall be soaked in clean water, before laying, and then allowed to drain until they are surface dry.
Heavy duty floors shall be provided with base concrete; light duty floors may also be provided with base concrete. The concrete used shall generally be lime concrete with brick or stone aggregates prepared as described in Chapter 5. Lean cement concrete mix 1:5:10 may also be used. For heavy duty floors the base concrete shall be 150 mm thick, for light duty floors, base concrete, when provided, shall be 75 mm thick.
b) The bricks shall be laid in plain, diagonal, herring bone, or other suitable patterns. The brick shall either be laid flat or on edge; laying on edge is preferred. Broken bricks shall not be used in flooring except for closing line.
c) Bricks shall be laid on the mortar bed by gentle
a) Limeconcrete sub-gradeshall be allowed to set for seven days. If the sub-grade is of lean cement concrete, flooring work shall be commenced within 48 h; if not the surface of the sub-grade shall be roughened with steel wire brushes, wetted by sprinkling water and smeared with a coat of cement slurry at 2.75 kg
topping. The inside faces of bricks shall be smeared with mortar before the next brick is laid and pressed against it. On completion of a portion of flooring, the vertical joints shall be fully filled with mortar from top. The surface of the flooring shall be checked frequently for 181
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 trueness and slope. In case of flat brick flooring, bricks shall be laid with frog down, when laid flat in plain courses, the units shall be bonded to break joints at half the length~of the bricks.
3.2.3 Details of corrosion protection are as below:
a>Quality b) Cover
to reinforcement as specified in\ IS 456 : 1978 subject to severe conditions.of exposure.
4 All joints shall be full of mortar; the thickness of joints shall be 8 to 10 mm. The joints shall be flush pointed after being raked out 10 mm deep while the mortar is still green. The raked joints, after cleaning, shall be wetted and filled with I:3 cement mortar.
c>Protective
coatings may be as follows: pitch mixture coating - A dry mixture of cement, molten asphalt or coaltar pitch and dry sand in the ratio of 1: I:3 by mass should be applied on the steel surface to a thickness of 6 mm and surface should be finished by flaming. with neat cement 2) Cement-sand-mortar finish - 1:3 cement mortar to a thickness of 6 mm shall be applied. The surface should be finished with a neat cement slurry finish with a2: 1 water cement ratio. 3) Empty resin/mortar rendering may also be applied in existing structures. 41 Steel reinforcement may be coated with cement slurry to inhibit corrosion.
1) Cement-sand-asphaltkoaltar
The flooring shall be cured at least for 7 days after completion. In case of cement lime mortar, curing shall commence 2 days after laying and continued for 7 days. 2.5 Dry Brick Paving The bricks without soaking in water, shall be laid dry, flat or on edge on 12 mm thick mud mortar laid to required slope on the sub-grade. The mud mortar shall be made of soil free from vegetable roots, gravel, and coarse sand; the plasticity index shall be between 9 to 12 percent and it shall be prepared as in Chapter 4. After laying the bricks, the joints shall be filled with fine sand. 3 REINFORCED BRICK AND BRICK CONCRETE FLOORS 3.1 General Reinforced brick and brick concrete floors are widely adopted, particularly in north India. This type of construction consists of laying high strength bricks directly over the formwork with reinforcements in between the joints and filling up the joints with concrete. This type of construction has been found to be strong, durable and it also facilitates quick construction. However, in this type of construction, reinforcement deteriorates due to corrosion, unless otherw~ise protected. 3.2 Preparatory
Work
3.2.1 Bricks shall be kept immersed in water for 4 to 6 h and removed about 15-20 min before they are used so that their skin is dry when concrete is poured. 3.2.2 Reinforcement shall be so placed, that they do not touch bricks at any point. A minimum cover of 25 mm shall beprovided all round the reinforcement. Corrosion of reinforcement shall be prevented by taking measures recommended in IS 9077 : 1979 which deals with corrosion protection of reinforcement in RB and BBC construction. In general two bars shall not be used in the same joint.
of concrete mix, should be higher than
M 15.
Reinforcement shall be free from rust; heavy rust shall be removed by brushing or by derusting jellies. 3.3 Construction
of RB and RBC Roof or Floor
3.3.1 Centering shall be erected to support the RB floor or roof from below. The centering shall be smooth, clean and to correct alignment. The top surface of the formwork shall be given an upward camber of 1 mm for every 150 mm of span subject to a maximum of 30 mm to allow for initial settlement. Before laying the slab, the formwork and the supports shall be checked to prevent undue sag and to ensure overall safety and stability of the formwork. 3.3.2 All main and distribution bars shall be placed in the position in Fig. 9.1 and shall be completely embedded in concrete. They shall be rigidly secured against any displacement and arrangement shall be made to ensure proper cover to reinforcement. Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered. Horizontal spacing of bars shall not be more than 3 times the effective depth or 450 mm whichever is smaller. The pitch of the distribution bars shall be not more than 5 times the effective depth or 450 mm whichever is smaller. The reinforcement in either direction shall not be less than 0.20 percent of the cross section of slab for mild steel and 0.16 percent for deformed bars. 3.3.3 The bricks, as prepared in 3.2.1 shall be laid as shown in Fig. 9.1 with cement mortar 1:3. Preferably a minimum spacing of 60 mm in between bricks should be maintained for preventing corrosion.
182
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 DISTRIBLITION /- REINFORCEMENT
OEPTH OF SLAB7
MAIN REINFORCEMENT
9.1 A Cross Section of RB Slab
l
9.1 B Cross Section of RBC Slab
FIG 9.1 TYPICALRB ANDRBC 3.4 Laying of Bricks and Reinforcement a) The bricks~for single brick thickness of floor or roof shall be laid directly on the forms without bedding of any kind. After one or two bricks has been laid the next row is similarly laid providing the gap for concrete joint. Cement concrete shall be poured into the joints after the placement of reinforcement. The concrete shall be fluid enough to run freely around the reinforcing bars and fill the joints completely. The joints shall be puddled sufficiently with a trowel or a sharp ended 16 mm bar to allow free flow of concrete. b) If a slab of two courses of bricks is laid, a fresh layer of concrete shall be placed over the first course to make the middle horizontal joints and screeded properly to the desired thickness of the joint. The top course is laid in the same manner as the first course.
3.5 Curing The brickwork shall be kept wet by means of wet straw or wet sand or merely be sprinkling water gently over the surface for about 24 oh after finishing. The slab shall then be watered profusely for a period of at least 10 days. 3.6 Removal of Formwork The formwork shall not be removed after laying.
FLOORING
1.1 General
In-situ cement concrete flooring consists essentially of rich cement
concrete,
and possesses
good wearing
before 14 days
3.7 Finishing The completed floor nor roof shall be finished with concrete (sea a waterproofing course of lime Chapter 12) or mudphusku with tiles (see-chapter 11). The ceiling shall be rendered or plastered, after drying, with cement mortar (1:3) or lime mortar (1:2) as specified. Theplaster may be in a single coat of 12 mm thick and shall~be done in accordance with IS 1661 : 1972 (see Chapter 4). The finished surface of the floor or roof shall be cured with water for a period of not less than 3 weeks.
PART 2 CEMENT CONCRETE
1 IN-SITU CONCRETE
SLAB
FLOORS
properties and facility of easy cleaning and maintenance which make it suitable for use in houses, offices, schools, hospitals and light industrial buildings. Depending on the loading conditions and degree of wear resistance needed, the floor finish has to be laid
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 in various thicknesses; and careful selection of mix proportion, panel sizes and number of layers has to made. Also the laying operations have to ensure proper bonding of the finish to the base or sub floor.
cal floor finish (Type I) with good wearing quality (see Figs. 9.2 and 9.4).
1.2 Materials
In case of bonded construction, where floor finish is laid separately over a set and hardened base, the topping has to be laid to greater thickness, care shall be taken to ensure a good bond~between the topping and base; otherwise it may lead to cracking, curling and warping of the floor finish. The higher thickness adds to the dead weight of slab (see Figs. 9.3.9.5 and 9.6)
1.3.2 Bonded Floor Finish (Types II, III, V and VI)
4 Cement shall conform to IS 269 : 1989, or to IS455: 19890rtoIS 1489(Parts or any other as specified.
I &2):
1991;
b) Aggregates shall conformto IS 383 : 1970. The aggregate crushing value, tested as per IS 2386 (Part 4) : 1963 shall not exceed 30 percent. Graded coarse aggregate shall be as per Chapter 4. The coarse aggregate shall generally be of the following sizes: Sl No.
Material
that it is not damaged since it is done after all the work of base and structural slab is done much in advance. Close tolerances can be maintained and levels of finished floor can be controlled. This type of finish is also suitable to be laid on old concrete.
Size of Aggregate
i) Base concrete (lean cement concrete lime concrete)
4 The advantage of this type of bonded finish is
or
Graded from 40 mm and below
b) Where very dense and smooth surface is
ii) Cement concrete topping ofthickness 40 mm and above
Graded from 16 mm and below
iii) Cement concrete topping of thickness 25 mm
Graded from 12.5 mm and below
iv) Underlayer of cement concrete topping in two layers
-Graded from 12.5 mm and below
desired, the topping can be laid in two layers (finsihes Types III and VI). The underlayer consisting of a leaner mix is first laid seperately on the hardened base; and the wearing layer of very stiff and richer mix, but of thickness smaller than the underlayer, is bonded to the green concrete of underlayer and finished smooth.
c>In
case of bonded finish on structural slabs where it is not possible to obtain proper levels within the thickness of topping, a cushioning layer of about 50 to 75 mm thick lime concrete is laid and well compacted over the structural slab. Lime concrete layer may also be necessary to obtain a level surface over structural floors other than that of concrete or for embedding fixtures like pipes, etc. This will however add dead weight to the structure.
Grading of fine aggregate shall be as per Chapter 4. c) Water shall be clean and free from oil, and alkali organic or vegetable matter. Generally potable water is suitable. In case of doubt about, quality of water, it shall be tested as described in Chapter 5. d) Dividing strips shall be as per 3.2 (0. 1.3 Types of Floor Finishes
r BASE
Types of floor finish shall be as given in Table 9.1, depending on the expected load, wear of the floor and whether the top is monolithic with base or laid separately on a set and hardened base. In either case special precaution is necessary to ensure bond between topping and the base.
CONCRETE CEMENT CONCRETE TO+PING LAID MONOLlTHlCALLY WITH THE BASE CONC-RETE r20
1.3.1 Monolithic Floor Finish (Finishes Type I and NSOLIDATEC 1 GROUND’
Type IV)
LSAND
In case of monolithic construction even a small thickness of topping is sufficient because of strength imparted to it by the base concrete and such type of finish is quite suitable as a moderately strong and economi-
FILLING
9.2A Without Hard Core Sub-Base All dimensionsin millimetres.
F~9.2
MONOLITHICFLOOR FINISH (OVERGROUND)Continued
184
’
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997’ CEMENT LAID THE HARD
CORE
BASE
OF
DRY
BRICK
OR
STONE
CONCRETE
TOPPING
MONOLITHICALLY BASE CONCRETE1
WITH
SOFT CINDER
MOORUM. OR
I- BASE
BALLAST
OR
SAND -20
CONCRETE
CEMENT CONCRETE MONOLITHICALLY
TOPPING WITCH THE
LA10 CONfRETE BASE 25
~CONSOLIDATED
GROUND
ED
9.2B With Hard Core Sub-Base
9.2C Sub-Base for Regions Having Expansive Soil All dimensions in rmllimetres.
FIG.~.~MONOLITHICFLOORFINISH(OVERGROUND)Concluded WEARING LAYER OF CEMENT CONCRETE MIX 12 TO 3 FINISHED MONOLITHICALL WITH WITH UNDER-LAYER
r
L CONSOUDATEOGFIQUND BAND FILLINU
BAND nWuQ
BABE
B4!3EcoNCRm
COFlCRrn
9.3A Tapping Laid in Single Layer
9.38 Topping Laid in Two Layers
FIG.9.3 BONDED,FLOORFINISHOVERGROUND
CEMENT CONCRETE TOPPING FINISHED MONOLITHtCALLY WITH THE STRUCTURAL SLAB
1
15mm
*
LSTRUCTURAL
SLAB
FIG.9.4 FLOOR FINISHLAIDMONOLITHICALLYWITHTHESTRUCTURALSLAB
185
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 r-WEARING LAYER OF CEMENT CONCRETE MIX 1:2 TO 3 ‘FINISHED MONOLITHICALLY WITH UNDER-LAYER
CEMENT CONCRETE ToPPlNG -7-l
LSTRUCTURAL SLAB--l ’
9.5B Topping Laid in Two Layers
9.5A Topping Laid in Single Layer FIG.
9.5 BONDEDFLOOR
CEMENT
LUNDER-LAYER OF CEbiENT CONCRETE MIX 1:3:6
FINISHOVER STRUCTURALSLAB
CONCRETE
TOPPING
LIME CONCRETE CUSHIONING LAYER
r 25
75
LSTRUCTURAL
SLAB
9.6A Topping Laid in Single Layer
CEMENT
CONCRETE
TOPPING
UNDER-LAYER Of CEMENT CONCRETE
75
1
LSTRUCTIJRAL
SLAB
LIME C~ONCRETE CUSHIONING LAYER
9.6B Topping Laid in Two Layers All dimensions in nlillimetres. FIG 9.6 FLOORFINISHONSTRUCTURALSLABLAIDOVER CUSHIONINGLAYEROF'LIMECONCRETE
z
: 186
*
:
L
B
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
Mix proportions of base concrete and the topping for different types of floors shall be as specified in Table 9.1. The topping finish mix of 1:2:4 is being replaced by 1:2.5:3.5 mix since this gives a much better workability and finish.
nesium silica-flouride or zinc silica-flouride or proprietary materials consisting mainly of one or more of these compounds.These treatments are likely to need renewals at intervals of one year. Manufacturers advice should be followed when proprietary materials are used. The treatment may be given as described in Annex A.
1.5 Durability
1.9 Size of Panels
Concrete floors possess good durability and resistance to abrasion and wear depending upon the following factors:
Floor finish shall be divided into panels so as to reduce the risk of cracking. The size of the panel is governed by the thickness of floor finish, the type of construction (monolithic or bonded), local conditions of temperature, humidity and the season in which the flooring is laid. For floor finish laid in hot and dry climates or in exposed situations, the size of the panels for floor finish shall be smaller than those laid in less exposed situations or in cold and humid climates. The size of panels for monolithic floor finish can be larger than that of bonded floor finish. Generally no dimension of a panel shall exceed 4 m in case of monolithic floor finish and 2 m in case of bonded floor finish. The length of the panel shall not exceed 1; times its breadth. Dividing strips may be used to
1.4 Mix Proportions
a>Choice
of Aggregate - Hard tough aggregate is essential for good durability as well as abrasion resistance.
b) Water-Cement
Ratio - The lower the water cement ratio the greater the durability and wear resistance provided the flooring is fully compacted.
cl Density of Flooring -
Durability increases with density of finish. The staining of floor surface that may result from absorption of oils is, reduced by increasing the density of floor finish.
form panels.
a>The joints
of floor finish shall extend through the border and skirtings. If the skirting is laid monolithic with the flooring, a border of about 300 mm width must be provided alround the floor. The width of the border provided around the floor when the skirting is not monolithic with floor finish shall not exceed 450 mm.
4 Curing - Adequate curing is very essential to ensure good wear resistance. 1.6 Resistance
to Attack by Chemical Reagents
Concrete flooring is slowly attacked by acids, vegetable oils, sugar solution and various other agents; prolonged exposure to these reagents will bring about gradual deterioration.
b) Construction joints between bays of the floor finish should be placed over any joints in the base concrete.
1.7 Slipperiness The slipperiness of concrete surface depends mainly upon the surface treatment, highly polished type of floor finish is likely to be slippery. A trowel finished floor is reasonably non-slip. Non-slip surfaces may be obtained by trowel finish or by providing non-slip inserts. Floor finishes over ramps, stairs and other similar situations, specially if they are liable to get wet, shall be finished in chequered pattern to make them non-slip. 1.8 Surface Hardening
.
1.10 Protection against Dampness -“QIw* The layer of sand provided under the base concrete will generally serve w a damp-proof course under normal conditions. However in more severe conditions, damp-proofing as described in Chapter 12 shall be provided. 1.11 Finisb~over Stairs
Solutions
It is not necessary, generally, to ~apply any further treatment to the cement concrete floor topping but dusting may be reduced by application of one of the surface hardening solutions of sodium silicate, mag-
For risers 6 mm thick mortar finish~will be sufficient, 10 mm thickness may be provided when the-surface of structural concrete is uneven. At treads, the thickness shall be not less than 20 mm for monolithic type of construction and 40 mm for bonded construction.
187
n
I
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Table 9.1 Recommended Sub-base
Type
Mix Proportion (by volume)
T-horoughly consolidated ground covered with 100 to 150 mmtiell rammed preferably coarse sand 100 mm thick hard core of well consolidated dry brick or stone aggregate blended with MOORUM or coarse sand, laid over well rammed sand filling of 100 mm thick Stone -ballast (40 mm graded aggregate) mixed with locally available yellow or red soil or soft MOORUMin 1:l proportion shall be compacted to about 300 mm thickness and throughly saturated with water Thoroughly consolidated ground covered with 100 to 150 mm well rammed (preferably coarse) sand do
I A.
I B.
II
III
100
.
(4)
(2) Cement concrete flooring laid over ground 1
Topping
Base Concrete c Minimum Thickness, mm (3)
(1) A.
Specifications for Different Types of Concrete Floors (Clauses 1.3, 1.4 and-1.14.3)
Cement concrete 1:4:8 (stone aggregate 40 mm and below)
fl Minimum Thickness, mm (5)
Mix Proportion (by volume)
(6)
20
Cement concrete 3 (fine aggregate)
-
V
do
20
Cement concrete 1:2:4 (coarse aggregate 12.5mm and below)
100
do
20
Cement concrete 1:2 to 3 (fine aggregate)
25
Cementconcrete 1:2.5:3.5 (coarse aggregate 12.5 mm and below)
Underlayer, 25
Underlayer cement concrete 1:3:6 (coarse aggregate 12.5 mm and below) Wearing layer cement concrete I:2 to 3 (fine aggregate)
IdO
Cement concrete 1:5:10 (aggregate size 40 mm-and below) do
100
-
-
15
-
-
25
Underlayer, 25
VI
Wearing layer, 15
-
VII
I:2 to
100
Wearing layer, 15 B. Floor topping laid over structural slabs IV
\
50-75
Lime concrete
Cement concrete 1:2 to~3 (fine aggregate) Cemcntconcmte 1:2.5:3.5 &oarszaggregate 12.5 mm and below) Under layer cement concrete 1:3:6 (coarse aggregate 12.5 mm and below) Wearing layer-cement concrete 1:2 to 3 (stone aggregate 4.75 mm and below)
Same as for Type V or VI
NOTES 1 In regions having expansive soils, the sub-base shall be laid as given in Type I B for bothType
II and Type III flooring.
2 For Type I, the cement concrete topping shall be laid monolithic with the base concrete. For Type I A, in places such as garages, where wheeled traffic comes into contact with the flooring, the sub-base shall have a hard core over the well rammed sand filling. For Type I B, in regions having expansive soils, Note 1 will apply. 3 For Type III, underlayer shall be laid seperately over specially prepared surface of set and hardened base concrete. The wearing layer shall then be laid over the green-surface and finished/monolithic with it. 4 For Type VII, a cushioning prepared as in Chapter 5.
layer of lime concrete shall be laid over the prepared surface of structural slab. Lime concrete shall be
1.12 Laying of Concrete%looring 1.12.1
Preparation
on Ground
of Sub-base
a) The ground or earth filling shall be thoroughly compacted so that there are no loose pockets
left anywhere in the whole area. This shall be covered with clean sand well consolidated to a thickness of not less than 100 mm. b) In cases where wheeled traffic comes into contact with sub-base, as in garages, the sub-base
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 shall consist of well compacted sand layer of 100 mm thick and an additional 100 mm thick well compacted hard core of dry brick or stone ballast 40 mm in size blended with Moorum or coarse sand.
c>In the case
of expansive soils, after preparing as per Table 9.1, a further cover of 200 mm thick layer~of soft MOORUM or cinder or sand be laid and compacted properly before laying the base concrete.
1.12.4 Sequence of Building Up The base concrete and topping shall be laid in alternate panels if screed stips are used; the intermediate panels being filled after one or two days depending on atmospheric conditions. But if glass or metallic strips are used for effective separation of panels, the base concrete may be laid in all panels simultaneously. 1.13 Laying of Bonded Construction
(Type II)
1.13.1 Preparation of sub-base shall be as in 1.12.1.
1.12.2 Luying of the Base
1.13.2 Laying of Base Concrete
The area shall be divided into suitable panels (see 1.9). This shall be done by fixing screed strips, the depth of which shall be equal to combined thickness of the base concrete and the topping. The screed strips may be coated with a thick coat lime wash so as to prevent them sticking to the concrete deposited in the panels. Before placing the base concrete, the sub-base shall be properly wetted. The concrete so placed shall be thoroughly tamped and surface screeded uniformly below the finished grade of flooring to accomodate the required thickness of topping. Any slope desired in the floor finish shall be given in the base concrete. The surface shall be kept rough to receive the topping.
The base concrete may be deposited over the whole area at a stretch. Before placing the concrete in the sub-base, the whole area shall be properly w,etted and rammed. The concrete so placed shall be thoroughly tamped and the surface finished level with the top edges of the forms. The surface of the base concrete shall be left rough~to receive the topping. Two or three hours after the concrete is laid, the surface shall be brushed with a hard brush to remove any laitance or scum and swept clean so that the coarse aggregate is exposed.
1.12.3 Laying the Topping On the clean green surface of the base concrete, the topping shall be laid as soon as possible but not later than 2 to 3h of laying the base concrete, depending on the atmospheric conditions. The base concrete shall be still green, but sufficiently firm to enable workmen to walk over it by placing planks on its surface.
1.13.3 Laying of Topping The surface of base concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned by scrubbing with a coir or steel wire brush. Where the concrete is hardened so that roughening of the surface by wire is not possible, the entire surface shall be roughened by chipping and hacking. The surface shall be soaked with water, before laying the topping, at least for 12 h and surplus water shall be removed by mopping immediately before laying the topping.
a>The
screed strips shall be fixed over the base concrete dividing into suitable panels; the screed strips shall be so arranged that joints, if any, in the base concrete shall coincide with the joints in the topping. Neat cement slurry shall be thoroughly brushed into the prepared surface of the base concrete. The topping shall then be laid, very thoroughly tamped, struckoff level and surface floated with a float. Any inequalities in the surface shall be made good immediately. The finish shall be laid in alternate panels as described for monolithic construction.
4 The concrete
mix for topping shall be deposited on the base concrete, thoroughly compacted to the finished thickness. If water or laitance rises to the top when consolidating, the concrete should be scraped and replaced by a fresh mix; the excess water in no case be absorbed by spreading dry cement. The topping should be floated with a wooden float to render the surface even and shall be finished~smooth as in 1.12.3 (b), after slight hardening.
b) Finishing the surface - Finishing operations shall start after the compaction of concrete and shall be completed in a period of 6 h depending on the temperature and atmospheric conditions. The surface shall be trowelled (about three times) to produce a uniform or hard surface. The trowellings shall be done at proper intervals; the final trowelling shall be done before the concrete has become too hard.
b) Finishing the surface - The surface shall be finished as given in 1.12.3. 1.13.4 L.uying the Topping in Two Layers Where the topping is to be laid in two layers to obtain very smooth and dense finish (Type III), the sub-base, base concrete and underlayer shall be as described in 1.13.1 to 1.13.3 with the exception that the topping shall not be finished smooth with a trowel but left 189
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 rough after tamping board.
it and levelling
it with screed
The top 15 mm thick wearing layer of I:2 to 3 concrete mix of consistency stiffer than underlayer concrete shall then be laid immediately over the rough but green surface of underlayer, thoroughly tamped struck-off level and the surface floated with a wooden float. Any unevenness in the surface shall be made good immediately. The surface shall then be finished smooth as in 1.12.3. 1.14 Laying of Floor Topping on Suspended Slabs 1.14.1 Floor Topping Laid Monolithically Structural/Suspended Slab (Type IV)
with
water overnight and wiped clean. On the clean damp surface of sub-floor, lime concrete shall then be evenly spread between forms, throughly tamped and levelled. The clean surface shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cementslurry and then the topping shall be laid either in single or two layers. 1.14.4 Curing The surface shall be cured for 15 days and no traffic shall be allowed during this period; traffic shall be allowed only after 28 days. 2 IN-SZ1’U GRANOLITHIC FLOOR TOPPING
CONCRETE
FOR
4 The framework
of structural slab shall be erected to the finished thickness of floor finish. The concrete shall be deposited in the framework and surface finished below the top edge of the form to accommodatethe required thickness of the topping; any required slope shall be given~in the structural concrete and any laitance or scum shall be brushed away from the surface of concrete when it is still green. The surface shall be left rough to receive the topping.
2.1 General a) Granolithic concrete floor topping is adopted for heavy engineering factories, workshops, garages, warehouses, etc, where the floor is subject to heavy loads and severe abrasion combined with impact. The granolithic conCrete essentially consists of rich concrete made with specially selected aggregate of high hardness, surface texture and particle shape suitable for use as a wearing finish to the floors. Although plain concrete laid as per 1 of this Part would be satisfactory for many purposes, granolithic concrete is chosen because of its high abrasion resistance and used for floor toppings wherever abrasion combined with impact is likely to be severe.
b) On the green surface of structural concrete, topping shall be placed immediately after the concrete has stiffened to allow the workmen to walk over it by placing planks. Laitance and foreign matter if any shall be removed. The topping shall be laid and thoroughly compacted and screeded to the finished grade. The topping shall be floated with a wooden float to render the surface even. It shall be finished as in 1.12.3.
b) The base doncrete shall be laid as per 1 of this Part and here only the laying of granolithic topping is described as a supplement to 1 of this Part.
1.14.2 Floor Topping Laid Directly over the Hardened StructuraVSuspended Slab (Type V and Type VI)
c) There are two methods
The surface of concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned. Where concrete has hardened, the entire surface shall be roughened by chipping or hacking. The rest of the operations shall be as in 1.13.3.
of laying in-situ granolithic concrete floor topping. The topping shall be laid within 3 h of the laying of the base, that is, monolithically with the base concrete; or alternatively shall be laid anytime after the base has begun to harden, in such a way as to produce the maximum possible bond between the base and topping, that is, it shall be laid separately from the base. In ground floors it is advisable to lay the granolithic concrete topping monolithically with base concrete. In the case of bonded construction extreme care shall be taken to ensure no breaking of bond between the base and topping.
1.14.3 Floor Topping Laid over Cushioning Layer of _ Lime Concrete (see Table 9.1)
4 Floor finish to be laid depends on nature of use
a>
Preparation of surface-When the topping is to be laid separately but directly over the slab without any cushioning layer, the structural concrete shall be brushed thoroughly with a coir or steel wire brush and swept clean to expose the coarse aggregate and leave the surface rough.
b) Laying topping -
and performance expected ~of the topping. Therefore the thickness, selection of mix proportions, pane1 sizes and the type of construction shall be carefully decided.
1.14.3.1 Preparation of sub-floor - Before laying lime concrete, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by scrubbing with steel wire brushes and soaked with
190
SP 62 (S ‘& T) : 1997 2.2 Materials
-Where expansion joints are necessary in the walls and roof of a building, there should be corresponding joints in the floor. The floor finish should not be allowed to cover the joint filler of the expansion joint in the base concrete; either joint filler should be extended through the full thickness of the base concrete and finish or the space above it should be filled with a suitable sealing compound.
a>Cement b)
to IS 269 : 1989 or IS 455 : 1989 or IS 1489 [Parts 1 & 2) : 199 1: or any other cement as specified. Aggregates -The aggregates shall consist of one or more of the following groups : i) Granite, Quartzite.
ii) Basalt,
iii) Trap, and
iv)
The aggregates shall conform to IS 383 : 1970 and the crushing value when determined as per IS 2386 (Part 4) : 1963 shall not exceed 30 percent. The grading of the aggregates for granolithic concrete shall conform to Table 9.2 for coarse aggregate and Table 9.3 for fine aggregate. Table 9.2 Coarse Aggregate (Clause 2.2) ISSieve Designation
Percentage by Mass Passing IS Sieves 90- 100 40%
12.5 mm IO mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm
O-IO
-
Table 9.3 Fine Aggregate (Clause 2.2) ISSieve Designation
Percentage by Mass Passing IS Sieves ’ Gmding
10 mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm 1.18 mm 600 micron 300 micron 1SO micron
cl
Admixtures
4
Abrasives
Zone 1
Grading ’ Zone 2
100 90-100 60-95 30-70 15-34 S-20 O-10
100 90-100 75-100 55-90 3%s9 8-30 O-IO
- Integral additions are not normally required; but may be advantageous in certain circumstances.
Metallic or non-metallic materials of high abrasion resistance may be incorporated in the floor topping mix to increase the abrasive resistance of floor topping.
e>Surface
Hardening Solutions - These solutions, as described in Annex A of this Part may be used.
2.3 Preparatory
Work
a) Mix Proportions - The mix proportion for granolithic concrete floor topping for different types of floor finishes shall be I: lc2 (by volume) b) Joints - Construction joints between bays of the floor finish need only be plain untreated vertical butt joints and shquld be placed over any joints in the base.
c) Protection against Dampness - Protection against dampness shall beas given in 1.10. 2.4 Laying of Floor over Base Concrete 2.4.1 Floor Topping Laid Monolithically Base Concrete (see Table 9.4)
with the
On clean green surface of the base concrete laid in accordance with 1 of this Part, the topping shall be placed in position as soon as possible but generally not later than 2 to 3 h of laying base concrete, depending upon the temperature and atmospheric conditions. The base concrete at the time of laying the topping shall be still green but sufficiently firm to enable the workmen to walk over it by placing planks on its surface. The granolithic mix (I : 1:2) shall be deposited on the base concrete in the screed strips already laid and thoroughly compacted to the finished thickness. The surface shall be tested to detect any undulation in the surface, if any, and shall be made good immediately. The topping shall be floated with a wooden float to render the surface even and after the surface is slightly hardened it shall be finished smooth as descrbed in 1.12.3. 2.4.2 Floor Topping Laid Separately
on Hhrdened
Base Concrete (see Table 9.4)
Before the operation of laying the topping is started, the surface of the base concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, loose particles, laitance, etc. by scrubbing with coir or steel wire brush, where the concrete is hardened, the surface shall be roughened by chipping or hacking. The surface shall be wetted with water for several hours and surplus water shall be removed immediately before topping is laid. A neat cement slurry shall be thoroughly brushed into the prepared surface of base concrete before laying the granolithic topping. The screed strips shall be so arranged that the joints, if any, in the base concrete shall coincide with the joints in the topping. The topping shall be tested for eveness, floated as in 2.4.1 and finished smooth as in 1.12.3. 2.5 Laying of Floor Topping on Suspended Slab 2.5.1 Floor Suspended
Topping
Laid Monolithically
with the
Slab {see Table 9.4)
The framework for the suspended slab shall be erected to the full thickness of the floor finish. Structural 191
-..
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 concrete shall be deposited in the forms thoroughly consolidated and surface finished below the top edge of the form to accomodate the required thickness of the topping. Any slope required in the floor finish shall be given in the structural concrete itself when it is still green. The surface shall be finished smooth but rough enough to provide an adequate bond for the topping. On the green surface of the structural concrete, granolithic concrete (1: 1:2) shall be placed in position immediately after the structural concrete has stiffened enough (but is still plastic) to allow workmen to tread over it by placing planks. Laitance and foreign matter, if any, shall be removed and then granolithic concrete placed in position. The topping shall be thoroughly compacted and screeded to the finished grade. The topping shall be floated with a float to render the surface even. The mix for the structural concrete as well as the topping shall be as stiff as possible consistent with workability so as to prevent accumulation of excess of water or laitance on the surface. After the surface is hardened it shall be finished smooth as in 1.12.3.
shall be brushed with a layer of neat cement slurry. The granolithic concrete shall be laid and finished smooth as in 2.4. NOTE-Where lime and good quality of bricks are not available 1:4:8 cement concrete may be used.
Table 9.4 Different Types of Granolithic Concrete Floor Topping (Clauses 2.4 and 2.5) SI No.
Type of Topping
A. Floor Topping Laid over Base Concrete on Ground i) Floor topping laid monolithically with base concrete
20
Granolithic concrete floor topping shall be laid monolithic with base concrete
ii) Floor topping laid separately on hardened based concrete
40
Granolithic concrete floor topping shall be laid over separately prepared surface of set and hardened base concrete
NOTES 1 In the monolithic method of construction, the granolithic topping may be regarded as contributingto the structural strength of the suspended slab. 2 The monolithic construction of granolithic concrete floor topping presents certain difficulties in construction due to activities, such as plastering of walls and ceilings, fixing ofjoinery, movement of scaffoldings, ladders, etc, which are likely to damage the floor finish.
2.5.2 Floor Topping Laid over Suspended Slab (see Table 9.4)
Remarks
Thickness of Granolithic Concrete Floor Topping inmm,Min
B. Floor Topping Laid over Suspended iii)
Floor topping laid monolithically with suspended slab
iv) Floor topping laid over hardened suspended slab
Slabs
20
Granolithic cculcrete topping shall be laid and finished monolithic with the suspended slab
40
The granolithic topping shall be laid separately over the specially prepared surface of set and hardened concrete
40
Cushioning layer of lime concrete of 40 to 50 mm thickness shall be spread over the prepared surface of suspended slab. Topping shall be laid as in Sl No. (iv)
the Hardened
The surface of the base concrete shall Abethoroughly brushed with a coir or steel wire brush to remove any scum or laitance before the topping is laid; the surface shall be swept clean to expose coarse aggregate. Where the concrete is hardened, the surface shall be roughened by chipping or hacking. The surface shall be wetted with water for several hours and surplus removed by mopping immediately before the topping is laid. A neat cement slurry shall be thoroughly brushed into the surface as per 2.4 before depositing the topping. The surface shall be tested for uneveness and made good immediately. The top surface shall be finished smooth. 2.5.3 Floor Topping Laid over Cushioning Layer (see Table 9.4) The surface of the suspended slab shall be prepared as in 2.5.2. Lime concrete (see Note) shall be spread evenly thoroughly tamped and levelled. Lime concrete shall be prepared as per Chapter 5. The surface of lime concrete shall be prepared as described~in 2.4 before laying the topping. The surface
v) Floor topping laid over cushioning layer
2.6 Curing The surface shall be kept moist ,at least for 10 days; no traffic shall be permitted on the surface during this period. 2.7 Maintenance Except for oil and grease, frequent washing of the surface with water may be sufficient to maintain the floor finish in a clean condition. Grease stains may be removed by means of sodium metasilicate, caustic soda, some phosphates or other proprietary materials. 3 IN-SITU TERRAZZO 3.1 General
I
b
FLOOR FINISH 1
In-situ terrazzo is a popular floor finish in residential and public buildings preferred for its decorative and
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 TERRAZZO
wearing properties and facility for e.asy cleaning. It can also be used in skirting and dados. Use of cement concrete flooring tiles is covered in 4.
TOPPING
UNDERLAYER rCUSHlONlNG
3.2 Materials
LAYER
a>Aggregates
used in terrazzo topping shall be marble aggregates with size varying from 1 mm to 25 mm. Marble powder used in terrazzo topping shall pass through IS Sieve 300. Aggregate for terrazzo underlayer as well as the base concrte shall conform to IS 383 : 1970. Cement shall conform to IS 269 : 1989, or IS 455 : 1989, IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 199 1, or any other cement as specified.
b) Cement -
c>White
Cement -
It shall conform to IS 8042 :
1989.
4 Pigments -
The pigments shall be of permanent colour and shall conform to the requirements mentioned~in Table 9.5.
L STRUGTURAL FIG.
Size of Chips
Ir kUB
UNDERLAYER n--BASE
CONCRETE
-BASE
Thickness
2 41 7 10
6 9 12
Where chips of larger size than 10 mm are used, the minimum thickness of topping shall be not less than one and one-third times the maximum size of chips. 3.3.3 Mix Proportions a) The underlayer shall be of cement concrete mix 1:2:4 by volume, the maximum size of aggregate shall not exceed 10 mm. b) The mix for terrazzo topping shall consist of cement with or without pigments, marble powder, marble aggregates and water. The proportions of cement and marble powder shall be three parts of cement and one part of powder by mass. For every part of cement marble powder mix, the proportion of aggregates shall be as follows depending on the size of aggregates:
3.3.1 The terrazzo finish normally consists of the topping and an underlayer and is laid over a layer of base concrete or cushioning layer. The arrangement of terrazzo finish laid directly over the ground shall be as various layers shown in Fig 9.7 and when laid on structural slab, the arrangement shall be as shown in Fig 9.8. The sub-base shall be well consolidated layer of earth or preferably sand. The cushioning layer shall preferably be lime concrete. The base concrete -shall be lean cement concrete of 1:5: 10 mix or lime concrete.
TOPPING
Minimum
mm
mm 1 to 2 to 4 to 7to
3.3 General Construction
TERRAZZO
9.8 TERRAZZOFINISHON STRUCTURALSLAB
3.3.2 The thickness of base concrete shall be not less than 100 mm and of cushioning layer not less than 75 mm. The combined thickness of underlayer and topping for flooring and dada/skirting shall not be less than 30 mm and 20 mm respectively. The thickness of terrazzo topping shall be not less than the following depending upon the size of chips used :
Water - Water for use in terrazzo work shall be as described in Chapter 5. Dividing Strips - The material for dividing strips shall be such that it has similar resistance to wear as the flooring. The dividing strips may be aluminium, brass, copper, glass, plastic or similar materials. Aluminium dividing strips should have a protective coating of bitumen. The thickness of strip shall not be less than 1.5 mm and width not less than 25 mm for flooring.
SLAB
Size of Aggregates
Proportion of Aggregate
mm
Binder Mix Parts
lto7 \ 7to 15 15 to22 r’
One and three-fourths
of
One and one-half
The aggregates may be of required colour or may be a mix of aggregates of different colours in the required proportions. The proportions of cement shall be inclusive of any pigments added to cement. The proportions in which pigments are mixed with cement or white cement to obtain different colours for the binder shall be as specified in Table 9.5. 3.3.4 Size of Panels a) While laying the floor the joints in tlooring shall always coincide with the expansion
FIG. 9.7 TERRAZZOFINISHOVER GROUND
193
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
b) Where different coloured chips are used, they
joints, if any, in the structural slab so that any movement of the base will be in the joint in the flooring instead of forming uncontrolled cracks.
shall be first well mixed in required proportions of various colours and sizes. Coloured cement may be procured as ready mixed material or mixed at site; in the latter case the pigment and cement in the required proportions shall be mixed thoroughly and sieved before further mixing with marble powder and aggregates. 4 The coloured cement shall be thoroughly mixed in dry state with marble powder. The binder so obtained and the mix of chips shall then be mixed dry together as given in 3.3.3. e) While mixing the aggregates, care shall be taken notto get the materials into a heap, as this would result in the coarsest chips falling to the edge of the heap and cement working to the centre at the bottom. The material shall be kept, as far as possible, in an even layer during mixing. After the materials have been thoroughly mixed in the dry state, water shall be added in small quantities, preferably in a fine spray, while the materials are being mixed until the proper consistency is obtained. The mixture shah be plastic but not so wet that it will flow; a rough indication for the addition of proper quantity of water in the mix is that it shall be capable of being moulded when squeezed in hand without water flowing out. A high water cement ratio will produce a mixture with a high dry shrinkage. Machine mixing may preferably be used but the common type of concrete mixer is not as suitable for terrazzo work as the mixer specially made for this purpose, in which segregation is prevented by~blades with a lifting as well as rotating movement. Only constant work justifies the installation of such special machines. The mix shall be used in the work within half h) an hourof the addition of water during preparation.
c>
b) Differential
shrinkage or expansion between terrazzo and the sub-floor may cause cracks in the flooring and floor joints shall be formed so that the positions of such cracks are controlled. The floor both while laying the underlayer and later on the topping shall be divided into panels not exceeding 2 m2 so as to reduce the risk of cracking. The joints shall beso located that the longer dimension of any panel does not exceed 2 m. The panel shall preferably be separated by means of dividing strips. However where butt joints are provided, the bays shall be laid alternately allowing for an interval of at least 24 h between the laying of adjacent bays.
Table 9.5 Cement Pigment Proportion for Various Colours of Matrix in Terrazzo Work (Clauses 3.2,3.3.3 and 4.2.5) All proportions by mass. Colour
Proportion of Pigment
-Pigment to be Used
Proportion of Cement
Proportion of White Cement
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
6)
Red
Red oxide of iron (see IS 44 : 1969)
1
15-20
Nil
Black
Carbon black (see IS 40 : 1971)
1
25-40
Nil
Bottle Green
Green chromium oxide (see IS 54 : 1975)
1
15-30
Nil
Pink
Red oxide (see IS 44
1
Nil
100-300
: 1969)
Cream
Yellow oxide of iron (see IS 44 : 1969)
1
Nil
100-400
Yellow
Yellow oxide of iron (see IS 44 : 1969)
1
Nil
25-75
Light Green
Green chromium oxide (see IS 54 : 1975)
1
Nil
50-150
Nil
1 to2
1
1
6
4
French Grey Fawn
Yellow oxide of iron (see IS 44 : 1969)
3.4 Preparatory
Work
3.4.1 Mixing of Materials a) Mixing of materials is of great importance, for if this is not done thoroughly the work will not have a uniform appearance. If done manually the mixing shall preferably be done in a trough or a tub. With a view to avoid variation in colour the complete quantities of cement and pigment required for one operation shall be mixed at the begining of work and stored properly.
s>
3.5 Spreading the Underlayer 3.5.1 Dividing strips, including the stips required for decorative design, shall be fixed on the base to the exact surface level of floor so as to divide the surface of base into the required arrangement of panels. 3.5.2 Where the dividing strips are not used, the screed strips shall be fixed on the base, properly levelled to the correct height to suit the thickness of floor. 3.53 The base shall be cleaned of all~dirt, laitance, or loose material and then well wetted with water without forming any water pools on the surface. It shall then be smeared with cement slurry just before spreading of underlayer. 194
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 3.5.4 After application of cement slurry, the underlayer shall be spread and levelled with a screeding board. The slightly rough surface left by the screeding board will form a satisfactory key for the terrazzo. 3.6 Laying Terrazzo Topping 3.61 Terrazzo topping shall be laid while the underlayer is still plastic, but has hardened to provent cement from rising to the surface which is, normally, achieved between 18 to 24 h after the underlayer has been laid. A cement slurry preferably of the same colour as the topping shall-be brushed orrto the surface immediately before laying is commenced. If possible, the entire work of laying the topping shall be completed at one stretch. 3.6.2 The terrazzo mix shall be placed on the screed bed and compacted thoroughly by tamping or rolling and trowelled smooth, The. time interval allowed between each successive trowelling is important as only that much trowelling, which is sufficient to give a level surface, is needed immediately after layer. Further compacting shall be carried out at intervals, the amount depending upon the temperature and rate of set of the cement. Excessive trowelling or rolling in early stages shall be avoided as this tends to work up cement to the surface~producing a finish liable to cracking and also necessitates more grinding of surface to expose the marble chips. 3.6.3 The surface shall then be rammed in order to consolidate the terrazzo; it is not sufficient just to ‘float’ lightly, as this would cause depressions which have to be filled with mortar. A piece of smooth marble stone of size 150 mm x 150 mm x 25 mm may be advantageously used for ramming. Following the rammer, a trowel may be used. When using the trowel the object should be to make surface level and smooth with as little use of the float as possible relying on pressure rather than upon a~trowelling action to achieve this end. Rolling will be easier than tamping and patting but a rolled terrazzo is more likely to crack since the roller would draw cement to the surface unless the mixture is very dry. The best results are obtained by tamping combined with minimum of trowelling. The compaction shall ensure that the air bubbles are cleared from the mix.
stencils or framework shall be rectified with a large trowel, care being taken to consolidate terrazzo to avoid damage to the edges of the design. 3.7 Curing The surface shall be left dry for air-curing for a duration of 12 to 18 h depending on the atmospheric conditions. It shall then be cured by allowing water to stand in pools over it for a period of not less than 4 days. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the floor from being subjected to extreme temperature. 3.8 Grinding 3.8.1 The grinding and processing of terrazzo may be commenced not less than 2 days from the time of completion of laying for manual grinding and not less than 7 days for machine grinding. The period that should be allowed before the floor is fit for grinding depends upon the materials, their proportions and the weather. The sooner the grinding is done the easier it is; if it is done too soon the grinding may tear out the chips from the matrix. 3.8.2 The filling shall be done with a grout using the same coloured cement (without marblepowder) as the original mix for terrazzo topping and a portion of the coloured cement shall be kept for this purpose when the floor is laid; this ensures that the parches do not differ in appearance from the remainder of the floor. 3.8.3 Grinding and polishing may be done either by hand or by machine. The operations shall be as given below : a) The first grinding shall be done with carborundum stones of 60 grit size. b) The surface shall then be washed clean and grouted with neat cement mortar of the same colour as matrix grout of cream like consistency. It shall then be allowed to dry for 24 h and wetcured for 4 days in the same manner as specified in 3.7. c) The second grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of 80 grit size. d) The surface shall then be prepared once more as in 3.8.3 (b). e) The third grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of 120 to 150 grit size. f) The surface shall again be washed clean and allowed to dry for 12 h and wetcured for 4 days in the same manner as in 3.7. g) The fourth grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of 320 to 400 grit size. h) The surface shall again be washed clean and rubbed hard with felt and slightly moistened oxalic acid powder; 5 g of oxalic acid powder is adequate for 1 m2 of floor surface.
3.6.4 Work on Borders and Decorative Designs Borders and decorative designs shall be laid before the main body of the flooring. They shall Abe laid and finished in the same manner as flooring, preferably using dividing strips. Where, however, stencils or framework of wood or metal are used instead of dividing strips, they shall be removed before the topping mix commences to harden. The removal shall be effected with as little disturbance to the materials as possible and any ragged edges left after removal of the
195
I
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 3.8.4 When all constructional and finishing works, namely, painting, distempering, electrical work, plumbing, joinery work, etc, are completed and just before the area is occupied the floor shall be wahsed clean with dilute oxalic acid solution and dried. Floor polishing machine fitted with felt or hessian bobs shall then be run over it until the floor shines.
4 Tile flooring may be laid on most types of reasonably rigid base, provided that the subfloor is of sufficient strength for the type of flooring proposed and is not liable to settlement at any time. Cement concrete flooring tiles are not recommended for use where they will be exposed to the action of acids and alkalis. However, they give suitable service if exposed to seawater, vegetable oil or fats.
In case wax-polished surface is desired, the wax-polish shall be sparingly applied with soft linen on the clean dry surface. Then the polishing machine fitted with bobs shall be run over it. Clean sawdust shall then be spread Dver the floor and polishing machine again be applied mopping up surplus wax leaving glossy surface. Care shall be taken to see that the floor is not left slippery. 3.9 Laying Terrazzo 3.9.1
b) For the purpose of selecting tiles, floors are generally classified into the following types : 1) General purpose or light duty floors, that is, those subject to pedestrian traffic as in offices, domestic buildings, hospitals, colleges, banks etc; 2) Medium duty floors, that is, those subject to heavy pedestrian traffic from trolleys, casts, etc, as in factories, pavements, platforms, railway stations, driveways etc; and 3) Non-slip floors (where chequered tiles are used), that is, footpaths and pavements, special factory floors, platforms, ramps, etc.
Skirtings and Dados
Underlayer
For terrazzo finish on vertical surfaces like skirting and dados, the underlayer shall consist of a layer of stiff cement mortar 1:3 (by volume) and finished rough so as to provide adequate key for topping. 3.9.2 Thickness The combined thickness of underlayer and terrazzo topping shall be not less than 20 mm. The minimum thickness of terrazzo topping shall be not less than 6 mm. 3.9.3 The other operations like laying, curing, grinding, polishing and maintenance shall be similar to those described for in-situ terrazzo flooring except that grinding will be done~manually. 3.10 Maintenance Under normal conditions, the flooring may be kept clean by washing periodically with water and occasionally with a dilute solution of oxalic acid after which it shall be mopped down with cold water and dried. If desired, the floor may be polished using a hard wax-polish or an emulsionpolish. Soap in any form shall not be used as it tends to make the terrazzo dangerously slippery; excessive polishing has a similar effect. The surface may also be kept free from oil and grease toavoid slipperiness. 4 CEMENT
CONCRETE
FLOORING
TILES
4.1 General The usefulness of tiles as.a flooring material consists mainly in their plesant appearance as it eliminates the possibility of unsightly cracks and facility for quick installation. The appearance and performance of tiled floor will, however, depend not only on the quality of materials used but also on the care taken in bedding, laying and finishing of the tiles.
4.2 Materials 4.2.1 Sand The sand to be used for mortar for laying of tiles shall conform to IS 2116 : 1980 and the sand shall have a minimum fineness modulus of 1.5. 4.2.2 Cement The cement used for laying the tiles and grouting shall conform to IS 269 : 1989, or IS 455 : 1989, or IS 1489 (Parts I & 2) : 1991, or as specified. 4.2.3 Lime Class B or Class C conforming
to IS 712 : 1984.
4.2.4 Tiles The cement concrete flooring tiles to be used shall conform to IS 1237 : 1980. 4.2.5 Pigments .Pigments incorporated in mortar or used for grating shall conform to Table 9.5. 4.2.6 Water Water used shall conform to requirements Chapter 5.
laid down
4.2.7 Oxalic acid used in polishing of tiles shall be such as to give satisfactory performance without detrimental effects.
196
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 4.3 Preparatory
Work
4.3.1 Completion of Work Before Laying of Tiles
4 All the inside walls, ceiling and outside walls b)
cl
4
shall be plastered and door frames and windows fixed in position. The sub-floor shall be finished to a reasonably true plane surface about 35 to 50 mm below the level of the finished floor, properly graded and free from loose earth, dirt or dust and lumps. Before tiling work is started, all points of level for the finished tile surface shall be marked out. This is particularly necesary in the case of finished staircase landings. Wherever slopes in finished floors are desired points of level and outlets shall be correctly marked and outlet openings made before hand. Where it is feared or suspected that dampness may percolate either from the ground floor or walls, the same shall be damp-proofed or waterproofed as described in Chapter 12.
4.4 Bedding
a>Spreading
ofCement Mortar-
The base shall be well compacted and the surface shall be rough to form a suitable key. The base shall be cleaned and wetted without allowing any pools of water on the surface. Cement mortar 1:6 for shall be evenly spread over the base for two rows of tiles and about 3 to 5 m in length with thread level fixed at both ends to act as a guide. The top of the mortar shall be kept rough so that cement slurry can be absorbed. The thickness of bedding shall he not less than 10 mm and not more than 30 mm in any one place. Tiles shall then be laid as in 4.5.
b) Spreading of Lime Mortar - After preparing the surface as in (a) above lime mortar 1:1:2 (1 lime: 1 SURKHI: 2 coarse sand) or 1:3 (1 lime: 3 SURKHI) or 1:3 (1 lime: 3 coarse sand) shall be spread evenly limiting the thickness as in (a). 4.5 Laying of Tiles 4.51 Laying of tiles should commence next morning by which time the bedding becomes sufficiently hard to offer a rigid cushion for the tile and enable masons to place wooden planks and squat on them. Neat cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the mortar bed, over such an area at a time as would accomodate 20 tiles. The tiles shall be fixed with grout one after the~other, each tile being tapped gently with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as close as possible and in straight lines. The joints between the tiles shall normally be 1.5 mm wide.
4.5.2 Surplus cement slurry after the days work shall be cleaned and joints washed fairly deep. 4.5.3 The day after the tiles have been laid, joints shall be filled with cement grout of the same shade as the colour of the matrix of the tile. The freshly laid portion of-the tiles shall be prevented from damage by providing suitable barricades. 4.5.4 Tiles which are fixed to the floor adjoining the wall shall go about 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado as may be required by the designer. For this purpose the wall plaster may be left unfinished by about 50 mm above the level of the proposed finished flooring and the unfinished strip may be plastered later or after the tiles are fixed. 4.5.5 In odd situations where a full tile cannot be provided, tile shall be cut to size and then fixed. 4.5.6 After fixing the tiles, the floor shall be kept moist and allowed to mature for 7 days so that the bedding and joints set properly. After this, it may be used for light traffic. Heavy traffic shall not be allowed on the floor for at least 14 days after fixing the tiles. 4.5.7 Wherever big areas of floor are to be tiled, the level of the central portion of the floor shall be kept about 10 mm higher than the level marked at walls unless specified otherwise. This is normally done to avoid the optical illusion of a depression in the central portion of the tiled hall. 4.6 Grinding and Polishing 4.6.1 Grinding and polishing of tiles shall commence only after the floor as well as the joints have properly set and in no case earlier than 14 days of laying. 4.6.2 ~Grinding should preferably except for skirting.
done by machine
4.6.3 For grinding terrazzo tile flooring, the first grinding-shall be with machine fitted with carborundum stones of 48 to 60 grit. When the floor is rubbed even and chips show uniformity it shall be cleaned with water marking base all pinholes. Grouting in the same shade is then briskly applied so that all pinholes are properly filled in. The grout shall be kept moist for a week for proper setting. Thereafter, the second grinding operation with Carborundum of 120 grit is commenced. The floor is grouted again to fill in fine pinholes. After curing, the flooring is left with protective film till other works are completed and all workers quit. Before the final grinding the floor is swept clean. Final grinding is done with carborundum of 220 to 350 grit using plenty of water and taking care that any foreign matter, particles of sand, etc, are prevented. When surface is rendered smooth, it is washed with water. Afterwards oxalic acid powder is vigorously applied with machine fitted with hessian bobs to bring out sheen. Wash the floor clean and apply dry linen to suck in moisture. If desired wax-polish may finally be 197
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 applied mechanically with clean hessian bobs. Superfluous wax is mopped-up with saw dust till occupation. This will protect the surface and help increase lustre. -When saw dust is spread, water should not be spilled as this is likely to give stains on the polished surface. 4.6.4 When hand grinding and polishing has to be adopted, the various processes in the same sequence sha!l be carried out as in 4.6.3, except that stones with coarser grit may be used. 4.6.5 In the case of plain cement and coloured tiles, the process of polishing shall be the same as in 4.6.3 except that initial grinding with Carborundum stone of 48 to 60 grit may not be necessary. 4.6.6 Chequered and Grooved Tiles These tiles normally do not require polishing. But where polishing is required, the same shall be done as in 4.6.5. 4.7 Laying of Rough Tiles 4.7.1 Where the tiles have been supplied and fixed in rough condition (not ground and filled by the manufacturer), the first grinding shallbe done not less than 14 days after fixing the tiles. The initial grinding shall be done with Carborundum stones of 36 to 48 grit. The remaining process shall be as in 4.6.3.
4.9.2 Before fixing tiles on brick or concrete wall, the wall surface shall first be wetted with clean water. Thereafter, in case of dado the wall surface shall be uniformly and evenly covered with about 10 mm thick backing of cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand). In the case of-skirting the tiles shall be directly fixed with cement mortar 1:4 without initial backing. Before the cushioning mortar has hardened, the back of each tile to be fixed shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste and the tile shall then be gently tapped against the wall with a wooden mallet. The fixing shall be done from bottom of wall upwards. Each tile shall be fixed as close as possible to the one adjoining and any difference in thickness of tile shall be evened out in the cushioning mortar or cement paste so that all the tile faces are set in conformity with one another. 4.9.3 Wherever possible, skirtings and dado shall be ground and polished just as for floor work with machine suitable for the purpose. Skirtings and dado may also be polished by hand. 4.9.4 Precast treads and risers for staircases shall be laid and polished as for flooring. 4.9.5 The laying and polishing of tiles for external paving shall be done similar to that of ordinary flooring. 4.10 Maintenance
4.8 Tolerance in Laying
a) After laying, the floor shall be allowed to
The permissible deviation from datum depends on the area involved; for a large open area a deviation upto 15 mm may be tolerated. Localized deviation of 3 mm in any 3 m may be accepted in nominally flat floor. 4.9 Skirting, Dado Work and Staircase Work
remain clean and free from cement, oil, paint, plaster droppings and all materials likely to stain or spoil the tiles. If appliances, such as, trestles, ladders, steps etc, have to be used for electrician’s plumber and other light work, it shall be ensured that parts in contact with the flooring are padded and no sliding of the appliances shall be permitted.
Tread
49.1 Tile skirtings, where required, shall be fixed only after laying the tiles on the floors. If tiles are to be fixed on walls as dados, the portion of the wall to be tiled shall be left unplastered. Also, dado work shall be done only after laying tiles on the floor.
b) Subsequent
maintenance shall be done by regularly swabbing with clean water followed by rubbing with dry linen.
ANNEX
A
(Clauses 1.8 and 2.2) SURFACE TREATMENT A-l
CLEANING
TO CEMENT CONCRETE
THE SURFACE
A-l.1 The top surface of concrete shall be clean and free from grease or oil to enable the hardening solu-
FLOOR TOPPING
tions to penetrate. Thorough cleaning of the surface shall be ensured particularly in old surfaces. The top surface shall be wetted with water and scrubbed with coir or steel wire brush and cleaned with water. The 198
f
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 floor shall be allowed to dry before applying hardening solution. A-2 TREATMENTS A-2.1 Sodium~Silicate A solution containng one part by volume of sodium silicate andfour parts of water should be spread evenly over the concrete top surface with a mop or soft brush. Any excess material shall be wiped off and the floor allowed to dry. After washing the floor with clean water, a second coat, containing one part of sodium silicate to three or four parts of water should be applied and this should be allowed to dry similarly. After drying, a third coat shall be applied after washing the floor if it is still porous. After drying, the floor should be washed with clean hot water. Effective results are obtained if the treatment is applied 7 to 10 days after the end of curing.
PART 3
INDUSTRIAL
1 GENERAL Ll In industrial covered:
A-2.2 Silica-Flouride The crystals of magnesium silica-flouride or of zinc silica-flouride should be dissolved in water at the rate of 0.1 g/cm3 for the first coat and 0.2 g/cm’ for subsequent coats. Three coats are usually applied after 24 h intervals. There is no need to wash the top surface between coats, but it is advisable to wash with clean water after the final treatment. A-2.3 Drying Oil and Surface Sealers Drying oils, either neat or thinned with turpentine or white spirit, or surface sealers, may be applied to the top surface by brushing. Any excess should be wiped off about 2 h after application. A-2.4 Calcium chloride shall not be used with high alumina cement.
FLOOR FINISHES
circumstances, such as, non-slippery, less, non-sparking, anti-static, etc. floors finishes
the following
are
4 Industrial floors to IS 497 1 : 1968. b) Dairy floors to IS 7956 : 1975. cl Bitumen mastic flooring for industries handling LPG and other light products to IS 13074 : 1991.
hydrocarbon
1.2 In the selection of industrial floor finishes, special care is required in view of diversity of the requirements to be met with and the different characteristics of individual floorfinishes. The strength and stability of finishes will depend on the structural floor, the sub-floor or the foundation. Overloading, thermal expansion and movements due to bad design may cause failure of an otherwise satisfacfoty floor finish. Spillage of chemical solutions, acids, alkalis, etc, on the floor contribute towards the failure of a floor finish. 2 TYPES OF INDUSTRIAL
FLOOR
dustless, noise-
FINISHES
2.1.1 A finish for the floor of an industrial building may begenerally selected out of the following types to suit the requirements of particular case:
4 Plain concrete - as described in Part 2, b) Grarwlithic concrete - as described in Part 2,
c>Precast 4
concrete tile -
Paving brick -
e>Magnesium
as described in Part 2,
as described in Part 1,
oxychloride
-
as described
in
Part 4,
f-l Bitumen mastic - as descrbied in Part 4, g> Linoleum - as described in Part 4, h) Rubber, PVC &eets - as described in Part 4,
j)
Epoxy resin -
k)
Fire clay brick 1972,
as described in Part 4, conforming
to IS 6727 :
m>Ceramic -
unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles conforming to IS 4457 : 1982,
n>Stones,
2.1 Types
P> Steel or cast iron units 3502: 1981,
conforming
to IS
This will deal with the selection of industrial floor finishes where the floor is subject to heavy abrasion, impact, chemical action; floor finish under special
9) Wooden block~with lead lining, and r) Acid resistant brick - conforming to IS 4860 : 1968.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2.2 Considerations
for Selection of Floor Finish
bitumen mastic or magnesium oxychloride composition. A lead lining may be provided over the base concrete or wooden flooring where explosives are being stored. It may be necessary to use a floor which conducts electricity and thus prevents the accumulation of static electrical charges which may cause a spark.
2.2.1 The~important features that govern the selection of industrial floor finish are durability, incidence of loading, safety, resistance to chemical action, convenience of the user, appearance and overall economy. Table 9.6 gives in general a summary of requirements of floor finishes for various industrial buildings. a) Durability 1) Wear - The nature of mechanical wear that a floor has to resist varies considerably. For general information the type of wear may be classified as below: Type of Wear
Examples
Very severe abrasion iogether with heavy impact
Heavy engineering workshops and places where milk cans are being handled in dairies
Very severe abrasion
Places where steel-tyred trucks constantly move
Severe abrasion
Floors having traffic of more than 2 000 persons per day in definite traffic lanes
c) Resistance to chemicals and water - The spillage or splashing of chemical solutions acids, etc, may cause corrosion, deterioration, induce slipperiness or give to other fire or health risks. The possibility of wetting or flooding the floor with water may be taken into account. 2.3 Properties of Floor Finishes 2.3.1 Properties Table 9.7.
of floor
5nishes
are
listed
in
a>Centent_concretefinishes
- Plain cement concrete is used for a wide variety of industrial tloors i,z-situ form. Portland cement concrete is resistant to a wide variety of chemicals, including mineral oils and greases but is slowly attacked by acids, vegetable oils, fats and sugar solutions. Frequent cleaning reduces the attack, but prolonged exposure will bring about a gradual deterioration of the cement concrete flooring.
2) Impact - Consideration should be given to impact, as many flooring materials that will stand abrasion may suffer rapid damage under impact. ~3) Load carrying capacity - Depending on the nature of loading and type of traffic, Y such as foot, rubber, tyred, metal’wheeled, etc, the flooring should be selected to withstand the severe condition.
Granolithic flooring is hard wearing, resists impact and is resistant to alkalis and mineral oils. On the other hand, it is hard to the feet, cold, noisy and susceptible to chemical attack including acids, sulphates and vegetable oils and fats.
b) Safety 1) Resistance to high temperature or fire In industrial structures high temperatures occur without spread of fire. Floor finishes do not by themselves add to fire risks, provided the floor superstructure has adequate resistance to fire. In certain special circumstances, however there may be risks arising from the usage of the floor. For example, oil or other flammable liquids spilled on floor will lead to greater afire risks with floors which are absorbent or themselves combustible, such as, timber or bitumen, than with inert dense materials, such as, concrete or tiles. 2) Sparking - In factories or stores where explosives and substances liable to cause explosions are being handled, sparks caused by friction on a floor surface may cause fire or explosion. Therefore, it is assential to use non-sparkling floor finishes, such as rubber or special grade of 200
Concrete tiles have good resistance to wear and chemical attack but cannot withstand heavy impact; where good appearance and cleanliness are required for the floors, concrete~tiles may be selected.
b) Brick and tile finishes -
They have good resistance to wear and impact. Paving brieks to IS 3583 : 1988 may be used for heavy duty and industrial floors, loading and unloading platforms where the floor is subjected to heavy wear and tear. Fireclay brick to IS 6727 : 1972 may be used in situation where high temperatures are to be met with, such as those around metallurgical furnaces. Acid resistant bricks conforming to IS 4860 : 1968 have good resistance to all acids except hydrofluoric acid and perchloric acid and other chemicals. They are suitable for floorings subject to acid attack and abrasion.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Table 9.6 Requirements
of Floor Finishes for Various Industrial Buildings (Clnuse 2.2.1) Resistance to Attack by
St Type of Building No.
(1) 0
(2) Factories and workshops a) Heavy industries b) Light industries
Resis- Resis- Resis- Even- Wartancc tance tance ness mth to to to or to Abra- Imp- Slip- Smoo- Touch peii- tbness sion act ‘ness
(3)
(4)
VI
VI
I VI
(6)
(3
VI
(8)
(7)
--
I
I
App- ,H cara- Water Mineml nce
I
D
I
D
(9)
R R
1
Acids
Organic Acids
Alkalis
(10)
(II)
(12)
-
-
-
-
-
-
ii)
Loading and unloading platforms
iii)
Shops and offices
I
I
I
R
R
iv)
Food factories, factories processing meat, vegetables, animal or vegetable oils. breweries, beer cellars, etc
I
I
VI
D
I
D
Factories using process involving sugar solutions, etc
I
R
D
I
R
I
D
I
v)
vi) vii)
viii)
Dairies Factories handling or using salts, salt solutions, fertilizers, etc Chemical factories (miscellaneous), chemical laboratories and explosives~manufacturing factories
I
VI
I
VI
VI = Very important, D = Desirable. important to not required sometimes.
I
VI
I
VI
D
I
D
I
R
1=~Important.
-
VI
I
VI
Soluions of
Mineml Oil SUIand phates, GrePhos- ases phates and Nitrates (13)
-
Vegetable Oil and Fats
Heat Resistance
(15)
(16)
(14)
I I<
0 0
R
R
VI
VI
-
VI
VI
R
D
R
VI
D
D
D
D
-
-
R
I
VI
D
D
VI
VI
R
R
= Not usually required, R = Required to some degree, 0 = Variable, very
withstand impact and wear and where the floor need not be too smooth and even.
Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles conforming to IS 4457 : 1982 have good resistance to acids and are suitable for floorings subject to acid attack, impact and abrasion.
Quartzite slabs are used mainly for entrance halls or where a decorative appearance combined with good wearing properties under heavy foot traffic is required. The stone is easy to clean and does not become slippery.
cl Stoneflooring-
The~types of stones useful for flooring are granite, basalt, quartzite and sandstone. Granite is very hard and resistant to wear by abrasion or impact, and to attack by chemicalagents. It is readily cleaned and if kept clean, it is nonslippery till unworn; after considerable wear, it may become smooth and slippery and mechanical roughening may be necessary. It is used in thick slabs of various sizes depending upon the conditions of use. Granite slabs are suitable for the flooring of loading and unioading platforms in workshops, godowns, etc. Basalt flooring will be suitable for heavy engineering factories and garages as it may 201
Sandstones (see IS 3622 : 1977) of suitable variety and thickness may be used for light duty flooring.
4 Steel und cast iron floor firtish -
Metal floor finishes are used where severe wearing conditions are encountered. Several types of steel or cast iron units are used for heavy duty flooring. This type of finish includes: 1) open metal grids embedded in grannolithic concrete or in bitumen mastic, 2) soild tiles or solid plates, and ’ 3) open metal grid suspended floors.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Open metal grids embedded in granolithic concrete are suitable for loading platforms subject to impact and wear caused by movements of trollies with iron wheels, under wet or greasy conditions as in the case where bottled milk are handled. Steel tiles with a smaller proportion of open space than the grids embedded in granolithic concrete are suitable for situations subject to heavy abrasion and impact. The open metal grids and steel tiles tend to become slippery when oily and to corrode when wet. Solid faced metal tiles (usually made of cast iron) are highly resitant to wear and impact and to action of oils, fats,salts and alkalis provided the joints are filled with appropriate chemical resistant material (see Part 4). The plain surface types are liable to become slippery if wet or even when dry if polished by wear, and hence special types with patterned surface shall be used under these conditions The solid metal tiles are particularly usetil, on loading bays where there is heavy trucking and in dairies where a high standard of cleanliness combined with high resistance to-wear and~chemical attack is required.
may cause indentation. In selecting bitumen mastic flooring consideration may be given to be anticipated service conditions, particularly the type of traffic and possible contact with oils, acids and the like. Thesurface of bitumen mastic flooring is liable to become slowly softened by prolonged contact with greases, fats and oils. Contamination with such materials shall be avoided.
h) Linoleum flooring -
Linoleum provides a clean, dust free and resilient flooring. In light industry, such as, in electronic industry, linoleum flooring may be used as the risk of damage by cutting to which linoleum is vulnerable is small. If linoleum gets wet, it expands, mildews and eventually rots.
j> Rubber flooring -
The flooring is resilient and noiseless. The flooring is suitable for electronic industry, computer rooms, etc.
k) Flexible PVCflooring
- The PVC flooring provides a clean, dust free and resilient flooring. The flooring may be easily cleaned with wet cloth, as dirt and grime do not penetrate the surface.
m>Epoxy
resinfloor topping - The use of epoxy resin floor toppings is characterized by its exceptional physical and chemical properties, such as, chemical resistance, hardness, abrasion resistance; compressive, impact and structural strengths; dimensional stability and adhesion to concrete, metal and other surfaces. This is suitable for use on industrial floors, plants manufacturing such as, chemical fertilizers, pharmaceuticals, acids, solvents, etc, in dairies, tanneries, breweries, garages, service stations, warehouses, metal plating and pickling areas.
Steel or cast iron grid suspended floors are used for elevated platforms or walk ways around large machinery. Floors on which liquids or solids are continuously being spilled may be made of supported steel grids with suitable channels beneath, from which the spilled material may be drained or recovered.
e>Wooden provides suitable stored.
block with lead lining This a non-sparking floor finish and is for floors where explosives are
f) Magnesium oxychloride -
The flooring mix gives a fairly strong and durable floor with good appearance. However, the flooring is affected by continued exposure to water, acids, and salt solution. Too wet a mix with excessive magnesium chloride results in sweating of the floor surface. Mineral oils, greases, vegetable, oils, ~milk products and mild alkalis do not affect the floor.
S) Bitumen mastic jlooring -
2.4 Recommendations for Floor Finish for Industrial-Buildings (see Table 9.8) 2.4.1 Floors for Heavy Workshops and Garages
Bitumen mastic flooring is considered suitable for industrial buildings, storage houses, etc, because of its resiliency, wearing quality and ease of maintenance. Bitumen mastic flooring to IS 1196 : 1978 is dustless, odourless, jointless and impervious to the transmission of moisture either in liquid or vapour form. The flooring is easily cleaned, quiet under traffic and resilient. Bitumen mastic flooring is also durable. While it may carry heavy loads, concentrated loads
Engineering
Factories,
Floors in heavy engineering factories, workshops and garages shall be resistant to impact, abrasion and attack by lubricating oils. The epoxy resin floor topping is suitable for heavy industrial floors. The extent to which the floors will be subjected to heavy wear and impact will often vary widely in different parts and since the more important type of finishes are more expensive it is advisable to ascertain as far as possible, before laying the finishes, where trucking gangways or processes involving impact will be located and to provide accordingly. Steel or cast iron tiles or plates, embedded in granolithic concrete may be used for areas of heavy abrasion by steel-tyred trucks or where a high resistance to impact is required.
202
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Table 9.7 Properties of Floor Furnishes (Clause 2.3.1) Resistance to Abrasion
Freedom from Slipperiness
Evenness or Smoothness
Warmtb to Toucb
Appe- Resiarasta/ nce nce Water to Impact
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
i) Portland cement concrete a) In-situ b) Precast
V%-P VG-G
VG VG
VG-P VG-P
P P
G G
G-P G-F
ii)
Steel tiles or grids embedded in concrete
VG
G
P
P
F
iii)
Cast iron tiles
VG
F
-F-P
P
iv)
Natural stones
VG-F
G-F
G-F
P
v)
Heavy duty burnt clay brick/paving brick
G
VG
F
vi)
Fire brick
G
VG
Acid resistant brick and tiles
VG
VG
viii)
Magnesium oxychloride cement
VG
ix)
Bituminous mastics
G-F
SI No.
Type of Finish
:I)
(2)
vii)
Resistance to Attack~by A
Heat \ ResisSolu- Mine- Vege- tance tions rat table Oils of Oils Sulp- and and hates, GreFats Phos- ases phates and Nitrates
Mineral OrgAcids anic Weak St&g Acids
Alkalis
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16) (17)
VG VG
P P
VP VP
F-P F-P
G G
P-VP P-VP
G G
P P
G G
VG
VG-F
P
VP
F-P
G
P-VP
G
P
G
F
VG
G-P
P
VP
G
F
F-P
VG
G
VG
G-F
VG-F
G
G-P
F-VP
G
G-F
F
G
G
G
P
F
G
VG
G
G-P
G
F-VP
G-P
G
G
G
F
P
F
G-F
VG
VG
G
G
G-P
G
G
VG
F
P
G
VG
VG
VG
G
G
G
G
G
VG
G
VG
G
VG
VG
P
P
VP
G
G
VG
VG
G
G
G
F
F
G
VG
F-P
VP
P
G
F
FP
(9)
F
VG
VG
VG
VG
G
G
G
G-P
G
G
G
GF
xi)
Rubbersheetsl tiles
F
VG
VG
F
VG
G
G
G-P
G-VP
F
G
P
GP
xii)
PVC-asbestos tiles
F
VG
G
G
VG
G
VG
F
F
VG
VG
VG
VG
VG
xiii)
Epoxy resins
VG
G
F
G
G
G
VG
G
G-F
G
VG
VG
VG
G
xiv)
Polyester resins
G
G
F
G
G
G
VG
G
G-F
G
VG
G
G
G
x) Linoleum
VG = Very good, G = Good, F = Fair, P = Poor, VP = Very poor. G-P denotes variation with the quality of the material or with severity of conditions.
2.4.1.1 Granalithic concrete with suitable ,materials and good workmanship will provide in light industrial workshops and garages a floor finish of reasonable durability. Special aggregates and metallic floor hardeners may be added to the granolithic concrete where heavy impact and wear is expected. 2.4.2 Loading and Unloading Platforms
4 The requirements
of loading and unloading platforms and industrial loading bays are primarily high resistance to impact and abrasion and non-slipperiness.
b) Steel tiles or ‘anchor-plates’
or metal grids
embedded in granolithic concrete are suitable for loading and unloading platforms subjected to heavy impact. 2.4.3 Food Factories, Factories Processing Meat, Vegetables, Animal or Vegetable Oils, Breweries, Beer Cellars, etc There are many factories making soap, candles and lubricating oils, in which the floors are subject to the action of animal or vegetable oils or fats due to spillage combined with abrasion. The epoxy resin floor topping, is suitable in such situations. Magnesium oxychloride flooring or heavy duty brick flooring may also be adopted.
203
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Table 93 Recommended SI No.
Type of Building
(1) (2) i) Floor for heavy engineering factories, garages
Floor Finishes forlndustrial (Clause 2.4)
Situation and Conditions met with
Recommended Floor Finish
(3)
(4) Granohthic concrete or paving bricks
a) Normal conditions
workshops and
b) Heavy impact or wear c) Spillage containing lubricating oils d) Floors subjected to heavy abrasions by steel tyred trucks ii)
Loading and unloading platforms
a) Platforms involving
b) iii)
Food factories, factories processing meat, animal or vegetable oils, breweries, beer, cellars, etc
normal loading conditions Platforms involving heavy impact
a) Floors subjected to the action of lubricating oils combined with the action of hot water
b) Abrasion resistance not severe iv)
Factories using processes involving sugar solutions and weak acids
c) Severe abrasion a) Places where abrasion and impact are not excessive b) Places where hot sugar solution or molasses are used
v)
Factories handling or using salts or salt solutions and fertilizers
a) Places where common salt is the main constituent of spillage b) Spillage containing any type of salts or fertilizers
2.4.4 Factories Using Processes Solutions and Weak Acids
Involving
Buildings
Sugar
Epoxy resin floor topping Epoxy resin floor topping Steel or cast iron tiles or plates embedded in granolithic concrete Granolithic concrete or granite slabs or paving bricks Steel tiles or anchor plates or metal grids embedded in granohthicconcrete Epoxy resin floor topping or paving bricks or ceramic unglazed vitreous, acid-resisting tiles
Jointing and Bedding Mortar (5) -
-
-
Magnesium oxychloride flooring Epoxy resin floor topping or paving bricks Epoxy resin floor topping or unglazed vitreous acid-resistant tiles or acid-resistant bricks Unglazed vitreous acid-resistant tiles or Tiles or bricks acid-resistant bricks shall be bedded and jointed in acid-resistant mortar Granolithic concrete or bitumen mastic
Epoxy resin floor topping or ceramic unglazed vitreous acid-resistant tiles or acid-resisting bricks
-
ful to the floor finishes. Bitumen mastic flooring is suitable for such situations because of its impermeability and resistance to chemical action. Granolithic concrete may also be used.
In factories processing fruits and vegetables or using sugar syrups, as for example, preserve, canning, pickle, fruit drink, sweet or sugar factories, the floors are subject to chemical action by fruit acids, vinegar and sugar syrup and often to impact and abrasion by movement of casks and~by trucking.
~b) Nitrates, sulphates and phosphates which are widely handled in the fertilizer industry, may lead to rapid deterioration of the cement concrete floor. Epoxy resin floor topping or floor paved with ceramic unglazed vitreous acidresistant tiles or acid-resistant bricks will be suitable in such situations.
b) Unglazed vitreous acid-resistant tiles or acidresistant bricks properly bedded and jointed with chemical resistant mortar [IS 4832 (Parts 1 and 2) : 1969, IS 4832 (Part 3) : 1968 (see also Part 4 of this Chapter)] provide a satisfactory floor for such situations. Epoxy resin floor topping is also suitable for such situations.
2.5 Bedding and Jointing Materials 2.51 Appropriate choice of bedding and jointing materials is essential if the risk of defective floors or premature failure is to be avoided, even when the main flooring material, that is, block, slab or tile, is of a type which would otherwise be satisfactory.
2.4.5 Factories Handling or Using Salts or Salt Solutions and Fertilizers a) The risk of deterioration of floors upon which salts or salt solutions may be spilled as in tanning, bacon curing, or chemical factories depends on the nature of the salts, chlorides, as in common salt when spills are not very harm204
a) The various materials used for bedding and jointing materials and their resistance to deterioration is indicated in Table 9.9. The material shall adhere properly to the base on which the finish is laid and to the finishing units. It shall be durable and resist chemical attack.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
b) Bedding materials and jointing materials could be different in the same floor. If spillage of harmful material is not likely to be appreciable or where the floor may be cleaned frequently, it may be sufficient to point the joints with the chemical resistant mortar and to use cement mortar for bedding. It may also sometimes be an advantage to bed the units in a bituminous waterproof compound and to point the joint with a chemical resistant mortar. In general, the use of one type of mortar with very thin joints requiring no pointing should be preferred even if a separate bitumen or other waterproof layer is laid before bedding and jointing the tiles.
Table 9.9 Sl No.
(1) 0
Type of Material
(2) Portland
Manner of Use
3 DAIRY FLOOR
FINISHES
3.1 General Floors in dairies and other premises used for processing milk and milk products are subject to heavy impact, abrasion and chemical attack. Selection of suitable floor finishing materials and design of drains are, therefore, important for low maintenance cost and long life of the floor. For small dairies, processing up to 10 000 1of milk per day. 3.2 Floor Finishes for Different Sections of a Dairy Floor 3.2.1 Structural Base The structural base should be so constructed that a slope of not less than 1 in 80 is imparted to the floor
Properties of Bedding and Jointing Materials (Clauses 2.5.1 and 3.2.4.4)
Hardness
Adhesion to Smooth Sur-
ResisResistance to h tance ) Water Mineral Acids Orga- Alkato * lis Wear Weak Stro;lg nit Acids
Attack
by
Solutions of Sulphates Phosohates and Nitrates
Mineral Oils and Greases
iii)
iv)
Vl
vi)
Bituminous mastics Rubber latex cement mortar
Chemical resistant silicate type mortars Chemical resistant sulphur type mottars Chemical resistant resin type mortars
a)
EPOXY
(4) Hard
(3 F
(6) F
(7) VG
(8) VP
(9) VP
(10) F-P
(11) VG
(12) P
(13) G
P.
(13 G
Hot, as supplied Rubber, latex with portland cement Silicate solution and fillers Sulphur and tillers, dry mortar to be melted before use Resin syrup. tillers and hardners
Plastic
G
G-F
VG
F
P
P
G
G
P
P
P
Resilient
VG
G
G
G-P
P
P
G
F
F
F
P
Hard and rather brittle
G
F
P
VG
VG
VG
P
G
G
G
G
Hard
G
G
VG
G
G-F
G
G
G
G
F
P
-
Hardand tough
VG
VG
VG
VG
G-F
G
VG
G
VG
do
do
VG
VG
VG
VG
G-F
P
G
VG
VG
do
do
G
G
G
G
F
G-P
G-P
G-F
VG-P
resin mortars/ fumae~resin mortars b) Cashew nutshell liquid resin c) mother resin mortars NOTE -
Oils and Fats
Resistance to Temperature
(3) 1:3
cement mortar ii)
9 Vege-
VG = Very good; G = Good; F = Fair; P = Poor; VP = Very
poor.
205
(14)
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 3.2.3.3 Metal grids are frequently used as a surface reinforcement to increase the impact resistance. The grids may be of cast iron or steel and hexagonal or square mesh. The usual matrix into which they are laid may be either granolithic concrete (see Part 2) or cement rubber latex. The grid may be supplied either as a roll of interlocking metal trips from which a grid can be formed or as small units. Mats framed on two sides only are best because this avoids the weak joints between sections.
surface. This fall should be such that liquid spillage on the floor surface will be drained quickly by the shortest route. It is essential to have a waterproof membrane (see 3.3) between the base and the floor finish. The joints in the structural base shall be provided in accordance with the details given in IS 3414 : 1968 covered in Chapter 13. All laitance shall be removed and the surface roughened before laying the floor finish. 3.2.2 Group I This group consists of the following sections:
The top edges of the grid form part of wearing surface of the floor and distribute impact and wear. Because of uneven wear between the grid and the material in which it is embedded such floors may become noisy in use.
a) Loading dock or dispatch dock, and b) Cold storage room. 3.2.2.1 These sections are subject to very heavy impact and abrasion. Spillage of milk and milk products also takes place. Floor finishes recommended for these sections are steel or cast iron tiles or solid steel plates. The floor finish of steel or cast iron tiles may be supported structurally by sub-floor. Solid steel plates may be used as a structural finish supported on a under floor framework.
3.2.4 Group III This group consists of the following sections :
a>Milk
drum tank pit;
b) cl Processing hall, milk pasteurization section; 4 Butter, ice-cream, cheese and ghee section; Milk storage room;
3.2.3 Group II This group consists of the following sections:
e>Milkfilling
a) Milk can reception room,
section;
0 Roller drier room; g) Toned milk room; h) Corridors; and
b) Empty can and bottle reception desk, and c) Empty can and bottle~washing room.
j)
._3.2.3.1 These sections are subjected to very heavy impact and abrasion, but little spillage of milk and milk f products. Floor finishes recommended for these sections are steel or cast iron tiles or metal grids with filling ~materials, such as, cement concrete, cementrubber latex, etc.
Laboratory rooms.
3.2.4.1 Floor finishes in these sections should be resistant to normal impact and wear, to frequent spillage of milk and milk products, to mild acids, and alkalis and good resistance to hot and cold water as the floors are subject to frequent washing. The general choice may be made from the floor finsihes given in 3.2.4.2 to 3.2.4.5.
3.2.3.2 There are two main types of metal tiles used for industrial purposes which are suitable for dairy floors. They withstand impact, abrasion and resist the action of alkalis but are liable to attack by weak acids.
3.2.4.2 Portland cement concrete is slowly attacked by milk and milk products particularly by lactic acids and therefore is not suitable for these sections. However in such areas where ac.idic action is not predominent, cement concrete flooring tiles, as described in Part 2 or stones, such as, Kotah stones may be used.
a) One type, called an anchor plate, is in the form of a shallow tray, made of steel. The wearing surface is punched to give twisted anchors or grips which form the key for the bedding and when bedded in the concrete give a floor which is generally 40 mm thick. A typical illustration is given in Fig. 9.9. It is essential for the success of this type of floor finish that tiles are completely-filled~with concrete. Tiles which are not solid by embedded give continuous trouble because the steel is not strong enough to bridge hollow places and is bent under traffic.
3.2.4.3 Acid and alkali resistant stones laid with phenolic type resin mortar (as per Part 4) for bedding and jointing
b) Another type of tile is called honeycomb cast iron tile. These types of tiles are manufactured with a taper in honeycomb for better grip with concrete. A typical illustration of such a tile is shown in Fig. 9.10.
Sandstones of highly siliceous and compact variety containing low quantity of aluminium oxide, calcium oxide and magnesium oxide, etc, have good acid and alkali resisting quality. Such stones are found in places like Dholpur, Gwalior, Rewa, Cuddapah and Mandana, etc. The stones may be tested for acid resistance in accordance with methods of test described in
206
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 IS 4457 : 1982. However a maximum of 4 percent weight loss during acid treatment may be accepted as adequate acid resistance for the purpose ofdairy floors. These floors give long life but become slippery in due course and hence would require periodical roughening.
such as, water-tightness and resistance to oil. The techniques of mixing and laying is different than that of ordinary concrete and therefore advice of an expert, would be required when using these floor finishes. NOTE - The latex normally takes the form of dispersion in water of natural rubber latex, but for a special circumstance, for example, for oil resistance, synthetic rubber may be used,
3.2.4.4 Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles or acid resistant bricks
4 The latex is stabilized
against premature coagulation. It should~not contain vulcanizing ingredients. If these are required they should be incorporated at the time of preparing the mixture.
Vitreous ceramic tiles (IS 4457 : 1982) or acid resistant bricks (IS 4860 : 1968) could be used for floor finish. These tiles and bricks could provide over a long period, a good resistance against acidic conditions provided by milk and milk products. These materials would also offer adequate resistance against the mild alkaline conditions provided by washing soaps, detergents, etc.
b) The emulsion is diluted with water as required and is then mixed with cement and aggregate to form a mix of the desired rubber latex content. The proportion of the rubber latex used varies 8 to 25 percent by weight of the total mix.
4 The life of a good quality brick or tile floor is largely determined by the material used for bedding and jointing and to some extent by~the width of the joints. Hence careful selection shall be made in the choice of bedding and jointing mortar, and the thickness of the joints. Whatever be the choice of mortars these should necessarily show adequate strength when tested according to IS 4456 (Part 1 or 2) : 1967 as appropriate.
3.2.5 Group IV This group consists of the following
:
a) Boiler room, b) Refrigeration
room,
c) Stores and godowns, and d) Workshops.
b) For bedding and jointing mortars, selections may be made from the following : 1) Chemical resistant resin type of mortars [see IS 4832 (Part 2) : 1969 and also Part 4 of this Chapter], 2) Rubber latex cement mortars, and 3) Supersulphated cement (see IS 6909 : 1990) or Portland blast furnace slag cement (see IS 455 : 1989).
3.2.5.1 These sections require good wear resistance and occassionally resistance to alkalis and very mild acidic conditions. 3.2.5.2 The choice of floor finishes for these sections may be made from: a) Granolithic cement concrete to IS 549 1 : 1969 (see Part 2)
c>Among
the resin based chemical resistant mortars, epoxy resins and phenol formaldehyde type [see IS 4832 (Part 2) : 19691 are quite suitable as joint mortar.
b) Power compacted concrete grade Ml50 with iron chippings mixed with the aggregates, or
d) Sodiumsilicate
or potassium silicate and resistant mortars [see IS 4832 (Part 1) : 19691 although have good properties under dry conditions, are not suitable as jointing mortars in these sections of the dairies as these mortars are slowly attacked by cold water and rapidly by hot water. However, these may be used as bedding mortars in conjunction with resin type mortar. For ~properties of these mortars see Table 9.9.
3.2.4.5 Jointless cement - latex rubber$nish This is prepared from a mixture of rubber latex or synthetic rubber and portland cement or portland slag cement. The resistance of these mixes to milk and milk p&duct is generally much higher than that of cortiponding mixes without latex. The choice of type of latex will also determine the preporties of the floor,
c) Hydraulic pressed cement concerete tiles to IS 1237 : 1980 (see Part 2). 3.2.5.3 Wherever slippery conditions prevail, cement concrete tiles with chequered surface finish would be suitable. Where in-situ concrete is provided and nonslip surface finish is desired, a hard abrasive material, such as, silicone carbide or aluminium oxide may be sprinkled evenly on the concrete surface at the rate of 2 kg/m2 and worked into the surface by power floats and finallyby steel trowelling. Iron particles may also be used in the same way to increase the wear resistance of the surface. 3.2.6 Group V This group consists of chemical stores for storage of concentrated acid and other chemicals. Cermaic unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles conforming to IS 4457 : 1982 or acid resistant bricks conforming to IS 4860 : 1968 may be used.
207
-7
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
FIG. 9.9 -ILLUSTRATION OFONE OF THE TYPICAL STEEL FLOORING TILESFORDAIRYFLOORS 3.3 Waterproof
Membrane
for Dairy Floors
3.3.1 The floor finish of any section ‘of the dairy should necessarily prevent the leakage of effluents to the base concrete. To install a permeable floor finish is dangerous as the point of attack is not visible. Even more dangerous than the attack of concrete is the possibility of corrosion of reinforcement in a suspended floor. A water tight membrane shall therefore be provided. This membrane should be resistant to all mild acids and alkalis. Bitumen mastic laid on saturated bitumen felt to IS 1322 : 1993 or fibre glass based saturated bitumen felt (see IS 7193 : 1974) can be considered. Chapter 12 details the membrane treatment based on IS 1196 : 1978.
3.4.2 There are three drainage as below:
methods
of arranging
the
a) The floor finish may slope from each of the side walls into centre channel which runs along the length of the building or from the centre of the floor to the side of wall channels. b) The floor finish may be laid in bays with channels across the width of the building. c) The floor may be divided into a series of rectangular troughs each with a central drain.
3.4 Drainage in Dairies
3.4.3 The drains should be open channel covered by a grid, discharging into an ordinary closed drain. The edges and corners of the floors and drains should be rounded off to prevent dirt from harbouring there.
3.4.1 A slope of 1 in 80 is adequate if the floor finish is smooth and even and little spillage. A slope of 1 in 40 would be required if the floor finish is rough with much spillage.
3.4.4 The most suitable material for the drains is chemically resistant salt glazed pipes to IS 651 : 1992 and similar chemical resistant resin mortar.
!-1
-----L
\
.
I J, /
SP 62 (S & T) .: 1997
TERRAZZO
FINISH
SCREED TOP LAYER INSIDE HOLLOWS
UME CONCRETE
ENLARGEDSECTION
YY
C-
III
.
III
,
tlr
f?ARl PLAN OF GRID FLOOR F1o.9.10 ILLUSTRATIONOFONEOFTHETYPICALHONEYCOMBCASTIRONTILES 3.5 Maintenance
4.2 Thickness
of Dairy Floors
a>The
The total thickness to which bitumen mastic should be laid shall be between 20 mm to 25 mm as specified.
floors should be scrubbed several times a day to remove milk waste and grit which not only causes insanitary conditions but also is detrimental to the floor finish.
4.3 Preparatory
4.3.1 Preparation of Base
b) Use of straight soaps is not recommended since
The base on which the bitumen mastic is to be laid shall be able to receive the mastic and to sustain the anticipated load on it.
they tend to precipitate insoluole salts if the water is hard or acidic or alkaline, resulting in slippery floors. Detergents may be used; they need only to be sprinkled. Scrubbing with machines shall be followed with rinsing.
The base shall have an even and dry surface which has been roughened with stiff broom or wire or coir brush and should be free from ridges and hollows. The base may be provided with a suitable slope for drainage.
c) Use drip trays under machines to limit areas of spillage of milk. 4 BITUMEN
MASTIC
FLOORING
Work
4.4 Laying
FOR LPG
4.1 General Bitumen mastic is jointless and impervious to the transmission of moisture. The anticipated service conditions for bitumen mastic flooring for hydrocarbon services shall be as given in IS 13026 : 1991, which is a specification for bitumen mastic for flooring for industries handling LPG and other hydrocarbon products. The material shall be anti-static and electrical conducting grade (see IS 8374 : 1977).
4.4.1 The molten mastic shall be carried in flat mortar pans. The pans are sprinkled -with lime stone dust, to prevent sticking of mastic. Grease or oil shall not be used. 4.4.2 The mastic should be laid in bays in one or more layers. The specified thickness shall be maintained. The multi-layered work should be treated in the same manner as a single layer mastic. Bubbles formed during laying should be punctured and the area rectified while mastic is hot.
209
--
L-
.
._
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 4.4.3 The laid surface shall be protected from damage due to movement of heavy loads, spillages, etc during laying. The mastic shall not be opened to traffic until the material has cooled down to ambient temperature.
PART 4 SPECIAL
4.4.4 Damaged areas shall be cut into rectangular strips and replaced with a new mastic. Blow lamp techniques to remove damaged layersare preferred. 4.4.5 Bitumen mastic flooring requires little maintenance. Dirt and dust shall be rehoved periodically.
FLOORS AND FLOOR COVERINGS
1 GENERAL
water or moisture by periodic applications polish or oil at regular intervals.
1.1 The following Indian Standards cover the use of various types of special floors and floor coverings:
Magnesium oxychloride flooring should not be used in any situation where it would be exposed to damp conditions for long periods, unless other suitable protective measures are taken; it should not be used in places where it will be exposed to acids or salts continuously.
a>Mangensium
oxychloride composition floors IS 658 : 1982
b) Bitumen mastic flooring -IS
c>Rubber
floors -IS
4 Linoleum floors -IS
1196 : 1978
1197 : 1970
2.2 Types
1198 : 1982
4
e>Chemical
resistant mortar, Silicate type 4441 : 1980
IS
Chemical resistant mortar, Sulphur type 4442 : 1980
IS
ia Chemical
resistant 4443 : 1980
mortar, Resin type -
Flexible PVC sheet and tile flooring -IS 1969
k) Parquet flooring -IS
IS
53 18 :
5389 : 1969 and IS 9472 :
(Trowel
Finish)
-
c)
Non-spark Static Discharging Floor (Trowel or Ground Finish) - This type of floor is
2.1 General
210
Floor
Heavy Duty Floor(Trowe1
OXYCHLORIDE FLOORS
Magnesium oxycholoride composition consisting of ~mixture of calcined filler and pigments provides a good floor if proper ingredients are mixed in correct proportions and skilled labour is employed in laying the floor. Too wet a mix with excess magnesium chloride results in sweating of the floor surface. Mineral oils, greases or vegetable oils do not affect the floor. The flooring is not seriously affected by alkalis, but strong alkalis, such as, soda or harsh cleaning agents tend to attack the protective dressing and thus exposing the flooring to action of water. However, the finished floor tends to be protected from excessive
Purpose
b)
1980 2 MAGNESIUM COMPOSITION
General
This type of floor shall contain an adequate amount of calcined magnensite, fillers such as, talc, saw dust and asbestos; and fine aggregates which with magnesium chloride of suitable strength make a product which may be trowelled to a dense smooth glossy finish. The composition may be applied monolithically. It has wearing properties which make it adaptable for service conditions in offices, ship decking, railway carriages, hospital rooms and wards, residential and industrial floors.
h) Epoxy resin floor toppings - IS 463 1 : 1986
9
of wax-
Finish) -This type is closely related to the general purpose floor. The principal difference is that the quantity of fillers used is minimum and theproportion of aggregates is increased, the aggregates being of hardness similar to crushed granite. It is adapted for special service conditions in industrial and restaurant kitchens, light industrial plants, corridors, lobbies and business establishment having large usage.
similar to heavy duty floor except that the aggregates used are not siliceous and do not contain materials which will produce a spark when struck with any object. This type of floor is suitable for hospital operation theatre, ammunition and chemical plants or other areas subject to explosion hazards.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Non-slip Floor (General Purpose) - This type of floor is similar to heavy duty floor except that certain proportion ofthe aggregates is of abrasive type. This floor is specially adaptable to areas, such as, entrance lobbies, ramps, stair treads, landings, etc.
3)
Mosaic or Terrazzo Floor (Ground Finish) The matrix in this case is the same as in general purpose, non-sparking or non-slip floors but the aggregate used is marble chips with each 100 kg of the dry mix, 125 to 200 kg of coarse aggregate is used. The-floor is adaptable for places where a highly decorative effect coupled with wear resistance is required.
2.4 Properties of MagnesiumOxychloride
oxide floor should not be exposed to action of sea water; and is not recommeneded where it may be exposed to high humidity or damp conditions; damp proof course should be incorporated if the base is in direct contact with the ground.
b) Floor finish should be sel&ted by sample size of 300 mm x 300 mm x 20 mm which finished work should conform in hardness (as per IS 658 : 1982) near to colour, texture, number and thickness of coats.
the maximum a light-weight floors mensub-types are
cl Resistance to Checmical Attack 1) The floor finish, if not adequately
base coat, and coat.
2.3 Materials
4 All the materials used in the manufacture of magnesium oxychloride floor finish should comply with IS 657 : 1982. The test limits for calcined magnesite in this standard are based on a notional mix of calcined magnesite and saw dust gauged with magnesium chloride and do not obviate the need to test the floor finishing mixes in order to check compliance with IS 658 : 1982. Materials for magnesium oxyflouride composition floors shall be supplied in two parts, namely, dry mix and magnesium chloride.
b) Dry Mix 1) Dry mixfor all types offloors - The dry
2)
Floars
a>Magnesium
Industrial Granolithic Floor - This type of floor is essentially the same as mosaic or terrazzo floor in which the matrix is the same as in the heavy duty floor and the coarse aggregate consists of granite chips or similar hard stone chips. With each 100 kg of dry mix, 200 to 225 kg of coarse aggregate is used. This type of floor is recommended for the most severe and abrasive service conditions. Base Coat - This type has resilience and is employed as base for the types of oxychltde tioned in 2.2 (a) to (f). Two generally employed : Sub-type 1 - General purpose Sub-type 2 - Heavy duty base
from substances capable of producing a spark when struck or abraded with a steel tool. Dry mix for non-slip floor - About 35 percent by weight of the aggregates used in the dry mix for non-slip floors shall consist of abrasive aggregates which shall be of non-rusting natural (emery) or manufactured (fused alumina) product, the particles of which are of irregular shape and of slightly open texture.
mix shall consist of an intimately mixed composition of dry ingredients. If talc is used as a filler it shall not exceed 5 percent by weight of dry mix. Dry mix for non-spark static discharge floors - The dry mix for non-spark static discahrging floor shall contain only such materials in its composition which are free
211
protected by oiling or waxing gradually disintegrates under continuous exposure to water. 2) The floor finish is not affected by alkalis but strong alkalis such as soda or harsh cleaning agents attack the protective dressing and expose the floor finish to the action of water. The floor finish is subject to attack by 3) acids. Adequate protection against occasional contact with dilute acids may be obtained by oiling or waxing. 4) The floor finish is subject to attack by continuous exposure to salts; under normal conditions of use, some protection may be obtained by oiling or waxing. 5) It should not be slippery when treated as described in 2.5. Special non-slip surfaces may be obtained by incorporating abrasive grit in the floor finish. of magnesium oxychloride 6) Sweating floor finish is characterised by beads of magnesium chloride solution forming on the surface in humid atmospheres and is not merely the result of the condensation of moisture on a cold surface. The tendency to sweat is inherent in the material, since magnesium chloride takes up readily moisture from damp air.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 7) If the ingredient of the floor finsih mixture comply with IS 657 : 1982, there should be little tendency towards efflorescence. 8) The thickness of floor finish shall be not less than 10 mm. of the floor finish mixes 9) Contamination with free lime tends to cause expansion. The floor finish is likely to crack or lift~if laid on light weight concrete base or on a dense screed which is not firmly bonded to the base. Coves and skirtings can be formed with 10) magnesium oxychloride finishing material. Contact between the oxychloride mix and the wall plaster should be avoided by the use of an intervening fillet of wood or other suitable material. A sand cement rendering on the wall surface is desirable as a backing. 11) Metalwork, such as, partitions, or gas, water and electrical services in contact witha magnesium~oxychloride floor finish is liable to corrode and should be isolated from the floor finish, by not less than 25 mm of untracked dense concrete or protected by a coating of bitumen or coaltar composition or by a suitable material (see 2.8).
2.5.2 Preparation
of Floor Finish Mixture
Magnesium chloride both before and after it is dissolved should not be allowed to came into contact with any floors and walls. The solid chloride should be broken up and dissolved in water tight vessel by covering the same with clean water, that is, clean and free from deleterious acids, alkalis, salts or organic material and stirring the same from time to time. The solution should be allowed to stand over night so that the residue, dust, impurities, etc, may settle to the bottom. The clean concentrated solution shall be well stirred after each dilution. The solution shall be prepared sufficiently early so that it is cooled to room temperature before use. The specific gravity of the solution should be maintained at the value selected from the table given below. This value will depend on the type given of work, the nature of the base and ambient and temperature conditions. Floor Finish Mix
Single coat and -top coat
2.5 Application 2.5.1 Preparation
floor finish, such as, dovetailed wooden battens or galvanized wire netting firmly screwed to the base at approximately 200 mm centre. An equal number of galvanized clout nails should be used at 200 mm centres and be left proud of the base.
Baume’ (BE) Scale
Specific Gravity
20’ to 24’
1.16 to 1.20
Bottom coat, 18’ to 20’ coves and skirtings
1.14 to 1.16
of the Base
The base shall be rigid, sound, free from rising damp and not unduly porous. Highly absorbent materials, such as, pumice concrete, breeze or clinker concrete and aerated concrete shall not be used unless a layer of damp-proof course is laid between the base and the main floor.
a>New
cement concrete base - The base shall be true and even and slightly coarsened by stiff brush or broom. A steel trowel finish is not desirable. The cover to steel of base concrete shall be not less than 25 mm, since the reinforcement would be damaged by magnesium oxychloride compound. New concrete should age for 28 days before receiving the flooring. No lime admixture shall be allowed in concrete.
2.5.3 Proportions
of Dry Materials
The proportions of dry materials may be varied within certain limits in order that the properties of the finished product may be suited to the conditions of use. Proportions shall be by weight and the dry material should be thoroughly mixed by machine.
a>Proportion
of chloride solutionA strong floor finishing material may be formed by addition of only sufficient magnesium chloride solution to make the dry mixed materials damp. For single coat and top coat some additional solution is usually required to enable the mix to be placed and brought to a smooth finish. The extra chloride does not improve the strength of the mixture and the use of excessive amount will have harmful effects.
b) Existing concrete base -
The existing concrete base should be roughened to a suitable degree by tooth chisling, picking or by any other suitable process before oxychloride composition is laid. Absorption may be checked and if porous screed may be spread on the base.
b). The amount of solution required for a given weight of dry mix cannot be stated accurately; however, the following guidelines may be used: 1) Bottom coatfloorfinish mixes - Bottom coat finish mixes should be gauged to a
C) Timber base -
A suitable mechanical key should be provided between timber base and
212
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
2)
3)
2.54
damp but not plastic consistency; just sufficient solution should be used to enable the mix to bind together when thoroughly compacted by tamping. As a guide, a mix from which liquid can be squeezed by hand should be considered as suitable. Bottom coat mixes for coves and skirtin& - The mixes should be gauged to a consistency just sufficiently plastic to allow the mix to be spread on the wall. Single coat and top coat mixes - These mixes should be gauged with no more solution than is needed to produce a stiff mix which is just sufficiently plastic to be spread with a trowel.
3) 4)
2.5.6 Curing Rapid drying of floor shall be avoided~at least for 24 h after laying the floor. It should be allowed to set and harden at least for 3 days before opening it to traffic. It should not be allowed for heavy traffic for some weeks till it is fully dried and hardened. During hardening it should not be exposed to sun or rain.
Final Mixing
2.5.7 Sulfate
The mixing of the chloride solution with the dry mix shall be done in a containerand not on the floor. The quantity of mix should be sufficient to be laid in one batch before it sets; no solution should be added during laying. If the mix is too stiff it should be discarded. 2.55
Treatment
The floor finish should be washed with clean warm water changed frequently and wiped dry at regular intervals until the effloroscence has ceased. At this stage the finish may be treated with a mixture of linseed oil (double boiled) (-see IS 77 : 1977) and turpentine (see IS 533 : 1973) in equal volumes or with a suitable wax or drying oil. For mottled floor finish, the finish should be laid in two coat work.
Laying the Floor Finish
a>Size
of bay will depend on the temperature conditions generally; the controlling factor would be the time taken to obtain adequate compaction of the floor finish.
2.6 Testing Testing shall be carried out on samples mixes from three different parts of the vessel. The tests should be done as per IS 658 : 1982.
b) Joints shall be provided if the floor dimensions are more than 5 m in either direction. The joints may be mastic insertions or strips of hardwood, vulcanite, non-ferrous metal or other suitable material, 5 mm wide, bedded flush with the surface of the flooring material. These joints should coincide with the joints of the base, if any.
c>The
Each coat should be throughly compacted ensuring no formation of iaitance. When the top coat has hardened sufficiently, its surface shall be felt finished after trowelling. Scraping shall be undertaken on ornamental work such as mottled finishes.
2.7 Maintenance The floor surface shall be cleaned with warm water only. A mild house soap free from alkali may be used occassionally; but strong household cleaning powders, soda, etc, should not be used.
concrete base should be dampened before laying; excessive flooding should be avoided. The dampening should be done either with a solution of magnesium chloride which should not be weaker than 12’ BE nor stronger than 14’ BE; or a wash composed of a 14’ BE magnesium chloride solution and magnesia mixed to the consistence of cream and brushed over the base. 1) If a thickness of 40 mm or more is required,~additional coats may be laid, each of which should not be more than 20 mm thick. 2) For skirting on sand cement rendering, the mix may be applied in a single-coat not less than 5 mm thick; then the backing is unrendered. The mix should be applied in two coats to a total thickness of not less than 15 mm.
2.8 Protection of Metal -Work Metal work may receive anti-corrosive treatment; suitable materials are bituminous coaltar composition with or without added fillers, intended for hot application. For cold application a solution of bitumen or of coaltar in a volatile solvent with or without added fillers but excluding bituminous paipts with drying oils may be used. 3 BITUMEN
MASTIC
FLOORING
3.1 General Bitumen mastic is a dustless, odourless, jointless flooring and impervious to the transmission of moisture, either in liquid or vapour form. The surface is easily cleaned, noiseless under traffic conditions and resilient. While it may carry heavy loads, application of concentrated point loads may cause indentation. Bitumen mastic is, therefore, suitable for a variety of
213
--
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 load over it. The-base shall be true, even and dry surface which has been slightly roughened by means of a stiff broom or wire brush and should be free from ridges and hollows. A steel trowelled finish is not desirable. The levels of the base should be such that the specified thickness of bitumen mastic may be applied uniformly.
uses under a wide range of climatic and service conditions, except as detailed below: a) The surface of bitumen mastic is liable to become gradually sofetened by prolonged contact with greases, fats and oils. Contamination with such materials shall~be avoided. b) Susceptibility of bitumen mastic floor finishes to chemical attackis given in Table 9.10.
b) The total thickness to which bitumen mastic should be laid depends on the traffic conditions to which the floor will be subjected.
Table 9.10 Susceptibility of Bitumen Mastic Floor Finishes to Chemical Attack (Clause 3.1) Sl No.
Agency
Susceptibility
i) Acids and vegetable extracts
ii) Alcoholic liquors
iii) Alkalis
iv) Brine (sodium and calcium chroide) and sulphate salts v) Complex industrial liquors vi) Radio active materials vii) Dairy products and milk
viii) Mineral, animal and vegetable oils, fats and greases ix) Sugar syrup, sugar
x) Water
coat, but two-coat work may be used depending on the thickness of floor finish. As a general guide the thickness given below are recommended.
to Attack
Normal grades subject to attack by acids; special grades can withstand attack by dilute solutions Normal grades are subject to attack by certain alocholic liquors. Special grades may be used in breweries and distilleries Not affected by low concentration alcoholic solutions Alcoholic solutions above 38’C will affect Unaffected under normal circumstances Conduct tests to choose the grade of bitumen mastic Special grades of bitumen be used
Unaffected by low concentration sugar solutions syrup, molasses, etc, will affect at all temperatures Unaffected unless the water is hot, for which high temperature mastic may be used
a) Bitumen mastic shall conform to the requirements given in IS 1195 : 1978. b) Special types of metal armouring may be incorporated in bitumen mastic flooring for industrial purposes to increase resistance to abrasion (see Part 3). Work
3.3.1 Base a) The base shall be adequately strong to receive the bitumen mastic and to carry the anticipated
Light duty
15 mm to 20 mm thick
Medium duty
20 mm to 25 mm-thick
Heavy duty
25 mm to 30 mm thick
4 There may be a siope of not less than 1 in 75, in the base, if the finished floor is likely to have water or industrial liquors upon it. Channels should be provided to ensure adequate drainage.
d The base may be treated in any of the following ways: 1) A screed bed of cement concrete or lime concrete not less than 25 mm thick; 2) An isolation membrane or underlay (see 3.3.2 and 3.3.3); or 3) On metal floors, a thin priming coat of bitumen paint applied over a clean and dry surface. The paint should be dry before the mastic is laid.
Normal grade where hygenic conditions are maintained (see Part3) Subject to attack
3.2 Materials
3.3 Preparatory
c) Usually bitumen mastic should be laid in one-
3.3.2 Isolqting Membrane An isolating membrane conforming to IS 1322 : 1993 is normally used where bitumen mastic up to 20 mm in thickness is laid where the base is in direct contact with the ground; glass fibre feli (see IS 7193 : 1974) may be used as an alternative. Thickness of bitumen mastic exceeding 20 mm on new concrete is usually laid without fan isolating ~membrane. Isolating membranes should be laid loose. 3.3.3 Underlay The underlay, when required, should be laid loose. 3.3.4 Remelting permitted.
of broken bitumen mastic blocks is
3.4 Laying 3.4.1 When the material is sufficiently molten to be workable, it should be carried in flat mortar pans, to 214
SP62(S&T):l!N7 the-point of laying. To prevent sticking of mastic to the pans, inorganic dust may be sprinkled on the pans.
buses and ships. It provides a resilient and noise-free floor surface. The life of rubber floor is related to its thickness, since it~is not possible to be specific about wear resistance. Provision of mats will reduce the amount of abrasive grit carried to the floor. The durability of rubber floor is increased if the material is laid correctly and maintained carefully. IS 809:1992 lays down the requirements for rubber flooring materials both in sheet and tile form.
3.4.2 Bitumen mastic should be generally laid in bays of one coat. It should be spread to the specified thickness by means of hand tools. Bitumen mastic should then be floated to a uniformly level surface by a heavy wooden float and should be free from roughness and -imperfection. If ‘blowing’ occurs, the bubbles should be punctured and the area affected shall be made good while the mastic is still hot.
Flooring made of natural rubber is not recommended in situations where it may came into contact with fat, grease, oil or petrol, as these substances may cause swelling, softening or other deterioration. To meet such situations, flooring made from various kinds of synthetic rubber may be utilized.
Two-coat of single-coat work, but care should be taken to arrange that the joints in successive layers are staggered. ~3.4.3 Sulfate
Fmish
Surface finish could be either matt finish or polished finish, or as desired.
4.2 Preparatory
4.2.1 Sub-jloor and Base
Immediately after laying, the bitumen mastic shall be protected from damage till it cools to the surrounding temperature. Bitumen mastic should be allowed for traffic after the material has cooled. Frequent polishing, should be avoided as it will become slippery.
a) New concrete floors - In the case of newlylaid concrete floors in contact with the ground, a damp-proof membrane or a bitumen mastic layer shall be incorporated ln the thickness of the floor and it shall be properly joined with the damp-proof course in the walls. Special precautions, such as, tanking may be necessary against water pressure and to prevent the entry of moisture into floorsbelow ground level.
3.4.4 Bedding Special care shall be taken to effect proper bond between new and old sections of work. The contact edges of the previously laid work should be cleaned and warmed by additional applications of hot mastic. This procedure also should be adopted for joints between the floor finish and skirts and coves or fillets.
b) Existing~concretefloors
- If the floor surface is not smooth and true, it shall be well hacked to provide key for the screeding. It shall then be brought to an even surface with a screeded bed at least 25 mm thick. Concrete floors which are in contact with the ground but have been damp-proofed shall be covered with a bed of at least 15 mm thick bitumen mastic conforming to IS 1195 : 1978. Over the-bitumen mastic 40 mm thick cement concrete shall be laid.
3.4.5 Skirtings should be executed in not less than two-coats particular care being taken td ensure proper adhesion of~the first coat to the base. Special care shall be taken at external angles to ensure the full thickness of material. 3.4.6 Maintenance Bitumen mastic surface requires relatively tanance. Superficial dirt may normally be washing with warm water and suitable ‘After the dirt is removed, the floor should with clean water.
little mainremoved by detergents. be mopped
cl New timber floor -
3.4.7 Repairs The correct method, to remove damaged area, is to place hot mastic around, and over the area concerned and after this has sofetened the area concerned, it should be cut away and made good. 4 RUBBER
Work
Timber floors shall be constructed with tongued and grooved boarding and shall be adequately ventilated to prevent dry set. There should not be any gap between the planks which may permit air to penetrate from bottom and affect the bonding of the rubber flooring material with the timber base. Where plywood is used as a base, it shall be of the moistureproof grade.
4 Existing timberfloors
FLOORS
4.1 General Rubber floor coverings are mainly suitable for use in domestic buildings and those of a non-industrial character, such as, schools, hospitals, offices, where traffic is expected to be essentially pedestrian and also in
215
- Damaged and worn floors should be repaired and brought to an even and smooth surface, an underlay also may be used.
e>Metal
floors - The surface of metal floors shall be smooth. Screws, bolts, etc, used in the flooring shall be of counter sunk type. When
! I / j/: P^
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
f) The tiles should be laid in exactly the same
they project above the surface, the metal floor shall be covered with a base bringing the floor on level before the rubber flooring is laid on. The metal floors should be rust free and a rust proof coating should be ~applied before the rubber flooring is laid. 4.2.2
Underlay
An underlay shall be used where the base is of timber. It may also be used when it is necessary to make the flooring quieter, warmer and more resilient. Underlay shall be either tibre-based saturated bitumen felt (Type I) conforming to IS 1322 : 1993 or other suitable material.
s>
The underlay shall be butt jointed and so laid that the joints are at 45’ to the principal joints in the rubber flooring. The underlay shall be secured by a suitable adhesive except on a timber base in which case it may be nailed. 4.3 Laying and Fixing of Rubber Flooring
4 The sub-floor shall be cleaned with dry cloth.
.
b) The lay out of the rubber flooring shall be first laid on the sub-floor to be covered and should be marked with guidelines. The rubber flooring shall be first laid for trial without using the adhesive according to the layout.
cl The adhesive shall then be applied by using a notched trowel, to the sub-floor and to the backside of the rubber sheet or tile flooring. When set sufficiently for laying, the adhesive will be tacky to touch, but will not mark fingers. In general, the adhesive will set in about half an hour; but it should not be left for too long a period as the adhesive properties will be lost owing to dust film and other causes. It is preferable to avoid laying the flooring under high humidity conditions so as to prevent condensation. The area of adhesive to be spread depends on the local circumstances; in a small room the area can be covered at one stretch.
manner as the sheet. Any adhesive contaminating the face of the rubber shall be removed as the work proceeds within 24 h. A minimum period of 24 h shall be allowed for proper development of bond and no traffic should be allowed. Thereafter the flooring shall be cleaned with a wet cloth, soaked in warm soap solution (two spoons of soap in 5 1 of warm water) . In case of stairs, where rubber nosings are to be laid as separate units and are of heavier gauge, the difference in thickness shall be made up in design, or by screed or with plywood or ~bitumen mastic. Rubber in sheet form is not used for coves and skirtings; suitably moulded units should be used. h) Rubber shall not be cleaned by softsoaps, soaps containing _essential oils, soaps with free alkalis, pastes or powders containing coarse abrasives, scrubbing brushes or petrol benzine, naptha and similar solvents. j> A wax-polish shall be used for polishing rubber floors; polishes containing organic solvents shall not be used.
5 LINOLEUM
FLOORS
5.1 General Linoleum provides a satisfactory floor for residential and public buildings, railway coaches, ships, etc. It is also suitable for most type of non-industrial floors. In light industry, such as, electronic industry linoleum may be used, as the risk of damage by cutting, to which linoleum is vulnerable, is small. However, if it gets wet, it expands and eventually rots. 5.1.1 Linoleum is not suitable for locations subjected to rising damp, external exposure, exposure to traffic with indentations from heels or static loads, and where high polish is required because it becomes slippery. 5.2 Materials a) Flooring material shall conform 1992. b) Underlay shall be as below:
4 When the adhesive is tack free, the rubber
For timber sub-floors
flooring sheet shall be carefully taken and placed in position from one end onwards slowly so that air will be completely squeezed out between the sheet and the background surface. Then the sheet shall be pressed with suitable roller to develop proper contact with the subfloor. The next sheet with it backside applied with adhesive shall be laid edge to edge with the sheet already laid so that there is a minimum gap between joints.
-
For concrete sub-floors
to IS 653 :
Plywood at least 4 mm thick Hardboard thick
at least 3 mm
-
Fibrebased bitumen felt at least 1 mm thick, to IS 1322 : 1993
-
Bitumen mastic to IS 1195 : 1978
-
Bitumen to IS 1580 : 1991. c) Adhesives shall be as per recommendations of the manufacturer.
e) Alignment
should be checked and if not perfect, the sheets may be trimmed.
216
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 5.3 Preparatory 53.1
Work
When laid on concrete floors it is desirable to prime the back of linoleum with the adhesive. Cork tiles should be fixed with the adhesive.
Sub-floor
Sub-floors should be thoroughly dry before laying of linoleum since entrapped moisture cannot escape. It should also be even to ensure thorough bonding with the linoleum.
Linoleum coving and skirting shall be formed from the sheet material on the job in grades up to 3.2 mm thick. Normally 4.5 and 3.2 mm thick linoleum can be used for commercial and institutional buildings respectively; for domestic buildings 1.6 mm thick linoleum may be used.
Timber sub-floors - A timber sub-floor should be sound, rigid and dry. It should be well ventilated to discourage fungal attack. In case of new construction, tongued and grooved boarding shall be used. All nails shall be punched down and timber floor made even.
d) The surface, after cleaning of all debris, etc,
In existing floors, when it is not possible to obtain an even surface, use of diagonal boarding is recommended, after removing and replacing badly affected boarding; alternatively plywood may be used to get an even surface. be finished as mentioned in Part 2, to give an even and dry surface. Rising damp may be protected by using bitumen mastic, 15 mm thick, conforming to IS 1196 : 1978 as described in 3. -
e) All surfaces shall be swept clean and washed with a cloth dampened with an aqueous solution of neutral detergent. 6 EPOXY RESIN FLOOR TOPPINGS
b) Concrete sub-floor - Concrete sub-floor may
c>Other sub-floors
may be wax-polished or a coat of ~emulsion polish may be applied. No traffic shall be permitted till the completion of all related works.
They should be dry and
even. 5.4 Laying
4 Linoleum should be stored at room temperature of not less than 20°C for at least 48 h before unrolling; after unrolling, it shrinks in length and expands in width. When two widths of linoleum are to meet, they shall be left with an overlap until the expansion has stopped and then cut to fit.
b) The linoleum should be laid either loose or fixed to the sub-floor by means of suitable adhesives. Any priming coat should be allowed to dry before the adhesive is spread. Adhesives should be spread evenly as per manufacturers’ instructions. Naked lights should be avoided, if the adhesives having low flash solvent (containing petroleum and naphtha) are used. The area shall be well ventilated and smoking shall be prohibited.
6.1 General Epoxy resins are suitable for use on industrial floors, such as, in chemical plants manufacturing fertilizers, pharmaceuticals, acids and solvents, in dairy industry, tanneries, breweries, garages, service stations, warehouses, metal plating and pickling areas. They have good qualities of adhesion and chemical resistance, hardness, abrasion resistance; physical properties, such as, compressive, impact and flexural strength; neglegible shrinkage, dimensional stability and adhesion to cured concrete, metals and other surfaces. 6.2 Materials
a>Epoxy
resin shall conform to IS 9197 : 1979,
b) Hardeness shall conform to IS 9197 : 1979,
c>Accelerator
4 4 f)
shall conform to IS 9197 : 1979, Plasticizers and non-reactive diluents shall conform to IS 9197 : 1979, Liquid coal tar shall conform to IS 9197 : 1979, and Aggregates shall conform to IS 9 197 : 1979.
6.3 Types of Epoxy Resin Toppings There are two types of epoxy resin floor toppings:
a>Trowel Type -
cl The underlay shall be fixed to the sub-floor in such a way~that a smooth surface is available. The finished underlay shall be cleaned of all dirt and dust, chemicals, paints, etc. The linoleum shall be firmly pressed into the adhesive spread over the underlay. To ensure good bond, the surface can be rolled with a roller of 70 kg weight, washing from centre to the walls. If necessary, sand bags may be placed at some points. 217
This is usually heavily filled with sand or other suitable aggregates and the compound is applied by trowel. Such compounds are often referred to as mortars or screeds.
b) Flow Type -
This is usually a solventless compound containing filler and pigment and the mixture is poured directly on to the surface when the blend will flow and level itself with little assistance to form a smooth continuous coating.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 6.5.2 Application
6.3.1 Terrazzo Floors
a>The blended
epoxy resin mix shall be applied uniformly, over the area prepared, to a uniform thickness.
The Portland cement in conventional terrazzo floors is replaced by epoxy resin binder. Such flooring formulations serve the dual purpose of providing a good appearance and chemical resistance.
b) For some areas where heavily tilled trowelling
6.3.2 Non-skid Floors
compound is to be applied, the prepared area shall be first covered with a tack coat of unfilled resin-hardner mix applied by brush which shall be allowed to cure to a tacky stage.
This type of floor may be prepared by sprinkling a suitable grit on an epoxy resin floor topping when the latter is still in a tacky state.
cl Where heavily filled trowelling compound is
6.3.3 The following minimum thicknesses are recommended : a) Trowel type
-
4 mm for normal use and 6.5 mm in areas of thermal shock and heavy traffic on horizontal surfaces
b) Flow type
-
2mm
c) Terrauofloors
-
10 mm.
6.4 Preparatory
,
d) As mild steel tools are liable to cause stains on light coloured surfaces, it is recommended that stainless steel, chromium on rigid PVC tools should be used after laying of epoxy resin floor toppings.
d After application of the epoxy resin topping, the floor shall be allowed to set without disturbance for a minimum period of 24 h. The floor can be brought to normal use after a period of 7 days at a temperature of 20’ C and above though light traffic may be permitted after 24 h of laying the floor topping. -Below 20°C special hardeners may be used as recommended by the formulator in order to obtain proper setting of the floor topping.
Work
6.4.1 Concrete surfaces shall be properly cured and dried and kept rough. Laitance shall be removed. All cracks and broken areas of an existing base shall be sealed, fresh concrete applied and cured. Grease and oil shall be removed with solvents, such as, acetone or a suitable detergent. The concrete surface shall be even,
f) Expansion joints to coincide with those in the
6.4.2 Mild steel and cast iron surfaces shall be washed with a suitable solvent or detergent solution to remove grease or oil. The surface shall then be sand blasted or abraded with emery cloth, abrasive disc or with wire brushes.
base concrete should be provided in epoxy resin toppings. The expansion joints in the epoxy topping shall be filled with a flexible putty that shows appropriate waterand chemical resistance as recommended by the formulator.
6.5 Laying 6.51
6.5.3 Safety Precautions
Mixing of Epoxy Resin Blend
The mixing shall be carried out at the site as follows :
a>The constituents
required shall be mixed in the correct proportions as specified by the formulator.
b) Unless otherwise specified, the order of addition of the constituents and aggregate.
used, it is advisable to apply a seal coat of unfinished resin to ensure that pores, if any, are sealed adequately.
shall be resin, hardener
cl Aggregates, when required, shall be added to the blend in a mixer in dry condition. d) The duration ~of mixing shall be adequate to ensure thorough mixing; the quantity mixed at one time shall be such that a uniform thickness of epoxy resin topping may be applied over the whole floor.
Epoxy resins cause irritation to persons having sensitive skin. Good ventilation is necessary and the most effective precaution is the use of rubber or polyethelene gloves. It is preferable to wear thin cotton gloves underneath for comfort. Other methods recommended are regular washing hands, arms and face with soap and luke warm water followed by thorough drying with a clean towel and the use of a barrier cream. Splashes on skin should be removed immediately by washing with soap and luke warm water. On no account should a solvent be used for this purpose. 6.5.4 Chemical resistance of epoxy resin flooring mixes to various substances is given in Table 9.11 for general guidance. Table 9.11 shows that systems cured with amines exhibit higher chemical resistance. Polyamide hardeners should be used where floors are
218
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 the floor. Use of powerful oxidizing should be avoided.
exposed to frequent impact stress and fluctuations in temperature. The performance of floor will, however, depend on whether the chemical and mechanical stress occur simultaneously. Variations in temperature would also affect the performance of the floor topping.
agents
b) The resin flooring tend to develop cracks when subjected to quick thermal cycles. Hence frequent use of alternate cold and hot water hosing should be avoided.
6.6 Maintenance
c) Dragging of heavy sharp edged loads shall be avoided since the flooring is liable to scoring.
Very little maintenance is required for epoxy floor toppings. However, the following precautions would prolong the service life of the topping.
d) Spillages of powerful solvents like acetone and trichloroethylene should be drained away quickly.
a) Usual house hold detergents, soap and warm water (up to 60°C) may be used for cleaning
Table 9.11 Chemical Resistance of Epoxy Resin Flooring Mixes (Clause 6.5.4) Substance
Chemical ’
(1) Acetic acid, 5 percent Acetic acid, 10 percent Acetic acid, 50 percent Acetic acid, anhydride Ammonium hydroxide, 10 percent Ammonium hydroxide, 30 percent Alcohols (ethyl alcohols) Aliphatic hydrocarbons (naphtha) Aromatic hydrocarbons (toluene) Beer Blood Boric acid Calcium chloride, 50 percent solution Caustic soda, 10 percent Caustic soda, 50 percent Chlorinated hydro carbons (carbon tetrachloride) Citric acid, 10 percent Cooking fats and oils Ester Ether (ethyl ether) Fats and oils Formaldehyde, 37 percent Glycerine Hydrochloric, 10 percent Hydrochloric, 37 percent Javel water Ketone (acetone) Lactic acid, 10 percent Liquid fuel (petrol or oil) Milk, sour or fresh Nitric acid, 10 percent Nitric acid, SO percent Soaps and detergents Sugar (saturated solution) Sulphuric acid, 10 percent Sulphuric acid, 50 percent Tap water Urine Vegetable oils Water (distilled) NOTE -
S (4) X -
X -
X
-
X
--X --
X -
X X -
--
X
-----
-
X
-
----
-
X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X
at 2O*C Compounds Cured with Polyamide Hardeners
(:J ---
-
Resistance
Compounds Cured with Amine or Amine-Adduct Hardeners
X X
---X --X -----
E = Excellent; G = Good; S = Satisfactory;
(1) X X X
X X X X -
--X --X --
X X P = Poor.
219
-
R -X
-
X -
X X
-
X -
X X X X
X
X
X X
-
X X X -
X
X X -
-
X
X X X X -
(9’) X X
X -
’
X X X X -
-
-
X X X
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 7 FLEXIBLE FLOORING
at the rate of 1.5 kg/mm2 after the concrete has set; or ~bitumen felt conforming to IS 1322 : 1993 may be sandwiched between the two concrete layers. If dampness is expected from surrounding walls, the same treatment may be extended, up to 150 mm above the floor level, over the walls. The basement floor shall be damp proofed as per IS 1609 : 199 1 (see Chapter 12). Before the PVC sheeting is laid ample time shall be allowed for water to dry completely from the concrete floor.
PVC SHEET AND TILE
7.1 -General PVC flooring material manufactured in different patterns to match and suit any decorating scheme is normally used for covering floors from decorative point of view in residential and office buildings and also in railway coaches. The material gives a resilient and non-porous surface which can be easily cleaned with a wet cloth as dust and grime do not penetrate the surface. Since burning cigarette will/damage the neat surface of the PVC sheet, special care should be taken to prevent burning cigarette stumps to come in contact with the PVC flooring material
In new work the finish shall be produced with a trowel. With old concrete~the sub-floor shall be scrapped free of all foreign material and swept clean. The surface shall be kept wet for 24 h by sprinkling water and then a screed topping of 3 mm thickness, shall be provided.
7.2 Materials
a>Flooring
shall comply with IS 3461 : 1980 and IS 3462 : 1986. The thickness depends on service conditions.
4 Metal floors shall be made free from rust and scale by chipping and or vigorous wire brushing and cleaning. All joints shall be ground smooth. Painting and grease shall be removed by caustic soda. Suitable putty compatible with the adhesive shall be used to fill metal surfaces to obtain a smooth and even surface.
b) Underlay for use on concrete sub-floor shall be the screed topping. Underlay for use on an uneven and rough wood sub-floor shall be 3 mm thick BWR grade plywood conforming to IS 303 : 1989.
7.4 Laying
c>Rubber
based adhesives are suitable for fixing PVC sheet and tiles over concrete wood and metal sub-floors. PVA based adhesives may be used for concrete and wood sub-floors. PVA based adhesives are not suitable for metallic surfaces and also for locations where there is a constant spillage of water.
7.3 Preparatory
a>The
material shall be brought to the temperature of the area on which it has to be laid by stacking it near the area for 24 h.
b) Where air-conditioning
is installed, the flooring shall not be laid for 7 days from commencement of operation of air-conditioning. During this period the temperature shall neither fall below 20°C nor exceed 30°C. These conditions shall be maintained during laying and 48 h thereafter.
Work
a>It is important
that the sub-floor and underlay should be thoroughly dry before the PVC flooring is laid since moisture cannot evaporate once the PVC flooring is laid. The sub-floor should be even since irregular surface creates improper adhesion.
cl The layout of PVC flooring shall be marked on the sub-floor. The flooring shall be laid for trial without adhesive according to the layout.
4 The adhesive
shall be applied by using a notched trowel to the sub-floor and to the backside of the PVC sheet or tile flooring. In general, the adhesive will take about half an hour for setting; it should not be left too long a period as the adhesive properties will be lost owing to dust films and other causes.
b) In case of new timber construction~tongued and grooved boarding constritction shall be used. All nail heads shall be punched down and all irregularities planed off and holes frlled in. Adequate ventilation should be ensured.
c>In case of existing
or damaged timber floor, if it-is not possible to obtain an even surface, the use of diagonal boarding is recommended after removing the damaged boarding. Alternatively plywood boarding may be used.
4 Concrete sub-floors shall be finished with a trowel and shall be left long enough to dry out. Concrete sub-floor shall be in two layers. The top of the lower layer shall be painted with two coats of bitumen conforming to IS 1580 : 1991
Care should be taken while laying under high humidity conditions so that condensation does not take place on the surface of the adhesive. The area of spreading the adhesive at any one time depends on local conditions; in case of a smallroom the entire area may be spread at one time. e) When the adhesive is tack free, the PVC flooring shall be placed in position from one end
220
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 onwards, so that air is squeezed from below the PVC material. Press with a roller to develop proper contact with the adhesive. The sheets shall be laid edge to edge, with minimum gap between joints. The alignment shall be checked after laying each row of sheet is completed.
fl
chemical resistance by physical bond formed by the chemical action of the acid with the mortar, the acid should have apH value of 4 or less. Manufacturer should be consulted regarding usage of these mortars.
b) Sulphur mortars have good resistance against most of the acids except for concentrated oxidizing acids, but have very poor resistance to alkalis. The sulphur mortar shall always be used at less than 9O’C. Where conditions are questionable, specific recommendations of the manufacturer shall be obtained.
The tiles shall be fixed in the same manner as the sheets. It is preferably to start from the centre of the area. Any adhesive squeezed out between the tiles shall be wiped off immediately with a wet cloth before the adhesive hardens. Hardened adhesive shall be removed by a suitable solvent; a solution of commercial butylacetate and turpentile oil (1:3) is a suitable solvent for the purpose.
c) Resin mortars have fairly good resistance to non-oxidizing mineral acids but have a poor resistance to oxidizing mineral acids. They are fairly resistant to inorganic alkalis. Manufacturer should be consulted on the usage of these mortars.
g) No traffic shall be -permitted for 24 h after laying.
h) Where the edges of the PVC sheets are exposed, it is important to protect it by metallic or other edge strips.
3 PVC flooring shall be kept clean by mopping with a soap solution using clean damp cloth. Water shall not be poured on PVC flooring as it may seep through the joints. The flooring may be periodically polished to keep a good appearance and a good wearing surface. A regular brushing, at 4 to 6 weeks interval, shall be given. 8 CHEMICAL
RESISTANT
MORTARS
8.1 There are three types of chemical resistant mortars for different end uses, covered by the following Indian Standards: a) Use of Silicate Type by IS 4441 : 1980,
type. 9 SILICATE MORTARS
TYPE
CHEMICAL
RESISTANT
9.1 Material Silicate type mortar shall conform to IS 4832 (Part 1) : 1969. 9.2 Mortar The chemically setting silicate type chemical resistant mortar is an intimate mixture of a chemically inert solid filler, asetting agent usually contained in the filler and a liquid silicate binder. When the filler and binder are mixed at ordinary temperatures, a trowelable mortar is formed, which subsequently hardens by the chemical reaction between setting agent and the liquid silicate binder. 9.3 Storage
b) Use of Sulphur Type by IS 4442 : 1980, and c) Use of Resin Type by IS 4443 : 1980. 8.2 A mo&r suitable for a particular environment unsuitable for another.
8.3 Clauses 9 to 11 would cover the use of these mortars, namely, silicate type, resin type and sulphur
is
a) Chemically setting silicate type of mortars are resistant to most acids and have been found to be satisfactory against nitric, chromic, sulphuric and hydrochloric acids. They are used for acid proof bricks or tiles. These mortars are not suitable for hydrofluoric and concentrated orthophosphoric acids. They are also not resistant to alkalis, boiling water or steam and are likely to deteriorate by continuous exposure to water or frequent washing with water. In view of the fact that silicate type of mortars develop
The filler shall be protected from water during storage. The filler shall be kept in the containers if it cannot be protected otherwise. The liquid binder shall be protected from freezing during storage until used. Under unavoidable circumstances Liquid binder that has frozen may be used, provided the liquid binder is thawed and thorough!y remixed before use and it can be restored to its original consistency. 9.4 Mixing Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturfer, two to three parts by weight of filler to one part by weight of binder may be used. The optimum proportions might vary slightly due to climatic conditions, but it is important to have a mortar that is fluid enough to be workable and sufficikntly stiff for the masonry unit to
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 harden fully. 9.6~(b).
retain its position without slipping or sliding or without the mortar being exuded from the joint after the masonry unit has been placed in position.
Cure the joints as given in
2) For walls - Spread the silicate mortar 6 to 8 mm thick on the back of the unit. Smear the two adjacent sides of the unit with 4 to 6 mm mortar. Press the unit against the wall until joint in each case is 2 to 3 mm thick. Trim off excess mortar. While carrying out the jointing allow sufficient time to avoid the joints at bottom getting disturbed and sliding of the unit. Only one course of unit shall be laid during’the initial setting. Cure joints as given in 9.6 (b).
a>Weigh
the filler and binder in separate containers according to the recommended proportion.
b) Add approximately
three-fourths of the filler to the liquid binder in a clean container and mix with a trowel until all the filler has gone into paste. Add the remaining filler to the paste and continue mixing until the mortar is uniform. In any batch only that quantity of mortar that could be used before it starts setting shall be mixed.
4 Mortar Application with Different Bedding
cl Mortar that has begun to set shall not be
and Jointing Materials - When the job has to ‘come into contact with water weaker acid solutions and alkalis, silicate type of mortar may be used for bedding and resin type of mortar for jointing. The job shall be carried out with only class I bricks, if used. On floors - Spread on the two adjacent sides of the tile or brick the silicate type of mortar 6 to 8 mm thick. Press the unit on the bed until the joint in each case isnot more than 6 mm. Before the silicate mortar sets completely, remove the mortar in the joints to a depth of 20 mm. Cure the joints as in 9.6 (b) and fill the joints full with jointing mortar taking care to fill up the entire length of the joint. Trim off the excess mortar and make the joints smooth and plane. On walls - Spread on to the back and two adjacent sides of the unit the silicate type of mortar 6 to 8 mm thick. Press the unit against the wall until the joint in each case is not more than 6 mm. Only one~course of the unit shall be laid during the initial setting time to avoid the joints at the bottom getting disturbed and sliding of the unit. Cure the joints as given in 9.6 (b) and fill the joints full with the jointing mortar to fill up the entire length of the joint. If sulphur mortar is used, seal the vertical and horizontal joint with a strip of gummed paper 25 mm wide to prevent the flow of sulphur -mortar from the joints. Strip off the gummed paper after the mortar has set. Trim off excess mortar to make the joints smoothand plane.
tempered by adding liquid binder or water but shall be discarded before preparing fresh batches.
4 Portland cement or water shall not be added to the silicate type of mortar. Care shall be taken that the mortar does not come into contact with cement concrete surface.
e) Special precautions shall be taken ~when silicate mortars are exposed to temperatures below 10°C or above 27’C during mixing, application or setting. 9.5 Application
4 Sueace Preparation - The surface on which bricks to IS 4860 : 1968 or tiles to IS 4457 : 1982 are to be laid shall be free from dirt and dampness and shall be properly cured and dried.
b) Application of Membrane-A
coat of bitumen primer conforming to IS 3384 : 1986 be applied, and then covered with a coat of bitumen conforming to IS 1580 : 1991. If the bedding material is epoxy or polyester resin, the tiles or bricks may be laid directly on the, surface without application of bitumen primer. In case of furane, cashewnut shell liquid and phenolic types resins, a coat of bitumen primer conforming to IS 3384 : 1986 shall-be subject to service conditions. Other membranes such as lead, polyisobutane and fibre reinforced plastics may also be used.
c>Mortar
Application with the Same Bedding and Jointing Materials 1) Forfloors - Spread the silicate type of mortar 6 to 8 mm thick on the back of the tile or brick. Smear two adjacent sides of the unit with 4 to 6 mm thick mortar. Press the unit into the bed and push the unit until the joint in each case is 2 to 3 mm thick. Trim off excess mortar and allow it to
9.6 Acid-Curing
222
a) Acid-curing shall be carried out as -per manufacturer’s instructions, using safety precautions normally used when handling such acids. The operators shall be provided with
-?---+a ,
. I
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Table 9.12 Chemical Resistance of Silicate Type Mortars (Clause 9.7)
suitable aprons, gloves, boots, etc. The mortar joints shall be cured with 20 to 25 percent hydrochloric acid or with 30 to 40 percent sulphuric acid no sooner than 2 days and not later than 6 days after the masonry units have been bonded with the mortar. The curing time shall be at least 60 min. If the constructed unit is designed to contain a liquid, it may be filled with acid of the type and concentration stated above, with in the time interval stated, in lieu of washing the joints. In no case shall the acid solution be made by partially filling the tank with water and then adding acid. When sulphuric acid is used for curing, the solution shall not be prepared inside the unit.
(4)
i) Hydrochloric acid (concentrated)
R
R
ii) Sulphuric acid (10%)
R
R
Sulphuric acid (10.50%)
L
R
iv) Sulphuric acid (above 50%)
N
R
v) Nitric acid (concentrated) vi) Organic acids (concentrated)
R
R
R
R
N
N
N
N
N
N
Hydrofluoric
acid (any strength)
Salt Solution R
R
N
N
R
R
R
R
Alcohols
R
R
iv) Ketones
R
R
R
R
R
R
i) Acidic (PH value less than 4) ii) Alkaline Solvents 0 Aliphatic hydrocarbons ii) Aromatic hydrocarbons iii)
v) Chlorinated hydrocarbons Fats and oils R = Generally recommended; N = Not recommended.
AL= Limited use;
10.3 Safety Precautions
4 Both the liquid and powder ingredients may contain materials that may affect the skin. Therefore either gloves or barrier cream shall be used while handling these materials.
RESISTANT
b) Vapours are present in most of the resin mortars and same -produce gases during curing. Adequate ventilation shall be provided in the mixing and working areas. Under confined areas like vessel lining, etc, forced air draught may be used.
laid down
c>Resin.
mortars, labelled as inflammable by manufacturers shall be used with adequate safety precautions against fire.
The resin shall be stored in a clean dry place away from spen flame and under roof with containers tightly closed. The resins could be generally stored without deterioration at 27k 2’C for periods not exceeding the i values given below. The filler or resin that has-become wet shall not be used.
ii) iii) iv) v)
Type
(3)
i) Sodium hydroxide (any strength) ii) Sodium carbonate (any strength)
10.2 Storage
Cashewnut shell liquid Epoxy Furane Phenolic Polyester
Type
(2)
\
Alkalis
10.1 Material
i)
Potassium Silicate
vii)
A general guide for chemical resistance of silicate type of mortars to various subtances is given in Table 9.12. The ratings are for immersion service at ambient temperatureand may be usually upgraded for spillage only. The chemical resistance of silicate type of mortars shall be determined by IS 4456 (Part 1) : 1967.
Type of Resin
Sodium Silicate
iii)
9.7 Chemical Resistance of Silicate Type Mortars
The resin shall conform to the requirements in IS 4832 (Part_2) : 1969.
Resistance A
Acids
When the bedding material is silicate type mortar and the jointing material is epoxy resin type or polyester type or sulphur type mortar, noacid curing is required. When the bedding material is silicate type and the jointing material is phenolic resin type or furane type or cashewnut shell liquid type, the joints shall be cured as in 9.6 (a) before applying the jointing material.
10 RESIN TYPE CHEMICAL MORTAR
Chemical r
(1)
NOTE -20 percent hydrochloric acid can be made by mixing 3 parts by volume of commercial 20” Baum6 hydrochloric acid with 2 parts by volume of water. Forty percent sulphuric acid can be made by mixing 2 parts by volume of commercial 66” Baum& sulphuric acid with 5 parts by volume of water.
b)
Substance
SI
No.
4 Solvents used for cleaning tools are generally
Storage Period in Months 9
inflammable. Fires shall be kept away from the area in which such solvents are used and ‘No Smoking’ sign shall be posted in these areas. 10.4 Mixing a) For handmixing required quantity of liquid resin shall be poured into a basin. The powder shall then be added gradually and the mixture shall be well stirred, working out all lumps and
12 12 3 3 223
_, i’
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 4 to 6 mm mortar. Press the unit against the wall until the joint in each case is 2 to 3 mm thick. Trim off excess mortar and allow it to harden fully. While carrying out the jointing allow sufficient time~to avoid the joints at the bottom getting disturbed and sliding of the unit. Only one course of tile or brick shall be laid duting the initial setting. Cure with acid as in 10.7 except for epoxy and polyesterresin.
air bubbles. The mortar shall be mixed to the proportion as specified by the manufacturer for a particular type ofjob. A stainless steel spatula may be used for mixing purposes.
b) Only such quantity of mortar that could be consumed within 15 to 20 min shall prepared unless otherwise recommended the manufacturer.
be by
10.5 Handling
d) Mortar Application with Different Bedding and Jointing Materials Onfloc%Spread on to the back and two adjacent sides of the unit the silicate type mortar 6 to 8 mm thick. Press the unit on the bed until the joint in each case is 3 to 6 mm thick. Before the silicate mortar sets completely, the jointing material is removed to a depth of 20 mm.The materlal thus removed may be used for bedding providing it is trowelable and has not hardened. After the bedding mortar is properly set cure the joints as given in 10.7 and fill the joints full with resin type mortar taking special care to ~fill up the entire length of the joint. Trim off excess mortar to make the joints smooth and plane. 2) On ~walls - Spread to the back and two adjacent sides of the tile or brick the silicate type mortar 6 to 8 mm thick. Press the unit against the wall until the joint in each case is 3 to 6 mm thick. Only one course of the unit shall be~laid during the initial setting time to avoid the joints at the bottom getting disturbed and sliding of the unit. Before the silicate mortar sets completely, the jointing material shall be removed to a depth of 20 mm which may be used for bedding provided it-is trowelable and has not hardened. Cure the joints as given in 10.7 and fill the joints full with resin type of mortar taking care to fill the entire length for the joint. Trim off excess mortar to make the joints smooth and plane.
4 Resin mortars cure slowly at low temperatures. If the work is to be carried out at temperature below 15’C, to masonry units should be warmed and the area of work shall be enclosed and heated to above 15’C by using infrared lamp, to obtain proper curing.
b) Mixed mortar, that has ~become unworkable shall not be re-tempered shall be discarded.
with liquid resin, but
10.6 Application
4 Surface Preparation - The surface on which bricks conforming to IS 4860:1968 or tiles conforming to IS 4457: 1982 are to be laid shall be free from dirt and dampness and shall be proper1 y cured and dried.
b) Application ofMembrane-
A coat of bitumen primer conforming to IS 3384 : 1986 shall be applied on the prepared surface. A uniform coat of bitumen conforming to IS 1580 : 1991 shall then be applied. If the bedding material is epoxy or polyester resin, the tiles or bricks can be laid directly on to the surfaces ~without application of bitumen primer. In case of furane, cashewnut shell liquid and phenolic resin, a coat of bitumen primer shall be used subject to service conditions. Other membranes, such as, rubber, lead, polyisobutane and fibre-reinforced plastics can be used in place of bitumen primer.
cl Mortar Application
with the Same Bedding and Jointing Materials 1) Onfloors - Spread the resin type of mortar 6 to 8 mm thick on the back of the unit. Smear two adjacent sides of the unit with 4 to 6 mm thick mortar. Press the unit into the bed and push against the floor and the unit until the joint in each case is 2 to 3 mm thick. Trim off excess mortar and allow it to harden fully. Cure with acid as given in 10.7 axcept for epoxy and polyester resins. 2) On walls - Spread the resin type mortar 6 to 8 mm thick on the back of the unit. Smear two adjacent sides of the unit with
c-“-----k
10.7 Acid-Curing Except for epoxy and polyester resins, cure the joints for a minimum period -for 72 h with 20 to 25 percent hydrochloric acid or with 30 to 40 percent sulphuric acid before applying the resin type of mortars. After acid-curing, wash the free acid in the joints with clean water and allow sufficient time for thorough drying. Resin mortars shall then be filled into the joints.
224
10.7.1 Resin mortars are normally self curing and do not generally require an auxilliary curing. They should
:
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 not be put to use before 48 h in the case of furane, epoxy and polyester resin type mortars. They may be put~to use after 48 h provided the setting temperature is at least 20°C. In the case of phenolic and cashewnut shell liquid resin and for lower temperatures the period of curing shall be extended as recommended by the manufacturer. Without any heat treatment phenolic resin and the cashewnut shell liquid resin shall not be put to use for 7 to 28 days respectively. With the treatmentphenolic resin and the cashewnut shell liquid resin shall not~be put to use for 7 to 28 days respectively. With heat treatment the phenolic and cashewnut shell liquid resin may be put to use after 2 to 6 days respectively. The construction shall be protected from weather and water and from accidental mechanical damage until the mortar is cured. Heat treatment may be given with infrared lamp.
pouring is carried out shall be checked for flammable or explosive gases and a flame permit shall be issued before the fir&s are lit or molten sulphur mortar is carried into the area. Soda acid type fire extinguisher and wet cloth shall be made available for extinguishing fire or preventing its spread. Water shall be kept away-from molten sulphur mortar in order to avoid foaming. Adequate ventilation should be provided wherever sulphur mortars are used. Table 9.13 Chemical Resistance ~Mortars (Clause 10.8) SI -No.
Sobs~ance
Epoxy
(2)
(3)
(4)
(9
Acetic acid 10%
R
R
Chromic acid 10%
N
R
R
(1)
10.8 Chemical
Resistance
of Resin Type Mortars
TYPE CHEMICAL
0 ii)
RESISTAdT
conform
to
IS 4832
(7)
R
R
R
L
N
\
L
R
R
R
R
iv)
Hydrofluoric acid (see Note)
N
N
R
R
R
v)
Lactic acid 2%
R
R
R
R
R
vi)
Nitric acid 10%
L
N
L
N
L
Nitric acid (cone)
N
N
N
N
N
Phosphoric acid 10%
R
R
R
R
R
ix)
Sulphuric acid 10%
R
R
R
R
R
x)
Sulphuric acid 40%
R
R
R
R
R
Sulphuric acid (cotlc)
N
N
L
N
N
R
R
xi)
11.2 Storage
Alkalis
Sulphur mortar shall be kept in a dry place prior to use. The mortar shall not deteriorate during storage.
i) ii) iii)
11.3 Safety Precautions
iv)
a) Sulphur mortar is melted and poured between bricks or tiles. If overheated, it ignites and burns with a low blue flame. When the blue flame is observed, heating shall be stopped and the vessel shall be covered with a tight fitting lid or wet gunny bags until the tire is extinguished. When applying sulphur mortar in a confined space, each pail or molten material shall be checked to ensure that the mortar is not burning. The blue flame shall be checked in a dark place. b) All surfaces coming into contact with molten sulphur mortar shall be kept dry. Adequate safety precautions shall be taken during melting and pouring of sulphur mortars. The operators shall be provided with leather aprons, asbestos gloves, asbestos boots, goggles and masks. The areas where melting and
(6)
Hydrochloricacid (cone)
viii)
shall
Fur- Cashewnut nae Nutshell Liquid
iii)
vii)
11.1 Material Sulphur type mortar (Part 3) : 1968.
Poly- Phenoester lit
Add.?
As a general guide the chemical resistance of resin-type mortars to various substances is as given in Table 9.13. The rating are for immersion service at ambient temperature and may be upgraded for spillage only. Manufacturer’s instructions shall generally be followed. IS 4456 (Part 1) : 1967 may be used for testing. 11 SULPHUR MORTAR
of Resin Type
Ammonia 0.880
N
L
R
Sodium hydroxide 40%R
N
L
R
L
Sodium carbonate
R
L
R
R
R
Calcium hydroxide
R
N
R
R
R
Sult Solutions i)
Salt solution (acidic)
R
R
R
R
R
ii)
Salt solution (alkaline)
R
L
R
R
R
II-
Solvents i)
Aliphatic hydrocarbonsR
R
R
R
N
ii)
Aromatic hydrocarbonsL
N
R
R
N
iii)
Alcohols
R
R
R
R
R
iv)
Ketones
L
N
L
R
R
Chlorinated hydrocarbon&.
L
R
R
N
N R R R
N R R R
N R R R
N R R R
N R
v)
Wet guses (oxidizing) Wet gases (reducing) Mineral oils Vegetable oils anclfuts R = Generally recommended; recommended
L = Limited use; N = Not
NOTE Carbon and graphite hydrofluoric acid service.
225
L L
tillers
should be used for
i>
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 2)
11.4 Melting and Pouring
a) The mortar shall be melted in a clean vessel made of cast iron, or steel, or aluminium. It shall be filled with dry sulphur mortar to not more than one half and heated slowly until the mortar has melted to a black, smooth liquid with a mirror bright surface and the liquid is almost as free flowing as water, while stirring frequently with a steel laddle. The sulphur mortar must be dry at the time of use to avoid foaming. The mortar shall be heated to a temperature of about 135’C. Below 130°C some of the liquid will congeal over the top or around the sides of the vessel. If the mortar is heated much above 135’C, the viscosity increases until the mortar thickens and loses its mirror like appearance.
b) If the mortar thickens on overheating, it should be allowed to cool and stirred until thin; then more cold mortar may be added, if necessary, overheating for long periods may permanently damage the mortar. Care shall be taken that water or damp mortar do not get into the heating vessel so as to avoid foaming.
c>The
molten sulphur mortar shall be taken in galvanized bucket. The nose of the bucket shall be directed towards the joint and the hot and viscous mortar is poured slowly into the joint without air entrapment. Any entrapped air should be removed while the mortar is hot by poking with a thin mild steel rod.
11.5 Application
4 Surface Preparation
- The surface to recveive the acid resistant bricks and tiles shall be free from dirt and dampness and shall be cured and dried.
b) Mortar Application with Same Bedding and Jointing Materials 1) OnfZoors - Spacer chips with a surface area of about 1 cm2 and 6 mm thick and made of sulphur mortar conforming to IS 4832 (Part 3) : 1968 shall be made available. The chemical resistant brick or tile shall be placed on spacer chips, 3 chips being used under each tile. Between the floor and tile or brick 6 mm space shall be provided.~The molten sulphur mortar shall be poured in a maximum oftwo operations in spaces between floor and the units avoiding air pockets till it completely fills the joints. Trim off excess mortar to make the joints smooth and plane using a hot trowel. 226
On walls - The chemically resistant unit shall be placed 6 mm away from the-wall and the adjacent unit using spacer chips with a surface area of 1 cm2 and 6 mm thick and made out of sulphur mortar. The vertical and horizqntal joints are sealed with gummed strip of paper 25 mm wide to prevent molten sulphur mortar flowing from the joints. The mortar shall be filled leaving a gap of 25 mm from the top and avoid air entrapment. A further course of the unit shall be laid in the same way immediately thereafter. The gummed paper can be stripped off as soon as the sulphur mortar has hardened.
c) Mortar Application with Different Bedding and Jointing Materials 1) Onfloc%s- Spread on to the back and two adjacent sides of the unit the silicate type of mortar 6 to 8 mm thick. Press the unit on the bed and push against the floor and the unit until the joint is not more than 6 mm thick. Before the silicate mortar sets completely, the jointing material is removed to a depth of 20 mm. The material thus removed may be used for bedding provided it is trowelable and has not hardened. Cure the joints with acid for a minimum period of 72 h and dry. If the bedding material silicate mortar, the laying and curing shall be done as per 9.6. Fill up the joint completely to its entire length with sulphur mortar as in .11.4. Trim off excess mortar to make the joints smooth and plane with a hot trowel. 2) On walls - Spread on the back and two adjacent sides of the unit, silicate mortar 6 to 8 mm thick. Press the unit against the wall and with the adjacent unit until the joint in each case is not more than 6 mm thick. Only one course of the unit be laid during initial setting time to avoid the joints at the bottom getting disturbed and the unit getting slided. Before the mortar sets completely remove the jointing material to a depth of 20 mm. The material thus removed may be used for bedding provided it is trowelable and has not hardened. After the bedding mortar has set, cure the joints with resin for a minimum period of 72 h and dry. If the bedding material is silicate type the laying and curing shall be as per 9.6. Seal the vertical and horizontal joints with a strip of gummed paper 25 mm wide to prevent the flow of sulphur mortar from the joints. Fill up the joints completely with molten
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 12 PARQUET
sulphur mortar avoiding air entrapment. Strip off the gummed paper after the mortar has hardened. Trim off excess mortar with a hot trowel to make the joints smooth and plane.
12.1 General Parquet flooring is covered by the following Standards : IS 5389 : 1969 Hardwood parquet block floors
4 Protecting the Units from Mortar - Various methods are available for masking the masonry units to prevent sulphur mortar from adhering to them. Paraffin wax, paper, etc, may be used to cover the masonry units. The paraffin wax or paper shall be removed after use.
courts, skating rinks, dancing halls, etc.
b) Mosaic parquet floors consists of many small pieces of (slats) which are liable to compensate very successfully the inevitable warping of wood due to variations in humidity without resulting in gaps so objectionable in strip parquet; at the same time glueing also remains perfect. New patterns may be provided with mosaic parquet which are not possible with conventional strip parquet.
of Sulphur Type
11.6.1 A genera1 guide for chemical resistance of sulphur type mortars is given in Table 9.14. The ratings are for immersion service at ambient temperature and may usually be upgraded for spillage. The chemical resistance of sulphur type mortar shall be determined in accordance with the method described-in IS 4456 (Part 2) : 1967.
12.2 Materials
a) The species of timber for hardwood parquet and wood block floors are given in Annex B along with the indentation index, compared to teak as 100. The sawn timber shall be nonrefractory and the thickness of floor blocks and parquets shall be 25 to 40 mm. Nails used shall be diamond pointed (see IS 723 : 1972).
Table 9.14 Chemical
Resistance of Sulphur Type Mortar (Clause 11.6.1)
SI
Substance
Chemical Resistance
No.
b) The percentage indentation for hardness shall be not less than 55 so as to withstand constant wear and tear.
Acid.r
0
Hydrochloric acid (concentrated)
R
ii)
Sulphuric acid (70%)
R
iii) iv)
Sulphuric acid (above 70%)
L
Nitric acid (40%)
R
Nitric acid (above 40%)
N
v) vi)
Organic acid
vii)
Hydrofluoric
cl Timber shall be seasoned as per IS 114 I : 1993 and fhereafter treated with preservatives as per IS 401 : 1982. In case water soluble preservatives are used, timber shall be seasoned a second time after preservation. Termite control shall be as per Chapter 6. Damp-proofing shall be as per Chapter 12.
L R
acid (40%) (see Note)
Alkulis
12.3 Classes of Mosaic Parquet Flooring
Sodium hydroxide (1 W)
R
Sodium hydroxide (above 1%)
N
iii)
Sodium carbonate (concentrated)
R
iv)
Salt solutions (acidic)
R
Salt solutions (alkaline)
L
i) ii)
v)
They shall be of two classes.
4 Class I - Slats may be quarter, half quarter or rectangular sawn provided that the number of tangential sawn slats does not exceed 30 percent of the slats in~each panel.
Solvents i)
Aliphatic hydrocarbons
ii)
Aromatic hydrocarbons
L
Alcohols
R
iii) iv) v)
Face shall be free 2 mm in-diameter 1 mm in diameter. may be~permitted
L
Ketones
L
Chlorinated hydrocarbons
L
Fats und Oils
L
R = Generally recommended; N = Not recommended.
and wood
a) Parquet flooring are used in auditoria, squash
into service before 8 h of hying. Resistance
Indian
IS 9472 : 1980 Mosaic parquet flooring
4 Floors laid with sulphur mortar shall not be put 11.6 Chemical Mortars
FLOORING
b) Class II - Only one of the defects mentioned
L = Limited use;
NOTE Graphite and carbon filler hydrofluoric acid service.
from sound knots exceeding and loose knots exceeding Knots up to 5 mm diameter in the back.
should be used for
227
from i) to v) below, apart from sound knot is permitted on the face of a slat; back may exhibit knots and other defects of a larger size. i) Sound knots, of acolour very nearly approaching that of adjoining wood; i width of slat.
c
‘.
azl'6
321’6
I
1
9Z1’6
VZC’G
.
. I4 all’6
311’6
Vll’6
all.6
311’6
L66l:(JLD S)Z9dS
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 12.5 Woo&Block
Flooring Patterns (Types of Blocks and Wood Block Floor)
They shall be as! given in Fig. 9.13, Fig 9.14 and Fig. 9.15.
9.13A
Herring-Bone FIG.
9.138
Pattern
Basket Pattern
9.13 PATTERNS OF WOOD BLOCK FLOORING
9.14A With Dove-tailed Grooves on the Bottom
9.14C
FIG.
With Tongues on the Ends
9.148
Tongued and Grooved
9.140 With a Dove-tail Groove on the Bottom with a Narrow Groove Alround
9.14 DIFFERENT TYPES OF WOOD BLOCKS
All dimensions in centimetres. FIG. 9.15 WOOD BLOCK FLOOR
229
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 12.6 Mosaic Parquet Panel
2) Tongued and grooved,
It shall be as in Fig. 9.16.
3) 4)
12.7 Dimensions
d) Laying of woodblock floor shall be done as below: 1) Sub-floor shall consist of cement concrete flooring of 5 to 7.5 cm thick, finished smooth. cm x 7.5 cm 2) The woodblockssizestiom25 to 30 cm x 7.5 cm, shall be dipped in liquid mastic composition adhering to cement. 3) The centre of the floor shallbe laid first with the border cut and fitted to it. Generally two rows of wood blocks shall be laid longitudinally to serve as border. The floor is scraped and planed to an even surface and sand papered. 4) The pores in the floor shall be sealed by an appropriate floor seal.
Mosaic parquet floors shall be of 6, 8 and 10 mm thickness; 6 mm thickness is not suitable for softwood and softer grades of hardwood; width shall be 18 to 25 mm. Length shall be 100 to 165 mm. 12.8 Fabrication
and Laying
a) Parquet floor shall be consist~of the following : - The sub-floor shall be planed 1) ‘Sub-jZoor before laying of parquets. It shall be made of timber boarded floor 50 to 75 mm thick. (see IS 3670 : 1989 or Part 5). The subfloor may also be of cement concrete. 2) Panels - These shall be generally 30 to 35 cm2. Square edged hardwood battens-These 3) shall be generally 15 to 50 cm in length, 5 to 10 cm in width and 5 to 10 mm in thickness.
e) Mosaic parquet floors shall be laid as below: 1) Adhesives for glueing mosaic parquet shall be of solvent and dispersion type, such as, epoxy resin or phenolic resin (resorcinol formaldehyde), or urea formaldehyde synthetic adhesives. All parquet adhesives are diluted (mixed) with various mineral components; they are applied by means of a toothed steel trowel as thin as possible. Only a limited area shall be primed in order to prevent setting.
b) The laying of parquet floor shall be done as below: 1) Border shah be fitted first to a width of 60 cm and the area is laid and fitted dry.
2) Every individual piece of parquet is taken
3) 4) 5)
Tongues on the ends, and Dovetailed groove on the-bottom and with a narrow groove.
up in turn and placed in position with mastic; Before the mastic hardens, nails are driven in; The floor is scraped or planed to an even surface and sand papered; and The nail holes punched in area filled with putty and the floor is polsihed with the use of power-driven machines.
2) Mosaic parquet are laid over battened floors which are even. The mosaic parquet shall be laid diagonally to the direction of battens. In old and uneven battened floors, plywood or other boards may be inserted between the floor and mosaic parquet. The boards may be glued or nailed to the floor and, the old batten floor be made even.
c) The wood block floors shall be in herring-bone or basket patterns. The blocks shall of the types given below: 1) Simple square end -block with dovedetailed grooveson the bottom,
1
SLATS
FIG.9.16TYPICALILLUSTRATION OFMOSAICPARQUET PANEL 230
SP 62 (S & T)-: 1997 3)
Adhesive shall be applied on the prepared and dry surface and the back of parquet. Apply pressure on the parquet panel to get a good bond. Joints shall be very thin and fine.
4)
ANNEX
Mosaic parquet floors shall be finished as in Chapter 15 on finishes of wood work.
B
(Clause 12.2) SPECIES OF TIMBER RECOMMENDED FOR SLATS, FLOOR BOARDS AND PARQUET FLOORS Name
Hardness
Name
Hardness
1. Gurjan
135
14. Kindal
95
2. Rahini
130
15. Pali
90
3. Padauk
130
16. Kokko
90
4. Satinwood
130
17. Rosewood
90
5. Maniawga
125
18. Kassi
6. Axelwood
120
19. Sissoo
$5 85
7. Kala Siris
120
20. Piney
85
8. Bijasal
100
21. Jarul
80
9. Laurel
100
22. Hollock
75
10. White Chuglam
100
23. Anjan
70
11. Teak
100
24. Fir
65
12. Lendi
95
25. Cypress
13. White Cedar
95
26. Machillus
60 55
-PART 5 TLMBER FLOORS
1 GENERAL
a) Species of timber selected for girders, binders and projecting joists shall be as given below: 1) For spans of 12 m and greater, all the species of Group ‘Super’ specified in IS 3629 : 1986. 2) For spans greater than 6 m but less than 12 m, all the species of Group ‘Standard’ specified in IS 3629 : 1986. 3) For spans up to and including 6 m, all the species of Group ‘Ordinary’ specified in IS 3629 : 1986.
1.1 Timber floors are provided in auditoria, gymnasia, dancing halls, squash courts, public balconies, galleries, skating rinks, etc, for noise retardent floor finish and in hilly areas as thermal insulating floor finish. These floors may also he used in timber framed construction to serve as structural floors. 2 MATERIALS 2.1 The species of timber recommended for floor board shall be as given in Annex B of Part 4 of this Chapter, with their percentage of indentation for hardness, taking teak as 100.
of floor b) Timber selected for construction boards and supporting members shall conform to the following :
231
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 I) 2) 3)
h) Wall plates and ends of joists should not be
The species should be non-refractory; The thickness of boards shal! be from 25 to 40 mm. Forjoists, binders and girders the modulus of elasticity should be not less than 5 625 N/mm’ and the extreme fibre stress should be not less 8.5 N/mm*.
built into the side walls. Spacing of joists may be between 300 to 450 mm.
3
2.2 Nails shall conform to IS 723 : I972 and diamond pointed.
k) The surface of the boards are levelled and rubbed smooth.
2.3 All timber shall be seasoned as per IS 114 I : 1993 and preserved as per IS 401 : 1982. If water preservatives are used, it shall be seasoned a second time. Proper anti-termite measures as in Chapter 6 shall be adopted for use in buildings. Damp-proofing, w-here necessary, shall be done as per Chapter 12. 3 TYPES
OF TIMBER
4.1.1 Timber Floors,for
Upper Floors
The details are as in Fig. 9.18. 4.2 Double Joisted Timber Floor These are used for longer spans between 3.5 m and 5 m. To make it more sound proof the construction procedure is as follows (see Fig. 9.19):
FLOORS
3.1 Timber floors are generally of the following types:
4 The bridging joists, instead of spanning from
4 Single joisted floors having bridge joist only;
wall to wall, are supported by larger horizontal members (binders) at suitable intervals, between 2 m to 5 m in the shorter direction of the room.
b) Double joisted floors having bridge joists supported on binders;
cl Triple joisted floors having bridging joists sup4
On properly fixed joists, wooden boards 25-30 mm thick, IOO- 150 mm wide and 3 m longgenerally widend by tongued and grooved joints shall be laid and fixed by screws/nails.
ported on binders and framed into girders;
b) Floor boards are supported on bridging joists.
Solid timber floors/wood block floor; and
c>The binders
shall not be placed over door window openings unless designed as lintels. Ends of binders should not touch masonry.
e) Purpose made floor/parquet floors, etc. 4 CONSTRUCTION
4 Ceilings may be fixed to the bottom of the
4.1 Single Joisted Timber Floor
binders.
This Lype of floor is constructed on ground floor, generally in theatres where dance and drama performances are regularly held. Also they are suited for buildings in hilly regions and damp areas. The construction sequence is as below:
4.3 Triple Joisted Timber Floor The details are as in Fig. 9.20. 4.4 Solid Timber Floors The details are as in Fig. 9.21.
4 Clear the site of vegetation, etc.
4.5 Purpose-Made
b) Honey-combed
dwarf walls are built, preferably half brick thick at intervals of 2 m to a suitable height (see Chapter 4).
These are not generally made solid; they are primarily hollow floors. They are named according to purpose they serve, namely, Skating-rink floor, Badminton floor, Squash floor, etc. Some details are as in Fig. 9.22.
cl In case of basement
floors, particularly, for theatres, the space between the dwarf walls may be filled with dry sand up to DPC level as shown in Fig. 9.17.
5 TIMBER
4 Over the DPC on dwarf walls longitudinally
FLOOR
5.1 The timber 100 to 150 mm widening joints below (see Fig.
wooden members, or wall plates, are solidly bedded level by means of suitable lime or cement mortar. The timber floor joists (bridging nailed to these wall plates.
Floors
BOARDS
floor boards, 25 to 30 mm thick, wide and 2 to 3 m long are joined by listed in order of efficiency as given 9.23):
joists) are
4 Ploughed and tongued joints;
Proper ventilation should be ensured to prevent dry rot of timber.
b) Splayed, rebated, tongued and grooved joints;
There should be a gap between the underside of every joist/girder of the ground floor and top surface of sand filling or site concrete.
4 Tongued and grooved joints;
c>Rebated,
232
e>Rebated
tongued and grooved joints;
joints;
SP 62 ($ & T) : 1997
f) Rebated and fitted joints;
For all these joints, screws shall be driven from top of floor boards to the joists below and then concealed by putty.
g) Splayed joints; and h) Square butt joints.
5.2 The pores of timber floor shall be sealed with a floor seal. FLOOR
BOARD
CONCRETE
r
BRIDGING
JOIST
~SOLID TIMBER STRUTTING
ilMBER
LTRIMMING
JOIST
FIG.~. 18 SINGLEJOISTEDUPPERFLOOR
FLOOR !ING BOARD
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
TRIMMING JOIST T TRIMMEO JOISTTRIMMER InlCT-
FLOOR
BOARD RIDGING
------_, ---..._..__.__--------..-_..__ -__._-.__ .. . -----______------___ -7-----A_-__
ENLARGED Fc9.19
_ -h---------3
SECTION
DOUBLEJOISTEDFLOOR
234
XX
JOISTS
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
7 c
.BRIDGING JOIST
-BINDER
i
I_SPAClMG OF+ GIRDER 95rn
L. GIRDER
/-
FLOOR
f
-MASONRY
BOARD ,- BRIDGING
/
ENLARGED
SECTION
XX
FIG.9.20 FRAMEDOR TRIPLEJOISTEDFLOOR
235
JOIST
WALL
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
T
L125 x ~O;~IE~OODEN (MAIN
FLOOR
25 mm -MIN f_
+$Lti.
kEMENT CONCRETi 50 TO 75 mm THICK WITH ONE COAT OF OF
TIMBER
WITHOUT
/-ONE COAT OF BITUMEN , .. . .,_; .I.!. 4 +I$&.‘:- 1, y,y;*:,&&;
_ __l
SECTION (MAIN
PLANKS)
FLOOR
OF
XX
TIMBER
WITH
PLANK3
B’TUMENBmm
AIRGAP _ -_ . ‘-6..! .,a:, i 1.q 3 50 TO 75 mm f
FIG. 9.2 1 ROOM SHOWING SUB-FLOOROF CEMENT CONCRETEAND WOODEN FILLETS
SCREW FOR FIXING THE FLOOR PLANKS/
kONCRETE
FLOORJ
BOLT FOR FIXING FLOOR JOIST WITH CONCRETE FLOOR
SECTION
THE SIDE
ELEVATION
JOIST SCREW FOR THE TIMBER
TOP
FIXING FLOOR
PLAN
FIG. 9.22 TYPICAL DETAIL OF FIXINGOF FLOOR JOISTAND TIMBERFLOUR
236
SP 62 (S & T) z I997
9.23A Square or Butt
9.238 Splayed
9.23C Rebated and Filleted
9.23D Rebated
9.23E Tongued and Grooved
9.23F Rebated, Tonguedand Grooved
9.23G Splayed, Rebated, Tongued and Grooved
9.23H Ploughed and Tongued
FIG. 9.23 DIFFERENTTYPES OF JOINTSIN TWBER FLOORINGBOARDS
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER10 WALL AND CEILING FINISHES AND COVERINGS AND WALLING
CONTENTS
PART 1 WALL AND CEILING FINtSHES AND COVERINGS
6.2 Materials 6.3 Types of Facings and Fixing by Cramps
6.4 Supports 1 GENERAL 6.5 Joints 2 LIMEPLASTERFINISH 6.6 Fixing Precast Concrete Slab Facings 2.1 General 6.7 Control of Alignment 2.2 Materials 7 EXTERNALFACINGSAND VENEERS- WALL 2.3 Preparatory Work TILINGAND MOSAICS 2.4 Preparation of Background 2.5 Preparation of Lime Mortars for Plastering 7.1 General 2.6 Application of Lime Plaster 7.2 Materials 2.7 Curing 7.3 Preparatory Work 2.8 Special Finishes 7.4 Application of Floated Coat for Tiles and 2.9 Miscellaneous Works Mosaics 3 CEMENTANDCEMENT-LIME PLASTERFINISH 7.5 Fixing of Tiles 7.6 Fixing of Ceramic Mosaics 3.1 General 7.7 Fixing of Marble Mosaics 3.2 Materials 3.3 Preparatory Work 8 WALLCOVERINGS 3.4 Sequence of Operations 3.5 Thickness of Plaster 8.1 General 3.6 Number of Coats 8.2 Materials 3.7 Application of Undercoats 8.3 Preparatory Work 3.8 Curing 8.4 Fixing of Boards 4 EXTERNAL RENDERED FINISHES 9 CEILINGCOVERINGS 4.1 General 4.2 Types of Rendered Finishes 9.1 General 4.3 Nature of Background in Relation to Choice of 9.2 Preparatory Work Rendering 9.3 Fixing of Coverings 4.4 Recommended Mix Proportions 10 FIXINGDEVICIZS 4.5 Preparatory Work 4.6 Application of Rendering Coats 10.1 Types 4.7 Curing 10.2 Fixing 5 EXTERNAL FACINGANDVENEERS -STONEFACING ANNEXA SPECIALMIXES FOR SULPHATEBACK5.1 General GROUNDS 5.2 Materials 5.3 Types of Facings ANNEXB FABRICATION AND FIXING OF TIMBER 5.4 Fixing theFacings with Cramps CEILING 5.5 Joints PART 2 WALLING 5.6 Fixing of Stone Facings 5.7 Finishing of Joints 1 GENERAL 5.8 Ashlar Facing 2 REEDWALLING 5.9 Control of Alignment 2.1 General 6 EXTERNALFACINGSAND VENEERS- CEMENT 2.2 Materials CONCRETE 2.3 Preparatory Work 6.1 General
2‘4 Fixing of Reed Board 25 Fixing of Reeds for h-situ wall Construction
2.6 Finishing
3 C&PSUM BLWKPAKTITIONS -NON-LOADBEARING 3.1 &net+ 3.2 Material8 4.3 Laying of Blocks
4 NO-FINES CONCRETE 4.1 General 4.2 Materials 4.3 Mixes
4.4 Transporting, Placing, Compacting, Curing and Workmanship
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
SP62(S&T):1997
CHAPTER 10
WALL AND CEILING FINISHES AND COVERINGS AND WALLING PART 1 WALL AND CEILING FINISHES
1 GENERAL 1.1 Wall and ceiling finishes and coverings covered by the following Indian Standards:
If dubbing out is necessary, it should be done in adVance so that an adequate time interval may be available before the application of the first undercoat.
are
Plaster work shall not be started until necessary fixtures, such as, door and window frames, etc. are completed and all pipes, etc, are embedded in the wall so that there is no need to cut the plaster.
a) IS 1414 : 1989 Fixing of wall coverings b) IS 1661 : 1972 Cement and cement-lime plaster finish c) IS 1946 : 1961 Use of fixing devices in walls, ceilings and floors of solid construction d) IS 2394 : 1984 Lime plaster finish e) IS 2402 : 1963 External rendered finishes f) IS 2441 : 1984 Fixing ceiling coverings g) IS 4101 (Part 1) : 1967 External facings and veneers, stone facing h) IS 4101 (Part 2) : 1967 External facings and veneers, cement concrete facing j) IS 4101 (Part 3) : 1985 External facings and veneers, wall tiling and mosaics. 2 LIME PLASTER
2.4 Preparation
a>Ensure
FJNISH
2.1 General Lime plaster finish and allied finishes are commonly used in the country for internal finishes as well as for external renderings. Application of lime plaster finish to walls, ceilings, columns and similar surfaces are covered here. 2.2 Materials
) Lime shall conform to IS 712 : 1984 :, Pozzolana shall conform to IS 1344 : 1981 and IS 3812 : 1981
c) Sand shall conform to IS 1542 : 1992 4 Cement shall conform to IS 269 : 1989, IS 455 : 1989, IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1991 and any other as specified Lime putty shall conform to IS 1635 : 1992.
e>
2.3 Preparatory
AND COVERINGS
Work
2.3.1 All surfaces to receive lime plaster shall be sufficiently cured and dry; all service pipes, etc, to be embedded in masonry shall be protected against corrosion before plaster work is begun. Plastering work shall be protected from damage during and after the operation; the plaster hardens by drying and recarbonation which is a slow process and hence susceptible to damage.
243
of Background
proper bond between background and the first coat of plaster. For this all joints in back masonry shall be raked out to a depth of not less than 12 mm while the mortar in the joint is still green. Roughening and cleaning of background shall be done; for roughening thin wire brush may be used and the roughened surface moistioned; for cleaning it should be brushed to remove dust, loose particles, etc. b) Where necessary, dubbing shall be carried out; the need would arise where the background is uneven and it cannot be made up by regular courses of plastering. The dubbing process consists of filling the holes and depressions with mortar of the same mix as the first coat. The patches of plaster are left rough so that subsequent coat of plaster would stick to it. cl The masonry shall be allowed to dry out for sufficient period so that initial drying shrinkage is fairly complete and suction adjustment is possible during plastering. Suction is the force by which the plaster is held on the surface after it is laid by the trowel and it has hardened. However, very strong suction would suck all moisture from the plaster making it weak, porous and friable. Therefore, careful adjustment is necessary for good plastering~by wetting the backing suitably if it is dry; the wall shall not be soaked but only dampened evenly before applying the plaster since too much water also makes it impossible to keep the plaster in position. It is preferable to do plastering under shady conditions. d) Differential movements between the background and plaster due to moisture change will cause cracking of plaster. Major part of such movements shall be allowed to set before the plaster is applied, for example, by giving
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 sufficient drying time to the background. However, concrete blocks and foam concrete blocks shall be only lightly wetted before plastering. The reasons for cracking of plaster are as under: 1) Quick drying of the mortar due to hot weather and low humidity; 2) Strong mix is used on a weak background; 3) Lack of bond with the background; 4) Masonry underneath has not undergone initial shrinkage; 5) Lack of proper raking of joints; in backgrounds, such as, 6) Discontinuity change from wall to ceiling, from concrete to brickwork, from clay brickwork to concrete block work, etc. This can be overcome by separating the two portions by a neat cut through the plaster at the junction; 7) Due to roof movement by variation in temperature, cracks may occur in partitions; this can be prevented by isolating the top of partition from roof slab; and 8) When bridging joints in slabs, the plaster will crack due to higher stresses; this can be avoided by reinforcing the plaster at the joint by wire or jute scrim. 2.5 Preparation
of Lime Mortars for Plastering
of Lime Plaster
The range of coats normally employed for different backgrounds are as follows: Brickwork (internal and external) 1 or 2 Stonework (internal and external) 2 or 3 Concrete blocks 1 or2 Wood laths 2 or 3 Soffits and ceilings 1 or2
Thickness for plaster work exclusive of key or dubbing out shall generally be-as below: First Second Third Coat Coat Coat masonry Single coat work 15mm Double coat work 10 mm 10 mm masonry 15mm 10mm masonry (very surface) 15mm 10mm 10mm 3)
Plastering shall be completed before the setting process for mortar has started. If hydraulic lime is used the mortar shall be used within 4 h after grinding. Lime pozzolana mortar shall be used within 24 h of grinding.
cl The plaster shall be left cut clean to line both
2)
Brick a) b) Stone Stone rough
5)
plaster about 150 mm x 150 mm shall be first laid, horizontally and vertically, at not more than 2 m intervals over the entire surface to serve as gauges; they shall be uniformly thick but slightly more than the specified thickness. These shall be beaten by wooden straight edge and brought to true surface after thoroughly filling the joints. Excessive trowelling or floating should be avoided. During the process a solution of lime putty shall be applied on the surface to make the latter workable. All corners, arrises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be. Rounding or chamfering shall be done with proper templates.
a) General - It is an advantage to plaster the ceiling first and then to plaster the walls starting from top and working downwards. This will permit the removal of scaffolding as easily as possible. 1)
Metals in contact with plaster are liable to corrosion. However, when a rich mix of cement lime plaster (1: 1:6) is used, it would have less corrosive effect on iron and steel.
b) To ensure even thickness and a true surface,
This is covered in Chapter 4. 2.6 Application
4)
horizontally and vertically, while stopping work at the end of the day. For recommencing the work, the sedge of the old work shall be scrapped clean, wetted with lime putty.before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas. The plastering work shall be closed at the end of the day on the body of the wall but not nearer than 150 mm to any corner or anises. There shall be no horizontal joints in plasterwork on parapet tops and copings. No portion of work initially be left out to be patched later on. In case ballies pierce the wall, the holes shall be made good with brick and plastered.
d) One Coat Plaster work -
The plaster of specified thickness shall be applied to the full length of the wall up to natural breaking points, such as, doors and windows. The mix for ceilings shall be stiffer than that used for walls. On soffits the mortar shall be laid in long even spreads outwards from the operator overlapping each trowel full and using sufficient pressure to ensure intimate contact with the background. On walls, the mortar shall be laid in long even spreads upwards and across, under pressure. On smooth background, the mortar may have to be dashed on to ensure adequate bond.
The plasters shall be finished to a smooth surface.
244
SP62(S&T):1997 The sand shall be ground shall be ground fine and lin. The materials shall and~kept in a heap, well
The plaster shall be laid on little more than the required thickness and levelled with a wooden float. The plaster shall be water cured as described in 2.7. Two Coat Plaster Work
e>
c>On this coat of(b),
the same mix as in (b) shall be ground on flat stone slabs with stone rollers to the coinsistency of fine river mud and applied to a thickness of 2 mm over the second coat (b) which is wetted before hand.
1) First coat-The
f)
first coat shall be applied as in (d) above. Before the first coat hardens, itssurface shall be beaten up by the edges of wooden thapis and close dents shall be made on the surface, which serve as a key to the next coat. The next coat shall be applied, after the first coat has set for 3 to 5 days. The surface shall not be allowed to dry during this period. 2) First coat on wooden lath and metal lathing - The mortar shall be stiff enough to cling and hold when laid and shall be applied spreading diagonally across the lath work overlapping each trowel full under pressure. The average thickness shall not be exceeding 10 mm. 3) Second coat - The second coat shall be completed in exactly the same manner as the first coat. The finishing coat shall be laid with a mason’s trowel to an average thickness of 5 mm. 4) Curing shall be done as in 2.7. Three Coat Plaster Work- The first two coats shall be applied as in (e); the third coat shall be completed to the specified thickness in the same manner as the second coat; curing shall be done as in 2.7.
4 The surface of the third coat (c) shall be polished first with trowels and then with very hard smooth stones. While polishing operation is in progress soap stone powder contained in muslin bags shall be dusted on the surface. The operation shall be continued till a high smooth polish is obtained.
d Curing shall be done as in 2.7. 2.9 Miscellaneous
a>Cracked,
crumbled or hollow sounding portions of plaster shall be removed to a shape of a square or a rectangle. The edges shall be undercut slightly to provide a key to new plaster.
b) The visible joints shall be raked out to a minimum depth of 12 mm in the case of brick work and 20 mm in the case of stone work. The surface of the masonry shall be scrubbed with wire brushes to remove all-mortar; it shall then be washed with water and kept wet before commencing plastering.
c>Plaster
shall then be applied as in one ‘coat plaster work [see 2.6 (d)]. The surface shallbe finished even and flush with the old smounding plaster.
Curing shall be started 24 h after finishing the plaster. The plaster shall be kept wet for 7 days; during this period it shall be protected. 2.8 Special Finishes
2.9.2 Avoidance of Crazing
This~is a special plaster finish applied in three or more coats to obtain a smooth polished surfaces in places where shell lime and fine sand are easily available.
a) Surface crazing-is due to excessive shrinkage caused by drying. b) In order to prevent this, it is necessary to limit the differences in shrinkage, as below:
a>
b)
The first coat of lime plaster shall be applied as in 2.6 (d). This shall be allowed to set for 2 or 4 days and then the surface scoured thoroughly in diagonal lines crossing each other. The plaster shall be kept constantly watered till it is~nearly set and then the second and third coats be applied as in 2.6 (e) and (f). On this coat, a mix specified below about 5 mm thick shall be applied to an exact level surface with long wooden floats or where required by curved moulds. The surace of the undercoat may be watered, if necessary, before applying this coat. 12 parts by volume Shell lime (slaked) Fine white sand 9 parts by volume Powdered marble 1 part by volume
Works
2.9.1 Repairs.
2.7 Curing
2.8.1 Madras Plaster
fine. The marble also filtered through musbe mixed with water wetted ftr 2 days.
1) Use well graded materials; 2) Ensure thorough grinding of mortar and 3)
thorough mixing of constituents; Observe carefully the time intervals between successive coats so that each coat undergoes a portion of its shrinkage before the next coat is applied; and Avoid quick drying at initial stages.
4) 3 CEMENT FINISH
AND
CEMENT-LIME
PLASTER
3.1 General Cement plaster and cement plaster gauged with lime are widely used in the country for finishing of walls and ceilings. 245
SP62(S&T):1997 3.2 Materirils
e>Plastering
Cement~shall conform to IS 269 : 1989 or IS 455 : 1989 or IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 199 1 or any other as specified. Cfass B and Class C lime shall conform to IS 712 : 1984. Sand shall conform to IS 1542 : 1992.
0
3.3 Preparatory
Work
Preparation Plaster
3.3.1
of Background
8) for Application
of
of cornices, decorative features, etc, shall normally be completed before the finishing coat is applied. Holes in walls left by scaffolding shall be made good and plastered true, even and smooth in conformity with the rest of the wall. Where corners and edges have to be rounded off, this should be done along with the finishing coat, so that no sign of any joint shows out later.
3.5 Thickness
a) For the durability of the plaster or rendering, it is vital to obtain a satisfactory bond between the background and the first plaster coat and also to ensure that the bond is maintained subsequently. b) It is also important to clean the background; remove dust, laitance, etc. The background should be made rough and then moistened, joints shall be raked. Suction of the background should be suitably adjusted. The background shall be even. The strength and elasticity of plaster shall be compatible with the background. Precautions against discontinuity of the background should be taken to prevent cracking; the best treatment appears to be to separate the two backgrounds by a neat cut through the plaster at the junction. c) Brickwork or Hollow Block Background The masonry shall be allowed to dry out for sufficient period so that the initial drying shrinkage is fairly complete and suction adjustment is possible during plastering. Joints shall be raked out and projecting bricks trimmed off. Old brick work shall be thoroughly brushed down and low spots dubbed out by a mix similar to the first coat to be applied. d) Concrete Background - The surface shall be clean and rough. The surface shall be evenly wetted (not saturated) to provide correct suction. All projections shall be removed.
4 Finishing coats (and single coat work, when employed) shall be such minimum thickness that provides sufficient body material to harden -satisfactori!y under-site conditions in any particular case. The total thickness of two c_oat work, excluding keys and dubbing out shall be about 20 mm thick~and not more than 15 mm thick in case of in-situ concrete soffits. The thickness of three coat work shall be about 25 mm. The thickness of an individual coat shall be generally as recommended in Table 10.1. Table 10.1
S1 No. i)
No. of Coats
Recommended Plaster Mix and Thickness (Clause 3.5) Situation
of Plaster Single coat plaster
Mix Proportion by Volume (cement:lime:sand)
Both internal and external
I:03
I :0:4 1:0:6
Thickness
10 to 15 mm
1:1:6 1:2:9 ii)
Two coat plaster a) Backing coat
I :0:3 I :0:4
do
IO to i2 mm
1:0:6 l:1:6 b) Finishing coat
d0
; 9;;
to 6
3 to 8 mm
I :2:9 iii)
Three coat plaster
a) Base coat
3.4 Sequence
of Plaster
of Operations
4 For external plaster, the plastering operations may be started from the top floor and carried downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering operations may be started wherever the building frame and cladding work are ready and the temporary supports of the ceiling resting on wall or the floor have been removed. b) Constant supply of plaster shall be ensured. The first undercoat is then applied to ceilings and walls. It is an advantage to plaster the ceiling first ~to remove the scaffolding before the plastering work on the wall. 4 After a suitable interval, not more than 5 days, the second coat may be applied. After a further suitable interval, the finishing coat may be applied first to the ceilings and then the walls.
c>
246
b) Second coat c) Finishing coat
Very rough surface; both internal and external 1:0:3 1:0:4 1:0:6 1:1:6
; ;R;
lOto I5 mm
to 6
3to8mm
1:2:9 Fat lime and fine 3 to 5 mm sand or marble dust in equal proportions
NOTES
1 Where two or more coats are adopted, as far as possible the mix for undercoats should contain cozuse sand conforming to grading Zone II of IS 383 : 1970. 2 For single coat plaster the fineness modulus of sand should be, as far as possible I .5 and conforming to Zone IV of IS 383 : 1970. WhereDnly tine sand is available, the fineness modulus may be improved by mixing the required percentage of coarse sand. The strength of plaster mix reduces with the reduction in the fineness modulus of sand. 3 Other mixes of cement/lime and sand may also be adopted depending on the quality of sand available and local conditions provided the strength conforms to any of the above mixes.
SP62(S&T):1997 3.6 Number of Coats
Number of Coats
Background
a) The ideal number of coats, where practical, is two, namely, the undercoat followed by finishing coat. This is possible on reasonably plane backgrounds of brick, concrete and similar materials. However, for very rough surfaces, such as, rough stone masonry, three coat plastering may be necessary. Metal lathing requires three coat plaster finish. Renovation work on wooden laths should also be carried out in three coats.
9
2 or 1
Brickwork or hollow clay tiles
2or 1
ii) Concrete, cast in-situ iii) Building blocks
2or 1
iv) Wood or metal lath
3 or2
v) Fibre building boards vi) Wood-wool slabs
201-I 2or i
vii)
Cork slabs
2or I
viii)
Uneven rough stone masonry
3 or 2
b) A summary of background data for internal plastering is given in Table 10.2.
The range of coats for different backgrounds is as follows:
Table 10.2 Data for Internal Plastering (Clause 3.6) Sl No.
Class
Type
(1)
(2)
(3)
i) Solid
a) Dense clay bricks and blocks
Drying Shrinkage Movement (4) Negligible
Characteristics
Low suction and poor
(7)
May require more than raking joints bonding agents, spatterdash or wire. mesh or special plasters
Note I
b) Normal clay brick and blocks
.Negligible
Moderate to high suction and reasonable key
Rake joints unless key provided
Note 2
c)
Low to high differential thermal movement varies with aggregate
Suction generally low but varies according to aggregate and water cement ratio poor key
Unless keyed use spatterdash, bonding treatment or special plasters
Note 3
d) No tines concrete
Varies from low to moderate. Varies with aggregate
Low suction andgoodkey
None
-
-e) Open textured concrete with light weight aggregate
Moderate to high
Low suction and good key
None
Note 4
Moderate to high
Variable suction
May need treatment with bonding agent to provide key
Note 5
Moderate to high
Moderate to high suction, reasonable
May be necessary to reduce suction unless special plasters are used
Note 6
None other joints scrimmed
Note 7
f)
Dense concrete, either . precast or in-situ
Close textured concrete blocks
g) Aerated concrete
key Slab
Remarks
(6)
(5)
key
ii)
Preparation of Surface
a) Wood-wool
High but generally fixed dry ‘and may also be restrained
Low suction andgoodkey
247
SP62(S&T):1997 Table 10.2 (1)
iii)
iv)
(2)
Boards
Metal lathing
Concluded (7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3) b) Strawboard
-
No key
Key can be provided by use of bonding treatment or wire netting or metal iathing. Joints should be scrimmed
-
c) Cork
-
Low suction key variable
If the surface provides insufficient mechanical key a 1: 1 cement fine sand slutry should be brushed on and wire mesh fixed
-
a)
Negligible
Low suction, adequate key with suitable plasters
Joints scrimmed unless gypsum lath is used
-
b) Insulating tibreboard
High, but fixed dry and easily restrained
Low suction, adequate key with suitable plasters
Joints scrimmed
Note 8
c)
-
Low suction, adequate key with suitable plasters
None, other than joint scrimming when recommended by manufacturer
Note 9
-
Good key
None
-
Plasterboard
Expanded plastics
Metal and clay
NOTES 1 Spatterdash coat, 1:2 or 3 cement at least 6 mm in clear of surface.
: coarse sand should be allowed to harden before applying under coat. Wire mesh should be fixed
2 Should bc dry to minimize efflorescence. 3 Use bonding treatment or special plasters according to manufacturers’
recommendations.
4 Should be dry to minimize shrinkage movement. 5 Differential
thermal movement may be high with some aggregates.
6 Should be dry to minimize shrinkage movement. 7 When used as permanent shuttering special precautions are necessary. 8 Boards must be conditioned 9 Consideration
at site.
should be given to the strength of the board and the possibility of impact damage.
3.7 Application of Undercoats
b) Second Coat/Floating Coat - The surface of the first coat shall be dampened evenly, the second coat shall be 3 mm to 8 mm thick.
a) First Coat/Rendering Coat - The rendering coat shall be at least 10 mm thick and carried to the full length of the wall. Before it hardens it shall be roughened to provide key to the next coat. The coat should be trowelled hard and tight.
c) Finishing Coat
1) The second coat shall -be dampened. 2) Coloured cement work - The pigment may be intimately ground with cement clinker, or pigments are added to the white cement or ordinary grey cement to get the required shade.
On smooth concrete walls, the surface shall be roughened and then the first coat shall be dashed on it.
248
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 4.2.4 Machine Applied Finishes
3) In case of coloured cement plastering, waterproofing compounds should be added on the undercoats to minimize the risk of efflorescence.
There are various types, mainly proprietory materials and processes operated by specialists. The types are as follows:
3.8 Curing
a) Finishes in which the material is thrown at random - These have an open porous structure, behave similarly to hard-applied scraped finishes and are equal to the latter and to handthrown finishes in water proofness, durability and resistance to cracking and crazing.
a) Each coat shall be cured for a maximum period of 7 days and-shall be kept damp till the next coat is applied. b) After completion of the finishing coat, the plaster shall be kept wet at least for 7 days.
b) Finishes which are applied by gun spray These give low density porous finishes.
4 EXTERNAL RENDERED FINISHES
There are other finishes solely applied by means of cement gun under pressure which produce somewhat similar appearance to roughcast but less attractive. They are more dense and therefore give very effective protection.
4.1 General ‘Rendering’ denotes generally external plaster and allied finishes, plain or textured, applied for the purpose of protection and decoration. Rendered finish can withstand different exposure conditions, such as, severe or moderate exposure to rain; dusty, clear or corrosive atmosphere, or subject to large variations in temperature or other climatic cycles. Rendering increases, durability and ensures better performance.
4.3 Nature of Background in Relation to Choice of Rendering Broadly the background may be classified under the following types so far as application of rendering is concerned:
Plain internal finishes are covered in 2 and 3 of Part 1 of this Chapter.
a) Dense, strong and smooth materials; b) Moderately strong and porous materials;
4.2 Types of Rendered Finishes
c) Moderately weak and porous materials;
4.2.1 Trowelled or Floated Plain Finishes
4 No-lines concrete; and
Steel trowelled finishes are not recommended for external renderings. Plain floated finishes require a high standard of workmanship to minimize the risk of cracking, crazing and irregular discolouration.
d Lathing or other similar backing materials. The characteristics of these backgrounds are given in Table 10.3. 4.4 Recommended Mix Proportions
4.2.2 Scraped or Textured Finishes, Hand Applied Scraped or textured finishes are generally less liable to crack or craze than plain finishes and are easier to bring to a uniform appearance; this is specially important when coloured renderings are used. Although rough texture offers more lodgement for dirt, it tends to an evenness of discolouration; rain water is distributed reducing the risk of penetration through the rendering.
Mixes suitable for different types of renderings are given in Table 10.4. Where alternate mixes are given selection shall be made on the following considerations: a) The mix for each successive coat shall never be of a type richer in cement than the mix used for the coat to which it is applied; and
4.2.3 Hand-Thrown Finishes, Rough Cast and Dry-Dash, etc
t
b) Richer type of mix shall be~preferred in winter conditions.
These finishes have all the advantages of scraped or textured finish. Under severe conditions of exposure these are more satisfactory from weather proofing, durability, reistance to cracking and crazing than the types as in 4.2.1 and 4.2.2.
-4.5 Preparatory Work 4.5.1 Independent scaffolding may be used wherever possible to avoid put log holes.
249
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 Table 10.3 Backgrounds for Renderings (Clause 4.3) SI Backing Materials No.
Strength
Porosity and Suction
i) Poured cement conciete
ii) Cement concrete blocks
Strong
Low
Moderately strong
High
Sometimes weak
Large voids, a few small pores, capillarity absent; suction low -
iii) iv) Bricks, ordinary porous type
v) No-fines concrete
vi)
Lathing
Shall be strengthened
Mechanical Key and Adhesion
Resistance to Penetration, Protection Required
Roughening, moistening and sometimes treatintingthe surface with cement and grout (1:l) is necessary Satisfactory; if suction is irregular use cement and sand mix 1:1 over the surface Very satisfactory
Sufficient resistance;no further treatment apart from rendering
Sufficient resistance, no further treatment apart from rendering
Purpose is to provide key
Two coats of rendering are necessary. First coat shall be of relatively impervious mix
Table 10.4 Recommended Mixes for External Renderings (Clause 4.4) Background
Type of
Material
Finish
Type of Mix Recommended for Given Exposure f
Conditions A
,
Firstand Subsequent
Final Coat
Undercoat .
rs
/ Severe
Moderate
Light
Severe
Moderate
, Light
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
I
(1)
(2)
Dense and strong
Wood-float Scraped or Textured
1 2
:
20r3 2or3
:.
:
2, 3 itr 4 20r3
Roughem Dry-dash
:
55
5
-6
-6
-6
and porous Moderately weak and porous
Wood-float Scraped or Textured
2
3
4
Moderatelystrong
No-fines concrete
Metal lathing or expanded metal
’
Same as for undercoats
-
1
Wood-float Scmped or Textured Roughcast Dry-dash
5 5
5 5
:
I
1
1
:
:
5
3or4 3or4
:
20r3 2or3
6
6 -
6 -
2
2
2
6 -
6 -
6 -
-
+
Wood-float Scraped or Textured Roughcast Dry-d&
NOTES
1 Mixtypes.Type1-1:0:4,Type2-1:0:5to6,Type3-1:1:6to7,Type4-1:2:9to10,Type5-1:0.3,Type6-1:3 Types 1 to 5 shall-consist of cement:lime:sand
by volume; Type 6 shall consist ofcement, coarse aggregate of size 6 to 12 mm by volume.
2 For special mixes for high sulphate backgrounds
(see Annex A).
3 Where alternate sand contents are shown, the higher one may be used if the sand’is coarse or well graded and lower sand content may be used of the sand is fine.
*
SF’ 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 45.2
Preparation of Background
2)
a) The background
shall be brushed with a stiff bristle or wire brush. Laitance if any on fresh concrete shall be removed.
b) The baekground shall be roughened and moistened. Joints in masonry shall be raked to a depth of 1 cm.
c) Adequate time shall be allowed between erection and application of rendering to make the surface suitable for suction adjustment. The backing shall be wetted, if it is dry, for this purpose; it shall not be soaked but dampened evenly.
4 Ensure evenness of background before applying rendering.
e) Differential movements of mixed backgrounds of Rendering Coats
The moistening shall commence as soon as the plaster has hardened; the surface shall be kept wet for at least 7 days by using a fine fog spray. Soaking of wall shall be avoided. -
5.1 General
4 General -When
using high alumina cement, the work shall not be done in hot weather. Between coats, give 24 h interval in hot and dry weather and more in cold weather.
b) First Undercoat - This may be applied either by laying or throwing from the trowel. It shall be as uniform as possible up to a thickness of 8 to 12 mm. It shall be rough and then combed and scratched to provide a key to the next coat.
c) Subsequent undercoat, if necessary, may Abe laid similarly to (b).
d) Plain Finishing Coats - The finishing coat shall be not less than 3 mm or more than 8 mm thick; the coat shall be laid with a trowel and finished with a wood, felt, cork or other suitably faced float.
e) Scraped or Textured Coats - Various scraped or textured finishes can be~obtained by hand or machine application. The thickness of the final coat is governed by the texture required. For scraped finishes the final coat is of a thickness of 6 to 12 mm of which about 3 mm is removed in the scraping process. For textural finish the surface skin of the mortar shall be removed to expose the aggregate. Roughcast Finish -The final coat, the mix of which shall be quite wet and plastic, is thrown on by means of a trowel or scoop. Dry-Dash Finish 1)
4.7 Curing
5 EXTERNAL FACING AND VENEERS STONE FACING
shall be provided for. 4.6 Application
The aggregate used for dashing shall be well washed and drained. 3) To ensure satisfactory bond between the dashing and mortar, the aggregate may be slightly tapped into the mortar with a wood float or to a trowel. h) Machine-Applied Finishes - All damaged adjacent surfaces shall be masked. The finish shall be applied at such a rate as to ensure the desired texture.
For this finish the undercoat shall be up to a thickness of 8 mm and slightly pressed. 251
Facing with stones of various types like marble, granite, lime stone,~etc, is a popular external finish. Therefore, these require careful fixing techniques involving proper preparation, appropriate choice of fixing devices and weather proof construction. Fixing accessories, like cramps, dowels used in facing work are commonly of copper alloys but also of aluminium alloy, plastics, etc. 5.2 Materials
a>Facing
Stone - The stone shall be sound, dense and free from defects which impair strength durability and appearance. The facings may be of marble, granite, syenite, basalt, limestone, sand stone or slate. Limestone slabs from Sahabad, Taiduran, Kotah and Yerraguntla of 20 mm thickness and above are used.
In case of sandstone, patches or streaks shall not be allowed; however scattered spots of 10 mm diameter may be allowed. Marble facings (blocks, slab and tiles) shall conform to IS 1130 : 1969. The thickness of stone veneer shall not be less than 20 mm.
b) Cramps - The material for cramps shall have high resistance to corrosion under conditions of dampness and chemical action of mortar in which it~is embedded. They may be of copper alloyed with zinc, tin, nickel, lead and aluminium or stainless steel. Aluminium H9 alloy in W condition (see IS 737 : 1986) may be used for cramps.
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 c) Metal Angle Supports - Mild steel angle supports may be used; they should be protected from corrosion. d) Cement shall conform to IS 269 : 1989, IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1991 or any other as specified. Sand shall conform to IS 2116 : 1980 and lime to IS 712 : 1984 and SURKHZ to IS 1344 : 1981. 5.3 Types of Facings a) Facings
which the backing do tribute to the capacity of the
b)
to hold the units in position and also to support the unit transferring the weight to the backing.
5.4.1 Supporting arrangements shall be as shown~in Fig. 10.1 A to 10.1 H; cramps may be attached to the sides (Fig. 10.1 A and lO.lB), or top and bottom (Fig. lO.lC, Fig. lO.lD, Fig. lO.lE andFig. lO.lF), or sides and bottom (Fig. lO.lG and Fig. lO.lH). 5.4.2 Facings Integrally Bonded to Backing The attachment for integral bond should be either:
are not integrally bonded with not generally appreciably constability and load bearing wall.
b) Facings which are integrally bonded with the backing so that both together contribute to the stability and load carrying capacity of the wall in which at least 15 percent of the face consists of bonding stones extending up to 10 cm into the backing. 5.4 Fixing the Facings with Cramps Cramps may be used either: a) to hold the facing units in position only and transfer the weight of the unit to the facing beneath; or
a) the facing unit contains projections~which are mechanically bonded with the backing and supporting unit; or b) by means of masonry bond or keying to the backing, or c) a combination
of both (a) and (b).
5.5 Joints The joints between units should be finished flush, tuck, ruled, square, weathered-struck or rebated as in Fig. 10.2 Expansion joints in -the backing shall be carried through in the~facing. The joints may be sealed with appropriate joint sealing compounds, to prevent ingress of moisture.
10.1A Side Attachment
10.1B Side Attachment
10.1C Top and Bottom Attachment
10.1 D’Top and Bottom Attachment
10.1 E Top and Bottom Attachment
10.1 F Top and Bottom Attachment
10.1G Side, Top and Bottom Attachment
10.1H Side, Top and Bottom Attachment
NOTE - Cramps shown in diagrams ‘A-H’ are arranged for facings with the longer sides vertical. For facings having the longer sides horizontal, cramps wouldbe positionedto suitthe alteredproportions of the facings.
FIG. 10.1 DIAGRAMATICARRANGEMENTS OFCRAMPSFOR ATTACHINGFACINGSTO BACKINGWALL 252
SP62(S&T):1997
FIG.
10.2 TYPESOF FINISHESFORJOINTS
5.6 -Fixing of Stone Facings The stone facings shall be wetted before laying. While applying mortar for fixing the facings in position, no chips or fillings of any sort shall be used. The facings may be fixed according to the different types of arrangements (see 5.4.1) and shown in Fig. 10.3. In case of load bearing cramps (designed to carry the load), the holes in the backing shall be
enlarged to improve the anchorage of the cramp. During fixing, cramps shall not be bent, unless provided for in the design. 5.6.1 Use of stone dowels and metal pins for fixing veneering to wall are shown in Fig. 10.4. Cramps illustrated in Fig. 10SA shall not be used for load bearing purposes. Details of copper pin dowel is shown in Fig. 10.5, details of metal and stone cramps are as in Fig. 10.6.
FIG. 10.3 TYPIS OF CRAMPSFORSTONEFACINGS
253
SP62(S&T):1997 /-BRICK
BACKING
rBRlCX
GUN METAL CRAMP7
BACKING
FIG. 10.4 DETAILSOFFIXINGSTONEVENEERING
10.5A
10.56
All dimensions incentimetres.
FIG. 10.5 COPPERPINDOWELS
HOLE FOR ATTACHING HANNEL TO FORMWORX METAL
CRAMP
h
STONE VENEERING
6A MetalCramp
FIG. 10.6 CRAMPS 5.7 Finishing
of Joints Exposed joints shall be pointed with 1:2:9 mortar as specified, the thickness of joint shall not exceed 6 mm.
68 Stone Cramp
For a close but joint the thickness shall not exceed 1.5 mm. Crushed stone sand from the same stone as the facing unit is preferable as the aggregate in mortar.
254
a
4
r 3 s I
.
SP62(S&T):1997 6.3 Types of Facings and Fixing by Cramps
When distinct joints are necessary, a wiping of white cement~slurry or tinted white linseed oil-putty may be applied to the tightly butting slabs; but this shall not be used under severely exposed positions.
6.3.1 Facings and veneerings
Attached facings for use with backing as a safe means of attachment without essentially contributing to the stability of the load bearing properties of the wall, and
5.8 Ashlar Facing Facing with ashlar built integrally be as in Chapter 4.
with backing shall
Integrally reacting facings which are bonded with the backing and contribute to the structural stability and strength of the wall.
5.9 Control of Alignment Alignment shall be accurate to present a good appearance. Inaccuracies will easily show up. Masking may be attempted by treatment of joints, such as, by use of chamfered, rounded or rebated edge in place of a simple square edge.
6.3.2 Cramps
4 Using cramps to hold the facing units in posi-
6 EXTERNAL FACINGS AND VENEERS CEMENT CONCRETE
tion only, the weight of the unit being supported by the unit beneath, or
6.1 General
-b) Using cramps to hold the units in position and in addition to support the units thus transferring the load to the backing; or
Concrete slabs or precast blocks with different textures and finishes provide possibilities for a wide range of architectural treatment for external facing and are particularly suited for a wide scale adoption. While availability of natural stones is limited, concrete finishes can be made in a wide range of textures and colours.
c) The facing unit may contain projections which mechanically bond into the backing and support the unit; or
d) By means of masonry bond or keying to the backing; or
6.2 Materials
e>By combinations
a) Precast concrete blocks shall conform general-
Supporting arrangements by means of projections which bond mechanically into the facing is a common method. Supporting by cramps are as shown in Fig. 10.7A to 10.75. Cramps may be attached to its sides (Fig. 10.7A andB), or top and bottom (Fig. 10.7C to E), to its side, top and bottom (Fig. 10.7F to H), or in its centre (Fig. 10.7J). 6.5 Joints The joints between facing unns may be finished flush, tuck, ruled, square, weathered-struck or rebated as in Fig. 10.8. Where expansion joints are formed in the backing walls, they should be extended to the facing. The joints may be sealed with appropriate sealing compounds, to~prevent ingress of moisture.
b) The material for cramps shall have high resis-
I
,
of the above methods.
6.4 Supports
ly to IS 2185 (Part 1) : 1979; IS 2185 (Part 2) : 1983; IS 2185 (Part 3) : 1984 (see also Chapter 4), and in addition shall have special treatment in regard to durability, colourand surface textures for the exposed facing. The size commonly adopted for concrete facing slabs is 600 mm x 400 mm x 30 mm. The face finish of slabs shall also be adequately waterproofed. For obtaining various colours in the admixtures, reference may be made to IS 2114 : 1984 and also Chapter 9 regarding pigments to be used in concrete mixes.
.
may be of two types:
tance to corrosion under conditions of dampness and chemical action of mortar or concrete in which it is embedded. The cramps may be of copper, alloyed with zinc, tin, nickel and aluminium or stainless steel. Aluminium alloy H9 in W condition (see IS 733 : 1983) may also be used for cramps.
6.6 Fixing Precast Concrete Slab Facings
C>Metal angle supports used shall be protected from corrosion.
d) Cement shall conform to IS 269 : 1989, IS 455 : 1989, IS 1489 (Parts 18z 2) : 1991 or any other as specified. Sand shall conform to IS 2116 : 1980 and lime to IS 712 : 1984, surklin to IS 1344 : 1981.
The facings can be fixed with butt joints, single or double joggle joints or grouted joints as shown in Fig. 10.9 and Fig. 10.10. When the backing wall is of in-situ concrete it will be an advantage to use dovetailed non-corrosive metal channels cast vertically in the backing wall in which one end of the cramps fit, the other end being cranked or drilled for dowels, the cramps being set into the channel as the fixing proceeds.
255
SP62(S&T):1997
10.7A Side Attachment
10.78 Side Attachmeht
10.7C Top and Bottom
1O.fD Top and Bottom
Attaohmbnt
10.7E Top and Bottom Attachment
10.7F Top and Bottom Attachment
10.7G Side, Top clnd Bottom Attachment
10.7t-l Side, Top and Bottam Attachment
Attachment
10.7J Centre Attachment
NOTE- Cramps shownin diagrams‘A-H’nrearranged forfncingswiththe longer sides vertical. For facings having the longer sides horizontal, cramps would be positioned to suit the altered proportions of the facings.
FIG. 10.7 DIAGRAMATICARRANGEMENTS OF CRAMPSEORATTACHING FACINGSfo h~CKlNt3 WALLS
FIG. 10.8 TYPESOF FINISHESFORJOINTS
I 3
256 ; P 1”3
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
10.9A
10.9c
10.9D
FIG. 10.9 DETAILS OF CRAMP FOR PRECASTCONCRETEFACINGS
a) Buttjoint is the simplest form of joint and may be used when the facing unit has a projection into a backing to provide mechanical bond. It may also be used when it has no such projection with the arrangements, either for carrying the weight of the units by cramps or by the backing as shown in Fig. 10.7. b) In single joggle joint when side cramps are used they need only be single cramp as one side of the cramp is already held in position. The positioning of single cramp will be easier than that of a double cramp; when ledged facing is used in conjunction with an inverted joggle joint, probably cramps may not be necessary and the joint shall be as shown in Fig. 10.11.
c) Double joggle joint is not suitable for vertical joints as the sliding action necessary to engage the unit vertically will interfere with the proper bedding of the horizontal joint and the bond to the backing with mortar. This type of joint is suitable for horizontal joints; it locks the units to one another but cramps may be required to hold the units to the wall.
-ar’*
d) The grouted joints shall stabilize the facing system if applied to all horizontal and vertical joints. Crampsmay beusedforsupportingtheunit with the wall and also bearing load partially. 6.7 Control of Alignment The appearance of the finished wall will be easily marked by inaccuracies of alignment. Inaccuracies will to some extent be marked by the treatment of
i
I
SP62(S&T):1997
E
A2
83
B2
RAG BOLT7
D3
D2
FIG. 10.10 PRECASTCONCRETEFACING CRAMP AND JOINTDETAILS 7 EXTERNAL FACING AND WALL TILING AND MOSAICS
VENEERS
-
7.1 General Wall tiles provide a wide range of architectural treatment for external rendering. Generally the methods covered here for wall tiles and mosaics are a plicable -P to the unit of an area not exceeding 900 cm . Larger shapes and ,sizes of tiles and mosaics require special methods not covered herein. 7.2 Materials Tiles, mosaics and other materials shall conform to the following:
NOTE - The invertedjogglejoint at the top of the ledgeis suitableonlywhenthejoiningis appliedto a cavitywall.
4 Terrazzo tiles shall conform to IS 1237 : 1980. b) Ceramic glazed tiles shall conform to IS 777 : 1988.
FLG. 10.11CONCRETEFACINGS SUPPORTEDON LEDGES
c) Unglazed clay facing brick tile shall conform
joints, for example, by chamfered, slightly rounded or rebated edge in place of simple square edge. Where practical the backing shall be built simultaneously with the facings to maintain correct alignment of facings. Treatment of joints will avoid chipping due to handling.
4 e) For mortar, cement shall be to IS 269 : 1989
toIS
2691 : 1988.
Mosaics are of a variety of shapes and sizes.
or IS 455 : 1989 or IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1991 or IS 3466 : 1988 or any other as specified. Lime shall conform to IS 7 12 : 1984. Sand shall conform to IS 2116 : 1980 for
258
SP62(S&T):1997 mortar bedding and to IS floating coat and pointing. 7.3 Preparatory
1542 : 1992 for
Work
4 Sufficient time should elapse for complete initial drying and shrinkage of the background before application of floating coat. The surface shall be properly cleaned from dust and particles.
b) The surface should not be allowed to dry after wetting before application of the floating coat. The floating should keep pace with wetting and if necessary the surface shall be rewetted. Efflorescence or laitance shall be removed.
cl To provide an effective key for-surfaces contaminated with oil or grease special treatment by fixing a metal lath or wire netting shall be given. At least one-half of any smooth surface shall be removed to a depth of 3 mm either by hand or mechanically. Weakbackgrounds, which are unlikely to support a floating coat should be covered with a firmly fixed metal lathing or wire netting.
4 Movement of joints due to shrinkage of background and settlement of unit shall be provided for. Narmally these joints shall be at the level of every storey height horizontally and every 3 m vertically. They shall coincide with structural material changes, such as, top of slab for horizontal joint. Movement joints shall extend to depth of tile and bed and shall be minimum 6 mm wide. The joints shall be filled with cement mortar with about 15 percent gauging with lime putty. 7.4 Application Mosaics
of Floated
Coat for Tiles and
The purpose of floated coat or rendering is to form a surface suitable for application of tiling when the background is unsuitable for direct fixing of tiles.
d) The mix for bedding can be sand cement mortar or sand cement mortar with additives; I:4 mix should be adequate; additives can be plasticizer, waterproofing agents, etc. 7.5 Fixing of Tiles Tiles are fixed beginning at the uppermost level working downwards to avoid disfiguring, staining damage and subsequent cleaning. The tiles with non-porous bodies need not be soaked; tiles with porous bodies should be completely immersed in clean water at least for an hour before using. After soaking, the tiles shall be stacked tightly on a clean surface to dry. The tiles should be fixed on the wetted floated coat, they should be tapped back firmly into position so that the bed is covered entirely by the tile. The thickness of bed should be between 6 to 12 mm after fixing the tile. Uniform spacing between tiles should be obtained by using spacer pegs as the work progresses. Any adjustment of the tile shall be made within about 10 min. Ensure that the surface of tiling shall be true and flat. Cleaning shall not be started before 1; h after fixing. Grouting or pointing of tiles should not be carried out, until the day after the tiles have been fixed. A waterproofing agent may be added to the grouting mix. The grout should be applied with a squeeze working back and forth over the area until all the joints are completely filled; all the surplus grout should be removed from the tiles and polished. Pointing would be similar to grouting, except that a small portion of fine sand should be added to the mix. 7.6 Fixing of Ceramic Mosaics
a>Mosaics
mortar (volume) for smooth and moderately strong backgrounds, such as, high density bricks or blocks, precast or in-situ stone, etc. To improve workability and thus to aid application and finishing, a small portion of hydrated lime may be added to the mix; for I:3 cement mortar by volume, one-fourth lime by volume may be added.
shall be assembled in the form of sheets or varying mixes, the separate pieces of mosaic glued face down to any suitable material such as, paper, nylon, adhesive strips, etc. The paper strips. etc should be easily removable after fixing has taken place. All dimensions be checked out so-that no difficulty would arise in setting it out. Where mosaic has to be applied to a floated coat, the surface shall be slightly scratched and finished with a wood float.
c) Thickness of each floated coat should not be
b) The bedding mortar may be 10 mm thic-k.
b) Mix for the floated coat shall be 1:3 cement
more than 10 mm; the float shall be even and preferably scratched to provide a key for the bedding mortar.
Before bedding the mosaic, the fixing side of the mosaic sheet shall be grouted with a neat cement slurry.
. L
SP62(S&T):1997 c) After the sheets have been firmly beaten into
8.3 Preparatory Work
the facing, paper and glue sheets removed and, the final straightening done, a grout shall be rubbed over the surface to fill the voids in the joints and then cleaned down. After the cement in the joints has hardened, the whole surface may be washed down with a solution of 10 percent hydrochloric acid and 90 percent water and finally cleaned with water.
a)
b) Joint thickness shall be of about 6 mm. All vertical joints shall be staggered, particularly where both sides of the wall are covered.
Table 10.5 Spacings for Support and Fixing of Rigid Wall Boards
7.7 Fixing of Marble Mosaics
(Clauses 8.3 and 8.4)
The fixing shall be the same as in 7.6 with the exception that the back of the mosaics, after applying the cement grout into the joints, shall be covered with a layer of two parts of fine sand and one part of cement to the level of the thickness. This is due to the variation in thickness of marble slabs. 8 WALL
SI No.
Type of Board
(1)
(2)
i) Gypsum board
COVERINGS board, particle etc ii) board, Fibre building
8.1 General Wall coverings such as building boards, sheets, etc, are extensively used in construction of light partitions. They are also used on solid wall buildings to obtain various decorative finishes which are easier to install and maintain than traditional plaster and allied finishes. The selection of these boards depends on appearance and performance requirements, methods of fixing and joining, different types of boards, etc. The boards generally used are gypsum plasterboards and wall boards; fibre building boards, plywood and blockboard; chip boards particle boards; asbestos cement wall boards and multiple layer coverings.
board, etc iii) iv)
The materials Standards:
shall conform to the following
b)
12 20 10
500 600 I 400
75
150 to 200
10
12 16 6.9 6
500 150 300 600 I 400 400 150 to 200 150 to 200
10 -
or 2.50 mm are
.4 lhxmg ot Boards Gypsum boards may be fixed as in Fig. 10.12. The joints may be filled with finishing material, such as, gypsum plaster or any other material recommended by the manufacturer. After filling the joints, a thick skin of finishing materials shall be spread 50 mm on either side of the joint and on to it shall be trowelled dry, a reinforced scrim cloth about 100 mm wide; or the joints may be left open as desired.
Indian
a) Boards 303 : 710 : 1328 7316
Plywood, blockAsbestos board
Minimxm Nail Spacing Thick- Spacing Centre to Centre Edge of ness (mm) S”(“m”ts ;tEdges Cl-y at Supports Nails (7) (5) (6) (3) (4) 9.5 400 12.5 500 1 100 to 1.50 100 to 150 10 15 600
NOTE-Nails with shank diameter 2.00.2.24 commonly used.
8.2 Materials
IS IS IS IS
The spacing of supports and fixing rigid wall coverings shall be as given in Table 10.5.
b) For fibre building boards (see Fig. 10.13). The 1989 1976 : 1982 : 1974
boards shall be stored for 24 h before fixing. The studs and grounds for fixing shall be spaced as given in Table 10.5 The joints may be open butt joint at least 3 mm wide. Various types of joints shall be as in Fig. 10.14.
Common commercial plywood Marine plywood Veneered decorative plywood Decorative plywood
Fixing Accessories IS451 : 1972 IS 459 : 1992 IS 723 : 1972 IS 1658: 1977 IS 1659: 1990 IS 2095 : 1982 IS 2098 : 1964 IS 3087 : 1985 IS 3097 : 1980 IS 3129 : 1985 IS 3348 : 1965 IS 3478 : 1966 IS 5509 : 1980
c>Plywood,
blockboard, etc, covering may be fixed as in Fig. 10.15. The edges of plywood shall be protected before fixing with a suitable sealer. The fixing may be done in panels; horizontal panelling may be done in bays not exceeding 2.7 m in length; vertical panelling may be done in bays not exceeding 0.9 to 1.2 m. Joint for plywood and blockboard boards shall be as in Fig. Fig.lO.16 and Fig. 10.17 respectively.
Wood screws Asbestos sheets (corrugated) Nails Fibre building board Block boards Gypsum~plaster board Plain asbestos sheets Particle board medium density Particle board (veneered) Particle board (low density) Fibre insulation boards Particle boards (high density) Fire retardant plywood
4 Particle boards may be fixed as in (c). d Fixing asbestos cement board shall Abe as shown in Fii. 10.18 and Fig. 10.19 for flat and corrugated sheets respectively.
260
SP62(S&T):1997 For better strength and stability, successive boards may be fixed in perpendicular direction to the one below it, or if all the layers are fixed vertically, the joints of each layer shall not occur over the joints of the preceeding layer.
When multiple layers of coverings have to be done the first covering shall be fixed as in (a) to (e) above. Further covers shall be bonded by suitable adhesive to the first cover or as specified by the manufacturer. /
STUD
HEADER BEHIND
AElNFORClNf3 SCRM CLOTH
NAILS 1omm
FROM EDGE
FIG. 10.12 FIXING GYPSUM BOARDS
NAILS IsoTo2oo mm02
10.13A
10.138
Boards with Longer Sides Vertical
Boards with Longer Sides Horizontal
FIG. 10.13 FIXING FIBREBOARDWALL SHEATHING i
261 ‘i
- ,i:
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
BEVELLEO
METAL
EOGE
SNAP
ON
BEVELLEO
OPEN
WOOD INLAV
WOOD COVER STRIP
WOO0
INSERT
INSER 1 MOULO
FIBREBOARD COVER STRIP
-lr REBATED
OPEN
BEVEL
LAPPED
IXVELLED
4
METAL
EDGE
J
MOULDED
TREATMENTS
J
METAL
COVER
FIG. 10.14DETAILS01;FIBREBOARDJOINTS
FIG. 10.15FIXING PLYWOOD WALLSHEATHING
262
STRIPS
STRIP
SP62(S&T):1997 HEADLESS
NAILING
HEADLESS
WOOD
NAILING
-INSERT
INSERT HEADLESS
WOOD
COVER
STRIP
MO!JLD
NAILING
OPEN ;S NAILING
‘FRAMING
METAL
STRIP
OPEN
NOTES : EDGE SEALING
: Protect all the edges of the board using a suitable sealant or edge lipping to prevent moisture absorption.
SUGGESTED SEALANT : For 6 mm Ply : Epoxy resin, nitrocellulose lacquer. SUGGESTED LIPPING
: Veneers - 1.5 mm thick, solid wood strips, P.V.C. bands, elastic laminates, aluminium strips. FIG. 10.16
DETAILS OF PLYWOOD JOINTS
PANELLING
Lf3LOCKBOARD
L BEADING
1
BUTT
V-BUTT
BLOCKBOAR
OECORATIVE
BATTENS
HAROWO FRAMfNG
PANEL“NG
00
BLOCKBOARD ING
I- PANELL
BLOCK BOAR0 LIPPING FIXED WI SYNTt-iETI GLUE
CORNERS
HARO WOOD FRAMING
LIPPING
NOTES
OPEN
OF EOGES
:
EDGE SEALING
: Protect all the edges of the~board using a suitable sealant or edge Iipping to prevent moisture absorption.
SUGGESTED
: Veneers - 1.5 mm thick,solid wood strips, P.V.C.bands, elastic laminates,aluminium strips.
LIPPING
FIG. 10.17 DETAILS OF BLOCKBOARD JOINTS
264
-V
‘.
$ L a r iv1
-.
SP62(S&T):l997
r
METAL
CHANNEL
SHEET7,
AP
FIG. 10.18 FIXING FLAT ASBESTOS-CEMENT SHEETS IS 2098 : 1964 (Plain) IS 459 : 1992 (Corrugated)
Asbestos cement building board
g)
Wooden cover fillets for ceiling
W Cloth ceiling 3 Aluminium
FIG. 10.19 FIXING CORRUGATEDASBESTOSCEMENT SHEETS
k) Expanded polystyrene
m>Mineral
9 CEILING COVERINGS
wood board
9.2 Preparatory Coverings are fixed on to the ceiling to give decorative appearance, to conceal projections, such as beams occurring underneath floor slab, to provide a false ceiling, to obtain special accoustic effects, insulation against heat and cold, etc.
a) Insulating
board
ceiling
The f;abrication and fixing of timber ceiling is covered by IS 5390 : 1984 (see Annex B).
9.1 General
9.1.1 Fixing details using other are covered herein:
sheet ceiling
the following
Work
a) Wooden or metal framework, consisting of longitudinal,bearers and cross bearers by means of which the ceiling board are supported, shall be designed for structural strength and stability as per IS 883 : 1970.
boards and
b) The suspenders from RCC slabs for supporting the framework for false ceiling shall be of sufficient length to reach the ceiling frame.
IS 3348: 1965
c) Ceiling boards, less than 5 kg/m2 in mass, can be directly fixed to RCC by means of fixing plugs, bolts, etc.
b) Hardboard
IS 1658: 1977
c) Plaster of Paris Ceiling & Plaster ot Paris tiles
IS 2547 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1976
d) Gypsum plaster board
IS 2095 : 1982
e) Plywood and blockboard
IS 303 : 1989, IS 1328 : 1982 (Plywood) IS 7316 : 1974, IS 710:
d) Where double ceiling boards are provided, such as, in air conditioning installations, cold storage rooms, the first layer of ceiling board may be fixed to the ceiling with plugs or other fixing devices (see 10) in the concrete slabs at required spacings. e) Typical details of framework and methods of its suspension are shown in Fig. 10.20 and Fig. 10.21.
1976,1S 1659 : 1990 (Blockboard)
265
AL
AND
60mm
MS FLAT--/
LBOLT
~-CEILING
CROSS DEEP
AND NUT
LANGLE IRON CLEATS FIXED AT EVER’/ CROSS JUNCTION
FIG. 10.20 DETAILS OF CEILING FRAME SUSPENDED FROM RCC SLAB
ROD HANPJER
A SW HANGER WlTH ANGLE RUNNER
B ROD HANGERWlTH PIPE RUNNER
C ‘STRAP HANGER WITH mnCAL - SumG Ai3qANGEMEp.g
E FIXING OF CEILING BOARD WITH STUD CLAMP
/
F ANGLE AND TEE CEILING MEMBER SUSPENDED FROM ROD HANGER
VARlOU5 PIF OF CLIPPINC RE”IP.LI _ _ . _ __ i,._--_
:
,
‘\@ , 5
--I
G HORlZONTAL~LlDlNQ HANGER WITH DC4JBl.E ANGLE TRUSS MEMBER
7
H SUSPENSION OF CEILING 5OARD WITH VARIQUS TYPES OF CLIP5
Different methods of attachmentof hangersto Top Members are illustrated in A, B, D and G, and to Ceiling Frames are illustrated in A,C,D,FandG. Use of clips, studsand hooks for fixing bolts are illustrated in H aad E.
FIG. 10.21 DETAILS SHOWING SOME TYPICAL METHODSOF SUSPENSIONOF CEILING FRAME FROM STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 266
SP62(S&T):1997 9.3 Fixing of Coverings 9.3.1 Insulating Building Board
a>Materials
- The timber for framework and beading shall be treated and chosen from any of the species in IS 3629 : 1986. Insulating building boards may be particle boards (low density) to IS 3129 : 1985 or fibre insulating boards to IS 3348 : 1965. Nails, conforming to IS 723 : 1972 shall be long enough to cover the thickness of board plus 25 mm. Galvanized lost head nails to IS 6738 : 1972 of 2.80 mm dia may be used when joints are left exposed. Where joints are to be covered by beading, galvanized felt nails of 2.50 mm dia conforming to IS 6730 : 1972 may be used. Wood screws shall conform to IS 6760 : 1972.
b) Fixing - Cut the boards to the required size. The edges shall be slightly sand papered to make them smooth. The framework with battens, size ranging from 60 to 75 mm shall then be fixed. Aluminium frame may also be used instead of timber frame. The building board shall then be fixed with lengths parallel to all joints centered over the framing members. Where the joints are to be covered the boards shall be spaced 3 to 6 mm apart. Where the joints are to be exposed the sheets shall be butt jointed with their edges abutting each other. The boards are first nailed to intermediate framing member proceeding from the centre of the board outwards, the edges being nailed last.
b) Fixing 1) The framework and board shall generally be fixed as in 9.3.1 (b). Wood screws may be used. 2) The joints may be normally filled with plaster. If the hardboard has to be cement plastered the joints shall have a gap of 6 mm covered with scrim and bedded in cement plaster before the finishing coat is applied. 3)
9.3.3 Plaster of Paris
4 Materials- Timber for framing shall conform to IS 5390 : 1984. Plaster of Paris shall conform to IS 2547 (Parts 1 and 2) : 1976. The other materials shall be as in 9.3.1 (a).
b) Fixing 1) In case of sloping roofs, wooden battens
1) Where joints are exposed, the outer row of
2)
3)
nails shall be at 100 mm centres and about 12 mm from edge of the sheet. The rows in the middle of the sheet shall be at 20 mm centres. Nails in the outer rows on either side shall be paired and not staggered. Nails shall be countersunk in the underside of the board. Where joints are to be covered with beadings, the procedure is the same as in (1) above, except that in the outer rows, the nails spaced at 200 mm may be staggered. The beadings shall then be fixed over the sheets with screws at 200 mm centres. The exposed side shall be truly level; joints truly parallel and perpendicular to the walls.
9.3.2 Hardboard a) Materials - Timber shall conform to IS 5390 : 1984. The hardboard shall conform to IS 1658: 1977. The other materials shall be as per 9.3.1 (a).
267
The finishing shall be as in 9.3.1(b) (3).
2)
3)
4)
of suitable section (50 mm x 60 mm) shall be firmly fixed as main supports, to the underside of the beams at required centres by means of bolts and nuts. In case of flat roofs, treated battens shall be securely fixed to the walls and pillars by holding down bolts and shall be fastened to the slabs above with iron straps or mild steel bars anchored therein. Cross battens (treated) of 50 mm x 40 mm at about 400 mm centres shall then be fixed at right angles to the main battens. The underside of the framework shall be true to planes and slopes. Aluminium frame may also be used if specified. Wooden strips or laths 25 mm x 6 mm shall be fixed to the cross battens in parallel rows with felt nails. The strips shall be butt jointed and joints staggered. Rabbit wire mesh shall be fixed with rails of a pitch of 150 mm to 200 mm to the underside of wooden strips. The wire mesh shall be straight, tight and true to planes and slopes without any sagging and slightly below the underside of the laths. Plaster of Paris shall be mixed with water to a workable consistency. The plaster shall be applied to the underside of laths over the rabbit wire mesh in suitable sized panels and finished to a smooth surface by steel trowels. The thickness over the laths shall be as specified but not less than 12 mm. Joints shall be finished flush; the surface shall be smooth and true to plane, slope or curve as required.
SP62(S&T):1997 9.3.4 Plaster of Paris Tiles
4
b)
cl
50 mm on either side and trowelled dry. When metal scrim is used, a stiffer plaster may be necessary. The joints may also be left open if desired.
Materials
- .Timber for making framework shall be from any species in IS 5390 : 1984. Plaster of Paris shall conform to IS 2547 (Parts 1 and 2) : 1976; thickness of tiles shall be not less than 12 mm. Hessian cloth shall conform to IS 2818 (Part 1) : 1990; hessian cloth shall be of an open webbed texture.
9.3.6 Plywood and Blockboard
of Tiles-Tiles of plaster of Paris reinforced with hessiancloth shall be prepared to the required size. The maximum size shall be limited to 750 mm in each direction. The tiles may be made on a glass sheet with wooden surrounds; a thin coating of non-staining oil may be given to the glass sheet for easy removal of tiles. Plaster of Paris shall be evenly spread to about half the thickness and then hessian cloth spread over it; on this, plaster of Paris is spread again to the full thickness. Tiles shall be allowed to set for an hour and then removed to dry and harden for about a week. A good tile will give a ringing sound when struck.
b)
Materials -
b!
Fixing -
Preparation
Fixing -
The timber frame shall be so made that each tile has supporting scantlings to fix them. Aluminium frame may also be used. Tiles may be fixed to the cross battens with 40 mm long brass screws to IS 6760 : 1972 at 200 mm centres. Ties may be laid adjacent to each other without leaving any gap. The screws shall be at least 15 mm away from the edge. Holes for screws shall be drilled. The countersunk heads of screws shall be covered with plaster of Paris and smoothly finished. When unbroken surface is desired, joints shall be filled with plaster of Paris and trowelled smooth.
Timber for framework shall conform to IS 5390 : 1984. Plywood shall conform to IS 303 : 1989 or IS 710 : 1976 or IS7316 : 1974 or IS 1328 : 1982~or IS 5509 : 1980. Blockboard shall conform to IS 1659 : 1990; screws shall conform to IS 6760 : 1972. The fixing shall be as in 9.3.1(b); except that for boards in thickness 4 to 10 mm the spacings may vary from 450 to 600 mm for longitudinal battens and 600 to 1 200 mm for cross battens; for boards above 10 mm thick, the spacings may be 600 to 900 mm for longitudinal battens and 900 to 1300 mm for cross battens. The spacing of fixing countersunk screws may be adjusted according to thickness of board. Joints if left open shall be filled with painters putty and brought to level; joints may also be left open. Thejoints may be rebated or tounge and grooved. The ceiling shall be finished by hand-sanding and waxed or polished or clear varnished or painted as required (see Chapter 15).
hbestos Cement Building Board
9.3.7
for framework catibe any a) Materials-Timber of the species in IS 5390 : 1984; asbestos board shall conform to IS 2098 : 1964; screws shall conform to IS 6730 : 1972. b) Fixing - Framework shall be fixed as in 9.3.1 (b). The asbestos board shall be laid truly parallel or perpendicular to the walls and shall be fixed to the battens with countersunk screws by using metal channels and clips. Holes shall be drilled at least 12 mm from edge. They should be butt jointed. If a gap of 3 to 6 mm between sheets is given the gap should be covered with wooden beading or similar material.
9.3.5 Gypsum Plaster Board
4
a)
Materials -
The boards shall conform to IS 2095 : 1982. Nails shall conform to IS 723 : 1972. The length of the nail shall be 30 mm for boards 10 mm thick and- 40 mm for 12.5 mm or 16 mm thick boards. Screws shall conform to IS 6730 : 1972. Steel screws without brass or nickel coating shall not be used. Screw sizes shall be 3.10 or.3.45 mm; length shall be 30 mm for 10 mm thick board and 35 or 40 mm for 12.5 mm and l-6 mm board.
No finishing treatment’is necessary. 9.3.8
Fixing - The frame work shall be fixed as in 9.3.1 (b). Joints may be 6 mm wide. Jointing may be in a decorative pattern. The joints may be finished with a filling of gypsum plaster or other materials; after filling the joint, a thick skin of the finishing material shall be spread
268
Wooden Cover Fillets Beading
a) Materials - Timber for framework may be any of the species of IS 5390 : 1984. Screws shall conform toIS 6730 : 1972. Beading shall be planed, smooth and true on the rear surface. It may be 12 mm x 40 mm or as specified. b) Fixing - The beading shall be fixed centrally over the butt joints between two timber planks with screws in two rows on either side of joint.
I’
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
b) Fixing - Adhesive shall be applied to the tiles
The junction of beading shall be fully mitred or as specified. The beadings shall be finished smooth.
and fixed to the framework. The white polysterene ceiling may Abe painted as specified.
9.3.9 Cloth
a>Material
- Timber for framework shall be as per IS 5390 : 1984. Bamboo of good quality may be used for framework. In general thick cloth can be used or as specified. Screws shall conform to IS 6730 : 1972 and nails to IS 723 : 1972.
9.3.12 Mineral Wood Board a> Materials - Timber for ceiling’shall be from IS 5390 : 1984; nails to IS 723 : 1972, screws to IS 6730 : 1972 and mineral wool to IS 3677 : 1985. b) Fixing - A metal ‘T’ grid shall be suspended first and mineral wool board may be cut to size and stuck with suitable adhesive. For timber framework, the mineral wool board shall be stuck with an adhesive. Similar procedure may be followed with local modifications, as necessary, for different ceilings.
b) Fixing -
The framework shall be securely spiked to the wall plaster/ceiling joints or beams. The cloth shall be wetted, stretched and nailed to the upperside of the framework. In case of bamboo framework, the cloth shall be tied to it without tearing. To prevent the cloth from blowing and flapping, wooden beadings shall be fixed. The cloth ~may be white washed and distempered.
9.3.10 Aluminium Sheet
10 FIXING DEVICES 10.1 Types The fixing devices covered are as below:
a> Materials - The framework may be made of aluminium ‘T’ grid and trays of aluminium alloy sheets 19000 or 31000 of IS 737 : 1986. The grid shall be made of extruded aluminium ‘T’ section of 63404lWa of IS 733 : 1983. The fillings shall be made out of aluminium or rust proofed steel.
b) Fixing -
The ceiling may be formed as an exposed grid or a concealed grid using the above sections. The aluminium false ceiling may be left asit is if anodized or painted with an acrylic resin paint.
9.3.11 Expanded Polystyrene a> Material - Expanded polystyrene shall conform to IS 4671 : 1984. Screws shall conform to IS 6730 : 1972. The framework may be of wood or metal.
-4 Expansion wall plugs, b) Expansion shells,
c>Caulked-in
anchor devices, and
d) Butt-in devices. 10.2 Fiiing Proper devices and tools ensure a neat fixing work with minimum effort and little damage, and the fixtures will have adequate strength and durability. Special devices are also available for resisting dampness, chemical attack, thermal effects, etc. Details of fixing devices are given in IS 1946 : 1961. Fixing devices, mentioned above are for solid walls. Devices for hollow walls are also coming into vogue. NOTE - Since the date of publication of this standard several new innovations have been introduced; the trade may be consulted for more information.
ANNEX
A
(Table 10.4) SPECIAL MIXES FOR SULPHATE BACKGROUNDS A-l GENERAL A-l.1 A separate support may be provided for the rendering
on backgrounds
with soluble sulphates. A
cement resistant to sulphate action may be used, namely sulphate resisting cement; or in very severe conditions, high alumina cement or blast furnace slag cement may be used.
i i: 9. $ it,
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 A-2 MIXES A-2.1 For sulphate resisting cement the mixes indicated in Table 10.4 may be used. Where alternatives are given, the richer ones shall be used. A-2.2 For high alumina cement, lime shall not be mixed. The mixes should be as below (see Table 10.4):
Use 1 part high alumina cement: 3 parts sand, by volume.
In place of Type 1 mix In place of Type 2 mix
Use 1 part high alumina cement: l/2 to 314 part zinc sulphate powder : 4 parts sand, by volume.
In place Of Type 3 m1x
Use 1 part high alumina cement: 1 part zinc sulphate: 5 to 6 parts sand, by volume.
ANNEX B (CZuuse9.1) FABRICATION B-l B-l.1
CONSTRUCTION
AND FIXING OF TIMBERCEILING
OF TIMBER CEILINGS
B-l.3
a) Fixirzg Ceilings - Planks shall be butt and beading jointed or overlap or half lap or tongued and grooved.
General
Timber ceilings are provided to give decorative appearance, to conceal air-conditioning or other service ducts and also to obtain accoustic effects and thermal insulation. B-l.2
b) Sloping Ceilings - The ceiling shall be fixed to the underside of rafters. c) Closed Ceiling - The ceiling shall be fixed to the underside of the ceiling joists.
Material
Timber for making planks shall be from any of the species given in Table 10.6 and the ceiling framework and beading shall conform to IS 3629 : 1966 appropriately seasoned and treated. Nails shall conform to IS 723 : 1972 and the wood screws to IS 45 1 : 1972. Suspenders may be mild steel flats or other material sections. The dimensions below:
Types
of timber units for ceiling may be as
d) The planks shall be fixed to the timber frame suspended from the slab. The surface of finished ceiling shall be truC and plane. Table 10.6 Species for Timber Ceilings (Clause B-1.2) Jarul
Machilus
Teak
Karl
Maniagwa
White Cedar
Bijasal
Katasih’s
Pali
White Chuglam
Chir
Kasi
Piney
Anjan
Axlewood
1) Timber scantling for ceiling and framework
60-75 mm thick x 50 mm wide
Cypress
Kindal
Rohini
2) Timber planks
15-20 mm thick x 100-150 mm wide
Deodur
K&co
Rosewood
Fir
Laurel
Satinwood
3) Beading
12 mm thick x 30 mm wide
Gurjan
Lendi
Sisoo
PART 2 WALLING 1 GENERAL 1.1 Walls and partitions covered herein:
2 REED WALLING of the foIlowing
types are
a) Reed walling to IS 4407 : 1967, b) No fines in-situ to IS 12727 : 1989, and c) Gypsum block partitions to IS 3630 : 1992.
2.1 General Reed walling is a traditional construction in certain parts of India; in Assam EKRA and NAL are used; in Punjab SARKANDA reed is used. In addition machine made reed boards are~also used. In these boards, reeds are considerably strengthened by binding together 270
SP62(S&T):1997 d) For cutting diagonally or in shapes combine the two methods in (a) and (c).
with galvanized wire. Reed walling~and roofing have advantages like thermal insulation and light weight and are found specially suited for earthquake resistant consEruction, where flexible light weight material is needed for walling (see Chapter 17). Use of reed walling will facilitate additional advantages of prefabricated construction particularly suited for panel filling, partitions and roof construction.
2.3.2 Joining the Reed Boards With the reeds vertical, the joining shall be done as in Fig. 10.23. 2.4 Fixing of Reed Board a ) Fixing of Partitions - Reed boards shall be fixed with reeds vertical to horizontal runner spaced at 1 m centres. The adjacent boards shall be butt jointed and the joint shall be located at the centre. Fixing shall be done with wood screws with a spacing of 30 cm. While fixing to frames, boards shall not be fixed into a groove. While locating the door and window openings, work should be carefully planned so as to keep cutting and wastage to a minimum.
2.2 Materials a) Reed boards, made by binding reeds with galvanized wire, are available in three different thicknesses of 2.5 cm,~4 cm and 5 cm. Preferred widths are 1 m and 2 m. The boards are generally used as below: Component
Thickness
For door and window panelling, for wall facing, for partitions and for ceiling
2.5 cm thick
For sloping and gabled roof’), for weather board partition walls, for fencing, for wall insulation, etc
4 cm thick
For panel walls of exterior use, for sloping and gabled roofs, for weather boards, etc
5 cm thick
The board of window sill shall be so cut that it covers half the frame runners on all sides (see Fig. 10.24). b) For roof construction, reed board shall be used for pitched roof as in Fig. 10.25 and not flat roof. 2.5 Fixing of Reeds for In-situ Wall Construction
4 Grooves, 15 mm wide shall be made in the timber frame and the reeds slipped into the grooves one by one. The reed walling may be stiffened by means of double bamboo slips 25 mm wide and not less than 6 mm thick spaced at around 40 cm apart. One slip shall be attached to each side of the reed and tied together. Reeds may be fixed with just sufficient space of 1cm between each other so that the mortar may be applied on one side for finishing so that it penetrates to the other side to form a key for plaster. All vertical timbers in walling shall have grooves (4 cm x 1.5 cm deep) to force plaster into it.
b) The reeds may be EKRA, KHASRA, NAL, SARKANDA. These reeds shall be cut from mature plant, which have their sheaths firmly attached; they shall be dried in the sun. 2.3 Preparatory 2.3.1
Work
Cutting of Reed Boards
Cutting of reed board shall be done as follows:
4 Cut each running wire half way between the required hook wire and the next one as in Fig. 10.22. After each running wire is cut, bend the ends tightly over the respective hooks. Remove the reeds which are left between two hook wires exposing the running wire on the underside of the board.
b) The reeds shall not be used for roofing, without making them into boards. Reed may, however, be used for thatching. 2.6 Finishing
b) Place the boards erect and cut the running wire on the other side and bend the cut ends over the hook wire.
c>Cutting
across the reed may be done with the use of a saw or a sharp broad chisel. Cutting shall not be done near the wire and at least 25 mm of the board~shall be left to cover as edge beyond the running wire.
Reed boards may be pebble-dash plastered or rough cast finished after fixing. Reed boards should be dry before applying plaster. The mix shall generally be cement mortar 1:6 applied in two coats not more than 15 mm, lime plaster mix may be 1:3 using class C lime of IS 712 : 1984; mud plaster may be as in Chapter 4. Waterproofing may be done using bitumen felts (see Chapter 12). The reed walling may also be painted it required.
‘) The spacing of purlins for roof shall not be more than 0.5 m centres.
271
SP62(S&T):1997
l-
‘%UNNlNG
-POSITION
LHOOK
WIRE
OF
CUT
Et&
WIRE
KY REEDS
BEING
REMOVED
FIG. 10.22 OPERATIONSFORCUTTING OF REEDBOARD
WIRE
1
0.6 mm ‘$ LACING WIRE
FIG.IO.23 DETAILSOF JOININGOF REED BOARD
BACK
SP62(S&T):1997 HORIZONTAL YEMSPR OF WINDOW
FRAME
I
-TOP MEMBER
OF
scnew
WINOOW
OR NAIL
FRAME PtAIN GALVANIZED SHEET PAlNTEO FOR PROTECTION
ROUGH
CAST
PLASTER
b -5Om THICIIREEDWARD \
TIMSLR POST
VERXAL
0UlYOE
HoRlZOtJTAL OF WINDOW /tumuONT*~ OF WINDOW /
PLASTER
rROUGN
NEMBER FRAME
NEM~ER FRAME FINISHED
CAST
SMOOTH PLAJN
PLA3TER
GAMNUED
FAINTED ROUGH
5Dmm
LVEI)TICAL TlYllER P0ST LVERTICAL
IIMBER
FOR CAST
THICK
SHEET PR0TECTION PLASTER
REED
BOARD
POST
FIG. 10.24 DETAILSOFCONSTRUCTIONFORTHEREEDWALLINGATTHESILLOFWINDOWS
FIG. 10.25 REEDBOARDRIDGINGFOR 3 GYPSUM BLOCK LOAD BEARING
PARTITIONS
-
NON-
ROOF
3.2 Materials a) Gypsum block shall conform to IS 2849 : 1983 for both soild and hollow blocks. The surfaces of the block shall be smooth or -scored; the scoring shall not be more than 5 mm deep.
3.1 General Gypsum block partitions are light in weight, fireproof and free from pest infestation. There is a scope for large scale use in multistoreyed construction. They are not suitable for external use.
b) Mortar shall consist of one part gypsum and three parts fine aggregate conforming to IS 383 : 1970 or sand by ~weight; sodium citrate in 213
--
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 proportionof0.25percentoftheweightofgypsum may be added as amtarder. For fine work, that is, work with fine mortar joints, the mortar may also consist ofgypsum and lime in the ratio of 1:3 by weight’with 0.25 percent of sodium citrate. c) Reinforcing material may be mesh, expanded metal ties, light gauge expanded metal, steel strips, etc. 3.3 Laying of Block
4 Gypsum block partitions shall not be wetted before~laying, however the surfaces in contact with mortar may be wetted, to reduce suction, with minimum quantity of water. b) Gypsum block partitions shall be built in half bond in true level and regular courses (see Fig. 10.26). The joints shall be as thin as possible. Where the partition is to be plastered, the joints shall be left roughly flush or may be raked out. d) Where possible, frames for openings shall extend from floor to ceiling to secure a positive fixing at both ends; they shall have a groove to receive the ends of blocks. Gypsum block lintel 0.5 m wide, may span the openings. The lintel blocks may span in an arch form also (see Fig. 10.27). At the ceiling the partition shall be secured and isolated with wedges as in Fig. 10.28. Cracking in partitions takes place due tomvariations in volume of blocks; this can be taken care of as in Fig. 10.29. h) Vertical joints may be reinforced as in Fig. 10.26. j> For strength and stability purposes the height of partition shall be limited to 36 times the thickness of block; except when lateral support is provided it shall not exceed 72 times the thickness. W The block may be finished with a rendering of gypsum plaster not less than 6 mm thick; other-
ci
wise it may be left as it is but cleaned down and any defects made good with neat gypsum plaster with mortar as in 3.2 (b). 4 NO-FINES 4.1 General No-fines cement concrete has highly permeable mass with large air spaces. It is an aggolmeration of coarse aggregate ~particles each surrounded by a coating of cement paste, up to about 1.25 mm thick. As the aggregates to be used is almost single sized, resulting in formation of enough voids and therefore light in weight and eliminates the rise of dampness. No-fines can be used in walls, foundations where eliminaton dampness is desirable. No-fines cement concrete can substitute brickmasonry where good bricks are not available. Further the thermal conductivity of wall made from no-fines concrete with conventional aggregate and a solid brickwall of the same thickness is about the same. 4.2 Materials
a>Cement
e>
/-
NOTE -
FIG. IO.26
CONCRETE
shall conform to IS 269 : 1989 or IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1991 or IS 455 : 1989 and IS 8041 : 1990 or any other as specified.
b) Aggregate should conform to IS 383 : 1970; the aggregate would be nominally graded from 40 mm to 20 mm. Whichever size is used, the proportions of oversized and undersized material shall be kept as low as possible; generally oversize and undersize material should not be used more than 5 percent and 10 percent respectively. used preferably broken at site; no unburnt bricks shall be used. Stone ballast may be used with a flakiness index of less than 15 percent.
c) Brick ballast may be
12 n-m Q STEEL BARS 40 cm LONG IN EACH CORE HOLE OF BLOCKS
Number of reinforcement bars will depend on number of holes in the block.
REINFORCINGOF VERTICAL JOINTSOF GYPSUM BLOCKS AS A SAFE GUARD AGAINST CRACKING
274
I”
SP62(S&T):1997 \600 x 300 METAL LATH BOTH SIDES7
L 631 ANCHOR 125 mm INTO JOINTS All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 10.27 ~EIwPcJIZ~E~~ENT AROUND OPENINGIN GYPSUM BLOCK PARTITIONS
. ..; .,*..:-
(..
..,.
“:
.,.._ ‘...,
”
/-n--
200
mm 4
FIG. 10.28 POSITIONOF WEDGE AND GYPSUM BLOCK PARTITIONWALL AROVE SKIRTING
275
SP62(S&T):1997
-ALTERNATIVE METHODS
10.29A Edge Isolation at Partition Wall
PLASTER
FIBRE 80 OTHER RE ?ACK
10.298 Edge Isolation at Walls only
GVPSUM’EILDCK OR SLAU PARTITION
GVPSUi.4 BLOCK OR SL
7
PACKING LWOODEN FILLET FIXEO TO POST
WOODEN POST OR PLATE FIXED TO WALLS. FLOORS OR C&LlNGS
WOODEN POST OR PLATE FIXED TO WALL
10.290 Alternative Edge Isolation at Wall, Floor or Ceiling
10.29C Edge Isolation at Wall, Floor or Ceiling
10.29 METHODS OF EDGE ISOLATION FOR PARTITIONS 4.4.3 Concrete shall not be vibrated for compaction; The no-fines concrete mixed shall be as Table 10.7 compaction may be done by rod or gentle ramming. No water should be added during ramming. below for guidance. 4.4.4 Curing shall be done by spraying water at least Table 10.7 Strength of Various No-fines for 7 days. Concrete Mixes 4.4.5 Workmanship (Clause 4.3) Construction Joints in Walls - Vertical or SI Maximum Mix by Water Cement Expected raking construction joints shall not be perNo. Size of Volumes Ratio Compressive mitted except where expansion joints are to be Ballast (Cement: (Optimum) Strength in Aggregate) 28 Days, N/mm’ formed. Horizontal joints should be as few as 20 1:8 0.40 5.5 i) possible. Cracks due to shrinkage and setting ii) 20 1:9 0.42 4.9 can be avoided by locating expansion joints at iii) 20 I:10 0.45 3.5 iv) 30 m interval. 20 1:12 0.48 3.5 40 1:lO 0.48 3.5 v) Wall ties may be used between floors and walls b) vi) 40 I:12 0.50 2.6 throughout the building. Cracks may be 4.4 Transporting, Placing, Compacting, Curing, avoided at openings by placing two 10 mm dia and Workmanship mild steel bars under the window sill. Concrete 4.4.1 Concrete shall be transported by methods which cover should be 50 mm minimum. It is impractical to nail into no-fines concrete. will prevent segregation or loss of any of the Therefore for fixing, fixing devices should be ingredients. In hot or cold weather it shall be incorporated before pouring concrete; or holes, transported in deep containers, adopting suitable etc, should be formed by finishing suitable methods to prevent loss of moisture. coves in the shuttering for services. 4.4.2 The concrete should be poured in horizontal FIG.
4.3 Mixes
c>
layers. Care shall be taken to ensure that the ballast is uniformly coated with cement layer. Thickness of concrete placed in a wall should not exceed 500 mm; minimum thickness may be 230 mm.
4 Plastering may be done on both internal and external surfaces; the thickness may be 10 mm to 12 mm in two layers.
t
c
276
CHAPTER 11
ROOFSANDROOFING
oii
CONTENTS
6 ROOFS AND FLOORS WITH JOIST AND FILLER BLOCKS- HOLLOWCLAY FILLERBLOCKS
1 GENERAL PART 1 FLAT ROOFS
6. I General
1 GENERAL
6.2 Materials 2 JACK-ARCHTYPEROOF
6.3 Components of the Roof
2.1 General
6.4 Preparatory Work
2.2 Materials
6.5 Laying of the Roof
2.3 Typical Details
6.6 Finishing
2.4 Preparatory Work
7 ROOFS AND FLOORS WITH JOISTS AND FILLER BLOCKS- PRECASTHOLLOWCLAY BLOCK JOISTS AND HOLLOWCLAY FILLERBLOCKS
2.5 Construction of Jack-Arches 2.6 Finish 3 BRICK-CUM-CONCRETE COMPOSITE (MADRASTERRACE)
ROOF
7.1 General 7.2 Materials
3.1 General
7.3 Preparatory Work
3.2 Materials
7.4 Structural Clay Block Joists
3.3 Preparatory Work
7.5 Structural Clay Block Slab
3.4 Laying of Terrace Bricks
7.6 Construction of Roof
3.5 Laying ofLime Brick Aggregate Concrete
7.7 Finishing
3.6 Finishing 4 STONE SLABOVERJOISTFLOOR 4.1 General 4.2 Materials 4.3 Preparatory Work 4.4 Laying of Stone Slabs 4.5 Laying of Concrete Layer over the Stone Slabs 4.6 Finishing
8 ROOFS AND FLOORSWITH JOISTS AND ‘FILLER BLOCKS-PRECAST HOLLOWCLAY BLOCK SLAB PANELS
8.1 General 8.2 Materials 8.3 Preparatory Work 8.4 Slab Panel 8.5 Construction of Roof
8.6 Finishing 5 ROOFS AND FLOORS WITH JOIST AND FILLER ANNEX A SPECIFIC-ATION FORCRUDE-OIL FORUSE IN BLOCKS- HOLLOWCONCRETEFILLER BLOCKS MORTARSFORMADRAS TERRACEWORK
5.1 General 5.2 Materials 5.3 Components of the Roof
PART 2 SLOPING I WOODEN SHINGLEROOF
5.4 Preparatory Work
1.1 General
5.5 Laying of the Roof
1.2 Materials
5.6 FiniShing
1.3 Preparatory Work
RBOFS
6 ASBESTOSCEMENT SHEETS-
1.4 Laying of Shingles 1.5 Maintenance
6. I General
2 ROOFINGWITHMANGALORETILES
ANNEX B TIMBERFORWOODEN SHINGLES
2.1 General
PART3
2.2 Materials
SHELL ROOFS
1 GENERAL
2.3 Preparatory Work
2 REINFORCEDCONCRETESHELLROOF CAST /N-s1711
2.4 Fixing of Reepers
2.1 Shell Dimensions
2.5 Laying of Mangalore Tiles 3 SLOPEDROOFCOVERING-
2.2 Type of Shells
SLATING
3.1 General
2.3 Design 2.4 Sequence of Construction
3.2 Materials
3 PRECASTDOUBLYCURVEDSHELLUNITS
3.3 Preparatory Work
PART 4 FLAT ROOF FINISH PHUSKA
3.4 Laying of Slates 3.5 Finishing
SEMI-C• KNJGATED
Around Projections/Junctions
MUD
1 GENERAL
4 SLOPED ROOF USING PLAIN AND CORRUGATED 2 MATERrALs GALVANIZEDSTEELSHEETS 3 PREPARATORY WORK 4. I General 4 LAYINGOFMUD PHUSKA 4.2 Materials
4.3 Preparatory Work
4.1 Preparation
4.4 Laying and Fixing of Sheets
4.2 Laying
4.5 Ridges and Hips
4.3 Applying Mud Plaster
4.6 Valleys and Flashings
4.4 Paving with Brick Tiles
5 ASBESTOSCEMENTSHEETS-
CORRUGATED
5.1 General
5.2 Materials
4.5 Maintenance
PART 5 THATCHED 1 THATCHINGOF ROOF
5.3 Preparatory Work
1.1 General
5.4 Laying and Fixing of Sheets
I .2 Materials
5.5 Safety Precautions
1.3 Fire Retardant Treatment
ROOFS
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
SP62(S&T):1997
CHAPTER 11
ROOFS AND ROOFIN-G 1 GENERAL
Part 2 Sloping Roofs
1.1 A number of roofing materials are used and different types of roofs are constructed in the country. They can be broadly grouped as under:
Part 3 Shell Roofs Part 4 Flat Roof Finish -Mud
Phuska
Part 5 Thatched Roof
Part 1 Flat Roofs
PART 1
FLAT ROOFS
1 GENERAL
shall be encased in cement concrete with a minimum cover of 40 mm. Joists shall not be spaced at more than 2 m.
Flat roofs are covered by the Indian Standards given at the end of the Handbook.
b) Centering shall be erected to support the jack2 JACK-ARCH
arch. Temporary supports may be given to the joiststo prevent sagging of joists during laying of jack-arch work.
TYPE ROOF
2.1 General
c>The
bricks shall be laid on edge in cement mortar 1:4 or equivalent lime mortar, to form an arch, with a rise between l/6 to l/8, springing from the bottom flange of the joists. The joints at bottom shall not exceed 10 mm in thickness. The brickwork shall then be cured by keeping moist and allowed to set for 10 days, before laying the lime broken brick aggregate over it. The centering of the jackarches shall be eased at the end of 7 days for arches constructed with lime mortar.
The jack-arch type of roof is a composite construction consisting of a row of brick arches with a small rise and having a lime concrete layer over it. The strength of the roof is due both to the arch action as well as the bond between the lime concrete layer with brick. 2.2 Materials Bricks should conform to IS 1077 : 1992; sand for lime concrete shall conform to IS 383 : 1970 and fine brick aggregate shall conform to IS 3 182 : 1986. Cementmay be to IS 269 : 1989 or to IS 455 : 1989 or to IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1991 or any other as specified. Lime shall conform to IS 712 : 1984; lime concrete shall be as given in Chapter 5. Steel joists shall conform to IS 805 : 1968; steel tie rods shall conform to IS 432 (Part 1) : 1982.
4 Laying of Lime Concrete 1) On the hardened brick arch, a layer of lime broken brick aggregate concrete mix 1:2.5 (1ime:broken brick aggregate by volume) or layer of lime pozzolanic material and fine aggregate mix 1: 1: 1 (lime:pozzolana:fine aggregate by volume) shall be spread to an initial thickness of 75 mm over the crown of the arch.
2.3 Typical Details Typical details of jack-arch type of roof is as shown in Fig. 11.1. 2.4 Preparatory
Work
2) The lime broken brick aggregate concrete
The bricks shall be immersed in water for 24 h before use. The skin shall then beallowed to dry so as to give the necessary adhesion with mortar required for laying the brickwork. The tie rods shall be given a protective coating of bituminous paint and the paint may extend 10 to 20 mm beyond the required length in the portion to be exposed. 2.5 Construction
of Jack-Arches
a) The steel joists shall be fixed in position at the designed spacing over supporting elements such as walls, on appropriate bed blocks. Joists 281
mix shall then be consolidated with wooden hammers~to a thickness of 60 mm over the crown of the arch. The concrete shall be further beaten with wooden hand beater. During compaction the surface shall be wetted with lime water and a solution; which may be 3 kg of jaggery in 100 1 of water alongwith 1.5 kg of BAEL fruit or similar solution of KADUKAI or HARARH or jaggery and GUGAL. The concrete shall be cured for at least 6 days.
SP62(S&T):1997
PLAN
k:BRICK TlLES IN LIME ‘OR CEMNT
MORTAR
CEILING flNISH AS SPECIFIED
STEEL JOISTS Of3 WILT-UP SECTION ENCASED IN CONCRETE CAST IN- SITU; ALTERNATIVELY, SUJTABLE SHAPED PRECAST CONCRETE SECTIONS
SECTION
AA
X = Y =
spacing ofjoists spacing of tie rods
Z = riseofarch FIG. 11.1 TYPICALDETAILSOFJACK-ARCHFLOOROR ROOFCONSTRUCTION 2.6 Finish
The completed terrace shall then be finished with specified finish. The finishmay be tiled roof with flat clay tiles (2 courses) (see Fig.ll.2) laid in cement
mortar (1:3) mixed-with crude oil (10 percent of mass of cement), laid in such a way as to break joints. Instead of two course of flat tile, one course of pressed clay tile may be used (see Fig.1 1.3)
lwocouRsESoF FLAT TILES
P--. 11.2 TYPICALDETAILSSHOWINGTHEMETHODOFLAYINGTwo COURSESOF RAT TILESFORROOF
282
SP62(S&T):1997 ONECOUF OF PRESSED Tl E ESi
END TILE LEVELLING COURSE 0~ AGGJWiATE
CONCRETE
FIG. 11.3 TYPICAL DETAILSSHOWINGTHE METHOD OF LAYING ONE COURSEOF PRESSEDTILES FOR ROOF
The ceiling shall be finished with lime plaster of I:2 mix or cement plaster mix 1:3. Plaster shall be 12 mm thick and done as mentioned in Chapter 10. It shall be cured for 3 weeks. The exposed length of tie rod shall be painted (see Chapter 15). 3 BRICK-CUM-CONCRETE ROOF (MADRAS TERRACE)
3.4 Laying of Terrace Bricks a) The terracing bricks shall be laid on edge in diagonal rows spanning over the joists. The laying shall start from one corner and proceed towards the opposite corner. Each row shall be complete before the next one, adjacent to it, is started. The terrace work shall have a bearing of at least 150 mm on the walls or support all round. The bricks shall be laid in lime mortar 1: 1.5 (lime putty: sand by volume); the thickness of mortar joints shall be not less than 10 mm (see Fig. 11.4).
COMPOSITE
3.1 General A composite floor/roof construction consisting of terrace bricks and lime concrete is widely adopted particularly in the southern parts of India; this is commonly known as Madras Terrace construction. This construction has been found to be quite strong, durable and waterproof. Supporting action of the bricks results from the arch action in the bricks which are packed in rows to form a flat layer over closely spaced joists; and the support is enhanced by the super-incumbent lime concrete layer by virtue of bond between it and the bricks.
b) During _laying the bricks shall be pressed against the adjacent row already laid so that it bonds well with the mortar and also partially develops lateral adhesion preventing it from slipping. To enhance the setf supporting action of the brickwork, the bricks may be so laid as to obtain for the brickwork, a slight rise between the joists, generally not exceeding 5 mm. The joists may be supported from below by wedged uprights while the roof is being laid. The brickwork shall be cured for at least 10 days.
3.2 Materials Broken brick coarse aggregate shall conform to IS 3068 : 1986. Cement shall conform to IS 269 : I989 or IS 455 ; 1989 or IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1991 or as specified. Lime shall conform to IS 7 12 : 1984. Terracing bricks shall conform to IS 2690 (Part 2) : 1992 hand made bricks. Timber joists shall conform to IS 3629 : 1986. Steel joists shall conform to IS 883 : 1970. Crude oil shall conform to the requirements given in Annex A. 3.3 Preparatory
3.5 Laying of Lime Brick Aggregate
Work
Terracing bricks shall be immersed in water for at least 4 h before use in the work; the skin shall be allowed to dry. Steel joists shall be protected with one coat of primer before fixing. Timber joists shall be protected with two coats of tar and then a primer to the exposed portions. 283
Concrete
4 After the terracing has set, a layer of lime broken brick aggregate concrete of mix 1:2.5 (slaked lime: aggregate by volume) shall be spread to a thickness of 100 mm.
b) After laying the lime concrete, it shall be rammed so that the layer consolidates to 75 mm. After this further consolidation be done with a hand beater for at least 7 days so that concrete hardens and the beater makes no impression on the concrete. During hand beating the surface-shall be wetted by sprinkling lime water and sugar solution may be of 3 kg ofjaggery in 100 I of water and I .5 kgof BAEL fruit; or solution of KADUKAI or HA~RARH or ~GUR and GUGAL. The surface shall be cured for 6 days.
SP62(S&T):1997
ROOF OR FLOOR
FINISH
lSOmm TERRACE
mar
BRICKS
SECTION
XX
FIG. 11.4 TYPICALDETAILSOFMADRAS TERRACEFLOORORROOFCONSTRUCTION
3.6 Finishing
4.2 Materials
The roof may be finished with two courses of flat clay
tiles in cement mortar 1:3 mixed with crude oil about 10 percent the mass of cement, ensuring breaking of joints. Instead of two courses of flat tiles one course of pressed clay tiles may be used (see Fig. 11.5 and Fig. 11.6). The ceiling shall be finished with cement mortar I:3 and the finished terrace shall be cured for a period of not less than 3 weeks. 4 STONE SLAB OVER JOIST FLOOR 4.1 General Slabs of natural stone, such as, granite limestone, sandstone, etc, are availbale in parts of Andhra Pradesh, Mysore, Maharashtra, Rajasthan, Uttar Pradesh, for use in floor and roof construction. These stone slabs are supported over closely spaced joists and covered with a layer of lime concrete or cement concrete and the required floor or roof finish.
Cement shall conform to IS 269 : 1989 or IS 455 : 1989 orIS 1489 (Parts I & 2) : 1991 or any other cement as specified. Lime shall conform to IS 712 : 1984. Aggregate shall conform to IS 383 : 1970 and SURKHI to IS 1344 : 1981. Stone slabs may be granite, sandstone including quartzite, limestone or slate. The slabs may be chisel dressed to a smooth or rough surface as required for the finishes at top and bottom of roof. The slab shall not absorb more than 5 percent of moisture. 4.3 Preparatory
Work
All steelwork shall be painted with one coat of primer. In case of timber joists they shall have two coats of tar and one coat of primer before fixing. All edges of stone slabs shall be chiseled square so that mortar joints will be of even thickness. 284
.
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 EXTERNAL RENDERING
END LAID
/I-
TILE AT C!i” LIME BROKEN BR:,n AGGREGATE CONCRETE
/-TWO COURSES OF FLAT TILES
12mm
&????BR,cK wALL
THICK
‘JOIST
FIG. 11.5 TYPICAL DETAILS SHOWINGTHE METHOD OF LAYING Two COURSESOF FLAT TILES FORROOF
RENDERING
LIME BROKEN BRICK AGGREGATE CONCRETE
OURSE ESSED
12 mm THICK PLASTER
WALL
FIG. 11.6 TVPICAL DETAILS SHOWINGTHE METHOD OF LAYING ONE COURSEOF PRESSEDTILES FOR ROOF
4.4 Laying of Stone Slabs a) The joists’shall
4.5 Laying of Concrete Layer over the Stone Slab
be fixed in position.
a) Lime concrete mix of 1: I :2 shall be laid over the stone slabs already laid and grouted, to provide adequate waterproofing. A ihix of 1: 1.53 may be used in situations where exposure to weather is not much or where separate waterproofing is provided. The lime concrete shall be consolidated with wooden hand beaters to a thickness of not less than 7.5 cm. The consolidation shall be done for at least for 6 days till the concrete hardens and the beater does not make an impression on the concrete.
b) The stone slabs shall be placed over the joists. The slabs set in rows close to each other and the joints grouted with cement mortar 1:3. The mortar shall be of stiff consistency and pressed into the joints. If may be desirable to treat the mortar with crude oil, about 5 percent the mass of cement. The underside of the joints shall be pointed or other finish as desired (see Fig. 11.7).
c
285
SP62(S&T):1997 FLOOR
OR ROOF
h-
LIME
FINISH
shuttering. But the roof should not be used where impact loads or vibrations are likely to occur.
OR CEMENT
CONCRETE
BASE +25
OINTS
mm MIN
5.2 Materials Cement shall coliform to IS 269 : 1989 or IS 455 : 1989 or IS 1489 (Parts I & 2) : 1991 or any other as specified. Aggregate shall conform to IS 383 : 1970. Precast hollow cement filler blocks should be as in Fig. 11.8. Precast joists should be designed to IS 456 : 1978 or IS 1343 : 1980.
POINTED
5.3 Components
TYPICAL SECTION OF RCC JOIST
TYPICAL SECTION OF STEEL JOIST
of the Roaf
The floor and roof shall consist of the following components:
4 Precast reinforced/prestressed NOTE -
concrete joists
at suitable centres;
Precast RCC o: steel joists may be used.
FIG. 1 I .7 STONE SLAB OVERJOIST FLOOR
b) Precast cement concrete hollow blocks laid over in the space between precast reinforced concrete joists;
b) Cement concrete base shall be laid as in terrazzo flooring described in Chapter 9.
cl Structural topping concrete nominally
4.6 Finishing
5 ROOFS AND FLOORS WITH JOIST AND FILLER BLOCKS-HOLLOW CONCRETE FILLER BLOCKS 5.1 General Floor and roofconstruction using precast reinforced or prestressed concrete joists and hollow cement concrete filler blocks is advantageous because of durability, fire resistance, thermal insulation, lower dead load and high speed of construction; it eliminates the use of
4
rein-
forced laid in-situ;
The stone roof may be finished with either cement plaster mix 1:3, 20 mm thick; or any other finish such as with tiles, mud phuska (see Part 4) etc.
4 The required floor or roof finish at top; and
e>A suitable
ceiling finish applied to the bottom of the joists and hollow blocks, if desired.
5.4 Preparatory
Work
All supporting elements like walls, pillars, etc, shall be completed and a 75 mm plain concrete (1:2:4) bed block may be provided over the walls, if necessary. Arrangements for all service pipes, etc, passing through the roof should be taken care of.
3o.k
L
All dimensions in millimetres. FIG.
11.8 TYPICAL HOLLOW CONCRETE FILLER BLOCK
286
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 5.5 Laying of the Roof
a) The precast joists shall be placed in position at the spacings designed. The joists may be temporarily supported before laying the topping, at predesignated points; and left in place for 7 days after laying the topping.
b) The hollow block shall be placed between joists with their ends resting on the projecting lips of the joists~as in Fig. 1 I .9.
c) Reinforcement
shall be provided for structural topping slab; at least 0.15 percent steel shall be provided along the joists and 0.20 percent steel across the joists for the structural topping slab; the spacing of bars shall not exceed 300 mm. The top reinforcement in the slab over the joists shall be tied to the stirrups projecting from the joists. Weld mesh may be used as an alternative. Concrete should be M 15 grade; it shall be laid over the hollow blocks to a designed thickness or minimum of 50 mm. The top surface shall be finished smooth. In-situ concrete shall be cured for a week.
5.6 Finishing Theconcrete topping may be finished as specified. The ceiling may be rendered or plastered as desired.
6 ROOFS AND FLOORS FILLER BLOCKS FILLER BLOCKS
WITH JOIST AND HOLLOW CLAY
6.1 General F~OOFand roof construction
with hollow clay fillet blocks has been found to be advantageous over the conventional type of beam and slab construction. This type of construction consists of placing reinforced cement concrete precast beams or prestressed concrete beams at suitable spacing and the gap between them is filled with hollow clay blocks. This type of construciton is lighter in weight and provides~better sound and thermal insulation to the buildings. It also ensures rapid construction and eliminates the use of shuttering required in conventional construction. This type of floor or roof is not recommended where impact loads occur or vibration is expected. 6.2 Materials Cement shall conform to IS 269 : 1989 or IS 455 : 1989 or IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1991 or any other as specified. Aggregates shall conform to IS 383 : 1970. Hollow clay blocks or tiles shall conform to IS 3951 (Part 1) : 1975. Precast joists shall be designed to IS 456 : 1978 or IS 1343 : 1980; Ml 5 grade concrete may be used.
HOLLOW
BLOCK
BITUMEN STRUCTURAL 4iuD
CONCRETE
PHUSKA/FOAM
INTER-FLOOR PRECAST REINFORCED/ PRESTRESSED CON CRETE JOIST
SECTION
XX
FIG. 11.9 PRECASTCONCRETE JOISTSAND HOLLOWFILLERBLOCKFLOORINGAND ROOFING
287
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 6.3 Components The construction
nate. Concrete should be Ml5 grade; it shall be laid over the skin-dry blocks to the designed thickness or a minimum of 50 mm. In-situ concrete should be cured for a week.
af the Roof shall consist of the-following:
a>Precast
reinforced suitable centres;
concrete joists spaced at
6.6 Finishing
b) Hollow clay filler blocks laid in the space between the joists;
c>Topping
concrete laid in-situ over the hollow clay blocks with reinforcement;
d) The required floor finish at the top; and e) Suitable ceiling finish applied to the bottom, if
The concrete surface shall be finished as specified. The ceiling~may be rendered or plastered as necessary. 7 ROOFS AND FLOORS WITH JOISTS AND FILLER BLOCKS - PRECAST HOLLOW CLAY BLOCK JOISTS AND HOLLOW CLAY FILLER BLOCKS
desired. 6.4 Preparatory
7.1 General
--. . worK
This construction All supporting elements like walls, PillW main beams and frames, shall be completed and a 75 mm plain concrete bed block may be provided over the walls if necessary. Arragements for all service pipes, etc, passing through roof shall be taken care of. 6.5 Laying of the Roof The precast joists shall be placed in position at the designed spacing so as to span between supporting beams or walls; generally not more than 600 mm. The joists may be temporarily supported, before the topping is laid, at predesignated points, and left in position for 7 days after laying the topping.
b)
also-has the advantage mentioned
fin6.1. 1naddition a number of plants for manufacture
of clay blocks have come up in different parts of the country, this kind of prefabricated floor or roof construction where structural clay blocks are used both as an element of joist and filler will find greater application. In joist and filler scheme, clay blocks are used in conjunction with concrete to serve as structural component in carrying flexural compression. The shape of the structural clay blocks are so designed that the same clay blocks can be used as an element of joist and infill element7-2 Materials a) Hollow Clay Block (Structural Type) - This shall conform to IS 3951(Part 2) : 1975 with dimensions preferably as in Fig. 11.11. The average crushing strength of the blocks shall not beenless than 20N/mm2 with an individual value of minimum 15 N/mm2.
The hollow blocks shall be placed in between the joists with their ends resting on the projecting lips of the joists as shown in Fig.1 1.10.
c) Reinforcement
shall be provided for the topping concrete slab in accordance with the relevant provisions of IS 456 : 1978. At-least 0.15 percent reinforcement along the joists and 0.2 percent across the joists shall be provided for the structural topping concrete finish. The spacing of reinforcement shall not exceed 300 mm. The reinforcement over the supports should be tied to the stirrups projecting from the joists. Weld mesh may be used as an alter-
b) Cement concrete shall be of Ml5 grade conforming to IS 456 : 1978. c) Mortar shall be either cement mortar or cement lime mortar with a minimum compressive strength of 10 N/mm2 (see Chapter 4) d) Reinforcement 1978.
shall be as given in IS 456 : 1 I
HOllOW CLN BLOCN
f SOmm
MINl
PRECAST CONCRE’TE JOIST \
SUITABLE CEILING FINISHI
y TOPPIND &ASl-IN
be---.-m
/
-Sl’l U)
600 mm ~~~--------_rrl
FIG. 11.10PLACING HOLLOW BLOCKS IN BETWEENJOISTS
288
SP62(S&T):1997
1:2:4
CONCRETE
All dimensions in mihimetres. FIG.
7.3 Preparatory
11.11 TYPICAL CLAY BLOCK removed after 45 to 90 min, depending weather conditions (see Fig. 11.12).
Work
All supporting elements like walls, pillars, etc, shall be
b) One day after precasting the joists, they shall
completed and cured well before placing cement concrete or mortar bed blocks over load bearing walls, if necessary. Arrangements for all service pipes, etc, passing through the roof shall be taken care of. 7.4 Structural
be cured with water on the precasting platform itself. After about 4 days when the concrete has developed sufficient strength to withstand handling stresses, the joists shall be inverted upside down and removed to a curing yard and kept continuously moist for 14 days from the day of casting.
Clay Block Joists
a) The joists shall be precast by placing hollow clay blocks end to end, on a level platform protected from wind and sun, and jointing them with 1:3 cement mortar or equivalent cementlime-mortar. The clay blocks shall be thoroughly wetted and they shall be skin-dry at the time of use. Two wooden planks, cleaned and oiled shall be then placed on the sides of the joist held with clamps. The reinforcement shall be placed in the two hollow spaces between the two planks and clay blocks, ensuring proper cover from the top and ends. The hollow spaces shall then be filled with Ml5 concrete to the top level of the clay blocks. Side planks may be removed after 45 to 90 min, depending on the weather conditions. Side planks may be
c>After
water curing, the joists shall be further cured for another 14 days in the shade.
d) Lifting and stacking ofjoists shall be done with care. 7.5 Structural
Clay block Slab
4 The slab shall be designed for two stage loading. In the first stage of loading shall carry its own weight, dead load of blocks and cement concrete. In the second stage when cement concrete has attained full strength, it shall carry dead and live loads.
b) The design shall be as per IS 456 : 1978.
RUNFORCEMENI
CLAY BLOCKS ASSEMBLE0 AS JOIST
JOIST READY GROUTING
FIG.
on the
FOR
MS CLAMP FOR MOLDINO SIDE PLANK
COMPLETED
11.12 DIFFERENT STAGES OF PREFABRICATIONOF JOIST
289
JOIST
SP62(S&T):1997 7.6 Construction
b)
of Roof
The joists shall be placed at designed intervals, generally, around 300 mm. In the intervening space structural clay blocks shall be placed with mortar joint with the wider base towards the ceiling of the slab (see Fig. I I. 13). While placing infill blocks, the joints in the joist members and infill blocks shall be broken with half length units. The space between joists and blocks shall be filled with Ml5 concrete. For continuity over negative reinforcement shall be support. provided in the space with proper cover. In case the joist are used as cantilevers. they shall be supported from the bottom all along the length. Negative reinforcement for cantilever movement shall be provided in the space before filling with concrete. The bottom support shall be removed only when the infill concrete has attained adequate strength. Bearing of the slab shall be 75 mm minimum in the direction of spanning and 20 mm minimum at end. Structural clay blocks shall be immersed in water for about 20 to 30 min before use. Thickness of mortar joint shall not be more than I2 mm. Fixtures like fan hooks, wooden plugs, junction boxes, floor traps, etc. shall be located in the infills rows of clay block by omitting one of them at the desired location. The fixture shall be placed in position and the remaining space filled with concrete. Concealed electrical conduits shall be placed inside the hollow bottom/portion of filler blocks.
8 ROOFS AND FLOORS WITH JOIST AND HOLLOW FILLER BLOCKS - PRECAST CLAY BLOCK SLAB PANELS 8.X General The construction of floor or roof using structural clay blocks is a suitable substitute for in-situ RCC slab construction. This type of slab is comparatively cheaper, saves cement and steel and provides better thermal insulation. In this type of floor or roof, the clay blocks are used to prefabricate a slab panel like a wall. It is the clay blocks that take part in the structural action by carrying the flexural compression. The shape of the blocks are so designed that the panel can be used to build a wall. 8.2 Materials
4 Hollow clay blocks
(structural type) shall conform to requirements of IS 395 I (Part 2) : 1975 with dimensions as shown in Fig. I 1.14. The average crushing strength shall not be less than 20 N/mm2; the individual value shall not be less than I4 N/mm’. b) Cement concrete to be used over the support to fill the joint between slab panels shall conform toMl5ofIS456: 1978. Mortar shall be either cement mortar or cl cement-lime mortar conforming to Chapter 4, with a minimum compressive strength of IO N/mm2.
c> 4
e>
7.7 Finishing The roof may further be finished with the specified roof finish. The ceiling may be rendered or plastered as may be necessary.
8.3 Preparatory
Work
All supporting elements like walls, pillars, etc, shall be completed and cured well before placing cement concrete or mortar bed blocks over load bearing walls. Arrangements for all service pipes etc, passing through the roof shall be taken care of.
FIG. 11.13 J~ISTANDINFILLCLAYBLOCKSLABASSEMBLY 290
SP62(S&T):1997
All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG. 11.14 TYPICAL STRUCTURALCLAY BLOCK FOR PANEL SCHEME 8.4 Slab Panel
vertical or horizontal position face towards the bottom.
a>
b) cl
The slab panel shall be cast with hollow structural blocks on a level platform protected_from wind and sun; and jointing ~them with 1:3 cement mortar or equivalent cement-lime-mortar. The blocks shall be placed with a short face on the platform. A layer of mortar shall then be applied over the top surface ahd the reinforcing bar shall be placed in one df Ihe logitudinal oval shaped grooves. Next a layer of mortar shall again be applied to that the total thickness of the mortar joint is about 10 mm. Another course of clay blocks shall then be laid as before and this operation shall be repeated to a maximum height of 600 mm, as in Fig. 11.15. Vertical joints shall be broken in each course by using half units of clay blocks. The face towards which the main reinforcement is placed shall be made plumb and this face shall form the ceiling face. After casting, the slab panel shall be cured with water for 14 days and furtheraircuredfor 14days. The slab panels shall be lifted after 28 days from the casting yard; they shall be carefully transported to the site. They shall be stacked in
with plumbed
d) The slab shall be designed as in 7.5. 8.5 Construction
of Roof
a>The
slab panels shall be placed side by side abutting each other over the supports~and the joints shall be finished with 1:2 cement mortar. Bearing for the slab shall be 75 mm minimum in the direction of span and 20 mm at the end. Negative reinforcement, where needed for continuity shall be provided; it shall be in the longitudinal groove which comes on top face of the slab; the reinforcement may be projected at ends by 60 mm for lap welding at site.
b) The clay blocks shall be immersed in water for 20 to 30 min and &in-dry at the time of use. The thickness of joints shall be 12 mm minimum. Fixtures, service conduits, etc shall be placed inside the hollow block. 8.6 Finishing The roof shall be finished as specified. The ceiling may be rendered or plastered as may be necessary.
291
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
FIG. 11.15 SLAB PANELSBUILTLIKEA WALLUSINGCLAY BLOCK
ANNEX A (Clause 3.2) SPECIFICATION
A-l
FOR CRUDE OIL FOR USE IN MORTARS MADRAS TERRACE WORK A-6 VISCOSITY
GENERAL
A-l.1 The crude oil shall be a petroleum oil conforming to the requirements of A-2 to A-7. A-2 SPECIFIC
A-6.1 When tested by the procedure given in A-6.2 the viscosity number of the crude oil shall be between 40 and 45.
GRAVITY
A-6.2 The viscosity shall be tested in Englor’s viscometer at 5O’C. 240 ml of the oil shall be takenin the container maintained at 50°C for at least 3 min, and then allowed flow out through the nozzle. The period of flow for the first 100 ml shall be noted as the viscosity number.
A-2.1 The specific gravity shall be between 0.930 and 0.940 at a temperature of 25°C. A-3 SOLUBILITY A-3.1 The solubility of the crude oil in carbon disulphide shall be not less than 99.9 percent. A-4 BITUMEN
A-7 LOSS ON IGNITION
CONTENT
A-4.1 The content of bitumen, insoluble in 36’ BE paraftin naphtha shall be between 1.5 and 2.5 percent by mass. A-5 RESIDUAL
FOR
COKE CONTENT
A-5.1 The content of residual coke in the crude oil shall be between 2.5 and 4 percent by mass.
A-7.1 When tested in accordance with the procedure given in A-7.2, the loss in mass in the crude oil shall not exceed 2 percent by mass. A-7.2 Twenty grams of the material shall be heated for 5 h in cylindrical tin dish, 80 mm in diameter and 25 mm deep, and the temperature of ignition shall be 163’C.
292
SP62(S&T):1997 PART 2 SLOPING
1 WOODEN
e>The
shingle covering shall be at least three courses deep at every section; the minimum overlap shall be one-third of the length of the shingle.
SHINGLE ROOF
-1.1 General Wooden shingles are used for pitched roofs in some of the Himalayan Regions of India where suitable species of timber are available, such as, in Jammu & Kashmir, North Punjab, Himachal Pradesh, Assam; as also in Andaman and Nicobar Islands.
The spacing of rafters shall not normally exceed 600 mm or as determined by IS 883 : 1970. The size of battens shall not be less than 50 mm x 25 mm.
Wooden shingles are short, thin, rectangular pieces of timber usually tapering in thickness along the grain, used in the same way as tiles for covering roofs of buildings. Thickness of shingles ordinarly reduces from tail (butt) to head. Shingles are nailed to the battens and arranged generally in a number of courses overlapping each other so as to ensure leak proof drainage.
s) When ceiling board is adopted, the planking shall not be less than 12 mm and shall preferably be tongued and grooved. The ceiling boards may either be nailed to the rafters or may direcly be fixed to the purlins.
h) Wooden shingles shall be given fire retardant treatment by pressure impregnation with chemicals, such as, ammonium mono-phosdi-phosphate, sodium phate, ammonium arsenate, or sodium tetraborate.
1.2 Materials a) Wooden shingles shall conform to the species specified in Annex B. b) Nails shall conform to IS 723 : 1972; preferably rust resistant or hot dip galvanized nails shall be used. Nails shall be of 2.00 or 2.24 mm shank diameter and 40 mm in length depending upon the species. Subsidiary battens shall be fixed to main battens by 2.80 mm or 3.15 mm diameter, 60 mm long nails.
1.4 Laying of Shingles
4 Each wooden shingle shall be fixed to the battens by two nails (see Fig. 11.16 and Fig. 11.18). The distance of nails from the~butt end of shingle, shall be equal to the shingle exposure plus 10 to 15 mm, the edge distance of nails from the sides of the shingle shall not be more than 20 mm; the nails may be driven flush.
c) Timber for battens and rafters shall conform to structural timber specified in IS 3629 : 1986 properly seasoned and treated (see Fig. 11.16). 1.3 Preparatory
ROOFS
b) Each course of wooden shingle shall be overlapped by another course such ~that only onethird of the length of the shingle in the lower course is left uncovered; the remaining twothird length shall be overlapped. Except for the bottom two courses, wooden shingle shall be three course deep throughout the roof area.
Work
4 In case of low pitched roofs, p&ticularly in areas of high winds, it is necessary to have an underlay of roofing sheets or timber roofing boards. In areas of heavy rainfall and in very damp climates, spaced -roofing boards may preferably be used to permit quick drying of the underside of shingles. The provision of an undercover for the roof will not only add insulation and waterproofing but also prevent debris from falling in.
c>In each horizontal
course, the shingles shall be laid 3 to 6 mm apart to allow for swelling when wet. Each horizontal course of wooden shingles shall break joints with two courses above and two courses below it.
4 The gaps between the wooden shingles in each course shall be off set at least 40 mm centre to centre from corresponding gaps between the shingles in the course above. The two courses of shingles at eaves shall also be break-jointed.
b) No gutter or rain water pipe shall discharge from~one roof to another.
c>The
size and shape of the shingles shall be as in Fig. 11.17
e>The
first shingle course laid in double should extend 50 mm to 60 mm beyond facia member, if adopted, to prevent the water from backing up underneath the shingles.
4 Spacing of battens shall be equal to about onethird of the length of shingles, that is, 100 to 130mmasinFig. 11.18.
293
SP 62 ( S 8: T ) : 1997 WOODEN
RIDGE
DETAIL WOODEN
OF RIDGE RAFTER
SLOPE OF ROOF
L12O
TO
150
.
PLAN
WIRE NAILS 1 LOmm LONG-I 7
III.“LL~
(THICKE R END)
ENLARGED
SECTION
Xx
All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 11.16 TYPICAL DETAIL SHOWINGROOFING WITH WOODEN SHINGLES
f-3 mm
112-5mm 7 30
TO 40cm--j
FIG. Il. 17 TYPICALWOODENSHINGLE
294
SP62(S&T):1997
STEEL 2 WIRE NAILS FOR ONE SHINGLE-,
_&I
CORRUGATED SHEETS
MAIN
BAT TEN
SUBSIDIARY BATTENS
pi
SHINGLE CUT TO THE REQUIRED SIZE7 ANGULAR WOODEN-j RIDGE (ONE PIEC I
EAVES
Ah)
b-8.
STEEL CORRUGA SHEETS1 d
BOARD-I
SUBS;IDENBATIE;LO~5-j
_
LMAIN WOODEN
SECTIONAL
BATTEN 50 x10 RAFTER
(TRUSS)
ELEVATION
/I -Overlapped length 2 L I3 B - Exposed length L / 3 NOTE-One
piece ridge arrangement of shingles shall be followed for hip ridges also. All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG 11.18 TYPICAL
DETAIL
SHOWINGROOFINGWITHWOODENSHINGLES OVERGI
295
CORRUGATED SHEETS
-SP62(S&T):1997
b) Spacing of reepers shall not normally exceed
1.5 Maintenance
600 mm; the size unless otherwise designed, shall be normally 50 mm x 25 mm for Mangalore tiles laid over flat tiles over reepers; and 50 mm x 15 mm for Mangalore tiles laid over reepers or over ceiling tiles laid on reepers.
Wooden shingle roofing shall be periodically painted (say after every 3 years) by a suitable preservative (see Chapter 7). Any decayed shingle and batten shall be replaced in time. 2 ROOFING
WITH MANGALORE
c>Where
TILES
ceiling. board is adopted, it shall not be less than 12 mm thick and shall be tongued and grooved. The boarding shall be nailed to the rafters first so as to form a continuous surface from ridge to the eaves, and the reepers nailed over them. Alternatively the ceiling boarding may be fixed direct to the purlins. The size of reepers shall not be less than 25 mm x 25 mm fixed at suitable distances apart to suit the tile spacing. The maximum spacing of sleepers shall not exceed 750 mm.
2.1 General Mangalore tiles are machine made burnt-clay tiles widely used for roofing work in the coutnry. Its design incorporates corrugation for drainage and also an efficient interlocking system between the tiles, enabling them when laid to form a leakproof layer. Depending on the degree of protection needed from the roof, Mangalore tiles may be laid as such or with an underlayer of flat tiles or ceiling tiles, etc. A specific advantage of a tiled roof is the ease of maintenance since any broken tile can be easily replaced. The design of Mangalore tile takes into account this aspect and the tile aslaid on the roof will be able to carry the~weight of a man it is called on to support during such repair. Though originally produced in areas near Mangalore, this tile is now manufactured and used in many parts of the country.
d) Dimensional coordination be done between the various elements of Mangalore avoid cutting of tiles.
e) No gutter on roof drainage shall discharge water from one roof to another, except from the dormer.
f> Glass tiles, of the same shape and size as the Mangalore tiles may manner as other tiles.
2.2 Materials
the following account:
b) Ridge tiles shall conform to IS 1464 : 1992. shall be composite hme : sand) 1 : 2 : 9.
mortar (cement :
4 Flat tiles shall have one of the dimensions equal to the gauge of the Mangalore tile.
e>Glass
tiles shall preferably shape as the Mangalore tile.
f)
be of the same
Ventilating tiles shall be equal in size to one plain Mangalore tile or two tiles laid side by side after allowing for overlapping. They shall be provided at the rate of two per every 10 m* area of finished roof surface.
s>Ceiling
Rise/Span
Mangalore tiles embedded in mortar over tiles
l/4 to 112
110
Mangalore tiles with flat tiles without mortar for embedment
l/4 to l/3
80
Mangalore tiles alone
l/4 to l/3
90
Dead Load, kg/m*
h) Flat tiles shall be immersed in water for 2 h and air dried before laying. The underside of the flat tiles, if so specified, shall be dipped in whitewash mixed to a creamy consistency and . then the tiles dried.
tile shall conform to IS 1464 : 1992.
be plain head nails of size 2.50 mm or 2.24 mm and shall be galvanized.
j) Mangalore tiles shall be first soaked in water for at least 2 h before laying.
Sheet metal for valley gutters shall be galvanized and at least 1.25 mm thick.
2.4 Fixing of Reepers
k) Reepers shall be of any of the species given in IS 883: 1970.
4 The reepers shall be fixed over the rafters at the specified spacing and nailed. The nails shall penetrate at least 2 cm into the rafters. They shall extend at least three span lengths between rafters; their length may be extended by a butt joint occurring on the rafters. The joints of two adjacent rows of reepers shall not occur on the same rafter. At the eaves a tilting fillet shall be fixed, if necessary (see Fig. 11.19)
m) Wire for tying down the tiles shall be galvanized and conform to IS 280 : 1978. -2.3 Preparatory
dead loads shall be taken into
Description
h) Nails shall conform to IS 723 : 1972; they shall
j)
be fixed in the same
g) While considering the strength of framework
4 Mangalore tiles shall conform to IS 654 : 1992.
c>Mortar
tiled roof to
Work
4 The roof framework shall be completed and the reepers nailed into position. The pitch of the roof shall neither be less than 24’ nor more than 45’. 296
sp 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 MANGALORE
TILE
GALVANIZED WIRE FOR TYING DOWN TILES TO THE REEPER EDGE BEDDING IN MORTAR
BATTEN OR REEPER WOODEN RAFTER
ENLARGED
DETAIL
MANGALORE TILE
AT A
GAUGE OF TILE
GALVANIZED MS FIATSCREW
MANGALORE TILE --,
/-TYING
LUG
h!S GALVANIZED 7 BATTENS OR REEPERS WOODEN RAFTER TILTING FILLET
\
LEAVES
REEPER
BOARD
ENLARGED
EAVES GUTTER
SECTION THROUGH TYING LUG (OF MANGALORE TILE)
FIG. 11.19 DETAILOFMANGALORETILESLAIDONREEPERS b) Where cejling boards are used instead reepers they shall be fixed as in 2.3 (c).
of
fixed to the roof. Mortar bands 200 mm to 250 mm wide and 60 mm to 65 mm deep may also be spread over the tiled roof at a spacing of 2.5 m to 3 m for additional protection against wind (see Fig. 11.20).
-2.5 Laying of Mangalore Tiles a) The tiles shall be laid from eaves towards the ridge properly interlocked according to the design of the tile. The tiles shall be laid breaking joints, that is, the left channel of the upper tile shall lie in the right channel of tile below. The hips and ridges of roof shall be covered with ridge tiles which shall be edge-bedded in mortar as shown in Fig. 11.19. The mortar in edge bedding may be further finished with plaster or paint to match the colour of the tiles. If the courses of roof tiles adjacent to the hip or ridge do not fit exactly underneath the ridge tiles, either purpose made tiles or tiles cut to suitable shape may be use. At eaves the lower most course of tiles shall overhang the tiling fillet by a distance sufficient to ensure that the mater drained off from the roof, discharges clear off the eaves into the gutter.
c>Mangalore
Tiles over a Flat Tile Undercover -The flat tiles shall be laid over the reeper; a mortar layer 25 mm thick shall be spread over the tlat tile. Mangalore tiles shall then be laid over the mortar and fully embeded. Where the pitch of the roof is more than 30°, additional fillets shall be fixed at a spacing of about 1 m centres, so that the-flat tiles laid between them are retained in position (see Fig. 11.21).-The Mangalore tiles may also be fixed over flat tiles without mortar bedding, if so specified.
4 Mangalore
Tiles over Ceiling Tiles - The ceiling tiles shall be laid over the reepers and the Mangalore tiles shall be laid over them with appropriate interlocking between tiles in two layers (see Fig. 11.22).
4 The eaves line and ridge-line shall be perfect-
b) A suitable arrangement shall be made so that the lower most course of tiles are not blown away by wind. The bottom most layer, or even more layers of tiles above it shall be tied to the reepers or other roof elements by means of galvanized wire; or by a galvanized steel flat
297
ly straight horizontal and parallel to each other.
f) The joints between hip and ridges shall be grouted so as to be leak proof. A metal saddle not less than 45 cm*~in area may preferably be used underneath such junctions as additional protection against leakage.
SP62(S&T):1997 GABLE
PARAPE
NIZED MS FLAT TYING DOWN TILES
FIG. 11.20 NOMENCLATURE
OF A
PITCHEDROOF
A-MANGALORE TILES RETAINING FILLETS TO BE USED WHEN PITCH IS MORE THAN 3d-,
MORTAR LAYER
,
A MANGALORE TILES
LREEPER
OR BATTEN
WOODEN RAFTER
OODEN RAFTER
ENLARGED DETAIL AT A REEPERS OR BATTENS
FIG. 11.2 1 DETAIL OF MANGALORE
TILES EMBEDDED
j) At junctions of roof and wall, waterproofing treatment (see Chapter 12) may be given.
OVER FLAT
TILES
Where necessary, tiles shall be let into the wall to a depth of 50 mm at least and a drip moulding shall be provided at about 100 mm above the roof surface and the joints between the wall and roof be grouted with waterproofing mortar (see 3.5).
g) A clear and unobstructed channel shall be formed in the valley. Undercover shall be provided for the courses of tiles adjacent to the valley (see Fig. 11.23). h) In case of chimney stacks and other similar features projecting through the roof, full tiles shall be used around them and taken into masonry.% addition metal or bitumen flashing shall be used to cover the intersection between the top edge of tiling and any projection through the roof. The flashing shall be well tucked into either joints in masonry or grooves in concrete as the case may be and shall be wedged and pointed.
IN MORTAR
3 SLOPED ROOF COVERING
-
SLATING
3.1 General R ec tangular slates of uniform thickness are widely used for roofing work in the country. The advantage of this roofing is the ease with which any broken slate can be replaced. Depending on the protection needed from roof, generally two ways of slating are adopted, they are single slating and double slating. 298
SP62(S&T):1997 MANGALORE
TILES
OF TILE
WOODEN
RAFTER
ENLARGED
DETAIL
AT
A
FIG. 11.22 MANGALORE TILE LAID OVERCEILING TILES
VALLEY
BOARD
VALLEY
RAFTER
STEEL
SHEET
FIG. 11.23 FIXING OF VALLEY GUTTER
3.2 Materials
2)
4 Slates shall be of uniform thickness and rectangular in shape. Generally, slate sizes 60 cm x 30 cm, 50 cm x 25 cm and 40 cm x 20 cm and of thickness varying from 5 mm to 10 mm may be used for rooting. Slates shall be so selected that the thickness of any one lot of 20 slates, selected from an individual consignment and closely packed one above the other shall not exceed that of any other lot of 20 of the same size taken from the same consignment, by more than 25 percent. 1)
The slates shall be of uniform size, colour and texture, free from white patches and be hard and brittle but not tough; when struck it shall give a ringing sound and shall not break when it is let fall flat on hard ground from a height of 1.25 m. The slates shall be of reasonably straight cleawage. The grains shall be longitudinal and not transverse. The surface shall be such as to permit proper laying of slates.
b)
The slates shall be impervious to moisture; the percentage absorption by weight of the slate after immersing it in water for 24 h shall not be more than two. When the slate is kept immersed on its edge in water for 6 h, the water level shall not rise to more than 12 mm and the immersed edge shall not show signs of swelling, splitting and flaking. The timber for plankings, reepers and rafters shall conform to structural timber specified in IS 3629 : 1986. Nails shall conform to IS 723 : 1972 of size 2.50 mm or 2.25 mm and shall be galvanized. The length of nails shall be such that they penetrate at least 2 cm into the rafters. Copper nails, if used, shall conform to IS 725 : 1961. Screws conforming to IS 451 : 1972 may be used instead of nails.
c>
3.3 Preparatory
Work
a) As far as possible, hipped roof shall be adopted. The slope of the roof may vary from
SP62(S&T):1997
2) Timber planking
22’ to 30’. It is also advisable to adopt slates of’size 60 cm x 30 cm, when the slope-of roof is 22’, size of 50 cm x 25 cm when the slope is 27’; and size of 40 cm X 20 cm when the slope is 30’.
b) Galvanized
steel sheet ridge and hip pieces (see IS 277 : 1992) shall be used and these shall be fixed with roofing screws, limpet and washers which are preferably dipped in anticorrosive bituminous paint conforming to IS 158 : 1981. Corresponding holes in slates below the hip or ridge pieces shall be made to receive the stews. The ridge and hip pieces shall have an overlap of 7.5~cm over the slates. The thickness of galvanized steel sheets shall preferably be 0.63 mm or 0.80 mm.
3)
c) Valleys shall be formed by laying lead or galvanized steel sheet gutter on boarding fixed into the valley bottom. The gutter shall extend 20 cm on each side of the valley line, the edges being turned over to form beaded edges and shall be fixed down by nails with corresponding suitable holes in the slates. The slates shall be cut to shape and fixed with a lap of 7.5 cm over the gutter. The edges of slates shall be made true and the face of the edges shall be chisel dressed.
4)
3.4 Laying of Slates 5) Slates may be laid in one of the following two ways: a) Single Slating 1)
Slates shall be laid on wooden reepers as shown in Fig. 11.24.
6)
of thickness 15 mm to 20 mm shall be laid on the wooden rafters, spaced at between 30 cm to 150 cm apart. On~the planking bitumen felt conforming to IS 1322 : 1993 shall be laid according to the procedure laid down in Chapter 12. Bitumen felt shall overlap at horizontal joints by not less than 7.5 cm and at other joints by not less than 15 cm. At hips a strip not less than 60 cm wide shall be laid from top to bottom overlapping the felting of roof. At valleys a similar strip shall be lapped under the felting. Polyethylene may also be used instead of bitumen felt. On bitumen felt, wooden sleepers shall be fixed, one under the head of each; a reeper shall be fixed in the middle of each slate (see Fig. 11.24). The spacing of sleepers thus depends on the length of the slate. The top surface of the reepers shall conform to the underside of the slate resting over them. The reepers shall be nailed to the planking and the bitumen layer. The bottom course of the slates near the eaves shall project 7.5 cm outside the planking and shall be half the length plus 7.5 cm. This course shall be laid of double slates, the joint of the top layer shall be in the centre of the bottom layer. Over the bottom course, other courses shall be laid. Each slate shall be laid with an overlap of minimum 7.5 cm over the bottom and of 5 cm on the sides. Slates shall be fixed to the reepers with flat headed glavanized wire nails of 2.5 mm
1I.24B ENLARGED SECTION XX FIG.11 .~~DETAILSOFSINGLE SLATING
SP62(S&T):1997 shank diameter and length of 3 or 4 cm. It is preferable to dip the nails in anticorrosive paint and dry them before use. It shall be ensured that the nails are driven into the reeper by at least 2 cm or two-thirds of the depth of reeper whichever is less. 7)
8)
Nails shall be fixed on two holes, 3.75 cm from top edge and 5 cm from side edges, made from front to back side in each side, thus leaving a centre sunk on the top surface of slates. All slates shall be headnailed with two nails each. Ridge pieces Fig. 11.25.
sheds, godowns and factory buildings, besides their extensive use in remote areas. These are easy and quick to erect and economical. This type of construction is also popular in hilly areas and for temporary construction. NOTE - If corrugated nluminium sheets to IS used similar procedures may be followed.
4.2 Materials
shall be laid as shown in
1)
Slates shall be laid on reepers as shown in Fig. I 1.26.
2)
Timber planking shall be laid on rafters as described in 3.4 (a)(2). Bitumen may not be provided except in case,of important building where procedures as detailed in 3.4 (a)(3) may~be followed.
3)
All other details shall be as in 3.4 (a). Around Projections/Junctions
a>Proper
b)
precaution shall be taken to prevent leakage of water by providing galvanized sheet and double layer of felt at junctions of roof and roof projections, such as, chimneys. At junctions of wall and roof the treatment shall be as given in Fig. 11.27.
4 SLOPED ROOF CORRUGATED SHEETS
a>Steel
sheet shall conform to IS 277 : 1992 with a grade of coating 600 or 450.
b) Hook bolts shall conform to IS 730 : 1978. Steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be galvanized. Neoprene washers, if used, shall conform to IS 8869 : 1978.
b) Double Slating
3.5 Finishing
1254: 1991 are
USING PLAIN AND GALVANIZED STEEL
4.3 Preparatory
Work
a) In addition to end purlins for each layer of sheets, at least one purlin should be placed (on simple rafter) to support sheets at midway to avoid sagging. In case of fabricated roof trusses, the spacing of purlins is guided by the maximum distances as given below: Thickness of Steel Sheet, mm
Maximum Spacing of Purlifls, c/c, m
1.oo
2.0
0.80
1.8
0.63
1.6
Ridge purlins shall be fixed 75 mm to 115 mm from apex of the roof, that is, from the bolt point.
b) Sheets shall be laid with a minimum end lap of
4.1 General Sloped roof coverings using plain and corrugated galvanized steel sheets are generally used for storage
I50 mm and side lap of two corrugations; may be increased to avoid cutting.
/-GALVANIZED
STEEL RIDGE
BITUMEN FELT SCREWS AND
L WOODEN PLANK
Y-
FIG. I 1.25 DETAILSA’rTHEEDGEOF SLATEDROOF
these
SP62(S&T):1997
WOODEN
PLANU
Il.26 A~PICfGR[AkVIEW BITUMEN FEL? WOODEN PLANK
11.26EtENLARGED SECTION XX FIG. 11.26 DETAILSOFDOUBLESLATING WOULblNG RAIN~WATER GUTTER
DRIP
CEMENT MORTAR SLATES A
TILTING FILLET BITUMEN FELT
FIG. 11.27 DETAILSATTHEJUNCTION OFTHEROOFWITHWALL (WHERE-SLATES THEMSELVES AREUSEDFORROOFDRAINAGE) 4.4 Laying and Fixing of Sheets
a>The sheets shall be laid on the purlins or other structural members as indicated, to a true plane, with the lines of corrugation truly parallel or normal to the sides of the areas to be covered, unless otherwise cial shaped roofs.
required as in spe-
b) Laying of the sheets shall commencefrom lower sheets length mum
the end (bottom) of roof. Longer length shall be fixed first and then shorter sheets fixed towards the ridge. Mini300 mm length of sheet should project 302
beyond the edges of purlins. For alignment of sheets, one piece of timber batten shall be fixed, projecting up to the depth of purlin, on the first and last structural member (truss or rafter); and with both these batten pieces a thread shall be tied to check straightness, etc, and then the sheets shall be fixed. First the bottom layer of sheets shall be laid temporarily by 50_mm long nails. After laying all the sheets up to the ridge, permanent fixing shall be done by means of J or L hook bolts (see Fig. 11.28 and Fig. 11.29.
SP-62(S&T):1997 r--STEEL END LAP 150 min. _
RAFTER OR TOP CHORD OF ROOF TRUSS
l E.$z.$, J OR L BOLT>
NUT
r
\
/
t--LIMPET
WASHER
BITUMEN
WASHER
WITH 150mm OVERLAP
ENLARGED
DETAIL
AT ‘A’
All dimensions in millimetres. ..FIG. 11.28 FIXING DETAILS OF STEEL SHEETS STEEL
SHEE
drilled but not punched. The holes in the washers shall be the diameter of the bolt. The nuts shall be tightened from above to give leak proof roof. Sheets shall not generally be built into gables and parapets. Junction with a wall shall be treated to make it leak proof.
1 7
L SIDE LAP (2 CORRUGAflONS)
4.5 Ridges and Hips
a>Ridges
and hip sections either side be properly
FIG. 11.29 DETAILS OF LAPPING
c>For fixing
of sheets the cover shall not be less than 85 mm. The sheets shall be placed ‘alternate’, that is, one sheet (the lower) being fixed with edges turning away from the bearer or purlin to which the sheeting is fixed and the cover sheet on side being fixed with edges turning in towards the bearer or purlin.
b) Ridges and hips shall be fixed to roof members with J or L hook bolts M 6 or M 8; at least one of them should pass through the end laps of ridges and hips. End laps shall be joined together by M 6 hook bolts. The hips and ridges shall fit in squarely on the sheets.
4 Sheets shall be fixed to the purlins by J or L
c
hips shall becovered with ridge and with a minimum lap of 150 mm on over the roofing sheets; they shall bent to shape and fixed.
(M 6 or M 8) hook bolts; these shall be a minimum of three hook bolts placed at ridges of corrugation in each sheet on every purlin with a spacing not exceeding 300 mm. Sheeting on steel purlins, shall be riveted together with 6 mm dia galvanized wrought iron rivets and galvanized washers, two to each~rivet, at spacing of 200 mm maximum for the side laps; and on every corrugation for end laps.
4.6 Valleys and Flashings
e) All holes for bolts, rivets, etc, shall be made in the crown of the corrugation and shall be
303
a) Valleys and flashings shall lap with corrugated sheets not less than 150 mm width on ei&er side; the end laps shall also be not less than 150 mm and painted with red lead.
b) Valley sheets should be fixed to the roof members with J or L hook bolts; at least one bolt should pass through the end laps on either side. Junctions with wall shall be properly treated to make it leak proof.
SP62(S&T):1997 lengths between adjacent sheets [see 5.3 (Q] shall be increased.
5 ASBESTOS CEMENT SHEETS CORRUGATED
b) Purlins shall be so spaced to see that the sheets
5.1 General Unreinforced corrugated absestos cement sheets are commonly used in this country for providing structural surfaces exposed to weather, such as, roofs for industrial, institutional, commercial and residential buildings. These sheets have several advantages, such as, lightness, ease and quickness of construction and durability. 5.2 Materials
a>Asbestos
cement sheets shall conform to IS 459 : 1992. Asbestos building boards shall conform to IS 2098 : -1964.
b) Fixing
accessories, such as, J or L bolts, washers, etc, shall conform to IS 730 : 1978. Coach-screws shall conform to IS I 120 : 1975.
c>All
bolts, washers, etc. shall be galvanized.
5.3 Preparatory
Work
a) The pitch of roof be preferably not less than 18’; if steeper pitches are used, the end lap
do not deflect; generally for 6 mm thick sheet, the purlins should be spaced at I.4 m for roof covering and 1.7 m for side cladding.
c>Ridge
purlins shall be fixed 75 mm to 1 I5 mm from the apex of roof, that is, from bolt point.
4 Additional
trimmers shall be used between purlins at points where considerable traffic is likely to occur, such as, adjoining valleys or gutters, etc. For smaller sheets,-it is desirable to arrange for closer purlin spacing at eaves rather than at edges.
d Hip and valley runners should be fixed flush with top face of the purlin and span bet-ween them. The runners should be parallel to the edge of the sheeting to permit fixing of accessories. The side lap should be half corrugation Fig. 11.30).
(see
For normal pitches, equal to and more than 18’, the end lap shall not be less than 150 mm (see Fig. 11.3 1). J-TYPE HOOK BOLT
fGI FLAT WASHER BITUMINOUSFELT WASHER _ WIND DIRECTION
FIG. 1 I .30 DETAIL OF SIDE LAP
MS ANGLE PURLIN
FIG. I 1.3 I DETAILOFEND LAP
SP62(S&T):1997 For low roof pitches, less than 18’, manufacturers shall be consulted for side laps; also for normal pitches in exposed conditions side laps should be as per manufacturers instructions.
j> Fixing bolts and screws shall be 8 mm or more in diameter and the nuts of the-hook bolts shall bear on galvanized iron washers which in turn shall be embedded on bituminous felt washers. The screws and nuts shall be sufficiently tightened only to seat the bitumen washer over the corrugations, so that natural movement in the sub-structure of the roof may not damage the sheeting.
The side lap shall be away from the prevailing wind direction. The free over-hang at eaves, measured from lower edge to centre of bolt holes, shall be not more than 300 mm. Wherever four corners of sheets overlap, two of them shall be mined to secure a perfect tit. To avoid undue width of flashing, the sheets should finish at abutments with an upturned edge.
k) The length of J-bolt or crank bolt shall be 75 mm longer than the depth of the purlin for single sheet and 90 mm longer for double sheet or where ridges or other accessories have to be fixed.
5.4 Laying and Fixing of Sheets
m>The
minimum length of square head coach screws for timber purlins shall be 110 mm. The number and length of bolts and washers shall be as given below:
5.4.1 Holes and Accessories
a>Holes
in sheets shall be drihed and not punched and should be 2 mm larger than the diameter of the hook bolt; they shall be at the crown of corrugation and not at the valleys.
No. of Bolts, Washers
Length of Bolt
1. At horizontal (end) laps of sheets; at eaves when filler pieces are used; at ridge when sheet and ridge pieces are secured by the same bolt
Twice the number of sheets in one horizontal course
Depth of purlin plus 90 mm
2. At eaves when filler pieces are not used; at ridge when sheet and ridge pieces are not secured by the same bolt
Twice the number of sheets in one horizontal course
Depth of purlin plus 75 mm
3. At intermediate purlins where horizontal laps do not occur
Twice the number of sheets in one horizontal course
Depth of purlin plus 75 mm
Situation
b) Holes for fixing sheeting shall be drilled in the centre of the end lap of sheets to suit, that is, the centre line of the purlins if these are of timber when square head coach screws are used; or as close to the back of purlins, if J or L bolts are used with steel angles, precast concrete or timber purlins. No hole shall be drilled nearer than 40 mm to any edge of sheet or an accessory.
c>Galvanized
iron J-hook bolts or cranked hook bolts and nuts bearing on galvanized iron washers and bitumen washers shall be used for fixing sheets on angle iron purlins.
4 Galvanized iron L-ho&bolts
and nuts bearing on galvanized iron washers and bitumen washers shall be used for fixing sheets on RS joist, precast concrete or timber purlins.
4 Galvanized iron coach screws bearing on galvanized iron washers and bitumen washers shall be used for fixing sheets on timber purlins.
n>The
washers shall be 25 mm in diameter and 1.6 mm thick for flat iron washers; 35 ~rnrn in diameter and 1.5 mm thick for bitumen washers.
f) Galvanized iron roof bolts and nuts bearing on galvanized iron flat washers and bitumen wahsers shall be used for stitching on sheets, fixtures like ridge cappings, corner pieces, ventilators, north light curves, etc.
P) Ridge cappings shall be secured to the ridge purlins by the same bolts which secure sheeting.
S) Where sheets are laid on tubular purlins the fixing bolt should be designed to encompass at least half the tube periphery and precautions should be taken to prevent its rotation.
5.4.2 Laying of Sheets
h) Direct
fixing of sheets to drilled metal framework or by stud welding is undesirable as it tends to restrain movement of sheets.
a>Check
purlin spacing and length of sheets for securing the appropriate laps,~overhang, etc.
b) Sheets shall be laid with smooth side upwards and with side and end laps as given in Fig. 11.30 and Fig. 1 I .3 1. The courses of 305
SP62(S&T):1997 3) The sheets in the second and other intermediate -rows shall have bottom right hand corner and top left hand corner cut;-the last sheet shall have only the top left hand corner cut.
sheets shall be so laid that the corrugations run in continuous straight lines. If the building is in exposed position and is subject to driving rain and wind, it is advisable to commence laying of sheets from the end opposite to the direction of wind.
4) The last or top row ofsheets shall have bottom right hand corner cut with the exception of the last sheet which shall be laid uncut.
c>The
sheets shall be laid starting either from eaves from left to right or right to left depending on direction of prevailing wind, to avoid it. See Fig. 11.32 for laying sheets from left to right, for details.
The whole sequence is reversed if laid from right to left. The mitre is cut from a point 15 cm up the vertical side of the sheet to 4.5 cm along the horizontal edge; this is necessary when four sheets meet at a lap.
The sequence for left to right starting from eaves could be as follows: 1) The first sheet is laid uncut.
d) Nuts and screws shall be tightened lightly at first and then fully tightened when a dozen or more sheets are laid. One bolt or screw shall be used on each side of the lap.
2) The remaining sheets in the bottom row shall have top left hand corners cut or mitred.
--SIDE
LAP
PURLIN POSITION T SUIT OVERHAN
A B C I)
= = = =
Uncut sheet Top left hand corner cut Bottom right hand corner cut Top left hand corner and bottom right hand corner cut
FIG.Il.32 LAYINGOFSHEETS(SHEETS LAIDFROMLEFTTORIGHT) 306
c
SP62(S&T):1997
5.43 Asbestos Accessories
tion and shall be fixed as in Fig. 11.33 and Fig. 11.34. Correct fitting of ridge capping will be automatic, if a template is used when fixing roof sheets.
a>
Moulded asbestos accessories should be selected as far as possible from the range of standard patterns. Special fittings, if required shall be designed to conform closely to the sheet profile. Roofing accessories should generally be secured to the roof or wall cladding by the same bolts which secure the sheets.
2)
The work shall be started from left hand verge, placing frost small roll wing (inner) and positioning it in such a way that the first valley on the right hand side of the ridge fits into the valley at side lap of roof sheeting. In case of large roll wing, it shall be so positioned that the first valley of left hand side of the ridge wing fits into valley of side lap of roof sheeting.
3)
Serrated adjustable ridge cappings, supplied in pairs, are as shown in Fig. I 1.35.
b) Ridge capping should be secured to the purlins, as far as possible, by the same bolts which secure the sheets, where this is not possible each wing of the ridge capping should be adequately secured to the sheets by roofing bolts. I)
Close fitting adjustable ridge capping shall be designed to fit~the corrugations of sheets laid with side lap of half corruga-
J-TYPE HOCU BOLT
FIG. 11.33 TYPICAL CLOSE FITTINGADJUSTABLERIDGE
OF SHEETS POSITION OF LARGE OUTER WING ON SHEETS LAID LEFT TO RIGHT
POSITION OF LARGE OUTER WING ON SHEETS LAID RIGHT TO LEFT
POSITION OF MALL INNER WING ON SHEETS LAID LEFT TO RIGHT
POSITION OF SMALL INNER WING ON SHEETS LAID RIGHT TO LEFT
RIDGE (LARGE OUTER WING)
TEMPLATE FOR OF CORRUGATED
CORRECT SHEET
LARGE
OUTER
SMALL
INNER
WMG
GAUGING SIDE LAP LPD9rn-I WING
FIXING
OF RIDGE
ADJUSTABLE PIECES
FIG. 11.34DETAILS SHOWING METHOD OF FIXING CLOSE FITTINGADJUSTABLERIDGE PIECES
SP62(S&T):1997 4)
The method if laying and fixing of ridges shall be as shown in Fig. 11.36.
TIP PAINTED TO FACILITATE
r
FIG. Il.35
Fixing with a typical north light two piece adjustable ridge shall be as shown in Fig. 11.37.
BLACK FwNG
TYPICAL SERRATED ADJUSTABLE RIDGE
THIS PORTION
OF INNER WING OF BRIDGE TO BE TRIMMED OFF
A
SERRATION SUITABLY PAINTED ON RIDGES TO FIT IN CORRUGATIONS WHERE SHEETS OVERLAP
THIS PORTION OF OUTER WING OF RIOGE TO EE TRIMMED OFF
INNER
WING
FIG. 11.36 DETAILS SHOWING FIXING OF SERRATED ADJUSTABLE RIDGES (SHEETS LAU) FROM LEFT TO RIGHT)
308
SP62(S&T):1997
M?rSHROOMHEAD ROOFING BlTlJMlNOUS AND INNERWING
J-TYPE HOOK BOLT
GLASS MSANGLE GLAZING GLAZINGGEE
F1c.Il.37 TYPICALNORTHLIGHTTWO-PIECEADJUSTABLERIDGE
c)
the rafter by means of coach screws.
Ridge finial in one piece should be secured to
the ridge bolt through the crown. Two piece ridge finial should be secured to the ridge capping and roof sheeting by one bolt through each wing of the fitting, in addition they should be secured to the ridge capping by one roofing bolt at the crown (see Fig. 11.38).
e) Eaves, may be closed by piece as in Fig. 1-I.40, above glazing and at the bottom of vertical sheeting. Alternatively, the sheeting at eaves may be bedded in mortar if the walls of the building are of brick, block, or similar construction.
4 Hip capping or hip tiles - The roofing sheet
t1 For top edges and abutments, apron flashings
at hips should be cut to the required mitre and be close butted. The hip joint may be covered with two piece plain wind hip tiles (see Fig. 11.39), one piece socketted plain wing angular hip tiles or heavy half round hip tiles. Alternatively, an apron type capping may be used over the plain wing ridge should be secured through the roof sheets to the hip runners, by one bolt on each side immediately above the socket. On timber roof, the hip tile should be secured to
should generally be used (see Fig. 11.4 1) and suitably fixed.
g)
,
Special moulded pieces may be used for yentilators and lights and suitably fixed (see Fig. 11.42, Fig. 11.43 and Fig. 11.44). If rooflights are required, purpose made rootlights may be used either as fixed skylights or as adjustable skylights (see Fig. 11.45 and Fig. 11.46). Alternatively, corrugated glass may be used.
/-MUSHROOM ROOFING
J-TYPE
ELEVATION (BARGE BOARD REMOVED)
FIG. 11.38 TYPICALRIDGEFINIAL 309
HEAD BOLT
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
Serrations, asdesired, should becutatsitetofitcorrugations athipslopes. FIG. 11.39 TYPICALUNSERRATED ADJUSTABLE RIDGEFORHIPS
NOTE -
b.iS
AkGLE PURLIN
FIG. 11.40 TYPICALEAVESFILLERPIECE
h) Other asbestos cement fittings may be used as corner rolls, barge-boards, etc (see Fig. 11.47) and secured to the structure or sheeting. 5.4.4 Guttersand IS 2527 : 1984.
as in b) Expansion joints shall be provided Fig. 11.48, for large roofs where there is likely to be some movements of the structure due to variations in climate conditions.
rain water pipes shall be fixed as per
c) The number and length of bolts, bituminous felt washers and galvanized iron washers shall be as below:
5.5 Safety Precautions a) No person other than workmen employed shall be permitted access to any area over which sheeting is being laid. b) Cat ladders of roof boards shall be used by men working on roofs.
6 ASBESTOS
CEMENT SHEETS -
SEMI-
CORRUGATED 6.1 General All the provisions of 5 for corrugated sheets and its subclauses shall apply for fixing semi-corrugated sheets except as modified below:
Situation
1. At horizontal laps of sheets; at eaves with filler pieces; at ridges when sheets and ridge pieces are screwed by the same bolt
a) Fig. 11.28 is modified to suit semi-corrugated sheet.
No. of Bolts and Washers
-
‘,
Length of Bolts
SHORTBOLTS Depth of The number of p u r 1i n + 7 5 sheets in one mm horizonta1 course + two
LONG BOLTS The number of sheets in one course less one
Depth purlin mm
of + 90
3 f [: k . 1 *
3‘10 & t
_,
SP62(S&T):1997 Situation
No. of Bolts
Length of Bolts
and Washers -2. At eaves when pieces are not used; at ridge when sheets and the ridge pieces are not screwed by the same bolt
Twice the number of sheets in one horizontal course one
3. At intermediate purlins where horizontal laps do not occur
The number of sheets in one horizontal course plus one
Depth of purlin+75mm
4
The length of the mitre, when done, shall be 15 mm and the width shall be equal to the width of side lap.
adjustable ridge and e) Typical semi-corrugated its fixings are as shown in Fig. 11.49 and Fig. 11.50 and typical plain adjustable ridge as in Fig. 11.51 and Fig. 11.52. Other modifications as needed by semicorrugation in Fig. 11.30 to Fig. 11.47 shall be done.
Depth of purlin+75mm
J-TYPE
SIDE
CL
‘Tf 50 mm
APRON
I 4
LEAN-TO
j
ROOF1 STANCHION
-
FIG. 11.4 1 TYPICALAPRONPIECE
SP62(S&T):1997 HOOK BOLT
MUSHROOM HEAD ROOFING BOLT
REBUIRED ONLY IN STORMY WIND REGION ANGLE WELDED AT THE BACK OF PRINCIPAL RAFT
VENTILATOR
CURVE
k-TYPE
.LOU’fRE
FIG. 11.42TYPICAL NORTHLIGHTCURVES
rm
LOUVRE SUPPORT MS ANGLE OR FLAT
r-w /-
I
:
1
4410
Gl
WAc;UFPe ..__. .-...J
SECTION
LAPPING
OF LOUVRES
FIG. 11.43TYPICAL ‘S’ TYPE LOUVRE 312
XX
SP62(S&T):1997
J-TYPE
HOOK BO
ANGLE PURLIN
MAKE AN OPENI IN THE SHEET
FMU!iiHFtOOM HEAD ROOFMG BOLT
PLAN
FIG. 11.44TYPICAL~COWLTYPE VENTILATOR
t-
l-1 m (NOM)
c
FIG. 1I .45 TYPICAL ROOFLIGHT
313
SP62(S&T):1997
r
MUSHROOM HEAD ROOFING BOLT
/ROOFLIGHT
k
WIRED GLASS
AC SHEET
NORTHLIGHT ROOF TRUSS \
J
rAC
GUTTER
7 I
FIG. 11.46TYPICALROOFLIGHT USEDAS NORTHLZIGHT GLAZING
/-
BARGE
IF-
OF
IOOmm
LAP
BOARD AT VERGE THE ROOF
FIG. 11.47TYPICALDETAILSOFBARGEBOARDORCORNERPIECE(VIEW FROMEAVES)
SP62(S&T):1997
J-TYPE BITUMINOUS SEMI-CORRUGATED
HOOK FELT
GI FLAT
WASHER
WA
SHEET
MS ANGLE PURLIN end lap of expansion joints is thesame,asthatof theroofingsheets,thatis, usually150mm.If expansion jointslap betweenpurlinstheyshouldbe stitchedbyroofingbolts.
NOTE -The
FIG. 11.48 TYPICALEXPANSION JOINTFORSEMI-CORRUGATED SHEETS
FIG. 11.49 TYPICALSEMI-CORRUGATED ADJUSTABLE RIDGE
SP62(S&T):1997
B 3
I
ix YI
EOGE OF RIDGE WING TO BE TRlUMF.0 OFF-
i- SEMI-CORRUGATED
SHEETS
OUTER WING OF J-TYPE
RIDGE
SEMI-CORRUGATED
ENLARGED
SECTION
XX
FIG. 11.50DETAILSSHOWINGFIXINGOFSEMI-CORRUGATED ADJUSTABLE RIDGES
I-TYPE
FIG. 11S 1 TYPICALPLAINWING ADJUSTABLE RIDGE 316
SP62(S&T):1997
SECTION SHOWING ALTERNATIVE FIXING ACCESSORIES
FIG. 11.52 TYPICAL ONE-PIECE PLAIN ANGULAR RIDGE
ANNEX
PI
(Clause 1.2) TIMBER FOR WOODEN B-l
SHINGLES
7. Deodar (Cedrus deodura)
QUALITY
B-l.1 The wood should be durable, dimensionally stable, light in weight, with good insulating properties, adequate strength, even grain and ability to take stains, paint or preservative.
8. Star Apple (Chtysophyllum roxburghii) 9. Cypress (Cupressus torulosu) 10. Thingan (Hopeu odorata) 11. Pyinma (Lagerstraemiu hypdecuu)
B-2 SPECIES
12. Pali (Paluquim elliptiem)
B-2.1 The following species of timber may be used for wooden shingles: 1. Fir (Abies pindrow) 2. Mundani (Acrocarpusfraxinitolius)
13. Chir (Pinus roxburghii)
3. Haldu (Adina cordifoliu)
14. Kail (Pinus wullichiunu) 15. Padauk (Pterocarpus dalbergiodes) 16. Oak (Quercus lamellosa)
4. Semul (Bombay_ceiba)
17. Yew (Tuxus baccatu)
5. Didu (B. Znsignea)
18. Teak (Tectona grundis)
6. Indian Chestnut (Custunopsis spp)
19. Irul (Xyliu dolubriformis)
PART 3 SHELL ROOFS (CURVED
1 GENERAL t 1.1 Shell roofs are cast in-situ or precast; they can be of single curvature or double curvature. Reinforced concrete in-situ concrete shells covered by IS 2204 :
ROOFS)
1962 are chosen commonly for covering large clear column free areas, such as, factory buildings, godowns, power stations, garages, island platforms of railway stations, stadia, etc. Precast concrete doubly curved shells, covered by IS 6332 : 1984 also serves
SP62(S&T):1997 similar end uses. Shell units are effectively used for replacing solid slabs; they may be used in conjunction with precast joists or battens or planks; or as waffle shells by providing in-situ ribs in two directions. The shells are lighter in weight and save reinforcing steel and concrete. It eliminates the use of shuttering fully and scaffolding partially. The sizes of shells are chosen depending or handling facility. But shell construction is a specialized job and the designers specifications should be adhered to. 2 REINFORCED CONCRETE ROOF CAST IN-SITU
SHELL
2.1 Shell Dimensions
a>Chord
width (see B of Fig. 1,153) is the horizontal projection of the arc of the shell.
cal shells, Shells of evolution, Translation shells, etc. Figures illustrating those are given in IS 2204 : 1962. 2.3 Design Design shall be according to relevant IS Codes. The thickness of singly-curved shells shall not however be less than 5 cm; it is the usual practice to thicken the shell near the edges and the traverses. The thickness of doubly-curved shells shall be not less than 4 cm; this thickness is adequate, as shells of double curvature are not developable and hence are more resistant to buckling; more over flexural stresses are small. End frames or traverses are provided to preserve the shape of the shell; it may a solid diaphragm, an arch rib, a portal frame or a bowstering girder. a) Reinforcement shall not be less than 5 mm in diameter in the unthickened portion of the shell and shall not be greater than the following:
b) Radius R, at any point of the skin in one of two principal shells.
directions
in the case of cylindrical
c>Rise
(seefof Fig. 11.53) is the rise of the shell at any section in vertical direction between the lower springing level and the highest level or apex of shell.
4 Span (see L in Fig. 11.53) is the distance between the centre lines of two adjacent frames or traverses.
There are many types of shells due to combination of geometric shapes, such as, Barrel shells, Continuous cylindrical shells, Corrugated shells, Cylindrical shells, Multiple cylindrical shells, Northlight cylindri-
10 mmdia
For shells from 5 cm up to less than 6-5 cm thick
12 mm dia
For shells from 6.5 cm and over
16 mm dia
b) Concrete mix shall be as per IS 456 : 1978.
end
2.2 Type of Shells
For shells from 4 cm up to less than 5 cm thick
2.4 Sequence of Construction Since the construction of shell is of utmost importance for its stability, the sequence, framework, placing of reinforcement, etc, shall be carried out by an expert contractor. For guidance IS 2204 : 1962 may be referred to.
FIG. 11.53 S~NGLEBARRELSHELL 318
SP62(S&T):1997 3 PRECAST DOUBLY CURVED SHELL UNITS
3.2 Construction
3.1 Funicular shell units shall be cast as described in IS 6332 : 1984.
Reference may be made to IS 6332 : 1984. NOTE -
Since design and construction of shell structures is a
specialized job. reference may be made to specialised literature.
PART 4 FLAT ROOF FINISH -
1 GENERAL
shall be allowed to rot for a period of not less than 7 days. During this period it shall be pugged manually to get a homogeneous mass free of lumps and clods. The wheat straw may be of any size since it would be broken to small size during the period.
1.1 Mud Phusku is a common type of insulating course in the roof used in shot dry regions of the country, such as in Punjab, UP, Haryana, etc. where rainfall is not heavy. It is cheap, reasonably durable and adds enough thermal insulation for maintaining relatively comfortable temperature in the interior. Of course the reduction in temperature would be less than what can be obtained from using polystyrene and other factory made products.
The slump, when tested as per IS 1199 : 1959 shall be about 70 mm. Alternatively, consistency of mortar may be adjusted by taking it in a trowel and observing as to how it slides off the face of the trowel. The mortar shall readily slide off, but at the same time shall not be so wet as to part into large drops before falling.
2 MATERIALS Mud Phuska layer by itself is not sufficiently waterproof for the roof and it may be necessary to provide beneath it a waterproofing layer or membrane to be effective in this respect. Care shall also be taken while doing roof finish work to compact mud Plzuska layer to maximum density.
4 Cutback bitumen shall be prepared by adding 20 parts of kerosene oil and one part of paraffin wax to80partsof8OO/lOObitumen (see IS 217 : 1988) melted on gentle fire. The mixture shall be worked to a homogeneous mass.
e) Mud mortar used as bedding under brick tile layer shall be prepared in the same-manner as mud plaster but without any addition.of fibrous reinforcing material and binding material. The mud mortar may be used immediately without any rotting period. The mortar shall be mixed with 2 percent bitumen cut back by mass of dry soil and worked to a homogeneous mass.
1) Soil mud Phuska shall be free from gravel and coarse sand of particle size greater than 2 mm, vegetable matter and KANKAR particles. The coarse material shall not exceed 25 percent by mass. The soil shall also be free from harmful and efflorescent salts. The plasticity index of the soil shall be between 10 to 15 percent.
9 LEEPINGplaster
(GOBRI LEEPING) shall be prepared by mixing soil with equal parts of cowdung and adding the required quantity of water to make a thin paste; soil used shall be free from coarse sand and gravel. The mixture shall then be worked into a homogeneous mass. Five percent of cutback bitumen by mass of dry soil may be added to improve the water proofing characteristics.
2) Generally soil suitable for brick making is suitable for mud Phuska also. The plasticity index will indicate a reasonable cohesive soil. Soil infested with white ants shall not be used.
b) Soil for mud plaster and mud mortar shall be free from vegetable roots, gravel and coarse sand of particle size greater than 2 mm. The coarse material shall not exceed 10 percent by mass and the soil shall be free from harmful and efflorescent salts. The plasticity index shall be between 10 to IS percent. C
MUD PHUSKA
g) Brick tiles shall conform to IS 2690 (Part 1) : 1993 and IS 2690 (Part 2) : 1992.
h) Cement shall conform to IS 269 : 1989 or IS 455 : 1989 or IS 1489 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1991 or any other as specified.
) Mud plaster
shall be prepared from soil prescribed in 2 (b). The dry soil shall be reduced to fine powder and mixed with water in a pit, adding wheatstraw 6 percent by mass and cowdung 12 percent by mass. The mixture
3
Sand and fine aggregate -- IS 383 : 1970.
shall
conform
to
ok) Burnt clay pozzolana shall conform to IS 1344 1981. 319
L
. .
SP 62 (US& T ) : 1997 m) Cement mortar for grouting shall be a 1:3 mix or any richer mortar as may be specified. 3 PREPERATORY
4.3 Applying
the mud Phuska, a layer of minimum 25 mm thick mud plaster shall be laid; the plaster may be applied in single coat or two coats of 15 mm and 10 mm; two coats are preferable. Hair cracks if any shall be grouted with the binder material of LEEPING. The surface level shall be checked.
WORK
3.2 The durability of the mud Phuska layer depends on how the protective layer, namely, the mud plaster or bricktiles are maintained free of cracks.
b) When the mud plaster coating has dried, a thin coat, not less than 3 mm, of LEEPlNG shall be applied. The surface shall be allowed to dry and any hair carcks shall be grouted as before. The LEEPING shall be finished with a trowel or float.
3.3 Where there is no rainfall and there is very little variation in temperature, paving with tiles may not be necessary over mud Phuska layer.
4 LAYING
4.4 Paving with Brick Tiles
a>The
OF MUD PHUSKA
brick tiles, where necessary, shall be laid flat on a thin layer of mud mortar. The mud mortar shall be used to the minimum extent to give a level surface. Tiles shall be laid close together with a thickness of joint between 6 mm and 15 mm; it shall be ensured that the mud mortar rises in the joints. The brickwork shall be allowed to dry for 24 h before grouting the joints. Care shall be. taken at the time of grouting that the tiles are not displaced.
4.1 Preparation The soil as described in 2 (a) shall be stacked in requisite quantities in about 300 mm high stacks over a level ground and the tqp surface divided into suitable compartments by bunding. The estimated quantity of water corresponding to the optimum moisture content shall be added about 12 h before the use and allowed to soak. The stacks of soil shall then be worked up with spades and hands to ensure proper distribution of moisture at the time of use of soil.
b) While grouting with the 1:3 mix, ensure that all joints are filled. Allow the mortar to set for 12 h before pointing, if it is to be done.
NOTE - Generally soil of this type will require an optimum moisture of about 145 l/m”. Soil suitable for good compaction should contain that much quantity of moisture, which when moulded with hand to the shape of form, just retains its form.
c>Check
evenness and desired slope.
4 Cure the surface for not less than 7 days. e) The junction between the roof finish and
4.2 Laying
parapets shall be treated as described in Chapter 12 on waterproofing of flat roofs in buildings.
a) The mud Phuska shall be laid loose to a thickness of not more than 150 mm. It shall be brought to proper slope and then rammed manually with wooden THAPPIES so as to obtain maximum density. The final thickness should not be less than 100 mm.
b) The surface shall be allowed to dry for a period of not less than 24 h. If any cracks appears, they should be filled with a grout of the binder material that is used in the LEEPZNG (usually GOBRI)
4.5 Maintenance Annual maintenance is required when the roof is finished~only with LEEPING; in such case theLEEPING shall be applied as necessary before monsoon. After monsoon, grass if any shall be removed.
PART 5 THATCHED 1 THATCHING
i
a>On
3.1 The slope of terrace shall be such that all rainwater can be drained off; preferably the slope shall be not less than 1 to 40. If the slope cannot be given in the mud Phuska layer, part of the slope can be given in the sub-floor itself.
3.4 Waterproofing treatment (see Chapter 12) as deemed necessary shall be done on the sub-floor.
Mud Plaster
OF ROOF
1.1 General Thatch roof is made of highly combustible and easily ignitable materials. In rural and slum areas pedple live
ROOFS
in huts and fire occurs very often in huts. It spreads very fast and conflagration results in great loss to life and property. The main thatch materials are reeds, Phoons, palmyrah, coconut, rice paddy. Treatment for rendering thatch fire retartdant is a measure of tire protection. 320
.
SP62(S&T):1997 3)
1.2 Materials 1.2.1 For Fire Retardant Treatment
4 Cutback bitumen of 80/100 to IS 217 : 1988. b) Cutback made by mixing 80/100 bitumen with
SUTLI, 1.5 kg;
4)
Stabilized mud, 0.35 cubic metre; and
5)
Wheat straw 25 kg.
Average thickness is 110 mm, as in Reed thatch. c) Coconut leaves thatch - This type of thatch requires the following for an area of roof of 9m2:
kerosene oil in the ratio of 5:l (Bitumen:Kerosene). The mixture should be stirred to ensure thorough mixing.
1) Coconut (Cadjan) leaves, 65; 2) Bamboos, 20 (3.3 m long and 25 mm
cl Soil shall~have a clay content of 25-35 percent 1) Mud shall be made with soil and wheat-
diameter;
straw or rice paddy, cut to 50 mm length roughly; keep it wet for a week and knead daily.. The general proportion of mix is to add about 16 kg of straw to 0.25 cubic metre of soil.
3)
SUTLI, 1 kg;
4)
Stabilized
5)
Wheat straw, 25 kg; and
6)
One wooden pole 100 mm dia and 3.3 m long.
2) To stabilize the mud, add cutback bitumen
mud, 0.35 cubic metre;
Average thickness 60 mm, made up of 25 mm each thatch and top mud plaster and 10 mm mud plaster on bottom.
(about 2 to 4 percent) and mix thoroughly.
4 One part of molten bitumen may be added to 2 parts of kerosene oil and stir it till a homogenous water proof solution,is formed.
d) Rice paddy thatch - This type of thatch requires the following for a roof area of about 9 m2 :
e>GOBRI
shall be made with cowdung and soil mixed in equal proportion and then add cutback bitumen at the rate of 16 kg for 0.25 cubic metre.
1) Rice paddy, 136 bundles (each bundle of 1 kg);
2) Bamboo,
Lime wash be prepared mixed with animal glue and ultramarine blue for whitening.
23 (3.3 m long and 25 mm
diametre);
1.2.2 For all Types of Thatches a) ReedJPhoons) thatch - For an area roughly 9 m2 of roof the following are required:
3)
SUTLI 1 kg;
4)
Stabilized mud, 0.35 cubic metre;
5)
Wheat straw, 25 kg; and
6)
A wooden pole, 100 mm in dia and 3.3 m long.
1) Reeds (Phoons), 130 bundles of 500 g and 1 m long; 3.3 m long;
Average thickness would be 150 mm of thatch plus 25 mm mud plaster on top and 10 mm on bottom surface. 1.3 Fire Retardant Treatment
2) Bamboo, 20 numbers, 50 mm dia and 3)
SUTLI, 1 kg;
4)
Bitumen stabilized mud, 0.35 cubic metre;
5)
Wheat straw, 25 kg; and
6)
Bhind (SARKANDA), 3 bundles, each 300 mm long and 400 mm thick.
Fire retardant and water repellant treatment is done as below:
a>The
stabilized mud is applied on top of the thatch as plaster, in two stages, each 10 mm thick and allowed to dry. For the bottom one coat is enough. Then GOBRI is applied and allowed to dry. Finally two coats of either a lime wash or simple GOBRI is applied. Thus the thatch becomes fire retardant and water repellant.
The average thickness would be 75 mm thatch plus 25 mm mud plaster on top and 10 mm on bottom surface. b) Palmyrah leaves thatch - ‘This type of thatch requires the following for an area of roof of 9 m2: 1)
Palmyrah leaves 90;
2)
Bamboos, 20 (3.3 m long and 50 mm in diameter);
b) Addition of bitumen makes the thatch rot resis-
321
tant and durable even up to 10 years.
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CiiIAPTER1.2
DAMP-PROOFINGANDWATERPROOFING
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL 2 ~GENERAL PREPARATORY WORKFOR
DAMP-PKOOF-
INGAND WATERPROOFING 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
General Preparatory Work Planning in Relation to Sub-Soil Drainage Preparation of Surface PART 1 DAMP-PROOFING
1 GENERAL 1.1 Preparatory Work 2 BITUMENFELTTREATMENT 2. I Materials 2.2 Damp-Proofing Treatment above Ground Level 2.3 Damp-Proofing Treatment below Ground Level 2.4 Laying of Damp-Proofing Treatment 3 BITUMENMASTICTREATMENT 3.1 Materials 3.2 Damp-Proofing Treatment above Ground Level 3.3 External Tanking 3.4 Internal Tanking 3.5 Remelting of Mastic 3.6 Thickness and Method of Laying
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
Materials Lime Concrete Laying Finish
3 BITUMEN FELT 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
General Materials Waterproofing Treatment Concrete and Masonry Roofs, Flat or Sloping Timber Roofs, Sloping Laying of Felt
4 BITUMENMASTIC 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Materials Preparatory Work Number of Coats and Thickness Movement of Joints Laying of Bitumen Mastic
5 POLYETHYLENE FILM 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
General Material Types of Waterproofing Treatment Laying
6 GLASSFIBRETISSUEREINFORCED BITUMEN 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
General Materials h-situ Waterproofing Treatment of Roofs Laying
4 GLASS FIBRE TISSUE REINFORCEDBITUMEN TREATMENT 7 WATWPROOFING OF UNDERGROUND RESERVOIRS AND SWIMMING POOLS 4.1 General 4.2 Materials 7.1 General 4.3 In-situ Damp -Proofing Treatment 7.2 Design Features 4.4 Laying In-situ Treatment 7.3 Materials 5 WATERPROOEING AND DAMP-PROOFING OF WET AREASIN BUILDING 5.1
General 5.2 Recommendations PART 2 WATERPROOFING
1 GENERAL 2 LIMECONCRETE WATERPROOFED FINISH 2.1 General
7.4 Waterproofing Treatment 7.5 Construction Details 8 SILICONE BASEDWATERREPELLENT 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4
General Materials Preparation of the Surface Application of Repellent
ANNEXA TEST FORMEASURINGOF WATER VAPOUR TRANSMISSION OF POLYETHYLENE FILM
SP62(S&T):1997
CHAPTER 12
DAMP-PROOFING
AND WATERPROOFING
1 GENERAL 1.1 Damp-proofing of basements and floors and waterproofing of roofs is necessary for protection against entry of moisture either from ground capillary action or from rain water. These aspects are covered by Indian Standards which can be grouped as below:
2 GENERAL PREPARATORY WORK FOR DAMP-PROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 2.1 General
waterproofing and IS 13182: 1991 Covering damp-proofing of wet areas in building
Different types of damp-proofing and waterproofing materials are used in the building industry. In order to obtain satisfactory performance, it is essential that prior to the application ofthese materials for the dampproofing and waterproofing treatment. special care has to be taken regarding the design details and carefully preparing the building surface (sub-floor) for receiving the treatment. Thus this is an essential adjunct to construction details of damp-proofing and waterproofing treatment dealt with subsequently in this chapter both for Part 1 and Part 2, unless otherwise modified.
Is’ 1609 : 1991
Covering laying of damp-proofing treatment using bitumen felts
2.2 Preparatory Work
IS 7198 : 1974
Covering damp-proofing bitumen mastic
IS 9918 : 1981
Covering in-situ waterproofing and damp-proofing treatments with glass fibre tissue reinforced bitumen
a)
General Prepamtoty Work -1s 3067 : 1988 covering general details and preparatory work for damp-proofing and waterproofing of buildings.
b) Damp-Proqfing
c) Wuterproofing
Treatment
a) Damp-proofing and waterproofing shall be taken up only when the sub-soil water level~is at its lowest, that is, in the dry season.
using
b) For efficient design and construction treatment the following particulars others would be of use:
of the among
1) Anticipated highest water level;
Treatment
2) Anticipated water level in rainy season;
IS 3036 : 1992
Covering laying of lime concrete for a waterproofed roof finish
3)
Shape of roof, that is. flat, sloping curved;
IS 1346 : 1991
Covering waterproofing with bitumen felts
4)
Type of roof;
IS 4365 : 1967
5)
Covering application of bitumen mastic for waterproofing of roofs
Type of thermaLinsulation treatment, that is, mud Phuska or polystyrene slab, etc;
IS 7290 : 1979
Covering recommendations use of polyethylene film waterproofing of roofs
of roofs
for for
IS 9918 : 1981
In-situ waterproofing and dampproofing using glass fibre tissue reinforced bitumen
1s 6494 : 1988
Covering waterproofing of underground water reservoirs and swimming pools
IS 12054: 1987 Covering application based water repellent
6)
Projections through roofs;
7)
Drainage arrangement;
or
8) Intensity of rainfall; and 9) Drawings as needed. c) For effective damp-proofing of basements the following be considered:
1) Construction
joints, shall be avoided;
as far as possible,
2) In case expansion
joints are necessary, adequate supports shall be provided at the vertical and horizontal joints to support the damp-proofing treatment from bursting under water pressure;
of silicone
1.2 The materials generally used for damp-proofing and waterproofing are lime concrete, bitumen felts, bitumen mastic, glass fibre reinforced bitumen and polyethylene film; silicone based water repellents are also coming into vogue. However, whatever be the new materials, the construction practices would largely be as reflected in the standards for damp-proofing and waterproofing.
325
3)
The wall faces, as far as possible, shall be free from obstruction toenablecontinuous laying of damp-proofing treatment;
4)
Damp-proofing shall be external for ali new buildings. Sufficient working space shall always be provided which shall in no
SP62(S&T):1997 case be less than 600 mm suitably protected all-round the basement; and
there is any standing water it shall be drained, out. If percolation persists, dewatering by well-point system may be done. Where it is not possible to employ well-point system for dewatering and the pressure of water during the dry season is negligible, it is possible to carry out the work by pumping the water out, with a pump located on the floor. In this case the damp-proofing treatment shall be carried out both on the floor and walls. When the treatment is completed, the pump shall be removed, and damp-proofing done over the area occupied by the pump, after suitably plugging the area with cement concrete.
5) In the ca& of reinforced concrete work, dowels shall be used on underground structures subject to sub-soil water pressure, otherwise the damp-proofing gunite may be blown on the surface on which it is applied. d) For waterproofing of roofs, its effectiveness will depend on the following: 1)
2)
The expansion joint in the roof shall be so designed as not to impair the effectiveness of the treatment; the joint may be treated with non-absorbant, compressible, nonbrittle and watertight sealants; and Adequate openings shall be provided to drain water from the roof; the design shall be such that waterproofing treatment may be easily applied to the openings.
2.3 Planning in Relation to Sub-Soil Drainage 2.3.1 Site and Underground Drainage
4 The site shall be drained during the entire period of laying the damp-proofing treatment. Typical arrangement of dewatering in some casesisshowninFigs.12.1,12.2,12.3and12.4.
NOTE - For dewatering and lowering of water table by well point method reference maybe madeto IS 9759 :
1981.
2.3.2 Time Schedule In damp-proofing operations of basement due consideration shall be given to economical utilization of pumps and other equipment by co-ordinating the activities of the general contractor and the dampproofing contractor. 2.4 Preparation of Surface 2.41
b) For existing structures, internal tanking for
Damp-Proofing
of Basement
a) For treatment above ground level-The rise of moisture due to capillary action has to be dealt with suitably.
damp-proofing has per force to be adopted. Damp-proofing treatment has to be taken up when the water is not there in the basement; if
STRUCTURAL DETAILS SAME AS IN FIG.12.6 ElUND TO PREVENT BACK FLOW
FOOT VALVE
L
SUMP
PLAN FIG. 12.1 ARRANGEMENT SHOWINGDEWATERING OFSMALLBASEMENTBY DRAINSAND PUMPS 326
SP62(S&T):1997 BUN0 TO PREVENT BACK FLOW STRUCTURAL SAME AS
DETAILS IN FIG.12.6
SUCTION
LAND
PIPE
DRAIN2
\FOOT
SECTION
LAND
VALVE
XX
DRAIN
TAR FELT OR SIMILAR COVER FOR LAND DRAIN
-I- --tr,,,,
kOLLECTING DRAIN
X
PLAN
FIG. 12.2 ARRANGEMENTSHOWINGDEWATERINGOFLARGE AREAS WHEREIT IS NECESSARYTO DEWATERUNDER THEFLOOR CEMENT CONCRETE OR BRICK FLAT 7 R f’
FLOOR7
\
/
r
DAMRPROOF
TREATMENT
ILAR LAND DRAIN FILLED WITH LOOSE BALLAST
FIG. 12.3 CROSS
1)
SECTION
AIN
OF LAND DRAIN WITH DETAILS
In places where rise in sub-soil water is severe, typical details of treatment are as given in Fig. 12.5. The mortar bed on which the damp-proofing treatment is to be laid shall be levelled and made free from projections liable to cause damage to the damp-proofing treatment. The dampproofing treatment shall cover the full thickness of wall and shall not be set back from wall face for pointing. In the case of lime terracing, at the junction of roof and the parapet, a cavity shall be left for inser-
327
tion of lime concrete treatment which shall act as a plastering. 2)
When a horizontal damp-proofing treatment has to be carried over to a vertical face, a cement mortar (1 : 4) fillet 75 mm in radius shall be provided at the junction. Both the horizontal and vertical surfaces shall be finished smooth.
3)
For residential buildings, a cement mortar (1 : 4) or 1 : 2 : 4 concrete 12 mm thick with waterproofing compound (see IS 2645 : 1975) added may be laid below the course of brick.
1
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
SECTION
XX
FIG. 12.4ALTERNATEARRANGEMENTSOFDEWATERINGFOR
LAYINGDAMP-PROOFTREATMENTIN BASEMENTWHERESPACE IS RESTRICTED FLOOR FINISH LIME
OR
CEMENT
BRICK
CONCRETE
SOLING
rDAMP
PROOF
TREATMENT
ED L
75
CEMENT
mm
LEAN SMOOTH
EARTH CEMENT FINISHEO
CONCRETE
CONCRETE
FILLET
12.5A
-
FLOOR
FINISH LIME
OR
CEMENT
FILLING
UNDER
CONCRETE
FLOOR
P PROOF COURSE IN CEMENT TAR l:L, 12mm THICK WITH ER PROOFING COMPOUND OR ENT CONCRETE 1:Z:L 12.5B
FIG.12.5DAMP-PROOF TREATMENTABOVE GROUND LEVEL FORNEW BUILDING 328
1
SP62(S&T):1997 roughened as required. For vertical dampproofing to be laid continuous with horizontal one, a fillet 75 mm radius of 1:4 cement mortar shall be provided.
b) For treatment below ground level
1) For internal tanking of existing buildings the vertical walls shall be roughened for proper grip; the floor shall be cleaned and levelled; and a fillet of cement mortar (1 : 4) 75 mm in radius may be provided at the junction between vertical land horizontal faces.
c>Gunite
work -- Guniting may be done (see Chapter 5) for damp-proofing of both masonry and concrete surfaces both below and above ground level. The surfaces shall be prepared by removing all loose and disintegrated material cleaned by compressed air and water; the concrete surfaces may also be roughened and the joints in masonry walls be raked to a depth of 12 mm.
2) For external tanking of new buildings, where space is available for excavation, details are as given in Fig. 12.6, where space for excavation is limited, the external protective wall shall be constructed first and internal face plasteredevenly but rough; details are as in Fig. 12.7. The damp-proofing treatment shall be continuous over the wall and the floor; a space of around 100 mm should be left between the vertical external protective wall and internal protective wall, which shall be grouted after laying of damp-proofing treatment. 3)
2.4.2 Waterproojhg
The perparations, where necessary, apply to the use of bitumen felts, bitumen mastic, lime concrete, guniting, use of films, etc. 2.4.2.1 Preparation
of concrete and masonry roofs
a) Well defined cracks, other than hair line cracks in the roof, shall be cut to a ‘V’ shape, cleaned and filled flush with cement sand slurry or with cold applied bituminous caulking compound conforming to IS 1580 : 1991. The roof surface shall be regraded and cured prior to application of waterproofing treatment. b) The surface of roof and related parts to receive the treatment shall be cleaned of all foreign matter by wire brushing and dusting.
For external tanking of new building a base slab of lean cement concrete rendered to a smooth surface finish shall be constructed on the floor of the excavation. The slab shall project 250 mm beyond the outer faces of the structural walls when completed. The exterior of the structural w-all shall be true and free from protrusions, but shall be smooth or
r.
of Roofs
DAMP PROOF TREAT MEN17
SPACE TO BE CEMENT
GROUTED
OUTER ~PROTECTIVE WALL
$N$ET
E
NOTE -Sequence of work. A - Base slab C~- Brick flat or cement concrete (1:3) E - Vertical damp-proofing treatment on outside faces of structural walls
LBASE LEAN
B D F -
SLAB OF CEMENT CONCRETE
Horizontal damp-proofing treatment Structural walls and floor Outer protective walls
.
. FIG.12.6 TYPICALDAMP-PROOFTREATMENTFORBASEMENTINNEWBUILDINGSUNDERCONSTRUCTION 329
SP62(S &T):1997 TO ~400mm THICK OUTER PROTECTIVE WALL ON DEPTH
DAMP PROOF TREATMENT-I
SPACE TO BE CEMENT GROUTED
L R75mm
BASE LEAN
CEMENT CONCRETE f ILLET NOTE - Sequence
SLAB OF CEMENT CONCRETE
of work.
A C -
Base slab Horizontal damp-proofing
E G -
Brick flat or cement concrete I:3 RCC structural wall or floor thickness and reinforcementwill be designed according to the depth and maximum water pressure
B - Outer protective wall D -Vertical damp-proofing outer protective walls F - Inner protective walls
treatment
treatment on the inside of
FIG. 12.7ALTERNATEDAMP-PROOFTREATMENT FORBASEMENTINNEW BUILDINGS
c) In case of lime concrete treatment, the structural roof surface shall be finished rough to provide adequate bond.
4 Drain outlets shall be suitably placed with respect to roof drainage to prevent accumulation of water. Masonry drain mouths shall be widened 2.5 times the dia of the drain, and rounded with cement mortar (I:4). For cast iron drain outlets, a groove shall be cut all round to tuck the treatment.
4 -For projections or pipes passing through a roof, treatment should be typically as shown in’ig. 12.8.
BITUMEN CEMENT ANGLE
GROUT
METAL
f) In case of parapet walls over 450 mm in height, typical details are as given in Fig. 12.9 A; in case of low parapet wall typical details are as in Fig. 12.9 B. In case of existing RCC and stone paparpet walls, typical details are as in Fig. 12.10. NOTERegarding thejunction of parapet wall and roof, improved treatment is as shown in Fig. 12.I 1.
g) At the drain mouths fillet (see Fig. 12.9A and 12.9 B) shall be suitably cutback and rounded off for easy application of the treatment and easy flow of water.
BITUMEN
COLLAR
GROUT
CEMENT CONCRE ANGLE FILLET
CONCRETE FILt_ET
UNDER CONSTRUCTION
MElAl_
COLLAR
110 TUMEN
12.8A Projecting Pipe on Flat Roof
12.88 Projecting Pipe on Sloping Roof
FIG. 12.8 TYPICAL WATERPROOFING TREATMENT WHEN A PIPE PASSES THROUGH A CONCRETE ROOF
330
FELT
SP62(S&T):1997
PARAPET CHASE CEMENT
FILLED WIT” MORTAR (I :4)
RCC
WALL
ANGLE FILLET WITH CEMENT CONCRETE
ROOF
12.9A Parapet Wall over 450 mm in Height
12.98 Parapet Wall 450 mm or Less in Height
FIG. 12.9 WATERPROOFINGTREATMENTOF JUNCTIONON ROOF AND PARAPETWA1 .L /-COPING
/
r
rRCC OR STONE PARAPET WALL
L
BITUMEN
CONCRETE
FILLING
FILLET
BITUMEN BITUMEN
FELT
All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 12.10DETAILS OF WATERPROOFINGTREATMENTIN PARAPETWALL WHERE CUTTING OF GROOVE IS NOT POSSIBLE 7cl.z
FIG. 12.11DETAILS AT THEJUNCTIONOFTHE ROOF WITH WALL (WHERE.SLATESTHEMSELVESARE USED FORROOF DRAINAGE)
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 2.4.2.2
Preparation
of timber roofs
rounded or chamfered.
a>Qn
boarded roofs where timber boards are not tongued and grooved, the gap at joints‘ shall be caulked with hemp, hessian or other suitable fibre impregnated with bitumen or some other suitable filler. In case of boards joined by tongue and groove joints, it is necessary to caulk the gaps, if any (see Fig. 12.12 for typical details).
b) All the boards shall be nailed to minimize curling.
cl
When a timber roof meets a vertical wall, a timber fillet 75 mm x 75 mm shall be provided at the junction. For timber walls, wooden moulding shall be used to secure and seal the top edge of the bitumen felt at a height of 150 mm from the junction.
d) Where a projection
or pipe passes through timber roof typical treatment should be as shown in Fig. 12.13.
All-sharp edges and corners shall be
AULKED WITH HEMP OR HESSIAN CHASE EMENT
FILL-ED WITH MORTAR (1:4)
WOODEN
FILLET
BITUMEN
FELT
TIMBER
BOAR
DETAILS OF JOINTS IN TIMBER BOARDING TWO LAYERS OF BITUMEN FELT WITH ITUMEN IN BETWEEN TIMBER
BOARDING
CORNER STONE
CORBEL
FIG. 12.12 WATERPROOFINGTREATMENTOF TIMBER-ROOF
I
METAL
COLLAR
FLAN
I BITUMEN
COMMON
FELT COLLAR
AAFTER
L WOOOEN
BOARDNG
FIG. 12.13 WATERPROOFINGTREATMENTOF SLOPINGTIMBERROOF WITH PIPE PROJECTING
332
.
SP62(S&T):1997 PART 1 DAMP-PROOFING
1 GENERAL t
1.1 Preparatory
b) For preparing the surface, cement mortar (1:4) be laid with cement conforming to IS 269 : 1989 and sand to IS 2116 : 1980.
Work
The provisions of preparatory work and other details given in 2 at the beginning of the Chapter shall apply. In order to provide continuity in tanking, provision of openings for service, such as, pipes, cables. etc, in walls or floors should be avoided. Where unavoidable, special treatment as given in Fig. 12.14 shall be given.
2.2 Damp-Proofing Level
Treatment
above
Ground
2.2.1 The damp-proofing treatment for floors and for walls above ground level shall be in layers as described below. The bitumen primer, if prescribed, shall be first brushed qver the roof surface and allowed to dry; generally 0.2 to 0.4 l/m2 is recommended.
Dewatering shall be continued during the laying of the layers of damp-proofing materials until they have hardened and the surface has developed enough strength to resist full hydrostatic pressure.
a) Forfloors (one layer offelt)
The surface on which the material has to be laid may be first sprayed with bitumen primer conforming to IS 3384 : 1986.
1)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m*;
2)
Hessian base self-finished felt Type 3, Grade 2 or glass fibre base Type 2, Grade II; and
3)
Hot~applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m2.
b) For walls (one or two layers offelt)
1) One or two layers of hessian base self finished felt Type 3, Grade 2, or glass fibre base felt Type 2, Grade II shall be laid according to the life of the building using the blown bitumen between the wall and felt. NOTEAdopt one layer of felt for an expected life of building up to 10 years and two layers for more than 10 years.
.+.--_
-t
2.3 Damp-Proofing Level
Treatment
below
Ground
2.3.1 A multiple layer, that is, more than two layer damp-proofing treatment shall be laid according to either of the three methods described below. It may be noted that fibre based self-finished felt in IS 1322 : 1993 is not recommended for use in basements. a) Normal treatment (two layers of felt) “I
1) Primer (for vertical faces only j at the rate of 0.27 l/m2;
2) Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m*;
FIG. 12.14 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENTOF DAMPPROOFINGAROUND A PIPETHROUGHAN
OPENING
3)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 2 or glass fibre base felt Type 2 Grade II;
4)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m2;
5)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3, Grade 2 or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade II; and
6)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of I .5 kg/m2.
2 BITUMEN FELT TREATMENT 2.1 Materials a) The bitumen felt shall conform to the requirements of IS l322 : 1993 and IS 7193 : 1974; bitumen primer shall conform to IS 3384 : 1986; blown bitumen shall conform to IS 702 : 1988~of Grades 85125 or 90/l 5. 333
!SP62(S&T):1997 b) Heavy treatment (three layers offelt) Primer (for vertical faces only) at the rate of 0.27 l/m2;
and brushed clean of dusting materials and laid flat on a level dry and clean surface; then it may be rolled up.
2) Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of
b) The laying of felt shall commence on the floor
1)
first and shall be completed before it is applied to the wall. Hot bitumen is poured in front of the rolled up felt on the floor to the full width of felt. The rolled felt is now gradually unrolled with aslight pressure to squeeze out the excess bitumen.
1.5 kg/m’; 3)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 2 or glass fibre felt, Type 2, Grade II;
4)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m*;
5)
Hessian base self-finished felt Type 3, Grade 2, or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade II;
6)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m*;
7)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 2, or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade II; and
8)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m*.
cl After the whole floor is thus covered and overlapping joints properly sealed, the felt is laid on the vertical face in a similar manner. In this case the roll of felt is held at the floor level and then gradually unrolled up the wall face as hot blown bitumen is poured between the roll and the wall face. The minimum overlap shall be 100 mm both at sides and ends.
4 The subsequent layers of felts shall break joint midway between the joints of the layer beneath it.
c) Extra heavy treatment flour layers offelt)
1) Primer (for vertical faces only) at the rate of 0.27 l/m’;
2) Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m*; 3)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 2, or glass fibre felt Type 2 Grade II;
4)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m*;
5)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 2 or glass fibre felt, Type 2 Grade II;
6)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/v’;
7)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3, Grade 2 or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade II;
8)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m’;
9)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 2 or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade II; and
10)
Hot applied blown bitumen at the rate of 1.5 kg/m*.
2.4 Laying of Damp-Proofing
3 BITUMEN
MASTIC
TRE;ATMENT
3.1 Materials The bitumen mastic shall conform to the requirements of IS 5871 : 1987; bitumen primer shall conform to IS 3384 : 1986. 3.2 Damp-Proofing Level
Treatment
above
Ground
The damp-proofing treatment shall be laid across the full thickness of walls excluding plaster or each of the base of cavity walls shall not be set back for pointing. The damp-proofing in the wall shall be continuous with the layer of bitumen mastic in adjacent floors; and where necessary, a vertical damp-proofing course shall be provided on the inner surface of the wall as shown in Fig. 12.15.
Treatment
2.4.1 General The damp-proofing treatment shall be continuous throughout and the overlap of joints in felts, wherever they exist, shall be correctly made. 2.4.2 L,aying of Felt
FIG.12.15 TYPICALARRANGEMENTOF CONTINUOUSDAMP-PROOFINGIN~ALLAND ADJACENTFLOOR
The felt shall be laid as mentioned below: a) The felt shall be first cut to the required lengths 334
-_..
.__.- .
.._
-
SP62(S&T):1997 and the loading coats have been hardened shown in Fig. 12.17.
3.3 External Tanking The following points shall be kept in view for externally applied tanking:
as
4 As in external tanking, a protective layers of screed should be laid and then the structural floors and walls laid.
4 The working space outside the walls may be not less than 0.6 m.
b) The base concrete of 100 mm in thickness shall be structurally sound; it shall be extended at least 150 mm beyond the edges of wall to permit angle fillet to form at the junction of horizontal and vertical damp-proofing (see Fig. 12.16).
OUTER
WALL
STRUCTURAL
OTECTIVE
_..- -
RllUMEN
I /-
ANGLE
FORM
SCREEO7 MASl
FILLET,
/ LEAN EASE CONCRETE
STRUCTURAL
L
HARD
.
WORKING
PLATFORM
SUCH
FIG.12.17 INTERNALLYAPPLIEDTANKING 3.5 Remelting
ANGLE FILLET
/“AR0 WoRilNG PLATFORM RUBBLE SOLING, RAMMED
S”i” AS EARTH,ETC
FIG. 12.16 EXTERNALLYAPPLIEDTANKING
c) As soon as the
horizontal layer of mastic asphalt has been laid, it shall be covered with a screed of cement and sand 50 mm thick, to prevent damage. The horizontal coat of structural slab shall be laid as quickly as possible. The I50 mm offset structurally protected by the screed.
4 Immediately
after the vertical damp-proofing bitumen mastic is laid, the outside of the wall shall be protected against damage by erection of a brick wall.
3.4 Internal Tanking The following precautions shall be taken before applying bitumen mastic:
a>A space
of 300 mm outside the wall shall be provided as far as possible during excavation to keep the wall dry at the time of laying bitumen mastic.
b) The base slab shall be provided with an even surface and the walls shall be built to the full height before mastic asphalt laying is commenced. Earth shall not be filled outside the wall until three coats of vertical mastic have been applied
of Mastic
Remelting shall be done at site in a mechanical mixer; the temperature of mastic shall not exceed 2OO’C during remelting. Blocks of bitumen mastic shall be broken into pieces and then stocked in layers first round the sides and then inwards towards the centre of the mixer. The charge shall be gradually heated to about 200°C and when the mastic has attained a molten condition, it shall be agitated continuously to ensure a uniform consistency. The duration of heating shall be such that the properties of bitumen are not impaired. 3.6 Thickness
and Method of Laying
3.6.1 Thickness Bitumen mastic shall be applied in one or three coats as stated below to all surfaces, whether sloping, horizontal or vertical. The thickness shall be as follows:
a>For
walls and floors above ground level the bitumen mastic shall be laid in one coat minimum of 10 mm thickness.
b) For vertical surfaces and surfaces steeper than 30’ to the horizontal below the ground level, the bitumen mastic shall be applied in three coats to a total thickness of not less than 20 mm.
c) For horizontal surfaces and sloping surfaces not steeper than 30’ to be horizontal below the ground level, the bitumen mastic shall be applied in three coats to a total thickness of not less than 30 mm.
SP62(S&T):1997 be used as bonding material. The penetration of bitumen shall be not more than 40 when tested in accordance with IS 1203 : 1978. Bitumen primer shall conform to IS 3384 : 1986.
3.6.2 Method of Laying
b)
cl
Bitumen mastic, shall be applied thinly on any surface and a first coat in three coat treatment, so that it acts as an adhesive layer and also prevents blowing. While laying a horizontal surface each coat should be spread with a float evenly and uniformly over the previously prepared surface to the recommended thickness. For laying on a vertical surface, the first coat may be plastered with a metal trowel as evenly and uniformly as possible. The second and subsequent coats may be applied with a wooden float to a uniform thickness; these coats should be applied as quickly as possible to prevent accumulation of dust or dirt between layers. Blows entrapped in each coat formed by entrapped air or moisture during the laying shall be punctured and repaired while the asphalt is warm and before the next coat is applied.
4.3 In-situ Damp-Proofing
4.3.1 The following in-situ treatments level is recommended:
3.6.4 Fillet
Clean and prime the surface with bitumen primer at the rate of 0.4 kg/m*;
2)
First coat of hot applied bitumen at the rate of 2.4 kg/m*, Min;
3)
First layer of glass fibre tissue; and
4)
Second coat of hot applied bitumen at the rate of 2.4 kg/m*, Min.
I to 4)
As for items (1) to (4) of normal duty treatment of 4.3.1 (a);
5)
Second layer of glass fibre tissue. This layer of glass fibre tissue shall be perpendicular to the first one; and
6)
Third coat of hot applied bitumen rate of 2.4 kg/m*, Min.
4.3.2 The following in-situ treatment level is recommended:
Angle fillet not less than 50 mm wide shall be applied in two coats at the junction of two planes forming an internal angle.
below ground
1) Bitumen primer at the rate of 0.4 kg/m*; 2) First coat of hot ~bitumen at the rate of
Edges of the mastic already laid should be warmed with hot asphalt and then cut out with a metal trowel to remove any dust or dirt that may have collected. The fresh mastic should be poured before the warmed up surface of the joint cools off.
2.4 kg/m*, Min;
REINFORCED
4.1 General Glass fibre is more resistant to weathering and has come into use for waterproofing and damp-proofing of buildings.
3)
First layer of glass fibre tissue;
4)
Second coat of hot applied bitumen at the rate of 2.4 kg/m*. Min;
5)
Second layer of glass fibre tissue; this layer shall be at right angles to the first layer; and
6)
Third coat of hot applied bitumen rate of 2.4 kg/m*, Min.
at the
b) Heavy duty treatment I to 6)
As for items (I) to (6) of normal duty treatment of 4.3.2 (a);
7)
Third layer of glass fibre tissue. This layer shall be at right angles to the previous layer; and
8)
Fourth coat of hot applied bitumen at the rate of 2.4 kg/m*, Min.
4.2 Materials 4.2.1
at the
a) Normal duty treatment
Joints
FIBRE TISSUE TREATMENT
1)
b) Heavy duty treatment
The top of the vertical bitumen mastic shall be turned into a chase in the wall not less than 25 mm x 25 mm unless it is being continued horizontally.
4 GLASS BITUMEN
above ground
a) Normal duty treatment
3.6.3 Chases
3.6.5 Construction
Treatment
Glass Fibre Tissue
The glass fibre tissue shall conform to the requirements given in Appendix A of IS 7193 : 1994. It shall be a thin, flexible, uniformly bonded mat composed of chemically reistant borosilicate staple glass fibres distributed in a random open porous structure, bonded together with a thermosetting resin (phenolic type).
c) Extru heavy duty treatment
The minimum weight of the tissue shall be 40 g/m2 and the nominal thickness shall be 0.5 + 0.1 mm. 4.2.2 Blown bitumen shall conform to IS 702 : 1988 or residual bitumen conforming to IS 73 : 1992 may 336
I to 8)
As for items (1) to (8) of heavy duty treatment of 4.3.2 (b);
9)
Fourth layer of glass fibre tissue. This layer shall be at right angles to the previous layer; and
SP62(S&T):1997 10)
e) The minimum overlap of joints shall be 100 mm at both sides and ends. All overlaps shall be firmly bonded with bitumen.
Fifth coat of hot bitumen at the rate of 2.4 kg/m2, Min.
NOTES 1 The treatments (a), (b) and (c) are recommended for normal, severe and very severe conditions respectively. 2 A IO/15 mm thick coat of mastic asphalt conforming to IS I 19.5 : I978 may bc included as an added protection over the basement floor treatment, as deemed necessary. 3 The basement wall treatment should be protected with asuitable lining, as may be decided, against any possible damage while backfilling.
4.4 Laying In-situ Treatment
4 Cut the required length at glass fibre tissue and roll it.
b) Pour hot bitumen on the surface to the full width of roll and simultaneously embed the glass tibre into it. Proceed in this manner throughout the length of the floor.
C) After the whole floor has been covered, the overlapping joints shall be sealed; the glass fibre is laid on the walls in the same way. The roll of glass fibre is held at floor level, and then gradually unrolled as the hot bitumen is poured between the roll and the wall face.
4 The joints between successive layers of glass fibre tissue shall be staggered.
5 WATERPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING OF WET AREAS IN BUlLDING 5.1 General Bathroom, kitchen, water closet and to lesser extent verandah, balconies and sunshades may be termed as wet areas of buildings which are more vulnerable to water due to their functional requirements. These wet areas are one of the main source of leakage and dampness in a building which leads to unhygienic conditions affecting badly the health and comfort of the inhabitants and seriously deteriorating the stability of the building. The causes of leakage and dampness may be due to defective design, sub-standard material, improper execution and incorrect usage by the occupant. 5.2 Recommendations IS 13 182 : 1991 gives detailed recommendations for identifying sources of leakage and dampness and their prevention in a systematic fashion for water closets, bathrooms, kitchen, open verandah, balconies and sunshades, floor traps, pipe work, water tank, sanitary shaft and external wall. These recommendations are copiously illustrated w&h sketches. Reference may be made to IS 13 182 : 199 1 for details.
PART 2 WATERPROOFING
1 GENERAL 1.~1 The preparatory work and general details given in 2 at the beginning of the Chapter shall apply. Waterproofing treatment to be efficient and lasting has to be carefully carriedout from the time the surface is prepared to receive the treatment, such as, membrane, film, lime concrete, etc, to the finishing of the treated surface. Special attention and strict supervision has to be paid to proper overlapping of joints, particularly in felts and film, treatment around drainage openings in the roof and treatment of parapets. The sticking of membrane to the roof by means of hot bitumen also requires skill, if the job is to be done economically and to give good results. For roof fnish reference~may be made to Chapter 11, after laying the waterproofing treatment. 2 LIME FINISH
CONCR-ETE
is also used for waterproofed roof finish. The introduction of pozzolanic materials, such as burnt brick pozzolana in lime concrete and compaction to-maximum density enhances the waterproofing effect. 2.2 Materials
a) Lime-As
far as possible Class C (fat lime) in the form of hydrated lime conforming to IS 712 : 1984 shall be used. Quick lime shall be slaked in accordance with IS 1635 : 1992.
b)
Pozzolanic
Material Calcined clay pozzolana shall conform to LP 40 of IS 4098 : 19K3.
c) Coarse aggregate shall be of broken brick (burnt clay) and conform to IS 3068 : 1986 01 conforming to natural stone aggregates IS 383 : 1970.
WATERPROOFED
d) Water shall be clean and free from injurious
2.1 General
amounts of deleterious materials. Sea water shall not be used. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory for use.
Lime concrete, apart from its use as a structural material in several situations in building construction,
337
2.4.3
2.3 Lime Concrete
If the surface becomes uneven during compaction, the surface shall be pricked up and fresh lime concrete spread and consolidated, adequate bonding between old and new concrete should be ensured by sprinkling requisite quantities of lime water (1 part putty to 3 or 4 parts of water) with any of the solutions in 2.4.4.
Limeconcrete shall be prepared as mentioned in Chap~ter 4 and IS 2.541 : 1991. Lime concrete shall be used in the work within 36 h of its preparation if burnt clay pozzolana is incorporated.
NOTE-
Addition of 12 kg of washing soap and 4 kg of alum dissolved in water in each cubic metre of lime concrete will
2.4.4 During compaction by hand beating, the surfaces shall be sprinkled with lime water with a small portion of sugar solution or a solution of dry nuts of Termirlalia Chebula soaked in water for improving the waterproofing of concrete (see Notes). On completion of compaction, the mortar that comes up on top shall be smoothened and if necessary sugar solution and lime putty may be added.
improve the waterproofing quality of lime concrete.
2.4 Laying 2.4.1 Laying of lime concrete shall be started from a corner of the roof and proceed diagonally towards the centre and other sides considering the slopes required for draining rain water smoothly. The average thickness of lime concrete shall be not less than 100 mm; in case the thickness is more than 100 mm, each layer shall be not more than 100 to 125 mm. If the roof is flat a slope of not less than 1 in 60 shall be given; in areas of heavy rainfall a slope of 1 in 40 is recommended. The compacted of concrete layer shall not be less than 50 mm.
NOTES 1 The sugarsolutionis preparedby mixing about3 kg ofjaggery and 112kg of BAEL fruit to 100 litres of water by boiling. 2 The solution of Termiwliu
at junctions
with parapet
my
be
Dry nuts shall be broken to small pieces and allowed to soak in water; about600 g of nuts,200 g ofjaggery and 40 I ofwater for 10 m* of work can be used. The solution is brewed for 12 to
2.4.2 The lime concrete shall then be rammed with a rammer not more than 2 kg by mass and the surface brought to the required evenness and slope; further consolidation shall be done by Thapis with rounded edges; the beating shall be done at least for 7 days until the Thapis does not make an impression and rebound readily when struck. The ramming and compacting can also be done by a machine. Compaction shall be done carefully
Chebulrc (KADUKAf)
prepared as follows:
24 h; the resulting liqueur, after decantation, is used for work. Sometimes M&i, jaggery and hemp are also added while preparing and laying lime concrete.
2.4.5 The lime concrete shall be cured for a minimum of 10 days or until it hardens. 2.4.6 Treatment of junction between roof finish and parapets is as shown in Fig. 12.18 and Fig. 12.19.
wall.
BRICK MASONRY 12 mm GAP PARTIALLY FILLED WITH BITUMEN
STRIP
(CONCAVE
LSTRUCTURAL
RIP (CONCAVE OR CONVEX)
LSTRUCTURAL SLAB
ROOF
ROOF
SLAB -LIME CONCRETE
,LiME CONCRETE
12.18A Structural Roof Slab and Lime Concrete Finish Extending to the Full Width of Wall
12.18B Structural Roof Slab and Lime Concrete Finish not Extending to the Full Width of Wall
FIG.12.18 TYPICALDETAILS AT JUNCT~ONBETWEENLIMECONCRETEWATERPROOFEDROOFFINISH AND PARAPET WALL
338
-
Continued
SP62(S&T):_l997 /.-COPING
BRICK MASONRY
STRIP
(CONCAVE
OR CONVEX)
LIME CONCRETE
12.18C
Detail Showing
SLOPE
Arrangement
of Downpipe
for 12.18A
IN PLASTER BRICK
MASONRY LIME
CONCRETE
Amin.SLOPE OF
LAID 1 IN
TO
50 7
20 mm DEEP PLASTER DRIP COURSE 12 mm FILLED
WIDE GAP PARTIALLY WITH BITUMEN FILLER
. .: a... ..’
STRUCTURAL CHAMFER \-CEMENT WASH
-. . . ..a... ._.-..
ROOF
PROVIDED
PLASTER OR KRAFT
SLAB
I
I
-I\
IN PLASTER
WITH PAPER
LIME
PAINTED WITH HOT BITUMEN OF OR APPROVE0 QUALITY SO/100 EQUIVALENT @ l-7 kg/m2 BLENOED WITH 0*008m3 OF COARSE SAND PER SQUARE METRE OF AREA _--I
12.18D
Junction
of Roof with Parapet
Wall (Alternate
Arrangement)
FIG.12.18 TYPICALDETA~LSATJUNCTIONBETWEENLIMECONCRETEWATERPROOFED ROOFFINISH PARAPETWALL- Continued 339
AND
SP62(S&T):1997 SLOPE
IN PLASTER
/ PAINTED WITH HOT BITUMEN OF _. APPROVED QUALITY Rn/lnn __ 0_R EQUIVALENT @ 11.7 kg/m2 BLENDED WITH @006 m3 OF COARSE SAND PER SQUARE METRE OF AREA, CEMENT
DOOR
: GAP FILLE 4EN F
12 mnl PARTI WITH
STRUCTURAL KHURRA
ROOF
LO cm SOULIRE
SLAB LAID 4ED :3)
I-230-4
LCEMENT PLASTER WITH LIMk WASH OR KRAFT PAPER i RAIN WATER PIPE 12.18E Detail of Khurra for 12.18D All dimensionsin millimetres.
FK_l2.18
TYPICAL
DETAILS
AT JUNCTION BETWEEN
LIME CONCRETE WATERPROOFED
PARAPET WALL -
ROOF FINISH AND
Concluded
2.5 Finish
m
/-RCC
-pi/;
PARAPET
Roof finish should be as described in Chapter 11 using burnt clay flat terracing tiles to IS 2690 (Part 1) : 1993 and IS 2690 (Part 2) : 1992. However in extreme conditions where there is considerable expansion and contraction, two layers of tiles may be laid on the lime concrete; the tiles should be joined by non-shrinking impervious mortar by adding an integral waterproofing admixtures or 5 percent engine oil and finished neat.
LIME CONCRETE FILLET LIME
CONCRETE
TERRACING
12.19A JunctionBetween Roof Slab and RCC Parapet
RCC
3 BITUMEN
PARAPET
,-LIME LIME
To drain rainwater every 40 m* area of roof shall have a 100 mm dia rainwater pipe or as in Table 3 of IS 2527 : 1984 depending on the rainfall intensities of the locality.
CONCRETE CONCRE’IE
FELT
3.1 General
FILLET TERRACING
Bitumen felt is one of the materials used for waterproofing of roofs. Waterproofing treatment with bitumen felt is adopted not only in the case of buildings and structures, but also in railway coaches, bus bodies, etc.
CE
3.2 Materials Cl
12.19B
RAIN
WATER
SPOUT
4 Regarding of the roof surface shall be carried
Details of Roof Slab and Rain Water Pipe
FIG. 12.19 TYPICAL DETAILS BETWEEN
out with suitable cement mortar incorporating clean, medium coarse sand or with a limeSURKHI mortar or any other suitable material.
LIME CONCRETE
FINISH AND
b) Bitumen primer shall conform to IS 3384 :
AT THE JUNCTION
WATERPROOFED
1986.
ROOF
c>Bitumen
felt shall conform to IS 1322 : 1993 and IS 7193 : 1974.
RCC PARAPET WALL
340
SP62(S&T):1997 d) Bonding material for use between successive felts and between roof surface and felt shall conform to industrial blown type bitumen of Grade 85125 or 90115 conforming to IS 702 : 1988. For top dressing bitumen shall be industrial blown type to IS 702 : 1988 of penetration not more than 40 when tested in accordance with IS 1203 : 1978.
3.4 Concrete and Masonry Roofs, Flat or Sloping treatments are recommended:
a) Normal Treatment moderate conditions:
-
Five
courses
1) 2) 3)
Hessian based self-finished felt, Type 3, Grade 1, or glass fibre base, Type 2, Grade 1; Hot applied bitumen at the rate of 1.2 kg/m2, Min; and
5)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min; and
7)
Pea-sized gravel or grit devoid of fine sand at the rate of 0.006 m3/m2.
Primer at the rate of 0.27 1/m2, Min;
2)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
3)
Fibre base self-finished 1 or Grade 2;
4)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
5)
Fibre base self-finished 1 or Grade 2;
6)
Hot applied bitumen 2.5 kg/m2, Min; and
7)
Pea-sized gravel or grit devoid of fine sand at the rate of 0.008 m3/m2.
lay, Type 1; rate
3) 4)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m2; and
5)
Pea-sized gravel or grit devoid of fine sand at the rate of 0.008 m3/m2, Min.
b) Heavy Treatment conditions:
the
rate
of
felt, Type 2 Grade at
the
rate
of
felt, Type 2 Grade at
the
rate of
3)
Fibre base self-finished 1 or Grade 2;
4)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
5)
Fibre base self-finished 1 or Grade 2;
felt, Type 2 Grade
6)
Hot applied bitumen 2.5 kg/m2, Min; and
at
7)
Pea-sized gravel~or grit devoid of fine sand at the rate of 0.008 m3/m2.
felt, Type 2 Grade at
rate
2)
of
Fibre base self-finished 1 or Grade 2;
the
Type 1; Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
1) Fibre base felt bitumen saturated underthe
at
1) Fibre base bitumen saturated underlay,
Floating Treatment
at
of
Floating Treatment
OR
bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
rate
OR
Pea-sized gravel or grit devoid of fine sand at the rate of 0.006 m3/m2.
2) Hot applied
at the
1)
for
Primer at the rate of 0.27 l/m2,’ Min; Hot applied bitumen at the rate of 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
4)
6)
Treatment
In selecting a combination of layers and grades of felt to be used, consideration shall be given to the type and construction of buildings, climatic and atmospheric conditions and the degree of permanance required.
The following
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 1 or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade 1;
OR
For vertical surfaces up to 1 m in height blown type bitumen to IS 702 : 1988 of Grade 85/25 or 90/15 and above 1 m Grade 115/15 may be used. 3.3 Waterproofing
5)
c) Extra Heavy Treatment very severe conditions:
of
-
at
the
rate
of
felt, Type 2 Grade at
the
the
rate
rate
of
of
Nine courses for
1) Primer at the rate of 0.27 l/m2, Min; 2) Hot applied bitumen at the rate of 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
Seven courses for severe
1) Primer at the rate of 0.27 1/m2, Min; 2) Hot applied bitumen at the rate of
3)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 1 or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade 1;
4)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
1.2 kg/m2, Min;
at
the
rate
of
3)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 1 or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade 1;
5)
Hessian base self-finished felt, Type 3 Grade 1 or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade 1;
4)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
6)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
at the
rate
of
341
at
the
rate
of
SP62(S&T):1997
,?I Hessian base self-finished
felt, Type 3 Grade I or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade 1;
8) Hot
applied bitumen I .2 kg/m*, Min; and
9)
at
the
rate
b) Heavy Treatment
1) Fibre base self-finished felt, Type 2 Grade 1, or hessian base felt, Type 3 Grade 2, or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade 2;
of
2) Hot applied
bitumen 1.2 kg/m2, Min;
Pea-sized gravel or grit devoid of tine sand at the rate of 0.006~m3/m2.
3)
OR 1) Primer at the rate of 0.27 l/m*, Min; Hot applied bitumen at the rate 1.2 kg/m’, Min;
2)
of
3)
Fibre base self-finished I or Grade 2;
4)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m*, Min;
5)
Fibre base self-finished 1 or Grade 2;
felt, Type 2 Grade
6)
Hot applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m*, Min;
at
7)
Fibre base self-finished 1 or Grade 2;
felt, Type 2 Grade
8)
Hot applied bitumen 2.5 kg/m*, Min; and
9)
Peasized gravel or grit devoid of fine sand at the rate of O.Ob8 m3/m2.
felt, Type 2 Grade at
the
rate of
at
the
rate
of
Fibre base self-finished felt, Type 2 Grade I or Grade 2, or hessian base felt, Type 3 Grade 2, or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade 2.
3.5.1 Timber roofs shall be finished with hot applied bitumen at the rate of 1.2 kg/m*, Min; or with two coats of bituminous paint at the rate of 0.1 l/m2 per coat or a single coat of bituminous emulsion at the rate of 0.5 l/m* over it.
Preparatory work (see 2 given in the beginning of the Chapter);
b) Cleaning roof surface of foreign matter;
rate of
c>Treatment
of main roof;
d) Treatment of flashings and projecting pipes; e) Treatment of gutters and drain mouths;
0 Top dressing, that is gravel or grit, fixing and
a) Surface finish, when subjected to foot traffic, shall be cement concrete flooring tiles or burnt clay flat terracing tiles as described in Chapter 9.
laying tile or concrete protection paint or emulsion; and
a screeding of I:4 cement sand mix layer 45 mm thick may be laid over the roofing treatment and marked off into squares of 600 mm made with expansion joints at adistance of 3 m caulked with bituminous sealing compound (see Grade A of IS I834 : 1984).
3.6.2 Concrete and Masonry Roofs a) The felt is normally laid in lengths at right angles to the direction of the run-off gradient, commencing at the lowest level and working up to the crest. In this way, the overlaps of the adjacent layers of felt offers minimum obstruction to the flow-off of water.
1) Bitumen primer shall be brushed over the roof-surface and left to dry afterthe face is thoroughly cleaned.
lengths, brushed clean of dusting materials and laid out flat on the roof and allowed to soften. Each length of feh shall then be laid in position and roiled up for a distance of half its length. The hot bonding material shall be poured on to the roof across the full length of the-rolled felt as the latter is roiled out steadily and pressed down. The excess bonding material is squeezed out at the ends and is removed as the laying~proceeds.
a) Nov-ma1 Treatment
1) Fibre base bitumen saturated
underlay Type 1. or hessian base felt, Type 3 Grade 1 or glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade 1; the
rate of
Fibre base self-finished felt, Type 2 Grade I, or hessian base felt Type 3 Grade I, or glass tibre base felt, Type 2 Grade I.
342
sur-
2) The felt shall be cut to the required
3.5 Timber Roofs, Sloping
at
or applying
g) Cleaning and removal of surplus materials.
b) Alternatively,
3)
of
3.6.1 Sequence of Operations for all Types of Roofs the
3.4.1 Surface finish of pea-sized gravel or grit affords a protection to the treatment and its durability. On the flashings and at the drain mouths, the gravel or grit may be omitted and instead two coats of bituminous paint at the minimum rate of 0.1 l/m2 per coat or a single coat of bituminous emulsion at the rate of 0.5 l/m2 may be applied.
applied bitumen 1.2 kg/m’, Min; and
rate
3.6 Laying of Felt
NOTE -Where pea-sized gravel or grit is not available, coarse sand may be used.
2) Hot
at the
3)
When the first half of the strip of fehhas been bonded to the roof, the other half shall be rolled up and then unrolled on the hot bending material in the same way.
SP62(S&T):1997 4)
Minimum overlaps of 100 and 75 mm shall be allowed at the end and sides of strips of felt respectively. All overlaps shall be firmly bonded with hot bitumen.
3)
5) The laying of the second layer shall be so
3.6.3 Timber Roqfs Sloping (see Fig. 12.12)
arranged that the ioints are stacreered with those of the layer beneath it. .a
b)
Two coats of bituminous paint at the rate of 0.1 l/m* per coat or a single coat of bituminous emulsion at the rate of 0.5 l/m* shall be applied.
vu
The underlay or first layer of feltshall be secured by nails spaced at 100 to 150 mm centres along overlaps and at 20 mm from the exposed edges. In case of struck on treatment, the felt shall be bonded on timber roof in the same manner as in the case of masonry roof but with nailing strips and back nailing.
6) In the case of pent roofs where the type of treatment consists of one layer of felt only as in normal treatment 3.4 (a), an additional layer of felt shall be provided at the ridge which shall cover a minimum length of the slope of 250 mm on both sides-of the ridge. Junctions ofparapet wall and roof- Felt shall be laid as a flashing with minimum overlaps of 100 mm. The lower edge of the flashing shall overlap the felt laid on the flat portion of the roof and the upper edge of the flashing shall be tucked into the groove made in the parapet on the vertical face of the wall. Each layer shall be so arranged that the joints are staggered with those of the layer beneath it.
1) Where required, additional provided between overlapsat
nailing may be 150 mm centres.
2) The second and subsequent layers of felt shall then be applied with bonding materials as in concrete and masonry roofs. 3) In the case of gabled roof, one single strip of felt shall cover from gutter to gutter over the ridge. If the treatment consists of one layer of felt, additional layer of felt shall be provided at the ridge which shall cover a length of slope of 250 mm on both sides of the ridge.
After the layers of felt are laid and bonded, the grooves shall be filled with cement mortar ( 1:4) or lime mortar ( 1:3) or cement concrete (1:3:6) which when set will satisfactorily secure the treatment to the wall. A fillet of cement mortar (1:4) shall be done at the junction of wall and roof.
4) Flashings - If the parapet is of masonry construction, the flashings shall be treated in the same way as in 3.6.2 (b). In case the roof butts against a timber wall, the flashings shall be continuously bonded down over the felt turn up and angle fillet. Joints in the felt tlashings shall be lapped 100 mm and sealed. The upper end of the flashing shall be firmly secured to the timber wall by screwing down with a timber batten.
c>Drain
mouths - Drain mouths with a bell shaped entry shall be fixed and properly set to allow the waterto flow into it. Felt shall generally be laid as on the other portion of the roof and the treatment shall be carried inside the drain pipes overlapping at least 100 mm. If possible a grating cap should be provided over the drain mouth to protect choking caused by leaves, stones, etc.
3.6.4 Shell Roqfs
4 Gutter -
The treatment to be laid in gutters shall provide for one layer of roofing felt more than is provided on the roof proper. A priming coat shall first be applied. Over this, the first layer of felt shall be bonded with hot bitumen followed by successive layers of felt bonded securely together and finally painted with a coat of hot bitumen at not less than 1.5 kg/m*.
1) The first layer laid separately in the gutters shall be overlapped with the corresponding layer on the roof proper. The felt layers in the gutter shall be carried down to the outlet pipes to a minimum depth of 100 mm.
a) In the case of shell roofs additional layer of felt shall be provided for the valley gutter for normal treatment and for other type of treatment; the number of felts in valley gutters shall be Dne layer extra. The treatment on the valley should be laid first and the height to which the felt is to be taken shall be at least 150 mm above the anticipated standing water in the gutter. For normal treatment on pent roofs, the felt should be laid parallel to the direction of runoff gradient. The felt in the case of shell roofs shall be laid from one edge of the valley gutter to the other, that is, around the curvature. In case of northtight cylindrical shells, it can either start from the valley gutter or from the upper edge. ,The upper edge shall be securely anchored at the edge of the shell. NOTE Where insulation is specified, the insulating material shnll be applied on top of the shell surface and plastered, if necessary, with cement mortar to provide adequate base for application of waterproofing treatment.
2) For gutters in pent roofs the flashings shall be laid separately at the sides and carried well under the caves of the pent roofs. 343
L
4
SP62(S&T):1997
1) When the felt is laid parallel to the direc-
emulsion at the rate of 0.5 l/m2 per coat, or one coat of acrylic based coating at the rate of 0.3 l/m2 shall be applied.
tion of run-off gradient, that is, around the curvature in the case of shell roof, the side overlap should be 100 mm minimum and end overlap should be 75 mm minimum; this means that the overlap lengths are interchanged with those when felts are laid across the gradient [see 3.6.2 (a)].
3.6.5 Expansion Joints Expansion joint coverings may be zinc or a lead sheet or of bitumen felt. In the case of the latter, a minimum of two layers of bitumen felt, Type 2, Grade 2 as specified in IS 1322 : 1993 or Type 2 Grade 1 of IS 7193 : 1974 shall be used with top dressing of gravel or other suitable finish (see Fig. 12.20).
b) For surface finish instead of the normal bituminous gravel finish, either two coats of bituminous aluminium paint at the rate of 0.1 l/m2 per coat or one coat colour bituminous GRAVEL
FIRST LAYER BITUMEN FELT FREE FR?M BASE BITUMEN
FELT,
GRAVEL
\ BITUMEN-,
\
\
f
CEMENT
PLASTER
r
f
n-BITUMEN BITUMEN
FE :LT
P
12.20A Expansion Joint with Tee Iron Tile and Terrace Construction
in Level with Roof Surface
FIRST LAYER BITUMEN FELT FREE FROM BASE
FLAT AND FIRST BITUMEN FELT OF PIECE SEALED AT
12.208 Expansion Joint with WC
Slab onmRoof Surface
FIRST FELT BITUMEN
FELT
LAYER FREE
CEMENT RCC
BITUMEN BITUMEN
BITUMEN FROM
BASE
PLASTER SLAB
PAINT FELT BITUMEN
FIRST LAYER FELT FREE
BITUMEN
---BITUMEN
FEL3
LAP JOINTS
12.2OC Raised Type Expansion Joint
FIG. 12.20 EXPANSIONJOINTS
SEALED
FELT
SP62(S&T):1997 3.6.6 Treatment of Bubble Formation
lathing with coating of bitumen may be used for reinforcement for laying bitumen to vertical sloping surfaces. The underlay may be bitumen felt to IS 1322 : 1993. Vapour barrier should be hessian based Type 3 felt to IS 1322 : 1993.
If balooning occurs, remove the gravel on the balooned surface. Then cut open and squeeze out the trapped vapour by firm pressure applied by hand. Seal the bitumen felt so lifted, back on to the surface by applying additional bitumen. Finally seal the cut with a piece of bitumen felt with bitumen application and re-apply the gravel finish over it to make the surface look uniform with the rest.
4.2 Preparatory
In addition to requirements of 1.1 of this Part, the following points may be considered.
3.6.7 Roof Gardens
a) Keying - Bitumen mastic will not adhere to vertical and sloping surfaces unless such surfaces afford an adequate key.
Where it is required to create a roof garden the waterproofing shall be carried out as per the treatment of damp-proofing covered in 2, Part 1 of this Chapter. As far as possible, plants should be planted in containers to avoid roof penetration-into the roof below. 4 BITUMEN 4.1
When bitumen mastic is applied to vertical surfaces including skirting the top of the mastic shall be tucked into a continuous groove of not less than 25 mm x 25 mm in the structure and its exposed part shall be formed with a splay to shed rain water.
MASTIC
Materials
DAMP-PROOFING
METAL
Horizontal joints in brickwork should not be less than 10 mm wide and the mortar joint shall be raked out and brushed clean to form a key to the bitumen mastic (see Fig. 12.2 1).
2)
Bitumen mastic shall conform to IS 3037 : 1986. Bonding bitumen shall conform to IS 702 : 1988 or residual bitumen to IS 73 : 1992. The penetration of blown bitumen shall be limited to 45 when tested in accordance with IS 1203 : 1978. Expanded metal
POINTED
Work
TREATMENT
IN MORTAR FLASHING
25 x 25mm 13 mm
CHASE
CUT
BITUMEN IN TWO
IN WALL
MASTIC COATS
SKIRTING
50 mm METAL TACK 750 mm INTERVALS
JOINTS RAKED OUT KEY FOR BITUMEN
AT
TO FORM MASTIC
20 mm BITUMEN MASTIC IN TWO COATS
FIG. 12.21 BITUMENMASTICLAID ON SCREEDED ROOFAND BITUMENMASTICSKIRTINGTO BRICKWALL
SP62(S&T):1997 For vertical surfaces on concrete, details arenas in Fig. 12.22.
total thickness Fig. 12.23).
the
3)
For vertical timber surfaces, a layer of metal reinforcement shall be securely fixed by nails. All vertical metal surfaces shall be primed with a rubber bitumen emulsion before the bitumen mastic is applied.
4)
Other surfaces, wherever possible, shall be hacked to give key to bitumen mastic.
4.3 Number of Coats and Thickness The number of coats depends on the particular position of the surface and the maximum thickness of mastic that is possible to apply while it is a warm state.
a>On
a horizontal surface and on slopes up 30°, two coats of equal thickness to a total thickness of 20 mm shall be applied, excluding horizontal treatment in walls.
At the intersection of two planes forming an internal angle and after the bitumen mastic has been laid on the horizontal, sloping and vertical surfaces, a solid angle fillet of bitumen mastic, not less than 50_mm wide, shall be formed in two coat work (see Fig. 12.22 and Fig. 12.23). 4.4 Movement of Joints Where it is considered necessary to provide movement of joints in the roof structure, details could be as in Fig. 12.24. 4.5 Laying of Bitumen Mastic 4.5.1 Spreading
a>Each
coat of bitumen mastic of each bay marked out, shall be spread evenly and uniformly by means of float to the recommended thickness, on to the previously prepared surface, the isolating membrane or the preceeding coat.
b) On a horizontal roof subject to foot traffic, two coats of mastic shall be applied; the first coat shahbe not less than 10 mm and the second coat not less than 15 mm.
c)
d)
of not less than 20 mm (see
b) Each coat of bitumen mastic shall be followed, without delay by the succeeding coat, since exposure to contamination might impair adhesion and cause blistering.
On vertical surfaces other than timber, including skirtings, upstands and drips and slopes over 30°, two equal coats of total thickness of not less than 12 mm or three coats of total thickness not less than 20 mm shah be applied.
cl The junction between two contiguous bays of a coat of bitumen mastic shall be not less than 150 mm from a corresponding junction in a preceding coat.
On vertical or sloping timber surfaces, three coats of bitumen mastic shall be applied to a
GROOVE FORMED WITH 50 X 25 mm TIMBER BATTEN LOWER EDGE SPLAYED
POINTED IN MORTAR 13mm BITUMEN MASTIC SKIRTING IN TWO COATS FACE OF CONCRETE LEFT ROUGH TO FORM A KEY FOR BITUMEN MASTIC ( ::
FIG.12.22
BITUMEN
C.‘.:.;,BL1,
MASTIC
,-20
LAID
ON SCREEDED
SKIKTING TO
CONCRETE
346
mm
BITUMEN
MASTIC
ROOFAND BITUMENMASTIC WALL
tL_._._._.
.. .__.
.
,.
,.
SP62(S&T):1997 POINT WITH MORTAR DAMP-PROOFING TREATMENT----.
/-METAL
-
13mm-4 TIMBER
I_ BOARDING JL
FLASHING
TIMBER
ROOF
FIG.12.23BITUMENMASTICLAIDONTIMBERROOFANDBITUMENMASTIC SKIRTINGONFREE-STANDING KERB PLUG
METAL PLATE
-25
mm
w-125
mm
20mm
BITUMEN MASTIC IN TWO COATS
GRAVELFINISH
L SCREEDING
E XJPOAYON
hOOF SLAB f BITUMEN FELT UNDERLAY
FIG. 12.24EXPANSIONJOINTINFLATROOF TWINKERB TYPE
d) When bitumen mastic is laid horizontally, tim-
f) Any blows shall be pierced and the affected area made good while the bitumen mastic is still warm.
ber gauges of specified thickness shall be used during the laying of each coat.
4 When bitumen mastic is laid over vertical or steeply sloping surfaces, the first coat is essentially-an~adhesive layer which acts as a base to ensure complete bonding of subsequent coats.
4.5.2 Surface /7irl,ish Immediately after completion of the laying of mastic, the surfaces shall be rubbed with a wood float using cleah sharp sand passing 8.50 micron IS Sieve and
347
SP62(S&T):1997 retained on 300 micron IS Sieve, while the mastic is still warm. 4.53
shall be laid between the~base and the insulation layer.
b) Skirtings and upstands - The exposed upper-
Final Finish
most part of bitumen mastic skirting shall be formed with a splay to shed rain water, even though a metal flashing is laid to cover the exposed part.
a>To
avoid absorption of solar heat, light coloured mineral aggregates or-pea-size gravel may be evenly spread shoulder to shoulder over the entire surface. The aggregates shall be stuck to the top of the surface with bituminous bonding material.
A similar splay is formed when bitumen mastic is continued through the wall to form a horizontal damp-proofing treatment (see Fig. 12.26).
b) The bitumen mastic may also be finished with roofing materials as described using light coloured tiles, etc.
c) All internal angles shall be laid in two coats, as
in Chapter 11
a separate operation. It is essential that the last coat of bitumen mastic of contiguous surfaces shall be warmed and cleaned, before the solid fillets are formed, by hot bitumen.
cl Where
decorative finish is necessary, aluminium paint free from material deleterious to bitumen mastic or any other coloured emulsion paint may be used.
4.5.4
4 Projecting pipes
should be surrounded by mastic as shown in Fig. 12.27. The treatment is continued over the metal surface coated with bituminous paint up to a stipulated height. The metallic reinforcements shall be placed vertically against the first layer of bitumen mastic. The top layer shall be built over the reinforcement. Neat bitumen or plastic bitumen shall be used as a grout at thejoint. A metal collar shall be fixed over it.
Other Details
a> Insulating materials to prevent fluctuation building, additional obtainable by placing material immediately ing. A vapour barrier
Where it is necessary of temperature inside a thermal insulation is a layer of insulating below the mastic roofas shown in Fig. 12.25
13 mm BITUMEN MASTIC DAMP- PROOFING TREATMENT IN ONE COAT, SCORED AND GRITTED WHEN LAID
13mm SKIRTING
BITUMEN MASTIC IN TWO COATS
JOINTS RAKED OUT TO FORM KEY FOR BITUMEN MASTIC
y;.. :,.::.. ‘.:.‘~.~:;‘~.~.:‘,:.:,~::‘~‘;I.
r
:.:: ‘, $
‘. ‘r
20mm
BITUMEN MASTIC IN TWO COATS
_~._, l.._.j /
1 / BONDINGCOMPOUND
LSCREEDING
VAPOUR BARRIER FOLDED OVER INSULATION
FIG.12.25 BITUMENMASTICLAIDONTHERMALINSULATINGMATERIAL
348
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
13mm
L a:
IN ONE
BITUMEN MASTIC DAMP-PROOFING TREATMENT COAT,SCORED AND GRITTED WHEN LAID 13mm BITUMEN MASTIC SKIRTING IN TWO COATS
JOINTS -RAKED OUT TO FORM KEY FOR BITUMEN MASTIC
,-20
mm
BITUMEN
MASTIC
FIG.12.26-BITUMENMASTICLAIDON SCIIEEDEDROOFWITHBITUMENMASTIC SKIRTINGANDDAMPPROOFINGTREATMENT TO WALL
r+----ft
/-CAST
IRON
I
PIPE
rMETALLlC
REINFORCEMENT
BITUMEN &
1-20
iA
/-GRAVEL
L BITUMEN
FIG.12.27TREATMENT
WHEN
A PIPE PASSES
349
THROUGH
mm BITUMEN MASTIC IN TWO COATS
FELT
A
FINISH
UNDERLAY
ROOF SLAB
SP62(S&T):1997 5 POLYETHYLENE
Over the film a cold cutback bitumen conforming to IS 73 : 1992 may be used; the temperature of the cutback shall not be more than 50°C at the time of application.
FILM
5.1 General Polyethylene film-is one of the materials which are being used for waterproofing of roofs in buildings. Experience gained so far indicates that when polyethylene film is laid on the roof as recommended, the treatment provides satisfactory performance against water penetration. Special care shall be taken for effective bonding of the polyethylene film to the background surface as well as in the overlaps. Proper precautions shall be taken against puncturing of the film and entrapping air while laying the treatment.
5.3 Types of Waterproofing 5.3.1 Pre-sloped Roofs
a) Single layer treatment (see Fig. 12.28)finished with plaster or gravel
1) Primer at the rate of 0.3 to 0.5 kg/m’, where necessary, till the surface is impregnated and the solvent oil in the primer is allowed to evaporate completely;
5.2 Material
2) Hot applied
bitumen (straight-run bitumen) at the rate of 0.70 kg/m2 Min;
Polyethylene film shall conform to 1s 2508 : 1984. In addition it shall satisfy the following conditions:
1) The film may be natural or black in colour. The black film shall contain not less than 2.0 percent of carbon black of an average particle size not exceeding 0.06 micron, well dispersed in mass. The natural film shall be ultraviolet stablized quality only.
2) Water vapour transmission
through the film determined by the procedure described in Annex A shall not be more than 5.53 g/24 hlm2.
b) Bitumen primer shall conform to IS 3384 :
bitumen
3)
Polyethylene film with adhesive in overlaps;
4)
Cold cutback 1.9 kglm2;
5)
Binding materials, such as fine sand in dry condition at the rate of 0.5 to 1.0 kg/m dusted over bitumen in (4) above; and
6)
Finishing layer, such as gravel on the flat surface and cement plaster 116 or lime mortar 1:3 on all vertical surfaces; or cement plaster 1:6 or lim% mortar 1:3 on the entire treated area.
bitumen
cold cutback at the
rate
materials shall grades conforming
be straight run to IS 73 : 1992.
TILES OR CEMENT CONCRETE OR PATENT STONE KRAFT PAPER LAMINATED WITH AND COATED WITH BITUMEN
r
L PRIMER
POLYETHY~LENE FILM /-BITUMEN
L
ROOF SLAB
THERMAL INSULATION
R~.12.28
SINGLE
of
pea-size gravel or grit finish is required, the size of the gravel should be 3 to 6 mm properly impregnated at 0.006 r&m*.
NOTE -Where
1986.
c) Bonding
Treatment
LAYERFILMTREATMENTOVERTHETHERMALINS~JLATIONONTHEROOF
350
,.
,___ -
-.
_ .._
iSP62(S&T):1997
b) Single layer treatment finished with tiles or
5.3.1 (b) items (1) to (5) and protective treatment, such as, mud Phuska and one or two layers of tiles.
patent stone or cement concrete
1) Primer at 0.3 to 0.5 kg/m2, till the surface is properly impregnated,
where necessary;
b) Treatment laid below lime terracing - As in 5.3.1 (b) items (1) to (5) and protective treatment, such~as, lime terracing.
2) Hot applied bitumen $straight-run grade) at the rate of 0.7 kg/m , Min; 3)
Polyethylene film with cold cutbackadhesive in overlaps;
4)
100 g brown kraft paper laminated in-situ over the film with semi-hot layer of straight-run bitumen. The technique of fixing kraft paper to polyethylene film is to paint semi-hot bitumen on the paper, reverse it and laminate over the film;.
5.4 Laying
5)
Semi-hot applied bitumen (straight-run grade) at the rate of 0.7 kg/m2 dusted with fine sand; and
6)
Finishing layer of tiles or patent stones (see Chapter 10).
5.4.1 Sequence of operations shall be as in 3.6.1. 5.42
4 The number of laps shall be minimized
by selecting film of suitable width; the minimum width of laps shall be 100 mm both at ends and sides.
b) The primer shall be applied on the prepared roof surface by brushing and allowing it to dry for 6 to 12 h.
c>Multi-layer
cl Hot bitumen shall be spread over the roof sur-
treatment - In severe conditions of exposure, such as, heavy rainfall or important structures it is advisable to provide multilayer treatment. Normally, a two layer treatment is sufficient to obtain adequate resistance to rain penetration. 1)
Lower layer 5.3.1 (b).
Items
(1) to (4) as
2)
Upper layer - Items (2) to (5) as in 5.3.1 (a) or items (2) to (5) as in 5.3.1 (b).
3)
Finish - Item (6) of 5.3.1 (b) or Item (6) as in 5.3.1 (a).
Laying
face and allowed to cool to a temperature so that the film may be laid without any damage to it.
4 The polyethylene film shall be carefully laid on the bituminous layer and firmly but carefully pressed down with the help ofa gunny cloth so as to prevent any damage to the film.
in
1)
5.3.2 Flat Roofs with Mud ‘Phuska’ Finish or Lime Terracing a) Treatment laid below mud Phuska (see Fig. 12.29) - as in 5.3.1 (a) items (1) to (4) or
The next length of the film shall be similarly laid down on the roof with proper longitudinal and end overlaps and firmly pressed down on the biutminous layer. The joints and overlaps shall be carefully sealed with the help of cutback bitumen applied over the upper surface of the lower layer of the film.
‘:CUTBACK BITUMEN WITH FILLER THERMAL INSULATION LIKE MUDPHUSKA OR LIME SURKHI MORTAR
r
ii-
1
L PRIMER
HOT BITUMEN
L
FINISHING LAYER LIKE TILES OR BRICKS ETC.
LROOF
SLAB
_ POLYETHYLENE FILM
SP62(S&T):1997 2)
The laying of film should be immediately followed by subsequent operations of covering with bituminous compositions. If the film is left exposed, it can lead to softening of bitumen layer underneath causing wrinkles leading to damage. The work therefore should not be carried out when the temperature is high.
As far as possible, the polyethylene film shall be laid as in Fig. 12.3OA for flat roofs; as in Fig. 12.30B for sloping roofs and as in Fig. 12.3OC for curved shell roofs.
e) As far as possible, laps shall be avoided in the troughs or valleys; where unavoidable, they shall be covered with an additional film strip of adequate width.
4 Excessive
It is necessary to hold the film high and finally pressed in position by cloth pad, so that the film sets securely on bituminous underlay. Otherwise this will result in the formation of air bubbles below the film, which will lead to poor bonding.
b) The film should not be overstretched, which
The workmen should preferably walk barefooted or with canvas shoes in order to prevent damage to the film.
5.4.3 Precautions to be taken into account in laying film treatment are as follows: bitumen should not be used for bonding the film to the prepared surface, which may result in the film sliding and wrinkling. otherwise leads to wrinkles when the film retracts. These wrinkles may get reproduced in the final treatment and are liable to get eroded and cause failure of treatment.
If the polyethylene film is to be carried over from horizontal to vertical surface, it should be over a fillet and protected with cement plaster or any other treatment. FILM
GRADING
MATERIAL
LAID ACROSS THE SLOPE
LROOF
SLAB
LAID
TO SLOPE
12.30A FlatRoof
ALONG
SLOPE
12.308SlopingRoof FIG. 12.30 TYPICALARRANGEMENT
FORLAYINGPOLYETHYLENEFILM- Contirlued 352
SP62(S&T):1997
POLYETHYLENEFILM f
12.3OCShell Roof FIG. 12.30 TYPICALARKANGEMENTFORLAYINGPOLYETHYLENEFILM5.4.4
Lncluded
54.5
Projections
Typical details for treatment of roof projections, projection through roofs, etc are as given in Fig. 12.3 I, 12.32 and 12.33.
For roof drainage, extra piece of polyethylene film shall be provided in the opening covering the edge of the down pipe and covered with cement plaster 1:6.
CUTBACK BITUMEN Alldinlensions in millimetrcs. FIG.
12.31 TYPICALBETAILOFWATERPROOFINGTREATMENTINCASEOF ROOFPROJECTING~BEYOND~THEWALL 353
SP62(S&T):1997 OVER FILLET C-EMENT MORTAR
r CHASE
FILLED
COLD
OPC
WITH
t1:11 CUT RACK WITH ~FltLER
POLYETHYLENE FILM
CE MEN1
HOT BIlUMEN
FINISHING LAYER
TION I
LSEPARATING
LAYER
FIG. 12.32 TYPICALDETAILOFWATERPROOFINGTREATMENTINCASEOFROOFSABUTTINGAGAINSTTHE
PARAPETWALL COLD CUTBACK BITUMEN
WITH
FILLER
POLYETHYLENE
CtlASE FILLED WITH CEMENT MORTAR II:‘.)
FILM
HOT BITUMEN
COVER FILLET FINISHING
LAYER
THERMAL INSULATION
SEPARATING
6 GLASS BITUMEN
FIBRE
TISSUE
REINFORCED
SLAYER
c) Bonding material shall be blown bitumen to IS 702 : 1988 or residual bitumen to IS 73 : 1992, or a mixture thereof selected to suit local conditions. The penetration of bitumen shall not~be more than 40 when tested in accordance with IS 1203 : 1978.
6.1 General Information on use of glass fibre tissue reinforced bitumen as damp-proofing material is covered in Part 1 of this Chapter. This mateiia! is also used for waterproofing of roofs.
6.3 In-situ
Waterproofing
Treatment
.,
.
of Roofs
6.2 Materials
4 Bitumen primer shall conform to IS 3384 : 1986.
b) Glass fibre tissue shall conform to IS 7 193 : 1974. Other details of glass fibre shall be as in 4.2.1 of Part 1 of this Chapter.
6.3.1 In selecting the combination of layers of glass fibre tissue membrane consideration shall be given to the type and construction of buildings, climatic and atmospheric conditions and the degree of permanence required.
354
% ,
!
SP62(S&T):1997 2 Where pea-size gravel is not available. coarse sand may be
6.3.2 For concrete, masonry and metallic roofs, flat or sloping, the following treatments are recommended:
used. Also tiles, finish, etc. shall be done as in Chapter 10. 3
a) Normal treatment
In the case of flat roofs with precast slabs, where the roof is
graded with lime concrete and surfaces plastered, normal treatment as in 6.3.2 (a) can be adopted. In case of sloping roofs, heavy treatment as in 6.3.2 (b) can be adopted. In case of too much of structural movements, an additional layer of glass fibre tissue embedded in hot bitumen may be provided.
I)
Bitumen primer at the rate of 0.4 kg/m2;
2)
Hot bitumen at the rate of 1.6 kg/m2, Min;
3)
Glass fibre tissue;
4)
Hot bitumen at the rate of 1.6 kg/m”, Min; and
6.3.3 Junction of parapet wall and roof shall be treated as shown in Fig. 12.34 and 12.35.
5)
Pea-sized gravel or grit devoid of fine sand at the rate of 0.006 m”/m2.
6.3.4 For expansion joints two layers of glass fibre base felt, Type 2 Grade 1 shall be laid loose overlapping one and other with one end of the felt stuck with bitumen alternately and finally covered with a layer of glass tibre tissue impregnated with hot bitumen. Typical arrangement is shown in Fig. 12.36.
b) Heavy treatment I to 4)
Same as in 6.3.2 (a) items (1) to (4);
5)
Second layer of glass fibre tissue laid perpendicular to previous layer;
6)
Hot applied bitumen 1.6 kg/m2, Min; and
7)
Finish as in 6.3.2 (a), item 5.
at the
rate
6.3.5 Sloping Roofs
of
Typical details of special treatment of AC and GI corrugated roofing at joints is given in Fig. 12.37.
c) Extra heavy treatment 1 to 6)
6.4 Laying
Same as in 6.3.2 (b) item 1 to 6;
7)
Third layer of glass fibre tissue laid perpendicular to previous layer;
6.4.1 Sequence of operations shall be as in 3.6.1.
8)
Hot applied bitumen kg/m2, Min; and
6.4.2 Procedure
9)
Finish as in 6.3.2 (a), item (5).
at the rate of 1.6
a) Clean the surface brushes;
NOTES
PARAPE
c) Cut the required length of glass fibre tissue and roll it;
I
,-CHASE IFOR TUC~KlNG / /
GLASS FIBRE FAClORY CEMENT MORTAR)II:L) /-
with wire
b) Prime the entire surface;
1 Five course treatment is recommended for moderate conditions (about 50 cm) of rainfall. Seven course treatment is suggested for severe conditions (between SO to 150 cm) of rainfall. Nine course treatment is recommended for very severe condition ( 150 cm and above) of rainfall.
BRlcK
to be treated
t+OT
APPLIED
lOOmm
GLASS FIBRE MADE FELr
TISSUE/ WITH
BITUMEN
OVERLAP
BITUMINOUS PEA-
PRIMER SIZED
GRAVEL/
GRIT
PLASTER CE
C-EVENT MORTAR (1:4) FILLET IGOLA) 75mm IN RADIUS
FIG. 12.34 WATERPROOFING ON A FLAT ROOFWITHBRICKPARAPET
OVER450 mm IN HEIGHT-TYPICAL
DETAILS
SP62 ( S & T ) : 1997 _/-HOT
APPLIED GLASS
//
BITUMEN
Fb3RE
TISSUE/
rEiITUMINOUS
/
GLASS FIBRE FACTORYMADE
F E Ll
PRIMER
R.Cc PARAPET
-SAND .CEMENT PL ASZER L CEMENT FILLET
~-FLAT
fim~
SURFACE
MORTAR ( 1 :L 1 IGOL A) 75 mm RADIUS
FIG. 12.35 WATERPROOFING ON A FLATROOF WITH RCC PARAPET 450 mm OR LE& INHEIGHT-TYPICAL DETAILS
r
GfUVEL ,-
HOTAFPUED Ouss
BITUMEN
FIERE TlSSUE
Rml UYER CiLAss FIBUE eAsE0 FELT FREE FROM BASE
CEMENT PLASTER
GLASS FIBRE IN SITU WAlERPRWFlNO
-‘. .
.-
J
All
.;’
0 _.
. 1
J.
dimensions in millimetres.
FIG. 12.36 WATERPROOFING OF EXPANSIONJOINTWITH GLASSFIBREIN-SITUTREATMENT ON RCC ROOF SLAB-TYPICAL DETAILS
h) The finishing materials like pea-sized gravel or grit surface dry shall be embedded into hot bitumen while it is being poured, by applying minimum pressure.
4 Pour hot bitumen on the surface to the extent of roll width and simultaneously embed the glass ftbre tissue into it. Proceed in this manner throughout the length of the roll. Precaution should be taken to ensure adequate sealing of overlaps;
e>Apply
second coat of hot bitumen;
0 In case of multilayer treatments, the joints in the glass fibre tissue between successive layers should be staggered midway;
8) The minimum overlap at ends and sides shall be 100 mm. All overlaps shall be firmly bonded with hot bitumen; and
w
7 ~WATERPROOFING OF UNDERGROUND RESERVOIRS AND SWIMMING POOLS 7.1 General During construction of underground water resources and concrete swimming pools and reservoirs, it is essential to ensure watertightness of the resulting structures so that the flow of water from inside the structure to outside and the infiltration of the water from the surrounding soil into the structure are effectively prevented.
: ‘, :; ;,
. *
356
.’
‘.
SP62(S&T):1997 GLASS FIB% TISSUE.
HOT APPLIED BITUMEN
GIASS FlfflE MADE FELT
\
FACTORY ,-
BITUMEN PRIMER
DETAIL AT A-A
L
GLASSFlBRETlSWO GLASS FIBRE FACTMY MADE FELT
FIG. 12.37 SPECIALTREATMENT FORAC/G1 CO~JCATED SURFACEJOINTS-TYPICAL DETAILS 7.2 Design Features
d) Lapping of reinforcement in circular tanks shoildbe so arranged that not more than 25 percent of the bars are jointed at any one vertical section.
7.2.1 Suitable precautions should be taken to avoid cracks and resulting leakages from the following:
a>Movements
due to shrinkage and creep;
b) Movements
due to variation
of temperature
7’3 Materials
and humidity;
c>Movements generated hydration;
d) Damage to concrete by the percolation chemically
e>Damage
a) Bitumen mastic shall conform to IS 5871 : 1987. Bitumen felt shall conform to IS 1322 : 1993 Type 3 -Grade 2; or IS 7193 : 1974, Type 2 Grade 1. Bitumen for bonding shall conform to IS 702 : 1988.
due to dissipation of heat by the concrete in the process of of
aggressive liquids from outside;
due to uneven settlement
b) Cement, steel, water shall conform to IS 3370 (Part 1) : 1965.
of founda-
tions;
7.4 Waterproofing
fl Cracking of concrete caused by rusting of bars; and
g)
Hydrostatic
7.2.2 -The design (Part 1) : 1965.
Treatment
7.4.1 Preventive Measures uplift force. shall Abe according
\ w The ground should slope away from~the struc-
to IS 3370
ture for a run-off. should be awayfrom
4 The concrete mix proportions
should be so designed to give an impermeable structure; this depends on the choice of water cement ratio, concrete mix, curing, etc.
distance of about 3 m to divert the The surfaces near the side walls paved; drainage to divert the water the structure shall be provided.
b) Waterproofing shall be done as in 3 using bitumen felt or 6 using glass fibre tissue; and damp-proofing treatment shall as in 3 Part 1 of this Chapter using bitumen mastic.
b) To reduce shrinkage stresses as far as possible, there should not be less than 0.3 percent of steel in any direction.
c) To avoid temperature
changes, reservoirs, shall be partly built into the ground, so that soil is available to cover the roof and to enclose the reservoir completely in a covering of earth, if necessary; and
357
c) The treatment mentioned in 7.4.1 (b) shall be covered with a cement screed of I:3 adding integral waterproofing compound. The surface of the screed should be levelled
t
d) The inside of walls and floors should be plastered, with cement plaster 1:3 with
+ ’
^
SP62(S&T):1997 repellents as below:
waterproofing compound added in two coats; the first coat being 12 mm thick and the second coat 10 mm thick. The outside surface of walls with waterproofing should be rendered compound added in a similar manner.
Class A - Silicone solvent solution for clay brickwork, hydraulic cement-based materials, natural and cast stone masonr-y for a predominantly siliceous nature.
e>A coat
of hot bitumen shall be applied to the outside wall after the rendening has dried.
7.5 Construction
Class B - Silicone solvent solution for natural and cast stone masonry work of predominantly calcareous nature and calcium silicate brickwork.
Details
Class C-Aqueous solution of sodium methyl siliconate for clay brickwork, natural and cast stone masonry of a predominantly calcareous nature.
a>In long
walls, they may be divided into 15 m sections with a gap of about 30 cm left between sections so that shrinkage in the long sections may occur, as far as possible, before the gap is concreted and the longer this can be deferred the better.
NOTE-Where the type of masonry cannot be classified, Class B repellentmay be used.
8.2.1 Preparation of Water Repellent
b) Vibrators shall be used wherever possible, for compaction.
a) From Class A and Class B materials - The Class A and Class B material may be diluted with mineral spirit nor xylene. The mineral spirit should have minimum flash point of 27’C, boiling range of 135 to 185’C and minimum Kauri-Butanol value of 34. For best results these classes of materials should contain 5 percent solids. b) From Class C, the material may be diluted with water to a concentration of 3 percent solids just prior to the application.
c>Construction
joints should be perpendicular to the general direction of the member. As far as possible vertical joints should be avoided.
4 It is not practicable to provide expansion joints in small and medium reservoirs and swimming pools. In large reservoirs expansion joints shall be provided at not more than 35 m for underground structures and not more than 28 m for exposed structures.
e) Pipes and special fixtures should be fixed in
8.3 Preparation of the Surface,
position before concreting is done.
f) For testing and remedial treatment reference
a>Cracks
may be made to IS 6494 : 1988. 8 SILICONE BASED WATER REPELLENT 8.1 General
b)
Application of the appropriate class of water repellent to all exterior surfaces free from cracks wider than 0.1 mm above ground level provides protection against absorption of water, salt and dirt. Applied over cement based paints, the repellent preserves the colour, brightness and appearance. Used as primers for oil based paints, the repellents minimize peeling and blistering caused by damp and salt from the masonry walls. The repellents should be applied to complete masonry rather than to individual units, in order to avoid inadvertent treatment of bedding faces which would be detrimental to bonding of mortar. Normally the repellent does not alter the dry appearance of the surface. Application of water repellent on exposed brickwork surfaces reduce the appearance of efflorescence of solublesulphates.
cl
S.2 Materials
wider than 0.1 mm and defective mortar joints shall be repaired. Surfaces Should be clean and dry. Detergents and wetting agents should not be used. When drying of surface is difficult, Class C material shall be used either Asia full treatment or prior to application of Class A or Class B treatment. Efflorescence, if visible, shall be washed with 5 to 10 percent muriatic acid (HCI) solution and then rinse it with clear water. If it reappears in some places after drying, the repellent shall be applied and allowed to cure for 24 h and the surface be again washed with muriatic acid (HCl) and rinsed. Then the surface may be treated with the repellent. The masonry, concrete, cement plaster and cement based painted surfaces shall be allowed to cure for 21 days before applying the repellent. If cement paint surfaces are treated with the repellent on a small area and if water repellency has not developed, such surface shall be cured for a longer period.
8.4 Application of Repellent
a) The silicone water repellent shall conform to IS 12027 : 1987. They are three classes of the 358
a) Normally a single generous or flood coat by brush or spray would be sufficient. The
4
SP62(S&T):1997 material should be applied liberally so that it runs down the surface freely to about 15 cm below the point of application. b) When spraying,
the solution
atomized or misted, but in a solid stream by maintaining a low nozzle pressure. c) Safety instructions followed.
should not be
ANNEX
of manufacturer
should be
A
[Clause 5.2 (a)] TEST FOR MEASURING A-l
OF WATER VAPOUR
GENERAL
A-l.1 This test lays the procedure for measuring water vapour transmission of polyethylene film. A-2 TEST SPECIMENS A-2.1 Four test specimens shall be tested, two being attached to an open mouth (30 cm2) dish with a designated side out and the other two with the opposite side out, unless otherwise specified. Great care shall be taken not to contaminate the test area of the specimen. A-3 -PROCEDURE A-3.1 Place a desiccant, such as, anhydrous calcium chloride to a depth of at least 15 mm in the dish. Seal the specimen to the opening of the dish (about 30 cm*), in such a manner that the leakage of water vapour at and through the edges is prevented. A-3.2 Weigh the assembly and place it in a rack inside a test chamber (or cabinet) with circulating air maintained at 38 + OS°C and 90 + 2 percent relative humidity, in an inverted position so that the desiccant is in direct contact with the test specimen; the assembly
TRANSMISSION
OF POLYETHYLENE
FILM
shall be so located that the conditioned air circulates over the exposed surface of the specimen with the specified velocity. A-3.3 Make successive weighings of the assembly at regular intervals until a constant weight is reached. If the assembly is removed from the chamber, it should be returned to the chamber immediately after weighing. A-3.4 Calculation . Calculate the water vapour transmission of the specimen from the rate of gain or loss found in the straight line portion of the plot of weighings versus time, as follows: G x 24 Water vapour transmission, in g/24h/m* = tea where G = t = a =
weight gain or loss, in g; time, in hours, during which gain or loss G was observed; and exposed area of specimen, in m2.
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER13 JOINTS IN BUILDINGS (CONTROL OF CRACKS IN BUILDINGS)
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
3.5 Additional Measures
2 TYPESOFJOINTS
3.6 Other Defects
2.1 Expansion Joints 2.2 Construction Joints
MATERIAU 4.1 Joint Filler and Sealing Compound 4.2 Waterbar
2.3 Contraction Joints 2.4 Sliding Joints 2.5 Joint Filler
INSTALLATION OFJOINTS
2.6 Sealing Compound
5.1 Expansion Joints in Walls
2.7 Waterbar
5.2 Expansion Joints in Roofs and Floors
3 DESIGNFEATURES 3.1 General 3.2 Evaluation ofDimensional Changes
5.3 Roof or Floor to Wall Joints 5.4 Expansion Joints in Framed Buildings 5.5 Contraction Joints in Roofs
3.3 Deformation
MAINTENANCE
3.4 Spacing of Expansion Joints
REFERENCES
--
SP62(S&T):1997
CHAPTER 13
JOINTS IN BUILDINGS (CONTROL OF CRACKS IN BUILDINGS) 1 GENERAL 1.1 When a material is stressed beyond its tensile or shear strength it cracks. The stresses may be due to external loads or restraint imposed against dimensional changes. Moisture movement and temperature variations cause such stresses which are resisted by the building elements. All building materials expand or contract with change in temperature and variation of moisture content. The magnitude of these changes vary with the type ot materials used. Most building materials expand while wetted and shrink while drying. Some materials contain moisture at the time of construction and dry out subsequently. Such materials are stone, brick and concrete and major dimensional changes are caused by their contraction. ,1.2 If the resulting contraction or expansion are restricted partly or wholly by any means, for example, restraining effect of cross and end walls in large buildings, internal stresses, like tension during contraction and compression during expansion, occur in the structure and their magnitude depends upon: the extent to which such free movement has been prevented due to connection of element to other structural members; the extent to which the movement would have taken place if there were no restraint; the extent to which the material creeps and flows under stress; and the extent to which elastic deformation place.
takes
These four factors are interdependent and the movement which actually occurs depends on the restraint to these movements as well as creep. Hence to minimize cracking in buildings, it would be necessary to avoid materials which expand or contract considerably due to thermal and moisture movements and design the structure so as to minimize restraint to expansion or contraction of the material. Use of materials having maximum extensibility, that is, total creep and elastic deformation before cracking and reducing the range of variation in temperature and moisture movement also helps in minimizing the cracking in buildings. 1.3 In tropical country like India, occurrence of large variations in the atmospheric temperature and humidity are to be expected and problems of crack prevention assumes greater importance. The larger the 363
structure or the number of storeys it has, the greater the extent to which such movements take place. 1.4 There are two ways of dealing with expansion and contraction of structures. The structures may be monolithic and heavy reinforcement may link each section so that all the stresses formed may be accommodated without fracture. Alternatively, the structure may be provided with a number of joints which relieve the stresses by allowing pre-determined sections of the structure to move. In the first method accurate assessment shall be made of all the conditions which are likely to induce stresses in the structure. This is not always possible but nevertheless the method is followed in cases like rigid frame structures and shell structures; in rigid frames provision of joints will interfere with the rigidity of the structure. In the second method where joints are provided reasonable care has to be exercised for design, location, detailing ofjoints and selecting materials such as joint fillers and waterbars so that large movements may be accommodated without structural failure, disfiguring cracks or penetration of moisture. 2 TYPES OF JOINTS 2.1 Expansion Joints Joints are provided to accommodate the expansion of adjacent building parts and relieve compressive stresses that may otherwise develop. Expansion joints essentially provide a space between the parts and may sometimes be provided with load transmitting devices between parts and generally tilled with expansion joint filler which is compressible enough to accommodate expansion of adjacent parts, and having ability to regain 75 percent of the original thickness, when pressure is reduced. 2.2 Construction
Joints
Joints installed in location whereconstruction stops for any reason and when the location of stoppage does not coincide with the planned location of an expansion or contraction joint. 2.3 Contraction
Joints
These are essentially separations or planes of weakness introduced in concrete structures to localize shrinkage movements which would otherwise lead to unsightly cracks. They may be of any of the following types: a) Complete Contraction Joint - In this type of joint the bond between adjacent sections of a
,
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 structure may be broken completely by painting one face with a bituminous material or by setting a layer of waterproof paper or roofing felt against the face of the section before casting the next section up to it.
b) Partial Contracting Joint - When structural stability is required between sections of a reinforced concrete structure separated by a contraction joint, it is sometimes convenient to continue the reinforcement across the joint. Due to the presence of reinforcement, the movement at these partial contaction joints is usually small.
changes. In estimating these movements the temperature at the time of construction may be considered. If concrete is laid in summer the main movement will be contraction and in such cases the expansion joints may be further placed apart provided the design takes care of the tensile stresses caused by contraction. If construction is in winter, the expansion joints may be nearer to avoid excessive compressive stresses. The coefficient of thermal expansion of some of the common building materials is given below: Material
Coegicient
Brick and brick work
5 to 7 x 10V6per “C
Cement mortars and concrete 10 to 14 x lOA per ‘C
c>Dummy
Joints-Dummy joints are used more particularly in thin sections of concrete. In these joints a plane of weakness is creaied by forming a groove in either or each of surfaces of concrete, the total depth of the groove being one-third to one-fifth of the thickness of the section.
Stones: Igneous rocks (granite, etc) 8
to 10 x 10” per ‘C
Limestones
2.4 to 9 x 10”
per ‘C
Marbles
1.4tollxlO+j
per°C
Sandstones
7
to
16 x 10m6 per°C
Slates
6
to
10x 10-6peroC
2.4 Sliding Joints
Metals:
When variations in temperature, moisture content or loading result in tendency for one part of a structure to move at right angles to the plane of another part, it is necessary to provide a slip plane between the two parts thus enabling freedom of movement in both the planes. Sliding joints are usually formed by applying a layer of plaster to one of the surfaces and finishing it smooth before the other is cast on it or by any other approved suitable method.
Aluminium
25 x lO& per OC
Bronze
17.6 x low6 per ‘C
Copper
17.3 x lOA per OC
Lead
29x IO4
Steel and iron
7t013x10-6
2.6 Sealing Compound A material of plastic consistency applied to the joint in the form of liquid or paste. The function of the sealing compound is to prevent the ingress of moisture or foreign matter. 2.7 Waterbar
per°C
NOTE-For natural materials like stones, because of moisture movements and the range of temperatures experienced, co effcents of thermal expansion cannot be specified accurately. This is only rough data arrd can be used by the des@ construction agency.
2.5 Joint Filer A strip af compressible material used to form and fill the expansion joints in structure.
per°C
3.2.2 Variation in Moisture Content Brickwork and concrete contract on drying out and expand when wetted again; and the process of contraction may continue even for a long time after construction depending on the external humidity conditions. The degree of moisture immediately after setting or hardening of the mortar or concrete may also vary from part to part during construction.
The design of a joint will depend on the type of structure, the method of construction and the jointing materials available. The dimensional changes due to moisture and temperature variations have to be accounted for in the design of.a joint.
For dense concretes, the contraction due to drying shrinkage may vary from 0.2 to 0.5 mm/m; for light weight blocks the shrinkage may be larger varying from 0.5 to 0.8 mm/m; for autoclaved aerated concrete still greater shrinkage of the order of 3 mm/m may be allowed for. However if care is taken to allow nonaerated concrete, specially precast blocks to dry and thus contract before use, the shrinkage may be considerably reduced and a value of 0.6 mm/m may be allowed.
3.2 Evaluation
3.3 Deformation
A strip which is placed across the joint during construction so as to form an impervious diaphragm. 3 DESIGN
FEATURES
3.1 General
3.2.1
of Dimensional
Temperature
Changes
Variations
Spacing of expansion joints is determined in relation to the movement which will occur due to temperature
Deformation may also be caused as a result of loading. Allowance for movement in the joint shall be provided for to accommodate deformation due to loading 364
SP62(S&T):lY97 parricularly
to allow for the following factors:
Difference in compressibility of the various materials used in the individual sections of the building; Unequal loading of the individual parts of a building; for example as a result of differences in height when constructing sections in parts or in the final stage; and Differential settlement due to unequal loading, variable load bearing capacity of the soil on account of constructing a building partly on old foundations; due to overlapping of the load distribution with that of the adjacent foundations or due to the variation in moisture conditions in the sub-soil. 3.4 Spacing of Expansion
Joints
Generally the spacing of expansion according to Table 13. I.
joints
shall be
Table 13.1 Recommended Spacing of Expansion Joints (Clause 3.4) Sl
Spacing of Joints
Items and Description
No. i)
Wulls I)
Load bearing walls with cross walls at intervals. Traditional type of onebrick thick or more
3Omintervals
2)
Walls of warehouse type construction
Expansion joints at 30 m maximum intervals. If they
joints are necessary.Control joints over cenlre of openings may be given at half the spacing of expansion joinls
iii)
Sunshades, balconies and parapets
b) In the case of masonry walls resting on pile foundation, the vertical control joint shall be taken up to the top of the grade beam over the piles. Reinforcement shall not pass through the joint.
cl In the case of reinforced concrete structures, the vertical control joints between two columns shall extend from top of the column to the top ~of the pedestal provided over the RCC footing. 3.5 Additional
Measures
In addition to provision of joints, the following measures may also be taken to reduce or prevent damage due to thermal effects. a ) Choosing texture and colour for the exposed surface such that most of the solar radiation is reflected and the minimum is absorbed; white washing of roofing would be advantageous; and b) Providing insulating surfaces on top of the slab to reduce and delay penetration of heat into the structure; such insulated slabs shall be provided with expansion joints, at suitable intervals. 3.6 Other Defects
are panel walls between columns is 9 m or less no
ii)
taken through the foundation concrete. Reinforcements shall not pass through the joint.
Many defects other than expansion may also lend to development.of cracks, and such cracks. may not be related to the defective provision of expansion joints, surface shrinkage for example, cracks, stress concentration in reinforcement due to corrosion and \ effects of frost action.
6 to 12 m intervals
4 MATERIALS
Roofi I)
Ordinary roof slabs of RCC
20 to 30 m intervals. and at
protected by layers of mud changes in directions as in L, Phusko or other insulating T, H and V shaped structures media in unframed struction 2) iv)
con-
Thin unprotected slabs
IS m intervals
Frcmtes Joint in structure through slabs. beams, columns. etc dividing building into independent structural units
Corners of L, H. T and C shaped structures and at 30 m intervals in long uniform structures
Coping
Corresponding to the joints in the roof slabs
v)
3.4.1
Vertical Control Joints
a) In the case of masonry walls the vertical control (expansion) joints shall be provide’d from top of the wall to the top of the concrete foundations. The vertical control joint shall not be
4.1 Joint Filler and Sealing Compound Joint filler shall conform to IS 1838 (Part 1) : 1983 or IS 1838 (Part 2) : 1984; sealing compound shall conform to IS 1834 : 1984. Ofher organic solvents may also be considered, such as, polysulphate based joint sealants to IS 11433 (Part 1) : 1985 nor IS 12118 (Part 1) : 1987. 4.2 Waterbar Waterbars may be necessary while the joint is subject to groundwater pressure or where the method of construction makes it difficult to accurately seal the surface cavity. Waterbars may be of natural and synthetic rubber, PVC or metal. Some common shapes of waterbars are given in Fig. 13. I, 13.2 and 13.3. For metallic waterbars copper is most suitable.
SP62(S&T):1997
13.18 13.1A
13.1D
13.1E
All dimensions in millimetxes.
FIG. 13.1 TYPICALDESIGNSOFVALVE TYPEPVC WATERBARS
13.2A
Alldimensions in millimetres. FIG. 13.2 TYPICALDESIGNSOFNATURALRUBBERWATERBARS-
Continued
SP62(S&T):1997
T
5
L
I 13.2D
13.2C All dimensionsin millimetres.
FIG. 13.2 TYPICALDESIGNSOF NATURALRUBBERWATERBARS-
C~nchded
13.38
13.3c
13.3D
13.3E
13.3G
13.3H
; 13.3K
13.3L
FIG. 13.3 TYPICALDESIGNSOF METALLICWATERBARS
SP62(S&T):1997 of joint is less than 15 mm, use of sealing compound will suffice, but for wider joints, a joint filler shall be used. The installation of joint with joint filler and sealing compound shall be as shown in Fig. 13.4 A and with angle irons shall be as shown in Fig. 13.4 B.
5 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS 5.1 Expansion Joints in Walls In brick or stone masonry joints normally need not be provided except in case of long walls exceeding 30 m in length; in such long walls, the expansion joints shall be not less than 15 mm wide and shall be placed at not more than 30 m apart. b) For walls above ground level where the width a)
SEALING METAL
COMPOUND7
c) For walls below ground level or for walls subject to water pressure, use of an efficient waterbar is essential in expansion joints. The waterbar shall be installed as in Fig. 13.4 C for walls subject to water pressure.
-;&r
JOINT FILLER
SHEET
SCREWS FIXED BY RAWL PLUG ON ONE SIDE ONLY
FLAT ASBESTOS CEMENT SHEET OR PLYWOOD OR ANY OTHER EQUALLY SUITABLE MATERIAL 150mm WIDE
13.4A Expansion Joint Using Joint Filler and Sealing Compound
METAL
SCREWS
SHEET
FIXED
PLUG ON ONE
BY RAWL SIDE ONLY
FLAT ASBESTOS CEMENT SHEET OR PLYWOOD OR ANY OTHER EQUALLY SUITABLE MATERIAL 150mm WIDE
13.4B Expansion Joint Using Steel or Aluminium Angles
WATER
BAR-
INITIAL
-v-
CONCRETE
AN0
GAP
STEEL
13.4C Expansion Joint Subject to Water Pressure
FIG. 13.4 TYPICAL
DETAILS
OF EXPANSIONJOINTSIN WALLS
368
SP62(S&T):1997 5.2 Expansion Joints in Roofs and Floors
be installed in the expansion joint. The joint shall suitably ~treated for waterproofing. Typical sketches of expansion joints in roofs are shown in Fig. 13.5 and 13.6.
a) The expansion joints used in roof shall be finished such as to obtain an effective seal against penetration of water. A waterbar shall BITUMEN
BITUMEN LAID IN TWO LAYERS n
/
r
FELT
CEMENT @CC
PLASTER PRECAST
TILE
BI-IUMEN
1Zmm
THICK
FILLER
/-LIME
TERRACING
FILLED \-METAL
UP WITH
BITUMEN
CRADLE
\-DRAWL PLUGS AND SCREWS WITH OVALSHAPED SLOT AND WASHER
AC SHEET
RAWL
PLUG AND
SCREWS
Alldimensions in millimetres. 13.5A Expansion Joint Using RCC Precast Tiles over Joint BITUMEN
PLASTIC
FILLER
RAWL PLUG AND 5Omm rip ABOUT 300mm
RAWL PLUG AND SCREW WITH OVAL SHAPED SLOT AND WASHER
SCREWS C/C
GS SHEET TO BE CARRIED OVER FLAT TILES BY 50mm
BITUMEN-,
13.58 Expansion Joint where Flat Tiles Laid over Roof PHUSRA ‘ONCRETE
OR LIGHT LA’D
lo
WEIGHT SLoPE
~RlCrCS LAID WITH VERTICAL JOINT IN MORTARtr TILES LAID TO SLOI *I MUG, PHUSKA
\RCC ToC, SURFACE RENDERED SMOOTH WITH THICll WHITE WASH
\
SLAB
CONCRETE
BED
L-WALL
13.5C Expansion Joint where Flat Tiles Laid over Roof and Brick Layer over Joint FIG. 13.5 TYPICALDETAILSOF TREATMENT FOREXPANSION JOINTSAT ROOFS-
369
Corltinued
L.
SP62(S&T):
1997 BITUMEN STONE
FELT
CHIPS
CEMENT PRECASl co BITUMEN STONE
/-
CHIPS
BITUMEN
/-
II
FILLER
PLASTER FELT
/-
b#ETAL CRAOLE mm GAP
’
13.5D Raised Type Expansion Joint with Coping
FIRSTLAVER 8ITUMEN
JITUMEN FREE FROM BAST
FEL
MEhiT FLAT AND FIRST
PLASTER
LIVE@
13.5E Expansion Joint with RCC Slab Covered over Joint FII(S.1 LAVEI BITUMEN FELT FREE FROM BASE BITUMEN
FELT
CEMENT
PLASTLR
FELT N
\
BITUMEN
FELT LAP JOINTS
SEALED
13SF Raised Type Expansion Joint Without Coping
FIG. 13.5 TYPICALDETAILSOF TREATMENT FOREXPANSION JOINTSAT ROOFS-
\
FIRST
LWER
FELT FREE BITUMEN
CEMENT
BITUMEN
SEALED
BITUMEN FROM
BASE
FELT PLASTER BITUMEN
FLAT AND FIRST LAYER BITUMEN FELT OF CROWN PIECE
Concluded
/--
,-BITUMEN
FELT
TUMEN
AT LAP JOINT
FIG. 13.6 TYPICALDETAILSOF EXPANSION JOINTINLEVELWITHROOF SURFACE
370
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
b) For floors, waterbar is not necessary.
When the floor part of the joint is left open chamfering shall be provided on either side of the joint to improve appearance. If open joint is not acceptable, a cover plate fixed to one side and free to slide over the concrete on the other side may be provided as in Fig. 13.7.
C) In case of long sunshades, balconies and parapets, the joints shall be at intervals of 6 to 12 m. The expansion joint shall not extend to the portion where the sunshade is embedded into the masonry but shall stop short of face by 5 cm; and the distribution reinforcement, in the embedded portion and in the 5 cm portion of the sunshade where there is not expansion joint. shall be increased to 0.3 percent of the gross cross sectional area to take up temperature stresses. In case of covered verandah slabs, the expansion joints spacing may be increased to I2 to 14 m and the expansion joint shall not be extended beyond the wall. The gap may be sealed by copper cradle. Aluminium cradles insulated with a thick coat of bitumen may also be used in place of copper cradles. I)
Where the verandah slab is the extension of floor slab, the distribution reinforcement in the portion of the slab resting on the masonry shall be increased to twice its normal amount. Reinforcement not required from structural considerations may be considered effective as distribution reinforcement for the purpose.
2)
Topreventcracks in the masonry below or above the expansion joint in cases where it is not possible to provide a vertical joint in the masonry, RCC or plain cement concrete bed plates shall be provided on the bearing.
5.3 Roof or Floor to Wall Joints The roof slab shall be free to move at the bearings on the walls and sliding joints shall be provided at the bearings. This may be achieved by resting the slab on a smooth surface obtained by a plaster finish over the bed blocks or bearing surface of wall; then giving a white wash finish would give a smoother surface. A similar treatment may also be given in the case of floor slabs bearing on walls (see Fig. 13.8, 13.9 and 13. IO). 5.4 Expansion
Joints in %ramed Buildings
The details of joints between panel wall and the frame shall be as shown in Fig. 13.11. In case of continuous expansion joints between two parts of buildings twin columns shall be provided and the details of expansion joints between them shall be as shown in Fig. 13.12. In addition to the expansion joints necessary in reinforced concrete frame, contraction joints shall be provided in the masonry in the facade. These joints may be either straight or staggered joints in the masonry and the joints finished with suitable sealing compound to match the appearance of the cladding. Resin based building mastics may be found suitable for sealing joints in the facade as they will be available in various colours. PVC cover strips may also be used. In the case of glass block partition felted mineral fibre will be particularly suitable as a joint filler.
RCC PRECAST TILE 25 mm THICK TO MATCH THE FLOOR FINISH AND LAID OVER A COAT OF HOT BITUMEN
.METAL FILLED BITUMEN
RAWL PLUGS OVAL SHAPED RAWL
PLUG
AND
CRADLE UP WITH FILLER
AND SCREWS WITH SLOT
AND
WASHER
SCREWS
FIG. 13.7 TYPICALDETA~LSOFEXPANSIONJOINTATFLOOR
371
SP63(S&T):1997 WCC
COPING
75mm
1lllCK
,-PAINT
FIG. 13.8TYPICALDETAILS OF EXPANSIONJOINTAT WALL AND ROOF JUNCTION TWO
LAYERS OF REINFORCED PRECAST TILES1
CEMENT LIME
PLASl
‘ER
’
TERRACING7
-rFtOOR
b?CC L25 All dimensions
mm
FINISH
&CC
SLAB
METAL
CRADLE
BEAM
GAP
in millimetres.
FIG. 139 TYPICAL DETAILS OF EXPANSIONJOINTAT ROOF BY THE SIDE OF WALL COPING rHlGHER
ROOF
sl
/-BlfUMEN
FELT
,12mm GAP LIGHTLY FILLED WITH WEAK MORTAR
/
BEARING
J
FIG. 13.10TYPICAL DETAILSOF EXPANSIONJOINTAT DIFFERENTFLOORLEVELS
372
SP62(S&T):1997 METAL PLUG
JOINT
FILLER7
STRIP
rOUTSlOE
LSEALING
I
\
7
‘PLASTER
CGMPOUNG
JOINT
r,ETAL METAL
13.llA
Unplastered
FILLE
A
PLUGS
SHEET
13.11 B Plastered Interior
Interior
FIG. 13. I 1 TYPICALDETAILSOFEXPANSIONJOINTAT PANELWALLS OFRCC FRAMEDSTRUCTURE
RAWL FLU0
AND
15Omm WIDE ASBESlOS CEHENl SHEET, ALUMINIUY PLAIE, STEEL PLATE OR SIMILAR MATERIAL RAWI. PulG
13.12A
AND SOmm
Typical D&ails of Expansion Joint on Outer Face of Columns
RAWL PLUG AN0 5Omm SCREWS
WALL
STEEL
‘ER
13.128
Typical Details of Expansion Joint at Comer Columns
f-JOINT
FILLER
COMPOUND
13.12C Typical Details of Expansion Joint at Isolated Twin Columns
FIG. 13.12 TYPICALDETAILSOF EXPANSIONJOINTSAT TWIN COLUMNSOF RCC FRAMEDSTRUCTURELS 5.5 Contraction
Joints in Roofs
Joints are generally oftwo types, namely, parapet type
lip type. Typical sketches of these types of joints iuoofs are as shown in Fig.13.13 and 13.14.
and
I
1
SP 62(S & T):
1997 y-ROOF
L INSULATION 13.13A
/-SEALING
TERRACING
COMPOUND
\ROOF
LAYER
SLAB
Typical Details of Lip Type Joint in Roof Terracing where there is no Joint in Roof Slab /SEALING
BITUMEN FELT FIXED WITH BITUMEN MASTIC-
/
TOP OF WALL RENDERED SMOOTH AND WHITE WASHED 13.13B
COMPOUND
rBlTlJMEN
FILLER
WITH WEAK
MORTAR
Typical Details of Lip Type Joint where there is Joint in Roof Slab over a Wall
FIG. 13.13 TYPICALDETAILSOF LIPTYPEJOINTSINROOF BRICK TILES 7 -PIPE INSULATION
IN SLOPE
WHERE
LAYER7
BITUMEN PASTED BITUMEN
FELT WITH MASTIC
GAP FILLED LIGHTLY WITH WEAK MORTAR PL4STER WHITE
FINISHED WASHED
SMOOTH AND OVERALL
FIG. 13.14 TYPICALDETAILSOF PARAPETJOINTINROOFTERRACING WITHOR WITHOUTWALL
6 MAINTENANCE
20mm and this shall be filled with cold-applied
a) It may be advantageous to carry out maintenance work during dry spells of weather in
the spring, at which time of the year, the width of the joints and cracks will be intermediate between summer and winter conditions, and subsequent strains for sealing compound and joint filler will be equally divided between expansion and compression.
bitumen or hot-applied mastic.
7 REFERENCES 7.1 SP 25 (S&T) : 1984covers the causes and prevention of cracks in buildings. This Handbook gives detailed information on treatment of cracks also.
b) Isolated and well defined cracks in vertical surfaces shall be cut out to provide a substantial cavity to a width of 15 mm, and depth of 15 to
7.2 Chapter 4 on Masonry and Chapter 5 on Concrete of this Handbook essentially cover procedures for construction of masonry and concrete; if followed carefully and meticulously the formation of cracks could be reduced to a large extent.
374
SP62(S&T):1997 7.3 Similarly good construction practices covered in Chapter 3 on foundations, Chapters 9, 10 and 11 dealing with good construction practices for floors, wall finishes and roofs respectively would help in containing initiation of cracks in buildings. 7.4 Apart from IS 3414 : 1968 on joints in buildings, three more Indian Standards are available based on IS0 standards. IS 10958 : 1984 gives a general check list of functions of joints in buildings. The functions include environmental factors, capacity to withstand stress, safety, accommodation of dimensional deviations, fixing of components, appearance, economics,
durability, maintenance and ambient conditions. The standard only elaborates a little of these functions and no constructional details are given. IS 11817 : 1986 covers classification of joints for accommodation of dimensional deviations during construction. Three types of joints are classified to deal with accommodation of dimensional deviations. These standards may be considered for appropriate situations, such as, in prefab or use of precast elements. Further IS 11818 : 1986 covers the test for laboratory determination of air permeability ofjoints in buildings.
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER14
WHITEWASHING,COLOURWASHINGAND PAINTINGOFMASONRY,CONCRETEAND PLASTER~SURFACES (CALCAREOUSSURFACES)
CONTENTS
3 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BACKGROUNDAND
GENERAL PART 1 WHITEWASHING COLOUR WASHING
TREATMENT
AND
3.1 General 3.2 Planning of all Painting Operations in Relation to Dampness in the Background 3.3 Painting and Other Finishes on Both Sides of the Wall 3.4 Variation in Suction
GENERAL MATERIALS PREPARATORY WORK 3.1 New Surface 3.2 Old Surface PREPARATION OFWHITEWASH ANDCOLOURWASH
3.5 Surface Imperfections 3.6 Growth of Moulds, Fungi, Algae and Lichens 4 PREPARATION OFBACKGROUND
4.1 Preparation of Whitewash 4.2 Preparation of Colour Wash
4.1 For Lime Plaster Surfaces
APPLICATION OF WHITEWASH ANDCOLOURWASH
4.2 For Cement and Cement Concrete Surfaces
5.1 Application of Whitewash
4.3 For Gypsum Plaster Surfaces
-5.2 Application of Colour Wash
4.4 For Masonry Surfaces
5.3 Painting Schedule of Whitewashing Colour Washing 6 PROTECTIVE MEASURES PART 2 PAINTING OF MASONRY, CONCRETE AND PLASTER SURFACES
1 GENERAL 2 MATERIALS
and
4.5 For Absestos Cement Surfaces 5 APPLICATION OFPAINTS ANNEX A CHARACTERISTICS OF CALCAREOUS SURFACESWITHREGARDTO PAINT FINISH ANNEX B APPLICATION OF ALUMINIUM FOIL TO CALCAREOUSSURFACES ANNEX C TEST RELATINGTO FITNESS OF PLASTER FORPAINTING
-.
..-
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
CHAPTER 14
WHITEWASHING, COLOUR WASHING AND PAINTING OF MASONRY, CONCRETE AND PLASTER SURFACES (CALCAREOUS SURFACES) 1 GENERAL 1.1 Whitewashing and_colour washing of surfaces of buildings is necessary for both hygienic and aesthetic reasons. In order to obtain a neat, clean and uniform finish it is necessary to prepare the surfaces, such as, 1 concrete, masonry or plaster. 1.2 Painting of ~masonry, concrete and plaster and similar calcareous surfaces is carried out not only for hygienic or aesthetic reasons but also for waterproofing and chemical attack from industrial atmospheres ccmtaminated with corrosive fumes. Calcareous surfaces like lime and cement plastered surfaces are highly alkaline in the initial stages, and they retain large quantities of water during construc-
PART 1 WHITEWASHING
1 ~GENERAL
1.3 This Chapter is divided into two Parts, Part 1 dealing with Whitewashing and colour washing and Part 2 dealing with Painting of masonry, concrete and plaster surfaces.
AND COLOWR WASHING
3.2 Old Surface
1.1 This Part deals with the preparation of surfaces and application of whitewash and colour wash over masonry, concrete and plaster surfaces. 2 MATERIALS 2.1 Lime used shall conform to Class ‘C’ (fat lime) to IS 712 : 1984 and white in colour. Water shall be clear, free from all organic and suspended impurities; potable water is suitable for this purpose. Sodium chloride shall conform to IS 253 : 1985 or Grade II of IS 797 : 1982. Ultra marine blue or indigo shall conform to IS 55 : 1970. Pigments of yellow and red ochre shall conform to IS 44 : 199 1; and pigments of blue vitriol shall be fresh crystals of anhydrous copper sulphate (blue vitriol) and conform to l[S 261 : 1982 ground to fine powder. 3 PREPARATORY
tion and it takes a long time for greater part of the water to evaporate even when the atmospheric conditions are favourable. Therefore cognizance of stored up moisture has to be taken while applying a paint system on these surfaces; the alaklinity of the surface is another aspect to be : taken note of. These surfaces are porous and present problems, such as, variable suction, surface imperfections, growth of moulds, mosses, lichens and algae. Each of these have adverse effect on most of the surface coating materials and therefore finishing of these surfaces, need special care.
WORK
3.1 New Surface The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar drops and other foreign matter before whitewash is to be applied.
a) Surfaces, where the same colour wash is to be repeated, shall be broomed to remove all dust and dirt. All loose scales of lime wash and other foreign matter shall also be removed. Where heavy scaling has taken place the entire surface shall be scraped clean. This will also apply, where a colour wash has to be given on an already whitewashed surface.
b) For surfaces where different colour wash is to be applied, the old colour wash on surfaces shall be entirely removed before whitewash or different colour wash is applied. The surface shall be prepared by brushing or by scraping or by other suitable means to produce a clean surface and shall be broomed to remove dust, dirt, etc.
cl Old surface spoiled by smoke soot shall be scraped with steel wire brushes or steel scrapers. -The surface shall be broomed to remove all dust and dirt and shall be washed with clean water.
4 Oil and grease spots shall be removed by a suitable chemical wire brushes.
and surfaces
rubbed
with
SP62(S&T):1997 screened through a clean coarse cloth. Add I kg of gum dissolved in hot water to each cu.m of lime cream. About 1.3 kg of sodium chloride dissolved in hot water may be added to every 10 kg of lime. Small quantity ofultramarine blue (up to 3 g/kg of lime) shall also be added to the last two coats of whitewash solution and the whole solution be stirred thoroughly (see Notes 1 and 2).
A!! unsound portions of surface plaster shall be removed to full depth of plaster in rectangular patches and plastered again after raking the masonry joints properly. Such portions shall be wetted and allowed to dry. They shall be given one coat of whitewash. Al! unnecessary nails shall be removed; and the holes and cracks shall be filled with lime putty or plaster of Paris to make the surface smooth.
NOTES
When whitewashing old surfaces, if surfaces are found to be infected with mould growth, it shall be treated as below.
1 The addition of sodium chloride (common salt) to lime wash helps in quick carbonation of calcium hydroxide making the coating hard and rub-resistant.
Any growth of moulds, moss shall be removed by scraping with steel scraper and ammoniacal copper solution consisting of 15 g of copper carbonate dissolved in 60 ml of liquor ammonia in500 ml water, shall be applied to the surface and allowed to dry thoroughly before applying colour wash or whitewash. An alternative to ammoniacal copper solution treatment may consist of 2 percent sodium pentachlorophenate solution in water.
2 For exterior work the whitewash or colour wash that will adhere well to stone and masonry surfaces may also be prepared by scattering one part by weight of tallow in small lumps over I2 parts of quick lime, slaking it with onlyjust sufficient water to form a thick paste, stirring occasionally to assist dispersing the tallow and allowing it to stand until cool. The resultant paste shall then be let down to thin wash, which is strained through a coarse cloth. If tallow is not obtainable, then linseed oil or castor oil about 10 percent by weight of dry lime may be used. If the oil does not saponify and incorporate with lime, it should be heated up until the oil disappears. The oil forms with lime an insoluble soap, which when once dry, will not wash off with heavy rain. In case of colour wash, mineral colours such as oxide of iron, red and yellow colours, based on chromium oxide and carbon black not affected by lime may be added. Use of linseed oil is likely to give slight yellow tinge to whitewash.
Local areas affected by eftlorescence shall be initially treated as described below and then applied whitewash or colour wash. Efflorescence will continue as long as there is sufficient water in the structure backings to carry the soluble salts forward and it is useless to sea! the moisture by paint film in the surface.
4.2 Preparation
Sufficient quantity of colour wash enough for the complete job shall be prepared in one operation to avoid any difference in shade. To the basic whitewash solution prepared in accordance with 4.1, mineral colours not affected by lime shall be added.
For removing eftlorescence dry brushing appears to be the only remedy. Efflorescence shall not be removed by washing with water as it may carry some salts back into the pores; on redrying efflorescence may be even worse than before if the salts were still present in the structure. The treatment of an old wall with hydrofuge silicone will frequently stop the efflorescence as the liquids block the passage of moisture. In the case of efflorescence due to rising of salt solutions through capillary action from sub-soil the only remedy is to provide bitumen or metallic seals in the walls above ground level so that an effective barrier to capillary action is treated. 4 PREPARATION COLOUR WASH 4.1 Preparation
OF WHITEWAS3-I
of Colour Wash
5 APPLlCATION COLOUR WASH 5.1 Application
OF
WHITEWASH
AND
of Whitewash
Whitewash shall be applied with Moorzj brush or other brush to the specified number of coats. The operation of each coat shall consist of astroke of the brush given from the top downwards, another from the bottom upwards over the first stroke, and similarly one stroke horizontaly from the right and another from the left before it dries. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next coat is applied. No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on. The~brush shall be dipped in whitewash pressed lightly against the wall of the container, and then applied lightly pressing against the surface with full swing of hand.
AND
a) The ceiling should be whitewashed prior to the walls.
of Whitewash
Whitewash shall be prepared from fat lime conforming to IS 712 : 1984. The lime shall be slaked at site and shall be mixed and stirred with about 5 I of water for I kg of unslaked lime to make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand for a period of 24 h and shall be 380
b) For new work, a minimum of two coats shall be applied so that the surface presents a smooth and uniform finish through which the plaster does not show. The finished dry surface shall not show any signs of cracking and peeling and
., - i-__ _^.I. I+--SP62(S&T):1997 the whitewash shall not come offreadily on the hand when rubbed.
cl For old work, after the surface
has been prepared as in 3.2, a coat of whitewash shall be applied over patches and repairs. Then one or two or more coats of whitewash shall be appliedovertheentiresurface. The whitewashed surface shall present a uniform finish through which the plaster patches do not show.
5.2 Application of Colour Wash The colour wash shall be applied in accordance with the procedure laid down in 5.1. For colour washing or new work, after the surface has been prepared as in 3.1, the first orimary coat shall be of whitewash and the subsequent coats (minimum two) shall be colour wash; the entire surface shall present a smooth and uniform finish. To start with 0.1 m2 of the prepared surface shall be colour washed with the first coat of whitewash and subsequent coats of colour wash solution in full number of coats and the shade so obtained shall be examined before the entire work of colour washing is taken up in hand. It shall then be noted that small areas of colour wash will appear lighter in shade than when the same shades are applied to larger surfaces.
PART 2 PAINTING
OF MASONRY,
a) For colour washing of old surfaces prepared as in 3.2, a coat of colour wash shall be applied for the patches and repairs. Then the specified number of coats of colour wash shall be applied over the entire surface. The colour wash shall present a uniform colour shade. No primary coat is needed for old surface bearing colour of the same shade. b) On surfaces requiring a changeof colour, after the surface has been prepared as in 3.2 (b), two coats of whitewash shall be applied before application of specified number (minimum two) of coats of colour wash of the new shade. 5.3 Painting Schedule Colour Washing
1.1 This Part will deal with painting, namely, distempering, oil paint, emulsion paint, cement paint, synthetic gloss paints, bituminous paints, etc, on masonry, concrete and plaster surfaces (calcareous surfaces).
6 PROTECTIVE
2.1 Dry distemper shall conform to IS 427 : 1965; oil bound distemper to IS 428 : 1969; enamel interior and exterior paint to IS 133 : 1993 and IS 2933 : 1975 and cement paint to IS 5410 : 1992. 3 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BACKGROUND AND TREATMENT 3.1 General In painting calcareous surfaces, careful consideration shall be given to physical and chemical properties of the background and the backing materials which are strongly alkaline. Concrete, lime and cement plasters are likely tocausealkali attack on paint. This will have to be clearly distinguished from materials which are neutral or nearly so, as in the case of calcium sulphate
MEASURES
6.1 Surfaces of doors, windows, floors, articles of furniture, etc, and such other parts of building not to be whitewashed or colour washed, shall be protected from being splashed upon. Such surfaces shall be cleaned of whitewash or colour wash splashes, if any.
AND PLASTER
SURFACES
plasters. The characteristics of different calcareous surfaces are described in Annex A. 3.2 Planning of all Painting Operafions in Relation to Dampness in the Background 3
2 MATERIALS
and
The schedules are given in Part 2.
CONCRETE
1 GENERAL
of Whitewashing
) When painting new walls, any type of paint system which will seal in the moisture shall be avoided.
b) The material for initial decoration shall therefore be chosen in due relation to the ultimate scheme for re-decoration. If, for example, it is intended eventually to paint the surface with an oil paint, the initial decoration shall be done either with a material which can be removed easily and completely, or with one which is suitable to receive oil paint.
c) When the surface has properly set and cured and when all excess moisture has dried out from it and from the backing and further movements of moisture will be negligible, painting may be done as specified, it being merely necessary to select an alkali resistant priming
SP62(S&T):1997 paint when oil based paints are used to suit the porosity of the surface. d) However, where it will not be possible to allow the required time for the surface to dry out fully, the decoration in such cases shall be with a porous finish, such as, lime wash, colour wash, cement paint, oil-free distemper or suitable emulsion paint which will allow drying to continue at a reasonable rate through their films. Gloss paint shall not be used until drying is complete. e) If a surface remains persistently damp, the cause shall be examined and the surface suitably treated before attempting to decorate. If remedy is impractical, isolation of affected surfaces by battening out and plastering or boarding may be necessary. Local areas affected by efflorescence shall be cut out and replastered or treated with efflorescence foil of aluminium to prevent the absorption of water from the exterior or penetration of water into the interior (see Annex B). 3.3 Painting and Other Finishes on Both Sides of the Wall Painting new walls or partitions on both sides may result in an increased risk of the paint failure, because the means of escape of water introduced during construction operations are restricted. A difference in porosity of the paint films applied to either side of a wall may result in one side being more affected than the other. The risk is similar and greater when only one side is painted and the other side is sealed by some impermeable treatment, for example, wall tiling. Particularly severe conditions may be met when walls, partitions and ceilings are built of materials that need large quantities of water for curing and setting. For solid walls, partitions and ceilings, the precautions outlined in 3.2 shall be carefully observed.. 3.4 Variation
in Suction
type of paint to be used: Pretreatment
Type of Paint
i) Size bound distemper 1) One coat A coat of clearcole application A coat of size alone will be 2) Two coat application sufficient ii) Dry distemper
A coat of the same distemper thinned with water or petrifying liquid supplied by the manufacturer; Or A coat of sharp colour or primersealer with the addition of finely ground pumice
iii) foil paint
A coat of thin primer or primer-sealer, preferably in consultation with the manufacturer of the paint
iv) Emulsion paint
A coat of the same paint thinned with water or sealers recommended by the manufacturer
v) Cement paint and lime wash
Wet the surface applying paints
before
3.5 Surface Imperfections Imperfections on surface either plastered or otherwise mar the appearance of the paint finish and are especially conspicuous if the finish is glossy. Where smooth finishes are required, particular attention shall be paid to the preparation of surface, including any necessary rubbing down, sealing stopping or filling. Plaster, develop present, in 4.1.1 or their
if improperly gauged and worked, is liable to surface crazing (map crazing). This defect, if shall be treated according to the method given or 4.1.2 beforepainting to prevent the cracks positions from showing in the finished work.
3.6 Growth of Moulds,-Fungi,
Algae and Lichens
a) Characteristics of Mould Growth - The growth of mould is generally associated with continued dampness, either of the material painted or of the surrounding atmosphere. It shows itself in the form of black or varicoloured spots or colonies which may be on, in or beneath the paint film, and are easily recognizable under microscope. Mould growth may occur on almost any type of building material, including plastered surfaces. Some growths may penetrate the underlying plaster or brickwork and become difficult to eradicate. On new work mould growth is unlikely to be encountered. The surface of old work (covered as it may be with wall paper, distemper, or oil paint) may already be infected
The variation in suction characteristics of the surface to be painted require corresponding variation of the priming coat, or in some cases, the use of glue size, petrifying liquid or sealers according to the type of paint to be used. Surfaces which show local variations in suction, as for example, between individual bricks or on patches produced on plastered surfaces by local over-troweliing or by efflorescence, shall be treated by the application of suitable primer. Lime plaster finishes have a moderate suction, which can easily be counteracted by use of sealers. 3.4.1 If the suction is so high or variable that a normal painting procedure is unlikely to give a good finish, one of the following pretreatments shall be applied over the whole surface as a primer, according to the 3.82
SP62(S&T):1997 manent decoration. Other types of paint suitable for early application are cement paints, silicate paints and washable distemper depending on the final decoration in view.
with mould, particularly in premises which have been left unoccupied for sometime or where there has been a persistent damp penetration, and especially where walls have been saturated with water in the course of fire fighting.
cl If the background of the plaster is one likely to contain large amounts of water, for example, new brickwork, concrete or building blocks, no attempts shall be made to apply oil paint (especially gloss finish) until there is every reason to believe that the walls are thoroughly dry. Some indication of the progress of drying can be obtained by means of tests described in Annex C.
Precautions - Exterior surface of porous building materials like brick, stone and cement especially if unpainted, may rendering, develop growths of vegetation ranging from thick beds ~of moss to slimy steaks or patches of algae. Any such growth shall be removed and ammoniacal copper solution (see Note) shall be applied to the surface and allowed to dry thoroughly before painting. NOTEA recommended composition and concentrntion of the ammoniacal wash shnll consist of 71: of copper cnrbonatedissolvedin 80ml ofliquorammoniaunddiluted to 1 1 with water. Alternatively, 2.5 percent magnesium silicofluoride solution may be used.
c>For prevention
of recurrence of mould growth the following procedure shall be followed: 1)
Remove the source of dampness and dry out the walls;
2)
Improve ventilation,
3)
Remove the infected paint~or paper; and
4)
Sterilize the surface antiseptic wash, such as, pentachlorophenate proprietary material and
4 PREPARATION
if necessary; by applying an 2 percent sodium or any other allowed to dry.
OF JMCKGROUND
4.1 For Lime Plaster Surfaces In the case of new lime plaster, precautions with regard to the drying of background shall be observed carefully as these will considerably effect the performance of the finish. In case of new lime plaster, the essential principles with respect to drying of background will be the following:
4 If the background is of a dry type, for example, wood or metal lath, oil paints may be applied with safety after a few weeks of drying, and oil bound distempers even earlier. 4.1.1 In case of old unpainted plaster surfaces any source of dampness in walls and ceilings shall be removed and painting shal be deferred until the plaster has dried. Any major cracks or defects in the plaster shall be cut out and made good. Cracks may be wetted thoroughly prior to filling or priming paint may be applied to the sides of cracks to avoid undue absorption of water and subsequent shrinkage of the filling. For filling, a retarded hemi-hydrate calcium sulphate plaster gauged with about one-third of its volume of hydrated lime may be used. Prior to painting, fine cracks may be filleb with a mixture of oil, putty and white lead or a distemper type of filling composition depending on the finish which is to follow. 4.1.2 In the case previously painted lime plaster surfaces the following precautions shall be observed:
4 Any existing fungus or mould growth shall be completely .removed. The surface shall be thoroughly scraped and rubbed down with bristle brush and sand paper and then washed down with clean water and allowed to dry. A coat of fungicidal wash shall then be applied and allowed to dry after which a further coat shall be applied and left for sometime to dry thoroughly. The surface shall be kept under observation for sometime during drying out period and if the mould recurs, the treatment and drying shall be repeated before painting. The surface shall be brushed with soft bristle brush to remove any dust particles 24 h after the wash. Painting shall becarried out over the fungicidal wash without removing it with water.
4 If possible lime plaster shall be left unpainted for the first few months so as to allow the plaster to carbonate, harden and dry thoroughly. If the plaster has any tendency to craze or crack owing to shrinkage on drying, the movements shall be allowed to occur before the surface is painted so as to enable provision of suitable proprietary treatment. Heating the rooms, if accompanied by good ventilation, will assist drying, but shall be cautiously adopted. Too rapid a drying may damage the plaster by causing undue shrinkage and separation of the plaster coats.
b) If there is any objection to leaving the plaster bare, a temporary decoration of soft distemper may be applied. This may be removed easily at a later date and replaced by a more per-
b) Any existing paint showing extensive tlaking, bleaching or saponification (as shown by stickness or the presence of yellow soapy runs) shall 383
^.
^ . ___.^
. _.,,..-II.
ll--.-.-_._L
,
SP62(S&T):1997 be removed by scraping and washing and the surface allowed to dry completely. It may Ihen be repainted as prescribed for new surfaces.
c) Local defective
patches shall be treated individually by removing all loose or softened paint and bringing forward the treated patches with primer and undercoating before applying a fresh coating over the white areas.
4 Dry distempers and lime wash shall be totally removed prior to repainting. It may sometimes be necessary to wet the surface before scraping. This shall not be overdone and all surfaces shall be perfectly dry prior to the application of any priming coats.
e>Certain
wall and ceiling surfaces may ‘reveal hairline cracks. After complete removal of the existing paint systems and if the lime plaster has cured and dried completely, use at least two coats of any of the primers for the paint system to be adopted. When oil paint is to be used, the primer at least shall be of alkali resistant type. Lime fast pigments shall be used. Water based paint or washable distemper, if in a clean, sound condition, need not be removed if similar coatings are to be applied in the new paint system. By using a mild detergent, the surface may be washed and then after a light sanding it will be ready to receive a fresh coat (with spot priming, if required).
4.2 For Cement and Cement Concrete Surfaces
the alkalinity Annex C.
be
tested in accordance
with
If the surface of the plaster has a patchy appearance and shows wide variations in suction due to efflorescence or other causes, a paint primer shall be applied before application of a regular paint. For old surfaces, unpainted or previously painted, the preparation of background will be the same as in the case of lime plasters. If it is a neutral surface, the application priming paint may not be necessary. 4.4 For Masonry Surfaces All mortarjoints shall be brought to a sound condition before painting operations are started. In the case of new brickwork, painting shall be deferred for at least three months after completion of the masonry work and longer if the weather during this period has become unfavourable for drying. Dirt may be removed by washing with water. In case of old masonry, wherever there is extensive growth of vegetable matter, it shall be treated suitably according to 3.6. Previously painted surfaces of brickwork shall be prepared in the manner given in 4.1.2. 4.5 For Asbestos Cement Surfaces Asbestos cement being based on portland cement will be, specially when new and damp, sufficiently alkaline to attack oil paint. -The asbestos cement sheets are porous, permit suction and also fungus ~growth on them. The necessary precautions in the painting work to overcome there difficulties are as below:
a>The
best way, probably, to reduce the risk of alkali attack is to allow the sheets to weather for some months. The alkali become carbonated on exposure to air, and rain will often wash them off the surface to some extent. With long exposure, however, surfaces become powdery and dirty, and offer poor key for paint unless properly cleaned. Although weathering reduces the risk, it may not entirely overcome the danger of alkali attack.
For new surface it is preferable that the surface is left unpainted for as long as possible to allow drying. Before painting, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed to remove all dirt and remains of loose or powdered materials. Treatment of the surface with solution of acids or salts, such as, zinc sulphate is not advisable as the risk of not reducing the alkali attack appreciably and efflorescence may be increased. -But on old unpainted surfaces, if there is an extensive growth of vegetable material which cannot be removed by brushing, the growth shall be destroyed by applying a wash of ammoniacal copper solution in accordance with 3.6(b). The dead and dry remains of the growth shall be brushed off prior to painting. Any loose or uneven areas or any major cracks in cement concrete or plaster background shall be cut out and made good and the repairs allowed to dry thoroughly before painting is commenced. Minor repairs may be made with cement mortar. Cement plaster or concrete which is previously painted shall be prepared in the same manner as in 4.1.2. 4.3 For Gypsum
may
b) Asbestos cement sheets shall not be treated with chemicals like hydrochloric acid or zinc sulphate to neutralize the alkalis. Also the use of chemicals will often leave powdery deposit on the surface which may interfere with adhesion of paint. The use of hydrochloric acid for cleaning will also make the asbestos cement sheet brittle.
cl Asbestos cement sheets are porous in varying degrees and moisture absorbed will often cause failure of the paint system. It is therefore essential that absestos cement sheets are dry when they are painted. To ensure this each sheet shall be left with both sides exposed to good drying conditions for 7 to IO days before painting.
Plaster Surfaces
Before application of the paint it shall be ensured whether the surface is alkaline or neutral and
384
SP62(S&T):1997
4 When there is a danger of moisture entering the
If the suction is very high and variable that normal painting procedure is unlikely to give a satisfactory finish, suitable pretreatment to the surface shall be given as described in 3.4.1.
sheets from the back owing to dampness or condensation, ‘back painting’ shall be done with an alkali-resistant primer conforming to IS 109 : 1968 or bitumen paint conforming to IS 158 : 1981 or a colourless waterproofer. Usually ‘back painting’ will have to be done before the sheets are fixed and will be particularly necessary where impervious painting system is adopted for painting of the surface. Back painting means coating the back and edges of the sheets with a specified paint to prevent entry of moisture from the back. Whenever impervious paint or paint system is used on the face, ‘back painting’ shall be done. When the backs of sheets are inaccessible for back painting, a porous paint shall be chosen. Porous paints will allow the sheets to breathe so that there is less risk of trouble caused by moisture.
f) It is important to remove and kill any existing fungus growth. For this the surface shall be scraped and rubbed down with glasswool and sandpaper and then washed down with clean water and allowed to dry. A coat of fungicidal wash shall then be applied and left for sometime to dry thoroughly (see 3.6 and 4.1.2). 4.5.1 Preparation
ofhjface
The surface shall be cleaned by rubbing with sandpaper. Any glazed area shall be roughened. Loose powdery material after rubbing shall be brushed off. Wire brushes shall be avoided in cleaning operations as they will lead to difficulties from deposited particles of iron causing iron stains. In the case of previously painted surface the preparation of surface shall be as in 4.1.2, as applicable. Before applying the paint finish, sheets shall be given a final sand papering and then washed down with clean water and allowed to dry thoroughly. If the old paint film is sound, one or two coats only of any of the finishing paints may be applied.
e>Glazed
patches are often visible on asbestos cement sheets and they have to be roughened to provide a key to the paint. More absorbent patches, which are whiter than the rest on the surface, tend to suck medium out of the paint and this is likely to affect the durability of the paint on these patches. The suction is also high and also variable. To overcome this effect pretreatment with primer as mentioned in the paint schedules (see 5) shall be applied over the whole surface. Application of the primer shall be minimtim two coats.
5 APPLLCATION
OF PAINTS
5.1 The application of paints shall generally be as given in Table 14.1 and Table 14.2 along with pretreatments where necessary for corresponding types of paints. The painting operations shall be as given in Chapter 15.
Table 14.1 Schedules for Painting New Calcareous (Clause 5.1)
Surfaces -
Interior -
Sl No.
Final Finish Required
(1)
(2)
i) Whitewash ii) Colour wash
Primer
Coat
Under Coat
Finishing
Coats
(3) One coat of whitewash
(4) -
(5) Whitewash (two coats)
One coat of colour wash
-
Colour wash (two coats)
iii) Distemper
iv)
a) Dry distemper (non-washable)
Clearcole or size, etc
b) Oil bound distemper
One coat of alkali resistant primer
do
Oil bound distemper (two coats) (IS 428
Emulsion paint’)
One coat of emulsion paint
do
Emulsion paint (two coats) [IS 5411 (Part 1) : 19741
v) Flat/Semigloss vi) vii) viii) ix)
paint’)
Filler to be used, if required
One coat of alkali resistant primer
Gloss paint’)
Underdoat as required, filler, if required
do
do
Dry distemper (two coats) (IS 427 : 1965)
Flat/Semigloss (two coats)
: 1969)
paint
Gloss paint (two coats) (IS 133 : 1993)
Chemical resistant paint’)
One coat of the paint
Cement paint’)
One coat of cement paint
Nil
Cement paint (two coats) (IS 5410 : 1992)
Bituminous
One coat of the paint
Nil
Bituminous (IS 9862
paint’)
I) May be thinned according to manufacturer’s
Filler, if required
Chemical, resistant (two coats)
paint
paint (two coats)
: 1981)
recommendation.
385 .
SP62(S&T):1997 Table 14.2 Schedules for Painting New Calcareous (Clause 5.1) SI No.
Primer
Final Finish Required
(2) (1) i) Whitewash
Surfaces -
Under Coat
Coat
Exterior
Finishing Coats
(3) One coat of whitewash
(4) Nil
Whitewash (two coats)
Nil
Colour wash (two coats)
ii)
Colour wash
One coat of whitewash
iii)
Emulsion paint’)
One coat of emulsion paint
Filler, if required
Emulsion paint (two coats) [IS 5411 (Part 2) : 19721
iv)
Flat/Semigloss
One coat of alkali resistant primer
Undercoat as required
Flat/Semigloss paint (two coats) (IS 168 : 1973 and IS 1232 : 1964)
v)
Gloss paint’)
vi)
Chemical resistant paint
One coat of the paint
Cement paint’)
One coat of cement paint
Nil
Cement paint (two coats) (IS 5410 : 1992)
Bituminous paint’)
One coat of the paint
Nil
Bituminous paint (m,o coats) (IS 9862 : 1981 and IS 158 : 1981)
vii)
viii)
paint’)
‘) May be thinned according
do
do
to manufacturer’s
Filler, if required
Chemical resistant paint (two coats)
recommendation.
Where it is desired to tone down the natural colour of the sheets, a wash of green copper (as ferrous sulphate about 0.1 g/ml of water) shall be used. This will give a durable brownish stain, although the finish is unlikely to be uniform.
5.1.1 Normally stopping or filling as required be carried out before any painting is done and care should be taken to see that any cracks between plaster and wood work (for example, skirtings) are securely filled. If such cracks are wide, caulking with hemp or similar material may be necessary to support the filling and prevent it falling away through the gaps. Minor defects are frequently more apparent once the priming or first coat has been applied, and if any further stopping or filling is done over this first coat the area must be brought forward with appropriate paint to restore even porosity over the surface.
Gutters, downpipes, etc, should receive waterproofing coating of bitumen on the inside. For outer surfaces alkali-resistant _porous paint shall be used. For painting asbestos cement sheets, in choosing a paint system for a particular job, the risk of attack by alkali shall be taken into account. Paints which are by themselves highly resistant to alkali attack may be used. But where paints used are not alkali-resistant, at least two coats of alkali-resistant primer shall be applied. The primer shall not only be resistant but also form an impervious barrier so that alkali cannot get through to attack the paint system above.
5.1.2 In regard to painting of asbestos cement sheets, the following points may be noted:
a) Asbestos cement sheets shall be thoroughly dry at the time of painting;
b) Back painting shall be done when an impervious paint system is adopted for the finish, if practicable it shall be done after the face of the sheet has been painted, though, normally back painting will have to be done before the sheets are fixed.
cl For external sheeting an alkali-resistant either porous or impervious ing) may be chosen.
Gloss paint (two coats) (IS 2932 : 1993 and IS 2933 : 1975)
paint (with back paint-
5.2 Maintenance In case of painting relating to maintenance work, the principles given in Table 14.3 should generally be applied.
386
‘SP62(S&T):1997 Table 14.3 Recommended Practice for Maintenance Painting (Clause 5.2) SI No.
Condition of Surface
,
’
Cleaning and Painting Practice (see Notes 1 and 2)
Blistering and Softening
Efflores-
Chalking
Cracking
Flaking
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
9
Nil
Nil
Yes
Nil
Nil
Clean, rub down with abrasive paper, apply one finishing coat.
ii)
Nil
Yes
Yes
Nil
Nil
Rub down the affected surface to bare plaster, allow to dry, touch up with primer coat and then apply required number of coats; and follow by a reviver coat on the entire surface, if required.
iii)
Yes
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Scrap off the soft film, allow the surface to dry completely, touch up with primer coat and then apply required number of coats; apd follow by reviver coat on the entire surface, if necesary.
iv)
Nil
Nil
Nil
Yes
Nil
Rub down and even up the surface with sand paper to remove cracked film. Touch up with primer and apply the required number of coats and follow by reviver coat on the entire surface, if necessary.
v)
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Yes
Remove the paint from the affected portion completely and _follow part of or full schedule of painting as the case may be.
(7)
NOTES 1 In case of anyserious characteristics schedule of painting be followed.
failure mentioned above (except chalking), the paint shall be completely removed and the full
2 There is no effective remedy for efflorescence.
ANNEX
A
(Clause 3.1) CHARACTERISTICS OF CALCAREOUS SURFACES WITH REGARD TO PAINT FINISH A-l CHARACTERISTICS OF LIME PLASTER a) Lime plasters are highly alkaline and hence, until they are thoroughly dry and matured, they are likely to cause alkali attack on oil containing paints and distempers and fading of distempers. The severity of the attack varies with the proportion of soluble alkalis (soda and potash) in lime used, but it is always wise to take full precautions against alkali attack irrespective of the type of lime used. b) Lime plaster finishes have a moderately high suction. This may be encountered by suitable adjustment of the priming coat.
387
c) Lime plaster develops efflorescence quickly than other plaster finishes.
less
d) Lime plaster, if improperly gauged and worked, is likely to develop surface crazing. This defect If present, may be reduced by special treatment as described in 4.1.1 or 4.1.2 to prevent cracks or their positions showing-in the finished painted surface. e) Lime plaster, being softer than other plasters, is liable to mechanical damage in certain solutions. The plaster shall, however, be made to harden more quickly by suitable gauging.
SP62(S&T):1997 A-2 CHARACTERISTICS PLASTER
OF
application of artificial heat. An impervious backing to a thin plaster finishing coat may be as dangerous as one which is too absorbant, since it holds little or no reserve of water and the finish dries quickly.
GYPSUM
4 When the plaster is properly set and hardened and the plaster backing and background are dry, gypsum plasters may be painted successfully with almost any type of paint except cement paint.
The condition of ‘dry out’ is not, usually, apparent at the time the surface is decorated but, if an impervious coat of paint is applied, water from the backing may cause expansion of the partially hydrated plaster producing ridges, blistering and disintegration in the plaster and often causing the paint to loose adhesion.
b) The finishing coat of gypsum plaster can be applied over any type of undercoat; the undercoat does notaffect the painting procedure and it is the composition of the plaster finishing coat that is chiefly to be considered.
c>Plaster
finishes gauged with lime involve a greater painting risk than other plasters, owing to the possibility of alkali attack. The risk is least with retarded hemi-hydrate gypsum plasters but for practical purposes, it is advisable to take precautions against alkali from any plaster to which lime has been added.
s>While,
it is possible to obtain a satisfactory paint on any type of gypsum plaster, provided the appropriate precautions are observed, it is preferable, from the painters point of view that the plaster surface shall not be too highly trowelled and made non-absorbant. A plaster surface which shows a moderate and uniform degree of suction provides a margin of safety inthe matter of paint adhesion. It is particularly desirable to have a surface of this type when emulsion paints, water paints and distempers are to be used, since these adhere less strongly, to impervious surfaces than do oil paints.
4 Neat calcium sulphate plasters have no appreciable chemical action on paint, and the paint defects which occur on them are generally associated with the action of moisture and of efflorescent salts. On anhydrite plaster, patches of efflorescence sometimes develop on areas differing in suction from remainder of the surface and there is a tendency for paint to fail in adhesion at these places. Extra care in priming is needed to secure adequate adhesion and even finish. The technique of ‘priming following the trowel’ helps to overcome the difficulty.
A gloss paint finish shows up any irregularities in the plaster surface, and hence, in places where such a finish is required, the plaster used shall be one which can readily be brought to a smooth level finish. To some extent, this conflicts with the requirements that the plaster shall be trowelled only to the minimum needed to produce a smooth finish and no attempt shall be made to produce a high polish.
e) Retarded hemi-hydrate plasters, when exposed continuously to damp conditions, are liable to ‘sweet out’, a defect characterized by failure to harden or by disintegration. This may occur in various circumstances, for example, when the background of the plaster is permanently damp or when moisture is sealed into the plaster by premature application of an impervious paint film. Care shall be taken to avoid these conditions.
h) Gypsum plasters may conform to IS 2547 (Parts 1 & 2) : 1976. A-3 CHARACTERISTICS RENDERINGS
OF CEMENT
AND
a>New portland
cement concrete and renderings are strongly alkaline, and for this reason oil paints when applied to them are subject for sponification and bleaching. In addition there is a risk of damage by efflorescence.
fi Gypsum plasters are liable to a defect known as ‘dry out’ characterized by friable condition of the plaster surfacing and sometimes affecting the whole thickness of the finishing coat. It occurs when plaster is allowed to dry out too quickly before it had time to combine with all the water needed for setting and hardening processes. A ‘dry out’ can be caused by application of the plaster finish to a highly absorbant undercoat, by conditions favouring by rapid evaporation or by the premature
b) The drying and surface combination cannot be hastened by treatment. Oil paint, therefore, shall not be used on such surfaces until several months shave passed; but earlier decoration may be carried out with cement paints or silicate paints.
388
SP62(S&T):1997
ANNEX
B
(Clause 3.2) APPLICATION B-l
OF ALUMINIUM
FOIL TO CALCAREOUS
PROCEDURE
B-l.1 The area to-be treated shall be cleared of dust and allowed to dry prior to the application by means of a brush of a thin coat of bitumen primer conforming to IS 3384 : 1986. Blown bitumen (penetration 10 to 20) conforming to IS 702: 1988 shall be hot applied by brush at a temperature of 175’C to the surface at the rate of approximately 1.5 kg/m2. The aluminium foil
SURFACES
(0.025 mm thick) shall immediately be unrolled on the surface applied with hot bitumen. All joints shall have at least 50 mm overlap and shall be hot sealed. If required the blown type bitumen at 175’C at the rate of 1.5 kg/m2 may be applied over the aluminium foil as a sealer coat. Thereafter, the aluminium foil or the bitumen sealer coat shall be painted with a plastic emulsion paint or water based paint as required.
ANNEX
C
(Clauses 4.1 and 4.3) TESTS RELATING C-l
TO FITNESS OF PLASTER FOR PAINTING
TEST FOR ALKALINITY
C-l.1 Representative areas of plaster shall be treated with an oil-gloss paint or other alkali-sensitive paint (tinted with prussian blue) and left for at least a week. If at the end the lime there is no sign of sponification or bleaching, conditions shall be reasonably safe for permanent decoration. If on the other hand, bleaching and sponification has occurred, further small areas shall be treated. This shall be repeated until sample areas remain undamaged. C-l.2
Alternative
Procedure
Alkalinity may also be detected by the use of moistened red litmus paper on the surface. If it turns blue the presence of alkaline background may be inferred. C-2 TEST FOR EFFLORESCENCE C-2.1 Small areas of plaster where the efflorescence is most conspicious shall be rubbed down with a suitable abrasive followed by the application of damp (not wet) cloth and left for at least one week. This
389
process shall be repeated, if necessary, until no more salts appear. Conditions shall then be reasonably safe for permanent painting. The test shall be carried out under conditions of warmth and ventilation appro-ximating those of occupational conditions. C-3 TEST FOR DRYNESS C-3.1 It shall be noted that those tests covered in C-l and C-2 are not sufficient since a plastered wall may be neutral and show no signs efflorescence and yet be damp which is liable to cause paint to fail in adhesion. Moisture metre for testing the dryness of walls may be used in deciding when a surface has reached a condition to receive paint. However, no form of test may indicate the condition of more than a small area and since plastered wall seldom dries uniformly, the test shall be repeated at a number of places. Again it shall be noted that deep seated moisture which is not always detected by superficial tests may make its presence felt after the surface is painted.
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
CHAPTER15
PAINTINGJARNISHINGANDALLIED FINISHES(WOODANDMETALS)
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL PART 1 FINISHING OF WOOD AND WOOD BASED MATERIALS
11 BURNISHING ANNEX A PAINTING CHARACTERISTICS OF TIMBERS
ANNEXB MERGINGTYPEGLAZEANDSTAINS
1 GENERAL 2 GENERALCHARACTERISTICS OFWOOD ANDWOOD BASEDMATERIALS 2.1 General 3 DESIGNCONSIDERATIONS
PART 2 PAINTING OF FERROUS METALS IN BUILMNGS
1 GENERAL 2 FACTORY PRETREATMENT
3.1 Detailing of Timber Joinery 3.2 Selection of Coating Materials 4 PAINTINGOFNEWWOODWORK 4.1 Surface Preparation 4.2 Priming 4.3 Stopping and Filling 4.4 Application of Undercoat 4.5 Finishing 5 APPLICATIONS OFCLEARFINISHES 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6
General Procedure Filling Staining Sealing Varnishing
6 FRENCHPOLISH 6.1 Preparation of Polish 6.2 Preparation of Surface 6.3 Application of Polish 7 FINISHING OF WOODBASEDMATERIALS 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5
Plywood Hardboard Particle Board Insulation Board Wood Treated with Preservative
8 PAINTINGSCHEDULE 9 MAINTENANCE 10 FINISHING OF WOOD PRODUCTS WITH NITROCELLULOSE AND COLD CATALYSED MATERIALS 10. I General 10.2 Finishing 10.3 Pulling Cover
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
General Removal of Oil, Grease, Dirt and Swarf Removal of Rust and Scale Phosphate Treatment Intermediate Protective Pretreatments
3 ON-SITEPRETREATMENT 3.1 Untreated Surface 3.2 Surface with Temporary Protective Treatment 3.3 Surfaces Already Pretreated and/or Primed in Factory 3.4 Brush Derusting with Phosphoric Acid 3.5 Solvent Cleaning, etc 4 APPLICATION OFPAINTS 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
General Painting Schedule Maintenance
PART 3 PAINTING OF NON-FERROUS METALS IN BUILDINGS
1 GENERAL 2 SURFACE PREPARATION ANDPRETREATMENT 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9
General Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys Zinc Magnesium Cadmium Copper and Copper Alloys Lead Lead-Tin Tin
3 PAINTING 3.1 General 3.2 Painting Schedule
SP-62 ( S & T ) : 1997
CHAPTER 15
PAINTING, VARNISHING AND ALLIED FINISHES (WOOD AND METALS) 1 GENERAL 1.1 This Chapter deals with painting, varnishing and allied finishes of wood and wood based materials, ferrous metals and non-ferrous metals. For convenience, this Chapter is arranged in three Parts as below:
PART 1 FINISHING
Part 1
Covering finishing based materials
Part 2
Covering buildings
Part 3
Covering painting of non-ferrous buildings
1.1 Wood and wood based materials are finished for decoration and for protection. The finishes are of two types, namely, opaque and transparent. Opaque (pigmented) coatings or paints conceal the grain and colour of the substrate and substitute in their place a surface of an entirely different colour and texture. Transparent finishes on the other hand bring out the grain and colour of the substrate, thereby enhancing its inherent beauty.
2 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS AND WOOD BASED MATERIALS
in
metals in
species of wood and an increasingly large number of wood based panel products often differing from each other in surface characteristics. They may be hard, soft, resinous or porous in varying degrees.
b) Wood is a hygroscopic material and tries to reach a state of equilibrium with the atmosphere in so far as its moisture content is concerned. Changes in moisture content are accompanied by swelling and shrinkage, pronounced across the grain of the wood. Due to moisture movement, the summerwoods swell to a greater extent than springwoods and this sets up stress concentration at the sharply defined iunctions between one -year’s summer growth at the next year’s spring growth and the failure commences about this region. The resulting stresses on the film of finishing material are such as to cause fissures to develop along the grain under adverse circumstances.
Title Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials: Part 1 Operations and workmanship
2338 (Part 2) : 1967
Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials: Part 2 Schedules Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based products with ,nitrocellulose and cold catalysed materials
OF WOOD
4 There are several
Indian Standards are available on
2338 (Part 1) : 1967
4597 : 1968
metals
2 I Genera, .
1.2 Protection furnished by wood finishes is mainly a matter of retarding the absorption and subsequent drying out of moisture from the finished surfaces. By retarding the passage of moisture into the wood, the finish minimizes the changes in dimensions and often inshape. The durable film on a surface finish may also provide protection against spotting and discolouration caused by dust, gases, grease or handling. To a limited extent it takes up abrasion resulting from hard usage. Finishes as a rule do not protect wood from biological decay.
IS No.
of ferrous
OF WOOD AND WOOD BASED MATERIALS
1 GENERAL
1.3 The following wood finishes:
painting
of wood and wood
c) Before painting the wood shall be properly seasoned as per IS 1141 : 1~93 and treated as per IS 401 : 1982 and the moisture content shall be brought to the level as given in Chapter 7 (or IS 287 : 1993) so as to prevent uneven shrinkage during drying which may result in distortion or even in cracks in the paint finish. It is also advisable not to finish excessively drywood. The painting characteristics ofsome of the softwoods and hardwoods are given in Annex A.
393
SP62(S&.T):1997 unduly restrained in tixing. End grain shall receive special care in painting.
4 The cellular structure of wood has a strong influence on the absorption of liquid components of finishes. Non-uniform absorption of vehicle by the wood upsetspigment-binder *-atio; impairing the appearance and life of the coating.
3.2 Selection of CoatingMaterials 3.2.1 Prime Coat
e) plywood, blockboard,
hardboard and particle board have greater dimensional stability than solid wood and provide more uniform surface for finishing.
4 A suitable wood primer shall adhere firm!y to the surface, form a sound foundation for further coating and fulfill special functions. such as, acting as a sealer on porous wood and hardboard.
3 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 3.1 Detailing
b) Wherever the timber has large pores, a priming
of Timber Joinery
with a quick drying varnish of the gold size type conforming to IS 198 : 1978 is desirable. The varnish shall be forced with a brush well into the pores so that the pores are completely filled. The filling of pores shall not be regarded as a substitute for normal priming and shall be followed by a coat of the primer.
Water can find access through unpainted surface or joints and may encourage decay, in all cases where wood surface is in contact with surfaces which are likely to get wet, such as brickwork or concrete; one or two priming coats shall be applied to wood surfaces before fixing to minimize absorption of water (seen/so Chapter 7). Special attention is drawn to the following:
c>Pink
wood primer (see IS 3536 : 1966) or the mixture of white and red lead primer may be used in painting structures containing a slight excess of moisture as they allow minute quantities of moisture to pass through without disrupting it.
a) Window and door frames, flush with the wall face may allow ingress of moisture between the structural walling and the woodwork, and the paint is then likely to fail unless two prime coats are applied to the surface and allowed to dry before fixing.
4 Aluminium
primer may be used for wood having knots and resinous matter. The primer prevents the resin of the wood from bleeding.
b) The rails of gates shall be bevelled to shed water and help to prevent it from entering the joints between vertical and horizontal members.
3.2.2 Stoppers and Fillers For deep holes, plastic wood conforming to IS 423 : 1961 may be used. Far high class work filling operations shall be done over the whole surface using fillers conforming to IS 110 : 1983. For clear finishes, appropriate filler shah be used.
c) Door posts and sash frames resting on steps or sills are liable to absorb water unless the steps or sills are designed and built as to drain away water. Door posts, sash frames and similar joinery shall be adequately primed all over, taking special care to prime any cut surfaces before fixing.
3.2.3 Undercoat
d) Wherever required, in joinery exposed to weather, tenons and other concealed surfaces shall be primed before assembly. Members shall be assembled when the paint is wet. When surfaces are to be glued, priming may not be possible and hence the use of waterproof glue is recommended. Any painted beads or steps shall be primed on the underside and fixed in position while paint is wet. e) In design, consideration shall always be given to the grain direction and effects of shrinkage, swelling and warping which may tend to open joints and break paint tlim. Wide boards shall be fixed centrally or at one edge only, bearing in mind that movement may be sufficient to rupture the paint film or may cause the board and with it the paint to split’ if the movement is
and Fitlishing Coat Materials
Before considering application of undercoat and finishing coat it shall be made sure that those selected are compatible with each other. If a non-elastic finishing coat is applied over elastic primer coat it may lead to cracking or alligatering of the finishing coat and the primer coat may become visible through cracks. If the finishing coat contains a strong solvent, it may attack the primer coat and lead to shrivelling (wrinkling) of the entire paint structure. It is therefore essential to specify and ensure that the various types of paints to be used are compatible with each other and as Indian Standards on paints allow enough latitude for the manufacturer to adjust his materials, it is advisable to consult the paint manufacturer and obtain his guarantee that the paints purchased not only satisfy the specified requirements but are also compatible with each other. As a general rule, it is safer to use primer and finishing paints made by the same manufacturer.
394
SP62(S&T):1997 4 PAINTING
NEW WOODWORK
4.1 Surface Preparation a) Wood that is to be painted should be well seasoned and free from discoloured sapwood and from large resinous or loose knots. If the wood is not properly seasoned, the surface may become uneven on drying and cracks may also develop. Paint applied over discoloured sapwood is liable to become discoloured; resin from knots tends to exude through the paint. Any such unsound portions should, therefore, be cut out and replaced with sound wood.
b) Nails should be punched well below the surface to provide a firm key for stopping.
cl Mouldings should be carefully smoothed with abrasive paper and projecting fibres left after machining should be removed. Quirks need particular attention since paint collects on any rough projections and the finished appearance is then marred.
4 Flat portions should be smoothed off with abrasive paper used across the grain prior to painting and with the grain prior to staining or if the wood is left in its natural colour. Woodwork which is to be stained is sometimes smoothed by scraping instead of by glass papering.
e) Any knots, resinous streaks or bluish sapwood that are not large enough to justify cutting out should be treated with two coats of pure shellac knotting, applied thinly and extended about 2.5 mm beyond the actual area requiring treatment. Aluminium primer may be used in place of shellac knotting. If the area is small and the wood is not highly resinous, it is permissible, instead of applying two coats of knotting, to apply one coat slightly pigmented with aluminium powder. 4.2 Priming
4 If there is a dirt or any other extraneous material this shall be removed. If the woodwork is not already primed, a pi-iming coat shall be applied. In case there is a primer coat but an unsatisfactory one, it shall be rubbed down to barewood and the surface reprimed. Primer shall be applied by brushing.
b) Care shall be taken to primer not only the surface of the wood that will be visible after fixing but also any surface which will be in contact with materials, such as, brickwork or concrete from which the wood may absorb moisture. It would be an advantage to give such surfaces a further coat of primer before fixing.
c) Unless specified otherwise, all joinery work which is intended to be painted shall receive at least two priming coats. It is particularly important that end grains be so treated and, if it is necessary to cut the joinery before fitting, all cut ends shall be painted with two priming coats. 4.3 Stopping and Filling Stopping and filling shall be done after priming. If the surface is not first primed, the filler or stopping may shrink and fall away owing to absorption of some of the binder.
4 Stopping is made to the consistency
of stiff paste and is used to fill holes and cracks while the function of the filler is to level up slight irregularities of the surface. Filler is usually applied with a putty knife and is subsequently rubbed down to a level surface with abrasive paper, pumice stone or other suitable abrasive. For certain work, fillers are mixed to the consistency of thick paint and applied with a brush.
b) The filler coat should be of optimum thickness and should be allowed to fully harden and flatten before subsequent coat is applied. Apply as many layers as necessary allowing the coats to harden and flatten between coats. The primary function of fillers is to -fill the opened cells of the wood in the surface layer. This is necessary to prevent excessive penetration of the finish that is subsequently applied, and to level off the surface of a porous wood to make a smooth top finish possible. 4.4 Application
of Undercoat
Undercoat shall be applied after the surface has been primed, stopped, filled and rubbed down to a smooth surface. Undercoat may be-brushed or sprayed. After drying the coat shall be carefully rubbed down and wiped clean before the next coat is applied. 4.5 Finishing The application of finishing paint varies according to the type of paint employed (see 8). Cleanliness is essential and as far as possible the application should be carried out in normal dry conditions. The finishing coat may be applied either with the brush or sprayed. 5 APPLICATIONS
OF CLEAR FINISHES
5.1 General Clear finishes for wood are generally used for interior surfaces as their durability when used on external surfaces is less than that of pigmented coating. This is mainly because of the destructive action on the clear finishes by the ultraviolet rays present in the sunlight. The ultraviolet radiation is to a great extent absorbed by pigments present in the coating while it may cause considerable damage to clear finishes. L
SP62(S&T):1997 5.2 Procedure For the application of clear finishes, procedure shall generally be adopted:
different penetrating properties and therefore, shall be selected to suit the performance required.
the following
a>Water
stains - Water stains are made with water soluble dyes. They emphasize the grain, especially of softwoods, since they are readily absorbed by the porous portions but less readily by the dense, more resinous portions. They will raise the grain of wood thus spoiling the smoothness of the finish if a highly polished effect is required; this difficulty can be overcome by first wetting the surface with water to raise the grain and then, after drying, smoothing it with abrasive paper before staining. Where it is necessary to provide a temporary staining treatment on wood, that is, damp or unseasoned, water stain is preferable to other types of stain.
a) Filling, b) Staining, c) Sealing, and d) Finishing. 5.3 Filling
4 On hardwood
with large suitable filler may be used.
open
vessels,
a
b) For special stain effects coloured fillers shall be used.
cl A combination
of filler and stain may be used for reasons of cost, that is, to eliminate a separate staining operation. However, the result lacks the grain and colour contrast characteristic of wood stains.
b) Spirit stains -
Spirit stains are solutions of spirit soluble dyes in industrial methylated spirit. Like water stains, spirit stains penetrate more into the softer portions of the wood and so accentuate the grain but they do not cause fibres to swell nor raise the grain. They will dry very quickly and shall be applied quickly and skillfully to avoid patchy effects. If applied to damp wood the dyes in the stains are liable to be thrown out of solution. The surface after staining with spirit stains may be finished in the same way as after treating with water stains.
4 On fine textured woods having minute pores that do not require filling, unfilled drying oils, thin varnishes, lacquer or shellac may be used.
e>Filler
or stain filler shall be heavily applied to the wood surface by hand, using hessian orjute rag across the grain. It may be rubbed down when still wet to get better penetration. After 5 to 10 min it shall be wiped off by hand across the grain followed by light wipe with the grain. Picking out corners and carvings may be done with a rag wrapped around the end of a sharpened wood dowel. The filled surface shall be dried preferably overnight and smoothened with abrasive paper. Wipe withaclean softrag to remove dust, etc.
c>Oil stains
- Oil stains may~be solutions of oil soluble dyes in linseed oil but usually, to give wider range of colours, they consist of insoluble, semi-transparent pigments ground in linseed oil and thinned with turpentine or other solvent. Sometimes wax is added to make the stain less penetrating. Oil stains will give a softer effect than water stains or spirit stains. Generally, they may be finished with glass or fat oil varnish. If wax-polished, the stain shall be first given time to dry hard. If applied to damp wood they are likely to develop a milky effect or bloom. The application of oil stains and varnish will retard the drying of wood. Oil stains do not take on certain resinous or oily woods, such as teak. Sometimes, these woods are penetrated with solvents to remove the greasy matter from the surface prior to oil staining and varnishing.
5.4 Staining 5.4.1 General Staining of wood may be resorted to for indoor fittings and even then only for subsequent clear finishes. The object of staining wood is to darken it as a part of a decorative scheme. If skillfully carried out, staining may be used with good effect to enhance the natural grain or figuring of the wood. The depth and colour produced by staining will depend not only on the concentration of the stain but also on the extent to which it is absorbed by the surface. Stain is readily absorbed by soft porous springwood but comparatively little by the harder and denser summerwood. Hardwoods, being less absorbant, will present less difficulty, the stain may be applied liberally and allowed to remain until sufficient quantity is absorbed, the excess being wiped off, if necessary. The effects produced by knots, resinous portions and other markings may be similarly accentuated. The different types of stains, such as, water, spirit and oil stains have
5.4.2 Wash Coating If grain raising stains have been employed or if it is desired to reduce to a minimum the risk of stain bleeding into top coats and to prevent discolouration of wood by absorption of oil and stains from the filler, a thin coat of shellac or lacquer shall be applied on the stained surfaces before sanding. 396
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 The stain may also be mixed with varnish to produce the combined effect in one operation; the result will, however, be not as satisfactory as when the ‘finishing’ follows as a separate operation after staining. Alternatively, the stain may also be mixed with wax so that after the application in one operation the wax may be polished. Here again the results will not be as satisfactory as in two stage system. 54.3
Prepuration
of Wood,for Staining
4 Surface intended for staining shall be kept scrupulously clean and free from greasy finger marks. It shall be prepared by careful smoothing with fine abrasive paper, used in the direction of grain; scratches across the grain are likely to become stained darker than the rest and so spoil the finished appearance. If water stain is to be used, the surface of the wood shall be wetted with water to raise the grain and then be allowed to dry before finally smoothing.
b) The stained surface shall be varnished,
waxpolished or French polished as required after it has dried. -For reasons of economy, the surface shall be sized before varnishing, in which case it is important to allow the size to dry thoroughly. Where a more durable finish is required two or three coats of finishing clear varnish is recommended.
5.5 Sealing A suitable sealer shall be applied on the filled and sanded surface to prevent absorption by the wood of the succeeding coats of finish and to seal the stain and filler and thus preclude their bleeding into the finish coat. a) Sealer may be sprayed on taking care not to flood the surface. It shall be allowed to dry hard. b) A stain (toner) may be incorporated sealer for special colour.
b) Small cracks or nail holes may be stopped with plastic wood, fine plaster of Paris or other suitable stopping, if water stain or spirit stain is to be used. The stopping shall be rubbed down with fine abrasive paper when hard and touched with a little thinned knotting before staining. Where oil stain is to beused, stopping shall preferably be done after staining using tinted putty or wood filler. C) If necessary, softwood may be treated with hot weak size before staining to prevent undue absorption of stain, but an excess of size should be avoided. To a certain extent the degree of penetration of a stain may be controlled by pretreatment of the absorbant surface with a hot weak size of thinned shellac varnish. Size shall preferably be not used where the stained surfaces are likely to come into contact with water, which may smear it. To control depth of colour, however, diluted stain may be made to soak well into the wood. Where size is used the surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before staining. In general, flat surfaces shall be treated first and mouldings and edges last, that is, reversing the order recommended when applying paint, the object being to avoid double staining along the edges. 5.4.4 4pplication
of Stains
a) Stains may be applied by brushing, and wiping or by spraying. The stain shall be so thinned that it can be applied liberally without overstaining. Care shall be taken, especially an absorbant softwoods, to apply stain evenly and without overlapping. Spirit stains, in particular require careful and quick application as they dry quickly.
with the
c) When fully dry the surface shall be sanded taking care not to cut through at corners and edges. Dust shall be blown off and surface wiped with a clean rag. 5.6 Varnishing 5.6.1 Preparation of Wood for Varnishing Surfaces to be varnished shall be prepared to produce a smooth, dry matt surface. Previous coats of paint or stain, if any, should be allowed to dry and be rubbed down lightly, wiped off and allowed to dry..
4 The operation of varnishing
calls for careful attention to cleanliness. All dust and dirt should be removed from the surface to be varnished and also from the neighbourhood. If the surfaces are dampened to avoid raising of dust, they should be allowed to dry thoroughly before varnishing is commenced. Damp atmosphere and draughts should be avoided. For exterior work. a normal dry day should be chosen. Exposure to extremes of heat or cold or to damp atmosphere will spoil the work.
b) In handling and applying varnish care shall be taken to avoid forming froth or air bubbles. Brushes and containers should be kept scrupulously clean. 56.2
Application
The varnish should be applied thoroughly with a brush and spread evenly over a portion of the surface with short light strokes to avoid frothing. It should be allowed to flow out while the next section is being laid-in. Excess varnish should then be scraped out of the brush and the first section be crossed, recrossed and laid-off lightly. Too much or too little varnish left on the surface will mar the appearance of the finish. The 397
SP62’j&T):1997
I
varnish, once it has begun to set, should not be retouched. If a mistake is made, the varnish should be removed and the work started afresh.
4 Where two coats of varnish are specified, the first should be a hard-drying undercoating or flatting varnish; this should be allowed to dry hard and then flattened down before applying the finishing coat. If two coats are applied, sufficient time should be allowed between coats.
b) When flat varnish is used for finishing,
a
preparatory coat of hard drying undercoating or flatting varnish should be first applied and should be allowed to harden thoroughly. It should then be lightly rpbbed down before the flat varnish is applied. Sections of the work, such as panels, should be cut in clearly, so as to avoid overlapping during application, as this is likely to impart some measure of gloss to partially dried areas, worked up in lapping. On larger areas, the flat varnish should be applied rapidly, and the edges of each patch applied should not be allowed to set, but should be followed up whilst-in free working condition.
7 FINISHING OF WOOD BASED MATERIALS 7.1 Plywood Plywood is similar to solid wood in the finishing characteristics. 7.2 Hardboard Hardboard is made up of fibres which are capable of swelling under the influence of oil paints. Tempered hardboard may be varnished or painted, if required. A suitable treatment to prevent swelling under the influence of oil paints is necessary; one such treatment is to use plastic emulsion paint thinned with water, another is shellac varnish as the first coat and when dry, rub down with fine grade gloss paper and follow with required undercoating and finishing coats as for solid wood. 7.3 Particle Board The surface shall be filled with a thin brushable filler and finished as for solid wood. 7.4 Insulation Board Two thin coats of water based paints shall be applied by spraying.
6 FRENCH POLISH
7.5 Wood Treated with Preservative
6.1 Preparation
7.5.1 Painting Characteristics
of Polish
Pure shellac varying from pale orange to lemon yellow colour, free from resin or~dirt should be dissolved in methylated spirit at the rate of 0.15 kg of shellac per litre of spirit (see IS 348 : 1968). Suitable pigment should be applied to get the required colour. 6.2 Preparation
of Surface
All unevenness should be rubbed down to smoothness with a sandpaper and the surface should be well dusted. Fill up pores in the wood with a filler made of paste of whiting in water or methylated spirit (with a suitable pigment like burnt sienna or umber, if required) other~wise the French polish will get absorbed and a good gloss will be difficult to obtain. 6.3 Application
of Polish
A pad of woolen cloth covered by fine cloth should be used to apply the polish. The pad should be moistened with polish and rubbed hard on the surface in a series of overlapping circles applying the polish sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to give an even surface. A trace of linseed oil on the face of the pad facilitates this application. The surface should be allowed to dry and the remaining coats applied in the same w~ay. To finish off, the pad should be covered with a fresh piece of clean line cloth, slightly damped with methylated spirit and rubbed lightly and quickly with circular motions. The finished surface should have a uniform texture and high gloss.
Wood treated with commonly used water soluble preservatives may be painted satisfactorily afterit is dried. The life of the coating may, in some instances, be slightly less than it would have been on untreated wood, but the loss in durability isnot such as to~offer any practical objection to the use of treated wood for purposes where preservation against decay is necessary and the appearance of painted wood and protection against weathering are desired. Coal tar creosote or other dark oil preservatives tend to bleed through paint unless the treated wood has been exposed to the weather for many months before it is painted. 7.5.2 Treatment Fairly satisfactory results may be obtained on creosoted wood with rough surfaces (sawed or weather-beaten surfaces) by applying exterior water thinned paints, such as casein paints or resin emulsion paints. a) Creosote treated wood shall not be painted with ordinary paint as discolouration of the latter may result. One or two sealing coats of aluminium paint or shellac knotting clear or pigmented with aluminium powder shall be applied before it is finished with other paints. b) In the case of wood treated with other preservatives, such as, copper napthanate, chlorophenol and zinc silica-fluoride, a high quality aluminium primer is desirable.
SP62(S&T):1997 clauses above, as applicable, painting may be withdrawn. The painting schedule covers the finishing of wood and wood-based materials with paints, varnishes, polishes and other organic coatings. The different coats as specified in Table 15.1 and Table 15.2 shall be applied along with stopping and filling where necessary for the corresponding type of finish.
c) Alternatively, advice may also be sought from the manufacturers of these preservatives for information as to the suitable primer that may be applied over there. 8 PAINTING
SCHEDULE
8.1 After the woodwork
is prepared according to the
Table 15.1 Schedules Sl No.
Final Finish Required
(1)
(2)
i) Enamel
ii)
Oil Gloss
Primer (One or Two Coats as Required)
Hat
iv)
Varnish
Undercoat
(3) IS 102
(4)
: 1962
First Finishing Coat
: 1966
IS 3536
IS 133
(6)
: 1993
IS 133
: 1966
IS 3537
: 1993
: 1966
IS 3537
: 1966
IS 3585 102 : :1962 1966 OR IS 3536 : 1966 OR IS 3585 : 1966 -
: 1993
IS 133
: 1966
IS 3% OR IS 524
: 1983
IS 5:::
1968
IS 137
: 1965
IS 3%
Merging type _ glaze~or stains (see Annex B)
IS 137
: 1966
: 1965 : 1966
IS 3%
IS 331: 1975 OR IS 524 : 1983 IS 5%
-
v) Grained Work
Secon~~~ishlng
(5)
: 1993
IS 133
IS 3% : 1966 OR IS 3585 : 1966 IS 102 : 1962 IS 3% OR
iii)
for Finishing New Woodwork-Interior (CZuuse 8.1)
1968
Merging type glaze or-stains
-1s 337
: 1975
IS 5%
1983
IS 5%
1968
IS 331: 1975 IS 5271983 IS 52::
1968
NOTES 1 For finishes (i) and (ii) tillers conforming
to IS 110
2 French polish, when used, shall conform to IS 348
: 1983 may be applied after the prime coat as required. : 1968.
Table 15.2 Schedules for Finishing New Woodwork-Exterior (Clause 8.1) SI No.
Final Finish Required
(1)
(2)
i) Enamel
ii)
Oil Gloss
Primer (One or Two Coats as Required) (3)
Undercoat
(4)
IS 102 : 1962 OR IS 3536 : 1966 IS 3:;. IS 102 IS 3%
: i962 : 1966
OR IS 3585
: 1966
First Finishing Coat
Secon%fzishing
(5)
IS 2932
: 1993
IS 2%
: 1975
IS 3536
: 1966
IS 2932 OR IS 2933
(6)
: 1993
IS 2932
: 1993
: 1975
IS 2%
: 1975
1966 IS 3531 : 1983 (AFRd)
IS 3531 : 1983 (AI&d)
IS 117 : 1964 OR IS 124 (Part 3)
IS 117
: 1979
OR 1962 IS 12?z IS 128 : 1962 iii) iv)
Flat Varnish
7
<--------------Proprietary m&e&& to b used----_________________> IS 524 : 1983 IS 524 : 1983
: 1964
IS 12Y(PaIt 1979 IS 1::
1962
IS 12?
1962
3)
: I u
IS 524 : 1983 OR IS 525 : 1968 v) Grained Merging type IS 524 : 1983 IS 524 : 1983 Work glaze or stains (see Annex B) NOTE - For finishes (i), (ii) and (iii) fillers conforming to IS 110 : 1983 may be applied after prime coat as required. -
399 _:
SP62(S&T):1997 quired depends on the non-volatile the material used.
9 MAINTENANCE 9.1 The principles given in Table 15.3 shall generally be adopted for maintenance work. All unsound work should be burnt off or otherwise removed and brought forward as new work.
c) For wood finish with cold catalysed material, the sealer used may be single pack like shellac sealer or two pack like cold catalysed sealer. In both cases the application is by spray. The sealer is allowed to dry hard normally overnight, and sanded with ‘0’ grade flint paper taking care not to cut through the edges and corners. The dust is blown off and surface wiped with a rag.
9.2 The surface should be cleaned and rubbed down with pumice stone or abrasive paper. All holes and cracks should be prepared for stopping by touching them up with primer paint, with undercoat paint; when dry the stopping should be completed with a suitable filler and the appropriate paint schedule as given in 8 should then be applied.
4 If the sealer shows uneven surface necessitating levelling off at this stage a transparent, nitrocellulose based wood filler is used. It is applied with a putty knife in straight strokes, air dried for 1 h and dry sanded with ‘0’ grade flint paper.
10 FINISHING OF WOOD PRODUCTS WITH NITROCELLULOSE AND. COLD CATALYSED MATERIALS
10.2 Finishing
10.1 General
4 Nitrocellulose
based two-pack material (a lacquer and an activator) has limited pot life after mixing. Therefore, only a limited amount required for use shall be mixed and used within the recommended time.
The sequence mentioned in 5.2, namely filling, staining and sealing shall be followed except as modified below: a) The filler is air dried overnight and levelled off by dry sanding with ‘0’ grade flint paper.
b) It may be applied over the sealer, or in many
b) The sealer should be nitrocellulose based if the final finish is of the same material and is applied by spray. The number of coats re-
cases, directly over the filler. The application is by spray and the number of coats depends on the non-volatile content of the material used.
Table 15.3 Recommended Sl No.
content of
Practice for Maintenance (Clause 9.1)
Condition of Surface
Cleaning and Painting Practice
A
f Blistering
Painting
7
Cracking
Checking
Chalking
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Clean, rub with sand paper, apply one reviver coat
ii)
Nil
Nil
Yes
Nil
Blat down to remove checked film, clean, apply one or two reviver coats
iii)
Nil
Yes Localized
Nil
Nil
Rub down with steel wool/sand paper to remove cracked/crazed film, touch up with primer where damaged, apply two coats of finishing
iv)
Yes Localized
Nil
Nil
Nil
Scrap and rub down (with sand paper) the spot to bare wood, feather out the edge of paint, allow the surface to breathe out; touch up with primer; apply two coats of undercoat; if necessary
v)
Yes Localized
Nil
Nil
Yes
Treatments (i) and (iv) combined
vi)
Yes Localized
Nil
Yes
Nil
Treatments (ii) and (iv) combined
vii)
Yes
Yes
Nil
Nil
Completely remove paint to localized follow full schedule
viii)
Nil
Yes Deep
Nil
Nil
do
Yes Heavy
Nil
Nil
Nil
do
ix)
NOTE-Quality
of paints for interior and exterior as in Table 15.1 and Table 15.2.
400
deep base wood and
SP62(S&T):1997 c) In case of nitrocellulose finish, it is recommended that at a time two coats are sprayed wet on wet, with 15 to 30 min air drying between coats; air dried over-night and wet flatted with ‘400’ grade abrasive paper and soap water before spraying the next two coats. In place of sealer the finish coats may be applied after checking that it has no effect like grain raising or bleeding of woodfiller. In addition to the sealer coat, one coat of finish is considered adequate for furniture whereas two or three coats of finish are required for radio cabinets.
and a circular motion is used. This works out all the marks in the film and-the final straightening up motion~leaves a bright and full finish.
cl The pull over solution leaves some solvent in the finish and hence at least I2 h air drying is required before handling and packing. However, the fittings may be fixed during the period.
4 For best results pulling over is followed up with a polish. 11 BURNISHING
d) In the case of cold catalysed type of finish, in place of the sealer, a coat of finish may be applied after checking that it has no effect like grain raising or bleeding of woodfiller. Each coat of finish is air dried for at least 4 h so as to be dry enough for subsequent operations. Before re-coating it shall be ensured that the surface is clean and dry. In addition to the sealer coat, one coat of finish is considered adequate for furniture whereas two or three coats of finish are required for radio cabinets. e) After the application of the final coat the film is allowed to age at least for 24 h.
The best appearance may be obtained from nitrocellulose and cold catalysed type of finishes by means of burnishing.
b) Levelling before burnishing is advisable.
The film is wet sanded with a fine abrasive paper (400 grade) and soap water. The sanding is done along the grain taking care not to cut through edges and corners.
c>A
suitable burnishing compound is used for further levelling. The application is by pad.
4 A final light rub with a flexible shaft polishing machine using a soft lambs wool mop gives the best results. Small items which can be easily manipulated may be mopped on a stationery polishing machine. Care shall be taken to avoid burning the finish by local overheating.
10.3 Pulling Cover
4 Pull off solution may be used to level off only the nitrocelluiose finish. However, if burnishing and polishing is going to be done this operation may be eliminated.
e>In
case of semiglossy or matt finishes with nitrocellulose based materials burnishing is not required. However, wet sanding with 400 grade paper and soap water may be done to obtain a smooth even surface.
b) The application is by pad. The pad should be moderately damp when theoperation is started. The initial application is along the grain and then as the pad dries, the pressure is increased
ANNEX
A
(Clause 2.1) PAINTING
CHARACTERISTICS
A-l Some of the soft and hard woods given in A-l.1 and A-l.2 are resinous or show oil exudation occasionally and hence they require special treatment. In general hardwoods given in A-l.3 do not require filling as their pores are less than about 100 microns in diameter or are filled with gum. A-l.1 The following softwoods are resinous and may exude resin through paint films:
OF TIMBERS
Trade Name
Botanical Name
Chir
Pinus roxburghii Sargent
Cypress
Cupressus~torulosa
Deodar
Cedrus deodara Loudon
Kail
Pinus wallichiana A.B. Jacks
Spruce
Picea smilthana Boiss
Don
SP62(S&T):1997
Trade Name
Botanical Name
Trade Name
A-l.2 The following hardwoods may show oil exudation occasionally: Botanical Name
Axelwood
Anogeissus
Birch
Betula spp
latifolia wall
Gurjan
Dipterocarpus
spp
Boxwood
Buzus spp
Hollong
Dipterocarpus vesque
macrocarpus
Gardenia
Gardenia spp
Haldu
Adina cardifolia Hook F
Piney
Kingiodendron pinnatum (Roxb.) Harms
Kaim
Mitragyna parvifolia Korth
White cedar
Dysoxylum malabaricum - Bedd
Red sanders
Pterocarpus
Satinwood
Chloroxylon Swietenia DC
A-l.3 The following hardwoods do not require filling because their pores are less than about 100 microns in diameter or are filled with gum:
ANNEX
(Roxb.)
Santalinus Linn. F
B
(Tables 15.1 and 15.2) MERGING B-l
MERGING
TYPE GLAZE
although not normally classed as water stains, are often used to darken wood, such as floor boards. Potassium permanganate is a well known example.
TYPE GLAZE
B-l.1 Merging type glaze. which faciltates the blending of various colours after application is a transparent pigment bound with a medium having good tlowing properties, thinned with volatile solvent.
B-2.4 Spirit stains are solutions of spirit soluble dyes in industrial methylated spirit.
B-2 STAINS
B-2.5 Oil stains may be solutions of oil-soluble dyes in linseed oil but usually to give a wider range of colours, they consist of insoluble, transparent semipigments ground in linseed oil and thinned with turpentine or other solvents. Sometimes, wax is added to make stain less penetrating.
B-2.1 Stains are soluble fast dyes or transparent pigments, dissolved or suspended in an oil, water or spirit medium. The consistency shall be such as to ensure complete penetration. B-2.2 Stains are supplied either in liquid or as powders to be dissolved in the suitable medium as mentioned in B-2.1. If the medium is in oil, driers and thinners may be needed.
B-2.6 Oil stains are sometimes supplied mixed with varnish and sold as varnish stains, ,but where it is desired to enhance and not conceal the appearance of wood, better results can be obtained by staining and varnishing separately.
B-2.3 Water stains are solutions of vegetable dyes in water. Solution of certain chemicals in water,
PART 2 PAINTING
AND STAINS
OF FERROUS
1 GENERAL 1.1 Painting of ferrous surfaces is preceded by pretreatment at the factory or at site. Steel is normally supplied covered with oil and grease either as a protective layer to prevent corrosion or as a left over from machining and handling. The customary procedure of
METALS
IN BUILDINGS
applying the so called ‘shop coat’ of paint after fabrication which consists of wiping the surface with oily rag or cotton waste left over from other operations, defeats the purpose of painting at the start. Any paint coat applied on greasy or oily steel surfaces will lack proper adhesion and will lead to the failure of paint film. It is therefore necessary to have pretreatment which
402
SP62(S&T):1997
b) Chemical Cleaning -
Where descaling is required to be done chemically, pickling with sulphuric or hydrochloric or phosphdric acids is necessary. Pickling shall be carried out as per IS 6005 : 1970.
eludes removal of oil, grease, dirt, rust, scale, swat-f, etc, from the steel surfaces before painting is commenced. 2 FACTORY
PRETREATMENT
2.1 General
2.4 Phosphate
Pretreatment and priming of ferrous metals under controlled conditions at the factory gives the best results and it is therefore advisable to adopt this method wherever possible. The object of such a treatment is to preserve and maintain metal surface during transport, storage and erection and to minimize the ‘on-site’ preparation for final painting.
The most widely used pretreatments, for preparing metal surfaces for painting, are the numerous hot-tank phosphating processes. Details of phosphating are covered in IS 6005 : 1970. 2.5 Intermediate
of Oil, Grease, Dirt and Swarf
Generally, the application of any coating, lining material, adhesive or paint, requires as its first essential a clean surface, while dealing with painting of ferrous metals. Grease removal shall be carried out either with solvent type or alkali type degreasing agents.
3 ON-SITE 3.1 Untreated
Pretreatments
PRETREATMENT Surface
a>
Temporary protective materials applied to steel sheets to protect during storage, transport and erection should be removed with suitable solvent as a preliminary to other preparatory treatments.
2.2.1 Solvent Cleaning A number of proprietary brands of solvent, alkaline and emulsion cleaners are availAble; whenever these are used, manufacturers instructions shall be followed. Some of the processes are petroleum-solvent cleaning, trichloroethylene cleaning, alkaline cleaning, etc. For details of procedure for carrying out these processes, IS 6005 : 1970 may be referred to. 2.3 Removal
Protective
After the preparation of surfaces and prior to application of paint finishes, a number of intermediate treatments such as red oxide or zinc rich primer may be applied to give additional protection against corrosion. Etching or wash primers may be used; this is based on a deposition of acid-bound resinous film on ferrous surface which would enhance the adhesion of subsequent paint coatings.
Application of a priming coat should follow pretreatment without delay. Subsequent coats of paint may be applied on the site after cleaning down any damaged parts and touching up with the primer paint. 2.2 Removal
Treatment
b) Lubricants
of Rust and Scale
When steel leaves a rolling mill it has a firmly-adhering skin known as ‘mill-scale’. On exposure to the atmosphere, the mill-scale absorbs moisture, works itself loose allowing moisture to penetrate between scale and steel resulting in rusting. Therefore, derusting and descaling are essential prior to application of paint. The problem is much worse for old steel compared to new steel surfaces. Generally, derusting and descaling may be carried out mechanically or chemically. a) Mechanical Cleaning - This may be done by scraping, chipping, wire brushing, rubbing with abrasive paper or steel wool, by flame cleaning and sand or shot-blasting. For complete removal of all types of mill-scale, the only really efficient mechanical method is sand- blasting or shot-blasting. Flame cleaning is carried out with the help of a special oxy-acetylene torch; but it is not suitable for use in confined spaces due to fire risk. 403
used during the rolling of steel sheets may be particularly tenacious and may have undesirable effects on paint adhesion. The use of abrasive paper with suitable solvent, is effective in removing the worst effects of these materials. Where joints are welded, soldered or brazed, care should be taken to remove fluxing material before painting. This may be effected with a 10 percent solution of formic acid followed by thorough washing or with suitable solvents.
c>In
case of heat hardened alloys, the surface shall be treated by mechanical roughening combined by degreasing. Such work should be carried out as thoroughly as possible to ensure that the paint will adhere well and give protection and durability. The surface should be well scraped or swabbed with a suitable solvent and then abrased with an abrasive paper and finally rinsed with successive portions of clean solvent on clean swabs.
4 Proprietary
compositions may be used as recommended by the manufacturer to degrease and passivate or degrease and etch the surface; but care should be taken unless specified otherwise, to remove all residues by wiping or washing where possible and to ensure that the compositions do not contaminate other parts of the structure.
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 3.2 Surfaces Treatment
Containing
Temporary
Protective
4.3 Schedules The selection ofpaints and painting system shall be in accordance with Table 15.4. 4_4 Maintenance
Temporary rust protective treatment shall be removed. Descaling may be done by mechanical means such as hand-scraping or shot-blasting or flame cleaning. Where only derusting is to be done, the mechanical or chemical method may be followed.
Maintenance
4.4.1 Renovation
3.3 Surfaces Already Pretreated and/or Primed in Factory
a) Where specification
wise the filmis in good condition wipe off chalked film with wet rag or wash with water, remove gloss, allow the water to dry off and apply one coat of finishing all over the surface. If the chalking is in patches, apply one coat at the chalked areas and after it is dry, apply another coat all over the surface.
3.4 Brush Derusting with Phosphoric Acid
2) If fine chalking and/or hair line cracking
Apply phosphoric acid with a brush or swab, rubbing where needed with a steel wool pad, to assist rust removal. Keep the surface well wetted with phosphoric acid.
have appeared and the film underneath is firm, without symptoms of rust, cut the paint film by wet rubbing, remove all the cracked film, wash, allow water to evaporate and apply one or two coats of finishing paint or enamel. If the defects are noticed as patches, after cutting down the film in these patches, apply one coat of the finishing paint/enamel on this area and then follow with a coat all over the surface.
3.5 Solvent Cleaning, etc
4 APPLICATION
of painting is known
1) If the paint film is only chalking and other-
They should be inspected and damaged areas should be thoroughly degreased by clean solvent swabbing; corrosion products should be removed and touched up with a coat of wash or etching primer on suitable chemical pretreatment solutions. The rectified areas should be brought forward with appropriate primer, putty, finish coats, etc.
Solvent cleaning, mechanical cleaning, primers shall be done as in 2.2.1.
schedule shall be as in Table 15.5.
etching with
OF PAINTS
4.1 General Immediately after the pretreatment process, the first primer coat shall be applied within the shortest possible interval, unless rust proofing or other interior process is employed. This is particularly important in areas with high humidity.
3)
4.2 Painting
If the cracking is deeper, with or without flaking, reaching up to the primer, without symptoms of rust and the primer coat is in good condition then proceed as follows: If the defect is all over the surface, cut down the top two coats to the primer by wet rubbing, allow water to dry off, touch up the primer coat and build up the entire film by applying fillers, undercoating and finishing coat as required.
4 Primer coats may be applied by spray or brush, preferably the latter working in the paint into the fine dents and ensuring a continuous film without ‘holidays’. After the first coat is dry apply the second coat.
If the defect is only in patches, cut down the top coat only in these areas feathering the top coat, build up film in these patches ending with one finishing coat and apply a coat of finish all over the surface.
b) Filler Coats - After the second primer coat is hard and dry, sand the surface without scratching or in anyway damaging the primer coats. Fill the deep dents with paste filler using good putty knife pressing firmly into the dents. Allow to hard dry and cut down by wet rubbing to a smooth finish. Apply as many coats of filler as required.
cl Undercoats may be applied by brush or spray after rubbing down the entire surface. Allow it to hard dry and rub dow,n cutting to a smooth finish.
4 Finishing
coat may be applied by brush or spray. Gently remove the gloss of the entire surface.
404
4)
If blistering with or without flaking is noticed and the primer coat is sound, follow the procedure in 4.4.1 (a)(3).
5)
If rust spots are noticed in certain areas only with or without any other symptoms of breakdown, cut down the film in those spots to metal, feathering off the top coats, apply two coats of primer and build up the film following the schedules. Rough sand the entire surface, wash off if necessary and apply a finishing coat.
SP62 ( S& T ) : 1997 Table 15.4 Painting Schedules for Ferrous Surface (Clause 4.3) St No.
Final Finish Required
(1)
Primer
Undercoat
(3)
(2)
Finishing Coat
(4)
Number and Thickness
of Coating
(6)
(5) A FORINTERIORS
i)
Full gloss (enamel gloss)
IS 102 : 1962 (see Note) IS 207 : 1964
IS 133 : 1993 (B)‘) IS 2933 : 1975 (B, S)‘)
For optimum results, two coats of primer, IS 133 : 1993 (B)‘) IS 2933 : 1975 (B, S)‘) one undercoat, and two finishing coats are recommended. The total film thickness shall be not less than 100 microns.
ii)
Oilgloss
Same as for (i)
: 1993 (B) OR IS 144: 1950 (S)
iii)
Eggshell gloss
IS 102 : 1962 (see Note)
IS 137
: 1965
-
iv)
Flat
IS 102 : 1962 (see Note)
IS 137
: 1965
IS 137
v)
Metallic finishes
Same as for(i)
-
IS 2339 : 1963 (B) IS 2339 : 1963 (S) OR Bituminous aluminium paints
vi)
Bitumen
Same as for(i)
-
IS 158
Same as for (i)
IS 133
Same as for (i)
: 1965
: 1981
Same as for (i) One coat of primer and two finishing coats; if bituminous aluminium paint is used, three coats will be necessary.
Three coats of bitumen
shall be used.
B FOR EXTERIORS vii)
Full gloss
IS 102 : 1962 (see Note)
viii)
Oil gloss
Same as for (vii)
-
Eggshell gloss
-
-
x)
Flat
IS 102 : 1962 (see Note)
-
-
-
xi)
Metallic finishes
Same as for (vii)
-
IS 2339 : 1963 OR Bituminous aluminium paint
One coat of primer and two finishing coats; if bituminous aluminium paint is used, three coats will be necessary.
ix)
: 1975’)
IS 2933
: 1975’)
IS 2933
IS 117 : 1964 OR IS 128 : 1962
For optimum results, two coats of primer, one~undercoat and two finishing coats am recommended. The total film thickness shall not be less than 1BO micron. Same as for (vii)
-
NOTE -Paint primer conforming to IS 102:1962 may be used only where special precautions and where satisfactory drying conditions is ensured before applicationof further coats. ‘) Each of these Indian Standards cover both undercoating
for drying of the primer coat are taken
and finishing paints, and paints appropriate for the function shall be used.
(B) is brushing. (S) is spraying.
6)
Fresh painting should be done after scraping off the entire old paint film if the rusting is noticed all over the sur-
44.2
face, or -
the rusting is severe; or
-
cracking and blistering has damaged the primer coat exposing the metal and is noticed all over the surface; or
-
the paint film has eroded badly.
b) Where the specification
of painting is not known - follow the procedure given in 4.4.1 (a), Renovate with best quality materials to perform under the conditions of exposure. 405
Removal of Old Paint for Repainting a) Caution should be exercised while removing old paint. Paint removers of the alkali based or solvent type are available and if proper care is not taken, they may do more harm than good. While washing down after using alkali type, other structures, such as wood, may be adversely affected. For the solvent type, the fume and fire hazard is to be counted. They contain waxes and removal of last traces of wax is essential as otherwise adhesion of paint coats may be adversely affected.
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 Table 15.5 Recommended SI No.
Conditions
Cleaning
of Service h
f Rusting
(1)
Painting Practice for Maintenance (Clause 4.4)
Cracking
(2)
Work
and Painting Procedure
\ Checking
Chalking
(6)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0
Nil
Nil
Nil
Yes
Clean; rub down with sand paper; apply one reviver coat
ii)
Nil
Nil
Yes, fine checking
Nil
Flat down to remove checked film; clean; apply one or two reviver coats
iii)
Nil
Yes, not reached the surface
Nil
iv)
Yes
Nil
Nil
Yes
Treat as in 4.4.1 (a)(5)
a) Localized
Nil
Nil
Yes
Treat as in 4.4.1 (a)(5)
b) Localized
Nil
Yes
Nil
Treat as in 4.4.1 (a)(5)
c) Localized
Yes
-
-
Completely schedule
v)
vi)
Treat as in 4.4.1 (a)(2)
remove
paint to bare metal and paint to full do
Heavy rusting
(see Note) shall be applied to the surface and allowed to dry thoroughly before repainting.
b) Burning off old paint carried out with caution is better than using paint removers.
c) Removal of old paint by mechanical method of
NOTE - A recommended composition and concentration of ammoniacal wash shall consist of 7 g of copper carbonate dissolved in 80 ml of liquor ammonia and diluted to I 1with water. Alternatively, 2.5 percent of magnesium silicofluoride solution nay be used.
chipping and scraping is the best. 4.4.3 ~Removal oj’ Fungi Exterior paint surfaces may develop fungi which shall be removed and ammoniacal copper solution
PART 3 PAIWTING OF NON-FERROUS
METALS IN BUILDINGS
There-has also been an increase in the use of nonferrous metals, particularly zinc and ,aluminium in various ways as protective coating on steel. If unpainted, such metallic coatings afford protection of the steel under most conditions for periods related to the thickness applied. If properly painted and adequately maintained even greater protection is conferred.
1 GENERAL 1.1 The increasing importance and use of non-ferrous metals as structural materials in variety of conditions and environments had led to an increase in the forms which require painting. Zinc, copper and lead when used in sheet form for roof coverings are rarely painted and in other forms, such as pipes and fittings the areas to be painted are small. The development and extension of the use of non-ferrous metals fin the form of claddings and linings for frame buildings and in light gauge sections as structural members call for an appreciation of their painting requirements. Zinc, copper, lead, pure aluminium and some aluminium alloys require painting only when in contact with corrosive materials or atmospheres or for decoration.
Zinc in sheet form or galvanized steel, when new, always requires degreasing before painting, and to ensure adequate adhesion of the paint film, the surface should be modified by pretreatment, or by about three months weathering in a clean atmosphere or as alternative, a special primer may be used. 2 SURFACE PRETREATMENT
The original bright metallic appearance of the nonferrous metals, may be preserved by the use of clear finishes, but frequent renewal and maintenance of the coating is necessary. 406
PREPARATION
AND
2.1 General Pretreatment and priming of non-ferrous metals under controlled conditions at the factory gives the best
~~~~_~
_.. ^_._...-
--
SP62(S&T):1997 results and it is, therefore, advisable to adopt this method wherever possible. Application of suitable priming coat should follow the pretreatment without delay. Subsequent coats of paint may be applied onsite after-cleaning down the primer and touching up with the primer paint any damaged parts. Pretreatment processes are dealt with under two heads for each substrates, namely factory treatment and on-site treatment. For surfaces already factory pretreated, primed, application of further coats of paint should be followed in the usual manner after suitable rectification of damaged areas, if any, arising out of during storage and/or handling. 2.2 Aluminium
and Aluminium
4 Casting in aluminium
alloys may often be painted without any pretreatment other than degreasing.
e>For
unpainted aluminium surfaces, when they acquire a surface layer of corrosion products, it shall be removed.
2.3 Zinc 2.3.1 Factory Treatment The surface should be freed of oil, grease or any foreign contaminant by means of solvent-cleaning method before applying any of the treatments recommended below: a) Crystalline zinc phosphating
Alloys
treatment,
b) Chromate treatment, c) Aqueous chromic organic treatment, and
2.2.1 Factory Pretreatment
d) Etching or wash primers. This covers the following:
4 Mechanical
treatment - Mechanical treatment can be done by hand or~power wire brushing or other abrasive treatment or sand blasting.
2.3.2 On-Site Pretreatment
surface should be thorough!y degreased. The use of mordants containing copper is not recommended.
b) If the zinc sheet or galvanized steel is allowed
Solvent cleaning, where possible, should be followed by chemical treatment or anodic treatment.
to weather up tii, Lhebright spangles disappear before painting, it attains a condition suitable to receive paint without the necessity of degreasing or etching. Galvanizing alone, of reasonable thickness, is sufficient to protect the steel from corrosion for some years under normal exposures.
cl Chemical treatment-
4 Anodic treatment-This
includes treatment& either chromic or sulphuric acid electrolyte. Anodic treatment should not be used on assemblies of dissimilar metals.
2.4 Magnesium Chemical treatment at site is not easy and, therefore, factory treatment is preferred. 2.4.1 Factory Pretreatment
a) For metal exposed to indoor (mildly corrosive) conditions, mechanical (abrasive) treatment, solvent cleaning, alkaline solution treatment and acid pickling are suitable.
2.2.2 On-Site Pretreatment This is applicable to surfaces untreated or protected with a temporary protection and details are as below:
b) For exposure to higher degree of corrosion (outdoor), surface preparation by a suitable conversion coating treatment such as dichromate method shall be adopted. Certain anoidic treatments may also be considered.
Temporary protective materials applied to aluminium should be removed with a suitable solvent. Lubricants used in rolling of aluminium sheet should also be removed. The use of abrasive paper wetted with a suitable solvent is effective in removing the effects of these materials. Flux of welded joints should be removed with IO percent solution of formic acid followed by thorough washing or with-suitable solvents.
c) In the case of heat hardened alloys, the surface shall be treated by mechanical combined with degreasing.
roughening
Surfaces Untreated
a>The
b) Solvent cleaning -
The chemical treatment could include alkaline etching, sulphuric acid etching, phosphoric acid cleaners, acid flouride deoxidizer, crystalline phosphate treatment, amorphous phosphate treatment, carbonate chromate treatment, amorphous chromate treatment, etching or wash primers.
-
c>Wash
or etching primers may also be ~applied on previously cleaned surfaces.
2.4.2 On-Site Pretreatment The most satisfactory method is to apply an etching primer after degreasing by solvent cleaner or preferably an etch cleaner based on phosphoric acid. The combination of etching primer and etching pretreatment gives better results than if either of them were used alone.
407
SP62(S&T):1997 2.5 Cadmium Similar to zinc except that weathering is not required. 2.6 Copper and Copper Alloys The surface should be thoroughly cleaned with an organic solvent and then roughened with fine abrasive paper and applied with one coat of etching primer. Where factory preparation is possible, an electrodeposited coating of tin is useful in preparation for painting.
chromate or kaolin in an oil the content being between 50 weight and free from waterand chlorides.
Bitumen or bituminous pastes and rubber based jointing compounds are used for other metals. In all cases the joint should be made while the jointing compound is still wet, the metal having been previously prepared and primed. 3.2 Painting Schedule
2.7 Lead New lead surface should be weathered or pretreated before painting, the latter being preferable because of interaction between lead and many conventional paints. The application of etching primer is satisfactory as a pretreatment of bright lead. An alternative is to treat the surface with dilute solution of otthophosphoric acid (about 20 percent by volume) followed by thorough washing and drying. 2.8 Lead Tin~(Including
weight of barium varnish medium, to 60 percent by soluble sulphates
a>Where
metals are to come into contact with alkaline materials like concrete, etc, they should be given one or two coats of bituminous paint, and where the conditions are persistently damp, even thicker coatings are desirable. Similar treatment is necessary if the metals are to come into contact with hardwoods. Only copper appears not to require this protection.
b) For aluminium, zinc chrome or a modified zinc
Terne Plate)
The main preparation required for these surfaces is through degreasing with white spirit or other suitable solvent, followed by a washing with hot water. An etching process recommended for maximumadhesion is to swab with a solution of 5 parts of concentrated hydrochloric acid with 95 parts methylated spirit until a~crystalline pattern is seen (about 10 s) and washed in hot water. 2.9 Tin
chrome paint even with an etch primer, should be used. For subsequent coats, normal types of oil, oleoresinous or synthetic resinous paints may be used provided that they are compatible ~with the priming paint. Bituminous paints may also be used.
c>Copper,
Lead - The first coating or primer may be unpigmented resin varnish or an etching primer. If alight coloured finish is required a coat of aluminium paint over the resin varnish may be applied. The finishing coats are as given for aluminium.
The painting of tin applied by methods other than hot dipping present no difficulties, but adhesion may be defective on hot dip coating which should be roughened or treated with etch primer prior to painting.
d) Zinc and Zinc Coated Metals - After pretreat-
3 PAINTING
d Magnesium - The medium for painting mag-
3.1 General
4 Certain
non-ferrous metals, for example, aluminium, zinc, cadmium, copper, lead and tin are capable of resisting corrosion without painting under natural exposures. Anodized aluminium is quite resistant to corrosion.
b) Jointing compound is needed to insulate metal to metal contact, specially if they are exposed to damp conditions and the metals are dissimilar. Jointing materials materials.
are usually
paste-like
When dissimilar metals are used in conjunction, a jointing compound containing chromates are preferred where aluminium or magnesium is one of the metals. A typical jointing compound consists of equal parts by
ment, the subsequent aluminium.
coatings are as given for
nesium should be highly resistant to water and alkali; for example, a stoving or air-drying medium, such as that based on oil/phenolic resin varnish. The primer should not contain graphite, lead pigments or metallic lead, bronze or aluminium; it should however contain zinc chromate in appropriate percentages suitable to the exposure conditions; for normal exposure 20 percent by weight of the dry paint film. 3.2.1 Painting systems could be by ordinary or sophisticated methods; like roller coat, electrostatic spraying, air drying, force drying~or stoving. 3.23 Maintenance painting should be done after removing the old paint; for this organic solvent type paint remover is preferred. If paint has flaked only in certain patches, only such patches may be removed. After removal of old paint, priming should be done as in 3.2.
and finishing
CHAPTER 16
WATERSUPPLYANDDRAINAGE
CONTENTS
2.3 Gradients and Pipe Sizes 2.4 Choice of Materials for Pipes
1 GENERAL PART 1 WATER SUPPLY
2.5 Drainage Pipes
1 GENERAL
2.6 Manholes
2 MATERIALs 2.1 Pipes 2.2 Choice of Pipes
3 STORMWATERDRAINAGE 3.1 General 3.2 Rainwater Pipes for Roof Drainage
3 CONVEYANCEAND DISTRIBUTIONOF WATER WITHINTHEPREMISES 3.1 Basic Principles
3.3 Disposal 4 SUBSOILWATERDRAINAGE
4 GENERALREQUIREMENTS OFPIPEWORK 4. I -General 4.2 Systems of Subsoil Drainage
5 LAYINGOFPIPES 5.1 Service Pipes 5.2 Securing and Supporting of Pipes 5.3 Pipes Laid Through Ducts, Chases, Notches or Holes
5 CONVEYANCE OFSANITARY WASTES 5.1 Laying of Pipes 5.2 Protection of Pipes
5.4 Lagging of Pipes
5.3 Jointing of Pipes 5.4 Connection to an Existing-Sewer
6 JOINTINGOFPIPES 6.1 Wrought Iron and Steel Screwed Pipes 6.2 Polyethylene and Unplasticized PVC Pipes 6.3 Asbestos Cement Pipes 6.4 Lead Pipes
5.5 Backfilling PART 3 WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE IN HIGH ALTITUDES/SUB-ZERO REGIONS 1 GENERAL
6.5 Copper Pipes
2 WATERSUPPLY
7 STORAGEOFWATER 8 CLEANINGAND DISINFECI-IONOF THE SUPPLY
2.1 Selection and Sources 2.2 Pumping Installations 2.3 Protection and Storage of Water and Treatment 2.4 Transmission and Distribution
SYSTEM 9 INSPECTION. TESTINGAND MAINTENANCE
10 REQUIREMENTS OFOTHERWORK PART 2 BUILDING
DRAlNAGE
3
WASTEDISPOSAL
1 GENERAL 2 DESIGNCONSIDERATIONS 2. I Disposal of Sewage
2.2 Layout
3.1 General 3.2 Waterborne System
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
CHAPTER 16
WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE maintenance of drains inside buildings and from the buildings up to the connection to public sewer, cesspool or other water course.
1 GENERAL 1.1 Plumbing system shall include water supply and distribution pipes; plumbing fittings and traps; soil, waste, vent pipes, antisphonage pipes; building drains and building sewers including their respective connections, devices, appurtenances within the property lines of the premises.
1.4 For convenience, the Chapter is divided into three Parts, Part 1 Water supply, Part 2 Drainage and Part 3 Water supply and drainage at high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions.
1.2 This Chapter deals with water supply, plumbing connected to public water supply systems, principles of conveyance and distribution of water within the premises; it also covers water supply systems in high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperatures.
1.5 SP 35 (S & T) : 1987 which has been already prepared is taken note of in preparing this Chapter. 1.6 Local municipal byelaws should also be consulted and work carried out after their approval.
1.3 This Chapter also covers the drainage and sanitation requirements of buildings. Construction and
PART 1 WATER SUPPLY h) Lead to IS 404 (Part 1) : 1993.
1 GENERAL
2.2 Choice of Pipes
1.1 This Part deals with general requirements of plumbing connected to public water supply and installation of water supply system consisting of water service pipe, water distribution pipe, connecting pipes, fittings, valves and all related appurtenances in or adjacentto buildings. 1.2 The water supply requirements of buildings and design of distribution systems shall be as per IS 1172 : 1993 and IS 2065 : 1983 respectively. 1.3 Figure 16.1 is a typical sketch of the different types of water supply pipes in buildings. 1.4 Excavation,
if required, shall be as per Chapter 2.
2 MATERIALS 2.1 Pipes Pipes may be of any of the following materials: a ) Cast iron, vertically cast or centrifugally (spun) cast to IS 1536 : 1989 or IS 1537 : 1976. b) Mild steel tubes and tubulars to IS 1239 (Part I) : 1990. c) Asbestos cement to IS 1626 (Part 1) : 1991 and IS 1592 : 1989. d) Polyethylene to IS 3076 : 1985 and IS 4984 : 1987. Unplasticized PVC to IS 4985 : 1988. e) Copper to IS 1545 : 1982. 9 Brass to IS 407 : 1981. g)
The materials for piping and fittings, shall be resistant to corrosion both inside and outside or shall be suitably protected. Lead piping shall not be used for conveying domestic water supply; they may however be used for flushing and overflow pipes. Copper piping may be used for hot water supply systems, provided water is not capable of dissolving an undue amount of copper. In using asbestos cement pipes adequate precaution shall be taken while laying backfilling. Mild steel tubes used in plumbing shall be of medium class to IS 1239 (Part 1) : 1990. Polyethylene and PVC pipes should not be laid on hot surfaces or in too close a proximity to the hot -water pipes. Care should also be taken to avoid locations where they are likely to be exposed to atmosphere charged with coal gas. 3 CONVEYANCE AND DISTRIBUTION WATER WITHIN THE PREMISES
OF
3.1 Basic Principles Some of the details of plumbing which are considered necessary for properly designed, acceptably installed and adequately maintained plumbing systems are given below from (a) to (k). Though the details of a construction may vary, the basic sanitary and safety principles are the same, and they merit serious study. Furthermore in the event of any unforseen situation not covered here, the principles enumerated may serve as useful guides.
411
SP62(S&T):1997
C
r
/
AB AN0 FO
rCDMMUNlCAltON
BCDE
= SUPPLY PIPE
PQ
*OISTRIBUftNG
PtPES PIPE
OH, Hl.HJ, JM. Jfi,W BCDE, PO .=CONSUMER’S PIPES
NOTE-The illustrationis not intendedto indicaterecommendedpositions of undergroundstoragetank (where provided), pipes, etc, and this will~dependon local situations.
FIG. 16.1 TYPICAL SKETCH FOR IDENTIFICATIONOF DIFFERENTTYPES OF WATER SUPPLY PIPES b) The design of the pipe shall be such that there is no possibility of backflow towards the source of supply from any cistern or appliance whether by siphonage or otherwise. Reflux or non-return valves shall not be relied upon to prevent such backflow. c) Where a supply of less satisfactory water be-
a) Wholesome water supply provided for drinking and culinary purposes shall not be liable to contamination from any less satisfactory water. There shall therefore be no cross connection whatsoever between a pipe or fitting conveying or containing whole some water and pipe or fitting containing impure water or water liable for contamination or of uncertain quality of water which has been used for any purpose.
comes inevitable as an alternative or is required to be mixed with wholesome water, it shall be delivered only into a cistern, and by a pipe fitting discharging into the air gap at a height above the top edge of the cistern equal to twice its nominal bore, and in no case less than 150 mm. It is necessary to maintain
The provision of reflux or non-return valves or closed and sealed stop valves shall not be construed as a permissible substitute for complete absence of cross connection.
412
Y
SP62(S&T):1997 4.1.1 Communication
definite air~gap in all appliances or taps used in water closets.
a) Every premises shall have its own separate communication pipe for supply of water to-the Authority. In the case of a group or blocks of premises, the same communication pipe may supply water to more than one premises.
d) All pipe work shall be so designed, laid or fixed, and maintained as to be and to remain completely watertight, thereby avoiding waste of water, damage to property and risk of contamination of the water conveyed.
pipe between the water b) The communication main and the stopcock at the boundary of the premises shall be laid by the Authority.
4 No piping shall be laid or fixed so as to pass into, through or adjoining any sewer, scour outlet or drain or any manhole connected therewith nor through any ash pit or manure pit or any material of such nature that would be likely to cause undue deterioration of the pipe, except as permitted in 3.1(f).
c) Connection up to 50 mm dia may be made on the water main by means of screwed ferrules, provided the size of the connection does not exceed one-third the size of-the water main. In all other cases, the connection shall be made by a-Tibranch off the water main (see 5.1).
Where lines have to be laid in close proximity to electric cables or in corrosive soils, adequate precautions should be taken to avoid electrical accidents and corrosion.
pipe d) As far as possible, the communication and the underground service pipe shall be laid at right angles to the main and in approximately straight~lines to facilitate location for repairs.
f) Where the laying of any pipe through corrosive soil or previous material is unavoidable, the piping shall be properly protected from contact with such soil or material. Any existing pipe or fitting laid or fixed, which does not comply with the above requirements, shall be removed immediately and relaid in conformity with the above requirements.
e) Every communication pipe shall have a stopcock and meter inserted in it. The waterway of such fitting shall not be less than the internal sectional area of the communicating pipe and the fittings shall be located within the premises at a conspicuous place accessible to the Authority which shall have exclusive control over it. __ _ 4.12 Consumer Pipes
s) To reduce friction losses, piping shall be as smooth as possible inside. Methods of jointing shall be such as to avoid internal roughness and projection at the joints, whether of the joining materials or otherwise.
4 No consumer pipe shall be laid in the premises to connect the communication permission of the Authority.
h) Change in diameter and in direction shall be gradual rather than abrupt to avoid undue loss of head. No bend or curve in piping shall be made which is~likely to materially diminish, or alter the cross-section.
be laid underground with a suitable cover to safeguard against damage from traffic and extremes of weather.
piping shall be laid at such a depth that it is unlikely to be damaged by frost ortraffic loads and vibrations. It shall not be laid in ground liable to subsidence; but where such ground cannot be avoided, special precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to the piping. Where piping has to be laid across recently disturbed ground, the ground shall be thoroughly consolidated so as to provide a continuous and~even support.
c>To
k) No boiler for generating steam or closed boilers of any description or any machinery shall be supplied direct from a service or supply pipe. Every such boiler or equipment shall be supplied from a feed cistern. REQUIREMENTS
pipe without the
b) The consumer pipe within the premises shall
_i>Underground
4 GENERAL WORK
Pipes
’
control the branch pipe to each separately occupied part of a building a stop valve shall be fixed to minimize the interruption of supply during repairs. All, such stop valves shall be fixed in accessible positions and properly protected. To provide for drinking or culinary purposes, direct taps shall be provided on the branch pipes connected directly to the consumer pipe. In case of multistoreyed buildings, down take pipes shall be supplied from overhead tanks.
4 Pumps shall not be allowed on the service pipe,
OF PIPE
4.1 The following general principles shall comply in the layout and planning of the pipe work. 413
as they cause~a drop in pressure on the suction side, thereby affecting the supply to the adjoining properties. In cases where pumping is required, a properly protected storage tank of adequate capacity shall be provided to feed the pump.
SP62(S&T):1997 screwed down ferrule of non-ferrous metal conforming to IS 2692 : 1989, but the ferrule itself shall not be more than 25 mm bore. Ferrules of 20 mm and above shall not be used on mains of less than 100 mm bore. The main is drilled and tapped and the ferrule screwed in. In case of large-sized trunk mains, this may be done by a tapping under pressure machine, which will obviate any interference with the use of the main.
e) No direct boosting (by booster pumps) shall be allowed from the service pipes (communication and consumer pipes). Consumer pipes shall be so designed and constructed as to avoid air locks. Draining taps shall be provided at the lowest points from which the piping shall rise continuously to the drain off taps. Consumer pipes shall be so designed as to reduce the production and transmission of noise as much as possible.
b) Service pipes of 50 mm and above shall be connected to special T-branches which have to be inserted into the line of the main. Special branch pipes shall also be used for service pipes of less thati 50 mm bore where the bore of the main is not greater than thrice that of the service pipe.
h) Consumer pipes in roof spaces, unventilated air spaces, underfloors or in basements shall be protected against corrosion.
j> Consumer pipes shall be so located that they are not unduly exposed to accidental damage and shall be fixed in such positions as to facilitate cleaning and avoid accumulations of dirt.
cl Precautions
against contamination of the mains shall be taken when making a connection, and where risk exists, the main shall be subsequently disinfected. The underground water service pipe and the building sewer or drain shall be kept at a sufficient distance apart to the satisfaction of the Authority so as to prevent contamination of water. Water service pipes or any underground water pipes shall not be run or laid in the same trench as the building sewer or drainage pipe. Where this is unavoidable, the following conditions shall be fulfilled:
k) All consumer pipes shall be so laid as to permit expansion ments. 4.1.3 Prohibited
and contraction
or other move-
Connections
4 A service pipe shall not be connected
to a distribution pipe, since such connection may permit backflow of water from a cistern into the service pipe, in certain circumstances, with subsequent damages of contamination and depletion of storage capacity. It might result in pipes and fittings being subjected to a pressure higher than that for which they are designed and in tlooding from overflowing cisterns.
1) The bottom of the service pipe, at all points, shall be at least 30 cm above the top of the sewer line at its highest point.
2) The water service pipe shall be placed on a solid shelf excavated at one side of the common trench.
b) No pipe for conveyance or in connection with water supplied by the Authority shall communicate with any other receptacle used or capable of being used for conveyance other than water supplied by the Authority.
c>Where
storage tanks are provided, no person shall connect or be permitted to connect any service pipe with any distribution pipe.
4 No service pipe shall be connected directly to any water closet or a urinal. All such pipes shall be from flushing cisterns which shall be supplied from storage tank.
The number of joints in the service pipe shall be kept to a minimum.
4)
The materials and joints of sewer and water service pipe shall be installed in such a manner and shall possess the necessary strength and durability so as to prevent the escape of solids, liquids and gases there from due to temperature changes, settlement, vibrations and superimposed loads.
4 The service pipe shall pass into or beneath the
e) No service or supply pipe shall be connected directly to any hot water system or to any other appartus used for heating water other than through a feed Fistern thereof. 5 LAYING
3)
OF PIPES
5.1 Service Pi-Des a) Service pipes less than 50 mm bore [nay be connected to~mains by means of a right angled 414
building at a depth below the external ground level of not less than 0.75 m (provided the foundation is deeper than 0.75 m) and at its point of entry through the structure should be accomodated in a sleeve which should have been solidly built in. The space between the pipe and sleeve shall be filled with bituminous or other suitable material for a minimum length of 15 cm at both ends.
SP62(S&T):1997 alround with waterproof insulating material and shall not be in direct contact with the wall. Where it passes through a wall, whether into a building or not, the lagging shall be continued along the pipe throughout the thickness of the wall, and where it emerges from the ground, the lagging shall be continued into the ground until the depth of 0.75 m is reached.
e) Care shall be taken to ensure that before the pipeline is charged all piping and fittings are clean internally and free from particles of sand or soil, metal fittings, etc, which besides causing obstruction may lead to failure by corrosion. 5.2 Securing
and Supporting
of Pipes
a>Lead
piping of not more than 25 mm bore, in vertical runs, may be secured directly to brick walls (othei than external walls) by iron pipe clamps driven into the wall joints, or may be secured to wooden battens or other woodwork by iron orbrass clips with ears for screw fixing, the clamps or clips or holder bats being at not more than 90 cm intervals. Damage to the piping by the clamps shall be prevented by insertion of small lead pads.
b) Lagged piping connected to cisterns, enclosed by insulating casing shall pass at right angles through the casing and be lagged independently of the casing; if the piping is sandwiched between the cistern and the casing, it will probably, not be sufficiently insulated.
c>The
minimum thickness of-insulating material for lagging hot water piping inside buildings shall be 12 mm in the case of glass in fibre form, compressed felt, and felted slag or mineral wool and 20 mm in the case of asbestos, 85 percent magnesia, compressed backed cork and granulated cork (raw or baked).
b) Copper piping shall be secured by copper or copper alloy clips direct to woodwork, or-by similar bracket clips built in to walls or screwed to plugs.
4 Ail lagging exposed to moist conditions shall
c>Wrought
iron and steel piping shall be secured in a manner similar to that used for copper piping, except that the clips shall be of iron and steel.
be waterproof or covered with waterproofing. Table 16.1 Spacing of Fixing for Internal Piping (Clause 5.2. I)
4 Plastic pipes should be secured and supported
Kind of Piping
in accordance with IS 7634 (Part 2) : 1975 and IS 7634 (Part 3) : 1975. Lead Copper, light gauge
5.2.1 Spacing of Fixing for Internal Pipes Fixing on internal pipes shall be spaced at regular intervals as given in Table 16.1. 5.3 Pipes Laid Through Ducts, Chases, Notches or Holes Ducts or chases in walls for piping shall be provided during the building of the walls. If they are cut in the existing walls, they shall be finished sufficiently smooth and large enough for fixing the piping. In case of lead pipes, the joints may be wiped outside the duct, and the pipes eased back into the duct after jointing.
Copper, heavy gauge, wrought iron and mild steel
a) Wherever possible back-boards shall be provided in chases for fixing the piping, otherwise lead piping shall be protected from contact with lime or cement by building paper or felt. Where covers are-provided to chases, they shall be fixed to the screws for easy removal.
Cast iron
Plastic
b) Piping laid in notches or holes shall not be subjected external pressure and shall be free to expand and contract without noise due to friction on the wood. 5.4 Lagging of Pipes
6 JOINTING 6.1 Wrought
a) Where lagged ~piping outside buildings is attached to walls, it shall be entirely covered 415
Size of Pipe
Interval for Interval for Horizontal Runs Vertical Runs
mm
111
m
All sizes 1s 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
2
3 2 2.5
I 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3
2.5 3 3 3 3.5 3.5 3.5
IS 20 25 32 40
2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3
2.5 3 3 3 3.5
SO 65 80 100
3 3.5 3.5 4
3.5 s 5 5
50 80 100
2 2.5 2.5
2 2.5 2.5
0.70 I 0.75 0.825 0.975 0.975
1.Stimes the horizontal spacing
20 25 32 40 SO
OF PIPES Iron and Steel Screwed Pipes
Screwed wrought iron or steel piping may be jointed with screwed and socketed joints. Care shall be taken
L i
SP62(S&T):1997 is of fully annealed copper, its ends shall be made truly round before jointing.
to remove any burrs from the end of the pipes after screwing. Any jointing compound, approved by the Authority may be used together with a grummet of a few strands of fine yarn; but the compound shall contain no red lead.
c>-Copper
Any threads exposed after jointing shall be painted, or in ease of underground piping thickly coated with bituminous or other suitable composition to prevent corrosion. Screwed wrought iron or steel piping may also be jointed with screwed flanges.
d) Copper piping of small diameter
6.2 Polyethylene
and Unplasticized
piping may be autogenous welded or bronze welded, the latter giving the stronger Copper to be welded shall be joint. ‘deoxidized copper’ and not ‘tough pitch copper’. shall be jointed to cast iron, wrought iron or steel piping by the use of copper-alloy screwed unions or ferrules. For screwed copper piping of diameter, larger than 40 mm, a flange joint shall be used. The copper pipe shall have a copper-alloy flange screwed, brazed or welded on, and this shall be jointed to the iron or steel flange by alloy bolts or nuts.
PVC Pipes
These pipes shall be joined in accordance with the recommendations of IS 7634 (Part 2) : 1975 and IS 7634 (Part 3) : 1975 respectively. 6.3 Asbestos Cement Pipes Asbestos cement pipes are jointed with flexible joints supplied by the manufacturer. 6.4 Lead Pipes Lead and lead alloy pipes shall be jointed with wiped solder joints or by other suitable methods. Lead and lead alloy piping shall be jointed to cast iron, wrought iron, steel or copper piping by the use of copper alloy screwed unions or ferrules. 6.5 Copper Pipes Screwed copper piping shall be jointed with screwed copper-alloy fittings after treating the clean screw threads with raw linseed oil or other suitable jointing compound. Alternatively, the screw threads of the pipe and fittings may be tinned, and the joint heated to the melting point of the solder when being screwed.
a>Plain
copper piping shall be jointed with compression (manipulative or anon-manipulative) or with capillary joints in each case using copper-alloy fittings, or by welding. Only manipulative compression joints, that is, joints in which the pipe ends are flanged, belled or swaged, are suitable for use with fully annealed copper piping.
b) In~fhe case of the capillary joint, the pipe and the interior of the socket of the fitting shall be cleaned with steel wool, fluxed and fitted together and the joint heated to just above melting point of the solder, which is either provided in the fitting or is touched into the joint with a solder stick, and which then tlows by capillary to fill the joint space. If the pipe
7 STORAGE OF WATER 7.1 Details of materials for use of storage tanks, grouping~of storage tanks, fitments, etc, shall be as described in IS 2065: 1983. 8 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION SUPPLY SYSTEM
OF THE
8.1 All water mains, communication pipes, service atid distribution pipes used for water for domestic purposes shall be thoroughly and efficiently disinfected before being taken into use and also after every major repair. The method of disinfection shall be subject to the approval of the Authority. Similarly storage tanks and down take distribution pipes shall also be disinfected. 9 INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE
TESTING
9.1 Irispection, testing and according to IS 2065 : 1983. 10 REQUIREMENTS
AND maintenance
OF OTHER
shall be
WORK
10.1 Sanitary Installations The selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances shall be according to IS 2064 : 1993. 10.2 Plumbing Buildings
Installations
Plumbing in multistoreyed IS 12183 (Part I) : 1987.
in Multistoreyed
buildings shall conform to
10.3 Domestic Hot Water Installations This shall conform to IS 7558 : 1974. * ,
416
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 PART 2
BUILDING
not introduce crevices which are not possible to inspect and clean readily. Pipes if not embedded shall be run well clear off the wall. Holes through walls to take~pipes shall be made good on both sides to prevent entry of insects. Materials used for embedding pipes shall be rodent proof. Passage of rodents from room to room orfrom floor to floor shall be prevented by suitable sealing. The intermediate length of ducts and chases shall be capable of easy inspection. Any unused drains, sewers, etc, shall be demolished or filled in to keep them free from rodents.
1 GENERAL 1.1 This Part covers with construction of drains for waste water, surface water and subsoil water and sewage together with all ancillary works used within the building and from the building to the connection to a public sewer or to treatment works, a cesspool or a water course. 1.2 Excavation
DRAINAGE
shall be as per Chapter 2.
2 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 2.1 Disposal of Sewage
4 Drainage may be connected to a public sewer. b) Where discharge into a public sewer is not
c>Alignment
of Pipes - The pipes shall be laid in straight lines as far as possible and with uniform gradients. Anything that is likely to cause irregularity of flow, such as, abrupt changes of directions shall be avoided. No bends or junctions whatsoever shall be permitted in sewers except at manholes and inspection chambers.
possible, the drainage of the building shall be on a separate system. Foul water shall be disposed of by adequate treatment approved by the Authority at the site. The effluent from the plant shall be discharged into a natural water course or on the surface of the ground or disposed of by subsoil dispersion, preferably draining to a suitable outlet channel.
1) Where it is not possible to avoid a change of direction in case of drains, access shall be provided through manholes and inspection chambers. Necessary terminal bends at junctions shall be 1/8or preferably l/l 6 bends.
cl In the case of dilution into a natural stream course, the quality of effluent shall conform to the requirements of Authority controlling the prevention of pollution of stream. For guidance IS 4733 : 1972 may be followed.
2) All junctions shall be oblique and the contained angle shall be not more than 60”.
4 In the case of subsoil dispersion, the requirements of the Authority of water supply shall be observed to avoid any possible pollution of local water supplies or wells.
3)
Drains may be laid under buildings only when unavoidable and whenit is not possible to obtain otherwise a sufficient fall in the drain.
4)
Where it is necessary to lay a drain under a building or exposed locations within the building, the following conditions shall be observed: Pipes shall be of cast iron to IS 1536 :
e>Where
no other method of disposal is possible, foul water may be collected and stored in impervious covered cesspool and arrangements made with the Authority for satisfactory periodical removal and conveyance to disposal works.
1989 and IS 1537 : 1976.
9 Under the separate system, the drainage of the building shall be done through septic tank or by destabilization ponds or by any method approved by the Authority.
-
The drains shall be laid in straight line and at a uniform gradient.
-
Means of access like manholes/inspection chambers shall be-provided at each end, immediately outside the building.
-
In case the pipe orany part of it is laid above the natural surface of the ground, it shall be laid on concrete supports the bottom of which goes, at least 150 mm, below the ground surface.
-
Drains should be preferably taken under a staircase or passage and not under a living room or kitchen.
2.2 Layout
a>General-Generally,
rain water shall be dealt with separately from sewage and sullage. Sewage and sullage shall be connected to sewers. Storm water from the courtyard may be connected to the sewer where it is not possible to drain otherwise after obtaining permission from the Authority.
b) Protection Against Vermin and Dirt - Installation of sanitary appliances and fittings shall 417
SP62(S&T):l997 d) Surcharge of Sewers (Precautions) - Where there is a risk of the sewer becoming surcharged under storm conditions, all gullies and sanitary fittings shall be located above the level of maximum surcharge of the sewer. Where it is not practicable, an anti-flood valve shall be provided in the manhole nearest to the junction of drain and sewer. Parts exposed to wear in anti-flood valves shall be of non-corrodable metal and easily accessible. The cross sectional area of flow through the valve shall not be less than that of the pipe concerned. In extreme cases, pumping may have to be considered. The distance between inspection chamber and gully chamber shall not exceed 6 m. 2.3 Gradients
and Pipe Sizes
pipes shall be used. The approximate gradients which give a velocity of flow of 2.4 m/s for the various sizes of pipes and the corresponding discharge when flowing halffull are as-follows: Diameter mm
Gradient
Discharge m3/min
100 150 200 230 250 300
1 in 5.6 1 in 9.7 1 in 14 1 in 17 1 in 19 I in 24.5
0.59 1.32 2.40 2.98 3.60 5.30
NOTE-The discharge values given in 2.3.1 (b) and (d) are based on Mannings formula with IZ = 0.0 15.
2.3.2 Pipe Sizes
2.3.1 Gradients
4 The discharge of water through a domestic drain is intermittent and limited in quantity and, therefore, small accumulations of solid matter are liable to form in the drains between the building and the public sewer. There is usually a gradual shifting of these deposits as discharges take place. Gradients shall be sufficient to prevent these temporary building up and blocking the drains.
b) Normally, the sewer shall be designed to discharge three times the dry-weather flow flowing half-full with a minimum self-cleansing velocity 0.75 m/s. The approximate gradients which give this velocity for the sizes of pipes likely to be used in building drainage and the corresponding discharges when flowing halffull are as follows: Diameter mm
Gradient
Discharge m3/min
100 150 200 230 250 300
1 in 57 1 in 100 I in 145 1 in 175 1 in 195 1 in 250
0.18 0.42 0.73 0.93 1.10 1.70
c) In cases where such ruling gradients cannot be followed, a flatter gradient may be used but the minimum velocity in such cases shall on no account be less than 0.61 m/s. NOTE - The practiceof using pipes of larger diameter than is required by the normal flow, where gradients are restricted, does not result in increasing the velocity of flow but reduces the depth of flow and for this reason, this practice is to be deprecated.
4 On the other hand, it is undesirable to employ
Subject to a minimum of 100 mm, the sizes of pipes shall be decided in relation to the estimated quantity of flow and the available gradient. 2.4 Choice of Materials of Pipes
4 Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes - For all sewers and drains in all soils, except where supports are required as in made up ground, glazed stoneware pipe shall be used as far as possible in preference to other type of pipes; they are particularly suitable where acid effluents or acid subsoil conditions are likely to be encountered. Salt glazed stoneware pipes shall conform to IS 651 : 1992 or IS 3006 : 1979.
b) Cement Concrete Pipes -
When properly ventilated, cement concrete pipes with spigot and socket collar joints present as an alternative to glazed stoneware pipes over 150 mm diameter. These shall not be used to early acid effluents or sewage under condition favourable for the production of hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in subsoils which are likely to affect adversely the quality or strength of concrete. Cement concrete pipes may be used for surface water drains in all diameters. These pipes shall conform to IS 458 : 1988. Where so desired, the life of cement concrete pipe may be increased \>y lining inside of the pipe by suitable coatings like epoxy polyester resin, etc.
c>Cast Iron Pipes -
Cast iron pipes to IS 1536 : 1989-and IS 1537 : 1976 shall be used in the following situations:
1) In bad or unstable
ground movement is expected;
where soil
2) In made-up or tipped ground;
gradients giving a velocity of flow greater than 2.4 m/s. Where it is unavoidable, cast iron
3)
418
To provide for an increased strength where a sewer is laid at insufficient depth,
SP 62 ( S 8z T ) : 1997 where it is exposed or where it has to be carried on pipes above ground; 4)
be watertight, overlap shall be in the direction of fall. The minimum fall shall be 1 in 120.
Under buildings and where pipes are suspended in basements and like situations;
5)
In reaches where the velocity is more than 2.4 m/s; and
6)
For crossings of water courses.
2.5 Drainage Pipes
a>Drainage
pipes shall be kept clear of all other services. Provision shall be made during the construction of the building for the entry of the drainage pipes. In most cases, this may be done conveniently by building sleeves on conduit pipes into or under the structure in appropriate positions. This will facilitate the installation and maintenance of the services.
It may be noted that cast iron pipes, even when given a protective coating are liable to severe corrosion in certain soils; among such soils are soils permeated by peaty waters, and soils which contain appreciable concentration of sulphates. Local data may be obtained for this purpose.
b) Where soil and ventilating
Asbestos Cement Piyes - Asbestos cement pipes are commonly used for house drainage system and they shall conform to IS 1626 (Part 1) : 1991. They are not recommended for underground situations. However, asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989 may be used in underground situations also, provided they are not subjected to heavy superimposed loads. These shall not be used to carry acid effluents or sewage under conditions favourable for the production of hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in those subsoils which are likely to affect adversely the quality or strength of asbestos cement pipes. Where so desired, life of asbestos cement pipes may be increased by lining inside of the pipe by suitable coatings like epoxy, polyester resins, etc.
pipes are accomodated in ducts, access to cleaning eyes shall be provided. Any connection to drain shall be through gully with sealed cover to guard against ingress of sewer gas, vermin or backflow. Trenches and subway shall be ventilated preferably to the open air.
c>All
vertical, waste ventilating and antisiphonage pipes shall be covered on top with a copper or heavily galvanized iron wire dome or cast iron terminal guards. All cast iron pipes which are to be painted periodically shall be fixed to the wall to give a minimum clearance of 50 mm. NOTE - Asbestos cement cowls may be used in case asbestos cement soil pipes are used.
4 Drainage pipes shall be carried to a height above the buildings as specified for ventilating pipe (see IS 5329 : 1983). 2.6 Manholes
4 At every change of alignment,
Lead Pipes - Branch soil pipes from fittings to main soil pipes and branch waste pipes from fittings to branch anti-siphonage pipes may be of lead and shall conform to IS 404 (Part I) : 1993. PVC Pipes - Unplasticized PVC pipes may be used for drainage purposes; however where hot water discharge is anticipated, the wall thickness should at least be 3 mm irrespective of the size and flow load. UPVC pipe shall conform to IS 4985: 1988.
b)
NOTEWhere possible high density polyethylene pipes (HDPE) and UPVC pipes may be used for drainage and sanitation purposes, depending on suitability. HDPE pipes shall conform to IS 4984 : 1987.
cl
Roof gutters shall be of galvanized iron sheets 1.25 mm thick conforming to IS 277 : 1992. The gutter shall be semicircular in section with a width at top equal to abouttwice the diameter of the down pipe. The gutters shall be fixed 25 mm below the edge of roof. The gutter shall be supported by mild steel brackets at about l-2 m intervals. All junctions of gutters shall 419
gradient or diameter Df drain, there shall be a manhole or inspection chamber. Bends and junctions in drains shall be grouped together in manholes, as far as possible. The spacing of manhole pipe may be in accordance with IS 4111 (Part I) : 1986. Where the diameter of the drain is increased, the crown of the pipe shall be fixed at the same level and necessary slope given in the invert of the manhole chamber. In exceptional cases and where unavoidable the crown of the branch sewer may be fixed at a lower level but in such cases the peak flow level of the two sewers should be kept the same. Chambers shall be of such size as will allow necessary examination or clearance of drains. The size of manholes shall be adjusted to take into account any increase in the number of entries to the manhole. The minimum internal sizes of chambers (between masonry faces) shall be as follows: 1) Fordepthoflmor0.8mx0.8m less
SP62(S&T):1997 2) For depth between 1 m and 1.5 m
1.2 m x 0.9 m
3) For depths more than 1.5 m
Circular chambers with a minimum dia of 1.4 m or rectangular chambers with minimum internal dimension of 1.2 m x 0.9 m.
Typical sections of the manholes are illustrated inFig. 16.2, 16.3, and 16.4. Drop Manholes - Where it is uneconomic or impracticable to arrange the connection with 600 mm height above the invert of the manhole, the connection shall be made by constructing a vertical shaft outside the manhole chamber as shown in Fig. 16.5.
NOTES
If the difference in level between the incoming drain and the sewer does not exceed 600 mm and there is sufficient room in the manhole, the connecting pipe may be directly brought through the manhole wall and the fall accommodated by constructing a ramp in the benching of the manhole.
1 In adopting these sizes of chambers, it would be ensured that these sizes accord full with or half-bricks with standard thickness of mortar joints so as to avoid wasteful cutting of the brick. 2 The sizes of the chambers may be adjusted to suit the availability of local building materials and economics of construction.
d) The access shaft shall be corbelled inwards on three sides at the top to reduce its size to that of the cover frame to be fitted or alternatively the access shaft shall be covered over by a reinforced concrete slab of suitable dimensions with an opening for manhole cover and frame.
g)
e) The manhole shall be built on a base of concrete of a thickness of at least 150 mm for manholes up to 1 m depth, at least 200 mm for manholes from 1 to 2 m in depth and 300 mm (or one and half brick) for depths greater than 1.5 m. The actual thickness-in any case shall be calculated on the basis of engineering design.
Channels-These shall be semicircular in the bottom half and of diameter~equal to that of the sewer. Above the horizontal diameter, the sides shall be extended vertically to the same level as the crown of the outgoing pipe and the top edge shall be suitably rounded off. ~The branch channel shall also be similarly constructed with respect to the benching but at their junction with the main channel an appropriate fall suitably rounded off in the direction of flow in the main channel shall be given.
RENDERING WITH CEMENT MORTAR
/
/SLOPE
I:2
1 IN 6
i: SECTIONAL
PLAN Al
SECTION
ZZ
XX
SECTION
YY
NOTE-Wall thicknesses have been indicated in brick lengths to provide for use of~modular bricks (see IS 1077 : 1992) or traditional bricks. In the figure, B = one brick length. I.5 B = one and a half brick length, etc.
FIG. 16.2 DETAILS OF MANHOLE
420
(DEPTHS
1 m AND BELOW)
!SP62(S&T):
RENDERING WITH CEMENT MORTAR
DETAIL
SECTIONAL
PLAN
AT
OF
1997
I:2
BENCHING
ZZ.
I z;
w
P
SECTION
SECTION
XX
YY
NOTE - Wall thicknesses havebeenindicatedin brick lengths to provide for use of modular bricks (we IS 1077 : 1992) or traditional bricks. In the figure, B = one brick length, 1.5 B = one and a half brick length, etc. FIG.
16.3
DETAU
OF MANHOLE (DEPTHS BETWEEN
1
AND 1.5
DERINC WITH MEN1 MORTAR
DETAIL SECTIONAL
SECTION
PLAN
OF
m)
):2
BENCHING
AT 22
SECTION YY
XX
NOTE-Wall thicknesses have been indicated in brick lengths to provide for use of modular bricks (see IS 1077 : 1992) or traditional bricks. In the figure, B = one brick length, I .5 B = one and a half brick length, etc. FIG.
16.4
DETAILS
OF MANHOLE (DEPTHS
421
1.5 m AND ABOVE)
SP62(S&T):1997
r------
______ _______
SECTIONAL
PLAN
J
AT ZZ
m
SECTION
XX
&LOQE
I IN 6 I”;;//
SECTION
YY
’
NOTE- Wall thicknesseshave been indicatedin brick lengths to provide for use of modular bricks (see IS 1077 : 1992)or traditional bricks. In the figure, B = one brick length, I .5E = one and a half brick length,etc. FIG. 16.5 DROP MANHOLE
h) Rungs shall be provided in all manholes over 0.8 m in depth and shall be of cast iron conforming to IS 5455 : 1969. These rungs may be set staggered in two vertical runs which may be 380 mm apart horizontally. The top rung shall be 450 mm below the manhole cover and the lowest not more than 300 mm above the benching. The size of the manhole cover shall be such that there shall be a clear opening of at least 500 mm in diameter for manholes exceeding 0.9 m in depth. Circular cover are considered desirable. Manholes covers and frames shall conform to the requirements given in IS 1726 : 1991. All manholes shall be constructed so as to be watertight under test. No manhole or inspection chamber shall be permitted inside a build-
ing or in any passage therein. Ventilating covers shall not be used for domestic drains. j> All brickwork in manhole chamber and shaft shall be carefully built in English bond. The jointing face of each brick being well ‘buttered’ with cement mortar before laying, so as to ensure a full joint. The construction of masonry shall be as per Chapter 4. The cement mortar shall not be weaker than 1:3. The walls shall be plastered with cement mortar 1:3 to a minimum thickness of 15 mm both inside and outside; where subsoil water exists richer mortars may be used. All angles may be rounded to 7.5 cm radius and all rendered internal surfaces shall have hard impervious finish obtained by using a steel trowel.
422
.
k) The channel or drain at the bottom of the chamber shall be plastered with 1:2 cement mortar and finished smooth to the grade where required. The benching of the side shall be carried out in such a manner as to provide no lodgement for any splashings in case of accidental flooding of the chamber.
b) Rainwater pipes shall be normally sized on the basis of roof areas according to Table 16.2. The roof area shall be taken as the horizontal projection of the area. A bell mouth at the roof surface is found to give better drainage effect provided proper slopes are given to the roof surface. The spacing of pipes depends on the position of the windows and each openings but 6 m apart is convenient distance. The strainer area shall be 1; to 2 times the area of the pipe to which it connects. cl A rainwater pipe conveying rainwater shall discharge directly by means of a channel into or over an inlet to a surface drain; or shall discharge freely into a compound, drained to surface drain or a sheet drain w~ithin 30 m from the boundary of the premises but in no case shall it discharge directly into any closed drain. Where it is not possible to discharge as in (c), 4 the rainwater shall be discharged into a gully trap which shall be connected with the street drain; such a gully trap shall have a screen and silt catcher incorporated in its design. a rainIf no street drain as in (c) is available, water pipe may directly discharge into a kerb drain and shall be taken through a pipe outlet across the foot path, if any, without obstructing the foot path. A rainwater pipe shall not discharge into or connect with any soil pipe or its ventilating pipe or any waste pipe nor shall it discharge into a sewer unless specially permitted to do so by the Authority in which case such discharge into a sewer shall be intercepted by means of a gully trap. iz) The storm water shall be lead off in a suitable drain to a water course. The open drain, if not pucca masonry throughout shall be made so at least in sections where there is either a change in direction or gradient. i-0 The rainwater pipes shall be fixed to the outside of the external walls of the building or in recesses or chases cut or frame in such external wall or in such other manners may be approved by the Authority.
3 STORM WATER DRAINAGE 3.1 General The object of storm water drainage is to collect and carry, for suitable disposal, the-rain water collected within the premises of the building. The sources of such water are precipitation and run off, depending on the permeability of the surface and drainage from roofs. The disposal may be through a separate system to a water course or to storage tanks. 3.2 Rainwater
Pipes for Roof Drainage
a) Rainwater pipes shall be of cast iron, galvanized iron, asbestos cement, galvanized sheet or other equally suitable material. 1) Cast iron pipes shall be with socketed joints having lugs cast on for fixing and shall conform to IS 1230 : 1979. The shoe may be fixed 150 mm above ground level. Bends and offsets are to be avoided as far as possible. 2) Galvanized iron pipes shall be ‘fixed by straps or dogs one for each 2 m length of pipe. Joints between successive lengths of~pipes will be by collars at least 10 cm deep riveted tightly and securely to the pipes and the straps or dogs riveted or bolted through this collar by 9.5 mm galvanized iron bolts. 3) Asbestos cement pipes shall be fixed with straps or clips. 4) All rainwater pipes or leaders from roofs or terraces shall be screened off by grading at the top to prevent leaves, rodents, etc, entering the pipes. 5) The laying of pipes underground, manholes and chambers carried out as in the case of sewers for foul water.
e>
Table 16.2 Sizing of Rainwater Pipes for Roof Drainage (Clause 3.2) SI No.
(1) i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi)
Dia of Pipe mm (2) 50 65 75 100 125 150
Average Rate of Rainfall in mm/h A
f 50
15
100
(3) 13.4 24.1 40.8 85.4 -
(4) 8.9 16.0 27.0 57.0 -
(5) 6.6 12.0 20.4 42.7. 80.5 -
423
125 Roof Area in m* (6) 5.3 9.6 16.3 34.2 64.3 -
\ 150
200
(7) 4.4 8.0 13.6 28.5 53.5 83.6
(8) 3.3 6.0 10.2 21.3 40.0 62.1
SP62(S&T):1997 3.2.1 Size and Gradient of Pipes
would contain much undesirable material. The mouth of all pipes and openings shall be covered with mosquito-insect proof wire net.
The pipes shall be so designed as to give a velocity of flow not less than 1 m/s when running half-full; the maximum velocity shall not exceed 2.4 m/s.
g) French drains or shallow rubble drains, filled with coarse rubble, clinker or similar material, with or without field drain pipes may be employed as surface water drains and are useful in the drainage of unpaved surface, such as playfields and certain types of roads. When used for this purpose in addition to drain being filled with rubble, it is often advisable to include a field pipe drain in the trench bottom.
3.3 Disposal
a>General
- Surface water may be disposed off in one or more ways as described below but preferably by the method given in (b).
b) Separate System -
All courtyards shall be provided with one or more outlets through which rainwater shall be diverted into the storm water drains and away from any opening connecting with any sewer.
4 SUBSOIL WATER DRAINAGE 4.1 General
Usually each separate plot shall have a separate drain connection made to a covered or open public drain. Such connection to a covered drain shall be made through a pipe at least 3.5 m in length, laid at a gradient of not less than that of the connecting drain. The storm water from the plot should discharge into the storm water drain directly and not through a trap.
4 Subsoil water is that portion of the rain-fall which is absorbed into the ground and drainage of subsoil water may be necessary for the following reasons:
cl Combined or Partially Separate System Where levels do not permit connection to a public storm water drain, storm water from courtyard may be connected to a public sewer provided it is designed to convey combined discharge. In such cases, the surface water shall be admitted to the soil sewer through trapped gullies in order to prevent the escape of sewer air.
b)
to increase the stability of the surface;
2)
to avoid surface flooding;
3)
to alleviate or to avoid causing dampness in the building, especially in the cellars;
4)
to reduce the humidity in the immediate vicinity of the building; and
5)
to increase the workability
of soil.
The general direction of subsoil water may usualy be judged by the general inclination of the land surface and the main lines of the subsoil drains shall follow the natural falls wherever possible.
c) Subsoil drains shall be sited
so as not to endanger the stability of the buildings or earthwork. In some portions of the drain, it may be necessary to use non- porous jointed pipes. No field pipe shall be laid in such a manner or in such a position as to communicate directly with any drain constructed or adapted to be used for conveying sewage except where absolutely unavoidable and in that case a suitable efficient trap shall be provided between subsoil drain and such sewer.
d) To a Water Course -
It may be often convenient to discharge surface water to a nearby stream or water course. The invert level of the out-fall shall be about the same as the normal water level in the water course. The out-fall shall be protected against floating debris by a screen.
e>To Storage
Tanks - Water from the roof of a building may be led straight from the pipes to one or more watertight storage tanks. Such storage tanks shall be raised to a convenient height above ground and shall always be provided with ventilating covers, and have draw off taps suitably placed so that the rainwater may be drawn off for domestic washing purposes or for garden water. A large impervious storage tank is sometimes constructed underground, from which rain water is pumped as required to the house. All storage tanks shall be provided with an overflow.
1)
4.2 Systems of Subsoil Drainage 4.2.1 Field Drain Pipes Clay or concrete porous pipes may be used and shall be laid in one of the following ways, depending on site conditions.
An arrangement shall be provided in a rainwater pipe or leader to divert the first washings from the roof or terrace catchment as they
4 Natural -
The pipes are laid to follow the natural depressions, or valleys of the site, branches discharging into the main.
b) Herringbone-A
system consisting of a number of main drains into which discharge from both sides, smaller subsidiary branches parallel
424
SP62(S&T):1997 cavated to a smooth surfaces, the pipes shall be laid in a cradle of fine concrete floor or a floor of gravel and crushed stone overlaid with concrete or on a well consolidated’gravel and crushed stone bed only so as to ensure even bearing.
to each other but at an angle to the mains forming a series of herringbone patterns. c) Grid - A mainor mains near the boundaries of a site into which branches discharge from one side only. d) Fan shaped - The drains are laid converging to a single outlet at one point on the boundary of a site, without the use of main or collecting drains.
c>Each
separate pipe shall be individually set for line and for level using one of the following methods:
1) Where long lengths of sewer or drain are
e) Moatorcutoffsystem-Sometimesdrains are laid on one or more sides of a building to intercept the flow of subsoil water and thereby protect the foundations. 42.2
to be constructed in trench with glazed earthenware or concrete pipes, properly painted sight rails shall be fixed across the trench at a height, equal to the length of boning rod to be used, above the required invert level of the drain or sewer at the point where the sight rail is fixed. There shall be a minimum of three sight rails in position on each length of sewer or drain under construction at a particular gradient.
Laying of Pipes
a>For
building sites the mains shall not be less than 75 mm in diameter and the branches not less than 63 mm in diameter. The normal practice is to use 100 mm dia for mains and 7.5 mm dia forbranches.
Properly cut wooden or iron pegs shall be driven into the floor of the trenches at intervals of at least 1 m less than the length of the straight-edge, which is to be used. With the aid of boning rod, equal in length to the height of the sight rail above the required invert level, each peg shall be driven until its top is at the exact level required for the invert of the pipeline at that point; this will occur when a true bone is obtained over boning rod and sight rails. The underside of a straight edge resting on taps of those pegs will give level and gradient of the invert. The pegs shall be withdrawn as pipe laying proceeds.
b) The pipes shall generally laid at depth of 600 to 900 mm or to such a depth to which it is desirable to lower water table and the gradients are determined rather by the fall of land than by considerations of self-cleansing velocity.
c) The connecting of the branch drain to the main drain is best made by means of a clayware or concrete junction pipe.
4 The outlet of a subsoil system may discharge into a soakway or through a catchpit into the nearest ditch or watercourse. Where these are not available, the subsoil drains may be connected, with the approval of the Authority, through an intercepting trap to the surface water drainage system.
To obtain a true line along the grade, a side line shall be used strung tautly at halfpipe level between ironpins firmly driven in the floor of the excavation for the manhole at each end of the proposed pipeline, and the pipes shall be laid in such a way that the sockets are fixed just free of this side line. For long lengths of drain, the side line may require intermediate support. The practice of laying to a top line is not recommended.
NOTE -
Cue shall be taken that there is no backflow from sub-surface drains during heavy rains.
5 CONVEYANCE
OF SANITARY
WASTES
5.1 Laying of Pipes The pipes shall be laid with sockets leading uphill and shall rest on solid and even foundations for the full length of the barrel. Socket holes shall be formed in the foundation sufficiently deep, to allow sufficient space for the pipe jointer to work right round the pipes and as short as possible to accommodate the socket in proper position and allow the joint to be made.
2)
a>Where
the pipes are not bedded in concrete, the trench floor shall be left slightly high and carefully bottomed up as pipe laying proceeds that pipe barrels rest on ‘firm and undisturbed ground. If the excavation is carried too low, any packing done shall be in concrete.
b) If the floor of the trench consists of hard rock or very hard ground that cannot be easily ex-
425
In case of short lengths of branch dr-ain, where it is inconvenient to fix sight rails, pegs shall be driven into the floor of the trench and their tops boned in with the aid of three equal boning rods, one of which is used on the pegs to be driven and the other two held at the invert level of the pipes for fittings to be connected. A side line shall be used to obtain a true line in the horizontal plane.
SP62(S&T):1997 3)
In case of cast iron pipes, it is impracticable to use a straight-edge~and the invert of each pipe shall be fixed to a true bone over sight-rails by~means of a boning rod, which in such cases shall be provided with a bottom shoe to rest on the invert of the pipe being laid.
4)
Where it is necessary to cut pipes, this shall be done with a suitable wheel type pipe cutter so as to leave a clean and square section to the axis of the pipe.
+-lScm-4
5.2 Protection of Pipes 5.2.1 Gem&d
I
l
4
I-------
It may be necessary to support or surround pipe sewers or drains by ~means of concrete in certain circumstances. It may be done by bedding on concrete as in Fig. 16.6. A concrete haunching may be done as in Fig. 16.7. Encasing may be done as in Fig. 16.8.
W = D + 30cm,
where D is the external diameter of the pipe.
FIG. 16.8 SURROUNDOR ENCASING
1) When cover is less than 1 m below ground level and where pipes are unavoidably exposed above ground level, the pipes shall be completely encased or surrounded with concrete;
2) Where the pipes are laid on a soft soil with the maximum water table laying at the invert level of the pipe, the pipe shall be bedded on concrete; W= D + 30 cm, whereD is external diameterof the pipe. T=
3)
Where the pipes are laid on soft soil with the maximum water table rising above the invert but below the top of the barrel, the pipe should be haunched;
4)
Where the pipe is laid on soft soil and where the maximum water table is likely to rise above the top of the barrel, the pipe shall be completely encased or surrounded with concrete; and
5)
Where the pipes are to laid adjacent to growing trees, the pipes shall be surrounded by concrete.
10 cm for pipes under I50 mm nominal dia. 15 cm for pipes IS0 mm nominal dia andover.
FIG. 16.6 BEDDING
l------W--------I
c) Pipes on Unstable Ground -
In certain subsoils, rise and fall of subsoil water level -may be the cause of considerable earth movement. This and other conditions of unstable ground call for additional support to the pipes in the form of piles or trestles or other suitable means.
IV= D + 30 cm, where D is externnl diameter of the pipe. T= 110 cm for-pipes under I50 mm nominal dia. 115 cm for pipes 150 mm nominal din and over.
-FIG. 16.7 HAUNCHING
4 For cast iron pipes supporting pier may be provided where necessary. They shall be at least 30 cm in length parallel to the axis of the pipe and equal in section to haunching of Fig. T6.7. Piers shall be built just behind the pipe sockets, intermediate piers being provided where necessary. However, in normal ground no support or protection is necessary.
b)
5.3 Jointing of Pipes 5.3.1 General All soil pipes, waste pipes, ventilating pipes and all otherpipes when above ground, shall be gas-tight. All sewers and drains below ground shall be watertight. a) Jointing lead and iron pipes-Where any lead pipe, ventilating pipe or trap is conne’cted with an iron pipe or drain communicating with a
~Glazed stoneware pipes -
Glazed stoneware pipes shall be protected as follows: 426
SP62(S&T):1997 WC TRAP
sewer, there shall be inserted, between such pipes, an ordinary thimble of copper or brass, which shall be connected to the lead pipe by means of a wiped joint. The thimble shall be connected with cast iron pipe by means of a joint made with molten lead, properly caulked; a sufficient quantity of lead shall be melted at a time to finish the joint at one paring (see Fig. 16.9). LEAD
/
/-
CEMENT JOINT(l:l)
L
MORTAR
YARN BRASS THIMBLE WIT H SOCKET
PIPE
WIPED SOLDER JOINT
BRASS COPPER THIMBLE
k
/--
WIPED
\
OR
MOLTEN LEAD JOINT WELL CAULKED
LEAD
SOLDER JOINT
PIPE
FIG. 16.10 JOINTING STONEWARE OR SEMI-VITRIFIED WARE PIPEOR TRAPTO LEAD PIPE
\
Cl
PIPE
f-
PIPE
CEMENT MORTAR JOINT(l:l-)
FIG. 16.9 JOINTINGLEAD PIPETO CAST~RONPIPE
b) Jointing stoneware with lead pipes - Where any stoneware or semi-vitrilied trap or pipe is connected with a lead soil pipe, waste pipe or trap communicating with a sewer, there shall be inserted between the pipes, a socket of copper, copper brass or other suitable alloy; this shall be connected by means of a cement wiped metallic joint as in Fig. 16.10.
YARN
SW
c) Jointing cast iron pipes with stoneware pipes
PtPE
- For such connection, the beaded spigoted end shall Abe inserted into a socket of such stoneware~pipe as shown in Fig. 16.11. When any water closet pan or earthenware trap is to be jointed with a cast iron pipe, such joint shall be flexible in nature; a mixture of bitumen and asbestos fibre (not dust) may be used.
d)
CI PIPETO STONEWAREPIPE FIG. 16.11 JOINTING e) Jointing
Jointing lead pipes - These joints shall be made as shown in Fig. 16.12. The solder shall consist of two parts of lead and one part of tin.
427
stoneware pipes - These shall be jointed as shown in Fig. 16.13.
f) Jointing
concrete pipes - These jointed as per IS 783 : 1985.
shall
be
SP62(S&T):1997
2) Lead-wool or lead-fbre joints - These joints are suitable for wet conditions. Special attention is necessary in caulking. The socket shall be caulked with tarred gasket or hemp yarn and then lead fibre inserted into socket and tightly caulked home skein by skein until the joint is filled. Lead wool for caulking shall conform to IS 782 : 1978. 3)
Cement joints - Hemp yarn, dipped in cement slurry, is first inserted to a slight depth and well pressed in the same manner as for lead jointing. Cement mortar (1 : 1) should be rammed into the joint by caulking tools and completely filled. The joints should be -kept wet for 24 h. Lead joints may bemused at intervals.
h) Flanged joints - If a drain is constructed of flanged pipes, the joints shall be securely bolted together with a rubber or other suitable insertion.
FIG. 16.12 JOINTING LEADPIPETO LEADPIPE g) Jointing cast iron pipes. 1)
5.4 Connection
Lead run joinfs (cast-lead joints) - The spigot shall he centred in the adjoining socket by tarred gasket or hemp yarn leaving half the depth of socket for lead; then a jointing shall he placed around the barrel and against the faces of the socket. Molten lead, conforming to IS 782 : 1978, shall then be poured to fill remainder of the socket; the lead shall be caulked, preferably finished 3 mm behind the socket face. The pipes should be dry; if wet, special care shall be taken.
CEMENT
to an Existing Sewer
As far as possible connection to existing sewer shall be done at the manholes. Where it is unavoidable to make connection in between, it shall be done with the permission and supervision of the Authority. 5.5 Backfilling Backfilling shall not be done until the length of pipes have been tested and passed. Backfilling shall be done carefully so as not to damage the pipes.
MORTAR
TARRED GASKET OR SPUN YARN SOAKED IN NEAT CEMENT
X = Socket length
FIG. 16.13 TYPICALDETAILSOFCEMENTJOINTSFORGLAZEDSTONEWAREPIPES
428
SP62(S&T):1997 PART 3 WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE-IN HIGH ALTITUDE/ SUB-ZERO TEMPERATURE REGIONS
1 GENERAL 1.1 The broad principles of water supply and drainage covered in Parts 1 and 2 are generally applicable at high altitudes/sub-zero temperature regions with some modifications. These are elaborated here. 1.2 High altitude/sub-zero conditions may be summarized as low temperature, that is, below 4’C and/or low barometric pressures, that is, below 0.86 N/mm2. 1.3 Effects of low temperature are described below:
a>Physical-
Water is at its maximum density at 4’C, At O°C it solidifies and turns into ice having expanded approximately one-twelth of its volume. The velocity of water and liquids increases with falling of temperatures thus affecting the settling velocities of particles carried in suspension. Information on Kinematic viscosities and density of water at low temperature is given in IS 6295 : 1986.
b) Chemical - In general most chemicals react much slower at temperatures near freezing than they do at normal temperatures. Consequently, longer reaction times are required for satisfactory performance of chemical used in treatment units.
depth of the soil, where necessary. Protection be given to these casing pipes in case they are likely to be disjointed, crushed or damaged due to freezing of surrounding soils; the protection may be an additional casing~or other suitable means. Surface water from tanks are likely to freeze in winter, forming an ice cover. The freezing action tends to concentrate mineral and organic content in the unfrozen water and for this reason, the unfrozen water shall be analysed periodically for potability. Springs and rivers, which do not freeze completely after a continuous supply of water, should be perferred. Intake for river sourcesshall be placed well below the depth of ice cover, if any, formed during the worst periods. A deep pool of water should be created over the intake. High intake velocities without surface turbulence shall be used for drawing out water when the atmospheric temperature is below 0°C. 2.2 Pumping Installations Pumps and pumping machinery shall be housed in well-insulated chambers. Where necessary, inside of pump houses shall be heated. Pump house shall, as far as possible, be built directly above intake structures.
a) Pump;Selection -The
use of centrifugal pump shall be preferred to reciprocating pumps because of the fact that gland~packings soaked in water are likely to freeze when the pumps are idle and the reciprocating pump cannot work unless warmed up. Self priming pumps shall be used to avoid provision of foot valves, which help formation of ice which, in turn, clog the impeller and damages it. For high altitude regions it is always advisable to use submersiblepumps in view of low suction heads available in such places.
Biological - Low temperatures retard biological activity. Thus sewage treatment process depending on biological activities are affected. 1.4 Effect of Low Barometric
Pressures
Low barometric pressures limit pump suction head. Normal barometric pressures met at high altitudes are given in IS 6295 : 1986.
b) Suction Heads - Pump
suction heads are affected on account of reduced atmospheric pressures in high altitudes. Aerate of decrease of 1.15 m, in the allowable suction head shall be made for every 1 000 m in elevation above MSL.
2 -WATER SUPPLY 2.1 Selection and Sources The source selected shall be such as to minimize the length of~transmission line so as to reduce the inspection and maintenance. Attempts shall also be made to locate the source near the discharge of waste heat, such as power plants provided that it does not affect the potability of water.
cl Eficiency of Pumping Set - A rate of fall of over all efficiency of 2 percent shall be in case of electric prime movers and percent in case of other types of prime for every 300 m elevation in altitude. prime movers shall be preferred.
2.1.1 The sources may be melted ice or snow, ground water or surface water. Ground water is warmer than surface water in winter. Well casings for ground water shall be properly insulated along the front penetration
4 429
allowed up to 4 movers Electric
Pump Drainage - Where the ambient temperature conditions warrant, provision
-_
SP62(S&T):1997 shall be made to ensure that the pumps are drained immediately after shutting down to prevent damage to plant due to freezing. e) Engine Driven Pumps - Where blow lamps are used’ for heating the pump, compression ignition engines shall be used instead of gasoline engines. f) Engines shall be air cooled type rather than water cooled ones so as to avoid using antifreeze coolants against the danger of freezing of cooling waters in them. Engines shall be provided with special heat and cold starting devices for guard against starting troubles in winter. Draining taps of engines and pumps shall be easily accessible and convenient to operate with gloves on. g) Fuels-Diesel and gasoline are not suitable at low temperatures. Special fuels like water grade and sub-zero grade depending on the temperature shall be used as specified by the manufacturer. 2.3 Protection Treatment
and Storage of Water and
b) Chemical Reaction - For proper reaction mixing times shall be tripled when water at 0’ to 4’C is being treated. Structures storing chemicals should be as close as possible to the treatment facilities because unnecessary transplantation of chemicals can be avoided. c) Filtration - Rapid sand filters and pressure filters shall Abe preferred. Filter areas up to twice that required for warmer water shall be provided. Provision for backwashing shall be made by the use of pump rather than ele.vated water storage. Lower back washing rates will be required than normal. d) Chlorination - The pressure of chlorine gas at 2 1.1 “C is more than five times as great as at 17.8’C and special considerations should be .given to control chlorine dosing. Where bleaching powder is used adequate reaction time should be allowed for proper mixing.
a>Lay
b) To maintain temperature level of water, warm water from hot springs shall be mixed with the source of water, where feasible. Insulation of pipes may be done.
c>Adequate air release distribution
number of break pressure tanks and valves shall be provided in the system.
4 Arrangements
may be made to let out some water continuously, at suitable points, specially during no demand, so that ice formation in pipes can be prevented.
e>HDPE
pipes with proper break pressure chambers are suitable for transmission and distribution systems.
2.4.1 Pipe Materials Distribution pipes shall be made of any of the following materials:
a>High
density polyethylene
pipes to IS 4984 :
1987.
b) Asbestos cement pipes to IS 1592 : 1989.
a) Settling Tanks - Settling process is generally slowed down by increase of the viscosity of water at low temperatures. Settling tanks operated at r&ear freezing temperature shall provide surface loading rates nearly half that for operation at 20°C. Settling tanks may be covered for increasing efficiency.
2.4 Transmission
ground level in northern regions of India where freezing occurs. ’
and Distribution
the pipe below frost line to avoid freezing of buried pipe; the level of frost line is generally found to be between 0.9 and 1.2 m below
c>Galvanized
iron pipes to IS 1239 (Part 1) :
1990.
4 Cast iron pipes to IS 1536 : 1989.
e>UPVC
pipes to IS 4985 : 1988 when laid below frost line.
2.4.2 hwulating
Materials for Pipes
Apart from straw, grass, hessian, etc, 85 percent magnesia, glasswool or asbestos coated logging ropes may be used. 2.4.3 Distribution
Methods
In conventional system, the pipes should be buried below frost line; adequate draining points shall be provided to prevent freezing of water. House service connections shall be kept operative by the use of adequate heat insulation as shown in Fig. 16.14. 3 WASTE DISPOSAL 3.1 General The care exerc’ised for water supply systems should be applicable to disposal systems also. 3.2 Waterborne
System
a) Sewers shall be laid below the frost line. Manholes shall be made airtight. Trenches shall be closely filled with earth, where possible sewers shall be so located that the trench line is not in shadow when the sun is shining. Concrete, cast iron and stoneware pipes should be insulated.
SP62(S&T):1997 b)
c) Seepage Pits - The discharge of effluent shall be made below the frost line.
Septic tanks shall be located well below the frost line. Its capacity shall be increased by 100 percent for operation at 10°C over that for operation at 20°C.
WATERPROOF WRAPPING OVER
--a-d--m---
------A-
FROST
LINE ---_
FIG. 16.14 INSULATION DETAILSAT SERVICE-CONNECTION
431
c
1.1
.
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
-..
CHAPTER 17
SPECIALCONSTRUCTIONPROCEDURESEARTHQUAKEEFFECTS,ETC
.
CONTENTS
4.4 Seismic StrengtheningArrangements
1 GENERAL
PART 1 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANCE NORMAL BUILDINGS
OF
4.5 Framing of Thin Load Bearing Walls 4.6 Hollow Block Masonry
1 GENERAL 2 EARTHQUAKERESISTANTCONSTRUCTION OF NORMALBUILDINGS
5 SPECIALCONSTRUCTIONFEATURESFLOORS AND ROOFSWITH SMALLPRECASTCOMPONENTS
6 TIMBERSTRUCTURES - SPECIALARRANGEMENTS 6.1 Foundation
2.1 Types of Construction
6.2 Studwall or Brick Nogging Construction 3 GENERAL PRINCIPLESOF SEISMIC RESISTANCE ANNEX A BUILDING CATEGORIES BASED ON CONSTRUCTION EARTHQUAKE RESISTING FEATURES 3.1 Lightness ANNEX B OPENINGSINLOAD BEARINGWALLS 3.2 Continuity of Construction 3.3 Projecting or SuspendedParts
PART 2 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANCE WEAKER BUILDINGS
3.4 Building Configuration
1 Low STRENGTH MASONRYBUILDINGS
3.5 Strength in Various Directions 3.6 Foundation
1.1 General
3.7 Ductility 3.8 Non-Structural Parts
4 MASONRY STRUCTURESTiONFEATURES 4.1 General 4.2 Mortars 4.3 Cover
’
’
‘
SPECIALCONSTRUC-
2. BRICKWORK INWEAK MORTAR 3 STONE MASONRY (RANDOM RUBBLEOR SEMI-DRESSED) 4 IMPROVINGEARTHQUAKERESISTANCEOF EARTHENBUILDINGS 5 REPAIRAND SEISMICSTRENGTHENING OF BUILDINGS
OF
SP 62 ( S-L%T ) : 1997
CHAPTER 17
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES EARTHQUAKE EFFECTS, ETC 1 GENERAL
earthquake, blast or other effects which would ensure safety of the structure. As a first step, earthquake resistant structures are covered in Parts 1 and 2.
1.1 This Chapter deals with construction procedures required to take care of effects of forces like
PART 1 EARTHQUAKE
RESISTANCE
1 GENERAL
3.3 -Projecting or Suspended Parts
1.2 In addition, requirements of buildings against earthquake forces using weaker materials, such as, low strength masonry are covered in Part 2. Some guidelines for improving earthquake resistance of earthen buildings and repair and seismic strengthening of buildings are also included in Part 2.
2 EARTHQUAKE CONSTRUCTION
a) Projections shall be avoided as far as possible. If unavoidable, the parts projecting shall be properly reinforced and firmly tied to the main structure and their design shall be according to IS 1893 : 1984.
of seismic design shall
RESISTANT OF NORMAL
BUILDINGS
slabs shall be continuous throughout as far as possible. Concrete slabs shall be rigidly connected or integrally cast with support beams.
1.1 This Part deals with seismic resistant construction of normal buildings, using masonry, timber and precast building components.
1.3 The basic requirements conform to IS 1893 : 1984.
OF NORMAL
b) Ceiling plaster shall preferably be avoided, if unavoidable
it shall be as thin as possible.
c>
Suspended ceiling shall be preferably avoided; if unavoidable it shall be as light as possible.
BUILDINGS
2.1 Types of Construction
3.4 Building Configuration
The buildings covered include masonry construction using rectangular masonry units, timber construction and buildings with prefabricated flooring/roofing units.
In order to minimize torsion and stress consideration in buildings the following shall be adhered to:
3 GENERAL PRINCIPLES RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION
OF
The building should be a simple rectangle in plan and symmetrical both with respect to mass and rigidity so that the centres of mass and rigidity coincide in which case no separation sections other than expansion joints are necessary. For provision of expansion joints (see Chapter 13).
SEISMIC
3.1 Lightness Since earthquake force is a function of the weight of the building, it shall be as light as possible. Roofs and upper storeys of buildings should be as light as possible. 3.2 Continuity
b) If symmetry is not possible in plan, elevation or mass provision shaI1 be made for torsional and other effects due to earthquake forces in structural design or through crumple sections. The length of such building between separation sections shall not preferably exceed three times the width.
of Construction
a>As
far as possible, the parts of the building should be tied together in such a manner that the building acts as one unit.
b) Additions and alterations to the structures shall be accompanied by provision of separation or crumple sections between new and old structures as far as possible, unless positive measures are taken to establish continuity between them.
c>For
parts of building, between separation or crumple sections or expansion joints, floor 435
NOTE-As an nlternntive to separation section to reduce the torsionnlmxnent, the centrc of rigidity of the building may be brought close or coincident with centre of m~s by adjusting the locations and/or sizes of columns and walls.
c>Buildings
having plans with shapes like L, T, E and Y shall preferably be separated into rectangular parts by providing separation sections at appropriate places. Typical examples are shown in Fig. 17.1.
SP62(S&T):1997
I
I
I
I
0
0
T-SHAPE
L - SHAPE
Y -SHAPE
Y-SHAPE
E-SHAPE FIG. 17.1 TYPICAL SHAPESOF BUILDING WITH SEPARATIONSECTIONS NOTES 1 ~For buildings with small lengths of projections forming, L, E or Y shapes need not be provided with separation section. such cases, the length of projection may not exceed I.5 to percent of the total dimension of the building in the direction projection (see Fig. 17.2).
3.6 Foundation T, In 20 of
2 For buildings with minor asymmetry in plan and elevation, separation sections may be omitted.
3.5 Strength in Various Directions The building shall be designed to have adequate strength against earthquake effects along both the horizontal axes. The design shall also be safe considering the reversible nature of earehquake forces.
The structure shall not be founded on such loose soils which will subside or liquify during an earthquake, resulting in large differential settlements. 3.7 Ductility The main structural elements and their connections shall be designed to have a ductile failure. This will enable the structure to absorb energy during an e‘arthquake to avoid sudden collapse of the structure. Details of ductile joints for reinforced concrete structures are given in IS 13920 : 1993.
436
LL.
SP62(S&T):1997
I
A/L
> O-15
TO O-2 41
A
C
LJklLl A
A
AIL -> 0.25
1
AtLw0.15
L
,
L
FIG. 17.2 PLAN AND VERTICALIRREGULARITIES
3.8 Non-Structural
4.3 Cover
Parts
Suitable details should be worked out to connect the non-structural parts with the structural frame so that the deformation of the structural frame leads to minimum damage of the non-structural elements. 4 MASONRY STRUCTURES CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
Where steel reinforcing bars are provided in masonry, the bars shall be embedded with adequate cover; in cement sand mortar not leaner than 1:3 a minimum cover of 10 mm shall be provided or in cement concrete grade Ml5 a minimum cover of 15 mm or the bar diameter whichever is more shall be provided.
SPECIAL
4.4 Seismic Strengthening
4.1 General
a) All masonry buildings shall be strengthened by the methods as specified in Table 17.2.
Normal construction work in masonry shall be as per Chapter 4. The special features for earthquake resistant construction are as detailed below.
Figure 17.3 and 17.4 show the overall strengthening arrangements to be adopted for category D and E buildings, which consist of horizontal bands of reinforcement at critical levels, vertical reinforcing bars at corners, junctions of walls and jambs of openings. For location of openings, which have a reducing effect on lateral load resistance (see Annex B).
4.2 Mortars Tne recommended
mortar mixes are as in Table 17.1.
Table 17.1 Recommended Mortar Mixes (Clause 4.2) Building
Category
Proportions
of Cement-Lime-Sand
A
M2 (cement-sand 1 : 3) or richer
BandC
M2 (cement-lime-sand sand 1 : 6) or richer
DandE
H2 (cement-sand sand1:1:6)orricher
1:6) or M3 (lime-cinder
b)
I : 2 : 9) or (cement-
1:4) or Ml (cement-lime-
Lintel Band - Lintel band is a band provided at lintel level on all load bearing internal, external longitudinal and cross walls. Lintel band if provided in panel or partition wall also, will improve their stability during severe earthquake. Details of the specification given in 4.4.1.
NOTES 1 Mortar grades are given in Chapter 4. 2 Building category based on (xh values is given in IS 4326 1993 (see ulso Annex A).
Arrangements
:
of the band are
c> Roof Band - Roof band is a band provided immediately below the roof or floors. Such a band need not be provided underneath slabs
437
.
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997 roof band at eaves level. Details of the specification of the band are given in 4.4.1.
resting on bearing walls, provided that the slabs are continuous over the intermediate wall up to crumple sections, if any and cover the width of end walls, fully or at least 3/4 of the wall thickness. Details of the specification of the band are given in 4.4.1.
band is a band e) Plinth Band - Plinth provided at plinth level of walls on top of the foundation wall. This is to be provided where strip footings of masonry (other than reinforced masonry or reinforced concrete) are used and the soil is either soft or uneven in its properties.
4 Gable Band - Gable band is a band provided at the top of gable masonry below the purlins. This band shall be made continuous with the
4. Door 5. Window
1. Lintel Band 2. Roof/Floor Band 3. Vertical Band
FIG. 17.3 OVERALL ARRANGEMENTOF REINFORCINGMASONRY BUILDINGS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Lintel Band Eave Level (Roof) Band Gable Band Door Window Vertical Steel Bar Rafter
8. Holding DowmBolt 9. Brick/Stone Wall 10. Door Lintel Integrated with Roof Band a - Perspective View b- Details of Truss Connection with Wall c- Detail of Integrating Door Lintel with Roof Band
FIG. 17.4 OVERALL ARRANGEMENTOF REINFORCINGMASONRY BUILDING HAVING PITCHEDROOF
438
SP62(S&T):1997 Table 17.2 Strengthening Arrangements Masonry Buildings (Clause 4.4) Building Category
Number of Storeys (2)
(I) A
B
i) 1 to 3 ii) 4
i)
1 to3
ii) 4 C
D
E NOTE -
i) I and 2 ii) 3 and 4
i) 1 and2 ii) 3 and 4
1to 3
for
b) In case of reinforced brickwork, the thickness of joints for steel bars shall be increased to provide a cover of 10 mm. The area of steel shall be the same as for reinforced concrete work.
Strengthening to be Provided in All Storeys (3)
c) For full integrity of walls at corners and junctions of walls and effective horizontal building resistance of bands, continuity of reinforcement is essential (see Fig. 17.6).
Mortar (see 4.2) Mortar (see 4.2), Lintel and roof band and where neces sary gable band (see 4.4)
Table 17.3 Vertical Reinforcement Masonry Walls (Clauses 4.4 and 4.6)
Same as A (ii) plus bracing in plan at tie level of roofs (see 4.4). where necessary plinth band (see 4.4)
Building Category
Storeys
>
/
Sameas B (i) plus vertical steel at comers (see 4.4)
(1)
Same as B (i) Same as B (ii) plus vertical steel at jambs of openings (see 4.4)
B
Same as C (ii) Same as C (ii) plus dowel bars (see 4.4)
C
Same as D (ii)
Vertical Reinforcement - Vertical steel at corners and junctions of walls which are up to 340 mm (lf brick) thick, shall be provided as in Table 17.3. For walls thicker than 340 mm, the area of the bars shall be proportionately be increased. Bracing in Plan - At tie level all trusses and the gable end shall be provided with diagonal braces in plan so as to transmit the lateral shear due to earthquake force to the gable walls acting as shear walls at the ends. 4.4.1 Section and Reinforcement
D
E
Diameter of Bar (Deformed)
No. (2)
Location (3)
(4)
1to3 4
-
-
Top Third Second Bottom
i0 10 10 12
I,2 3
-
-
Top Middle Bottom
4
Top Third Second Bottom
10 10 12 10 10 12 12
Fourth storey not allowed in Category E buildings.
Dowel Bars -In category D and E buildings, to further integrate the box action of walls steel dowel bars may be used at corners and T junctions of walls, at sill level of windows, to a length of 900 mm from the inside corner in each wall. Such dowel may be in the form of U stirrups 8 mm dia; the dowels shall be laid in 1:3 cement-sand mortar with a minimum cover of 10 mm.
in
1 2
Top Bottom
3
Top Middle Bottom
4
Top Third Second Bottom
I
-
2
Top Bottom
3
Top Middle Bottom
10 10 ‘2 10 12 12 10 12 16 20 12 12 16 12 16 16
NOTES 1 Four storeys not permitted in Category E buildings. 2 For precast components 3 No strengthening to three storeys.
of Band
a) The band shall be made of M 15 grade concrete or reinforced brickwork in cement mortar 1 : 3. The band shall be full width of the wall and not less than 75 mm in depth and reinforced as given in Table 17.4. In coastal areas the grade of concrete shall be M 20.
439
(see 5).
arrangement
for Category A buildings up
4 Vertical reinforcement shall pass through the plinth masonry of foundations, roof slab, roof band, lintel bands in all storeys (see Fig. 17.5). 5 The vertical bars will be covered with concrete M IS or with cement mortar (1:3) in suitably created pockets, around the bars (see Fig. 17.5).
SP62(S&T):1997
4iizhll 3.
=
V
:
l-F--b-
l -One
l/2
brick length
: B-4
;f -
Half brick length, V-Vertical
(a) and (btAlternate
courses in one brick wall: (c)
courses at T-junction
of If brick wall
steel bar with mortnr/concrete filling in pocket
andCd)-Altemntecourses at comerjunctionof Ii brickwall;
(e) and (D-Alternate
FIG. 17.5 TYPICALDETAILSOF PROVIDING VERTICAL STEEL BARS IN BRICK MASONRY
I
440
SP 62 ( S & T ) : 1997
I
b,
(d 1 2.
1. Longitudinal Bars bl, b2- Wall Thickness a) Section of Band with Two Bars c) Structural Plan at Comer Junction
Lateral Ties
b) Section of Band with Four Bars d) Sectional Plan at T-junction of Walls
All dimensions in millimetrcs.
FIG.
17.6 REINFORCEMENT
AND BENDING
Span, m
(1)
B C
(2)
i) 5. 6.7
E
(4)
2
8
ii)
8
2
IO
i) ii)
5.6 7
2 2
8 10
8
2
12
i) 5
2
8
iii) D
a) For thin load bearing walls, 150 mm thick including plaster reinforced concrete columns shall be provided at all corners and junctions of walls, spaced at not more than I .5 m apart.
Number of Diameter of Bar Bars (Deformed) (3)
ii)
6
2
10
iii)
7
2
12
iv)
8
4
IO
i)
5
2
IO
ii)
6
2
12
iii)
7
4
IO
iv)
8
4
12
IN RC BAND
4.5 Framing of Thin Load Bearing Walls (see Fig. 17.7)
Table 17.4 Recommended Longitudinal Steel in Reinforced Bands (Deformed Bars) (Clauses 4.4,4.4.1,4.6 and 5.1) Building Category
DETAIL
b)
~C)
The sequence of construction between walls and the columns shall be first to build the wall up to 4 to 6 courses height leaving toothed gaps (tooth projection being about 40 mm only) for the columns and then to pour Ml 5 grade concrete to fill the columns against the walls using forms only on two sides. The band concrete should be cast on the wall masonry directly so as to develop full bond with it.
d)
Such construction should be limited only to two storeys. The horizontal length of wall should not exceed 7 m and the storey height to 3 m.
NOTES 1 No strengtheningarrangementfor Category A buildingsup to
3 storeys. 2 For spans greater than 8 m. plasters or buttressesmay be
introducedto reduce the spnn. or special calculations have to be made. 3 For plain bars, the diameters should be IO, 12, 16, 20 and 25 respectively for deformed bars of 8. IO, 12. 16.20 given above.
Horizontal bands should be located at all floor, roof and levels of the openings.
4.6 Hollow Block Masonry The horizontal and vertical steel for earthquake resistance shall be placed as described below.
4 For RC band a clear cover of 20 mm shall be provided for steel.
5
For RC band the vertical depth shall be 75 mm for 2 bars and I50 mm for 4 bars.
6 Stirrups shall be 6 mm dia spaced at 150 mm.
441
a)
Horizontal Band - U-shaped blocks may be used for construction of horizontal bands at various levels of the storeys as shown in Fig. 17.8. The reinforcement shall be 2.5 percent more than that recommended fin Table 17.4. Continuity of reinforcement shall be ensured.
SP62(S&T):1997
1. Window 3. Brick Panel
2. Door 4. LintelBand
All dimensionsin millimetres. FIG. 17.7 FRAMINGOF THIN LOAD-BEARING BRICK WALLS
FIG. 17.8 U-BLOCKS FORHORIZONTAL BANDS 442
SP62(S&T):1997
1) Ml5 grade should be used for the beam
b) Vertical Reinforcement - Bars, as given in Table 17.3 shall be located inside the cavities of hollow blocks, one bar in each cavity (see Fig. 17.9). When more than one bar have to be located, this can be done in two or more adjacent cavities; these cavities should be filled with cement-coarse sand mortar I:3 and compacted with rod. c) Splicing of reinforcement by welding or overlap is permitted. To reduce the number overlaps the block ends may be U-shaped shown in Fig. 17.9 which will help in tieing bars together by binding wire.
and the reinforcement Table 17.4.
shall
be as in
2) If depth of the beam is more than 75 mm, the reinforcement shall be provided each corner with 8 mm bar. 3)
at
A typical detail is shown in Fig. 17.10.
of b) Top Reinforcement - The reinforcement 6 mm dia bars of 150 mm centres on top of the channel core units, shall project out at both ends and tied to the tie beam reinforcement.
by of as the
c) Deck Concrete - Deck concrete over the precast units shall be of Ml5 grade to act monolithically with the units; it shall be at least 35 mm thick,
5 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION FEATURES FLOORS AND ROOFS WITH SMALL PRECAST COMPONENTS
d) In ~general for precast components, the principle is to make them act as a diaphragm to withstand seismic forces.
5.1 Special construction features for floor and roofs with small precast components, are given below :
4 Tie Beam - Tie beam is a beam provided all round the floor or roof to bind together all the precast components to make it into a diaphragm. The beam shall be full width of the wall allowing for bearing of precast units; the depth shall be the depth of precast component.
6 TIMBER STRUCTURES ARRANGEMENTS
-
SPECIAL
6.1 Foundation Timber structures shall preferably start on masonry or concrete foundations except small buildings (50 m2 or less) may rest on ground. The structure may be fixed to~the foundation as shown in Fig. 17.11.
BINDING
WIR --i 304
FIG, 17.9 VERTICALREINFORCEMENTIN CAVITIES
443
.
SP62(S&T):1997 REINFORCEMENT OF TIE BEAM d 6 MS BARS @ 150 c/c BOTHWAYS TIE0 TO TIE BEAM REINFORCEMENT DECK
CONCRETE
PRECAST
UNIT
BEAM/WALL
17.1OB Cored Unit Floor/Roof
17.1 OA Channel Unit Floor/Roof
Alldimensions
in millimetres.
FIG. 17.10 CONNECTIONOFCHANNEL/COREDUNIT FLOOR/ROOF (WITHDECKCONCRETE) WITHTIE BEAM
OR CONCRETE
17.11A Suitable for Strip Foundations
17.llB Suitable for Isolated Column Footings
All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG. 17.11 DETAILSOFCONNECTION OFCOLUMN WITHFOUNDATION For small buildings of area less than 50 m2 resting on ground, they may be fixed to vertical poles embedded in the ground. The superstructure has to be strengthened for earthquake resistance.
a)
6.2 Stud Wall or Brick Nogging Construction
There shall be at least one diagonal brace of minimum size 20 mm x 40 mm for every 1~5m2 area of the wall. Diagonal braces shall be connected to the stud wall members with at least 4 nails.
b) Horizontal bracing, 20 mm
It consists of timber studs and corner posts framed into
sills, top plates and wall plates. Horizontal struts and braces are used to stiffen the frame against horizontal forces. Typical details are as in Fig. 17.12. 444
x 90 mm shall be provided at not more than 1 m apart. It shall be provided at T- junctions and corners of wall at sills, first floor and eaves level. They shall be connected to the wall plates by at least 9 nails.
SP62( S &T)~: 1997
HORIZONTAL 20 x 90
BRACE
DOUBLE STUD AT WINDOW OPENING
‘AL
POST
All dimensions in millimetlxx
FIG. 17.12 TIMBERFRAMINGINSTUDWALL CONSTRUCTION WITH OPENINGIN WALL
445
SP62(S&T):1997
ANNEX
A
(Table 17.1) BUILDING
CATEGORIES
BASED ON EARTHQUAKE
A-l ~For the purpose of specifying the earthquake resisting features in masonry and wooden buildings, the buildings may be categorised on the basis of value ofcch given by~cxt,= cc@I. p where Cch cl0 I P
Building Categories
ANNEX (Clause
Ofah
A
0.04 to 0.05
B
0.05 to 0.06
C
0.06 to 0.08
D
0.08 to 0.12
E
0.12 and above
B 4.4)
the size and position of openings Fig. 17.13 and Table 17.5.
Ventilator
are given
II me,,,
q&.,1/ 3.
Range
IN LOAD BEARING WALLS
B-l Door and window openings in walls reduce their lateral load resistance and hence, should preferably be small and more centrally located. The guidelines on
1. Door
FEATURES
A-2 The building categories, A to E are listed below:
= design seismic coefficient for the building, = basic seismic coefficient for the zone in which it is located as per IS 1893 : 1984, = importance factor applicable to the building as per IS 1893 : 1984, and = soil foundation factor as per IS 1893 : 1984.
OPENINGS
RESISTING
2.
Window
FIG. 17.~13DIMENSIONSOF OPENINGSAND PIERSFORRECOMMENDATIONSGIVEN IN TABLE 17.5
446
in
SP62(S&T):1997 Size and Position of Openings in Load Bearing Walls (Clauses B- 1 arid B-3)
Table 17.5
SI Position of Opening
Details of Opening for Building Category
No. f
I
(3)
C (4)
Dond E (5)
Zero
230 mm
450 mm
AnndB
(1)
(2)
i) Distance of bs from the
SECTION
Al
XX
inside comer of outside wall, Min ii)
For total openmgs;
length of the ratio
or (171+ bz + h)lli, (bh + b7)/ 12shall not
fx
7
X
exceed a) for one-storeyed building
0.60
0.55
0.50
b) for two-storeyed
0.50
0.46
0.42
0.42
0.37
0.33
450 mm
560 mm
6OOmm
600mm
building c) 3-or 4-storeyed building iii)
Pier width between 340 mm consecutive openings bd, Min
iv) Vertical
distance between two openings one above the other /13,
600 mm
W = t = b =
ft = V =
FIG. 17.14 STRENGTHENING
Thickness~of concrete Vertical bar
MASONRY
AROUND
OPEINING
Min
B-4 Projecting anchored.
B-2 Openings in any storey shall preferably have their top at the same level so that a continuous band could be provided over them, including lintels throughout the building.
PART 2 EARTHQUAKE
MASONRY
windows/ventilators
shall be suitably
B-5 If a tall opening from top to bottom were to split wall into two portions, these portions shall be reinforced with horizontal reinforcement of 6 mm diabars at not-more than 450 mm spacing, one on each face, properly tied to the vertical steel at jambs, corners or junction of walls.
B-3 Where openings do not comply with the guidelines of Table 17.5, they should be strengthened by providing reinforced concrete or reinforced brickwork as shown in Fig. 17.14 with high strength deformed (H.S.D.) bars of 8 mm diametre. Quantity of steel shall be measured at the jambs. Vertical reinforcement shall be as given in Table 17.3.
1 LOW STRENGTH
Window Wall thickness Lintel thickness
B-6 The use of arches over openings is a source of weakness. When used, steel ties should be provided.
RESISTANCE
BUILDINGS
1.1 General The use and strengthening of low strength masonry buildings shall be restricted to Zones III and IV of IS 1893 : 1984. No special provisions are necessary for such buildings in Zones I and II. Low strength masonry includes brickwork laid in mud mortar, random rubble, uncoursed undressed or semi-dressed stone masonry with weak mortars. Other requirements of 4 and 6 of Part 1 shall apply. 447
OF WEAKER
BUILDINGS
a ) This type of construction should not be permitted for important buildings with I> 1.5 and should preferably be avoided for building categories D and E. b) To protect course may soaking the water proof C)
the weak mortar a damp-proof be laid as prevent rain water from wall and softening the mortar. A plaster may bemused.
Resistance to overturning under the action of horizontal force shall be designed for.
SP62(S&T):1997 2 BRICKWORK
IN WEAK
MORTAR
a) For this type of construction, building
shall be restricted
Category A, B-ani C
-
Category D -
should be embedded in cement mortar 1:3 with a suitable cover of 6 mm.
the height of the to
the following:
Three storeys with flat roof; two storeys plus attic for pitched roof. Two storeys with flat roof one stoxy plus attic for pitched roof.
3 STONE MASONRY SEMI-DRESSED)
RUBBLE
a) Height of stone masonry
brick bonds should be followed. For perpendicular walls, a sloping (stepped) joint is necessary by making the corners to a height of-600 mm and then building the wall in between them. Otherwise toothed joint should be provided in both the walls; alternatively, it should be btiilt in lifts of about 450 mm (see Fig. 17.15).
b) Bond-Usual
b) c)
c) The minimum
wall thickness should be one brick for one storey construction; and one brick for top storey and 1; brick for storeys below for 3 storey construction.
4 The mortar should be lime mortar 1:3 or mud mortar. When steel is provided horizontally
(RANDOM
wall should be restricted to 2 storeys for category A and B if built with lime mortar or mud mortar; another storey may be permitted if built with cement mortar. For category C and D two storeys may be permitted with cement mortar; only one storey with lime or mud mortar. Attic may be permitted for two storey buildings. Masonry should preferably be brought to courses at not more than 600 mm lift. The wall thickness should be not largerthan 450 mm. Stones of the inner and outer wythes should be interlocked. ‘Throu’gh’ stones of full length equal to the thickness of wall should be used in every lift of 600 mm and not more than 1.2 m apart, horizontally. If full length stones ate not available, stones in pairs each of about 3/4 of the wall thickness may be used (see Fig. 17.16).
it
(1.6. c = Toothed jointsinwallA. B nnd C All dimensions inmillimetrw FIG. 17.15 ALTERNATING TOOTHEDJOINTSIN WALLS AT CORNERAND T-JUNCTION
t P&50
l-Through
stone, P-Pair 17.16A
of overlapping stone, 3-S-shape
tie, 4-Hooked
tie, 5-Wood 17.168
Sectional Plan of Wall
.
plank, 6Floor
Cross-Section of Wall
FIG. 17.16 THROUGHSTONEANDBOND ELEMENTS 448
0~
level.
SP62(S&T):1997
4 In place of through stones, ‘bonding elements,
c) Rammed earth in which moist soil is filled between forms and compacted manually or mechanically. The soil for rammed earth construction will generally have less clay than that used for blocks or adobes. Small amounts of straw, not more than one-fourths the volume of soil water mix, shall be added for fissure control.
of steel bars.8 to 10 mm dia bent to S shape or as hooked links may be used with a cover of 25 mm from each face of the wall (see Fig. 17.16).
e>Also
in place of through stones wooden cut size pieces 40 mm x 40 mm cross section or concrete piece of section 50 mm x 50 mm with 8 mm bars may be inserted.
d) Wood, bamboo or cane structures plastered with mud (Ikra walling in N.E. Region) (see Chapter 4).
f-l Bonding
elements should also be used at corners and junctions of walls.
4.1.1 The improvements are applicable to buildings in Zones III, IV and V of IS 1893 : 1984, and without the use of stabilizers for earthen elements.
g) Mortar should be either lime mortar 1 : 3, mud mortar or cement mortar 1:6.
h) Buttresses may be provided for walls longer.
4.2 General arrangements
than 5 m. 4 IMPROVING OF EARTHEN
EARTHQUAKE BUILDINGS
RESISTANCE
beloa;: The height of adobe building should be restricted to one storey plus attic only in Zones IV and V and to two storeys in Zone III. Important building, with I > 1.5, shall not be constructed with earthen walls in Zones IV and V; in Zone III they may be constructed but restricted only to single storey.
4.1 General Earthen walls may be constructed fourways:
in the following
Hand formed layers using mud lumps to form walls is the weakest of all earthen walls. Use of straw will impart strength and reduce fissures.
b) Sites with sand, loose soils, poorly compacted clays and fill materials should generally be avoided; also sites with high water table should be avoided.
b) Block
or adobe construction, cut from hardened soil or formed in moulds and compacted, are laid in courses using mud mortar from the same soil. Addition of straw in mud mortar in equal volume would make it nonshrinking; the mortar mix should be allowed to remain for 7 days before use. Normal breaking of joints and related masonry practices should be followed.
15 6LtTh
for seismic resistance are as
c) Foundation depth shah vary between one to two times the thickness of wall depending on number of storeys; depth shall be at least 0.4 m. d) Wall dimensions, openings, Fig. 17.17 and 17.18. e) The general Fig. 17.19.
AND
configuration
shall shall
1’““l+-
f-77
-1- Cross wall, 2 - Pillaster, 3 - Buttress, t - Wall thickness 17.17A Walls and Buttressing All dimensionsin millimetres. FIG.
17.17 WALLDIMENSIONS
449
17.178
Tapered Wall
be as in be as
in
SP62(S&T):1997
l-l
1 W OR V
W ORV
‘I
D57200 WS1200 LS101
1200 v -c f?OO x 5
.?I -
Door,
W - Window,
Y - Ventilators
Alldimensions inmillimetres. FIG. 17.18WALL DIMENSIONS, PILLASTERS AT CORNERS
17.19A
17.198
Building Configuration
17.19C Footing on Soft Soil
Footing on Firm Soil
1-
Light roof; 2 - Light gable wall (matting or boarding); 3 - Rain protection Stable plaster; 5 - Plinth height for flood protection; 6 - Stable foundation; level; 9 - Ground level; 10 -Waterproof layer
4-
overhang (about 500 mm); 7 - Good mortar; 8 - Floor
All dimensions inmillimetres. FIG. 17.19ADEQUATECONFIGURATION OFEARTHENBUILDING
450
SP62(S&T): 4.3 Strengthening
Arrangements
e) For construction with wood/cane, strengthening arrangements are bracings as shown in Fig. 17.22.
4 In load bearing walls, two horizontal continous reinforcing and bonding beams or bands should be placed one coinciding with lintels over doors and windows, the other just below the rooflevel. If the wall height is less than 2.5 m, the band at lintel level may be avoided.
b) ThebandsmaybeoftimberasshowninFig. cl The horizontal
band tresses and plasters.
should
f) For higher seismic intensities as in Zones VIII and IX, internal bracing as shown in Fig. 17.23 may be done.
17.20.
5 REPAIR AND SEISiVfIC STRENGTHENING OF BUILDINGS
cover the but5.1 Reference may be~made to I-S 13935 : 1993.
d) Vertical reinforcement
in mesh form, may be used in Zone V (see Fig. 17.21).
17.20A
Band with Single Timber and Diagonal Brace at Corner
17.208 1-
Adobe; 2 -
Mud mortar; 3 -
Band with Two Timbers in Parallel
Wooden band; 4 -
Diagonal brace.
FIG. 17.20 WOODENBAND IN WALLS AT LINTELAND ROOFLEVELS
451
c /
1997
SP62(S&T):1997
17.21A Pattern of Canes in Clay Mud Walls
17.21B Pattern in Adobe Walls
ir
d
17.21C Pattern in Adobe Walls lClay mud Wall; 2 - Adobe; 3 -Vertical cane/bamboo; 4 - Horizontal crushed canes/split bamboo every 4th layer of abode b, S = Spacing about 400 mm; d = Diameter of cane/bamboo about 20 mm
FIG. 17.21 REINFORCEMENT IN EARTHEN WALLS
452
SP62(S&T):1997
I-
1 E 8
E 8 m
s
c: \f 64
ri ,
rL
~
-
1 3 -
Clay mud covering over framing CanelBamboohVood framing
2 - Mud plaster on matting 4 - Cane/Bamboo/lkra knitting
17.22A Elementary On-Site Construction
17.228
1 - Diagonal brace 3 - CanelBambooMlood framing
Prefabricated Panels
2 - Mud plaster on matting 4 - CanelBamboollkra knitting 17.22C Diagonal Bracing
FIG. 17.22BRACING OF EARTHENCONSTRUCTIONWITHCANES, BAMBOO OR WOODEN STRUCTURE
453
SP62(S&T):1997
SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM
B
PLAN
SHOWING
SYSTEM
‘A’
SHOWING
SECTION-
. .
SYSTEM
‘f3’
1,l
HOLD FAST (STEEL 1
CORNER BRACING
CORNER BRACING
Minimum Dimensions 1 - Column 2 - Sill 3 - Beam 4 - Diagonal 5 - Strut 6 - Ceiling beam -Corner 7 - Holdfast Joints - Use 6 gauge nails 75 mm long minimum 2 from thickness or straps of 2 mm thickness. l
lOOx75*OR loo@ 100x75 100x100OR75~ 100x50 100x50 75xl25ORlOO~ 100 x 100 each face through iron sheet gussets minimum 1 mm
All dimensionsin millimetres. FIG. 17.23 BRACED WOODFRAMEFORADOBEANDOTHERWALLSINMUDMORTAR
454
.
CHAPTER18 DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
8.2 Masonry Structures
2 PLANNING
8.3 Reinforced Concrete
3 PRECAUTIONS AND PROTECTIVE MEASURES BEFORE STARTINGDEMOLITION WORK
8.4 PrecastReinforced Concrete
4 PROTECTION OFTHEPUBLIC
8.6 Steel
5 SEQUENCEOF DEMOLITION OPERATIONS
8.7 Other Elements
6 DEMOLITIONOFFLOORS 7 DEMOLITIONOF WALLS
8.5 PrestressedConcrete
9 REMOVALOFMATERIALS 9.1 General
7.1 Procedure
9.2 Through Chutes
7.2 Catch Platforms
9.3 Through Openings
8 DEMOLITION OFDIFFERENT TYPESOFSTRUCTURES 10 REFERENCES AND ELEMENTS 8.1 General
SP62(S&T):1997
CHAPTER 18
DEMQLITION OF BUILDINGS Ensure that the demolition conditions do not, at any stage, enhance the nuisance value of demolition work on ‘the use of adjacent buildings;
1 GENERAL 1.1 Demolition of any structure is, inherently, more hazardous than the construction or erection of the same. From the point of view of safety, the conditions usually encountered awhile dismantling a structure, whatever its magnitude, do not lend themselves to the degree of control possible in the construction operations, where more stable conditions are generally obtainable. It is all the more imperative, therefore, that adequate attention is paid to planning and execution of demolition work, in its various stages, so as to minimize the risk of accidents and injuries to the personnel engaged in demolition operations.
No structure or part of the structure or any floor or temporary support or scaffold, side wall or any device for equipment shall be loaded in excess of the safe load bearing capacity, in its then existing condition; and Stairs and stair railings, passage ways and ladders shall be left in place as long as possible. These should be maintained in a safe condition.
It has therefore become necessary to laydown certain safety procedures which along with a planned programme could ensure adequate safety, particularly with the involvement of management, supervisors and workers. 1.2 The demolition way that:
3.1 The following precautions land protective measures shall be taken before commencement of demolition work:
work shall be proceeded in such a
a) it causes least damage and nuisance adjoining building and the members public; and b) it satisf=s accidents.
3 PRECAUTIONS AND PROTECTIVE MEASURES BEFORE STARTING DEMOLITION WORK
all
safety requirements
4 On every demolition job, danger signals shall
to the of the
be conspicuously posted all around the structure and all doors, openings giving access to structures shall be kept barricaded or manned except during the actual passage of workmen or equipment. However provision shall be made for at least two independent exits for escape of workmen during any emergency.
to avoid
1.3 A separate handbook on all aspects construction safety is under preparation by the Bureau of Indian Standards. This Chapter will therefore confine itself to procedures and safety precautions for demolition and dismantling of buildings.
b) Walkways and passageways shall be provided for the use of the workmen who shall be instructed to use them and all such walkways and passageways shall be kept adequately lighted, free from all debris and other materials.
2 PLANNING 2.1 Before beginning the actual work of demolition, a careful study shall be made of the structure which is to be pulled down and also of its surroundings. This shall include the following:
a>The manner
in which the various parts of buildings are supported and how far the stage by stage demolition would affect the safety of the adjoining structure;
b) A definite plan and procedure of demolition
tive, because of existing danger, to ensure that no unauthorized person shall enter the site of demolition outside working hours, a watchman shall be employed. In addition to watching the site he~shall also be responsible for maintaining all signs, notices, lights, barricades, etc. During nights, red lights shall be placed on or about the barricades.
d) The power on all electrical service lines shall
work shall be prepared, taking into account the loads on various structural parts and their supports;
be shutoff and all such lines cut nor disconnected at or outside the property line. The only exception would be any powerlines required for the demolition work itself. Prior to cutting of such lines, the necessary approval of the Authority shall be obtained.
cl Before
commencement of each stage of demolition, the supervisor shall brief the workmen in detail regarding the safety aspects to be kept in view;
457
4’
cl Where in any work of demolition it is impera-
SP62(S&T):1997 anticipated to the adjoining structure, the same shall be got vacated to avoid any danger to human life.
e) All mains and meters of the building shall be removed or protected from damage.
0 All gas, water, steam and other service lines
0 Ladders, when used, shall conform to IS 3696
shall be shutoff and capped or otherwise controlled at or outside the property line.
s)
(Part 2) : 1991. Ladders or their side railsshall extend not less than 1.O m above the floor or platform to which the ladder gives access. All ladders shall be secured against slipping out at the bottom and against movement in any direction at the top.
If a structure to be demolished has been partially wrecked by fire, explosion or other catastrophe, the walls and damaged roofs shall be shored and braced suitably.
h) Construction
sheds and tool boxes should be so located as to protect workers from injuries of fatling objects, wall, etc.
u>All exterior
wall openings which extend down to the floor level shall be barricaded to a height not less than 1 m above the floor level. All floor openings and shafts not meant as material chutes shall be floored over and endorsed with ground rails and toe boards.
9 A warning device should be installed in the area to be used to warn the workers, in case of danger.
k) Screens shall be placed, where necessary, to
v>All
existing fixtures/services required during demolition operations shall be well protected with~substantial covering to the satisfaction of the Authority.
prevent tlying pieces from injuring the fellow workmen.
ml No demolition work shall be carried out during storm or heavy rain.
w) When demolition is to be done by mechanical
4 No demolition
work shall be carried out at night specially when the building or structure to be demolished in an inhabited area.
means such as weight ball and power showels, additional precautions are the following necessary :
P) All necessary safety appliances shall be issued to the workmen and their use explained. It shall be ensured that the workers are using all the safety appliances while at work. The safety appliances should be as follows:
1) The area shall be barricaded for a minimum distance of 1; times the height of the wall;
2)
While the mechanical device is in operation no workmen shall be allowed to enter the building being demolished;
3)
The device shall be so located as to.avoid falling debris; and
4)
The device when being used shall not cause any damage to adjacent structure, powerline, other services, etc.
1) Safety helmets as per IS 2925 : 1984;
2) Goggles made of celluloid lens to be worn at the time of demolition of floors, walls, tearing of plaster, etc, specially when equipment like jack hammers are used for demolition work, to protect the eyes from flying~pieces, dust, dirt, etc, that may be blown up by wind. 3)
Leather or rubber gloves worn during demolition of RCC work or removing steel work, where the hands of workers are likely to be injured.
4)
Safety belts while working at higher level to-prevent falling from the structure.
4 PROTECTION
OF THE PUBLIC
4.1 Protection of the public before and during demolition is important and the following points should be kept in mind: a) Every sidewalk or road adjacent to the work shall be closed or protected. All main roads, which are open to the public shall be~kept open to the public clear and unobstructed at all times.
q) First-aid equipment shall be available at all demolition works of any magnitude. Also, by prior arrangement, a qualified doctor be available at call.
b) dhildren and public shall be kept out of the building and the adjoining yards.
r) When there is a possibility of fire breaking out, appropriate portable first-aid fire appliances (see IS 2 190 : 1992) shall be kept at hand. s) The removal of a member may weaken the side wall of an adjoining structure and to prevent possible damage, these walls shall be supported until such time as permanent protection is provided. In case of any danger is 458
c) If the structure to be demolished is more than two- storeyed or 7.5-m high, measured from the sidewalk or street which cannot be closed or safely diverted, and the horizontal distance from the inside edge of the side walk to the structure is 4.5 m or less, a substantial side walk shed (see Fig. 18.1) [see nlso (k)] shall be constructed over the entire length of the
I
PLANKING-I
POST
RIGIDLY
n
BUILDING
UNDER
DEMOLITION
FIXEO
VARIES (FULL WIDTH OF SIDEWALK)
FIG. 18.1 TYPICALSKETCHOFASIDEWALKSHED the roof of the shed is not more than 600 kg/m*. The height of the sidewalk shed shah be such as to give minimum clearance of 2.4 m.
sidewalk adjacent to the structure of sufficient width with a view to accomodating the pedestrian traffic without causing congestion. The sidewalk shall be lighted sufficiently to ensure safety at all times.
4
A toe board at least 1 m the shed shall be provided and ends of the sidewalk may be vertical or inclined than 45”.
s>Sidewalk
shed openings, for loading purposes, shall be kept closed at all times except during actual loading operations.
high above the roof on the outside edge shed. Such boards outward at not more
h) The deck flooring of the sidewalk shed shall consist of plank of not less than 50 mm thickness closely laid and deck made watertight.
_i>All members of the shed shall be adequately
e) Except where the roofof a sidewalk shed solid-
braced and connected to resist displacement members or distortion of framework.
ly abuts the structure, the face of the sidewalk shed towards the building shall be completely closed by providing sheeting/planking to prevent the falling material penetrating into the shed.
of
k) When the horizontal distance from the inside edge of the sidewalk to the structure is more than 4.5 m and less than 7.5 m, a sidewalk shed or fence may be built or in their place a substantial railing shall be constructed on the inside of the sidewalk or roadway along the entire length of demolition side of the property with movable bars as may be necessary for the proper prosecution of the work.
f) The roof of the sidewalk shed shall be capable of sustaining a load of 730 kg/m2. Only in exceptional cases, say due to lack of other space, the storing of the material on a sidewalk shed may be permitted in which case the shed shall be designed for a load of 1 460 kg/m*. Roof of sidewalk shed shall be designed taking into account the impact of the falling debris. By frequent removal of loads it shall be ensured that the maximum load, at any time, on
Where workers entrances to the building being demolished are not completely protected by sidewalk sheds, all such entrances shall be protected by canopies extending from the face of the building to a point not less than 2.5 m 459
SP62(S&T):1997 from it. In such a case, overhead projection shall be at least 0.6 m wider than the building entrance or opening and every canopy shall be as strong as the sidewalk shed.
6 DEMOLITION
OF FLOORS
6.1 For demolition of floors the following procedure may be followed: a) A slit in width not exceeding 300 mm shall be cut at the first stage for the entire length of the 5 SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION slab along which it spans (see Fig. 18.2). The OPERATIONS opening shall thereafter be increased to the desired width by suitable instalments. 5.1 The sequence of demolition shall generally be as given below: b) Planks of sufficient strength not less than 50 mm thick and 250 mm wide shall be The demolition shall always proceed sysprovided at a spacing not greater than 0.4 m. tematically storey by storey in descending These planks shall be so placed as to give order and the demolition of upper floors shall workmen firm support to guard against any be completely over before any of the supportunexpected collapse. ing members or other important portion on the c) Stringers of ample strength shall be installed to lower floor is disturbed. No unnecessary support the planks where necessary and the work shall go on below when the demolition is ends of stringers shall be supported by floor in progress above. When some work is to be beams, girders and not by floor slab alone. done at the lower level, adequate protection When floors are being removed, no workmen shall be provided for all the workmen so 4 shall be allowed to work in the area, directly engaged. underneath and such area shall be barricaded b) The requirements of (a) shall not prohibit the to prevent access to it [see 5.1(a)]. demolition of structures by sections, if means The demolition of the floor in question shall be d are taken to prevent injuries to persons nor started only after the surrounding area for a damage to property. distance of 6 m have been entirely cleared of c) Roofs (or floors), generally, be demolished persons, and the debris and other unnecessary first before demolishing the supporting walls material removed. structural elements. f) Planks used for temporary protection shall be 4 All glazed sash, glazed doors and windows sound and at least 50 mm thick. They shall be etc, shall be removed before the demolition of laid close together with ends overlapping at roofs and walls starts. All fragile and loose least 100 mm over solid bearing to prevent fixtures shall be removed. Lath and loose tipping underload. plaster be stripped off throughout the entire 7 DEMOLITION OF WALLS structure. This is advantageous because it reduces glass breakage and also eliminates a 7.1 Procedure large amount of dust producing material before The following procedure should be followed when more substantial parts of the building are demolishing walls: removed. a) While walls or sections of masonry are being demolished it shall be ensured that they are not
a>
STRIPS NOT TO EXCEED 300 mm
INDEPENDENT WORKING PLATFORM TO BE USED WHEREVER POSSIBLE
LINES OF SUPPORT UNDER FLOOR
DIRECTION OF SPAN MAIN RElNFORCEME
FIG. 18.2 DEMOLITION OFREINFORCED CONCRETEFLOORS 460
I.,
SP62(S&T):1997 illowed to fall as a single mass on the floors of :he building so as not to qxceed the safe carrylng capacity of the floors; wherever practicable, they-may fall away from the floors [see 7.2) on to c~atch platforms. Overloading 3f floors shall be prevented by removing the accumulating debris through chutes or by other means immediately (see 9). The floor shall be inspected by the Authority before undertaking demolition work and if the same is found incapable of carrying the load of debris, necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent any unexpected collapse of the floor.
b) Walls shall be removed part by part. Stages shall be provided for the men to work on, if the walls are very thin and dangerous to work by standing over them.
cl No section of the wall whose height,is more than 15 times the thickness, shall be permitted to stand without lateral bracing unless such a wall is in good condition and was originally designed to stand without such lateral bracing or support.
4 Structural or load supporting members on any floor’ shall not be removed or cut until all the storeys above that floor have been demolished and removed.
4 Before demolishing
any interior or exterior wall within 3 m of the opening in the floor immediately below, such opening shall be substantially planked over, unless access is denied to workmen to that portion of the floor immediately below the opening, in the floor of the storey being demolished, where any debris passing through the opening may fall. In framed structures, the frame may be left in position during demolition of masonry work. Where this is done all beams, girders, etc, shall be cleared of all loose materials as the demolition of masonry work progresses downward provided it is still strong enough to stand as an independent structure.
8) Walkways
shall be provided to enable workmen to reach or leave their work on any scaffold or wall. Such walkways shall neither be less than 3 planks wide, nor less than 0.8 m in width.
h) After completion of each days work, all walls shall be left stable to avoid any danger of getting overturned.
3 Foundation
walls which serve as retaining walls to support the earth or adjoining structure, shall not be demolished until such an adjoining structure has been underpinned or
braced and the earth removed by sheet piling or sheathing. 7.2 Catch Platforms Catch platforms shall be provided in case of demolition of exterior walls in multistorey buildings. The following details may be considered:
a>Catch
platforms shall generaHy be provided for multistoreyed buildings more than 20 m high to prevent injuries to the worker and to the public when exterior walls are being demolished.
b) Such platforms shall be constructed and maintained not more than three storeys below the storey from which the exterior wall is being demolished. When demolition~has progressed to within three storeys of ground level, catch platforms will not be considered necessary.
c>Catch
platforms shall not be less than 1.5 m in width measured in a horizontal direction from the face of the structure and shall consist of outriggers supported not more than 3 m apart. Planks shall be laid tight together, without openings between them and the walls. Catch platforms shall be provided with a continuous solid parapet along its outer edge of at least 1 m height. The parapet may be constructed with the same material as the platform.
4 Catch platform shall be capable. of sustaining a live load of not less than 610 kg/m2.
4 Catch platforms shall neither be used’for storing of materials nor dumping of materials. 8 DEMOLITION OF DIFFERENT STRUCTURES AND ELEMENTS
TYPES
OF
8.1 General Structures may be dealt with as masonry, concrete, steel and timber. The structures or their elements shall be dealt with as below, in addition to other requirements as applicabk. 8.2 Masonry Structures
a>Jack
Arches - Where tie -rods are present between main supporting beams, these should not be cut until after the arch or series of arches in the floor have been removed. Particular care should be exercised and full examination of structure be made before the demolition is commenced (see Fig. 18.3). The floor should be demolished in strips parallel to the span of arch rings (at right angles to the main floor beam).
SP62(S&T):1997
REMOVE BEFORE
ALL ARCHES CUTTING TIE
FIG. 18.3 DEMOLITIONOF JACK ARCHES
Demolition may be proceeded as for a single span care being taken to demolish the spandrels down to the springing line as the work proceeds (see Fig. 18.4 D). Where explosives are used it is preferable to ensure the collapse of the whole structure in one operation to obviate the chance of leaving unstable portions standing.
b) Brick Arches
1) As much dead load as possible may be removed provided it does not interfere with stability of main arch rings; it should be noted that the load carrying capacity of many old arches relies on the filling between the spandrels. On no account should the restraining influence of the abutments be removed before the dead load~of the spandrel fill and the arch rings are removed. The normal sequence of demolition shown in Fig. 18.4 A includes the following: remove the spandrel filling down to the springing line, -
remove the arch rings,
-
remove the abutments.
-
special temporary support shall be provided in the case of skew bridges.
8.3 Reinforced Concrete a) Before commencing demolition, the condition and position of reinforcement and possibility of lack of its continuity should be ascertained. Demolition should be commenced by removing partitions, non-load bearing cladding, etc. and similarnon-structural elements. b)
Where hand demolition methods are used, the following procedures should be used:
1) Beams -
For beams supporting rope should be attached to the beam. Then the concrete should be removed from both ends by pneumatic drill and the reinforcement exposed. The reinforcement should then be cut in such a way as to allow the beam to be lowered under control to the floor (see Fig. 185 A).
2) A single span arch can be demolished, by hand, by cutting narrow segments progressively from each springing parallel to the span of the arch, until the width of the arch has been reduced to a minimum which can then collapse (see Fig. 18.4 B). Where it is impossible to allow debris to fall to the ground below, centering designed to carry the load should be erected and the arch demolished progressively. The design of the centering should make appropriate allowance for impact. 3)
Where deliberate collapse is feasible the crown may be broken by the demolition ball method working progressively from the edges to the centre (see Fig. 18.4 C).
4)
Collapse of structure can be effected in one action by the use of explosives. Charges should be inserted into boreholes drilled in both arch and abutments. This method is the most effective for demolition of tall viaducts.
5)
In multi-span arches, before individual spans are removed, lateral restraint should be provided at the springing level.
2) Columns -
For columns reinforcement should be exposed at the base after restraining wire guy ropes have been placed around the member at the top. The reinforcement should then be cut in such a way as to allow the column be pulled down to the floor under control (see Fig. 18.5 B).
3)
Walls - Reinforced concrete walls should be cut into strips and demolished as for columns (see Fig. 18.5 C).
4)
Suspended Floors and proofs Solid slabs should be demolished as described in 6 and Fig. 18.2. Where ribbed construction is used, the principle of design and method of construction should be ascertained before demolition. Care should be taken not to cut the ribs inadvertently.
SP62(S&T):1997
L
ABUTMENTS
-/
18.4A E-DGE
:DGE AR CH
LDELIBERATE COLLAPSE FOR CENTRE l*Om STRIP
6MPORARY CENTERING AS NECESSARY
/ ABUTMENT
PLAN
ELEVATION 18.4B
EMOLISHING ARCH AT CROWN OR’KING FROM EDGE EDGE OF F ARCH To CENTR ARCH
EDGE OF ARCH 18.4C
AINT
~REsTR BEFORE INTERMEDIATE IS DEMOLISHED
SPAN
18.4D NOTE-Order FIG. 8.4
of demolition.
18.4 DEMOLITION OF MASONRY AND BRICKWORK ARCHES
Precast Reinforced Concrete
a) Precast reinforced concrete units in a structure are normally held~in position by the strength of the joints in-situ or on supporting walls, etc. As such before starting on demolition the joint structures or the supporting mechanisms shall be studied and understood.
b) In devising and following demolition sequen-
other part of the structure and wherever necessary temporary suppports shall be provided. 8.5 Prestressed Concrete Before commencing of the demolition~work involving such structures advise of an expert engineer should be obtained 8.6 Steel
ces, due precaution shall be taken to avoid toppling over of the prefabricated units or any
a) No beams shall be cut until precautions have been taken to prevent it from swinging freely 463
SP62(S&T):1997
,
CUT2-,
/
RESTRAINING ROPE l Y’ (IN OPPOSITE DIRECTION TO PULLING ROPE) \ ROPE SECURELY TIED TO TOP Of
ROPE SECURELY TIE0 AROUNO
L REQUlRED DIRECTI ON FALL
CUT 1’
BEAM IN LOWERE POSITION 18.5A RC Beams
OF
18.58 RC Columns
SLOTS THIS L
APPROX
-REMOVE CONC (31 SECTION 18.5C RC Walls
ELEVATION
FIG. 18.5 HAND DEMOLITIONOF IN-SITUCONCRETESTRUCTURE and possibly striking any worker or equipment or any part of the structure being demolished.
frame should be independently and securely
guyed in both directions before work starts. On no account should the bottom tie of a truss be cut until the principal rafters are prevented from making outward movement.
b) All structural steel members shall be lowered from the building drop.
and shall not be allowed to
b) Cantilevers - A cantilever type of construction depends on the balancing superimposed structure for its stability. Canopies, cornices, staircases and balconies should be demolished or supported before the balancing load is removed.
c>Tag
lines shall be used on all materials being lowered or hoisted up and a standard signal system shall be used and workmen instructed on the signals. No person shall be permitted to ride the load line.
4 When a derrick or hoisting equipment is used
c) Heavy FloorBeams - Heavy baulks of timber should be supported before cutting at the extremites and should then be lowered to a safe working place.
care shall be taken to see that the floor on which it is supported shall be strong enough for the loading. If necessary heavy planking shall be used to distribute the load to floor beams and girders. Overloading/overturning of the equipment shall be avoided.
9 REMOVAL 9.1 General
8.7 Other Elements
a>Roof
Trusses-Roof
OF MATERIALS
trusses shall be removed to wall plate level by hand methods. Sufficient purlins and bracing should be retained to ensure stability of the remaining roof trusses while each individual truss is removed. Temporary bracing should be added, where necessary, to minimize instability. The end frame opposite to the end where dismantling is commenced, or a convenient intermediate
Removal of dismantled materials should be done carefully; they may be thrown/lowered to the ground. The materials shall preferably be dumped inside the building. Normally such materials shall be lowered to the ground or to the top of the sidewalk shed where provided by means of ropes or suitable tackles. 9.2 Through Chutes
464
a) Wooden or metal chutes shall be~provided for removal of materials. The chutes shall
SP62(S&T):1997 protected by standard railings and toe boards (see IS 4912 : 1978) nor preferably planked over if the holes are not being used for dumping materials [see 3.1(s)].
preferably be provided at the centre of the building for efficient disposal of debris.
b) Chutes if provided at an angle of more than 45’ from the horizontal shall be entirely enclosed on all sides, except for opening at or about the floor level for receiving materials.
c) All intermediate floor openings for passage of materials shall be completely closed with barricades or guard rails not less than 1 m high and at a distance of not less than 1 m from the edge of the general opening. No barricades or guard rails shall be removed until the storey immediately above has been demolished down to the floor line and all debris cleared from the floor.
cl Opening for chutes shall not exceed I .20 m in height measured along the wall of the chute and in all storeys below the top floor such opening shall be kept closed when not in use.
4 To prevent the descending material attaining a dangerous speed, the chute shall not extend in an unbroken line for more than two storeys. A gate or step shall be provided with suitable means of closing at the bottom of each chute to stop the flow of materials.
d) When cutting a hole in an intermediate floor, between the storage floor and the floor which is being demolished, makes the intermediate floor or any portion of it unsafe, then such intermediate tloor shall be properly shored. It shall also be ensured that the supporting walls are not kept without adequate lateral restraints.
e) Chutes at an angle less than 45’ to the horizontal may be left open on the upperside provided that at the point where such chute discharges into the chute steeper than 45” to the horizontal, the top of the steeper chute shall be boarded over to prevent the escape of materials. Any opening into which workmen dump debris at the top of the chute shall be guarded by a substantial guard rail extending at least 1 m above the~level of the floor or other surface on which men stand to dump the materials into the chute. A toe board or bumper not less than 50 mm thick and 150 mm high shall be provided at each chute opening, if the~required material is dumped from the wheel barrows. Any space between the chute and the edge of the opening in the floor through which it passes shall be solidly planked over. 9.3 Through
Openings
10 REFERENCES Other Indian Standards on the subject of safety of workers, in addition to the handbook under preparation are as follows: IS No. 3696 (Part I) : 1987 40 14 (Part 2) : 1967 3764: 1992 7969 : 1975 13415 : 1992 13416 (Part I) : 1992
4 Debris may also be dropped through holes i? the floor without the use of chutes. In such a case the total area of the hole cut in the intermediate floor, one which lies between tloor that is being demolished and the storage floor shall not exceed 25 percent of such floor area. It shall be ensured that the storage tloor is of adequate strength to withstand the impact of the falling material.
13416 (Part 2) : 1982
13430 : 1992
b) Openings in all floors below the floor from which materials are being removed, shall be
465
Title Safety code of scaffolds and ladders: Part 1 Scaffolds Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding: Part 2 Safety~regulations for scaffolding Code of safety for excavation work first revision) Safety code for handling and storage of building materials Code of safety for protective barriers in and around buildings Recommendations for preventive measures against hazards at workplaces: Part 1 Falling material hazards prevention Recommendations for preventive measures against hazards at workplaces : Part 2 Fall prevention Code of practice for safety during additional construction existing alteration to and buildings
99P (0661 paumJ3j”a~) (1 luaurpuawf) (996 [ : fjE I[ SI %upas.~adns) (uo~s!nal p_/yz) luaura>Jo3u!a.r alamio3 103 sa+ put2 mq Iaals paurJo3ap ql%aJls q%H (UO~S+%i pq1)
paseq l&y paug1?3
(uo~s~m
pq3)
paseq ysr? Q
(I iuau~puauqf) Z l.I”d :luaura:, eueIozzod pUr?ll.lOd 1 l.IEd warna:, ew1ozzod pUE[l.lOd
S861 : 98LI 166 I : (Z l-‘ed) 68P1 1661 : (I l-led) 68P1
8L6I : 9SP
(I 661 PamJrJjuatf) (2 sluaw alamuo3 paDIo3u!al pue uyd .103acylmd3o apoa
9861 : 0801
(066 1 paum33eaa) (uols!naJ Qz403as) (Ilaqs pw %!.I ‘1312.1 wql Jaylo) s[!os uo suo~lepuno3 Mo[p?qsJo uo~lmlsuo~ pw U8!Sap 10~ aDgmd3o apoa
-puaurV) (uo~s~na~pqz)
(E sluaurpuauy)
(uo?sy~
qJ.moJ) luaura:, 9~21spueplod
6861 : SSP
Z86I : IOP
Co661 pavwa& (2 uoge,tJasald ~03 a3ymd 30 apoz
2861 : (I lJ”d) ZEP
(~661 pauw3eax) (WYJ P-W) sJeq laals apsual rumpaw pue laals ppw 1 l.wd : luama3103ufaJ alamu 103 aqM [aals urnwp-p.wq puv sleq laals apsual umpalu pur! Iaals pj!m sluaurpuaurV)
(uoylna~
(E SlUXUpUXU~)
pqy~)
laqtug30
(UOfSJAiU ZfWlOJ> lU3Ula3 pUt?[l.IOd d.lW!p.lO3pW8
EE
6861 : 692
SNOILVCINllOd E XXLdVH3 suo!lv3!Dads paum33eax)
(Z sluampuaruV)
(Z sluaurpuawV)
salmluamo3
alqw3ynwa
(uo?sfna_i is.4~J)sale.nuamo3
(E661 so3!I/(dJolq3
Z6- 166 I CIMd3 8L61 : Pi768
(~661 pam.c33vatI) aIqm;S!sImua .IOppWdaH
(I 661 PaW33~aX) (E sluaurpuamf) (zro~s~na~JS_@) sa.xnsr?atu luamleall lwyaqg yoymqsuo~ -ag Z l.rl?d : s%up1!nq u! samseaur al!unal-pue 103 aycmd 30 apoa
8L61 : 6EP9
1861 : (Z l=d) EIE9
9861 : 18OP
%uq~pp palyar pue %!lseIq 103 apos 4a3es
0L61 : ( I 3aS/Z l-“Jd) 8L8S
(0661 pawJrJJea2U (1 waw -puaurV) 8uysz1q pm iXuyI!~a 1 uoyag ‘~30~ u! uogeAe3xa puno.&apun Z l.wd : .xaleM i?u!daAuoD Iauunl 30 uo!lmusuo3 -lo3 a3!lmd 30 apoa (1661 paum33eax) suoyelado
(UO~S~AiX1lS.@)6la3w3oapo~---
(1 1uauipuaruV)
(uoy~an
puonas)
salmluamo3
Z661 : P9LE*
JlOM uo~lr?Ae3xrJ
(~661 pauv33va& alqw3yntua auvploIq3
I7861 : 2892
(2661 paum33eax) (Z sluaurpuayf) (U0~S~AiJ-l w&i) IwauaB .103~110s30 uogwgyuap! pur? UO~E?XJ~SS~~~
sasodrnd %paaur%a ayxxd
(uofs?na.dpq$)
30 apoa -
OL61 : 86PI
8u!p[!nq u! .IaqLug p2mlm.Qs 30 u%!saa
0L61 : E88
X?rIOMHUIV?I Z XXLdVH3
(1 1uampuawV) sp2!~aletu Bu!pI!nq30 al!s 1~ sp+almu
a3wois
( I 66 I paw33Ea2Q pue &uIpueq .103apo2 Xla3es
SL61 : 696L
(0661 pauy33sa~) (uwp~ IS-@) 30 af?mols pm 8uyels uo uo~lepuauuuo3a~ acycmd 30 apes - .Iaqur!l30 th!UOSk?aS
uogmqsuo2
LL61 : Z8OPe E661 : IPlI
(uo~sfna_ipuoxw)
‘ONSI
W_l
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 IS No.
*1904:
1986
Title Code of practice for design and construction General requirements (third revision)
of foundations
in soils :
2062 : 1992
Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision) (supersedes IS 226 : 1975) (Amendment 1)
2911 (Part l/Set I) : 1979
Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations : Part 1 Concrete piles, Section 1 Driven case in-situ concrete piles @first revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1987)
2911 (Part l/Set 2) : 1979
Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations : Part 1 Concrete piles, Section 2 Bored cast in-situ piles (first revision) (Amendments 3) (Reaffirmed 1987)
2911 (Part l/Set 3) : 1979
Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations : Part 1 Concrete piles, Section 3 Driven precast concrete piles (first revision) (Amendments 3) (Reaffirmed 1987)
2911 (Part l/Set 4) : 1984
Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations : Part 1 Concrete piles, Section 4 Bored precast concrete piles (Amendment 1)
2911 (Part 2) : 1980
Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations Timber piles (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1987)
: Part 2
29 11 (Part 3) : 1980
Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations Under reamed piles @rst revision) (Amendments 3)
: Part 3
2911 (Part 4) : 1985
Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations Load test on piles (first revision) (Amendment 1)
: Part 4
2950 (Part 1) : 1981
Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundations Design (second revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1993)
: Part 1
2974 (Part 1) : 1982
Code of practice for design and construction of machine foundations : Part 1 Foundations for reciprocating type machines (second revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1993)
2974 (Part 2) : 1980
Code of practice for design and construction of machine foundations : Part 2 Foundations for impact type machine (hammer foundations) (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1993)
2974 (Part 3) : 1992
Design and construction of machine foundations - Code of practice : Part 3 Foundations for rotary type machines (medium and high frequency) (secondrevision)
2974 (Part 4) : 1979
Code of practice for design and construcrtion of machine foundations : Part 4 Foundations for rotary type machines of low frequency (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1987)
2974 (Part 5) : 1987
Code of practice for design and constrution of machine foundations : Part 5 Foundations for impact machines other than hammers (forging and stamping press, pig breakers, drop crusher and jolter) (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1993)
3629 : 1986
Specification 1991)
4094 : 1979
Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for transmission line towers and poles (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1987)
6403 : 1981
Code of practice for determination of bearing capacity of shallow foundations (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
for structural timber in building @rst revision) (Reaffirmed
6909 : 1990
Specification
8009 (Part 1) : 1976
Code of practice for calculation of settlement of foundations: Part I Shallow foundations subject to symmetrical static vertical loads (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1993)
8009 (Part 2) : I980
Code of practice for calculation of settlement of foundations : Part 2 Deep foundations subjected to symmetrical static vertical loading (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1987)
for supersulphated
467
cement (Amendments
2)
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
IS No. 8041 : 1990
Rapid hardening Portland cement (second revision) (Amendments
2)
9456 : 1980
Code of practice for design and construction of conical and hyperbolic paraboloidal types of shell foundations (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1993)
“9556 : 1980
Code of practice for design and construction ment 1) (Reaffirmed 1993)
11089 : 1984
Code of practice for design and construction ment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
11233 : 1985
Code of practice for design and construction of radar antenna, microwave and TV tower foundations (Reaffirmed 1990)
12269: 1987
53 grade ordinary Portland cement (Amendments
13094 : 1992
Guidelines for selection of ground improvement in weak soils
SP 36 (Part 2) : 1988
Compendium
of diaphragm walls (Amendof ring foundation
(Amend-
3) (Reaffirmed
1992)
techniques for foundation : Part 2 Field testing
of Indian Standards on soil engineering CHAPTER 4 MASONRY
Part 1
Mortars
269 : 1989
33 grade ordinary Portland cement (fourth revision) (Amendments
383 : 1970
Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete revision)-(Reaffirmed 1990)
455 : 1989
Portland slag cement (fourth revision) (Amendments
456: 1978
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1991)
712 : 1984
Building limes (third revision) (Reaffirmed
1344: 1981
Calcined clay pozzolana 1990)
1489 (Part 1) : 1991
Portland pozzolana cement: Part 1 Fly ash based (third revision)
1489 (Part 2) : 1991
Portland pozzolana (Amendment 1)
1635 : 1992
Code of practice for field slaking of building lime and preparation of putty (second revision)
2116:
1980
Sand for masonry mortars (first revision) (Reaffirmed
2250:
1981
Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars Cfirst revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2686 : 1977
Cinder as fine aggregates for use in lime concrete (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
3182 : 1986
Broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregates for use in lime mortar (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3812:
Fly ash for use as pozolana and admixture (first revision) (Reaffirmed
1981
4098 : 1983
Lime-pozzolana 1989)
6452 : 1989
3)
1991)
(second revision) (Amendment
cement: Part 2 Calcined
mixture
(first revision)
3) (second
1) (Reaffirmed
clay based (third revisilwz)
1992)
(Amendments
1992)
2) (Reaffirmed
Specification
for high alumina cement for structural use (Amendment
6909 : 1990
Specification
for supersulphated
8041 : 1990
Rapid hardening Portland cement (second revision) (Amendments
8043 : 1991
Hydrophobic
81.12 : 1989
43 grade ordinary Portland cement yirst revision) (Amendments
12269 : 1987
53 grade ordinary Portland cement (Amendments
12600:
Low heat Portland cement (Amendments
1989
13077 : 1991
cement (Amendments
2)
Portland cement (second revision) (Amendments
3)
2)
2)
3) (Reaffirmed
Guide for preparation and use of mud mortar in masonry
468
1)
3) 1992)
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 IS No. “SP 20 (S & Tj:
Handbook on masonry design and construction
1991
(first revision)
Summaries of Indian Standards for building materials
SP 21 (S &T) : 1983
Part 2
Brickwork and Blockwork
Section 1 Brick~and Block Units 269 : 1989
33 grade ordinary Portland cement (fourth revision) (Amendments
383 : 1970
Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
3)
455 : 1989
Portland slag cement vourth revision) (Amendments
456 : 1978
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1991)
712: 1984
Building limes (third revision) (Reaffirmed
1077 : 1992
Common burnt clay building bricks (@t/z revision)
1344 : 1981
Calcined clay pozzolana 1990)
(second
3)
199 1)
(second revision) (Amendment
1) (Reaffirmed
1489 (Part 1) : 1991
Portland pozzolana cement: Part 1 Fly ash based (third revision)
1489 (Part 2) : 1991
Portland pozzolana (Amendment 1)
1725 : 1982
Soil based blocks used in general building (Reaffirmed 1992)
2117 : 1991
Guide for manufacture (third revision)
2180:
Heavy duty burnt clays building bricks (third revision) (Reaffirmed
1988
cement: Part 2 Calcined
clay based (third revision) construction
@-St revision)
of hand-made common burnt clays building bricks . 1991)
2185 (Part 1) : 1979
Concrete masonry units : Part 1 Hollow and solid concrete blocks (second revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
2185 (Part 2) : 1983
Concrete masonry units : Part 2 Hollow and solid light weight concrete blocks yirst revision) (superseding IS 3590) (Reaffirmed 1989)
2185 (Part 3) : 1984
Concrete masonry units : Part 3 Autoclaved cellular aerated concrete blocks (first revision) (superseding IS 5482) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2222:
Burnt clay perforated building bricks cfburth revision)
1991
2645 : 1975 2686 : 1977
Integral cement waterproofing (Reaffirmed 1992) ^
compounds
(first revision) (Amendment
I)
Cinder as fine aggregates for use in lime concrete (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
2691 : 1988
Burnt clay facing bricks (second revision)
3068 : 1986
Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregates for use in lime concrete (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3115 : 1992
Lime based blocks (second revision)
3495 : 1992
Methods of test for burnt clay building bricks (Parts 1 to 4 in one volume) (third revision)
3812:
Fly ash for use as pozzolana 1992)
1981
and admixture
@rst revision) (Reaffirmed
3952 : 1988
Burnt clay hollow bricks for walls and partitions (second revision)
4098 : 1983
Lime-pozzolana 1989)
4139 : 1989
Calcium silicate bricks (second revision)
5454 : 1978
Methods of sampling of clay building bricks
6165 : 1992
Dimensions
6452 : 1989
Specification
mixture
(first revision)
(Amendments
2) (Reaffirmed
for special shapes of clay bricks (first revision) for high alumina cement for structural use (Amendment
469
1)
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
IS No.
6909 : 1990
Specification
8041 : 1990
Rapid hardening Portland cement (second/ revision) (Amendments
8042 : 1989
White Portland cement (second revision) (Amendments
8043:
1991
Hydrophobic
1989
43 grade ordinary Portland cement @sf revision) (Amendments
8112:
for supersulphated
cement (Amendments
2) 2)
4)
Portland cement (second revision) (Amendments
2) 3)
9103 : 1979
Admixture for concrete (Reaffirmed
1990)
11650 : 1991
Guide for manufacture of common mechanized process (first revision)
burnt clay building bricks by semi-
12269 : 1987
53 grade ordinary ~Portland cement (Amendments
12440 : 1988
Precast concrete stone masonry blocks (Reaffirmed
12600 : 1989
Low heat Portland cement (Amendments
3) (Reaffirmed
1992)
1995)
3)
Fly ash lime bricks
12894: 1990
(first revision)
SP20(S&T):
1991
Handbook on masonry design and construction
SP21 (S&T):
1983
Summaries of Indian Standards for building materials Section 2 Brickwork
1077 : 1992
Common burnt clay building bricks Vifth revision)
2212:
Code of practice for brick work (first revision)
1991
3696 (Part 1) : 1987
Safety code of scaffolds and ladders : Part 1 Scaffolds
4014 (Part 2) : 1967
Code of practice for steel tabular scaffolding scaffolding (Reaffirmed 1990)
SP 25 (S &T) : 1984
Handbook on caused and prevention
: Part 2 Safety regulationsfor
of crakcs in building
Section 3 Blockwork purposes (third revision) (Amend-
280 : 1978
Mild steel wire for general engineering ment I ) (Reaffirmed 1992)
456 : 1978
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 199 1)
1905: 1987
Code of practice for structural use of un-reinforced (Reaffirmed 1992)
2185 (Part 1) : 1979
Concrete masonry units : Part I Hollow and solid concrete blocks (second revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
2185 (Part 2) : 1983
Concrete masonry units : Part 2 Hollow and solid weight concrete blocks (first revisiort) (superseding IS 3590) (Reaffirmed 1989)
2185 (Part 3) : 1984
Concrete masonry units : Part 3 Autoclaved cellular aerated concrete blocks @rst revision) (superseding IS 5482) (Reaffirmed 1990)
*2572 : 1963
Code of practice (Reaffirmed 1992)
*6041 : 1985
Code of practice for construction of autoclaved masonry Cfirstrevision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
*6042 : 1969
Code of practice for construction~of (Reaffirmed 1990) Section 4
for construction
In-situ Construction
of hollow concrete block masonry cellular concrete block
lightweight concrete block masonry
with Soil Cement
217 : 1988
Cutback bitumen (second revision)
2110 : 1980
Code of practice for in-situ construction of soil-cement (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1992) Part 3
masonry (third revision)
walls,
in building
with
Stonework
CPWD 199 I -92 Specifications 1123 : 1975
Method of identification firmed 1990) 470
of natural building stones (first revision) (Reaf-
i
-._.
_,
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 IS No.
Titie
1127 : 1970
Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones for masonry work (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1993)
1128 : 1974
Limestone (slab and tiles) (first revision) (Reaffirmed
1129: 1972
Recommendation for dressing of natural building (Reaffirmed 1993)
1130: 1969
Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles) (Reaffirmed
“1597 (Part 1) : 1992
Code of practice for construction masonry yirst revision)
;k1597 (Part 2) : 1992
Code of practice for construction (first revision)
1630 : 1984
Mason’s tools for (Reaffirmed 1990)
1905 : 1987
Code of practice for structural use of un-reinforced (Reaffirmed 1992)
2250 : 1981
Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
3316 : 1974
Specification
3620 : 1979
Specification for (Reaffirmed 1993)
plaster
1993)
stones (first revision)
1993)
of stone masonry : Part 1 Rubble stone of stone masonry : Part 2 Ashlar masonry work and pointing
work (first revision)
masonry (third revision)
for structural granite (first revision) (Reaffirmed laterite
stone
block
for masonry
1993)
(first revision)
3622 : 1977
Specification for sandstone (slab and tiles) (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1993)
3696 (Part 1) : 1987
Safety code of scaffolds and ladders : Part 1 Scaffolds (Reaffirmed
199 1)
4101 (Part 1) : 1967
Code of practice for external facing and veneers (Reaffirmed 1990)
: Part 1 Stone
facing
12440~: 1988
Precast concrete stone masonry blocks
“SP 20 (S &T) : 1991
Handbook on masonry design and construction
SP 21 (S & T) : 1983
Summarise of Indian Standards for building materials
PLAINAND 269 : 1989 383 : 1970 432 (Part 1) : 1982
455 : 1989 456 : 1978 516 : 1959 712 : 1984 875 (Part 1) : 1987
875 (Part 2) : 1987 875 (Part 3) :.1987 875 (Part 4) : 1987 875 (Part 5) : 1987
CHAPTER 5 REINFORCED
Cfirst revision)
CONCRETE
33 grade ordinary Portland cement (fourth revision) (Amendments 3) Coarse and fine aggregates from natural resources for concrete (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1990) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part 1 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision) Portland slag cement (fiourth revision) (Amendments 3) Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1991) Method of test for strength of concrete (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 199 1) Building limes (third revision) (Reaffirmed 199 1) Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures : Part 1 Dead loads-Unit weights of building material and stored materials (second revision) (incorporating IS 1911 : 1967) (Reaffumed 1992) Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures : Part 2 Imposed loads (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1992) Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures : Part 3 Wind loads (second revqion) (Reaffirmed 1992) Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures : Part 4 Snow loads (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1992) Code ofpractice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures : Part 5 Special loads and lopd combinations (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1992) 471
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
IS No. 883:
Design of structural timber in building -
1970
Code of practice (third revision)
1199 : 1959
Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete (Reaffirmed
1344 : 1981
Calcined clay pozzolana 1990)
1489 (Part 1) : 1991
Portland pozzolana cement : Part 1 Ply ash based (third revision)
!489 (Part 2) : 1991
Portland pozzolana cement : Part 2 Calcined clay based (third revision) (Amendment 1)
1566 : 1982
Hard-drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement (Amendments 2)
1786 : 1985
High strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement (third revision) (superseding IS 1139 : 1966) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
1791 : 1985
Batch type concrete mixers (second revision) (Reaffirmed
1946: 1961
Code of practice-for use of fixing devices in walls, ceilings and floors of solid construction (Reaffirmed 1992)
2062 : 1992
Steel and general structural purposes IS 226 : 1975) (Amendment 1)
2386 (Part 1) : 1963
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete : Part 1 Particle size and shape (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2386 (Part 2) : 1963
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete : Part 2 Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2386 (Part 3) : 1963
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete : Part3 Specific gravity, density, voids, absorption and bulking (Reaffirmed 1990)
2386 (Part 4) : 1963
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete : Part 4 Mechanical (Amendments 3) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2386 (Part5)
: 1963
(second revision) (Amendment
(fourth
199 1) 1) (Reaffirmed
(second revision)
1990)
revision)
(supersedes
properties
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete : Part 5 Soundness (Reaffirmed 1990)
2386 (Part 6) : 1963
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete : Part 6 Measuring mortar making properties of fine aggregates (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2386 (Part 7) : 1963
Methods of test for aggregates reactivity (Reaffirmed 1990)
2386 (Part 8) : 1963
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete : Part 8 Petrographic nation (Reaffirmed 1990)
2502 : 1963
Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement (Reaffirmed 1990)
2505 : 1980
Concrete vibrators-Immersion 1993)
2506 : 1985
General requirements (Reaffirmed 1990)
2514 : 1963
Concrete vibrating tables (Reaffirmed
2541 : 1991
Code of practice for preparation and use of lime concrete (second revision)
2686 : 1977
Cinder as fine aggregates for use in lime concrete (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
2751 : 1979
Recommended practice for welding of mild steel plain and deformed bars for reinforced construction (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
3025 : 1964
Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) industry
for water used in
3036 : 1992
Laying lime concrete for a waterproofed (second revision)
Code of practice
3068 : 1986
Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregtates (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
472
for concrete
type-General
: Part 7 Alkali
requirements
aggregate exami-
(Reaffirmed
for screed board concrete vibrators lfirst revision) 1991)
roof finish -
for use in lime concrete
-.-
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 IS No.
Title
3182:
1986
Broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregates for use in lime mortar (second revision) (Reaffirmed 199 1)
3812:
1981
Fly ash for use as pozzolana and admixture (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
4031 (Part 1) : 1988
Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement : Part 1 Determination fineness by dry sieving (first revision)
4098 : 1983
Lime-pozzolana 1989)
4656 : 1968
Form vibrators for concrete (Reaffirmed
4925 : 1968
Concrete batching and mixing plant (Reaffirmed
4926 : 1976
Ready mixed concrete (first revision) (Reaffirmed
4990 : 1993
Plywood for concreteshuttering
5817:
1992
Preparation and use of lime-pozzolana mixture concrete in buildings roads - Code of practice (first revision)
and
6452:
1989
Specification
for high alumina cement for structural use (Amendment
1)
6909 : 1990
Specification
for supersulphated
7861 (Part 1) : 1975
Code of practice for extreme weather concreting : Part 1 Recommended practice for hot weather concreting (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
7861 (Part2)
: 1981
mixture
(first revision)
(Amendments
of
2) (Reaffirmed
199 I) 1991) 1990)
work (second revision)
cement (Amendments
Code of practice for extreme weather concreting practice for cold weather concreting (Amendment
2)
: Part 2 Recommended 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
8041 : 1990
Rapid hardening Portland cement (second revision) (Amendments
8043 : 1991
Hydrophobic Portland cement (second revision) (Amendments
8112:
1989
43 grade ordinary Portland cement yirst revision) (Amendments
9012:
1978
Recommended
practice for shotcreting (Reaffirmed
2)
2) 3)
1992)
9013 : 1978
Method of making, curing and determining compressive strength of accelerated cured concrete test specimens (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
9103 : 1979
Admixtures for concrete (Reaffirmed
10262:
Recommended
1982
1990)
guidelines for concrete mix design (Reaffirmed
1989)
12600: 1989
Low heat Portland cement (Amendments
133 11 (Part 1) : 1992
Non-destructive pulse velocity
testing of concrete -
Methods of test : Part 1 Ultrasonic
13311 (Part 2) : 1992
Non-destructive hammer
testing of concrete -
Methods of test : Part 2Rebound
SP 23 (S & T) : 1982
Handbook on concrete mixes (based on Indian Standards ) (with Amendment 1)
SP 24 (S & T) : 1983
Explanatory handbook on Indian Standard Code for plain and reinforced concrete (IS 456 : 1978)
SP 33 (S &T) : 1986
Handbook on timber engineering
SP 34 (S &T) : 1987
Handbook on concrete reinforcement
3)
and detailing (Amendment
1)
CHAPTER 6 ANTI-TERMITE MEASURES 216 : 1961
Coaltar pitch (first revision) (Reaffirmed
401 : 1982
Code of practice for preservation 2) (Reaffirmed 1990)
1141 : 1993
Seasoning of timber --Code
“6313 (Part 1) : 1981
Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings structional measures (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
*6313 (Part 2) : 1981
Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings : Part 2 Preconstructional chemical treatment measures (first revision) (Amendments 3) (Reaffirmed 1991)
473
c
1991)
of timber (third revision) (Amendments
of practice (second revision) : Part 1 Con-
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 IS No. “6313 (Part 3) : 1981
Title Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings : Part 3 Treatment for existing buildings (first revision) (Amendments 3) (Reaffirmed 199 I) CHAPTER 7 DOORS AND WINDOWS (WOOD AND METAL)
208 : 1987
Door handles (fourth revision) (Reaffirmed
287 : 1993
Permissible moisture content for timber used for different Recommendations (third revision)
303 : 1989
Plywood for general purposes (third revision) (Amendment 1993)
399 : 1963
Classification (Amendment
401 : 1982
Code~of practice for preservation 2) (Reaffirmed 1990)
419 : 1967
Putty, for (Reaffirmed
1003 (Part 1) : 1991
Timber panelled and glazed shutters : Part I Door shutters (third revision) (Amendment 1)
1003 (Part 2) : 1983
Timber panelled and glazed shutters : Part2 Window and ventilator shutters (secand revision)
1038: 1983
Steel doors, windows (Reaffirmed 1991)
“1081 : 1960
Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and aluminium) doors, windows and ventilators (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
1992) purposes 1) (Reaffirmed
of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution l)(Reaffirmed 1990)
use on 1992)
(revised)
of timber (third revision) (Amendments
window frames (first revisiun)
and ventilators
(Amendments
(third revision)
1141 : 1993
Seasoning of timber -
1328 : 1982
Veneered decorative affirmed 1990)
1658 : 1977
Fibre hardboards (second revision) (Amendment
3)
(Amendment
1)
Code of practice (second revision) plywood
(second revision)
(Amendments 1) (Reaffirmed
3) (Re1990)
1659: 1990
Block boards (third revision) (Amendment
2191 (Part 1) : 1983.
Wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type) : Part 1 Plywood face panels (t&u-th revision) (Reaffirmed 199 1)
219 1 (Part 2) : 1983
Wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type) : Part 2 Particle board and hard board face panels (third revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
1)
2202 (Part 1) : 1991
Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type) : Part 1 Plywood face panels vifth revision) (Amendments 2)
2202 (Part 2) : 1983
Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type) : Part 2 Particle board and hard board face panels (third revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
2553 (Part 1) : 1990
Safety glass : Part 1 General purpose (third revision) (Amendment
2835 : 1987
Flat transparent sheet glass (third revision) (Reaffirmed
3087 : 1985
Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes (firstrevision) (Amendments 4) (Reaffirmed 1990)
3097 3129 3348 3478
: : : :
1980 1985 1965 1966
3548 : 1988 3614 (Part 1) : 1966 3614 (Part 2) : 1992
1)
1992)
Veneered particle boards (firstrevision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990) Low density particle boards (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990) Specification for tibre insulation boards (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990) Specification for high density wood particle boards (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992) Code of practice for glazaing in buildings (first revision) Specification for fire check doors : Part I Plate metal covered and rolling type (Reaffirmed 1990) Specification for fire check doors : Part 2 Resistance test and performance criteria
474
.
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 IS
Title
No.
4021 : 1983
Timber door, window and ventilator frames (seconrl revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
4351 : 1976
Specification for steel door frames @rst revision) (Amendment affirmed 199 1)
*4913 : 1968
Code ofpractice for selection, installation and maintenance and windows (Reaffirmed 1991) for wooden side sliding doors (Reaffirmed
1) (Re-
of timber doors
4962 : 1968
Specification
4970 : 1973
Key for identification 1990)
5187 : 1972
Flush bolts (first revision) (Reaffirmed
5437 : 1970
Figured, rolled and wired glass (Reaffirmed
5509 : 1980
Fire retardant plywood @rst revision) (Amendments
3) (Reaffirmed
5539 : 1969
Specification for preservative affirmed 1990)
(Amendment
6198 : 1992
Ledged, braced and battened timber door shutters (second revision)
6248 : 1979
Specification for metal rolling shutters and rolling grills (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
of commercial
199 1)
timbers (first revision) (Reaffirmed
treated
1990) 1984)
plywood
1) (Re-
6534 : 1971
Guiding principles of grading and inspection of timber (Reaffirmed
6701 : 1985
Tungsten filament affirmed 1990)
7316 : 1974
Decorative plywood using plurality (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1992)
7452 : 1990
Hot-rolled revision)
10439 : 1983
Code of practice for patent glazing (Reaffirmed
miscellaneous
steel sections
electric
lamps
of veneers
for doors, windows
1990)
1990)
(first revision)
(Re-
for decorative
faces
and ventilators
(second
1990)
10451 : 1983
Steel sliding shutters (top hung type) (Reaffirmed
10521 : 1983
Collapsible gates (Reaffirmed
10701: 1983
Structural plywood (Amendment
11433 (Part 1) : 1985
One part grade polysulphide ments (Reaffirmed 1990)
base joints sealant : Part 1 General require-
11433 (Part 2) : 1986
One part grade polysulphide (Reaffirmed 199 1)
base joints sealant : Part 2 Methods of test
I2896 : 1990
Classification
13622 : 1993 SP21 (S&T):
1) (Reaffirmed
SP 33 (S &T) : 1986
1993)
of Indian timbers for door and window shutters and frames
Indian timbers for furnitures and cabinets 1983
1990)
1991)
Classificaiion
Summarise of Indian Standards for building materials Handbook on timber engineering CHAPTER 8 STEEL CONSTRUCTION
104: 1979
Ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome, priming (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1993)
123 : 1962
Ready mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semi-gloss, for general purposes to Indian Standard Colours No. 445,446,448,449,451,473 and red oxide (colour unspecified) (revised) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991) Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third revision) (Amendment 2) (Reaffirmed 1991)
456 : 1978
(second
revision)
“800 : 1984
Code of practice for general construction (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1991)
801 : 1975
Code of practice for use of cold formed light gauge steel structural members in general building construction Cfirsr revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 199 1) 475
in steel (second
revision)
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 IS No. *806 : 1968
Title Code of practice use of steel tubes in general building construction revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
Cfirst
811 : 1988
Cold formed light gauge structural steel sections (revised)
814 : 1991
Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steel (fifth revision)
816 : 1969
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction mild steel (first revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1992)
817 (Part 1) : 1992
Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders: Part 1 Manual metal arc welding (slcond revision)
819: 1957
Code of practice for resistance steel (Reaffirmed 1992)
919 (Part 1) : 1993
IS0 system of limits and fits : -Part 1 Bases of tolerances, fits (second revision)
1024: 1979
Code of practice for use of welding in bridges and structures dynamic loading @rst revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
1030: 1989
Carbon steel castings for general engineering (Amendments 2)
1148: 1982
Hot-rolled rivet bars (up to 40 mm dia) for structural revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
1149: 1982
High tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes (third revision) affirmed 1992)
1161 : 1979
Steel tubes for structural purposes (third revision) (Amendments affirmed 1990)
spot welding for light assemblies
in
in mild
deviations
and
subject to
purposes (fourth revision) purposes
(third (Re-
2) (Re-
1261 : 1959
Code of practice for seam welding in mildsteel
1278 : 1972
Filler rods and wires for gas welding (second revision) (Amendments (Reaffirmed 1991)
1323 : 1982
Code of practice for oxy-acetylene welding for structural steels (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1987)
1363 (Part 1) : 1992
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part 1 Hexagon head bolts (size range M 5 to M 64) (third revision)
1363 (Part 2) : l992
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part 2 Hexagon head screws (size range M 5 to M 64) (third revision)
1363 (Part 3) : 1992
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part 3 Hexagon nuts (size range M 5 to M 64) (third revision)
1364 (Part 1) : 1992
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B : Part 1 Hexagon head bolts (size range M 1.6 to M 64) (third revision)
1364 (Part 2) : 1992
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B : Part 2 Hexagon head screws (size range M 1.6 to M 64) (third revision)
1364 (Part 3) : 1992
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B : Part 3 Hexagon nuts (size range M 1.6 to M 64) (third revision)
1367 (Part 3) : 1991
Fasteners - Threaded steel - Technical supply conditions : Part 3 Mechanical~properties and test methods for bolts, screws and studs with full loadability (third revision)
1393: 1961
Code of practice for training and testing of oxy-acetylene affirmed 199 1)
1477 (Part 1) : 1971
Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings Pretreatment (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
1477 (Part 2) : 1971
Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings (fwst revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
1929: 1982
Hot forged steel rivets for hot closing (12’to 36 mm diameter) (first revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1990)
476
(Reaffirmed
1992) 2)
work in mild
welders (Re: Part 1
: Part 2 Painting
SP 62 (S 8z T) : 1997 Title
IS No.
Structural steel (ordinary (Reaffirmed 1992)
2062 : 1992
Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision) (supersedes IS 226 : 1975) (Amendment 1)
2074 : 1992
Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide-zinc revision)
2155 : 1982
Cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
3502:
1981
quality)
(second
revision) (Amendments
1977 : 1975
chrome, priming
4)
(second
Steel chequered plates (first revision)
3613 : 1974
Acceptance tests for wire flux combination for submerged arc welding (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1987)
3640:
Hexagon fit bolts @rst revision) (Reaffirmed
1982
3757 : 1985
High strength affirmed 1992)
5369:
General requirements (Reaffirmed 199 1)
1975
structural
1991)
bolts (second revision) (Amendment
1) (Re-
for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)
5370 : 1969
Plain washers with outside diameter cc3 x inside diameter (Reaffirmed
5374:
Taper washers for I-beams (ISMB) (first revision) (Reaffirmed
1975
199 1)
1991)
6419 : 1971
Welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding of structural steel (Reaffirmed 199~1)
6560 : 1972
Molybdenum and chromium-molybdenum low alloy steel welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding (Reaffirmed 1991)
6610 : 1972
Heavy washers for steel structures (Reaffirmed
6623 : 1985
High strength structural nuts (first revision) (Amendment 1992)
6649 : 1985
Hardened and tempered washers for high strength structural bolts and nuts (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1988)
1991) 1) (Reaffirmed
7205 : 1974
Safety code-for erection of structural steel work (Reaffirmed
7215 : I974
Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures (Amendment 1991)
7280 : 1974
Bare wire electrodes for submerged affirmed 1991)
7307 (Part 1) : 1974
Approval tests for welding procedures (Reaffirmed 1991)
7310 (Part I) : 1974
Approval tests for welders working to approved welding procedures Fusion welding of steel (Reaffirmed 1987)
: Part 1
7318 (Part 1) : 1974
Approval tests for welders when welding procedure approval required : Part 1 Fusion welding of steel (Reaffirmed 1991)
is not
8500 : 1992
Structural steel -Microalloyed revision) (Amendment 1)
9595 : 1980
Recommendations steel (Amendment
12843 : 1989
Tolerances for erection of steel structures
SP 6(5) : 1980
Cold-formed,
FLOORS
1991) I) (Reaffirmed
arc welding of structural steels (Re: Part 1 Fusion welding of steel
(medium and high strength qualities) (first
for metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
light-gauge steel structures @-St revision)
CHAPTER 9 AND FLOOR COVERINGS
77 : 1976
Linseed oil, boiled for paints (second revision) (Reaffirmed
269 : 1989
33 grade ordinaryportland
303 : 1989
Plywood for general purposes (third revision) (Amendment 1993) 477
1993)
cement (fourth revision) (Amendments
3)
1) (Reaffirmed
’
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 IS No.
Title
383: 1970
Coarse and fine aggregates from natura! sources for concrete revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
401 : 1982
Code of practice for preservation of timber (third revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1990) Portland slag cement (fiourth revision) (Amendments 3) Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third revisian) (Amendment 2) (Reaffirmed 199 1) Gum spirit of turpentine (oil of turpentine) (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
455 : 1989 456 : 1978 533 : 1973 651 : 1992
Salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (fifth revision)
653 : 1992
Linoleum sheets and tiles (third revision)
657 : 1982
Materials for use in the manufacture of magnesium compositions (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
658: 1982
Code of practice for magnesium revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
712 : 1984
Building limes (third revision) (Reaffirmed
723 : 1972
Steel countersunk affirmed 1990)
809 : 1992
Rubber flooring materials for general purposes (second revision)
1077: 1992
Common burnt clay building bricks (j@th rwision)
oxychloride
(second
oxychloride
composition
flooring
floors (second
1991)
head wire nails (first revision)
(Amendments
1141 : 1993
Seasoning of timber -
1195 : 1978
Bitumen mastic for flooring (second revision) (Reaffirmed
1196: 1978
Code of practice for laying bitumen (Reaffirmed 1990)
1197 : 1970
Code of practice for laying of rubber floors Cfirst revision) 1~990)
1198: 1982
Code of practice for laying, fixing and maintenance revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
3) (Re-
Code of practice (second revision) mastic flooring
1990)
(second
revision)
(Reaffirmed
of linoleum floor (first
1237 : 1980
Cement concrete flooring tiles (first revision) (Reaffirmed
1322 : 1993
Bitumen felts for waterproofing
“1443 : 1972
Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete tlooring tiles (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
and damp-proofing
1990)
(fourtir revision)
1489 (Part 1) : 1991
Portland pozzolana cement : Part 1 Fly ash based (third revision)
1489 (Part 2) : 1991
Portland pozzolana cement : Part 2 Calcined (Amendment 1)
1580 : 1991
Bituminous revision)
1609 : 1991
Code of practice for laying damp-proofing (second revision)
1661 : 1972
Code of practice for application of cement and cement-lime Cfirst revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
“2114 : 1984
Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazo floor finish (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
compounds
for waterproofing
clay based (third revision)
and caulking purposes (second treatment
using bitumen felts plaster finishes
2116:
1980
Sand for masonry mortars (first revision) (Reaffirmed
2180:
1988
Heavy duty burnt clay building bricks (third revision) (Reaffirmed
1992) 1991)
2386 (Part 4) : 1963
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete : Part 4 Mechanical (Amendments 3) (Reaffirmed 1990)
‘“2571 : 1970
Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3384 : 1986
Specification for bitumen primer for use in waterproofing proofing (first revision) (Reaffirmed 199 1) 478
properties
and damp-
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
IS No.
3414 : 1968
Code of practice for design and installation affirmed 1990)
3461 : 1980
Specification for PVC-asbestos (Reaffirmed 1990)
3462 : 1986
Specification (Amendment
3502 : 1981
Steel chequered plates (first revision)
3583 : 1988
Specification
of burnt clay paving bricks (second revision)
3622 : 1977
Specification 1993)
for sandstone
3629 : 1986
Specification 1991)
for structural timber in building (first revision) (Reaffirmed
3670:
Code of practice for construction
1989
of joints in buildings
floor tiles (first revision) (Amendments
for unbacked flexible 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
PVC flooring
(second
(Re2)
revision)
(slabs and tiles) (first revision) (Reaffirmed
of timber floors (first revisiorz)
444 1 : 1980
Code of practice for use of silicate type chemical resistant mortars (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
4442 : 1980
Code of practice for use of sulphur type chemical resistant mortars (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
4443 : 1980
Code of practice for use of resin type chemical revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
4456 (Part I) : 1967
Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars : Part 1 Silicate typeand resin type (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
4456 (Part 2) : 1967
Methods of test for chemical (Reaffirmed 1990)
4457 : 1982
Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tile (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
4631 : 1986
Code of practice for laying of epoxy resin floor toppings (first revision) (Reaffirmed I99 1)
4832 (Part 1) : 1969
Specification for chemical affirmed 1990)
4832 (Part 2) : 1969
Specification for chemical resistant mortars : Part 2 Resin type (Amendment I) (Reaffirmed 1990)
4832 (Part 3) : 1968
Specification for chemical affirmed 1990)
resistant
mortars
resistant mortars
resistant
mortars (first
: Part 2 Sulphur
type
: Part 1 Silicate type (Re-
resistant mortars : Part 3 Sulphur type (Re-
4860 : 1968
Acid-resistant
4971 : 1968
Recommendations 1990)
5318 : 1969
Code of practice for laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile flooring (Reaffirmed 1990)
5389:
Code of practice for laying of hardwood parquet and wood block floors (Reaffirmed 1992)
1969
bricks (Reaffirmed for selection
199 I) of industrial
floor finishes
(Reaffirmed
5491 : 1969
Code of practice for laying of in-situ granolithic concrete flooring~topping (Reaffirmed 1990)
“5760 : 1983
Compressed argon (first revision) (Reaffirmed
1991)
5766 : 1970
Code of practice for laying of burnt clays brick flooring (Reaffirmed
6727 : 1972
Fireclay checker bricks for open hearth furnace (Reaffirmed
6909 : 1990
Specification
for supersulphated
cement (Amendments
199 1)
1992)
2)
7193 : 1974
Glassfibre
7956 : 1975
Recommendations
8042 : 1989
White Portland cement (second revision) (Amendments
8374 : 1977
Bitumen mastic, anti-static and electrically conducting grade (Reaffirmed 1990)
base coaltar pitch and bitumen felts for selection of dairy floor finishes (Reaffirmed
479
1990)
4)
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
IS No. 9077 : 1979
Code of practice for corrosion protection of steel reinforcement RCC constiuction (Reaffirmed 1991)
9197:
Epoxy resin, hardness and epoxy resin compositions (Reaffirmed 1990)
1979
for floor topping
Code of practice for laying mosaic parquet flooring (Reaffirmed 1992) Code of practice for construction of RB and RBC floors and roofs (Reaffirmed 1990) Bitumen mastic for flooring for industries handling LPG and~other light hydrocarbon products (Amendment 1) Laying of bitumen mastic flooring for industries handling LPG and other light hydrocarbon products - Code of practice
9472: 1980 10440: 1983 13026:
in RB and
1991
13074 : 1991
WALL AND CEILING
CHAPTER 10 FINISHES AND COVERINGS
AND WALLING
269 : 1989
33 grade ordinary Portland cement fourth revision) (Amendments
303 : 1989
Plywood for general purposes (third revision) (Amendment 1993)
383 : 1970
Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
451 : 1972
Technical supply conditions ment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
455 : 1989
Portland slag cement (fourth revision) (Amendments
459 : 1992
Corrugated and semi-corrugated
710 : 1976
Marine plywood (first revision) (Amendments
712 : 1984
Building limes (third revision) (Reaffirmed
723 : 1972
Steel countersunk affirmed 1990)
733 : 1983
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods and sections general engineering purposes (third revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
737 : 1986
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet and strip for general engineering purposes (third revision) (Reaffirmed 199 1)
777 : 1988
Glazed earthenware wall tiles (second revision) (Superseded by IS 13753, 13754,13755,13756)
883 : 1970
Design of structural timber in building -
1130: 1969
Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles) (Reaffirmed
1237 : 1980
Cement concrete flooring tiles (first revision) (Reaffirmed
1328: 1982
Veneered decorative affirmed 1990)
1344 : 1981
Calcined clay pozzolana 1990)
1414 : 1989
Code of practice for fixing wall covering
1) (Reaffirmed (second
for wood screws (second revision) (Amend3)
asbestos cement sheets (third revision) 3) (Reaffirmed
1989)
1991)
head wire nails (first revision) (Amendments
plywood
3) (Refor
Code of practice (third revision) 1993)
(second revision)
1990)
(Amendments
(second revision) (Amendment
1489 (Part 1) : 1991
Portland pozzolana cement: Part 1 Fly ash based (third revision) Portland pozzolana (Amendment 1)
1542: 1992
Sand of plaster (second revision)
1635 : 1992
Code of practice for field slaking of building lime and preparation (second revision)
1658: 1977
Fibre hardboards (second revision) (Amendment
1659: 1990
Block boards (third revision) (Amendment
1661 : 1972
Code of practice for application of cement and cement-lime (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
cement: Part 2 Calcined
3) (Re-
1) (Reaffirmed
1489 (Part 2) : 1991
480
3)
clay based (third revision)
1) (Reaffirmed
of putty 1990)
1) plaster finishes
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
IS No. 1946 : 1961
Code of practice for use of fixing devices in walls, ceilings and floors of solid construction (Reaffirmed 1992)
2095 : 1982
Gypsum plaster boards (first revi.vion) (Amendment
2098 : 1964
Asbestos cement building boards (Amendments
2114:
1984
Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazzo floor finish (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2116:
1980
1) (Reaffirmed
2) (Reaffirmed
Sand for masonry mortar yirst revision) (Reaffirmed
199 1)
1992)
1992)
2185 (Part 1) : 1979
Concrete masonry units : Part 1 Hollow and solid concrete blocks (second revision) (superseding IS 3590) (Reaffirmed 1992)
2185 (Part 2) : 1983
Concrete masonry units : Part 2 Hollow and solid light weight concrete blocks (first revision) (superseding IS 3590) (Reaffirmed 1989)
2185 (Part 3) : 1984
Concrete masonry units : Part 3 Autoclaved cellular aeratedconcrete (first revision) (superseding IS 5482) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2394 : 1984
Code of practice for application (Reaffirmed 1990)
2402 : 1963
Code of practice for external rendered finishes (Reaffirmed
2441 : 1984
Code of practice for fixing ceiling covering 1990)
2547 (Part 1) : 1976
Gypsum building plaster : Part 1 Excluding premixed lightweight (first revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2547 (Part 2) : I976
Gypsum
building
blocks
of lime plaster finish (fkst revision) 1990)
(j?rst revision) (Reaffirmed
plaster: Part 2 Premixed 1992)
lightweight
plaster (first
plaster
revision) (Reaffirmed
2691 : 1988
Burnt clay facing bricks (second revision)
2818 (Part 1) : 1990
Indian hessian : Part 1 General (second revision)
2849 : 1983
Specification for non-load hollow types) (Amendment
3087 : 1985
Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes (first revision) (Amendments 4) (Reaffirmed 1990)
3097 : 1980
Veneered 1990)
3129:
Low density particle boards (first revision) (Reaffirmed
1985
bearing gypsum partition 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
particle boards (first revision) (Amendment
blocks (solid and
1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
3348 : 1965
Specification for fibre insulation boards (Amendment
3466 : 1988
Specification
3478 : 1966
Specification for high density wood particle boards (Amendment affirmed 1992)
3629 : 1986
Specification 1991)
3630 : 1992
Code of practice for construction partitions (first revision)
3677 : 1985
Unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation (superseding IS 5696) (Reaffirmed 1990)
3812:
Fly ash for use as pozzolana 1992)
1981
1) (Reaffirmed
for masonry cement (second revision) (Amendment
1990) 1) 1) (Re-
for structural timber in building (fi’rst revision) (Reaffirmed of non-load
and admixture
bearing gypsum
block
(second revision)
(first revision) (Reaffirmed
4101 (Part 1) : 1967
Code of practice for external facing and veneers : Part 1 Stone facing (Reaffirmed 1990)
4101 (Part 2) : 1967
Code of practice for external facing and veneers : Part 2 Cement concrete facing (Reaffirmed 1990)
4101 (Part 3) : 1985
Code of practice for external facing and veneers : Part 3 Wall tiling and mosaics (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
4407 : 1967
Code of practice for reed walling (Reaffirmed
481
1992)
SP 62 (S Sr T) : 1997 IS No.
Title
4671 : 1984
Expanded polystyrene (Reaffirmed 1990)
5390 : 1984
Code of practice for construction affirmed 199 1)
i 5.509 : 1980
for thermal
insulation
purposes
(first revision)
of timber ceiling (first revision)
Fire retardant plywood (first revision) (Amendments
3) (Reaffirmed
(Re1990)
6730 : 1972
Felt nails (Reaffirmed
6738 : 1972
Panel pins and lost head nails (Amendment
6760 : 1972
Slotted countersunk head wood screws (Amendments
2) (Reaffirmed 1988)
7316 : 1974
Decorative plywood using plurality (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1992)
for decorative
8041 : 1990
Rapid hardening Portland cement (second revision) (Amendments
12727: 1989
Code of practice for no fines cast in-situ cement concrete
1990) 1) (Reaffirmed
of veneers
1990) faces 2)
CHAPTER 11 ROOFS AND ROOFING 158 : 1981
Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black lead-free, acid alkali and heat resisting (third revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1988)
217 : 1988
Cutback bitumen (second reb?sion)
269 : 1989
33 grade ordinary Portland cement yburth revision) (Amendments
277 : 1992
Galvanized ments 2)
280 : 1978
Mild steel wire for general engineering ment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
383 : 1970
Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
432 (Part 1) : 1982
Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part 1 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision)
451 : 1972
Technical supply conditions for wood screws (second revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
455 : 1989
Portland slag cement fourth revision) (Amendments
456 : 1978
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1991)
steel sheet (plain
3)
and corrugated) (fifth revision) (Amendpurposes (third revision) (Amend(second
3)
459 : 1992
Corrugated and semi-corrugated
654 : 1992
Clay roofing tiles, Mangalore pattern (third revision)
712 : 1984
Building limes (third revision) (Reaffirmed
723 : 1972
Steel countersunk affirmed 1990)
725 : 1961
Copper wire nails (revised) (Reaffirmed
730 : 1978
Hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing (second revision) (Amendments (Reaffirmed 1988)
asbestos cement sheets (third revision) 1991)
head wire nails (first revision) (Amendments
3) (Re-
1990) 2)
805 : 1968
Code of practice for use of steel in gravity water tanks (Reaffirmed
808 : 1989
Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beam, column channel and angle sections (third revision) (Amendment 1)
883: 1970
Design of structural timber in building -
1077 : 1992
Common burnt clay building bricks @fh revision)
1120: 1975
Coach screws yirst revision) (Reaffirmed
1190 : 1990
Textile machinery revision)
1199 : 1959
Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete (Reaffirmed
482
1991)
Code of practice (third revision) 1990)
Healds twin wire for weaving -
Specification 199 1)
(third
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
IS No.
sheet (third revision)
1254 : 1991
Corrugated aluminium
1322 : 1993
Bitumen felts for waterproofing
1343: 1980
Code of practice for prestressed concrete (first revision) (Amendment (Reaffirmed 1990)
1344 : 1981
Calcined 1990)
1464: 1992
Clay ridge and ceiling tiles (second revision)
clay pozzolana
and damp-proofing
(fourth revision)
(second revision) (Amendment
1)
1) (Reaffirmed
1489 (Part 1) : 1991
Portland pozzolana cement: Part 1 Fly ash based (third revision)
1489 (Part 2) : 1991
Portland pozzolana (Amendment I)
2098 : 1964
Asbestos cement building boards (Amendments
*2115 : 1980
Code of practice for flat-roof finish, mud phuskn (seconrl revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
“2118 : 1980
Code of practice for construction ofjack-arch Cfirst revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
“2119 : 1980
Code of practice for construction of brick-cum-concrete composite (Madras terrace) floor or roof (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
2204 : 1962
Code of practice for construction affirmed 1990)
2527 : 1984
Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and downpipes drainage (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2690 (Part 1) : 1993
Burnt clay flat terracing tiles : Part 1 Machine made (second revision)
2690 (Part 2) : 1992
Burnt clay flat terracing tiles : Part 2 Hand-made
“2700 : 1987
Code of practice for roofing with wooden shingles yirst revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
*2792 : 1964
Code of practice for design and construction (Reaffirmed 1990)
“2858 : 1984
Code of practice for roofing with Mangalore affirmed 1990)
3007 (Part 1) : 1964
Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement sheets : Part 1 Corrugated sheets (Reaffirmed 1991)
3007 (Part 2) : 1965
Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement corrugated sheets (Reaffirmed 199 1)
3068 : 1986
Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregates for use in lime concrete (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3182 : 1986
Broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregates for use in lime mortar (second revisiotz) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3629 : 1986
Specification 1991)
for structural timber in building (first revision) (Reaffirmed
3951 (Part 1) : 1975
Specification
for hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs : Part I Filler type 1991)
clay based (third revision)
cement: Part 2 Calcined
2) (Reaffirmed
1992)
type of building floor or roof
of reinforced
concrete shell roof (Refor roof
(second revision)
of stone slab over joist floor tiles (first revision) (Re-
sheets : Part 2 Semi-
(fkst revision) (Reaffirmed
3951 (Part 2) : 1975
Specification for hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs : Part 2 Structural type (first revision) (Reaffirmed 199 1)
“‘5119 (Part 1) : 1968
Code of practice for laying and fixing of sloped roof coverings Slating (Reaffirmed 1990)
“6061 (Part i) : 1971
Code of practice for construction of floor and roof with joists and filler blocks : Part 1 With hollow concrete filler blocks (Reaffirmed 1992)
‘“6061 (Part 2) : 1981
Code of practice for construction of floor and roof with joists and filler blocks : Part 2 With hollow clay filler blocks (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
483
: Part 1
4
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
~1sNo. *606 1 (Part 3) : 198 1
Code of practice for construction of floor and roof with joists and filler blocks : Part 3 Precast hollow clay blocks joints and hollow clay filler blocks (Reaffirmed 1992)
*6061 (Part 4) : 1981
Code of practice for construction of floor and roof with joists and filler blocks : Part 4 With precast hollow clay blocks slab panels (Reaffirmed 1992)
6332 : 1984
Code of practice for construction of floor and roofs using precast doublycurved shell units (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
8869 : 1978
Washers for corrugated sheet roofing (Reaffirmed
“12093 : 1987
Code of practice for laying and-fixing of sloped roof coverings using plain and corrugated galvanized steel sheet (IS0 6589-1983):Reaffirmed 1993)
*12SO6 : 1988
Code of practice for improved thatching of roof with rot and fire retardant treatment
DAMP-PROOFING 73 : 1992
CHAPTER 12 AND WATERPROOFING
Paving bitumen (second revision)
269 : 1989
33 grade ordinary Portland cement (fourth revision) (Amendments
383 : 1970
Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
702 : 1988
Industrial bitumen (second revision) (Amendment
712 : 1984
Building limes (third revision) (Reaffirmed
1195 : 1978
Bitumen mastic for flooring (second revision) (Reaffirmed
1203: 1978
Determination
1322: 1993
Bitumen felts for waterproofing
1346: 1991
Code of practice for waterproofing revision)
1580: 1991
Bituminous revision)
1609 : 1991
Code of practice for laying damp-proofing (second revision)
1635 : 1992
Code of practice for field slaking of building lime and preparation (second revision)
1834: 1984
Hot applied sealing compund affirmed 1990)
2116:
’
1980
of penetration
(Amendments
3) (second
1)
199 1) 1990)
3) (Reaffirmed
and damp-proofing
1990)
(fourth revision)
of roofs with bitumen
compounds for waterproofing
felts (third
and caulking purposes (Second treatment using bitumen felts of putty
for joint in concrete (@st revision)
(Re-
Sand for masonry mortars (first revision) (Reaffirmed.1 992)
2508 : 1984
Low density polyethylene affirmed 199 I )
films (second revision) (Amendment
1) (Re-
2527 : 1984
Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and downpipes drainage (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990)
for roof
2541 : 1991
Code of practice for preparation and use of lime concrete (second revision)
2645 : 1975
Integral cement waterproofing (Reaffirmed 1992)
2690 (Part 1) : 1993
Burnt clay flat terracing tiles : Part 1 Machine made (second revision)
2690 (Part 2) : 1992
Burnt clay flat terracing tiles : Part 2 Hand-made
3036 :. 1992
Laying lime concrete for a waterproofed (second revision)
3037 : 1986
Bitumen mastic for use in waterproofing affirmed 199 1)
3067 : 1988
Code of practice for general design details and preparatory damp-proofing and waterproofing of buildings (first revision) 484
^”
1990)
compounds (first revision) (Amendment
1)
(second revision)
roof finish -
Code of practice
of roofs (first revision)
(Re-
work for
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
IS No.
3068 : 1986
Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregates for use in lime concrete (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3370 (Part I) : 1965
Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids : Part I General requirements (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3384:
Specification for bitumen primer for use in waterproofing proofing (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
1986
mixture
(first revision) (Amendments
4098 : 1983
Lime-pozzolana 1989)
4365 : 1967
Code of practice for application roofs (Reaffirmed 1990)
5871 : 1987
Bitumen mastic for tanking and damp-proofing 1991)
6494 : 1988
Code of practice for waterproofing of underground swimming pools (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1994)
7193 : 1974
Glass fibre base coaltar pitch and bitumen felts
7198 : 1974
Code of practice for damp-proofing 1990)
7290 : 1979
Recommendations for use of polyethylene first,revisinn) (Reaffirmed 1990)
9759 : 1981
Guidelines for de-watering affirmed 1987)
9918 : 1981
Code of practice for in-situ waterproofing and damp-proofing with glass fibre tissue reinforced bitumen (Reaffirmed 1990)
during
12027 : 1987
Silicone-based
12054 : 1987
Code of practice for application affirmed 1992)
a 13182 : 1991
1834 : 1984 1838 (Part I) : 1983
1838 (Part 2) : 1984
1968
10958 : 1984 11433 (Part 1) : 1985 11817: 1986 11-818 : 1986 12118 (Part 1) : 1987
IN BUILDINGS
2) (Reaffirmed
mastic for waterproofing
using bitumen
water reservoirs
(Amendment
of roofs 1) (Re-
treatments
1992)
of silicone based water repellent
CHAPTER 13 (CONTROL OF CRACKS
and
mastic (Reaffirmed
film for waterproofing
water repellents (Reaffirmed
of
(first revision) (Reaffirmed
construction
Waterproofing and damp-proofing Recommendations
JOlNTS
3414:
of bitumen
and damp-
of wet areas
in building
(Re-
IN BUILDINGS)
Hot applied sealing compound for joint in concrete @rst revision) (Reaffirmed 1990) Preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavements and structures (non extruding and resilient type) : Part I Bitumen impregnated fibre Virst revision) (Reaffirmed 1990) Preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavements and structures (non extruding and resilient type) : Part 2 CNSL Aldehyde resin and coconut pith Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings (Reaffirmed 1990) General check list of functions of joints in buildings (Reaffirmed 1992) One part grade polysulphide based joint sealant : Part 1 General requirements Classification of joints in buildings for accomodation of dimensional deviations during construction (Reaffirmed 1992) Method oftest for laboratory determination of air permeability of joints in buildings (Reaffirmed 1992) Two parts polysulphide based sealant : Part 1 General requirements (Reaffirmed 1992)
485
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 CHAPTER 14 WHITEWASHING, COLOUR WASHING AND PAINTING OF MASONRY, AND PLASTER SURFACES (CALCAREOUS SURFACES)
CONCRETE
Title
IS No.
44: 1991
Iron oxide pigments for paints (second revision)
55 : 1970
Ultramarine 1991)
109 : 1968
Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming, plaster, to Indian Standard Colour No. 361 and 631 White and off white (first revision) (Amendments 3)(Reaffirmed 1993)
blue for paints (first revision) (Amendments
2) (Reaffirmed
133 : 1993
Enamel, interior : (a) undercoating,
158 : 1981
Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black, lead-free, acid, alkali and heat resisting (third revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1988)
(b) finishing (third revision)
168 : 1993
Ready mixed paint, air drying, for general purpose (third revision)
253 : 1985
Edible common salt (third revision) (Reaffirmed
1990) 1) (Reaffirmed
261 : 1982
Copper sulphate (second revision) (Amendment
427 : 1965
Distemper, dry, colour as required (revised) (Amendments 1993)
428 : 1969
Distemper, oil emulsion, colour as required (first revision) (Amendments 3) (Reaffirmed 1993)
702 : 1988
Industrial bitumen (skcond revision) (Amendment
712 : 1984
Building limes (third revision) (Reaffirmed
797 : 1982
Common salt for chemical (Reaffirmed 1992)
“2395 (Part 1) : 1966
Code of practice for painting concrete masonry and plaster surfaces : Part 1 Operation and workmanship (Reaffirmed 1990)
“2395 (Part 2) : 1967
Code of practice for painting concrete Part 2 Schedule (Reaffirmed 1990)
2547 (Part 1) : 1976
Gypsum building plaster : Part 1 Excluding premixed lightweight @rst revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2547 (Part 2) : 1976
Gypsum building plaster : Part 2 Premixed revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
2932 : 1993
Enamel, synthetic, exterior (a) undercoating,
2933 : 1975
Enamel exterior (a) undercoating, ments 2) (Reaffirmed 1991)
:“3140 : 1965
Code of practice for painting affirmed 1990)
3384:
1986
Specification for bitumen primer for use in waterproofing proofing Cjirst revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
5410:
1992
Cement paint (first revision) (Amendment
industries
1988)
4) (Reaffirmed
‘1)
1991)
(third revision)
(Amendment
1)
masonry and plaster surfaces :
lightweight
plaster
plaster (first
(b) finishing (second revision)
(b) finishing
(first revision)
asbestos cement building
(Amend-
products
(Re-
and damp-
1)
5411 (Part 1) ; 1974
Plastic emulsion paint : Part 1 For interior use (first revision) (Amendments 4) (Reaffirmed 1991)
54 11 (Part 2) : 1972
Plastic emulsion affirmed 1991)
‘I6278 : 1971
Code of practice for whitewashing
9862:
Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black, lead-free, acid, alkali, water and chlorine resisting (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1988)
1981
paint : Part 2 For exterior use (Amendments
486
and colour washing (Reaffirmed
5) (Re199 1)
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997 Title
IS No. *2.524 (Part 1) : 1968
Code of practice for painting of non-ferrous Pretreatment (Reaffirmed 1990)
metals in buildings
: Part 1
*2524 (Part 2) : 1968
Code of practice for painting of non-ferrous Painting (Reaffirmed 1990)
metals in buildings
: Part 2
2932 : 1993
Enamel, synthetic, exterior (a) undercoating,
2933 : 1975
Enamel exterior (a) undercoating, ments 2) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3531 : 1983
Glossary of terms relating to corrosion of metals first revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3536 : 1966
Ready mixed paint, brushing, affirmed 1988) ,
3537 : 1966
Ready mixed paint, finishing, interior, for general purposes, to Indian Standard Colours No. 101,216,217,219,275,281,352, 353, 358 to 361, 363,364,388,410,442,444,628,631,632,634,693,697, white and black (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
3539 : 1966
Ready mixed paint, undercoating, for use under oil finishes to Indian Standard Colours, as required (Amendments 3) (Reaffirmed 1988)
3585 : 1966
Ready mixed paint, aluminium, brushing priming, woodwork (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1988)
4597 : 1968
Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based products nitrocellulose and cold catalysed materials (Reaffirmed 1990)
6005 : 1970
Code of practice for phosphating
(b) finishing (secondrevision)
(b) finishing
(first revision)
(Amend-
wood primer, pink (Amendments
4) (Re-
water resistant,
of.iron and steel (Reaffirmed
for with
199 1)
CHAPTER 16 WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE Part 1 Water Supply 404 (Part 1) : 1993
Lead pipes : Part 1 For other than chemical purposes (third revision)
407: 1981
Brass tubes for general purposes (third revision) (Reaffirmed
1172: 1993
Code of basic requirements vourth revision)
1239 (Part 1) : 1990
Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings : Part 1 Mild steel tubes (fifth revision) (Amendments 3)
1536: 1989
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1993)
1537: 1976
Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage cfirst revision) (Amendments 5) (Reaffirmed 1991)
1545: 1982
Solid drawn copper and copper alloy exchangers (second revision) (Reaffirmed
1592 : 1989
Asbestos cement pressure pipes (third revision)
1626 (Part 1) : 1991
Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings : Part 1 Pipe and pipe fittings (second revision)
2064 : 1993
Selection, installation and~maintenance practice (second revision)
2065 : 1983
Code of practice for water supply in buildings affirmed 1990)
“2692 : 1989
Ferrules for water services (second revision) (Amendment
3076 : 1985
Low density polyethylene pipes for potable revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
4984:
Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for supplies; sewage and industrial effluents (third revision)
1987
488
for water supply,
drainage
199 1)
and sanitation
tubes for condenser 1991)
of sanitary appliances -
and heat
Code of
(second revision)
(Re-
1)
water supplies
(second
potable
water
SP62(S&T):1997 Title
IS No. 4985 : 1988
Specification for unplasticised PVC pipes for potable (second revision) (Amendment 1)
7558 : 1974
Code of practice for domestic hot water installations
7634 (Part 2) : 1975
Code of practice for plastics pipe work for potable water supplies : Part 2 Laying and jointing polyethylene (PE) pipes (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
7634 (Part 3) : 1975
Code of practice for plastics pipe work for potable water supplies : Part 3 Laying and jointing of UPVC pipes (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1992)
12183 (Part 1) : 1987
Code of practice for plumbing supply (Reaffirmed 1992)
NBC, 1983
National -Building Code of India, 1983
SP 35 (S &T) : 1987
Handbook on water supply and drainage with special emphasis on plumbing
in multi-storeyed
water supplies
(Reaffirmed
buildings
1990)
: Part 1 Water
Part 2 Building Drainage 277 : 1992
Galvanized steel sheet (plain and.corrugated) vifrh revision) (Amendments
404 (Part 1) : 1993
Lead pipes : Part 1 For other than chemical purposes (third revision)
458 : 1988
Precast concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement) (Amendments 2)
2)
(third revision)
651 : 1992
Salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (fifrh revision)
782 : 1978
Caulking lead (third revision) (Reaffirmed
783 : 19g5
Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes (first revision) (Amendment (ReaffirmedX990)
1)
1230: 1979
Cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings (second revision) (Amendment (Reaffirmed 199 1)
1)
1536 : 1989
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed 1993)
1537
1976
Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision) (Amendments 5) (Reaffirmed 1991)
1592
1989
1992)
Asbestos cement pressure pipes (third revision)
1626 (.Part 1) : 1991
Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings : Part 1 Pipe and pipe fittings (first revision)
1726: 1991
Cast iron manhole covers and frames (third revision)
*1742: 1983 3006 : 1979
Code of practice for building drainage (second revision) (Reaffirmed 1990) Specification for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1992) Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system : Part 1 Manholes (fkst revision) (Reaffirmed 199 1) Methods of sampling and test for sewage effluents (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1992) Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies; sewage and industrial effluents (third revision) Specification for unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplies (second revision) (Amendment 1) Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1990) Cast-iron steps for manholes (Reaffirmed 1992)
4111 (Part 1) : 1986 4733 : 1972 4984 : 1987 4985 : 1988 5329 : 1983 5455 : 1969 Part 3 6295 : 1986
Water Supply and Drainage in High Altitudes/Sub-Zero
Regions
Code of practice for water supply and drainage in high *altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
489
SP 62 (S & T) : 1997
SPECIAL
CONSTRUCTION
CHAPTER 17 PROCEDURES EARTHQUAKE
EFFECTS,
Etc
Title
IS No.
1893 : 1984
Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
4326 : 1993
Earthquake resistant design and construction practice (second revision)
“13827 : 1993
Improving earthquake resitance of earthen buildings -
“13828 : lb93
Improving Guidelines
13920 : 1993
Ductile detailing of reinforced forces - Code of practice
13935 : 1993
Repair and seismic strengthening
earthquake
resistance
(fourth
of buildings
revision)
-
Code of
Guidelines
of low strength masonry buildings concrete structures of buildings -
subjected
-
to seismic
Guidelines
CHAPTER 18 DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS 1992
Selection, installation and maintenance of first-aid fire extinguishers Code of practice (second revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2925 : 1984
Specification for industrial safety helmets (second revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1990)
2190:
3696 (Part 2) : 199 I
Safety code of scaffolds and ladders : Part 2 Ladders
*413Q : 1991’
Demolition
4912:
Safety requirements for floor and wall openings, (first revision) (Reaffirmed 199 1)
1978
of buildings -
490
Code of safety (second revision) railings and toe boards
